JP7394420B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "slot machines").

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, a gaming machine is known in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be won when a person wins a prize.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the starting slot. When a game ball enters the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether the game is a hit or not. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined variable time period has elapsed, the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the player has won a prize, and the opening/closing member of the grand prize opening is operated, thereby giving the player a large amount of money. To provide a special game in which it is possible to win prizes.

JP 2017-006393 Publication

With such conventional gaming machines, there is a concern that interest in gaming may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Means 1: Judgment means for making a judgment;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
a specific operation receiver for receiving operations by a player;
an operation acceptance means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance state in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation reception unit, and causing a change after acceptance when an operation is accepted in the acceptance acceptance state;
a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image display of the specific operation receiving part in a predetermined display area;
an overlapping effect display means capable of displaying an overlapping effect display that is a different image from the said sample image display and that appears to overlap from the front side with respect to said sample image display;
Equipped with
When the acceptance acceptance state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation reception is allowed is outputted audibly,
As the acceptance state,
When the operation is accepted, a first post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the first post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is displayed, a first acceptance permission state;
When the operation is accepted, a second post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the second post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is not displayed.
When the operation is accepted, a third post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the third post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is not displayed.
is available,
No matter which one of the first reception permissible state, the second reception permissible state, and the third reception permissible state occurs, the sample image display is displayed when the reception permissible state occurs; When either the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state occurs, the sample image display indicates that operation reception for the specific operation receiving section is permitted after the reception permission state occurs. While the state continues, the display state is continued without being hidden, but when the third reception permissible state occurs, the sample image display does not change until the third reception permissible state occurs. After that, while the state in which operation reception on the specific operation receiving section is allowed continues, the display of the simulated image can be made into a non-display state,
When either the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound is audibly output, but when the third reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound is output. There is no audible output,
moreover,
When the reception permission state occurs, a specific pre-effect display different from the sample image display may be displayed as a display related to the occurrence of the reception permission state, and the specific pre-effect display is It is now possible to display information that spans the timing of occurrence of the acceptance permission state.
When the overlapping effect display is displayed while the specific pre-effect display is being displayed, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front side of the specific pre-effect display,
moreover,
The third acceptance permission state may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible,
moreover,
In the third acceptance permission state, after the sample image display is hidden, the sample image display is displayed again while the state in which operation reception for the specific operation receiving unit is permitted continues. can be done
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this invention, a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a); be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the main body side upper hinge member. It is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. 20 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. 37; (a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows the part that is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, button frame, etc. by cutting out a part of the operation button. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from behind. 57 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to a connection terminal board for a game ball lending device, which relays electrical connections between the payout control board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, which constitute the main board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control section. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. It is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection failure determination process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbols and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of sound control using a fixed channel method as a comparison target for the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using a fixed channel method. It shows the relationship between gaming status, playback sound, and playback channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of sound control using an automatic channel method according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using an automatic channel method. It is a diagram showing the relationship between gaming status, playback sound, and priority order. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in a peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. 128 is a diagram showing the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128. FIG. (a) is an example of processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is met while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. This is a diagram. (b) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is met while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. FIG. (c) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is met while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It is. (b) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It is. (c) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It is. (d) is a diagram showing an example of the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It is. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the contents of the performance progress notification process according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the contents of processing related to volume adjustment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the contents of processing related to volume adjustment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the contents of processing related to volume adjustment. 7 is a time chart illustrating an example of the allocation status of each channel when the suppressed operation sound output process is performed. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword drawing performance can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of fluctuation pattern, and (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform battōhon effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and shows (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathed state, and (C) the second unsheathed state. Indicates the unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when an aura member is provided in the sheath, and shows (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first sword unsheathed state, and (C) a second sword unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for a pseudo continuous performance. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach production, the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a transition example. Even though the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operational, the operation button becomes operational, and then the sword decoration becomes operational. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion performance of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 1st performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 2nd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 2nd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 2nd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 2nd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 3rd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 3rd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 3rd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows the 3rd performance aspect regarding a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when a “specific operation-related performance” is set as a performance target of the timer performance. This is a time chart illustrating an example of performance contents for each type of performance when a plurality of types (foreshadowing performances A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as precursor performances. It is a figure which shows the performance example about the performance content when the precursor performance which is not a specific operation related performance is performed, and the performance content when the precursor performance is performed as a specific operation related performance. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of a performance when a specific operation related performance is performed as a precursor performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (specific production mode) with which the princess character was added. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode in a performance pattern in which a specific operation-related performance is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode in a performance pattern in which a specific operation-related performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when displaying a sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a first omen performance is performed. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance when a first omen performance is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a performance in which the degree of expectation is indicated by an automatic performance function. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a performance in which the degree of expectation is indicated by an automatic performance function. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a performance in which the degree of expectation is indicated by an automatic performance function. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control when it is in an automatic button performance state. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control when it is in an automatic button performance state. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control when it is in an automatic button performance state. It is a diagram for explaining stable side automatic performance processing when in an automatic button performance state. It is a diagram for explaining stable side automatic performance processing when in an automatic button performance state. It is a diagram for explaining stable side automatic performance processing when in an automatic button performance state. It is a time chart showing the processing contents when the timing tm1 at which a new pattern variation is started in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state has arrived. It is a time chart showing the processing contents when timing tm11 for starting a special effect pattern has arrived in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation time (start timing and end timing of symbol fluctuation, etc.) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation time (start timing and end timing of symbol fluctuation, etc.) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to its original position. It is a figure showing an example of a display when state transitions between a non-gaming state and a game execution state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example when an expected performance is performed in which a princess character is displayed in a large size as a background image during execution of a specific performance pattern. 201 is a diagram showing an example of a display when a help image is displayed in a state where the expected performance shown in FIG. 200 is being performed. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example when character images PG are displayed in such a way that the display position is changed by an operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when generating a performance restriction period in a non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when the performance restriction period is ended early. It is a time chart showing an example of processing related to a special period (period exclusively for store opening). It is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started when a period exclusively for opening a store (special period) is set. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation acceptance performance. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation acceptance performance. It is a time chart showing an example of a special operation reception performance. 5 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including acceptable sound. 5 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including acceptable sound. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when a low expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when a high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when a high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart showing an example of a modification when the high expectation suppression reception performance is executed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which a first permissible sound is output in a specific manner when a “non-suppressing operation reception performance (here, a non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance)” occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a production according to a high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a production according to a high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a production according to a high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart showing an example of a performance (movement reception performance under suppression) that appears “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target” in the suppression/automatic reception performance. It is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 1 is selected in variation pattern determination. It is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 2 is selected in variation pattern determination. It is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 3 is selected in variation pattern determination. It is a time chart showing the content of the performance that appears when the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs when the performance sound of "BGM playback" is set to the "non-suppression mode". 2 is a time chart conceptually illustrating an example of a processing procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and blocks. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing when no operation is detected before and after the production acceptance period (validity period). 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started at the "m+1"th frame in the production acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started at the "m-2"th frame in the production acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started at the "m-2"th frame in the production acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226. FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started from the "m-3"th frame in the production acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226. FIG. Regarding the production acceptance period (validity period) when the timing of "operating (setting) the operation status flag to ON state" in the frame is performed after the "judgment process related to production reception" It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an integrated image from the start of the validity period until the end of the validity period. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an integrated image from the start of the validity period until the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance progress when the 2nd valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of an effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation regarding an integrated image. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of presentation when the second acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation content when the 2nd reception permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of presentation when the 1st reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the 4th acceptance permission state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception performance) occurs. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when a reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. This is a table showing an example of settings related to occurrence conditions of acceptance periods A to D. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which reception period A (reception performance A) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which reception period B (reception performance B) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period C (reception performance C) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period D (reception performance D) occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period E (reception performance E) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance within the reception period E. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd D reception period occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling it into the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below the handle unit 111 and can be operated by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 320 is attached to the lower front part of the tray unit 320, and a tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the bottom of the tray unit 320, and it is attached to the center of the tray unit 320. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory production, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. A door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball launcher 680 is attached to the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4, a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 along the upper side and left side in front view and that pays out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and also guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 according to the storage state of the game balls. The upper full bulb path unit 850 is configured to discharge from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full bulb discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full bulb path unit 850 is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guide path 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a game ball discharged from the full discharge port 850e is guided forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path 862 guiding to the bulb socket 274 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power board box 930 installed on the right side in front view at the rear side of the board unit base 910 and housing a power board inside, and a power board box 930 installed on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that accommodates an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. and a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 fires the game balls with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of game balls, the game ball in the upper tray 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 16(a). It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces facing outward in the left and right direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same surface. It is being

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper left end side upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left of the left-right center; A flat right sliding member 82 is attached to a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 also has an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 to be described later is locked. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside this engagement notch 11, upper and lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this mounting step portion 12 .

[2-2. Bottom frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. It is longer than the front and back width of the The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction, at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In this engagement notch 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is attached.

The lower frame member 20 also includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 have a constant cross-sectional shape and extend vertically, and are formed of extruded shapes of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the outer sides in the left-right direction from a position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end. It includes recessed portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recessed portions 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 and attached.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves make it easier for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 to island facilities such as game halls. The design of the exterior of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board members]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension part 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension part 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically and is large enough for a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51. A standing wall portion 54 extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51, and a standing wall portion 54 bulges forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 with the front surface facing upward. It is provided with a return part 55 which is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is arranged such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. A section 57 is provided. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Moreover, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing part 61 that is horizontally extended and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate-shaped upper fixing part 61 that extends forward from the front end of the upper fixing part 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending part 62 toward the left and right center of the front extending part 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing part 61 in a plan view. A flat horizontal fixing part 64 extends downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing part extends downward from the end side of the front extension part 62 from the left end to the front end to the area where the bearing groove 63 opens. A flat hanging part 65 that is continuous with the part 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b) etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the upper fixing part 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step part 12 of the upper frame member 10, and is fixed with screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends further forward than the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to rotate the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66a that extends back and forth with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operating portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 using attachment screws 67 .

The lock member 66 is attached through the attachment hole 66d at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is on the rear side of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. This locking member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the attachment hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a to accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

This lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retreated from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, and a portion extending upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 71. A rising flat plate-like rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 71, and penetrating the horizontal part 71 vertically, allowing only one game ball to pass through. A discharge hole 74 of the same size is provided. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the curtain reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that pass through the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 using screws (not shown). This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is constructed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (ejected) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 will fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the liquid rolls toward the rear where the gap is wide, and the liquid can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent them from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to stay in the lower hinge member 70 portion.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing part 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing part 86, and a horizontal fixing part 86. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing part 88 extends downward from the same side as the part from which the upper lateral fixing part 87 in 86 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing part 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing part 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing part 88 extends from both front and back sides of the upper lateral fixing part 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart from each other in the front and rear. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper-lateral fixing parts 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the ends of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing part 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing part 86, and further than the horizontal fixing part 86 of the upper horizontal fixing part 87. A lower horizontal fixing part 88 extends below the horizontal fixing part 86 from the lower end of the rearwardly projecting part. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that projects from the rear end of the upper horizontal securing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal securing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and lateral fixing parts 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left and right direction, respectively. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Refer to and explain. FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member on the main body frame side of the main body frame is removed from the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a partially closes the bent bearing groove 63, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a is The right side of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging part 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging part 65, and they are in contact with each other). In the normal pivoting state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in an oblique direction and are opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal pivoting state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Note that, since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. There is. In addition, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the attachment hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied with an acting force F in a direction in which it comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutting portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the circular arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , the moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the side surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic part 66c of the lock member 66, and the elastic part 66c is integrally formed with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Note that even if the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right due to excessive force, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a will come into contact with the hanging portion 65 and the lock body 66a will not move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extending portion 62.

Note that even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 may be placed at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or when the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated to rotate the locking member 66, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only comes into contact with the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62.

When supporting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic part 66c. The locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that had closed the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic part 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in front of the front end of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from inside the bearing groove 63, operate the operating part 66b of the lock member 66, rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and then remove the elastic part. The lock body 66a is retreated from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of the lock body 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
A crime prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and ball chewing prevention for preventing game balls from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the lower outer frame hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to be placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the top surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

In addition, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a barbed portion 55 extending forward, if an unauthorized tool that has come into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the barred portion 55 will cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend. Since it is possible to fold back further forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and unauthorized acts can be carried out through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71), the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50 include a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharge hole 52. , and the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc., and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between the balls.

Therefore, if the game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the area around the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not close normally and the outer frame 2 may It is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the main body frame 4 and the use of the gap to commit fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 19. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, etc., the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular frame-like external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300 that is attached to the handle unit 300, the pan unit 320 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the production operation unit 400 that is attached to the center of the pan unit 320, and the door frame base unit that is attached to the upper side of the pan unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for sending the game balls to the ball firing device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball sending device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270 receives the game balls that are ejected and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray 322.

Although the details will be described later, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to move the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive the ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a certain force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and the front side bulges forward, although the details will be described later. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 that stores game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 320 that is disposed below the upper tray 321 and stores game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending machine within the range of cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball rental machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card minus the amount of game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball rental/return display section 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a performance selection left button 331 and a performance selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting a performance, and a display section 330 in the lower tray 322 A lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the tray unit 320 is provided.

The production operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and presents a production image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details will be described later, this production operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side production that is arranged within the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a production image. A display device 460 is provided.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the tray unit 320, and It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. In the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is used to decorate the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 320 to which the production operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the front left outside of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and back. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and supporting the main body frame 4. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 which are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160, which is attached to the left side of the view and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190, which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for use.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the front side of the door frame base 110 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental and return display section 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through hole 111 that penetrates the door frame base 110 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and the handle mounting seat surface 112 and the through hole 111. A cylinder mounting part 113 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached to the cylinder mounting part 113 . The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted passes through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 from front to back on the left side when viewed from the front, so that the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 115 for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 110 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage hole 116 for the lower plate, which is inserted into the door frame base 110, and an upper hole that penetrates back and forth adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passage opening 117 , a glass unit mounting part 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110 . It is provided with a speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31, 33, and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; and a right reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front. It includes a metal plate 134 and a locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by an upper reinforcing metal sheet 131, a middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133, a right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by suitably bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a formed in the door frame base 110 at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 and penetrating back and forth.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This location increases strength and rigidity, and prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wire and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 is attached at a position between the flange member 143 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. is inserted through the lock spring 144 and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and has a shape in side view that is open to the front. It is formed into a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes higher than the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and its upper end is in contact with the collar member 143, and its lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the collar member 143. .

In the door frame upper hinge member 140, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The entire upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 does not allow the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 to be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 or pulled out from below. I can do it. Thereby, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is , can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can hingely rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protrudes downward from near the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in side view. is formed into a substantially L-shape. This door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is shaped like a truncated cone that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is a door that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. Frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration that extends vertically from the lower position of the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage hole 117. A substrate 162 is provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are each equipped with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, when the door frame 3 is assembled. By emitting light as appropriate, the left unit decorative lens member of the left side unit 530 of the door frame can be decorated with light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting parts]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 31(b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably attach the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped base 171 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 172.

The glass unit attachment members 170 are each rotatably attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protrusion 172 is positioned further outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit attachment part 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding part 172 attaches to the glass. It comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190, restricting rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the glass unit attachment member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. . From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the protrusion 172 is stably protruded downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protrusion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire body will not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be naturally released. do not have.

In addition, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, rotate the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding part 172 protrudes upward from the base part 171, and the protruding part 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181 from the rear end of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 , and a plurality of ( In this example, the cylindrical portion 181 includes three projecting rims 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side within the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side within the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 180, the base 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical part 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange part 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the slanted handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical part The handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state, with the axis line of the handle unit 300 being tilted so as to extend toward the right front.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that it can be seen from the front to the rear. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and whose outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to the glass plate 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate form from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that projects downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can come into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is assembled by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body part 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 201, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 are provided.

The main body part 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes further downward than the lower end of the glass unit 190 when it is attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball fired by the ball firing device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is kept inside the game area 5a. It does not impede hitting the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear protruding piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. 700, and a cylinder attachment plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a.If the cylinder lock 211 is a corresponding key, it can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches 212a which are cut out. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape protruding forward in a plan view. To be more specific, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-like front plate part 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate parts 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate part 213a in a flat plate-shape. and a pair of attachment plate parts 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from each other from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is such that the left side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate part 213a and a pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the production operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34(b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. Moreover, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent center side excluding the outer periphery, and includes an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and a performance operation unit that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is a plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 that is attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 that is arranged behind the operation button 410 and can decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light, and a frame. A base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has an operation button 410 and a decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer periphery is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the center side bulges forward, and a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) that bulges forward. It includes an attached annular button frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed into a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside), and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a is recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer circumferential side of the first button decoration part 411a, and extends on the axis toward the center, and is arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is one group on both upper and lower sides. It extends further towards the center.

The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration parts 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness with a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be clearly seen.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a that extends from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss parts 413c protrude rearward along the outer periphery of the main body part 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protrude rearward in a band-like shape and are arranged in plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d that penetrates the flange part 413b back and forth outside the main body part 413a and extends along the outer periphery for a predetermined length. A plurality of base openings 413e (six) are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inward so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411. An inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward the center (center side) is provided.

The outer circumferential edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided, three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a portion of the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumferential side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which narrows inward, substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

This operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface) and is transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. The display screen can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by. The front side of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, so that further forward movement is restricted. By pressing against this, the base unit 430 is moved rearward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 has a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side when the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 allows the operation button to be closed. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that is visible from the rear is formed so as to narrow inward from the outer periphery. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner circumferential side of the decorative board unit 420 and is lower than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will protrude backwards. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is transmitted to the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and also to prevent leakage from the outside of the base unit 430, the left side of the operation button decorative board 433, the right side of the operation button decorative board 434, the upper side of the operation button decorative board 435, and the lower side of the operation button. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operating button left inner decorative board 433, the operating button right inner decorative board 434, the upper operating button inner decorative board 435, and the operating button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from decorating parts other than those targeted for the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed to have an outer shape that matches the front end side of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and a frame body 416 that is attached to the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of frame side lenses 417 having light-transmitting properties that are attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side, and a frame top lens 418 having light-transmitting properties that is attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c cut out with a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with. The center opening 416a is formed to have approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylinder portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. When the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d is connected to the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward at the upper portions of the left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e that are attached to the production operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (presentation operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting portions 416e and a cutout portion 416c on both sides thereof attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has almost the entire surface made of metal, except for a portion with the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A shiny plating layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close off the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed three on each side of the frame main body 416, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front side. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concavities and convexities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420. At the same time, the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be decorated with light by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission, and also This allows vibration to be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The board base 421 has an inner circumferential side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer circumferential side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a. A plurality of second LEDs 422b are mounted along the side. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b are mounted along the side. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled into the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits light and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 using the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, where a part of the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is an explanatory view showing a part, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a performance operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can display a performance image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and also allows the player to operate the performance image. The player can be entertained by having the player participate in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the production operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the production operation unit 400 has a total width slightly larger than ⅓ of the total width of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the performance operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320. is formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320 only at the upper part, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed as follows. As a result, in the production operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is sloped so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the tray unit 320 (performance operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the gaming area 5a to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state of the production operation unit 400 (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pressed against the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a button frame 412 of the operation button 410 whose center side (center axis CL side) protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is located in the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes approximately 4cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a curved shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for performance provided in conventional pachinko machines, so the area near the periphery away from the center of the button lens 411 is pressed. There is a high possibility that it will be done. To explain in detail, the operation button for performance in a conventional pachinko machine is installed so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to a vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of this embodiment is installed so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. This means pressing a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL.

By the way, the operation buttons for performance in conventional pachinko machines are formed on a flat surface for the player to press, so if the operation buttons are made larger while keeping the part pressed on the flat surface, If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center of the button, the pressed surface will tilt so that the pressed part retreats first, making it impossible for the operation button to move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a part (button lens 411) that is pressed and operated by the player in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. I can do it. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retreated without tilting. You can fully enjoy the effects you operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since it is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the part to which it is attached. , the entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Furthermore, since the vibration motor 424 is placed directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 can It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, surprising the players and making them enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the leg section 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the frame remains until the lower surface of the leg section 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can absorb the impact by bending downward. Furthermore, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the production operation unit 400 is restricted, and the production operation unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying excessive force to the portion 326a etc., and damage to the production operation unit 400 etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or tapped with strong force, such as when the player is presented with an effect in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decrease in player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed into a curved surface shape (partial shape of an approximately spherical surface) that protrudes forward, so it is formed into a flat plate shape. The button lens 411 has higher strength and rigidity than the button lens 411, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 made of transparent members. The decorations with unevenness such as the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button inner decoration part 432f, and the second button inner decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side). ) can be visually recognized. In addition, in areas where these uneven decorations are formed, light is refracted in a complicated manner due to changes in board thickness, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the production operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration part 411a This makes it difficult to see the rear at the outer periphery of the inner part of the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (back in the central axis CL direction), there is an inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a peripheral wall part of the operation button inner decoration member 432. 432a, and the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap between the outer circumference of the inner operation button decoration member 432 to be closed from the front side (player side). It can be made difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and when the operation button 410 is viewed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button can be placed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the production operation unit 400 has a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is A unit base 431, a decorative board unit 420, etc. located on the outer side and rear side (rear side) are formed so as not to be visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by the dashed line is hidden from the player's view. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are made difficult to see and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration part 432g intersect, resulting in a geometrical Decorations can be shown to players.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). The second button interior decoration portion 432g allows the player to see a deep, three-dimensional geometric pattern, and enjoy the decorations including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front and back direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a changes. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the production operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button An upper inner decorative board 435 and a lower operating button inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the inner operating button decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the interior of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light by the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of these operation button left interior decoration board 433, operation button right interior decoration board 434, operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are as follows. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be well decorated with light.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a decorative board 422 on the left side of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by making these first LEDs 422a and 423a emit light, the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light. I can do it. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are connected to the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body part 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder part 416d, making it easy to operate. Only the second button decoration part 411b of the button 410 can be well decorated with light.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylinder part 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light. .

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By causing the LED to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated with light.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 47(b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. FIG. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) above the dish unit 320. 100 is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; A transparent band-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 is attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting lens is placed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration on the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit upper part that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit A plurality of decorative members 537 are attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front side back and forth. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and square holes extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame and the lower left side decorative board 162) are connected to each other through the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located approximately at the center in the vertical direction. This left unit base 531 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In this left reflective standing wall portion 538, an inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. Note that this reflective surface can be provided not only by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall section 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, this left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square lens portion 532a that is square in front view that corresponds to the square opening 531a. A lens portion 532b is provided. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward in a point-like manner. The light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be decorated with light.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed toward the rear at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d that is formed on the outside of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection section 532c), and an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the rear surface, and an input lens section 532e that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens section 532e on the rear surface. The front reflecting portion 532f is tilted so as to move.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the cross-sectional shape of the front diffusing lens portion 532d when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is recessed forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed into a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the lens portion in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a serrated cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with the peaks between the grooves being triangular and pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the front reflecting portion 532f in the circumferential direction. This radially extending line dividing in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens section 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens section 532b from the input lens section 532e. Since this input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 532c is directed by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame). The light is reflected so as to be diffused in a direction (direction), and travels inside the square lens portion 532b from the center toward the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting section 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, the thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front and back direction at the central diffuse reflection section 532c is sequentially reflected forward by the front reflection section 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting section 532f passes through the front diffusing lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens part 532d has a wave-shaped cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting part 532f in various directions, and the square lens part 532b It is possible to irradiate light substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the lens member.

In the front diffusing lens part 532d and the front reflecting part 532f, the square lens part 532b has a plurality of concentric grooves divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a border. Since the grooves are shifted in the radial direction and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted forward from the front surface of the square lens part 532b has a concentric striped pattern of shading. It is possible to prevent the light from turning into light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with light with a more uniform density. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and a circular decorative portion located in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. A multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short extension in the front and back. The polyhedral decoration part has multiple rows of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged vertically on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is shaped like a. The circular decorative part and the multifaceted decorative part are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative part 561a and the multifaceted decorative part 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative part is caused by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative part is directed forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light irradiated onto each of them emits light and decorates them.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube shape extending longitudinally. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery that is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower part of the portion penetrates back and forth. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion bent rearward, and a doglegged portion with a lower portion bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left A doglegged part whose upper part is bent backward along the front edge of the lower unit decoration base 535 connects the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It consists of a straight part.

Both upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of a non-transparent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 51(c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in front view of the through hole 111, and a front side of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the door frame right side decorative board 552, and the door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the left side of the front view center of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, and extends in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A right unit left cover 555 in the form of a transparent flat plate is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554 .

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the center in front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a decorated right unit is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. a right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow front and right side opening extending in the vertical and front and rear directions. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light opaque member attached to the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and the right side unit 550 has a translucent right side unit with a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating from front to back, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. 563 and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and connects the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, has a short rectangular tube shape in the front and back, and is formed into a box shape that is closed near the center in the front and back direction. has been done. This right unit base 551 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surface, which is flat and faces the through hole 111, is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Note that this reflective surface can be formed by providing the inner surface of the right reflecting wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, similar to the inner surface of the left reflecting wall section 538, or by providing a reflective surface for the same inner surface. It is also possible to provide this by attaching a seal. As will be described later, this right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 has a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of right LEDs 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of medium LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is used to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 by emitting light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right decorative member 557 of the right unit by emitting light through the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LED 552c is used to decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a main body portion 553a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view. A rectangular notch 553c is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed vertically at predetermined intervals, and a right unit left decorative member is formed on the left side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. 554, a housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so that the lens 554 can be accommodated, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the vertical direction; A plurality of side reflection parts 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is located in the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape so that it moves toward the In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a as a whole moves to the right in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward more than the front end of the left side unit 530 of the door frame.

When the rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its right end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c illuminate the right unit decorative lens member 561 well. It can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 553a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and is recessed forward in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 553a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side reflection portion 553f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit left diffuser lens member 553 allows the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads, and each input lens portion 553e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 553a from the input lens part 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body part 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body section 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body section 553a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflecting section 553f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 553f, and is directed outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left side of the main body part 553a, there is light reflected leftward by the side reflection part 553f inside the main body part 553a, and light irradiated rightward from the side reflection part 553f and left by the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body 553a is irradiated to the left, it is possible to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body part 553a in front view (the side where the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the left diffuser lens member 553 of the right unit is visible through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. To be more specific, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a main body part 556a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting in the shape of a flat plate from the rear side of the main body part 556a to the left in front view. 556b, a rectangular notch 556c that is cut out from the left end of the rear wall 556b to the right in a front view, and is formed in plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a front view of the main body 556a, and a plurality of input lens parts 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and are provided in the vertical direction. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided on the left side, which are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a as a whole moves to the left in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating back and forth. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well decorated with light by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 556a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle protruding rearward, and a spherically curved recess toward the front from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens parts 556e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where they are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 556a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit right diffuser lens member 556 allows the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens section 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so that it spreads, and each input lens section 556e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 556a from the input lens part 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body part 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflecting portion 556f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 556f, and is directed outward from the right side of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is made into a member, the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body part 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflection part 556f inside the main body part 556a, and the light irradiated leftward from the side reflection part 556f and the right side on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from having concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in front view of the main body part 556a (the side where the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed into a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Furthermore, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed into a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a main body portion 559a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, and a rear wall portion 559b. A rectangular notch 559c is cut out from the right end side of the wall portion 559b toward the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. It includes a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing parts 559d extending from the wall part 559b to the front end of the main body part 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side being cut diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to be movable, and the outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When the rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to the right of the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each pair being a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction and having substantially the same height as the left and right width, and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view of a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the main body parts 553a and 556a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated with light.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-transparent members, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other, and the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light-emitting decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

Furthermore, since the internal space is vertically divided into four parts by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each divided space. The LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be , each can be decorated with light emission independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction, and each region can be decorated with light emission independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed therein. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short length extending back and forth. The multifaceted decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a plurality of vertical rows on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is formed in a shape similar to the one shown below.

To be more specific, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative parts 561a and a multifaceted decorative part 561b in each space divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the top three parts located at the front, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged in the top three parts. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is disposed.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light by an LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 disposed at the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed into a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to be able to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward than the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and allows the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths, and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a non-transparent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, it protrudes forward in a plate shape to a greater extent than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes further forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 has a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively, independently. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 will be separated from the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. It can act as a partition between the two. As a result, players playing on the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in a game hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island equipment This pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along , and the pachinko machine 1 can stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in rows. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, the book can be seen from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides are removed. By decorating the member 561 etc. with light emitting in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the game hall attendants of the occurrence of a malfunction and make them aware of the occurrence, allowing them to quickly respond to the malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game by the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming irritated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 attached to the center in the left and right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend from side to side, and the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward. A pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped and open at the rear, penetrate front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three each on the left and right) extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front side of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal, which is arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown in the drawings, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer periphery outer light emitting part 34 (left outer periphery outer light emitting part 34a, right outer periphery outer light emitting part 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and It has a structure in which outer circumferential outer light detecting sections 35 (left outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35a, right outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35b) for detecting light outside the outer circumference are provided.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, and a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame, and a door frame top middle decorative board 577 which is attached to the front of the unit body 271 and closes the plurality of slits 574b, respectively, and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guiding members 578 (three each on the left and right ends) extend from the vicinity across the opening 574a to near both left and right ends of the unit body 271, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration A top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front side of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a. A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both the left and right sides of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the parts facing the outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 in the left and right direction. A plurality of (three) slits 574b are formed through the door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, respectively, which are formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A pair of board bases 585 are respectively attached to the parts, and a door is mounted on the front side of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover 591 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 is attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of projections and depressions on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of each of the upper speakers 573 are mounted obliquely so that the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 has a shape when viewed from the front, such that the lower portions near both left and right ends of a rectangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 has a shape in a front view, in which a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a shape in a plan view of a rectangle extending left and right, and a base that is approximately 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward, and a rectangle that protrudes short forward and has the front end side of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the forwardly protruding part at the center in the left-right direction on the front face are connected to the line connecting the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the forward-protruding part. It is located further back (concave) than the

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a extending from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside of the forwardly protruding portions, which extend through the unit body 271 in the front and rear directions. In addition, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending horizontally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the trapezoidally projecting portion on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion extending diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each, spaced apart vertically.

The unit main body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d cut out in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front on the lower surface. , is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit main body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape in a front view of a modified pentagon that is bent so that the center of the lower side of the approximately square is located downward, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed into a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tips of the sides and the bottom ends of the left and right sides of a side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the pentagonal portion on the front side moves rearward as it goes downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is entirely formed into a three-dimensional shape and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the back of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decorative board 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the forwardly protruding portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 on both the left and right sides. The side near both ends of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction is considered to be the end side, and the side near the center is the center side. 578a, and a circular arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the center end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 has a straight portion 578a whose depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than its height in the vertical direction, and a circular arc portion 578b whose depth in the front-rear direction is larger than its height in the vertical direction. Further, the light guiding member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller toward the center side at the arcuate portion 578b. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight part 578a is located just in front of the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the circular arc part 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection part 578c made of saw-shaped unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight part 578a, and a diffused input part 578d made of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear side of the arcuate part 578b. It is equipped with

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left and right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight part 578a. As the light travels toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light.

In addition, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input part 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc part 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens parts 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens parts 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire area on the right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from in front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center side of the front side is closer to the top left side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the top right decorative lens member 580 so as to fill in the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) of the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 illuminates the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. The board base 585 has a substantially square side wall in side view having sides extending vertically and longitudinally, a quadrangular rear wall in front view extending outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a side wall extending from the front end of the upper side of the side wall. A roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the upper sides of the side wall and rear wall with the line that connects the upper half of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the lower sides of the side wall and rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It has a right triangular lower wall, and is formed into a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear left side of the left-right center of the unit body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 586a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of non-light-transmitting members and are substantially symmetrical to each other. The light shielding member 588 extends between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It's in charge. This light shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be well decorated with light in a state where they are independent from each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, and the front faces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved so as to be gouged rearward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 is protruding forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center. It is formed to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal at the rear of each of the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 has a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
The functions and effects of the door frame 3 will be explained. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-holes 111 that penetrate the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. , In accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, the vertical heights of the pan unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 are reduced, and the horizontal widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , it corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of a plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the lower plate front decoration part 326c) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 has a recessed shape (the plate unit 320 and the front ends of both left and right ends of the production operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized to the player. This makes it possible to draw strong attention to the performance operation unit 400.

In the door frame 3, the production operation unit 400, which is arranged on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player is seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state facing the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her gaze and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, making the large, round operation button 410 clearly visible, and increasing expectations for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed within the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 that has a diameter that is approximately the same as the overall height of the pan unit 320 and bulges out in a round shape toward the front, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and "quick pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is installed in an inclined position, so it can not only be pressed from above like a conventional pachinko machine operation button, but also operated from the left or right side. The user can easily operate the button 410 from the front or from the front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the production operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the tray unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the production operation unit 400, so that the game When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, surprising the player and causing the operation button to move. 410 can be enjoyed even more.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the tray unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes less noticeable, players who are used to conventional pachinko machines can easily recognize that it is clearly different, and this appeal strongly attracts players' attention. The pachinko machine 1 can have high power.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 goes around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower tray 322 or hooks his left fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, as well as to reduce the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The user can also tactually recognize that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322 .

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for extracting the game balls from the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front and back, and is also arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the production operation unit 400) in front view. In other words, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Because they are arranged at the rear of the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be made neat. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is in an open state. Then, the game balls released from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322 and are immediately discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 and discharged to the dollar box is also limited. I can't see it. This prevents the player from giving the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of hitting the game ball, the effect image, etc.). can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a disposed in a position to the front left of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and a vertical position of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are directly transferred to the lower tray ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, while the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are transferred to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the balls flowing in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first area A1, the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be removed from the lower tray 322 without being visible to the player. The game balls can be ejected downward (to the dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, through which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (production operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player places his/her hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e will not be blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be outputted forward in a good manner, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, when the player puts his/her hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactually feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it is possible for players who play with this pachinko machine 1 to play in a private room. It is possible to create the illusion that the player is actually there, and it is possible to have players play games in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emitting light on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward. Even if you are not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 inside the building, you can make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a pachinko machine that is highly appealing to players. It can be set as machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front face of the top middle decorative member 576 on both left and right sides. The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 has a concave shape that can be scooped out backwards (the top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude forward, making it possible to highlight and emphasize the top middle decorative member 576 to the player. The center decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, the upper part of the door frame of a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends are provided. In addition to being equipped with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided, which extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right ends in front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player aware at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the production operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are arranged below and above the through-hole 111. , each protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, so that the imaginary line passing through the center in the left and right direction stands out, allowing the player to see a uniform decoration at the top and bottom, as well as giving the player a sophisticated decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out from other pachinko machines and have high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 and the production operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the performance operation unit 400 is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction, and the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 etc. of the production operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board of FIG. 63. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is installed approximately at the center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 above the vertical center on the left side when viewed from the front. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable production unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable production unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/bottom/rear movable production unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 64, 65, and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 that is recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 that protrudes toward the rear of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of attachment bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 into the attachment holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. The frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be held sufficiently even when obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 also has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed of round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left side and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. , is equipped with. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the gaming area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel board 1110 is provided with step-shaped engaging step portions 1115 with a depressed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and, like the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114, are arranged outside the gaming area 5a. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step part 1121 that removably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step part 1121 that is approximately the same size as the game area 5a inside the holding step part 1121 in the front and rear direction. A through hole 1122 penetrating through the.

The depth of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 from the front is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 held within the holding step 1121 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is approximately the same surface as the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner circumferential surface formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to a fitting hole 1113 and a long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel board 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is arranged at the upper part of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 is attached to the upper side ( It extends a predetermined amount toward the center (center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is held detachably from the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an outlet 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path unit 860 passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 passing through in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1126 by the out guide section 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at the lower part of the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is opened downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a notch 1152 on the upper side of the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. A rectangular insertion hole 1153 is provided, which extends through the hole 1153 and into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that pass through the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the attachment bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple attachment holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for attaching the table unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear side outlet 1151 by the out guide part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the outlet 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled on the game board 5, can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing the deterrent power against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces that are inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since implementation areas are now provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and four LEDs that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passing of game balls to the gate part 2003, and a drawing by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result, and a first special holding consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. A number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004, A second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and a special reservation number display 1406 that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening/closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that accommodates the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the game board side performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting part 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock it. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a rear end passing through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of accepting game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept game balls according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It includes an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to the approximate center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time, and a big winning port 2005 that allows multiple game balls to be received at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are of an acceptable size and extend from side to side, and are formed to be openable and closable depending on the gaming state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that can accept game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the gaming area 5a at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 are directed toward the right side (playing area 5a). (center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the gaming area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is located on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and allows the game board side effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball struck into the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 and can be released into the frame. It includes an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Furthermore, a game board side performance display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the direction and accommodates a performance drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper position from the center in the vertical direction. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square manner, and a flat frame-like shape that projects rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted. , a notch 3010d is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b when viewed from the rear, and a notch 3010d is provided to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower/rear movable presentation unit 3100, a back top/left movable presentation unit 3200, a back left movable presentation unit 3300, a back top/middle movable presentation unit 3400, a back/bottom/front movable presentation unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are released. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more clockwise the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. , game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the speed of the game ball flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, making the movement enjoyable. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer circumferential surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, since it is located directly above the first starting port 2002, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large prize winning port 2005 in an open state, and the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general prize opening 2001 and the first prize slot in the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when game balls are accepted into the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called hitting to the right), On the downstream side thereof, the water flows down a region where a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held in the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is a "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined period of time ( For example, the second starting port 2004 remains open for a period of 0.3 to 10 seconds, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at an upper limit of four, and even if game balls pass through the gate section 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot", "jackpot", " A special lottery result is drawn to generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation win," "time reduction win," etc.). Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", " 15R jackpot," "probability variable (probability change) win," "time saving (time reduction) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable no time saving win," and so on.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the special variable time has elapsed, the grand prize opening 2005 becomes ready to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the big win hole 2005 while the big win hole 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13) are delivered from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed onto the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept game balls when the big winning hole 2005 is enabled to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the players can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", after the big prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 became open to accept game balls, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted is met. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 receive game balls from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once a game ball is received in the second starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without retaining the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by varying each symbol row with three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols being displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three stop-displayed symbol rows are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small winning game, a jackpot game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (when the symbol rows fluctuate). The time required for displaying the confirmed image is different from the time required for displaying the finalized image, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 displays a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result. The operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations on the center accessory 2500, various decorations on the back unit 3000, back lower and rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper and middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to keep the players entertained, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is a main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention. The pan unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is attached to the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A of this embodiment is attached to the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the interior decoration member of the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decoration body of the present invention, The second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration part of the present invention, respectively. .

Furthermore, each LED and the sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 in this embodiment The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in this embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in this embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 can be operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) The decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show players a highly decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the button lens 411 can be moved by the player operating (pressing) the button lens 411. When this happens, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will approach or separate. Due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second inner button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a It becomes possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and The player can change the decoration (intersection mode) with the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side from the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), it is different from the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the button lens 411 and the second button decoration member 432, when viewed from the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration part 411a and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 The distance to the inner decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be much different, and the button lens 411 may be moved by operating the button lens 411. Even when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the intersecting manner (overlapping degree) changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. Through this, the interior operation button decoration member 432 on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be clearly seen, and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a The decoration allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button (or the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's attention can be strongly focused on the side effect display device 460.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g It is possible to reliably bring out the sense of perspective in the decorations created by the buttons, and to make the decorations created by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g stand out, thereby making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

Moreover, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g The decoration can direct the player's line of sight and attention to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or sub-screen decoration member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) controls the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration part 432g, the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button top While the interior decoration board 435 and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436 are illuminated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence, whereas the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence. Since the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with weak light, each LED of the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 When looking at the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) from the outside with the LED 477a emitting light, the sense of perspective is more emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing, strongly attracting the players' interest.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side decoration member 432) There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move around the outer circumference of the frame side second effect display device 460A), It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Furthermore, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative, has a good appearance, and has a high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, if a player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Since the applied impact force is more easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than in the case of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the button lens 411 being damaged during a game, which may cause some players to become irritated and lose their interest, and also to prevent the button lens 411 from being damaged. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, there is a space under the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm that can be moved (advance and retreat) by the player's operation, and an internal decoration that can be seen from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, it is different from the conventional one. In a pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 is visible in the position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as being different from conventional pachinko machines, and can have a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission. It includes an inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decorative part 411b, and a main body part 413a and an inner extension part 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LED 422b illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411 due to the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration part 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission independently. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b, various patterns of light emission can be produced. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that emits light to decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that emits light to decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the circuit board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decorative part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a board, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept as far away from the second button decoration part 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently reflected. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration part 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, the appearance of the second button decoration part 411b and the light emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Furthermore, since the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operating button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operating button 410 moves back and forth. The wiring connected to the outer right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. To allow a player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. (Door frame side second effect display device 460A) When looking at the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the outer edge of the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the second button decoration part 411b is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are transparent and visible. As described above, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be decorated with light emitting light in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effects, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by entertaining the effect images etc. on the effect display device 460A).

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is provided with the second button decoration part 411b on the outer edge, can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of a player participation type performance. By allowing the player to operate the button 410, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player participatory effect), and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. When performing a player participation type production, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light, thereby attracting the player's attention to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-transparent main body part 413a and the inner extension part 413f, which allow the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 to be decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 The area closer to the center than the button decoration part 411b is not illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, so that it is placed at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc. can be sufficiently enjoyed by the players, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are displayed on the rear side of the frame unit 415. 411b can be completely partitioned off by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is at the end (rear end) of the inner cylinder portion 416d closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the outer left decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative board 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b on the rear side of the operation button 410 and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned off by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body portion 413a closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 Since the LEDs 422a and 423a also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from entering the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. I can do it. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the player can fully enjoy the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, when viewed from the front, a second button decoration is provided in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side). The members on the outside and the rear side (rear side) of the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration part 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, at this time, when the second button decoration part 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration part 411b is different from the brightness of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second decoration on the door frame side). Since the outside and rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outside and rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Moreover, since the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration part 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, a light emitting effect in which light circles around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 can be produced. Since it is possible to show the player a display, a light-emitting display in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light-emitting displays, and to make the player have fun. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a, and the upper tray 321 used for the game is opened. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front side and lower part of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the first region A1 of the lower plate is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls is attached by extending the portion of the lower tray main body 325 corresponding to the lower tray second region A2 inside, the lower tray 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen vertically side by side in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make players realize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines at just a glance, and that can strongly attract the attention of players. can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided to restrict the movement of the game balls, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). This prevents the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to interruption of the game due to damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and this pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent the game ball from moving toward the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from intruding into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can 326d) into the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips etc. from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the underside of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and to allow the player to play the game in a safe state. I can do it.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), there is no impact or pressure caused by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Even if the operation occurs, the information is not transmitted from the lower plate cover 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can directly enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the main body of the lower tray body 325. It can be made difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball will be removed from the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the rear side from coming into contact with the player, it is possible to prevent damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), reduce interruptions in the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball facing the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is tilted. The ball will climb up the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls that come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

In addition, since at least the lower plate covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower plate covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and this pachinko machine 1 can reduce the burden on the game hall side where the game hall is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left and right direction expands most forwardly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 taken out is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are removably attached to the part that bulges out most forwardly, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a storage tray that can store game balls, and the storage tray (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) is provided with an outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located therein and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage trays (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see that the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized at a glance, and has a high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the first part of the lower plate main body 325 has a second lower plate area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, it is possible to store game balls even in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the lower tray 322 (lower tray second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to worry about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322. This makes it possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part are attached to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body part 325A having the lower plate first area A1, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A having the lower plate second area A2. Since the lower plate 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A of different sizes, a first extension part 325B, a second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, the size of the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be adjusted according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the installation space 326j in the tray unit cover 326. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rear protrusion amounts can be used. The lower tray 322 can be made compatible with the performance operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 includes a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container shape concave downward, and the game ball can be stored reliably. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A have a cover standing wall part 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower plate main body 325, lower plate covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. Then, by combining (installing) lower plate covers 340, 340A with a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size (shape) of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, etc., it can be adapted to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the lower plate covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower tray main body 325, so even if many game balls are stored, there is no force that would cause the lower tray covers 340, 340A to be separated from the lower tray main body 325. There is no action, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general prize opening 2001 etc. are played. 321 and a lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. More than half of the lower plate 322, including the The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can strongly attract people. In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game ball heading from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to see the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) controls the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom of the lower plate 322, which guide the game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is difficult to see the game balls guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d between the ball extracting hole 322a and the ball extracting hole 322a, if the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a is left open. , the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to create an illusion that the game balls are being discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the lower plate 322, including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, etc. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. are located at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is smaller than that of the actual lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. This is because the balls can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) by the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball extraction hole 322a and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. , it is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are immediately removed by the ball guide portion 322c etc. without the player noticing. Since the game ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322, the lower tray is visible from the front. 322, the actual lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, so it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls, similar to the lower tray of a conventional pachinko machine.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward in the lower part of the game area 5a of the game board 5 when viewed from the front, where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. Installation of a production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. 326a, and a plate front lower decorative part 326c located below approximately the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting part 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be gouged rearward. Because of the shape, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a can appear to protrude significantly forward, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) This allows the operation unit 400A) to stand out. Therefore, the large performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized manner in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are visible side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from a conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower plate front decoration part 326c which is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game balls is routed to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) can be secured. There is no need to play the game while worrying about the lower tray 322 being full of game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, his fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate unit base 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, etc. This makes it possible for the player to recognize through the sense of touch that a sufficient amount of game balls is stored, and when the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Furthermore, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., it provides the player with a feeling similar to that of the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to reassure the players and prevent them from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is formed to become wider toward the back (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored even if the front side is small. In other words, since the front end side portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open (lower plate front decoration part 326c). This makes it possible to relatively make the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to increase the appeal to players and to attract players. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the side and upper part of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player cannot enter the lower tray 322. This can prevent the player from getting injured by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with the fingertips when the player puts his/her hand in. You can play games in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) cannot be operated from the player side. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more appealing, which can be made more conspicuous and strongly attract players' attention, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. This allows the player to enjoy the decorations and performances of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in player's interest.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, it is different from the conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play games with this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused about the function of the lower tray 322, and will be able to play the same way as before. The player can enjoy the game by allowing the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower plate ball removal hole 322a is not visible from the player's side, making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the attention of players. It can be set as machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tray unit 320 bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of At the same time, attach the inner operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside of the operation button, and also An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 with a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached, and the button lens 411 is attached to an outer peripheral edge thereof. A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and protrudes from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration part 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side third It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge, the inner side (rear side), etc. of the screen unit 470 of the second performance display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the internal operation button decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 prevent the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being removed. By increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the outer edge and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, so the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. 470), it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a, etc., thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance, while also allowing the large operation button with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm to be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made larger, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, and the player's attention is strongly increased. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) is provided which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed diagonally, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the area near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410). Since the player is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal to the plane), light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 ) can make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 disposed inside the operation button 410 and the door frame A door frame side effect display device that allows the side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) to be made larger or easier to move, and allows the player to be entertained by using the inside of the operation button 410. 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be easily provided, and a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players can be realized.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given design (decoration), so the operation button 410 in the pachinko machine 1 is made to stand out and attracts players' attention. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Moreover, in the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, since the button frame 412 is made opaque, the button It is possible to reliably hide the rear side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 and the like can be improved by reducing deterioration in appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer circumferential edge to the inside with a predetermined width, and cooperates with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b to Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed and operated without any problem, and it is possible to reliably let the player enjoy the player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player participation type effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it easier to touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in a player participatory production using the operation button 410, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since a door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided within the operation button 410, player's interest can be controlled by presenting effect images according to the gaming state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) Not only can the effects be entertaining, but also the effect images and light emitting effects provided by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can prompt the player to operate the operation button 410. By having the players actively participate in the player-participation type presentation and having fun, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Further, by executing the effect within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a drop in interest. I can do it.

Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (part inside the first button decoration part 411a). As a result, players can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of this pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, which has high appeal to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and the player's expectations for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410 can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not limited to this, and the game machine can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the invention is not limited to this. , the button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the button frame 412 is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed all around the lens 411 at a portion corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that protrudes cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second display on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The button base 413 may have a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may have a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a two-dimensional decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Moreover, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply a light diffusion process such as a grain, a slit, a prism, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or it is recessed backward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may also choose to have one.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward (the lower tray front decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) is changed to a rearwardly curved surface. Although an example is shown in which the front surface is recessed in the shape of a polygonal column, the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) was attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this. ``A device equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface'', ``A device equipped with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body'', ``A game machine with a rotating body that has a decoration on its surface'' "Those with decorations that are three-dimensional reproductions of characters, items, logos, scenes (dioramas), etc. that are in line with the concept of the game machine"; It is also possible to attach a member such as a unit or a panel with decorations such as "", etc., applied by stickers, printing, etc.". Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown as having a production operation unit attachment part 326a that is open to the front for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to, and may include a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover part) that does not have an opening (performance operation unit attachment part 326a) for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A configuration may be adopted in which a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is formed behind the dish unit cover. Furthermore, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine may be applied to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is controlled by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) as a covering part. Although an example has been shown in which the covering is made difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and half or less of the storage area of game balls in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as having an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the production operation unit 400 is a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered at the center. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval shape) centered at the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible when the following is satisfied. Here, the variable light transmitting means is ``something like a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the back side'', and ``something like a liquid crystal film that becomes transparent when the power is turned on/off.'' "It becomes invisible or opaque so that the rear side can be seen." Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing at least one of the front member and the rear member with a variable light transmitting means, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible under normal conditions, Decorations of visible members can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear part (the rear member or a member placed on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state becomes visible, and the front part becomes visible. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can display an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible to entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

To be more specific, for example, if the front member is equipped with a variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear side of the rear member passes through the front member. The members become visible, and the decoration in which the decorations on the front member and the decorations on the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be The player can see the decorations on the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side becomes visible through the rear member, and the front member and the rear Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character, etc.) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player under normal conditions, and the decoration of the front member and the When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. Decorations made with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED). ) and the respective satisfaction conditions of the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. As a result, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light from the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy a variety of decorations.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is like a one-way mirror, so when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, so there is no light on the surface of the front or rear member. Shiny decorations can be shown to the players.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was explained as something like a one-way mirror, but even if it is something like a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be achieved. In addition, when using something like a liquid crystal film as a variable light transmission means, it is possible to transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so it is possible to If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light emitting light) by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show a wider variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects to the players. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls that relays the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control section.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control power supply generation processing (for example, +5V, etc.) and controls related to the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control section SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control section MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the The second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be explained.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands such as a main control program that is executed after the game is executed and that controls gaming operations, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. , and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a predetermined voltage power outage or instantaneous power outage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. A watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an) is built-in. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Once this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted with detection signals from various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general The detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and the signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. has been entered. In addition, a gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is sent to a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from the output terminal of , outputs a drive signal to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information related to games (gaming information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

Note that in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, gate sensor 4003, and count sensor 4005; A contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020, 4020. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with long lifespans are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter the ball, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a long-life proximity switch is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, in the general winning holes 2001 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also controls the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. Various commands are sent to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. , various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to a main control built-in RAM, a main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, etc. connects a bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management section 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to serial management section 1310aec.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, as shown in FIG. and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, detects the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output when operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b into which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial format as a main payout serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands to the payer as serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes the payout control program after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also executes a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, since the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals of the payout control input circuit 952b is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca that has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb that is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit into which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A ball outage detection sensor 827 that detects out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects game balls released from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the door frame release switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the dispensing control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives operation signals (detected) from the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also controls payout control without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. A drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the supply path of the dispensing device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates a “dispensing detection sensor error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is made at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that the game ball is in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid)) (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out). The number of pitches has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually put out is output from the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is connected to the game hall (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the main control board 1310 for playing the game and the payout control board 951 for controlling payouts etc. from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to prevent malfunctions or failures due to abnormal voltage being applied. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The game ball rental request signal from the ball rental button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining balance on the ball rental/return display section 330. The signal is output to the ball rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental and return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. There is. This capacitor BC1 allows the payout control MPU 952a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) during power cutoff processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is sent to a predetermined input of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, the payout control MPU 952a clears the information from the payout control built-in RAM. It is now completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained based on FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards of , the CR unit 6 and the connection terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls are electrically connected, the terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls etc. and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 869 is electrically connected. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and outputs it together with the ground LG. , is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

The frequency display board 365 has a ball rental button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball rental unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game player. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869.

The ball rental/return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a row, and uses a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one segment indicator of these three digits is sequentially driven one by one. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. Through such lighting control, the ball rental/return display section 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental and return display section 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of 3 signals) for specifying a 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display, and the specified 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of 7 signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially lights up according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display The content of the light emitted from the device can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display section 363.

Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to this CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball rental available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball rental button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and the ball rental is possible. controls the logic of the ball rental available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display section 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental/return display section 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 sends a single payout operation start request signal to payout a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. BRQ is outputted to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 and informing that the payout operation for paying out rented balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. Note that, for example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, game balls worth 200 yen are paid out, one payout operation is performed. This is done twice in a row, and once 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is inputted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount after subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , a firing control section 953 that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various types of direct current for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. A power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source is provided.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control section 953, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching the button, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the handlebar relay terminal board 315 is inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the firing control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, a game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information specifying the year, month, day, and time. Rotate the knob to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. A volume adjustment volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the process that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control production operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.) peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing production flags, etc., and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control external WDT 1511e) that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents long enough for the power to be immediately restored after an instantaneous power outage, and can only be stored in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (in the event of a long power outage) ), the contents are lost, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board 931 (not shown). By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. It can no longer be held and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door side motor drive for transmitting a drive signal from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 Data is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, Peripheral control output of door side light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board in 3. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided in the production operation unit 400 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 is transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), and uses the built-in peripheral control WDT and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e together to prevent its own system from going out of control. We are diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (direct memory access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to and from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while also reading and writing various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read and written to and from peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Additionally, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading various data into the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I/O ports. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between input/output devices such as the /O port 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab storage device built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. While reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I/O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I/O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and It reads from and writes to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac also includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and peripheral control various serial I/Os built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and input/output devices such as peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, data is read and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. For input/output devices such as serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h, and controls the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control Various devices including storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices. This is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between the two.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for a motor drive board, a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. A serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information on the production operation unit.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer expires, it resets the hardware. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets the watchdog timer. It will take a while. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag not only output various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, but also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a serial transmission circuit on the game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation lamp to notify that the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures regarding the lighting control of LEDs, which is important in terms of gaming. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. Music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set at the board volume 0 to 6. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are used to notify the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, as well as content related to game production. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous game state.) The notification sound is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and notification sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) using a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, and there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce things that are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the RTC control section 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data that generates screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data that generates the light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. has been done. The schedule data for generating a light emission mode is configured by chronologically arranging light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the output channel number of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A track number is defined for instructing which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Note that some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on, etc. There are some that are read out and executed. In addition, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. There are some items that are copied and read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b contains, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. Includes brightness correction program. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type. , acquires the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and uses the acquired brightness setting information based on the correction information. Correct it. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. It includes the set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the power was first turned on to the game board side effect display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness is set to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the game board side effect display device When turning on the 1600 backlight, the game board is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup memory that specifically stores information to be backed up among various types of information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the program, and the copies of various data, control data, schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce that is exclusively stored, and a backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs but is not subject to backup. is provided.

Note that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power outage or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. Regarding the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the performance when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca contains performance information (1fr ) is stored exclusively as a backup target, and the effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored exclusively as a target. Here, to briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Since a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that it is ready to accept screen data from Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (direction information (1fr) and the performance described below). The same meaning is used for backup information (1fr). "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for presentation information (1 ms) and presentation backup information (1 ms), which will be described later).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa contains game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is a storage area where is set, and the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side contains lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area where the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the various received commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read out and set, while various schedule data are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are some that are set.

Bank0 (1ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf contains door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag contains data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai stores detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Various information obtained based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which information about the rotation (rotation direction) of the operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405 is set. When the control board 1510 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output the LOCKN signal to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained about the frequency of malfunctions and the state of occurrence of malfunctions during connection with the effect display driving board 4450 is set.

Note that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr), the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. , when the next peripheral control unit steady state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state processing is performed. Every time the process is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control section steady processing is executed, the processing is proceeded based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. - When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Ru. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed and, for example, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, Processing is now performed based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side when the previous peripheral control unit steady process was executed. It has become.

When the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. - DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process was executed. It looks like this.

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store copies of production information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). , the production information (1ms) is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. is, as production backup information (1ms), sent by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, in the backup second area 1511cc, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is configured to have two pairs in total, including Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs: Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in the peripheral control unit every frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time regular processing is executed, the content is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The performance information (1ms) is stored as the performance backup information (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, but the program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs; A first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc are provided to exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored due to instantaneous power failure or power outage). is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point in which the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Furthermore, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of jackpot game state) ), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da stores performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming states and information for managing special performance flags). It consists of Bank 0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information (information, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later).

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and each pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as performance backup information (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair is Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair includes Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair as one page, and the backup second area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page. 1511dc is an area where Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawings of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As such, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source that performs control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the signal, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d; It is equipped with This liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b contains, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (ring-shaped display object), and sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data to be used for displaying at least one selected display object to be described later, tone adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, and volume adjustment icon data to be described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame back image data used to display the main body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player's perspective, and the display of the service mode screen. Service mode screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation section 405 (operation section) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting it from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, when a V blank signal, which will be described later, is input, the first screen data is copied according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, updates the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output one by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the surroundings. After extracting the various control data from the copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the input of the V blank signal triggers the start of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the first sound command data is output one by one to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for this purpose. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 to the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that it can be connected from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route is much longer than that for channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d uses THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication method called "Registered Trademark", the system is not easily affected by noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450. The serialized various signals are then restored to parallel signals by the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen worth of screen data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1. Image data for the effect display device 460 is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. This refers to the data to be generated above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) Then, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and is used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values. Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating a dial operation section 401 or a press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode to be described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is In fact, it is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used among multiple tracks, and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is adjusted to the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, we will briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To explain this, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set at the bottom. It is amplified to a master volume value corresponding to the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is progressing according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the production schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the volume of the production sound is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a). If the adjustment is made by switching to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

In this way, when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound does not continue for a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification sound started playing. The flow will start again from where it left off.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and for drawing on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, it outputs the audio data on the right side as serial data using a differential method in which it becomes a plus signal and a minus signal, and sends it to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also sent to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as serial data of a differential method that makes the left audio data a plus signal and a minus signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data between the boards ranging from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method on both the left and right sides, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, 18 bits in total, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower two bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. and are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The three synchronizing signals, the signal and the clock signal, are serialized into serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and can be transmitted using only one differential pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is Although the wiring length required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the Since the length of the wiring required for the second route is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. On the closed side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, etc., on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to run various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 830, the game balls put out by the dispensing device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the put out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full.
Moreover, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is disposed, which is a unit made up of a power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and the like that are supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc. In addition to the noise caused by the drive of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a By adopting a differential communication system called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'', the system is not easily affected by noise. In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As mentioned above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable consists of two wires. are not just parallel lines, but twisted pair cables. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case will be briefly described in which a parallel wire is used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects a transmitter and a receiver. For channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than that of channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, THine Electronics has developed a transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side performance provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Co., Ltd. is used to make it less susceptible to noise, this kind of hardware configuration alone is not enough to prevent electrostatic discharge from the game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a performance display is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state. , the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is displayed as a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem in that a certain image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the side of the door frame provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'' by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to create a mechanism that is less susceptible to the effects of noise, and in addition to this hardware configuration. Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) that noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls, noise intruding into the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 in which it is impossible to recognize the image at all. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the influence of noise.

In addition, in this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects, which will be described later, provided in an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed integrally, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. This makes it possible to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings. If the defect that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, replace the defective door frame 3 with another door frame 3' to the main frame 4, and replace the door frame 3 with another door frame 3'. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various wirings provided on the door frame 3' side can be connected electrically. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the receiving side can cancel (remove) that noise. ) was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed together. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. The route from the transmitter to the receiver traverses multiple relay terminal boards, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, so the video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards are subjected to impedance matching.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay The terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and the wire that supplies power is red and several other wires of the harness are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d is sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. This forced switching circuit 1512f receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is input into a differential circuit 1512e after being differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. This differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period, a transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later, are installed. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit these two signals. The circuit is configured such that the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the conversion circuit 1512e. has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so the door frame side effect transmitter A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a startup screen on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs a demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. During the period, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, the effect display drive board 4450 displays various serialized signals. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image to convey that fact and outputs it to the game board side performance display device 1600. The information is displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notified.

Furthermore, when the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input to the tray unit of the door frame 3. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, ``A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. ”) is outputted to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby producing a notification sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as its center. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on this, the effects can be played out on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, if it is December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, a new year countdown will be displayed. For example, the screen to be executed may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information if the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. There is. If the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. It includes the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Additionally, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when it was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls ON/OFF or only ON of the backlight when cold cathode tube type backlights are installed in the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. It is supposed to be done.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, input date and time information is inputted on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on. The manufacturing date and time are set as month, day, hour, minute and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, input date and time information, etc. , it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information etc. stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side production display device 1600 can be set as desired. You can adjust the brightness to The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In addition, in the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the game board side effect is adjusted. A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and calculates calendar information and time specifying the year, month, and day. The current date and time is determined by acquiring time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. This acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, In addition to acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% that is the correction information obtained for the brightness. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. , when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is the same.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by using the peripheral information described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak adjusts the resistance of the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and game effects. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state.) etc.) is also played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and announcement sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and are muted. It is possible to adjust the volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be performed. Although the sound becomes low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of the player.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 and By operating the press operation unit 405, the user can enter a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and applies the voltage to this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the press operation section 405 There are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is the clerk at the hall. However, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk may feel too low for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined period of time, the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 may be operated, or the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 may be performed while waiting for a customer. If you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 during the period in which the game is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the player can use the production operation unit 400 You can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405. If you feel that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too loud and the music or sound effects are too loud, you can use the production operation unit The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of 400.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no games are played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted last time by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music and sound effects, the player who played the game while sitting in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time A player who plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400. If a player who has been playing the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who plays the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 may adjust the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the press operation section 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be explained. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

The power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and performs launch control. The section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied via the power supply board 931 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts of alternating current (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create +37V DC (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of the supplied +37V, smoothes the +37V, and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball to the game area 5a shown in FIG. Control is performed to adjust the driving current for launching (shooting) the ball to the firing solenoid 682, while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball sending member to send the received game ball to the batted ball firing device 650 side.

The power generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, a power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and a power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951, as will be described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the RAM with built-in main control via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 951, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and also connects the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the forward direction through the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows towards the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is sent to the payout control board 951 and then returned from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Current is flowing towards it. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It is now possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V. When it runs out, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, so a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the stored contents are retained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltages supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the voltages mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are also supplied to the peripheral area via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+3.3V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates +9V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components configuring the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and also to the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of this external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power outage or momentary power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, the signals are inputted to the door frame decoration board and the like via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, thereby applying power to one of the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created on the main control board 1310. Various input/output signals to and communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control board 1310, which are shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0, as shown in FIG. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its No. 3 terminal. +5V is being output. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed. smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is electrically connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By connecting it to , ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in main control is connected via the resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. If the circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control, so that the stored contents are retained.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (4.25V, for example), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line and the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripples are removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is output to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal, by applying +5V to each of these terminals A, B, C, and ST.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the grounding terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to the ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency-divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives detection from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit into which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit where the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after the period for functioning as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). It has the ability to do this. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling an error that the payout control board 951 has, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic signal from the payout control board 951 is input to the main control board 1310. An operation signal in which the input signal becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on is a pull-up line whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR3 but also to the other end of a resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND). The line is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input. When the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI after being pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching it on. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge that.

Note that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The voltage +12V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning hole sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from a power supply board 931 via a payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be explained, and then the monitoring of a +24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of a +12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of a power failure notice signal will be explained.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC components) are removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 is equipped with two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. , is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the No. 2 terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND); and the other end of the capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 and MR22, and whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. . The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 5 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 and the other end of the resistor MR25 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and MR25, and one end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so that one end is connected to the +5V power line and electricity. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, and a 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and is connected to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or momentary power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Note that the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the grounding terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal inputted from the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, its logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the transistor MTR22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. Electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR30 but also to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a harness. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the latter stage is The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. By inputting the signal, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). A payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic is the same as that of the peripheral power outage notice signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is sent to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs as a power outage warning signal has two transistors, one in the front stage and the other in the rear stage, and the logic of the outgoing power outage warning signal is the same as the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the surroundings. The logic is the inverse of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected to the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb has no reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are installed in the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, Power outage warning is performed by the logic of a power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the delivery control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, output the serial data sent from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal and output the main control without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 69 from the TXB terminal. The main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb sends the main control output circuit without a reset function as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to inputting the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal is input. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input, etc.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. and outputs the main payout ACK signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, and outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to various displays, and various information related to games (gaming information). is outputted to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, and various information regarding the game (gaming information) is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main circuit serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is increased by transmitting using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of:

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, if power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a at least serially manages the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is increased by transmitting using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the main cycle serial data is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI with +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via the transistor MTR50. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR51 but also to the other end of a resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit composed of resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is switched to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND), and the negative terminal is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is sent to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a as a main frequency serial data transmission signal. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, if +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main serial data transmission signal, that is, the main serial data in the middle of transmission, is interrupted. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to reliably receive the data without missing or missing the data.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main circuit whose logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. This is the logic.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line, to which +12V, which is the communication voltage, is applied via the diode MD50. Measures have been taken in the event that a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h whose first auxiliary power supply is the electrolytic capacitor MC2, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that when a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs, the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being fragmented, and also to prevent the commands from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the commands being sent. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate commands from being missed immediately after a power outage occurs or at the time of a momentary power outage.

In addition, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all made into main serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF so that transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset allows the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to be converted into main cycle serial data and all to function as an interface circuit. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and prevents them from being lost. You can receive it without any problem.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be explained, and then the dispensing control section circuit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be explained.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Terminal 1 of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . In addition, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and the capacitor PC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in output control is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a current, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the voltage VBB. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as well as peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal, and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, and then explain the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic outputs the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VCC terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to its OE terminal, the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from its output terminal, ie, the OUT terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b receives the dispensing power outage warning signal from the door frame release switch 618 shown in FIG. 70, the main body frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit includes the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the power outage warning signal issued from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be explained. Note that the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches shown in FIG. 70, such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, have open collector output type output terminals. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR21 but also to the other end of a resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR20, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as a door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21, and is also pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR24 but also to the other end of a resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and the No. 1 terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via a resistor PR26, ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR26 but also to the other end of a resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the door frame release switch 618 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time.

A circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame release switches. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Ru. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. The transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V side, and the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, and the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame release signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR29 but also to the other end of a resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29, and also connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR31 but also to the other end of a resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, as shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

The circuit made up of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23 and the circuit made up of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on and off by a detection signal from body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. The transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to an external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 1310. 1310.

In this manner, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame door open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the logic is The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the states in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are provided. Even in this case, the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not normally occur during gaming, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Therefore, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 may be opened. It can be determined that a situation that does not normally occur during gaming is occurring for the player who is playing the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are normally closed switches, the door frame release switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main frame release switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and also to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

In addition, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame release switch 618' and main body frame release switch 619'), , the door frame release switch 618' is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. . The main body frame opening switch 619' is turned ON (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnecting) when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 remains open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are adopted as the door frame release switch 618' and the main body frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit into which the power outage warning signal issued from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal issued from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR41 but also to the other end of a resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR40, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is inputted to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power outage warning signal issued from power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in main control board 1310.

As described above, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the two types of voltages +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and as described above, meets the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is applied. When the conditions are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages. Sometimes, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V is When there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the power outage control board 951, so that the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage in the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a due to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. has been entered. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 has a circuit configuration as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line on the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal filter for the full-tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and whose other end is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR41, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , a signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side at the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns on the transistor PTR41 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a full signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and its logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns off the transistor PTR41 and turns off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and a full tank signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

Note that in this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit including a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that the signal is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from paying out game balls. It is designed to be controlled. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a will control the payout motor 834 even though the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from dispensing game balls, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the above-mentioned prize ball passageway is filled with game balls upstream by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body to continue paying out game balls, the payout rotary body itself becomes unable to rotate and the payout motor 834 There may also be cases where an abnormal load is applied to the dispensing motor 834, resulting in overload and abnormal heat generation, resulting in failure, or a failure of the mechanism that transmits the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first changed to remove the noise component from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). [Circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to a resistor PR49, and also to the other end of a resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 4 terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is not only electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, but also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR52 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the former stage and the latter stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage changes, and the signal is sent as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is input.

In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to a resistor PR55, and also to the other end of a resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to +12V in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time, causing a flapping phenomenon. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 due to the operation switch 954.

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50, and transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53, and transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, including resistors PR55, PR56, and transistor PTR44. The circuit consisting of is a switch circuit, and is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is configured to operate the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 (RAM with built-in payout control) and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and an error reset function after the power is turned on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). It has the following functions. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in a function that clears the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on; ), it becomes an error release signal in the error release function.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transferred to the previous stage transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42, turns on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. By pulling the voltage down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that this is not an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the transistor PTR44. When the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is input. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, this logic becomes LOW as shown in FIG. By inputting the RAM clear signal to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. The voltage applied to the base terminal of PTR42 turns off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is judged that it is an instruction.

In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and turning off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the RAM becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period from power-on, the logic becomes HI as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, this is an instruction to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied thereto, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is applied as the motor drive voltage to No. 3, which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60. It is supplied to the terminal and terminal No. 10, respectively, and also to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals, of the drive ICPIC 60 are grounded (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground (GND). A payout motor drive signal is input to certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals No. 1, No. 5, No. 8, and No. 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, an excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC 60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. These driving pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, and rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that when the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, which are terminals 3 and 10. We adopted a circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6, as described above, via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869. , is input, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for dispensing rental balls is possible or impossible. and outputs. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via a resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and also to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is not only electrically connected to a resistor PR71, but also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR71 but also to the other end of a resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR70, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR72 but also to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is connected to the power supply board 931. electrically connected to the other end of the By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

The circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via a resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a that informs that one payout operation has started or ended is outputted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and outputs the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is applied. When the logic of the EXS signal outputted from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC73, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is inputted to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

A PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is possible or impossible from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is applied. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is connected to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to inputting signals such as signal 1, etc., for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 952b. Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a outputs the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and outputs the EXS signal and PRDY signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca with a payout control output circuit with a reset function to send the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 transmits the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signals such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power outage warning signal, etc. related to the game are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The jackpot information of the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is outputted from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Outputs gaming information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number output signal from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, and starting opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. In addition, when outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hole computer outputs the number of jackpots in which there are 2 rounds (2-round jackpot information output signal). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots in which the round is 15 (the number of jackpots in the 15th round). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or the 15-rand jackpot from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots that actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is higher. , it is impossible to determine whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Additionally, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play by referring to the number of jackpot game states displayed on this data counter. Some do.

However, the number of jackpot game states displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of two-round jackpots, so even if the player starts playing, only two-round jackpots will occur. Sometimes it is difficult to hit the jackpot after 15 rounds. In this way, although the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may unnecessarily agitate the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by separately outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, It is now possible to accurately grasp the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the highest number of jackpots actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot, and the data counter shows the 15-round jackpot. Since the number of jackpot occurrences and the number of 2-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to unnecessarily arouse the gambling spirit of players. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer during the period from when the 2nd round jackpot occurs until the end of the round, and the 15th round jackpot information output signal is also output when the 15th round jackpot occurs. The state is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2 round jackpot occurs, the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information are output to the hole computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period. Another method is to output the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be explained with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal, and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during normal gaming when the player indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that indicates that a situation has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys the information, and the main prize ball number information output signal is the various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15 round jackpot has occurred. The 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the special symbol is in the state of This is a signal that indicates that the fluctuating display has ended (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal indicates that the fluctuating display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time-saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring. This is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

On the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row, as shown in FIG. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As mentioned above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls that have been put out.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, this signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. /Or it can be recognized that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys the status, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is sent from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at a time. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer displays the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to know that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and also to count the number of times and display the first special on the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols have been variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting slot winning information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , is output for 0.128 seconds every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting hole winning information output signal is input. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and also to count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered the ball.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs that the 15 round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is now output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the status, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2nd round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 2nd round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is now output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As mentioned above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped), and by counting the number of times, the total number of fluctuating displays of the regular symbols can be counted on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can keep track of the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is inputted, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that conveys that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the fact that there is a probability variation, it is also possible to count the number of times the probability variation information output signal is inputted and to grasp the total number of times that probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have been pitched reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the pachinko machine 1 receives 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is determined by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (=0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the various signals output from the main control board 951 side. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, and by electrically connecting wires with connectors colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to avoid accidentally connecting other wires with electricity. It is now possible to prevent unauthorized connections. Then, various signals output from the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output from the payout control board 951 side and various signals output from the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the left side of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side can be connected. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect electrical connection of the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively connected to the hall from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. For example, in a state where game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 If a 15th round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there are few remaining game balls, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (Furthermore, for example, if ball jamming or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this problem is resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 side indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Since it is a signal that conveys this fact every time, when it becomes impossible to pay out game balls, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls the hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like may, for example, check the hose-like replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720, and identify the location of ball clogging (or, for example, By identifying the location of the ball jam or the location of the ball jam and resolving the problem, the game ball can be returned to a state where it can be paid out.

However, even if the hall clerk etc. are working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 round jackpot is completed, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk etc. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the unpaid game balls one after another, and even though the 15th round jackpot has ended and the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, the payout control board 951 Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal that conveys this fact and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It happens. In this case, even though the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. A problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is independent of whether or not the payout motor 834 is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is independent of the prize ball number information output signal outputted by the payout control board 951. As a signal, the main control board 1310 receives game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on this, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify the fact, and the payout control board 951 and external terminal board 784 are activated. We adopted a system in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (problems such as ball jamming in the supply nozzle, ball jamming or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be thrown out and the relationship can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450, as shown in FIG. 87, mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 outputs a positive signal and a negative signal. It is now possible to separate noise from negative signals. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator) and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, are restored (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). Note that the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal are, as described above, although the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are 8 bits. , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, so they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit as follows. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the LCD module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f switches the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame side, when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. A serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is transmitted from the side production transmitter IC 1512d as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, it is a request to output a LOCKN signal, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that, as described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to create a startup screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the period of displaying on the display device 1600 or during the period of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration using the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, it is a signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)." Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and an abnormality occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to force the output, the LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the information, it is possible to check whether the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND request paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminals and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, and the voltage is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminals and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this LVDS input. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating that it will operate normally, and on the other hand, when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating that it will power down. It is a terminal for transmitting information. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V power line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal uses a rising edge to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This is a terminal for specifying either the case where the logic changes from LOW to HI or the falling edge (the logic changes from HI to LOW). The falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal is used to instruct whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal), which will be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, no output will be possible.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and when both are grounded, the operation mode can be selected. The operation modes include normal mode and shakehand mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In the normal operating mode, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. For some reason, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, and the error occurs. If it is difficult to draw data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510 to control the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. Output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d connects to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the performance display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is used between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to send a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D0 to D5 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D6 to D11 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D12 to D17 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected and are connected to the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, we will explain the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout that is sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and then we will explain the various commands that are sent from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and the commands that the main control board receives. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1) drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to dispense the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322, which are storage trays. If the machine that pays out game balls as rental balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), the main control board The prize ball commands sent from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H In command 1EH, 2 prize balls are specified, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as rental balls to storage trays such as an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to the gaming hall (hall), and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball rental machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(b), the payout control board 951 is Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to the , command 20H specifies 1 prize ball, command 21H specifies 2 prize balls, ..., command 2EH specifies the prize ball. Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Note that as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H specifies self-check. If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending a command, it can send command 30H and check whether an ACK signal is received. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display, and status. It is classified into Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
Special figure 1 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized performance start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized performance end, and state designation during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. Note that the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state, and a low probability time saving state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a state but not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal gaming state, low probability non-time-saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than that in the normal gaming state. By shortening the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and displaying them in a static manner in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery results, the normal lottery results by the regular lottery (described later) at a predetermined time can be changed. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, the period in which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 are opened and closed is made longer than in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). A state where it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state) , by increasing the number of decisions as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces, by lengthening the period of opening and closing of the pair of movable pieces, the second starting port 2004 This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls is increased.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The performance end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This command is composed of commands named "Start special pattern 2 synchronized performance," Specify special pattern 2, and End special pattern 2 synchronized performance regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized production start command instructs to start the special pattern synchronized production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 2 synchronized performance end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 89, categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth opening display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small win opening. , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th opening jackpot opening command command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting slot unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The big winning hole 1 closing display command is used to indicate when the big winning hole 2005 is opening or starting to open for the Nth round. The winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the grand winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (as shown in FIG. 69). The jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for telling the jackpot number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. This is an instruction to display symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command is for instructing the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is for instructing the opening of the small win. The small win count display command is used to instruct the small win medium/large prize opening winning presentation (when a game ball entering the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning). The small winning ending command instructs the start of the small winning ending.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th time display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the jackpot 1 is opened (starting port unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (starting closing of the grand prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The big winning hole 1 count display command is used when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005) is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) will be sent to.

In addition, the small win opening command is sent at the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is sent when the small win is opened (when the large win opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning), The small win count display command is sent when a small hit, medium or large prize opening is won (when the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is sent. , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named state at power-on and main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ), information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state mentioned above. , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is used to determine which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which this occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovered from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Regarding the device 1402, it is composed of commands named ``Star of ``Common pattern synchronization effect,'' ``Specification of common pattern, ``End of ``Common pattern synchronization effect,'''' and ``Specification of state during fluctuation.'' These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization performance start command instructs to start the general pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization performance end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization performance, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a time-saving state that is a low probability state, and a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is a time-saving state. state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common symbol synchronization performance start command is sent at the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the common symbol designation command is sent immediately after the beginning of the common symbol synchronization performance, and the common symbol synchronization performance end command is sent. , is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric effect related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named winning opening, general power open display, and general power opening ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power open display command is for starting the normal power opening (when the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107). state or when to expand), and the ending command per general map instructs the start of the ending per general map.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of the normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (a pair of movable pieces move left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). (when expanding in the direction), and the normal map ending command is transmitted when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 even though there is no jackpot (even though it is not a jackpot). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification), the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical It instructs to start connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, sent to the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. 4005, etc., to start displaying a disconnection/short circuit abnormality. This command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when this occurs.

Further, the door open command is executed when the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is in an open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door frame close command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. This command instructs the door open notification to end when the door is open. On the other hand, the main body frame release command is executed when the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame release switch 619 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the open state, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command causes the main body frame 4 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is in the closed state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during a jackpot (when the conditional device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the dispensing control board 951 when sending a command to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door is detected to be open (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is sent when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when body frame closure is detected (when the body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display classification consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed explanations of these will be described later. . In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. In addition to setting the status, the received command is also set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7*H" as additional information to these received commands. This formats the command into a command with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when power is restored. , and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned "8*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). This is used to inspect various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is sent at times other than RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the power is restored from a power outage or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the power-on processing on the main control side, which will be described later, is performed. The test command is executed and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 90, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the shortening working state to the variable shortening non-working state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is, 0 to 4 special symbols 1 are reserved (game balls enter the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls held), and the special symbol 2 memory command is to notify the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol memory command is for normal symbols 1 pending 0 to 4. This is to convey the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and which have not yet been used to display fluctuating normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 (pending number). Yes, the special symbol 1 memory pre-read production command pre-reads and makes the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command is used to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that notifies a preview of the display result on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the function display unit 1400. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance which pre-reads and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation before the special symbol is used for variable display on the device 1405.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is , in the case of "high probability N times", the special symbol 1 memory command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the failure stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times has been consumed, and the special symbol 1 memory command is used to change the number of balls on hold when special symbol 1 is activated. (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used in the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is used to display a variable special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of reservations decreases. , the special symbol 2 memory command is executed when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol). When there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the normal symbol 1 is activated (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is used for display). In a state where there is a pending number that has not yet been used for the normal symbol fluctuation display on the display 1402, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the normal symbol display 1402 The special symbol 1 memorization pre-reading production command is sent when the number of reserved balls decreases when the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading production command is sent when the special symbol 2 activates and the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). sent when the number increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002), When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit a sound to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, some other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the player by sound from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 that the main control board 1310 receives will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of frame state 2.

Frame status 1 commands (equivalent to error occurrence commands) include out of bulb, full, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected. If the bulb is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) when there are 50 or more in stock, and the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) when there is a connection error. Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and if CR is not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. In bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, B5 is set to a value of 1, B6 is set to a value of 0, and B7 is set to a value of 0.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) includes ball gumming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In ball gumming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "dispensing detection sensor error" indicates whether a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to retry operations. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command includes a ball being removed, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) when the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed. is sent when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process which will be described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include random numbers for jackpot determination, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, and random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state does not occur. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination and fluctuations for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot symbol. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for the symbol, which is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small win game state. Random numbers for small winning symbols used to determine small winning symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are prepared for use in determining initial values of the random numbers for small winning symbols. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and a random number used to determine the initial value of this normal symbol hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination, a random number for a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. for use in determining a fluctuating display pattern of a normal symbol fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Provided.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. retrieves the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. The system is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is set in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used if the ID code is stored in the memory, and the ID code is saved by executing initial value derivation processing when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above is taken to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage occurs at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af starts up and starts measuring time, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. This power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltages between +24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltages between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage does not occur, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be canceled until the latched state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electricity clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done. The determination as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power outage warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, and sent to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the logic LOW input state to its preset terminal PR terminal, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depends on whether or not. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it does not instruct to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program is capable of executing a RAM clearing process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. state (gaming control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to the value 1 when the game information is to be deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not to be deleted. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot I am waiting until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM for when the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing gaming information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program erases all of the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM and erases gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. If the process has not ended normally, a fixed numerical value range of a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from , and set this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining normal symbol hit described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation settings for the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a is used to update, by hardware, a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined random number circuit is generated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predefined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and when this latch signal is input, the main control The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program executes an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when main processing on the main control side has started. This will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt (normal operation control means). As described above, based on the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error release navigation command for a predetermined period of time from power-on as described above. The RAM clearing process is triggered by the input (gaming control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( (game control side normal operation control means), and is treated as a release switch for canceling error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation section), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred regarding the payout operation, is used instead as a game storage section for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game It is designed to function as an operation section for canceling errors that occur in relation to the action of putting out a ball.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is as shown in FIG. , the drive signal being output to the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is used to charge the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is restored. The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs and the pachinko island equipment is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Start counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts up (boots), and immediately before the waiting time reaches that waiting time. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7ms, step S42 The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that even if the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall clerk, etc., and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of the hall clerk's intention to clear the RAM. ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and to prevent variations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off processing consisting of the processing from step S58 to step S68 and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value stored in the checksum calculation in step S64). Therefore, there is no need to initialize the gaming information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM using the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing the power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Fig. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing in step S22 Immediately following step 24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating this determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. By not being able to start time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by preventing the control flow from proceeding to the control flow in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. This system was adopted. In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment, there is a part that is covered by software so that the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and a part that is covered by the main control side power supply. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) are divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware to ensure that the timeout process is completed and the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game information) from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, information indicating that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to transmit the message, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, if the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. A problem in the case where the command to be sent at power-on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not reserved in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is restored, so that the attacker When the solenoid 2108 starts to be driven, the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to the open state.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round of the jackpot game state it is in at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing the big prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the peripheral control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting it to the board 1510, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and closes the jackpot 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to transition from the state to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. becomes.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded). When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that informs the player in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 updates the work area of the RAM with built-in main control in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the settings, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven. The movable piece transitions from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it expands in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and returned, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen at all on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform that the player is present. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Despite this, when the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (in other words, a screen indicating what round it is). ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but in a jackpot game state, when the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that conveys a message to the player (for example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.'') It is possible to display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is placed into the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored. When the main control board 1310 returns, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction (for example, a message saying "The movable pieces are expanded") is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that tells the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start opening." can be displayed to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. will be stored in the state. As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, first a power-on state command is transmitted, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on state command is executed as shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. (including when the power is restored), the state is restored in any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state). It consists of information that instructs whether to play the pachinko machine, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is determined when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), and what kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which the state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a limited number of changes in special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) is such that a probability change occurs when the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist.
Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line. Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the symbols and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the payout control board 951 also sends various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payer has been received normally is input, time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 is detected. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 which detects fraudulent activity using a magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. It is stored in the input information storage area as . In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 classified into others is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. , and the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 4020,4020 which detects the game ball which entered the general winning a prize hole 2001,2201, and the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which entered the big winning a prize hole 2005 A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003 are read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ), each is read again a second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the first to third readings, and one for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to eliminate the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since false detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 are Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot symbols and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the jackpot symbol and the random number for the small prize symbol are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters count up only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and the prize balls are paid out as prize balls. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored as output information in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951. Or, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A self-check command is created and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, the exceeding number of balls will be added to the number of balls that will be played next time. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. When the number of balls has reached that point, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program includes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, the main control program stores information to notify the payout control board 951 to that effect in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in area. In addition, the main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized by status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clearing). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM. (to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), and to update the random number for jackpot symbols.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination as to whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 31,768. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the When determining whether or not the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the ROM matches the jackpot judgment value, a random number for jackpot judgment (that is, a random number obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) is used. This is done depending on whether or not it is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. do. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot gaming state is entered, various commands classified into jackpot related as shown in FIG. A closing display command, a jackpot opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a is set so that the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 is lit, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information. In some cases, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set to indicate whether or not a fluctuation has occurred in a predetermined color, and the output is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It looks like this. For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, if gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of gate information storage, respectively, and the second section of gate information storage and the third section of gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is stored so that the total number of stored gate information is reserved and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and from this read gate information, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces expands in the left and right direction, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It's in a gaming state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as the transmission information. In addition to storing it in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-mentioned output information is set. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role performance shown in FIG. is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece, and stores it in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit judgment taken out does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is performed based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. Decide on the display pattern, create various commands related to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, this main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been successfully received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. When in the jackpot game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc., are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, created in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine, and various commands categorized as related to special figure 2 synchronized production. Commands, various commands related to jackpots (for example, big winning based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected. 90 Various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) and various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear), as shown in Navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands, to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order as main serial data. As described above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is possible to transfer the data to the register 41aea and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data. When the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main cycle serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a status command at power-on, and then status, which constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on, The mode and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information and is stored in accordance with this game information in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310 in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status commands and power-on main status commands classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, the power-on state command is generated as main cycle serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on. The effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing this state and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command at power-on and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be created. Only the following information is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the power-on status command is configured as main cycle serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control section power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the production control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the commands shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 from the main control board 1310. , it becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands related to control of game performance and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ), and also compare the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. The performance backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms), and the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1ms), are compared, and the compared content is When they match, the production backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr), with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms), is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) to perform a hot start, but if the compared content does not match (i.e. , when there is a mismatch), a value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the performance backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is ) to perform a hot start, and if the compared contents do not match (in other words, they do not match), the value is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to zero-clear it. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. This includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When lighting, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness is adjusted to the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on the light. In addition, in the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. This is no longer done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent this from happening.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used for peripheral control, which will be described later, to be executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Furthermore, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK to send 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Start transmitting data one bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port is The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port, the lamp drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and Transmission of 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the panel side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Also here, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 1511cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sends the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the first address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial number via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port's transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to transfer the data of the transmission buffer register written to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data 1 bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is sent one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and then transfers and writes to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data in the transmitting buffer register is transferred to the transmitting shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte of data in the transmitting shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is Continuous transmission is performed using the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It will be decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the changes.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. Output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the multiple LEDs and the multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the sound data output processing described later. The system is designed to prioritize the synchronization of music, sound effects, etc., and synchronization.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When this audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data on the right side is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method that has a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with plus and minus signals. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and announcement sounds are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, which screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the first light emission data is selected for the light emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate the mode.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music, sound effects, etc., and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are specified. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the first one of the sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used is to instruct other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program uses information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analysis means). The production control program generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emitting mode generation, and sound based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the performance control program is configured such that the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, the number of pending normal symbols, etc. Normal symbol memory command to identify (0 to 4 pieces), symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization performance, symbol memory command output when the starting pending number changes, large winning opening 2005 The big winning hole 1 count display command (big winning hole count command) that is output every time a game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, (command analysis means) and recognizes the current gaming state. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, this production control program executes a command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing such as a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , the production control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Fig. 89, various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and various commands classified as power-on. various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , the door frame close command, the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancellation command), and the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as other.

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 sends screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set to the abnormality display mode for executing abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, the production control program classifies the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side A visual warning is given to the outside using the effect display device 1600 (the effect device), a door frame side effect display device 460 (the effect device), and a lamp (the effect device), and an auditory warning is given to the outside using the speaker ( error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hours, minutes, and seconds, which are the time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and the calendar information, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, is updated based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Game board side light emitting data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side effect display device. 1600 and one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source to output the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated, and the volume adjustment volume is The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into 7 parts and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and board volume 0 to board volume 6 are set to muffling. The volume is set so that the volume increases toward volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound source built in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is used to program the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, sound effects, and other performance sounds will be low. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr) are a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac stores the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank0 (1fr). ), all of the content stored at the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is sequentially copied one byte at a time, starting from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1fr) in order from the first address.

In addition, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac transfers the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as the performance backup information (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), all of the content stored at the end address of 1511 db is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), successively backup a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the second backup area 1511dc). Copy everything in order starting from the first address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 in step S1008, the steps from step S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 95 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady state processing is forcibly canceled midway through and starts execution from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the input processing (peripheral control steady state processing), the completion of the peripheral control steady state processing is indicated by the peripheral control V blank in this routine. By transmitting the signal to the signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not the process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes about 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electrical drive source schedule data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is first read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set it in the motor transmission data storage area 1511caf on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data bit by bit.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger every time a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transmission interrupt request occurs (in this embodiment, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, starts transmitting 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and transfers the data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Continuous transmission is performed using the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When this serial I/O port serial transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and solenoid is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 73 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it at the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the gaming board side. Start transmitting byte data one bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, interrupts the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port) whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port occurs. The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Transmission of one byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the occurrence state of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device 460 drawing status can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah are included in Bank0 (1ms) which is the backup target. , and the effect information (1ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1ms) around Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ), all of the contents stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb are sequentially copied one byte at a time starting from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1ms) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1ms) in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the main control board 1310 starts transmitting various commands as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is loaded into the reception buffer using the serial I/O port for the board, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral One byte of information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of main cycle serial data, and the third byte of main cycle serial data. If the sum values are not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value of the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the total (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216), and this routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are the received command storage area. 1511cac is stored in the peripheral control section reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and it stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the status allocated as the second byte of the received main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period has exceeded the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is continued as is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal is executed when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. Interrupt processing will be explained. When this peripheral control section power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If it is determined that no power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input, this routine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input, this routine ends, while the power outage warning signal is input. If a signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off, etc. in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for only a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) the received command is stored.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in a predetermined byte (e.g. , 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify to copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) is contiguous by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Then, all the received command storage areas included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The received command storage area is sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then the peripheral control MPU core The peripheral control DMA controller 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a specified value. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially copied starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again and it is determined whether the power outage warning signal is being input. In other words, it continues to be determined indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if the determination in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that peripheral control is performed immediately before the power outage occurs. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is now interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made because when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal data). This data is used to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the most significant bits B7←B6, B6← B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal read out in step S1500 is The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that this is the case, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation judgment value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and then exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 151 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d prepared for the event and the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the presentation display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by the value 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the instant or immediately before the power outage.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative count of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is interrupted when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the current state is in the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and is not reset when the power is restored. At times, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is restored to the value of the moment or immediately before a power outage.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, which is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether or not screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). This determination is used to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation in the scheduler update process. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so while it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the screen generation schedule When the performance has been completed in accordance with the data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. Note that this determination includes the period during which the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It is possible to judge whether or not it is the current period based on the schedule data for screen generation, and display the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period when the player is waiting for a customer and a demonstration is being performed using the game board-side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. When the period is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration (when it is simply in a state of waiting for a customer), This routine ends immediately.

In step S1540, when the performance is progressing in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine is terminated, while in step S1540, the production is progressing in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. When the effect has been completed and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to Counts up the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then the While the routine ends, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even 1. If so, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the transmitter This flag indicates whether or not there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.The value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to The transmitter IC1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for door frame side performance. This is to restore the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the communication error display process is performed. (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs processing to draw on. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal. As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing the process of displaying on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper pan-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker etc. installed in the door frame 3. Perform flowing processing. At this time, a process may be performed in which all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are turned on.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by part steady processing, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 through the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting hole 2004 becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 will be from 1 round to 15 rounds. There will be a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and each time one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that a left decorative pattern is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a central decorative pattern is displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right side decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined period of time, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side of the area to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative symbols rotate from the upper center side of the display area to the lower center side of the display area, and the right side decorative symbols rotate from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side of the display area. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they were floating, and the left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern. The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably and then stops on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern, which are started to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects a first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery results, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command to display the game board side shown in FIG. 8 as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to instruct which screen data to output to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source.In other words, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, the screen data is updated in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. Since the production is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is not started. Until the stop display is displayed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in this connection recovery process causes the routine to be forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is kept in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 from when the left side decorative symbols, the center decorative symbols, and the right side decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner until they are stopped and displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (in other words, between the transmitter and Even if the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and receiver The process for recovering the connection between A problem has occurred with the side LCD display.Please call a store employee.'' message is not displayed, indicating that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display.

When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative symbols, central decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols in a variable manner and stops displaying them (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process advances to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has been determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated and the communication check counter is When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1546, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, if a problem definitely occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1548, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver If there is a problem with the connection to ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, and if there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, so that between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred with the LCD display on the upper tray.Please call the store staff.'' The process is to display and notify the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner again. During the interval period until the start of the game, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are activated. A state in which a problem has occurred at least once in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be the same does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, thereby reducing the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing communication error display processing, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Processing is performed to display and notify the user of the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff."

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left side decorative pattern and the center decorative pattern , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the connection recovery process is repeated, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is disabled, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed again. During the interval period until the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 is activated, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is disabled. This is because the combination result of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is most interesting to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not a jackpot game state in which a jackpot is awarded will occur, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise and may not be correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the performance midway through and performing processing to restore the state to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 displays the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and By stopping and displaying the right side decorative pattern, the information most interesting to the player is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on, and the period when the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the customer waiting state. This is significantly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period of execution, the information is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the switching circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and sends the effect to the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the production display drive board 4450. A notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the LCD display on the upper tray. Please call the store staff.") is displayed on the game board side performance display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and also outputs a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Then, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the hall clerk etc. of this by executing a notification process. Hall clerks and the like can very easily check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before a player plays a game, and this check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, so it is used for door frame side production. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. In order to notify that the rendered drawing data is abnormal data, a LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to the door indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is to be started being transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can early discover a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the defect. It looks like this. Therefore, by discovering and resolving the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. If reception cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. It is now possible to display and notify users. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the malfunction to that effect. Since the player can notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk, etc. will be able to notify the pachinko machine 1 of the occurrence of the malfunction. You can begin work to resolve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and resolution of the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period). If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the side production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the state is in a state of A connection confirmation signal is sent to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , it is possible to continue outputting repeatedly. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game is not progressing, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450. If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is activated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. The door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the output continues to be repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. When the process starts again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d performs a predetermined process. It is possible to stop sending the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. It looks like this. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem-resolving signal, only during the period when the game starts and stops and is not progressing, it is possible to move in the direction of resolving the communication problem. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing and stops displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. While repeatedly outputting the connection confirmation signal only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the game progress is started again, the distortion of the performance (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (every time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) starts), it is possible to move the game toward resolution.

According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 controls the first starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, and the second starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, when a game ball is fired by a ball launcher 650 toward a game area 5a defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information regarding games even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information regarding payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 70. If the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, information regarding the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a gaming control microprocessor, and if the operation is performed within the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed, the RAM clear signal with built-in payout control is A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and the main control side power supply shown in FIG. 92 from the time of power-on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on), the error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. This system also has an error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding is outputted to the main control MPU 1310a which is the gaming control microprocessor, and the payout control unit is operated within the period from power-on to the power-on processing of the payout control unit, A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the dispensing device 830 An error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to cancel the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating one operation switch 954, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. This is a circuit into which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit into which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be explained. do.

Attempting to gain unfair profits by manipulating the flow of game balls as desired by, for example, bringing a magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) close to a game ball that has been hit into the gaming area of a game machine. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming activities and suppress them by means of light emitting means, audio warnings, etc., magnetic detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and performance will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as patterns, various background images, text, characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members that contribute to the performance (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, firstly, the first and second starting opening winning processes are performed. In this first and second starting hole winning processing, a judgment is made as to whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the starting hole, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, processing such as increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. It will be done.

When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, a fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of pendings is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (wins/losses, its type, etc.) is memorized, and then , updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern ( After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the stop display) and the stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, the changing process is executed. In this process during fluctuation, a timer monitors the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process, and based on the timeout, the special symbol is displayed in fluctuation on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. to stop. After this, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is not a jackpot (loss). , update the processing selection flag to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing are completed, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the conditional device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the gaming status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and also determines the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. This can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for jackpot variation, a variation pattern for losing reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that is performed when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the production display device 1600, after the reach production, the variation display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the jackpot symbol is finally fixed and stopped. The performance to be performed is executed. The missed reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is performed in which the fluctuating display of the symbols is finally discontinued and the symbols are displayed as fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is not determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. , an effect is performed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is developed in such a way that the symbols are finally stopped and displayed as fixed. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified whether the variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to generate such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 causes a fluctuating pattern of decorative symbols to appear on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, as well as changes effect displays related to expectations (backgrounds and pending images), Control is executed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the rear-down movable production unit 3100.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114).

Now, if the main control program moves to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the above-mentioned process as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a first jackpot determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring a second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R definite variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to create a 16R jackpot game state,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R guaranteed variable jackpot B", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) ) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times and controlled to an 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) in which the game is closed after opening is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, and it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for players. In this respect, in the left-handed game, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed game, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type). ), the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a jackpot, such as a 16-round long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained). , so that when the player is controlled to shift to the right-handed batting state, he can expect to win a larger amount of prize balls than when he is in the left-handed batting state.

In the jackpot control process, in order to start the opening control of the big winning hole 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of a conditional device, a process of resetting a variation counter described later, etc. are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot 2005 as described above, as shown in FIG. Execute each flag and time saving flag setting process.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on Probable Variable Jackpot, 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later. will be reset.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counting up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B). It is reset when starting a jackpot gaming state based on .

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the control is in a small win gaming state is set. Determine whether As a result, if the small winning execution flag is set, a small winning control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small winning control process, a process is performed in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the jackpot control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning hole 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, the time saving flag, etc. Each set process such as a number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination.

Further, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in a pending state is not lost (as long as the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be held continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right-handed hit) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state). Only the lottery (judgment process) for the two random numbers for jackpot determination can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, it is limited to those where the special pattern game (symbol variation) using the second special pattern (second special pattern) is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (first special pattern). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which game balls enter (pass) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. In step S5241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the first special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (judgment process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the first special figure side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the first special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required on the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect and the content of the effect (information regarding wins and losses for pre-read judgment, information regarding symbol types for pre-read judgment) information, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-read determination, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding storage area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the second special symbol side (a random number for second jackpot determination, a second random number for reach determination, a random number for second jackpot symbol). A random number (random number for second variable display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the second special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, a second special figure pre-reading process for executing a pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the second special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning/losing information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command is issued to instruct the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First pending number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). commands (second pending number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for jackpot determination corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read random number for jackpot determination, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. It is executed in response to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S5302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuating display pattern random number) are first-in first-out. Shift operation is performed in the manner of (First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d). Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol retention storage area a to second special symbol retention storage area d), and is responsive to the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers extracted are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Thereafter, as the process of step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the read first jackpot determination random number. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. Select a jackpot determination table (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and select The jackpot determination table is compared with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is determined for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) when the gaming state is low probability. (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high probability jackpot judgment table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a probability jackpot determination table. Then, in the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first jackpot judgment random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the first jackpot judgment random number of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating the loss (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the random number for jackpot determination (second random number for jackpot determination) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. In the referenced low-probability jackpot judgment table, 204 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot judgment random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the failure judgment value indicating that the winning probability is low (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number, 2040 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value, and 63496 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value. The first jackpot judgment random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second random numbers for determining a jackpot are associated with each other (probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately "1/32"). In addition, the jackpot judgment value (the jackpot judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be the same (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, the jackpot judgment value of at least one of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot judgment table with the random number for jackpot judgment read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and when it is judged that it is a jackpot (step S5315 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot judgment random number read above matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected jackpot judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the random number for jackpot determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (it is determined that it is a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game loses in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state, and the reach determination table when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. A reach determination table in a high probability time saving state used in the case of , and a reach determination table in a low probability state used when the gaming state is in a low probability state (low probability non time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating not reach. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the speed of game progress when in the time saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, it may be possible to avoid matching the reach judgment value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of random numbers for reach determination, including the same random number for reach determination as the random number for reach determination set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, are used to determine reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, there are five types of reach determination including the same random numbers for reach determination as those set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and in the low probability state. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are respectively associated so that the random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating that reaching is possible, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating not reaching. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as in the low probability non-time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319), and if it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach, and ends the process (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110(B), and selects the first jackpot symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the first special symbol side symbol determination table contains random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) for the judgment results (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). (Random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) are stored in a form that is associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the second special symbol side's symbol determination table has a random number for the second jackpot symbol ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) for a variable jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is said to be the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of the gaming balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The specific game/performance contents for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and performs a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, and in the high-probability time-saving state. 8R certain variable jackpot A controlled by the performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the big winning hole 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or wins the jackpot within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. 8R normal jackpot in which a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is shown in a low probability time shortening state.

3. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the big winning hole 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, a performance (success performance) regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) is performed. ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 16R surefire jackpot

4. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a performance (failure performance) regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) is performed. ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 8R certain strange jackpot B

5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that after the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, a special It is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the fluctuating display of symbols is used 100 times (or you win the jackpot within the period until it is used 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state, a specific character A 2R normal jackpot that is controlled to a performance mode in which a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which the player is defeated is performed, and a performance display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time shortening state.

In addition, in the left-handed hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, no game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed hitting state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 will not be displayed unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and jackpots related to the second special symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occur.

In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, only about 1000 game balls are paid out by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 8 times, In the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, if it is determined to be 8R definite variable jackpot A, the 8R definite variable jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R normal jackpot, the jackpot symbol is set to 8R normal jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop pattern setting process, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small win flag is set as a process in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the unique symbol stopping mode (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the losing symbol as the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then moves to step S5337. do.

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 to select the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, or out of reach). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changing the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol and are synchronously displayed in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, if the jackpot is won in a type other than the 2R normal jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any other symbol) is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the winning pattern is determined and a miss is specified, a miss symbol without reach is determined (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different). The stop symbols thus determined are displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning performance display (special display mode) to appear before the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot game After the start of the game, a performance display during the jackpot game appears.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is set. is set (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a reach is selected. (not shown) (step S5346), and if none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if the result is a normal loss (a result without performing the reach effect), when the result is a loss. A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of this, and variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process ends. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the variable time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will be carried out.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and jackpot symbol random numbers (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination result. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are compared with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out, and the fluctuating time information associated with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out is obtained from this table. Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, a determination process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, there is no chance of winning a small hit, so the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, the small prize is not won, but the small prize may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during reach in this example, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute and the random number for the variation display pattern. has been done. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The random numbers for the 18 types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low expectations for a jackpot will be executed, and the random numbers for 18 types of variable display patterns are for the high expectations for a jackpot. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be executed.

In addition, super reach performance (SP performance) has a higher jackpot expectation level than normal reach performance, and for players who desire the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, when the super reach performance is executed, the player who has a jackpot gaming state Expectations are increasing. In other words, this kind of super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot, and even if a loss is displayed in the end, the player's expectation level for the jackpot gaming state will decrease. You will be able to increase your However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise players' expectations for a jackpot game state, a highly anticipated preview performance that is a separate lottery from the fluctuating pattern appears during the period when the super reach performance is being executed. It is required to do (compound).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state A common variation time of 12 seconds is set for both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state, and when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is At the same time as prompting the player, time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol loses, each game ball that is hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) This prevents items from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing.

That is, the game ball hit right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate section 2003 while in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This creates a situation in which the balls can be received one after another in the second starting port 2004 (a time-saving state in which almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be executed one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around 1 in 32. It becomes possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted into the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol misses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 has extremely low fluctuation times in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) It is said that it can be set as short as 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is ended in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the firing interval of the game ball (0.6 seconds), so it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls fired at intervals are received one after another into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent these game balls from being ejected without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process ends at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

In addition, even though the variable timer has been subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer has not reached 0, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot gaming state (step S5387); The waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. At the time when the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation frequency counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5235 that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above. The state will now be executed.

Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R certain variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, a performance of a jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the process is in a low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is assumed that the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state is The function is stopped and a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time saving function is thus performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating to start the small win game state is set (step S5394), and the small win flag is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. At the time when the information is updated (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5236 that the small hit execution flag is set, and the small win control process (step S5240b) will be executed. A small winning game state is now executed. Incidentally, unlike when a jackpot is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small winning gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss and the first special symbol process is performed without performing any processing related to the jackpot or small win. At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the jackpot execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game will be started according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) begins to be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The fluctuation display of the normal symbols is performed such that the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", the movable piece becomes open and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S5407) that executes processing to enable control of

In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the above-mentioned normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value "4" or not.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. Processing will be carried out. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S5413, the above-mentioned normal random number and the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passing of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the time saving mode if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426). Step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), selects the normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the non-time-saving state ( Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table and the normal random number read out in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure hit determination table is used when the gaming state is time saving (high probability time saving state), and the normal figure winning determination table is used when the gaming state is non-time saving. (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal drawing has been won. The above-mentioned normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal figure indicating a loss does not coincide with the deviation judgment value. In this way, in the time saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the winning pattern is guaranteed, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball passes through the second starting port 2004. Acceptance is controlled. Rather than all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may be made to match the normal pattern winning determination value indicating that a winning pattern has been won.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time saving period, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning a normal ticket, so the movable piece 2106 is in the open state and the second starting port There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win the normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning is lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning probability. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, two seconds to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. It may also be possible to make it impossible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has hit (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won by the normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern winning as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern) The symbol is determined (step S5431), and on the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that the symbol is a miss, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol A normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (stop symbol of a normal symbol) (step S5432). Then, at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so as to proceed to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

While such control is performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and it is possible to execute a performance according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting winning has occurred, and when this situation exists, controls regarding the hold display and pre-reading effect according to the starting winning. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production symbol fluctuation start processing, production symbol fluctuation processing, production symbol fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , a jackpot game process, or a jackpot end performance process.

Waiting process to receive a fluctuation pattern designation command: Until a fluctuation pattern command related to a fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, a performance (demonstration performance, etc.) is performed when the symbols are not in a fluctuating state and control regarding jackpots is not being performed. While performing control, upon receiving a variation pattern command regarding a variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, preview production, etc.) during the pattern variation period are determined based on a variation pattern command, etc., and variation of decorative symbols is started based on the determined production contents. Control as follows. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during effect pattern variation. In addition, among the fluctuation patterns (production patterns), many of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at jackpot symbols" are prepared in the form of pairs with "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at losing symbols". By functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided as to whether a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear. Therefore, when explaining fluctuation patterns (performance patterns) below, when referring to "predetermined fluctuation patterns" or "specific fluctuation patterns," unless otherwise specified, "the pattern will stop at the jackpot symbol. It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol", and as a result of the production content progressing in the same manner. A turning point will be reached where either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear.

Processing during production symbol fluctuation: Performs control to start various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing at respective timings during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, changes the value of the process flag to the production symbol. Update to a value compatible with fluctuation stop processing.
Performance pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, control is performed to stop the fluctuation of decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stopped pattern). Then, if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a loss pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Update to the corresponding value.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the performance (display performance that notifies the performance display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot, etc.) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot pattern until the start of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot in-game processing.

Processing during the jackpot game: Controls various performances during the period when the jackpot game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end performance processing: In the performance display device 1600, the performance during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the change permissible state (such as a display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a production pattern (variation production). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines the production pattern (variation production) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and (Variation effect) Control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on the variation effect.

Note that the effect pattern (variable effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the above-mentioned variation pattern command. For example, multiple performance patterns (variable performances) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these performance patterns (variable performances) is determined based on the performance lottery, gaming situation, etc. You may also do so. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also allows a plurality of effect patterns to be associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Also, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the performance pattern (variable performance) in this way, performs a preview lottery (determination process for the preview performance) based on the jackpot determination result, symbol type, and fluctuation pattern. , by performing control (processing during performance pattern fluctuation) to make the preview performance won in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the performance pattern determined above (fluctuation performance) is performed, multiple performance contents can be displayed. As combinations are possible, the appearance of these symbols indicates the degree of expectation for the appearance of jackpot symbols.

Conventionally, among such complex effects, although they are the same specific preview effect (for example, timer effect), multiple effects may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. It is hoped that this will help maintain interest in gaming. However, since the preview effect can only be combined when there is a high expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally becomes low. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve gaming interest.

As will be described later, "timer performance" refers to a predetermined performance that appears during the execution of a performance pattern (variable performance), and a count display toward the timing when the predetermined performance is performed is set to a first predetermined value. (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) is started from the first predetermined value as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a performance (for example, a conversation preview or a cut-in A , B, etc.) is targeted for timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the case of a timer effect (particularly a timer effect on the preview side that is executed as a result of a preview lottery), the target effect of the effect is kept secret at least at the time the count display starts. It is desirable to do so. In addition, "timer performance target" refers to the timer performance that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value reaches a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count is displayed toward the timing at which the effect target occurs.

In addition, in the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, but as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice-side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the preview lottery, the above-mentioned effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer performance (variable timer performance) that is pre-installed as the performance content of the variable performance. In other words, in this case, if only the timer effect on the preview side executes the count effect display as ``the effect content of the preview effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation level with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command''. First, by executing the performance pattern itself as "the production content determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level can be changed from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It becomes possible to make a count effect display (timer effect) appear without wasting the increase in expectations (increasing the level of expectation by satisfying the condition of ``winning in a preview lottery''). For example, if the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variable pattern command appears is "20%", if the preview side timer performance is further executed, the jackpot expectation level will increase due to the function of the composite performance. For example, the frequency of appearance will be reduced to 40%, and the appearance frequency will have to be lowered accordingly.However, if a variable side timer effect is executed as the effect of the specific effect pattern itself, you can expect a jackpot. It is possible to execute a timer effect while keeping the frequency at "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level when a production pattern (variable production) appears in the judgment table T1 differs depending on the variation number (and production pattern), and basically, the jackpot expectation increases as the variation number becomes larger. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the production patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable-side timer production is executed in which "conversation preview" is the production target in all of the production patterns. The appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6) > fluctuation number 9 (10) > fluctuation number 17 (18), while the expectation of jackpot at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) < fluctuation number 9 ( 10)<Fluctuation number 17 (18). For convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the performance content of the performance pattern itself is This includes a performance pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer performance can be executed, and can appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the determination table T1, variation numbers 3 to 6 are all the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 5 and 6 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews. This differs from variation numbers 3 and 4 in this point. Also, variation numbers 7 to 14 are all the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 are variable side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 11 and 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. In 12, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in A as the effect target, and in variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation preview and cut-in A are executed, and at the same time, a variable side timer effect is executed with these as the effect target. They differ in that they can be In addition, variation numbers 15 to 22 are all the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 17 and 18 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 19 and 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed. In 20, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the effect, and in variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation preview and cut-in B are executed, and a variable side timer effect is executed with them as the effect. They differ in that they can be In addition, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the variable side timer effect is executed with cut-ins A and B as the effect than when the variable side timer effect is executed with the conversation preview as the effect. is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable-side timer effect is executed that targets both the conversation preview and cut-ins A and B.

Furthermore, "conversation preview" is a performance that can appear relatively early after the performance pattern (decorative pattern variation performance) is executed, and that often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (variation production of decorative symbols) is executed, and a relatively high level of expectation has been built up. This is a performance that often occurs (or a performance that always builds up a relatively high level of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation preview" is set so that its appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other productions with higher expectations (cut-ins A and B, character A actions, B, etc. described later). It has become something that will be done. Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable production is executed to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview production, whereas in SP reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the preview production is This is executed to correspond to cut-in B rather than cut-in A that appears as the production content of the production.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance pattern ) is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is of a "predetermined type (such as a shortening fluctuation or a normal reach performance with low expectations) (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6)", a count performance display as a timer performance on the preview side will be displayed. While ensuring that the performance is not won (by increasing the premium level) and suitably increasing the expectation level when the notice side timer performance appears, the fluctuation pattern is ``variation pattern that executes the fluctuation side timer performance ( If the pattern is a count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc., then the fluctuation pattern is of the predetermined type (for example, fluctuation The proportion corresponding to numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is executed, but 2 of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the variation patterns (which may be set individually) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and among these, four fluctuation patterns (variation Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the above predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the performance content of the variable pattern is one that can perform a count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is more effective than when the variable pattern is a variable pattern that does not perform a variable side timer effect. The rate at which it is determined that count performance display (notice side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the performance is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one performance pattern (variable performance) without unnecessarily increasing the level of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned preview side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the notification side timer effect is executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Note that even when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which allow the above-mentioned notice-side timer performance to appear with a high lottery probability, are executed, in reality, it is more likely to be a jackpot than a loss. It is said that the above-mentioned preview side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability with the winning effect pattern, and it is said that the variable number 22 can appear with an even higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display may be previewed depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The execution rate will be different as the performance content (notice side timer performance). Therefore, among the above count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the proportion of multiple count displays appearing within one production pattern (variation production) is high, that type In some cases, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, and therefore it is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the performance pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the performance content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer performance is included as the performance content. In the production patterns (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer effect does not occur within the execution period of the production pattern, compared to production patterns (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that do not include the variation-side timer production as the production content. The rate at which the effects appear (the rate at which it is decided to execute the preview-side timer effect in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, two timer performances (variable side timer performance, preview side timer performance) will appear within one performance pattern by simply requiring a high jackpot expectation level for one preview side timer performance to be won in the preview lottery. In turn, it becomes possible to realize the double timer performance opportunity without unnecessary increase in the expectation of jackpot.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case of a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "conversation notice" is the effect target and a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "cut-in" is the effect target. The count display formats (forms and colors of count numbers, etc.) are different. In other words, in this case, even if a performance pattern (for example, fluctuation number 9, 11) whose performance content is the same reach performance is executed, the count display mode of the fluctuation side timer performance (variation side count performance display) is checked. By doing this, in combination with the fact that the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern, it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to look forward to it.

Regarding the form of the count display that appears in the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), regardless of whether the target of the effect is the same (conversation preview, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side timer effect) It may be different (or different from at least one of them) than the count display mode (conversation preview, cut-in) that appears in the count production display), or it may be the same as the count display mode (or at least one of them). .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as a timer effect on the preview side (count effect display on the preview side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the display. This is useful in improving expectations by making the player aware that a preview-side timer performance with a high frequency is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspects of the preview side timer effect (notice side count effect display), multiple modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You can do it like this.

In addition, in order to better recognize that the preview side timer effect is being executed, it is necessary to display a count display when the preview side timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable side timer effect is executed. It is desirable to have different counting speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect starts, even during the period when the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is watched closely, and the timer effect is compared to the variable side timer effect, which has relatively low expectations. This makes it possible to create interest in which of the highly anticipated advance notice side timer performances is being executed, and to suitably maintain game interest during the timer expiration period.

At this time, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the target of the performance (conversation preview, cut-in), the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance ( If the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the preview side (conversation preview), it is possible to check whether the timer effect on the preview side is being executed or not. It becomes possible to add interest by varying the difficulty of judgment. In addition, in the variable side timer effect (or the notice side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the advance notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. The count may be displayed by displaying the information.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the preview side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that this will lead to an increase in interest in gaming.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count is displayed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer performance. A plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a variable pattern corresponding to the variable timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on the random number for the effect, and the count display of the variable timer effect and the preview side timer are displayed. By varying the ease with which the performance can be executed simultaneously with the count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the preview side timer performance is being executed can be varied. I try to make it more interesting by

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple performance patterns (target of timer performance and reach We decided to prepare multiple performance patterns (with the same production content), but with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required to complete all counts) (however, if the content is the same as that of the timer production), The type of performance to be performed and the type of ready-to-reach performance executed as the performance content of the variation pattern are the same for each performance pattern), but a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total count) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may be different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may differ. If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different between the side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. .

Additionally, while the timer effect on the preview side is executed with a countdown display, if the timer effect on the variable side is executed with a countup display, it can be determined with certainty whether or not the timer effect on the preview side is being executed. It is expected that this will greatly improve gaming enjoyment. In addition, while the preview side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation preview) is executed in a count-up display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable side timer effect for (cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed can be varied depending on the target of the effect, making it more interesting. It will be possible to grant.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases in which the same effect is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and cases in which different effects are targeted for effect. control. When the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (for example, a conversation preview), compared to when the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target different performances. In addition to setting it so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation level decreases is high, even if the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable side timer performance and the preview side timer performance, each count display The end timing is different.

In other words, in this case, even if the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (e.g., a conversation preview), one of the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance performs the predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different performance is being performed (the timer performance is executed in a manner with relatively high expectations). It appears as if After this, the other count display that was being continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is the target of the performance. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation preview with relatively low expectations is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the player will maintain a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, when the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the preview-side timer effect, the timing when the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the timing when the preview-side timer effect reaches the predetermined value. It is desirable that a separate display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "Counting succeeded!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer performance and a preview-side timer performance, each of which targets a "conversation preview" executed as a variation-side or preview-side performance, are made to appear within one performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the preview-side timer effect will be performed simultaneously, but in the variable-side timer effect, the variable-side timer effect will be displayed in conjunction with the "conversation preview". While the count display progresses in accordance with the fluctuation-side specific effects that occur (such as ``Count Success!'' or effects that match the appearance of conversation previews), the timer effects on the preview side are related to the ``conversation preview''. A count display is displayed in accordance with a specific trailer side effect that occurs as a preview side effect (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of a conversation preview (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect)). As the process progresses, separate displays corresponding to the end of counting will appear at different timings.

By the way, the conversation preview and cut-in performances are required to be executed whenever they are targeted for the variable side timer performance (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation previews and cut-ins are performances that can be executed in multiple ways with different expectations, so if they are targeted for a variable-side timer performance, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, Therefore, it is necessary to make it appear in a manner that is highly expected. Therefore, the performance that is the target of the variable-side timer performance is incorporated in advance as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance), and just by executing the performance pattern, the variable-side timer performance and its target are combined. It is desirable to allow each of the effects (modes with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect targeted for the effect (a mode with relatively high expectations) is always selected in the preview lottery. .

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not included in the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not they will appear as part of the preview side in the preview lottery described later. A determination is made as to what manner (relatively high or low expectation) the appearance should be made as part of the production content, and control regarding appearance is performed based on the result of this determination. .

The production pattern determination process using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, it first determines the current game based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to create a bias (expectation level) in the probability change expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, etc. become.

Next, multiple performance patterns (such as multiple performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance, etc.) are available for selection as the performance patterns associated with the variable number. If so, one of a plurality of production patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display is selected based on the jackpot determination. At this time, we will set a performance pattern so that the start timing or end timing of the count display will be delayed at a higher rate if the jackpot determination is won. It is made to have a tendency that the later the time is, the higher the possibility that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) are acquired when a special performance condition is satisfied. Even in this case, a performance pattern set so that a variable side timer performance does not appear is selected from among a plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern that appears during symbol variation (the production from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of variation) is selected in this way, what kind of preview production should be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (preliminary lottery).

[12. Sound control using automatic channel system]
By the way, in the already explained sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95), explanation regarding automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, was to be described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be explained next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

In a typical pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game, thereby trying to realize performances that attract the players' interest. For example, depending on the type of reach that is supposed to improve the player's expectations, there are some that output a variety of sounds and others that do not. In such general pachinko machines, each channel is assigned in advance to each sound that should be output in each scene, including each reach, and each such sound is assigned a corresponding default each channel. (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in general pachinko machines, even if there is an empty channel, the sound you are trying to play may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound you are trying to play may not be assigned to the empty channel. However, there was a problem in that it was difficult to realize a wide variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the pair of upper speakers 573 (audio While dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is If the maximum number of channels (16 channels is exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority order. (channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be outputted through each channel dynamically allocated within the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority order (sound output control means). . This will be explained in detail below.

[12-1. Sound control using fixed channel method]
FIGS. 119(A) and 119(B) each show an example of sound control using a fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment. FIG. 119(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In sound control using this fixed channel method, a total of 16 channels, for example, playback channel 00 to playback channel 15, are used, similar to sound control using an automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, which will be described later. Note that the illustrated "reproduction channel" is an abbreviation of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 119(B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In sound control using this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each playback channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, but one channel when outputting in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button press sound" are such that the sounds that have started playback must not be muted midway under any circumstances until the end of playback. As for the channel assignment method, the playback channel and the sound are exclusively assigned as a pair to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, for the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound that started playing is overwritten by another sound and muted during playback. As for the channel allocation method, I try to allocate them to the same channel so that the playback timings do not overlap as much as possible.

In sound control using a fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel that is currently being output, the sound that is currently being output is muted and the new sound is output. For sounds that would be problematic if overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, definitions of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, vertical pan initial value, volume initial value, note number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, its explanation will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker 573L, the lower left speaker 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", for example, the output is output from the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The difference in the volume of the individual outputs from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the left and right speakers 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that the signal is output only from the right speakers (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of the sound from the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R), for example. Represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes output from the upper and lower speakers individually, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and if it is set to, for example, "0x80", it indicates the difference in volume that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers in combination. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that output is only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within a setting range of, for example, "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to "LOOP" shown in the diagram), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponds to "1SHOT" shown in the diagram). It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, playback sound, and playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, shows the game state, and the game states are, in order, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stopped", "right symbol stopped", "middle symbol stopped", and "during jackpot". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (reproduction) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 122(A) shows an example of a production time chart, FIG. 122(B) shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. 122(C) shows an example of a channel playback time chart when trying to play each sound. This shows an example of a problem. In these FIGS. 122(A) to 122(C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 122(A), the game states are listed in order along the time axis (horizontal axis) as "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot". One example of this is that the game is controlled so that the game is "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 122(C), a new sound is added during the playback time of "first half notice A" (the If there is a winning sound), as shown in FIG. 119(B), the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half preview A", so the "first half preview A" is '' will be overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the ``first half preview A'' sound will stop (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 119(B), the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen preview". ” playback sound will be overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the “full screen preview” sound will stop (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control using automatic channel system]
Next, an example of sound control using the automatic channel method according to this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123(A) and 123(B) each show an example of sound control using the automatic channel method according to this embodiment.

FIG. 123(A) shows an example of a sound playback channel, and the sound control using the fixed channel described above is different from the sound control using the fixed channel when the channel classification as an attribute of the playback channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to "AUTOch" shown in the figure). The difference is that Here, when the channel classification is an automatic channel, it means that each playback channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled to be automatically assigned according to the rules described below (as described above). (equivalent to "sound control using automatic channel method").

In the sound control using the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, a total of 16 channels, for example, playback channel 00 to playback channel 15, are used, similar to the sound control using the fixed channel method described above. Note that the illustrated "reproduction channel" is an abbreviation of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 123(B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In this automatic channel system sound control, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority order. Now, to touch on the basic sound playback rules, as mentioned above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, but one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

Regarding the illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button press sound", the sound that has started playing must not be muted midway under any circumstances until the end of playback. On the other hand, for the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound that started playing is overwritten by another sound and muted during playback.

In sound control using the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning sounds to AUTO groups, it is possible to specify an identifier and priority for specifying a specific AUTO group in each AUTO group. When playing a new sound, if the sound is defined in an AUTO group, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately played back.

In the above case, if there is no vacant channel, the production control program searches all channels currently being played within the AUTO group based on the priority order of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel that has a lower priority or the same priority as the sound being played, the production control program ends the use of that AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not play the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being played or is not the same as the sound itself.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table for this automatic channel method, for each sound category and sound name, playback channel number, initial left/right pan value, initial vertical pan value, initial volume value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority order (also called "playback priority order") for specifying the AUTO group, initial left/right pan values, initial vertical pan values, initial volume value, and sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups each sound is played back. Furthermore, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be played with priority when each sound is played back at the same time. This priority order indicates that the higher the numerical value is, the more the sound should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value is, the sound that should be played with less priority. In this embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be played with priority is, for example, notification sounds with a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , Sound effects whose priority is "20" ("jackpot confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), BGM whose priority is "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and whose priority is "10". Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is said that As a result, when there is no free channel, for example, if you try to play a notification sound, there is no need to play it using a predetermined playback channel, and the sound with a lower priority (for example, the pending prize sound) ), the notification sound will be played with priority using the channel currently playing.

As already explained, the left/right pan initial value represents the initial sound image localization position of the sound from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker 573L, the lower left speaker 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left/right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output will be output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and if it is set to "0x80", for example, it will be output from the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L. The difference in volume that is individually output from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that the signal is output only from the right speakers (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the initial value of the vertical pan is, for example, the vertical panning value of the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). This represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound produced by the speakers. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes output individually from the upper and lower speakers, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . This initial value of vertical panning is managed as panning information. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and if it is set to, for example, "0x80", it indicates the difference in volume that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers in combination. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that output is only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF). ), you can ensure that playback will always be played at the default volume without being affected by changes in volume caused by operating one or more volume adjustment devices installed in the gaming machine. represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to "first half preview A sound effect", while "second half preview A sound effect" and "second half preview B effect" are set to "0". "1" is set for each "Sound". By using such seek points, it is possible to register sounds exceeding the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source.

The playback type setting is either loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponds to "1SHOT" in the diagram). It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, shows the game state, and the game states are, in order, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stopped", "right symbol stopped", "middle symbol stopped", and "during jackpot". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (reproduction) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 126(A) shows an example of a production time chart, and FIG. 126(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIGS. 126(A) and 126(B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126(A), the game states are sequentially arranged along the time axis (horizontal axis): "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and " One example of this is that the game is controlled so that the player wins the jackpot.

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. 126(B), for example, the sound of "normal BGM playback" is played from beginning to end on playback channels 00 to 01 ( (equivalent to range A). Here, if you try to play the pending winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting winning prize (corresponding to the "pending winning" shown in the figure), playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , this held winning sound can be played back using playback channels 12 to 13, so none of the sounds being played are overwritten by the held winning sound (corresponding to "holding music playback" shown in the figure), and other The output of all types of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as part of it, for example, the sound of "reach BGM playback" is played from beginning to end on playback channels 00 to 01, as shown in FIG. 126(B). (equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if you try to play the pending winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting winning (corresponding to the "pending winning" shown in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , all other types of sounds continue to be output without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the held winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound reproduction" shown in the figure).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), for example, a notification (corresponding to "Notification 2 occurrence" in the figure) has occurred, so a new sound has the highest priority of "25", which is the notification sound ( When attempting to reproduce the program (corresponding to "Notification 2" shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 126(B). Therefore, a search is made for the sound with the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing, and reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as channels that are reproducing the pending winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these playback channels 04 to 05, the pending winning sound is played as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be played next (corresponding to "Notification sound 2" in the figure) is Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the pending winning sound, the holding winning sound being played in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, requested sound number, currently playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority during automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control for each channel. It includes a pan control work and a pan control work, and has each piece of information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be reproduced if "-1" indicates a stop, and if it is other than "-1". As for the sound number being played, "-1" indicates a stop, and anything other than "-1" indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played.

If the automatic assignment group is set to "0", the channels will be fixedly assigned, while if it is set to "1~", the channels will be automatically assigned (see "Sound control using automatic channel method", which will be described later). ). Here, the automatic allocation group is, for example, "1" indicating AUTO group 1, and "2" indicating AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when performing sound control using the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from registration indicates the elapsed time from the time when the desired playback sound was registered, with the time when the desired playback sound was registered as "0". Furthermore, if you try to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played, the elapsed time from the registration will be calculated based on the time that has passed since the registration. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been playing for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and up and down pan settings.

Figure 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel This figure shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only the sound. This sound definition table manages the definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial values, vertical pan initial values, volume initial values, note number, seek point, playback type settings, and output type settings for each sound name. are doing. Note that here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and descriptions of the definitions of other notification sounds, performance sounds, etc. are omitted. Regarding the effect sound, in addition to the definition using the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition using the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 is applied to each channel other than channel It is also possible to use

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X and output when each of the notification sounds satisfies the output conditions. A high notification sound will be assigned to channel X and output, regardless of the allocation status to channel X of a notification sound with a low priority value. As will be explained later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and the notification sound assigned to channel It will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker 573L, the lower left speaker 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", for example, the output is output from the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The difference in volume that is individually output from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of 921L, upper right speaker 573R, and lower right speaker 921R becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that the signal is output only from the right speakers (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of the sound from the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R), for example. Represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes output from the upper and lower speakers individually, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and if it is set to, for example, "0x80", it indicates the difference in volume that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers in combination. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that output is only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within a setting range of, for example, "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponds to "1SHOT" in the diagram). It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 129 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound, the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending the notification (cancellation condition) for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for each notification sound, but this is done by dividing this into as many empty channels as possible in order to effectively utilize the single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 129, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism has been detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out). It informs you of something. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"). ) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time of detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "returning the power" is met. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that cheating by cheating is occurring). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) notifies that the state is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the jackpot gaming state (big winning opening state). A notification sound that notifies you that a state has been detected (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out to forcibly open the closed grand prize opening and win a game ball) by the winning opening sensor). 3 (big prize abnormality) is considered to belong to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo vibration detected", and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is executed as the notification time. The loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps. The lighting will continue until the cancellation condition of "returning the power supply" is met. In addition, for notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo big prize abnormality has been detected", and a Display (for example, "Great prize abnormality detected") and lighting of various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and as a notification time, The loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects the notification sound. The display and lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "powering on again" is met.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group with respect to the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting mode is the same for notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, notification sounds such as "boo-boo" that play a role in notifying that something belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) A combination of the alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify individual identification of the content of the notification by sequential output is adopted. Alarm sounds consist of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning in tense fraudulent situations, and message sounds consist of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish them from other notification sounds. It is desirable that the

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a situation in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, it is important to determine how the hall should respond to the fraud. It is important to speed up the initial response. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) are output, and only those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts) are output. It is expected that this will speed up the hall's initial response to fraudulent acts. Furthermore, following the notification sound of "boo-boo", a message sound notifying the type of notification is output, and a message is displayed within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, it is expected that the hall side will be able to handle the initial response smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is generated when the door frame release switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (possibility of fraudulent activity by opening the door). This is to notify that the door may have been opened due to abnormality response measures taken by the hall. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open. '') and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Door is open ping pong ping pong". ), whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled when the release condition is ``door closing detection (door frame release switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to Detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is continued until the condition ``detection that the door frame 3 is closed'' is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out by opening the main body frame, there is also a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to abnormal response measures taken by the hall side. , it is considered to belong to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 5 (frame open), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Frame is open ping pong ping pong", and a display ( For example, "The frame is open") and various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are lit, and at the same time, the main body frame open switch is activated as a notification time. 619, the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times). The lighting of the various lamps continues until the release condition "frame closure detection (detection of the main body frame 4 being closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It happens.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting modes are the same for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, there are message sounds (unique sounds) that play the role of announcing individual identification regarding the content of the notification, and those belonging to the second notification group (fraudulent activity). A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping pong ping pong", which plays the role of notifying that a state in which there is a moderate possibility that a There is.

In other words, when notifying players who belong to the second notification group (states where there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been committed), it is important to ensure that players who are playing the game properly do not feel disgusted. It is important that the hall side be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities fairly quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as the notification sound, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play the game properly will be less likely to feel disgusted by it. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing the game properly to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" is used after the message sound, although the sound is different from that for those who belong to the first notification group. In order to make it difficult for players who are playing the game properly to feel disgusted, the lighting mode is different from that when they belong to the first notification group, but it is output when they belong to the third notification group. By providing notification by lighting various lamps that do not occur, it is expected that the abnormality response measures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance) indicates that the game ball hits the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. The gate sensor 4003 detects that the gate has passed (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected to be played in a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hitting," and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed hitting." ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as for the notification time, both the loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" and the display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects the detection.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance), the state in which the lower tray 322 is detected to be full with game balls by the full tank detection sensor 279 (lower tray 322 is in a state in which the ball should be removed), a notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is provided to provide game guidance for properly proceeding with the game, although the possibility of cheating is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when the device is in the desired state, and the notification mode, notification time, and release condition for all notification sounds belonging to the third notification group should be set to be the same. It is said that

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray", and a Display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed, and a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as a notification time, and a game board. The display within the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is configured to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time of detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), when the gate sensor 4003 and the full tank detection sensor 279 have finished detecting it, the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more precisely, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, 5 seconds of silence is output. Data is assigned to channel It has become. Since notification sounds 6 and 7 both output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first notification group and the second notification group. The hall side can also properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group by simply checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare it in advance as one piece of sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent parts in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound), but these are very short periods to create a "pause". It is clear that it is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

According to this configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong-ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period in between. It becomes possible to provide information regarding game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the priority order is set to be the same for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group, but the priority order is set to be different for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group. You can do it like this. In addition, as the playback type setting, loop playback in which the target sound is played repeatedly is adopted, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and 1-SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, "booboo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping pong ping pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are sounds that are related to message sounds. You may prepare separate sound data for each notification sound, or prepare sound data separate from the message sound, and create sound data that combines the message sound and alarm sound when outputting. You may also assign it to a channel after that.

FIG. 130(a) shows the process when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. An example of this is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tα1 when no notification sound is output, the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that there has been magnetic detection. Next, information indicating that there has been magnetic detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that there has been magnetic detection based on the updated state of the notification flag is outputted to the outside and managed within the hall computer, and at the same time In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tα1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, information on magnetic detection is obtained. When it is determined that the channel X contains the following information, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to channel X and the notification mode is set. (Here, a loop of "boo-boo magnetism detected") starts playing the notification sound, and sets a timer (60 seconds) to measure the notification time of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality).

In addition, when assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel This will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts schedule data for generating a screen according to the magnetic detection and schedule data for generating a light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting this in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The display on the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp continue until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism has been detected") is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds. ”) and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) are respectively executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(a), at timing tα2, when 60 seconds have not elapsed since timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is being played in a loop, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that vibration has been detected, as in the case of timing tα1 when magnetic detection was detected. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is outputted to the outside and managed within the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that vibration detection information is included, notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do anything. In other words, since notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), which has the same priority, is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) on the side that is already in the assigned state is performed preferentially and is continued.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself in response to vibration detection at timing tα2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) will not be processed in a state where it is not assigned to channel X.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds ), set this, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not expired when the output state (playback state) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound corresponding to vibration detection will be set. Set the generation schedule data, assign notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to channel It is used to perform playback.

In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the schedule data for generating a sound according to the vibration detection at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), the schedule data for generating a screen according to the vibration detection and the schedule data for generating the screen according to the vibration detection are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned LCD display and lamp For lighting, I try to execute these steps.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. For lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to vibration detection is set, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to magnetic detection has already been set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating light emission mode according to magnetic detection, which has already been set, will be reflected in each type of lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating light emission mode according to vibration detection will be reflected in each type of lamp emission. They are not reflected by lamp light emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data in response to vibration detection may not be set at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, the schedule data for generating a light emission mode according to magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating a light emission mode according to vibration detection have the same data content, so any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, there will be no change in lamp lighting.

After this, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having timed up, a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is repeated. The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. In addition, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set to 10 seconds. At the uploaded timing tα3, the loop processing is terminated at the perfect timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times.

Also, at this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) has not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection, and the remaining By allocating notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to channel Detected" loop) will play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is set at timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation in response to vibration detection is not set and is set at timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound "Boo-boo vibration detected" can be played from the head, and when the timer for notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, "Boo-boo vibration detected" can be played from the head. It is now possible to prompt the user to end the loop process and stop playing the notification sound at a halfway point (for example, at the timing of a "boo-boo-shake" sound).

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played, 130(a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here: "boo-boo") and the sixth message sound (here: "Magnetism detected") have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here: "Magnetism detected") has finished playing. Now it is possible to achieve a smooth notification sound change, as if a "boo-boo" was being played. As a result, "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" and "Boo-boo, vibration has been detected" may be connected in an odd place, resulting in a situation in which a false alarm cannot be recognized in a tense situation (for example, If notification sound 1 ends with "booboo, magnetic" and notification sound 2 starts with "motion has been detected," it may be a meaningless notification such as "booboo, magnetic movement has been detected." This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of problems (which could cause confusion at the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is short, and the notification sound 2 times out and ends at the "boo-boo" alarm sound, and the message sound is emitted. Even if it is not regenerated, it is possible to recognize that some kind of anomaly detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a premature timing and it is no longer replayed (if only a magnetic anomaly is detected). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a sharp point). As a result, when the notification sound stops halfway, you will be prompted to check the LCD display, and the LCD display will display "Magnetism detected" and "Vibration detected" respectively. By being displayed, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that magnetic detection and vibration detection are being performed.

FIG. 130(b) shows the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. An example of this is shown below.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played is shown in FIG. ) described above (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is met while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played) ) is roughly the same as

For example, as shown in FIG. 130(b), at timing tβ1 when no notification sound is currently being output, frame opening is detected by the main body frame opening switch 619 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that frame opening has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is outputted to the outside and managed within the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is provided for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, the frame open detection is detected. When it is determined that information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 5 (frame open) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to channel In addition to starting the playback of the notification sound in the mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping pong ping pong"), a timer (30 seconds) is set to measure the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open). .

In addition, when assigning notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel This will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel It becomes like this.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers schedule data for screen generation in response to frame open detection and schedule data for light emission mode generation in response to frame open detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting the data and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continued until frame closing detection, which is a condition for canceling frame open detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "The frame is open, Ping Pong Ping Pong" is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "The frame is open. "Open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are respectively executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(b), at timing tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since timing tβ1 and the notification sound “Frame is open, ping pong ping pong” is being played in a loop, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects a door opening in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of timing tβ1 when the frame opening was detected. Next, information indicating that door opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that door opening has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is outputted to the outside and managed within the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (playback state). As a result, even if it is found that the door open detection information is included, the notification sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. 129 is not sent to channel I will not assign it. In other words, since notification sound 5 (frame open), which has the same priority, is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that is already in the allocated state is performed preferentially and continues.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself in response to door opening detection at timing tβ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to notification sound 4 (door open) will not be processed in a state where it is not assigned to channel X.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (30 seconds ) is set, and if the timer (30 seconds) has not expired when the output state (playback state) of notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, the timer (30 seconds) will respond to door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, assign notification sound 4 (door open) to channel It is designed to play the notification sound.

In addition, at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the schedule data for generating a sound according to the detection of the door opening, but the schedule data for generating the screen according to the detection of the opening of the door, and By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode in response to door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door appears separately in a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. For lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to door open detection is set, the schedule data for generating light emission mode in response to frame open detection has already been set and their priorities are the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating a light emission mode in response to the frame opening detection, which was already in the set state, will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to the door opening detection The aspect is not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data in response to door opening detection may not be set at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating a light emitting mode in response to frame open detection and the schedule data for generating a light emitting mode in response to door open detection have the same data content. No matter which one is reflected, there will be no change in lamp lighting.

After this, at timing tβ3, when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "Frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening) running up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed will be terminated. In this example, the time required to play the notification sound such as "Frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 5 (frame open) is set to 10 seconds. At timing tβ3 when the time has elapsed, the loop processing is terminated at a convenient timing when the notification sound "Frame is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 4 (door open) has not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the schedule data for sound generation according to the door open detection, and By assigning notification sound 4 (door open) to channel ``Ping Pong Ping Pong'' loop) will play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) is set at timing tβ2, the schedule data for sound generation in response to door open detection is not set, but is set at timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound "Door is open ping pong ping pong" can be played from the beginning, and when the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) times up, the notification sound "Door is open" can be played from the beginning. It will be possible to prompt the user to end the loop process and stop playing the notification sound such as "The door is open" at a halfway point (for example, the timing of "The door is open").

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played (see Fig. 130(b)), and after the third message tone (here: "Frame is open") and the third alarm tone (here: "Ping Pong Ping Pong"), the fourth message tone (here: "Ping Pong Ping Pong") is played. In this case, it is possible to realize a smooth notification sound change as if the message "The door is open" is being played. This prevents situations where "Frame is open, Ping Pong Ping Pong" and "Door is open, Ping Pong Ping Pong" are connected at an odd place, making it difficult to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of this phenomenon.

Further, according to the above configuration, at timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to door open detection is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is cut off halfway, the message sound is played first. This makes it possible to reliably know that the door is open.

FIG. 130(c) shows the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. An example of this is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 130(c), at timing tγ1 when no notification sound is being output, the game is not played even though the time is not saved during the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed hit detection in a non-time saving state), the main The control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that a right-handed hit was detected in a non-time saving state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of right-handed hitting in the time saving state) is provided for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated within the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, it is determined that the command is not in the non-time saving state. When it is determined that information on detecting right-handed players is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 6 (left-handed player guidance) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to channel X ( At the same time, a timer ( 20 seconds).

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a outputs information to that effect as a command regarding the detection of a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state. Only the information that the passage of the ball was detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 was performed in a non-time saving state. may be performed, and processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-hand batting guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

In addition, when assigning notification sound 6 (left-handed player guidance) to channel It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning notification sound 6 (guidance for left-handed batting) to channel It becomes like this.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the detection of right-hand hitting in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and extracts the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal will also be executed. Execution of the display on the LCD will end the notification (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) will expire), which is a condition for canceling notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance). will continue to be executed until Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, we place emphasis on avoiding interruptions to the progress of the performance, and set schedule data for generating lighting modes in response to detection of right-hand hits in non-time saving states. It will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from timing tγ1, and until the notification sound ends, the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 A display within the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed batting") is now executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(c), at timing tγ2, when 20 seconds have not elapsed since timing tγ1 and the notification sound “Please return to left-handed batting” is being played in a loop, step S110 or A case is assumed in which the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that the lower tray is full as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 when the right-hand hit was detected in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower tray full detection) is sent to the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is executed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (playback state). As a result of the analysis, even if it is determined that the lower tray full detection information is included, the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) shown in FIG. It is not assigned to X. In other words, since notification sound 6 (left-handed ball guidance), which has the same priority, has already been assigned to channel X, notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to channel X. By doing so, the playback of the notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) on the side that is already in the assigned state is performed preferentially and is continued.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself in response to the lower tray full detection at timing tγ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (20 seconds), set this, and if the timer (20 seconds) has not expired when the output state (playback state) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower tray is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel ” loop) to play the notification sound.

Furthermore, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the schedule data for generating a sound in response to the detection of the lower tray being full; By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal display can be executed. There is.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guide appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guide is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After this, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound saying "Please return to left-handed batting" is emitted based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed batting guidance) running out. The loop process that is repeatedly executed will be terminated. In this case, the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 6 (guidance for left-handed batting) is set to 10 seconds. At timing tγ3 when the time has elapsed, the loop process is completed at a convenient timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed batting" has been reproduced twice.

Also, at this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) has not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation in accordance with the detection of the lower tray being full. By assigning notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Now, the notification sound will be played in the loop "Please remove the ball from the lower plate".

That is, at timing tγ2, the timer for notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is set, but the schedule data for generating sound in response to detection of the lower tray being full is not set, but is set at timing tγ3. As a result, at timing tγ3, the notification sound "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" can be played from the beginning, and when the timer for notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) times out, , the loop processing will be terminated at a halfway timing (for example, the timing of "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") among notification sounds such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" and will no longer be played. You will be able to encourage them.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played (see Fig. 130(c)), when the second message tone (here, ``Please return to left-handed batting'') has finished playing, the third message tone (here, ``Please remove the ball from the lower plate'') is played. It becomes possible to realize smooth switching of notification sounds as if they were being played back. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a situation where "Please return to left-handed batting" and "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" are connected at an odd place, making it impossible to recognize the notification content. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, after the message sound has finished outputting, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It looks like this. Therefore, if the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is met while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, 5 seconds of silent data will be inserted. Since the message sound of a different notification sound will be played, it is preferable to prevent the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of an alarm sound, making it impossible to recognize the notification content. be able to avoid it.

FIG. 131(a) shows an example of the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, then Regarding the processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 130(a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, a loop process that repeatedly executes a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) times out. At t-3, the loop process ends at the perfect timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times. Moreover, the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp will continue to be executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(a), at timing t-2, 60 seconds have not elapsed since timing t-1, and the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism detected" is being played in a loop. Here, it is assumed that door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 during the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection (see Figure 128). ), even if door opening is detected, processing for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) will continue to be performed.

Normally, for the process on the side with a lower priority, similar to the case where processes with the same priority overlap as described with reference to FIGS. 130(a) to (c), A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

However, a situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from a case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out, and it is no longer possible to do so. It can be said that the situation is such that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the 2nd notification group, where the possibility of fraud is medium. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data are set. , only sets the flag according to door open detection. Then, at timing t-3, based on the fact that the flag is set, a timer for notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to door open detection and sound generation schedule data corresponding to door open detection are set respectively. At the same time, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel . Note that the execution of the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp in response to the door opening detection starts from timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame release switch 618 detects the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" is being played in a loop, "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected." From timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as ``Door is open'' ends, notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to door open detection starts to be played for a full 30 seconds, and ``Door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong''. The loop process ends at a convenient timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. In this way, by reproducing the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection in a more polite notification mode that differs from the normal priority-based processing, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group Although the content is limited (in this case, the loop is ``The door is open, ping pong ping pong''), it is expected that it will encourage awareness of situations where the possibility of fraud is high.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetic field has been detected," the notification content will start from the message sound (door is open), which will help the first notification group in the most tense situation. It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the relevant notification has been terminated. On the other hand, by playing the warning sound "ping pong ping pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 131(b) shows an example of the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), suppose that the door is detected to be open by the door frame open switch 618 during the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. Regarding the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as "process according to frame open detection (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 130(b) is performed. be exposed. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process that repeatedly executes a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" is started, and at timing tδ3, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) times out. Then, the loop process ends at the perfect timing when the notification sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. In addition, the display on the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp continue to be executed until the door is detected to be closed, which is a condition for canceling the opening of the door.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131(b), at timing tδ2, when 30 seconds have not elapsed since timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “The door is open, ping pong ping pong” is being played in a loop, the step It is assumed that a right-handed hit is detected by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection is given higher priority than the processing of notification sound 6 (left-hand drive guidance) in response to right-hand drive detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 128), even if a right-handed hit is detected in a non-time-saving state, the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) will continue to be performed.

In other words, as mentioned above, for the process with the lower priority, the notification sound of the lower priority side A process is performed in which only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(b), at timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) for notification sound 6 (left-hand ball guidance) is set, while the sound is generated in response to right-hand ball detection in the non-time saving state. schedule data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, if the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed ball guidance) has not timed up, the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection of right-handed hitting in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. Notification sound 6 (guidance for left-handed batting) is assigned to channel X, and the notification sound is reproduced in that notification mode (here, a loop of "Please return to left-handed batting").

According to this configuration, the notification sound that does not include the warning sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" at a good timing after the notification sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. is now played, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Furthermore, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, after the message sound has finished outputting, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It looks like this. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of notification sound that was being played up to that point has ended and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It becomes like this.

FIG. 131(c) shows an example of the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131(c), suppose that the door is detected to be open by the door frame open switch 618 during the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. Regarding the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as "process according to frame open detection (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 130(b) is performed. be exposed. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process that repeatedly executes a notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" is started, and at timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) times out. Then, the loop process ends at the perfect timing when the notification sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. In addition, the display on the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp continue to be executed until the door is detected to be closed, which is a condition for canceling the opening of the door.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since timing tε1 and a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" is being played in a loop, step S112 It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of (FIG. 94). In this regard, processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection has a lower priority than processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See Fig. 128), priority is given to processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and processing of notification sound 4 (door open) is given priority regardless of whether the sound or lamp lighting is performed. This will prevent the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal display, each notification is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so if a notification with a lower priority is being executed, priority is given to the notification. Even if a high-priority notification occurs, the display on the liquid crystal display of the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method to prevent the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or lamp lighting, at timing tε2, the previously set Processing may be performed to release the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data in response to door opening detection from their set states.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at timing tε2, not only the schedule data for screen generation in response to door open detection, but also the schedule data for sound generation and schedule data for generating light emission mode in response to door open detection. is maintained in the set state, and the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for screen generation, and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to magnetic detection, which have higher priority than each of those data, are set respectively. state. Then, assignments for channel By switching the content to the content based on the schedule data of The content is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tε2, no operation is performed on the lower priority process (door opening process) that is in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tδ2, a loop process that repeatedly executes a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. (60 seconds), the loop process ends at the perfect timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism detected" has been played six times. Moreover, the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp will continue to be executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

According to such a configuration, as soon as magnetic detection that is likely to indicate fraudulent activity occurs, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) can be performed by either sound, display on the LCD, or lighting of a lamp. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is played first as a notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is being carried out, and the situation is quickly communicated to the hall side that the situation has become tense. things come to be expected.

FIG. 131(d) shows an example of the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state during the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 130(c) is performed regarding the processing (left-handed guidance processing) corresponding to the detection of right-handed hitting in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process is started that repeatedly executes a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting," and at timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (guidance for left-handed batting) has timed out. Then, the loop process ends at the perfect timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed batting" has been played twice. In addition, the display on the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp will continue to be executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed play guidance, is up.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed since timing tζ1 and the notification sound "Please return to left-handed batting" is being played in a loop, step S110 or It is assumed that the opening of the door is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to detection of right-handed driving in the non-time-saving state is given a lower priority than the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door opening detection. For this reason (see Fig. 128), priority is given to the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door opening detection, and the output content of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as actuator operation. We will make sure that this is not the case. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal display, each notification is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so if a notification with a lower priority is being executed, priority is given to the notification. Even if a high-priority notification occurs, the display on the liquid crystal display of the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of notification sound 6 (left-handed hitting guidance), as a method to prevent the output contents from being reflected as actuator operation, at timing tζ2, right-handed hitting is detected in the non-time-saving state that has been set up until then. Processing may be performed to release the sound generation schedule data from the set state according to the set state.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at timing tζ2, not only the schedule data for screen generation in response to the detection of a right-handed strike in the non-time saving state, but also the schedule data for generating sound in response to the detection of a right-handed strike in the non-time saving state. These are also maintained in the set state, and not only the schedule data for sound generation according to door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, but also the schedule data for screen generation and light emission mode according to door open detection. Set the generation schedule data respectively. Then, the assignment to channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data in response to the right-handed hit detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data in response to the door open detection. In response to door open detection, the notification sound 4 (door open) is processed so that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator, whether it is sound, display on the liquid crystal display, or lighting of a lamp.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the lower-priority process (left-handed guidance process) that is in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand drive guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong", and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. The loop process ends at the perfect timing, when the timer (30 seconds) expires and the notification sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Moreover, the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp continue to be executed until the door closing detection, which is a condition for canceling the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, notification sound 4 (door open) is processed by sound, LCD display, and lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound starts with the message sound (door is open), it is possible to prevent players who are playing the game properly from feeling disgusted. The second notification group is notified by the "ping pong ping pong" alarm sound, and it is expected that the hall will be immediately notified of a change to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

It is possible to change the volume setting value and brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormality alarm sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed brightness is reflected in some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a situation arises in which multiple notification sounds shown in FIG. Although only a single channel (channel However, as mentioned above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group where the possibility of fraud is medium, depending on other detection conditions, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by control based on the priority order.

In addition, notification sounds are output not only when an abnormality is detected that has a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when an abnormality is detected that has a low possibility of fraudulent activity. be. In other words, if an abnormality is detected that has a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but if an abnormality is detected that has a low possibility of fraudulent activity, If so, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the hall's convenience (recovery from various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state continues, it is not necessary to output the notification sound. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue the notification process.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 132 to 137, in addition to the control based on the priority order described above, special conditions are also taken into consideration to improve the state of the gaming machine. The aim is to realize notification in a manner that allows for appropriate expression. Hereinafter, special notification processing will be explained for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the schedule data for generating a sound according to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel set state. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 4 (door open) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection will last 30 seconds until timing tα12 arrives. It will play for seconds.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door open detection is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door frame open switch 618 stops detecting the door open.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at timing tα13 when the playback of the notification sound in response to door opening detection has finished and channel Magnetic detection by sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission in response to the door open detection starting at timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the above-mentioned timing tα16 arrives; however, regarding the assignment to various lamp operations, , at timing tα13, the mode of lamp emission is switched to the mode of lamp emission according to magnetic detection.

That is, at timing tα13, the schedule data for generating sound according to magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and the schedule data for generating screen and the schedule data for generating light emission mode according to magnetic detection are also set. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to magnetic detection will continue for 60 seconds until timing tα14 arrives. It will be played over a period of time.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp light emission corresponding to magnetic detection will be maintained respectively unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the playback of the notification sound in response to door open detection has ended and the door frame open switch 618 is still detecting the door open, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. This kind of situation means that someone who has the intention of doing some kind of fraudulent operation opens the door frame 3 to make it open, waits for the end of the playback of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened, and then It is assumed that when an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for illicit purposes inside the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 had cooled down, the magnet could momentarily enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is extremely malicious. Because this is a serious act, there is concern that simply processing the notification sound in response to magnetic detection is insufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take any countermeasure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 when the playback of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still being continued. Based on this, the "schedule data for sound generation in response to door opening detection" that has already been played for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign the data to At this time as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) to measure the notification time of notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to door opening detection is set for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection, which has already ended, will be played in a way that is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", which will create a large sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that this will attract everyone's attention. In addition, those who commit fraud are already relieved that ``Once the magnetic notification is finished, all notification sound playback has ended, and the fraudulent activity can finally be made less noticeable.'' By playing the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened, which should have ended, an unexpected notification situation will occur, and it is hoped that this will create an awareness that further fraudulent activity is too risky. It becomes like this.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period when the notification processing belonging to the first notification group is being performed, and during the period when the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, the other channels are A process is performed to suppress the volume of the performance sound during the allocated symbol variation and other game sounds (process to reduce the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period when the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the performance sound during symbol variation and other game sounds assigned to other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is being performed (the period during which the volume is subject to suppression) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). This refers to a period during which the following conditions are met: whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being played (whether the notification sound is being played). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, in the period of timings tα11 to tα13 and the period of timings tα14 to tα16, symbol fluctuations are performed based on the fact that the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed. A process for suppressing the volume of the game sound and other game sounds is performed (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value), and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that the process is in progress, a process of suppressing the volume of the performance sound during symbol variation and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16), the notification processing by both the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. We decided to reduce the volume of the production sound during symbol fluctuations and other game sounds to the same value during the period when the symbols are changing, but the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are both performed. During the period, processing may be performed to lower the value to a lower value than during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are multiple notification states just by checking the performance sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial response on the hall side will be made more quickly.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the door opening detection ends at timing tα16, the process of suppressing the volume of the performance sound during symbol variation and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound in response to door open detection, which had already ended, is played in a way that is connected to "notification sound playback in response to magnetic detection," there is a possibility that an extremely malicious act was committed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection ends, the volume of the performance sound during symbol variation and other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, as is clear from the processing in response to door open detection, the LCD display in response to door open detection is Although the period in which the detection is performed and the period in which the lamp is emitted in a manner corresponding to door open detection have the same start time, their end times are all different. In this way, by activating the notification sounds, the LCD display, and the lamp emission so that they each have different roles, only a single channel (Channel X) is used for each type of notification sound. However, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the contents of the abnormality, game guidance, etc.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timings tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, at timing tα23, the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state. I am assuming the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 132, there is a low possibility that an extremely malicious act is being carried out, so the playback of the notification sound in response to the detection of a right-handed hit in the non-time-saving state is terminated. At timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection which has already ended is not reproduced again. Further, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the performance sound during symbol variation and other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timings tα21 to tα22) corresponding to door open detection has ended, even if the gate sensor 4003 detects a frame open instead of detecting a right hit in a non-time saving state, it is extremely malicious. Since there is a low possibility that such an action is being performed, when the corresponding notification sound ends, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already ended will not be played again.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) in response to door opening detection, which is different from the example shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and door open detection is ended at timing tα34 during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being played. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 134, at timing tα35 when the playback of the notification sound in response to the magnetic detection ends, the notification sound in response to the door open detection, which has already ended, is changed to "playback of the notification sound in response to the detection of the magnetism". There is no such thing as being reproduced in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. Waiting for the playback of the corresponding notification sound to finish, and when trying to secretly place a magnet for illicit purposes inside the door frame 3, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. It is assumed that there is a possibility that this situation has occurred. However, considering that after timing tα34, the door frame 3 is closed and magnetic detection is not occurring, it is in a non-illegal state. Continuously playing the notification sound until timing tα35 arrives is considered to be sufficient for notification sound processing, and channel X is left vacant in case further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state and secure it. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) in response to door opening detection, as shown in FIG. 132. This is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 135, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for illicit purposes inside the door frame 3 after waiting for the end of the playback of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened, and when the door had cooled down. Sometimes, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and even though a magnetic abnormality notification sound is played in response, the magnet does not flinch from this situation and moves within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. It is assumed that they are trying to place the magnet again, and there is a possibility that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 A timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is reset.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is emitted over a longer period of time from when the first magnetic detection occurs until 60 seconds elapse from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection occurs. can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And in the end, the loop processing does not end at the right time, and the loop processing ends at a half-hearted timing, such as "Boo-boo, magnetism detected." It is expected that this will create a great sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Further, at timing tα44, when 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic field was detected, the notification sound is played back for the notification time (30 seconds) when the door is opened. A special process is performed in which the notification sound is reassigned to channel X by resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection." At this time as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) to measure the notification time of notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to door opening detection is set for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, not only is the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already ended, played in a way that is connected to "notification sound reproduction according to magnetic detection", but also intermediate sounds such as "boo-boo detect magnetism" are played back. The loop process ends at an odd timing, and the playback begins in a way that connects with the "notification sound playback in response to magnetic detection." Therefore, the priority status of the notification sound in response to door open detection, which was already in the final state, becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of magnetic detection was stopped midway and played back. It is expected that this will create an even greater sense of discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) in response to door opening detection, as shown in FIG. 132. This is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα54, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 136, when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for illicit purposes inside the door frame 3 while the door has cooled down, after waiting for the end of the playback of the notification sound in response to door opening detection. Despite the fact that a magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and a magnetic abnormality notification sound was played in response, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken considerably without being daunted by this situation. It is assumed that this is the case, and there is a possibility that more malicious acts of fraud are being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 when the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is played in a manner connected to "the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection", and then At timing tα56 when the playback of the notification sound in response to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound in response to the door open detection, which has already ended, is played back in a manner that is further connected to the "playback of the notification sound in response to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection is not set, and the timer (60 seconds), and at timing tα55 when the playback of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, schedule data for generating sound according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X. .

With such a configuration, the loop processing will not end at a perfect timing when a notification sound such as "Boo-boo, vibration detected" is generated, and the loop processing will be interrupted at a halfway timing such as "Boo-boo, vibration detected". Since the processing will now be completed, it is expected that it will create a great sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at timing tα56 when the playback of the notification sound in response to the vibration detection ends, the playback of the notification sound is in a state where the playback of the notification sound has already been completed for the notification time (30 seconds). Special processing will be performed to set the "schedule data" again and allocate the notification sound to channel X again. At this time as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) to measure the notification time of notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to door opening detection is set for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound in response to door open detection, which has already ended, is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction in response to vibration detection," which is connected to "notification sound reproduction in response to magnetic detection." Not only will it be played back, but it will also be played in a way that connects with the ``notification sound playback in response to vibration detection,'' where the loop process ends at a half-hearted timing such as ``Boo-boo, vibration detected.'' Therefore, the priority status of the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the final state, becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped midway and played. It is expected that this will create an even greater sense of discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, a case is assumed in which magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timings tα61 to tα62) corresponding to frame open detection instead of door open detection. I am assuming that.

In the example shown in FIG. 137 as well, a situation in which magnetic detection occurs immediately after frame opening detection can be said to be a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being committed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activities, the door frame 3 should be left open, and even if the main body frame 4 is left open, there is no benefit to placing a magnet. Since there is no error, it can be assumed that the hall side may have accidentally caused the magnetic detection sensor 4024 to erroneously detect the ball when it used a magnet to clear the ball jam in the ball tank or delivery path.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 137 as well, at timing tα64 when the playback of the notification sound in response to magnetic detection ends, the notification sound in response to the frame opening detection, which has already ended, is changed to "notification sound in response to magnetic detection." By playing the music in a manner connected to "Reproduction" (timings tα64 to tα65), it is expected that it will create a great sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention. However, after that, at timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection ends, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also the notification process according to the magnetic detection Special processing will be performed to terminate each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp).

According to such a configuration, while the function against fraudulent activities is suitably performed, if it is an erroneous detection on the hall side, the main body frame 4 is simply closed, and notification processing (according to frame open detection and magnetic detection) is performed. Since it will be possible to turn off all alarm sounds, LCD displays, and lamps, it is expected that the hall will be able to respond more quickly to false detections and maintain a favorable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 137, even if the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection is ended during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being played, the frame open detection is At the timing of completion, not only each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to magnetic detection It is also possible to perform special processing to terminate the process.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player side volume adjustment function.

For example, in the process of step S1108, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, and if it is determined that the effect selection left button 331 has been operated. A process is performed to lower the value set by the player regarding the speaker volume (player set value), and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the value set by the player regarding the speaker volume (player set value) is lowered. ). Also, if the player setting value is lowered and the lowered volume is actually output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") may be output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is output at the increased volume value. , it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. In addition, regarding the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as mentioned above, which is referred to when there are no free channels (for example, "20", which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the production sound ( Changes in the volume of audible sounds can now be communicated more reliably.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such volume adjustment processing is performed during a period (demonstration display, etc.) before the start of the game when symbol fluctuations according to the jackpot determination have not yet been performed. The system allows players to accept requests not only during the period when the game is started (when the jackpot is determined), but also during the period when the symbols change according to the jackpot determination, and a more important production has appeared. By making it possible to dynamically change the setting of the volume value from time to time, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various effects sounds are allocated according to the progress of display effects during the execution period of symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 is detected to be in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or an open door, it performs a process of assigning and outputting a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds according to the detected content to a channel. In addition, at this time, channel allocation of various types of performance sounds in accordance with the progress of the display performance is not canceled, and a performance progress notification process that reduces the output volume to a specific value can be executed. In other words, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among multiple types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various performance sounds according to the progress of the display performance itself will not be canceled. Therefore, as long as the specific notification sound channel is assigned or the abnormal state ends, the performance can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the performance sound according to the progress of the performance display.

However, in the production progress notification processing described above, since the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production is not canceled, the normal time ( As a result, more channels will be used than in the non-broadcasting state), and there will be no free channels to which sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment for a specific notification sound (notification state). The risk tends to be higher. If there are no free channels to which sound data has been assigned before the end of channel assignment (notification state) for a specific notification sound, at that point any of the sound data Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (notification state) for a specific notification sound is subsequently completed, the sound data that could not be assigned to a channel and was discarded may be played back. There is a concern that interest in the game will decline.

Regarding these concerns about empty channels related to production sound, there will be no direct harm if a fixed channel method is adopted for channel allocation of notification sounds, but if a fixed channel method is adopted for channel allocation of notification sounds. Whether to adopt the automatic channel method or the automatic channel method should be determined from the design perspective of the game and performance, so no matter which channel method is adopted, the above-mentioned performance progress notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows the adoption of a common processing program in order to reduce costs and improve reliability in developing the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is operated while the performance progress notification process is being executed, the performance is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the performance sound is not variable and is maintained at a constant level. In other words, in this case, while the production progress notification process is being executed, there is no need to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("beep!" or "beep!") even if there is an operation by the player. , it is expected that the risk of running out of free channels will be reduced by giving channels that much more room.

However, although the pachinko machine 1 is capable of dynamically changing the volume setting when a more important performance appears, the output volume cannot be set while the performance progress notification process is being executed. If changes are not allowed, if performance progress notification processing is executed due to erroneous detection or notification due to the hall's convenience (door opening, etc.), the volume will be adjusted to an appropriate value according to the content of the performance progress. It is inevitable that players will lose interest in the game due to the inability to change the settings. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period in which the production progress notification processing is being performed, if a large discrepancy occurs between the appropriate volume value according to the content of the production and the actual setting value, the output volume (possible Since changing the setting (listening volume) is now allowed, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times to change the volume to the appropriate value, but this will cause the channel to be occupied by the volume adjustment completion sound mentioned above. As a result, even though the production progress notification process has finally been completed, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced because there are not enough free channels and it becomes impossible to output the production sound appropriately.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, while the performance progress notification process is being executed, when the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is operated, the value decreases to a specific value. While the output volume (audible sound volume) of the performance sound being played is not made variable and is maintained, changes to the set value (player set value) by the player regarding the volume are allowed, and the above-mentioned When the performance progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the change of the setting value (player setting value) by the player is accepted in accordance with the progress of the performance while the performance progress notification process is being executed, new operations can be performed. Even without performing the above, when the performance progress notification process is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point. In this way, by allowing the player to change the setting value (player setting value) even during the period when the performance progress notification process is being executed, the performance progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed until the end of the game. In addition, a situation may occur in which the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage of empty channels. can also be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the output volume is changed all at once to the player setting value when the presentation progress notification process is finished, the game during the period in which the presentation progress notification process is being executed. Regardless of the number of changes to the user settings or the number of operations performed by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. It may also be possible to output a special sound (for example, "bee!") that is different from the above.

Furthermore, in order to more appropriately eliminate the lack of free channels when the production progress notification process is completed, it is necessary to Regardless of the number of operations, etc., when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once due to the completion of the presentation progress notification process, it is desirable to not play the volume adjustment completion sound itself. . According to such a configuration, even though the performance progress notification processing due to false detection or notification due to circumstances on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally been completed, the proper performance cannot be performed due to a lack of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to enjoy.

In the above explanation example, if the notification sound corresponding to door open detection ends while the door remains open, then when a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection ends. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound is output while the notification sound corresponding to door open detection is being output, even if the door open state is maintained, door open detection will not be activated. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted "notification sound corresponding to door open detection").

When the door is in the open state, a lamp is emitted according to the detection of the door being open, but this lamp emission is continued even after the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door being open ends when the door is in the open state. It is desirable to do so. Furthermore, it is desirable that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is continued for a predetermined period of time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state ends.

If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the notification sound corresponding to door open detection is terminated while the door remains open, the specific error occurs. It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection be outputted again based on the occurrence of the door opening. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the door opening detection.

Or, if there is a specific error in which the notification sound is not output even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound according to the door open detection is terminated while the door remains open, the corresponding error occurs. The notification sound corresponding to door open detection may not be outputted again based on the occurrence of a specific error, but a state in which re-notification can be made may be maintained.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormality alarm sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed brightness is reflected in some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from when the performance progress notification process is executed until the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once will be described.

FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the presentation progress notification process according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, before explaining the process from the execution of the performance progress notification process until the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once, the contents of the performance progress notification process will be explained with reference to FIG. 138. I will briefly explain about. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume, the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound volume) can be changed in the range of "20" to "50". While this is possible, the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in particular, in this explanatory example, although the output processing itself is performed, the production sound is muted. It is exemplified as something that makes it possible to

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group with a high possibility of fraud are When the notification process for either of them is executed, the process is performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed after an abnormality is detected, the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound volume) is reduced in the second volume suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression. ) is continued instead of being terminated.

In addition, in this explanatory example, when the notification process regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound The period during which the processing to suppress the sound volume (volume of is set to .

On the other hand, when the notification process for either notification sound 4 or 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among notification sounds 1 to 7 is executed, the degree of suppression is Processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the first volume suppression mode, which is on the lower side. However, if the notification process related to either notification sound 4 or 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, at that point Then, the process of suppressing the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower degree of suppression, is ended.

On the other hand, when the notification process regarding any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-hand hitting guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is executed, the performance is , and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound).

Note that in this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is performed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is performed. The output volume of the effect sound does not necessarily have to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound is set in the same suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Volume of audible sound) may be suppressed. However, the termination conditions for the suppression process are different when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed than when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make sure that the

FIG. 139 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment in response to the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while no abnormality has been detected and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. FIG.

In this example, the player setting value can be changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by operating the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332. It is set such that the smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression modes (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this illustrative example, the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the player's operation.

Now, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the player setting value for the volume of the performance sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , it is assumed that the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that volume. In addition, if the decorative pattern SZ is in a stopped state and a jackpot determination has not been made and it is in a state of waiting for a starting prize, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the performance selection left button 331 is pressed. A display image 331a representing the performance selection right button 332 and a display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600, a first volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which of the values ``1'' to ``5'' the current player setting value is. Ru. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed all the time, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect, which is a reach effect performed with a changed background image. It is also possible to hide the volume value display when the volume value is in , and to make at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2, which will be described later, appear when the player performs an operation. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 139(A), when an operation is performed using the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332, the player setting value is increased by "1" each time the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is operated. Along with this, the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20". Further, each time the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") is played back at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge is displayed to indicate which of the player setting values is the current setting value within the range of "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139(C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

Note that if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", neither the player setting value nor the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is decreased, and the game The user setting value remains at "1" (the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) remains at "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound should not be assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume should be " It is desirable to set the value to "0" so that no audible output is produced. This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is "5".

On the other hand, when a starting prize occurs and a jackpot determination is performed, the decorative pattern SZ changes in a predetermined performance pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 139(B). Is displayed. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined effect is progressing, and a sound effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. Players are allowed to accept requests even during the execution period, and for example, when a more important effect appears, such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that settings can be changed.

That is, FIG. 139(C) shows the situation after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 139(B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) is changed to "60", which is 20 times that value. If the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound will be assigned to the predetermined channel and played at the changed volume of "80", and in the second operation, the player's setting The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times that value. The volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume of "100".

In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, it is possible to change the value within the range of the player setting value from "1" to "5". Then, the second volume value display OH2, which indicates the current set value by means of a gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. By making it clear which of the player's setting values is in the range of ``1'' to ``5'', this system can be used even in tense situations where more important effects appear. This is intended to prevent operational errors such as repeated operations on the performance selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed in blocks, and the number of filled blocks increases or decreases according to changes in the player's settings. The current player settings are shown by displaying the following.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 139(D), the second volume value display OH2 starts when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 139(C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the display is hidden, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a manner that does not cause a change in the player setting value (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 will be maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in a manner that does not cause a change in the player setting value (the operation on the performance selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"). , the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value that measures the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is possible to better prevent operation errors such as repeated operations on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, FIG. 140 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the pattern variation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is being executed. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the contents of processing related to volume adjustment accompanying this event.

The situation shown in FIG. 140(A) is the situation before the symbol variation starts, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139(A). When a starting prize occurs and a jackpot determination is performed in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 140(B), the results and fluctuations of the jackpot determination will be changed as shown in FIG. Decorative designs SZ are variably displayed in a predetermined performance pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined effect is progressing, and a sound effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of symbol variation, and processing related to notification sound 4 (door open) is executed in response to this. More specifically, a loop process (for 30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, " "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

Furthermore, as described above, during the pattern variation period, when door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs and processing related to notification sound 4 (door open) is executed in response to this, the first volume suppression mode is applied. A performance progress notification process is performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), even though the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation in FIG. 140(A), The sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player's setting value). The content of the performance will be developed based on the volume value.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is operated while such performance progress notification processing is being executed, the first specified The output volume (audible sound volume) of the performance sound, which has been lowered to the value (here "10"), is not changed and is maintained, while the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) is Accepting changes to itself is allowed, and when the above production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) will be changed to reflect all operations up to that point. As mentioned above, the values are changed all at once.

That is, FIG. 140(C) shows the state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 140(B). However, even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the production selection right button 332, the output volume of the production sound (volume of audible sound) is not the same as the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the user's set value (20 times the user setting value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the performance selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the performance sound remains until the performance progress notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed. is not changed, and the content of the performance progresses while keeping the volume at the first specific value.

In addition, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed to the first specified value. Since the value (in this case "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound will not be output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value will change from "4" to "5". However, since the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself changes from "3" to "4", and since the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicates by means of a gauge that the current set value is "4" within the range of player set values "1" to "5". This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" in the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from "4" to "5", and since the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" within the range of player set values "1" to "5", and also displays the first volume value. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed and the volume adjustment guide display OAH returns to the state where it is executed again, and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the process for notifying the progress of the production (the output volume is increased to a specific value) As shown in FIG. 140(D), the output volume changes to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the processing, as shown in FIG. 140(D). Change all at once. In other words, in this case, the player setting value changes stepwise from "3" to "4" in response to the first operation and to "5" in response to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) should originally range from the first specific value (here, "10") to "80" according to the first operation, and then to "80" according to the second operation. The first specific value (here, "10") should be changed in stages to "100" according to the current value, but it is changed all at once to "100", which reflects all the operations up to that point.

In this way, by allowing the player to change the setting value (player setting value) even during the period when the performance progress notification process is being executed, the performance progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed until the end of the game. In addition, immediately after the performance progress notification process is finished, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage of empty channels or there is no room left. The occurrence of such a situation can also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (from "10" to "100") as the production progress notification process is completed, the change in output volume does not occur. Even though the volume adjustment is done, the sound channel assignment does not do this itself. According to such a configuration, even though the performance progress notification processing due to false detection or notification due to circumstances on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally been completed, the proper performance cannot be performed due to a lack of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to enjoy.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, magnetic abnormality and door opening are exemplified as specific states, but performance progress notification processing and door opening occur in a state where magnetic abnormality occurs. Regarding the presentation progress notification process in the state where the process is performed, the termination conditions may be different.

For example, first, regarding the performance progress notification process when a door has been opened, if the door is closed or a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opened (if the door continues to be opened), (even if) it will be terminated. However, in any case, when changing the output volume (volume of audible sound) all at once (for example, from "10" to "100"), even though the output volume changes, the channel of the sound whose volume has been adjusted is It is preferable to avoid doing this assignment itself.

On the other hand, regarding the performance progress notification processing in a state where a magnetic abnormality has occurred, it should not be terminated just when the magnetic abnormality state ends, but should continue to be executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is shut off. is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) will be changed all at once (for example, from "10" to "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored from a power cut. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable that the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed.

In addition, in the presentation progress notification processing in a state where a door is opened, a display indicating that when the player setting value has been changed is displayed, whereas in the presentation progress notification processing in a state where a magnetic abnormality has occurred, , when the player setting value has been changed, a display to that effect may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the ending conditions are different between the presentation progress notification processing in a state where a door is opened and the presentation progress notification processing in a state where a magnetic abnormality has occurred. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can also be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment using the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, it is unlikely that the output of the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) will be triggered by the volume adjustment using the knob. It is more desirable to do so in order to allow some free channels.

Although not shown, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 are also available. (This includes lamps used for performances that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and game lamps such as special LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from brightness setting targets.) ) is equipped with brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various performance lamps can be adjusted by the player. Processing to change setting values (player setting values) can be executed. Also, when the player setting value regarding brightness is decreased or increased, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the volume setting value at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of the performance lamp can be changed by the player's operation both in a state where the symbols are not changing and a state where the symbols are changing.

In addition, it is desirable to assign the brightness adjustment completion sound to the same channel as the volume adjustment completion sound described above. In this case, even if the setting value related to brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound There will be situations where the sound channel assignment itself is not performed, or situations where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (such as whether the above-mentioned performance progress notification process is being executed) when changing the setting value related to brightness instead of the volume. becomes possible. Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a different sound from the volume adjustment completion sound.

Regarding the player setting value regarding the volume, when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled by the demo screen) is met, the value is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player. It may be changed. However, if the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating which value is currently set (first volume value display OH1, second volume value display OH1, second volume value display) By disabling both the value display OH2) and the output (channel assignment) of the volume adjustment completion sound, it is possible to notify a third party that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, if a new volume adjustment is performed while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is being output, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state will be output even if there is an empty channel. It is better to assign a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and output it (overwrite and output) by ending it prematurely, in order to leave room for the number of empty channels. desirable.

Also, when the player further performs an operation that increases the volume even though the player setting value is at the maximum value, or when the volume decreases even though the player setting value is the minimum value. When this operation is performed further, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and not output even if there is an empty channel, so that there is enough room for the number of empty channels. The above is more desirable. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1, second volume value display OH2) is displayed. Good too.

Although volume adjustment by rotating the knob of volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, it may be possible to generate a period in which volume adjustment performed by a player's operation is not permitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 141 shows that when the state detected in FIG. 140 is not a door opening but a magnetic anomaly, the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection button is pressed while the processing related to the corresponding notification sound is being executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a process related to volume adjustment in response to an operation of the right button 332. FIG.

The situation shown in FIG. 141(A) is the situation before the symbol variation starts, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140(A). In such a situation, when a starting prize occurs and a jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the results and fluctuations of the jackpot determination will be changed as shown in FIG. Decorative designs SZ are variably displayed in a predetermined performance pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined effect is progressing, and a sound effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of symbol variation, and processing related to notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in response to this. Specifically, a loop process (for 60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo magnetism detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, during the pattern fluctuation period, when magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs and processing related to notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in response to this, the performance is performed in the second volume suppression mode. A performance progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), even though the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation in FIG. 141(A), The sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be set to a predetermined second specific value (here "0") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The performance content is advanced based on the volume value (in this case, muted).

In this regard, even when the production progress notification process is executed in response to such magnetic anomaly, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here "0" The output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound (in this case, muted)), which has been lowered to ''), is maintained without being variable, while the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself Acceptance of changes is allowed, and when the production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) will be changed to reflect all operations up to that point. As mentioned above, the changes are made all at once.

That is, FIG. 141(C) shows the situation after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 141(B). However, even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the production selection right button 332, the output volume of the production sound (volume of audible sound) is not the same as the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (in this case, "0 (mute)") is lower than the user's set value (20 times the user setting value). Therefore, even if the player operates the performance selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the performance sound remains until the performance progress notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed. is not changed, and the content of the performance progresses with the volume remaining at the second specific value.

At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed to the second specified value. Since the value (in this case "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound will not be output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value will change from "4" to "5". However, since the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself changes from "3" to "4", and since the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicates by means of a gauge that the current set value is "4" within the range of player set values "1" to "5". This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" in the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from "4" to "5", and since the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" within the range of player set values "1" to "5", and also displays the first volume value. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this example, magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state in the situation shown in FIG. 141(C). However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound volume) is set in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) has elapsed after magnetic detection. The performance progress notification process that suppresses the performance progress is continuously executed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time (in this case, 60 seconds) has passed since the magnetic field was detected, the volume adjustment guide display OAH returns to the state where it is executed again. When the process of lowering the volume to the specified value is completed, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the output volume (audible sound volume) changes to reflect all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the process. Change all at once. In other words, in this case, the player setting value changes stepwise from "3" to "4" in response to the first operation and to "5" in response to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) should originally range from the second specific value (here, "0") to "80" corresponding to the first operation, and then to "80" according to the second operation. The second specific value (here, "0") should be changed in stages to "100" according to the current value, but the second specific value (here, "0") is changed all at once to "100", which reflects all the operations up to that point.

Note that when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case when the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 141(D), the game board side effect display device The display within the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 remain executed. There is. In other words, in the notification processing in response to magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound ends, the notification on the LCD display and the lamp continue, but the production sound is no longer subject to suppression and is suppressed according to the player's setting value. In contrast, in notification processing in response to door opening, even if the notification sound ends, the effect sound remains subject to suppression while notifications on the LCD display and notifications using lamps continue. It has come to be said that

In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the player is allowed to change the setting value (player setting value) even during the period when the performance progress notification process is being executed. , it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed until the performance progress notification process is completed. In addition, immediately after the performance progress notification process is finished, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage of empty channels or there is no room left. The occurrence of such a situation can also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (from "0" to "100") when the performance progress notification process due to magnetic anomaly is terminated, the output Channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed even though the volume changes. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation may arise in which, even though the performance progress notification processing caused by the notification due to erroneous detection has finally been completed, it becomes impossible to enjoy the appropriate performance due to a lack of free channels. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in Figure 128, the notification sound in response to the opening of the door, such as "Door is open, ping pong, ping pong," or the notification sound in response to a magnetic abnormality, such as "Boo boo, magnetism detected," is Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set at the initial value, regardless of the player setting value.

In addition, when notification sound 6 (left-handed ball guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are executed, the production progress notification process is not executed, so while these notifications are being executed, the player settings It is possible to vary both the value and the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) as appropriate. However, as shown in FIG. 128, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the initial volume value, so regardless of the player setting value, It will always be played back at the volume set by default.

Among notification sounds 1 to 7, for notification sound 6 (left-handed ball guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that belong to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the 3rd byte of the initial volume value. It may also be included in the volume adjustment by the player.

In addition, for each process explained in FIGS. 140 and 141, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation starts, and at the timing of the start and end of the symbol variation. Even when the notification process is executed according to the above, it may be executed in the same manner.

In each of the processes described in FIGS. 140 and 141, after the performance progress notification process is finished, the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button is pressed as before the performance progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation at 332, the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") is played back at the volume after the change.

Further, although the mode of suppressing the production sound during the period in which the production progress notification process is performed is different between the process explained in FIG. 140 and the process explained in FIG. 141, the mode of suppression does not necessarily differ. The output volume of the performance sound (audible sound) does not need to be different, and the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound As mentioned above, processing may be performed to suppress the volume of the sound.

In addition, in the performance progress notification process, the output volume (audible sound volume) of various game sounds is suppressed, but among these game sounds, when a game ball is in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, Some game sounds, such as the sound played in response to winning a prize (winning sound), may be played back at the initial volume setting without being affected by volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily understand whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal condition in the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as the sound (winning sound) played in response to a game ball winning a prize in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 while the production progress notification process is being executed. As for the game sound, it is desirable to reproduce it as a special sound that cannot be output when the presentation progress notification process is not being executed.

As mentioned above, in FIGS. 128 to 141, by adopting a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify abnormalities etc. using only a single channel for various notification sounds, situations where there is no free channel can be avoided. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) We proposed that technical measures be taken to make this situation less likely to appear. However, even if such a control structure is adopted, a situation may occur where there are no empty channels to which the production sound effects (production sound) are to be assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0), and the production design may be difficult. Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output mode still remain.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical improvements are made in the stage before a situation where there are no empty channels (a situation where the number of empty channels is 0) occurs regarding the channel allocation of the performance sound. I'm trying to come up with some ideas. Below, we will sequentially explain various technical improvements that have been made regarding the output of performance sounds. In addition, when adopting these technical devices for the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to adopt the above-mentioned channel-saving type control structure that allows for appropriate notification of abnormal contents using only a single channel regarding various notification sounds. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, either a fixed channel method or an automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, if an automatic channel method is adopted, the control based on the priority order described above does not necessarily need to be adopted, and it is possible to discard new sounds when all channels are in use. good. Moreover, each example described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As mentioned above, in gaming machines where the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is a situation where there is no free channel to which the sound data can be allocated. (In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0), a special sound corresponding to a special result cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease due to the inability to output this sound.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is decided to execute a specific production pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of jackpot determination, the pattern variation is performed from the start to the end. During the period, the game board side performance display device 1600 performs processing to advance the display performance according to a specific performance pattern, and also assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM playback" according to the specific performance pattern to a predetermined channel. Perform the processing to Then, when the display performance on the game board side performance display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM playback" remains assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed mode or without sound ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and an operation is detected on a predetermined operating means (operation button 410, etc.), the jackpot symbol (the corresponding A special performance sound indicating the degree of expectation that a special display mode (special display mode) will appear in the production pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

In other words, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the operation detection, the "BGM playback" sound is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but it is suppressed or output without sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage of the channel seems to be flexible. Therefore, to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound while eliminating the feeling of anxiety such as ``Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special effect sound may not be output.'' As a result, a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

By the way, if you want to keep the sound corresponding to a specific production pattern (the sound of "BGM playback") assigned to a channel and output it in a suppressed mode or silently, generally, the sound that is assigned to the channel It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of "BGM playback") (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed before giving the player an operation opportunity (initiating the effective period of production reception), it is possible to suppress the sound (" It is possible to suppress the sound of "BGM playback" or to output it silently before giving the player an opportunity to operate (generating a valid period for receiving the effect).

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the validity period of production reception will occur over a predetermined period of time, and the operation (production reception) can be performed at any timing within this validity period. This is uncertain (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to terminate the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when an operation (performance reception) is performed within the validity period, the volume will not be returned in this way. It is impossible to store the "BGM playback" sound in advance so that the playback of the corresponding sound starts at an undefined timing.

In addition to performing the process of restoring the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback exclusively for special performance sound playback". It is also conceivable to perform a process of reproducing the data. However, the sound of "BGM playback" is the one that is played in accordance with the content of various effects from the time a specific effect pattern is stopped until the end of the pattern, the timing of the pattern stop, etc. It is unclear (depending on the player) when the operation (performance reception) will be performed, but if the "BGM playback" sound is newly played using the operation (performance reception) as a trigger, There is a concern that a so-called sound lag may occur between various performances and the timing of stopping symbols thereafter, which may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific production pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ( For example, the sound data during normal fluctuations, the sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, the sound data during the second half of the super reach performance, etc.) are set in the chronological order specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning channels. Among the plurality of sound data stored as sounds for "BGM playback" corresponding to such a specific performance pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. If it is assigned to a predetermined channel in the chronological order, it will be assigned to the predetermined channel and playback will start at a timing before the effective period of production reception occurs within the specific production pattern, and the effective period will end. The allocation status for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the predetermined channel is played.

In this regard, when looking at the above specific sound data (one sound material) in chronological order, some sections (special periods) have a different suppression mode than other sections, or processing that involves sound output without sound. The data content that stipulates that the sound generation schedule data is performed is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special A chronological relationship is established in which the effective period of production reception occurs within (period). In addition, even if the player performs an operation at any time within the validity period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period will be changed from the special period (partial section) to the special period. The sound of "BGM playback" will be played across the two sections of the specific sound data after the (partial section) ends (other sections), and the special production sound according to the production reception will be played. The content is played back in a non-suppressed manner on a channel other than the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, The process of sequentially assigning the sound data (such as the sound data for the second half of the reach performance) to the predetermined channels in the chronological order specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data does not require volume adjustment from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state in which the output is performed without sound (special period)". In addition, when the player's operation is accepted in the "suppression mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, a special mode is created in a non-suppression mode using highly immediate processing triggered by this. While the production sound will start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is being played on the specified channel will be set to "suppression mode or output in silence (special period)" regardless of production reception. ” is maintained for a predetermined period of time. After this, while the special performance sound is being played, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) ends. Since the data contents of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are now played back, it is now possible to secretly return the "BGM playback" sound to the non-suppressed output mode. It becomes possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. In other words, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in the suppression mode or in a state where the sound of "BGM playback" is outputted silently, the special production sound is not suppressed through highly immediate processing triggered by this. Even though the playback is started at , it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound lag between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbols thereafter.

FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. A specific example of executing such suppressed operation sound output processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 142.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), during a period in which symbol fluctuations are being executed according to the result of the jackpot determination, at timing ts11, the game board side performance display device 1600 specifies that the performance is progressing. The situation is such that the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to the production pattern has been assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and is already being played back (stereo playback here). This "BGM playback" sound is, for example, one sound data (one It may be reproduced as a sound material (sound material) based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol fluctuation may be divided into multiple periods and separate sound data prepared for each period may be reproduced. may be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM playback" is used for the entire period in the diagram (part of the symbol variation period) including timing ts11. is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the state of playback.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), the first sound data (the "BGM playback" sound) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the playback state is At timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation validity period (validity period for reception of production) occurs during which an operation opportunity that triggers the production of production sound occurs, silent data content is set. It is set to play in some sections. As a result, without having to adjust the volume of the "BGM playback" sound from its initial value, it is possible to output the "BGM playback" sound silently while remaining assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is being played within a part of the section set as silent data content, and it seems that there is sufficient channel usage. While the atmosphere is being provided, it is possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period for performance reception) during which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the feeling of anxiety such as ``Maybe there is no available channel and the special effect sound cannot be output.'' As a result, a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

Moreover, even if there is no operation by the player, the operation validity period according to this example is the timing ts16 when the partial section in which silent data content is set as the "BGM playback" sound ends. At timing ts15, which is before the arrival of the game, the period is ended so that the operation by the player is no longer accepted. Therefore, no matter when the player's operation is accepted during the valid operation period, the sound of "BGM playback" will be played within a part of the section where the data content is set as silent. It becomes possible to generate special performance sounds in response to operations by a player while providing an atmosphere in which there seems to be plenty of room for use of the channel. Note that the operation validity period ends not only when timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an operation by the player is accepted. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated in the same way as when there is an operation by the player at that timing.

In this explanatory example, it is assumed that at timing ts14, the effect is accepted for the operation by the player, and based on the acceptance of the effect, the sound of "BGM playback" is assigned to channel 02. , 03, special effect sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the valid operation period (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is set to "SY", and the valid operation period ends at this maximum time. When "BF" is the time from when the sound of "BGM playback" is set to the end of the partial section where silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16), within the operation valid period. No matter at which timing the player's operation is accepted, the special effect sound is assigned to channels 08 and 09 and played over a fixed period of "SY+α (>BF)".

According to such a configuration, no matter at which timing within the valid operation period the operation by the player is accepted, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM playback" in a non-suppressed manner by blending it into the special performance sound. In other words, in this case, the time from when the special effect sound starts to be played until the "BGM playback" sound is output in a non-suppressed mode is variable depending on the timing at which the player's operation is accepted. , the output period of the special effect sound is set as a buffer period for restoring the sound of "BGM playback" in an unsuppressed manner (the sound of "BGM playback" is returned in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed with the special sound effect). By making it function as a period during which it is difficult to notice that the player is playing, the sound of "BGM playback" does not return to the non-suppressed mode when the player's operation is accepted, but instead returns after a predetermined period of time. You will be able to make it harder to remember.

Then, after the "BGM playback" sound is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback performance sound, when timing ts17 arrives, the "BGM playback" sound is played back in the non-suppression mode. The playback of the special performance sound will now end while the device is in this state.

In the above example, the "timing to start playing the special effect sound" and "timing to end the playback of the special effect sound" are determined by the player's operation, as shown in FIG. 142(b). Depending on the timing at which it is accepted, it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted line arrow, but no matter which timing they fall under, timing ts16 will arrive when the special effect sound is in the playback state. , it is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the user is further reminded of the "unnatural feeling caused by not returning the "BGM playback" sound to the non-suppressing mode when the player's operation is accepted, but returning it after a predetermined period of time." In order to make it difficult to play, it is desirable to set the initial volume value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, while the special performance sound with a large initial volume value is attracting attention, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when an operation by the player is accepted as a performance, a special performance sound is generated based on the reception of the performance. The special effect sound may be generated based on the acceptance of the effect only when the conditions are met. Note that even if a specific effect condition is not met, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is played. Then, no matter when the operation is performed within the operation validity period, while the predetermined performance sound (failure performance sound, etc.) is in the playback state, the BGM playback sound is secretly changed to the normal section playback state. It is also desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG. 142.

However, instead of this, if you want to play a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound), the playback time should be shorter than when the special effect sound is in the playing state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) The BGM reproduction sound may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the BGM (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, no matter when the operation is performed during the operation validity period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound returns to the normal playback state is determined by the playback of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). It will be set so that it will arrive after the end of . According to such a configuration, there is a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined performance sound (failure performance sound, etc.) and the time when the BGM reproduction sound returns to the normal reproduction state. (period whose length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. Moreover, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high expectation level (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when playing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the symbol fluctuation is stopped in a losing manner without the BGM playback sound returning to the normal playback state. Good too. In this case, at timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to channels 02 and 03 may be finished, and these may be made to be empty channels.

In addition, when generating special sound effects, it is recommended that a movable effect is also performed in which a predetermined movable body is operated based on the reception of the effect, so that the level of attention paid to the BGM playback sound is reduced. This is desirable in order to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the normal section reproduction state.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of "BGM playback" is outputted silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode is such that the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM playback" in other sections. It suffices as long as it is output by . Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, and a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, by setting a suppression mode or a chronological period of silence for the "BGM playback" sound data itself assigned to a predetermined channel, "BGM playback" can be controlled. It is now possible to create a suppression mode or a state in which the sound is output in silence (special period) just by playing it without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not necessary to set a suppression mode or a chronological period of silence for the "BGM playback" sound data itself assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at timing ts12, the "BGM playback" sound Volume adjustment may be performed to lower the volume to a specific value (or mute it). In other words, in this case, even if the effect is accepted for the player's operation at timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the "BGM playback" sound from a specific value (processing of returning the volume to the initial value) is not performed using the effect acceptance as a trigger. Make sure there is no such thing. Then, if a specific production condition is met, when a predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the "BGM playback" sound is increased from a specific value while the special production sound is being played. Processing (processing to return the volume to its initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, if the specific performance conditions are not met, the volume of the "BGM playback" sound is determined while the predetermined performance sound (failure performance sound, etc.) is being played, similar to the above-mentioned other example. You may perform a process of increasing the volume from the initial value (processing of returning the volume to the initial value), or increase the volume of the "BGM playback" sound to a specific value when the playback of a predetermined performance sound (failure performance sound, etc.) has finished. The process of increasing the volume from the specified value (processing of returning the volume to the initial value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to generate new sound assignments for empty channels over a period from at least a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16. It is desirable to In addition, such restriction processing includes, for example, block winning sounds, pending winning sounds, general electric effects sounds, adjustment sounds, etc., which have nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to symbol fluctuations during execution. It is desirable to limit a specific game sound and prevent the specific game sound from being played without being newly assigned to a channel.

In addition, if it is decided to execute a specific production pattern as a pattern change according to the result of jackpot determination, a specific production sound (BGM) will be played on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before timing ts12 arrives (It is preferable that the sound is a sound effect such as a sound effect or dialogue, rather than music, so as not to overlap with the sound.), and while the specific sound effect is being played, timing ts12 arrives and the BGM is played. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific performance sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction has been suppressed or muted. Note that for the specific effect sound, the reproduction state thereof should be ended before timing ts14 (at timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or predetermined effect sound) is output. This is desirable in order to alleviate the feeling of anxiety that the special performance sound will not be output.

Here, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect sound played on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the playback does not necessarily have to start before timing ts12 arrives, but after timing ts12. The reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if a specific production sound is output in a non-suppressing mode (normal mode) when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, Since it becomes possible to make it appear that the sound of BGM playback that was in a suppressed mode or silent state has been returned to the normal playback state, the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed mode or silent state. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it is happening.

Furthermore, "for a specific production sound, the playback state is ended before timing ts14 (at timing ts14, or before the timing ts14) when the special production sound (or predetermined production sound) is output" , "The output of a specific performance sound is terminated based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the operation validity period, or it is automatically terminated at a specific timing within timings ts13 to t15 (operation validity period)." It means that. That is, if the operation by the player is not accepted before a specific timing within timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound will be automatically terminated.

In addition, if it is decided to execute a specific production pattern as a pattern change according to the result of the jackpot determination, the BGM playback sound will start from the timing ts14 when the special production sound (or predetermined production sound) is output. It is desirable to output sound effects on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silent state ends. In other words, in this case, since multiple production sounds including special production sounds are output, the sound of BGM playback can be easily mixed into these production sounds, and the sound of BGM playback can be It becomes possible to secretly shift to the playback state according to the mode.

Regarding the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if there is no operation, the production reception will always occur (automatic reception) within the valid period and the post-operation production (special production sound playback) will be executed. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, when the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, production reception is allowed while the "BGM playback" sound is suppressed or output silently. An "acceptance acceptance sound" indicating that the performance is accepted (or that the production acceptance is permitted) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the "specific performance sound", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may also be something that is output. In other words, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, and the specific performance sound corresponding to this data is output in a non-suppressed manner. At the same time, when timing ts13 arrives, the "acceptable sound" is output as a sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptance sound" will be output from before to after the timing ts13 so as to span the timing ts13. In addition, the specific performance sound can be output as a precursor performance sound corresponding to a precursor performance (performance suggesting that the validity period will occur soon) that is performed before the operation validity period occurs, for example. In this case, a "playback section of the foreshadow effect sound" and a "playback section of the acceptance permission sound" are provided within one piece of sound data assigned to a channel so as to span before and after timing ts13. The "acceptance permissible sound" may be set to a non-output state in the middle of the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15), or may be set to a non-output state at timing ts15. However, if a production is accepted while in the output state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to switch to the non-output state.

In other words, "acceptable sound is output" here means not only that "sound data including an acceptable sound" is newly assigned to a channel at timing ts13, but also that it is already assigned to a channel. This concept also includes making the "reproduction section of the acceptable sound" in the sound data that is "acceptable sound" arrive at timing ts13. In addition, "setting to non-output state" here not only cancels the assignment status of "sound data that includes acceptable sound" to the channel, but also maintains the assignment status of the sound data to the channel. This concept also includes the fact that the "reproduction period of acceptance-permitted sound" in the sound data ends and transitions to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played.

Furthermore, in the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, no matter when the production is accepted at any timing within the validity period, the elapsed time from the time when the production is accepted is The special effect sound is played back in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the "BGM playback" sound is assigned until the predetermined time value is reached.

In this regard, if a performance is accepted during the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15), a special performance display corresponding to the performance reception will appear as a display image on the performance display device 1600. However, regarding the special performance display in response to the reception of the performance, the execution state (visible state) will continue until the elapsed time from the reception of the performance reaches the predetermined time value. Instead, it is desirable to "hide the display when a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives, regardless of when the performance is accepted within the validity period." Note that as the "predetermined timing within the performance pattern", for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period that is after timing ts15 and before timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the production is accepted immediately after the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must arrive before the timing at which the special production sound output state ends. is desirable. According to such a configuration, regarding the processing related to the special performance sound, the output state has to be continued until the timing that comes after the timing ts16 when the "BGM playback" sound is returned in a non-suppressed manner. However, since the special effect display will now be able to end before the special effect sound, the effect after the operation will be able to progress at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the "BGM playback" sound is restored or a timing that arrives before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important to

According to such a configuration, when a performance is accepted during the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15), based on the reception of the performance, "the elapsed time from the timing at which the performance was accepted is predetermined. A method that parallelizes the process related to the special effect sound that continues the output state until a predetermined time value is reached and the process related to the special effect display that continues to be displayed until a predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives. will be started respectively.

For example, if the production is accepted at a relatively early timing within the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), the "processing related to special production display" of the post-operation production will be executed over a relatively long period, Among the post-operation effects, the "processing related to the special effect sound" ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed from the time when the effect was accepted. On the other hand, if the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing within the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), the "processing related to displaying special effects" among the post-operation effects will only be executed for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the "processing related to the special effect sound" will be executed from the time the effect is accepted until the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

That is, in this case, the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 means that a specific performance pattern is executed based on the result of jackpot determination, and the performance content as the specific performance pattern reaches a specific timing. This occurs when a production is accepted within the special operation acceptance production (valid period), and the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the timing when the production is accepted reaches a predetermined time value. It functions as a device that executes ``processing related to the special effect sound that is to be continued'' and ``processing related to the special effect display that is continued to be displayed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives''.

According to such an operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of "processing related to displaying special effects" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "processing related to the special performance sound" of the post-operation performance will arrive at a relatively early stage. However, if you do not operate it for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of the "processing for special performance sound" of the post-operation performance will be set at a relatively late stage. However, there is a disadvantage that it becomes impossible to maintain the execution state of "processing related to displaying special effects" among post-operation effects for a long time.

In other words, during the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15), there is no optimal operation timing to enhance the performance.
・Would you like to enjoy this by extending the execution state of "processing related to special effect display" in exchange for speeding up the timing at which "processing related to special effect sound" ends? ), or
・Would you like to enjoy this by extending the time until the end of the "processing for special effect sound" in exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing for special effect display" (at a later stage within the validity period)? operation), or
・The time for which the "processing related to special effect display" is maintained in the execution state and the time until the "processing related to special effect sound" is completed will be sacrificed little by little to achieve an overall balance. (Are you going to operate it at a timing that is neither early nor late within the validity period?)
To provide an operation reception performance that does not easily cause boredom by allowing a player to select the operation timing according to his or her mood by giving such strategic operation performance to the effective period itself. You will be able to do this.

Here, in the above explanation example, "processing related to special effect sound" and "processing related to special effect display" are performed as post-operation effects when the effect is accepted during the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15). Although we have described an example in which a predetermined effect movable object is operated, it is also possible to further execute a ``process for operating a predetermined effect movable object'', or a ``process for operating a predetermined effect movable object'' instead of a ``process for displaying a special effect''. ” may be executed. However, regarding the "processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the above-mentioned "processing related to special effect display", "even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the validity period" , it is desirable to end the operating state when a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives. Here, "ending the operating state" means, in the case of a performance in which a predetermined performance movable body is moved to a specific position, the predetermined performance movable body that is in the motion state at the specific position is returned to its original position. This means starting the process to restore the state.

In the above explanation example, when a production is accepted during the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives (or , a process for operating a predetermined performance movable body)" and a "process for a special performance sound" that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the performance is accepted reaches a predetermined time value. And so. However, even if the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, if the predetermined production conditions are not met (for example, if the jackpot judgment is unsuccessful, or if the predetermined production judgment is unsuccessful). (e.g., when the performance is accepted within the operation acceptance performance), "processing related to special performance display (or processing for operating a predetermined performance movable body)" will not be performed, and the predetermined performance conditions will not be performed. Compared to the case where (FIG. 142), the "predetermined time value" is set relatively short, and the "processing related to the special sound effect" is performed as a different sound effect. More desirable.

However, even though the operation was performed during the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected properly (detection error) and the performance may not be accepted, and as a result, the performance may remain valid without being accepted. If the period ends, the game interest of the player who sees that "the process related to displaying the special effect (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)" is not carried out despite the operation may be reduced. There are concerns that this will decline. Therefore, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives. (or the process of operating a predetermined performance movable body)" and the "process related to special performance sound" that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the performance reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. It is desirable that the As a method of automatically generating (automatically accepting) an operation reception and a presentation mode related thereto, it is possible to use any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination.

As mentioned above, during the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the "BGM playback" sound is suppressed, the production reception is performed while the reception permission sound is in the output state in a non-suppressed manner. Then, based on the reception of the performance, the post-operation performance is executed, and the output state of the reception permission sound is canceled at this point. In this regard, even when the normal validity period occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is not suppressed, the acceptance permissible sound will be output in a non-suppressed manner. However, it is desirable that the acceptance permissible sound continues without being released from the output state even if the production is accepted while the sound is in the output state. Furthermore, regarding the acceptance permission sound that is output when the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, the reproduction state can be continued for a longer period of time than the reception permission sound that is output when the normal valid period occurs. It is desirable to use it as a playback in order to suitably maintain the game's interest even when the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed.

In addition, for a valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, N pieces of acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) are There are different types (modes), and output must be made in one of these types (output in a non-suppressed mode). On the other hand, a valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed manner suggests that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred). Only M types (modes), which are fewer than N types, are prepared as acceptance permissible sounds. It is desirable that there be a case where the sound data itself including the reception-permitted sound is not assigned a channel and generates a valid period. Note that it is desirable to suggest that ``the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot symbol differs'' depending on the type of acceptable sound.

Or, whichever is the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, and the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is normally output. , there are multiple types (forms) of acceptable acceptance sounds, but the proportion of acceptable acceptance sounds with high expectations for jackpots occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. It is desirable that the effective period is relatively high during the effective period when the BGM is played, and it is relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner. . In this case as well, in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the reception acceptance sound that suggests that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is While it is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner), in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the valid period occurs ( or when the acceptance permissible sound indicating that the valid period has occurred) is output in a non-suppressed manner, and when the sound data including the reception permissible sound itself is not assigned a channel and is not output. It is desirable that there be.

According to these configurations, when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptance acceptance sound is not detailed (M types less than N). They may not be able to recognize it or have very low expectations (relatively low). However, in this case, since the BGM playback sound is being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, there is a possibility that the reception permission sound may be overlooked due to the BGM playback sound. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptance acceptance sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM playback is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in a non-suppressed mode stand out, the acceptance acceptance sound is Since it is always output in a non-suppressed manner, you can look forward to the level of anticipation suggested by this. In addition, when adopting either (or both) of these modes, the types of acceptable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state" include: , at least one of the types of acceptance acceptable sounds that can be output when the "validity period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed manner" (for example, the acceptance acceptable sound type). Among them, the type with the lowest jackpot expectation) may be included. However, the acceptance permissible sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" includes "the BGM playback sound is suppressed or silent". Types that cannot be output (for example, types with the highest jackpot expectation among acceptance permissible sounds) that can be output when the "validity period that occurs when the user is in the state of validity period" are included. is desirable. In addition, the number of production types that can appear as a production after the operation in response to production reception in the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" is It is desirable that the number of production types is greater than the number of production types that can appear as post-operation production in response to production reception during the valid period that occurs when the sound is in a suppressed mode or a silent state. Among the production types that can appear as a production after an operation in response to a production reception during the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed mode", there is a "BGM playback sound At least one of the performance types that can appear as a post-operation performance in response to reception of the performance may be included in the "effective period that occurs when the suppression mode or silent state is in effect."

In addition, in the normal gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability fluctuation function is activated, there is a valid period when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, and a valid period when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode. In any of the valid periods that occur when the output is normally output, if multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as accepted acceptance sounds, the output in any of those valid periods. When this happens, a special reception acceptance sound may be output that says ``the rate of stopping at jackpot symbols is 100%''. Note that a plurality of types (aspects) may be prepared as the special reception permissible sound.

In other words, in this case, when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or silent state" occurs, and the special reception permission sound is output (non-suppressed mode), the production will be performed within the valid period. As for the post-operation performance that is performed based on the reception, when it appears, it will be performed in a special manner in which ``the rate of stopping at jackpot symbols becomes 100%''. If a production is accepted while a special reception permissible sound is being output, the output of the special reception permissible sound will be interrupted, and when it is output, a special It is desirable that performance sound be output.

However, when the "validity period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is normally output in a non-suppressed mode" occurs, if a special reception permissible sound is output (non-suppressed mode), the valid period As a post-operation performance that is performed based on the production reception in It is desirable to make sure that there are cases where this is not the case. In addition, there is a special reception permission sound that is output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is suppressed or silent" and a special reception permission sound that is output when the "BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppression mode". The special reception permission sounds output during the "validity period" that occur when the system is in a state may be different types of reception permission sounds. In addition, there are multiple types of special acceptance permission sounds that are output when the "validity period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner" occurs, and among these types: , there may be the same type of special reception permission sound that is output when the "validity period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or a silent state" or a type that is different from the type. . If a performance is accepted while a reception permissible sound (including a special reception permissible sound) is being output, the output of the reception permissible sound is interrupted, and the production sound corresponding to the post-operation performance (including special reception permissible sound) is output. If the game is performed in a similar manner, it is desirable that a special production sound that "the rate of stopping at jackpot symbols becomes 100%" is output when it is output.

According to such a configuration, when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state (in a situation where mishearing is unlikely to occur), when the special reception permission sound is output, the sound will be released within the validity period. Even if the post-operation performance is performed based on the reception of the performance, when it appears, it will always be executed in a manner that "the ratio of stopping at the jackpot symbol will be 100%". On the other hand, in a state where the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner (in a situation where mishearing is likely to occur due to competition with the BGM playback sound), it is assumed that the special reception permissible sound is output. Also, as a post-operation performance that is performed based on the reception of the performance within the validity period, the performance will no longer necessarily be performed in a manner that “the ratio of stopping at jackpot symbols is 100%”. Now, it is possible to create doubts about whether the reception permissible sound was output as the "special reception permissible sound" (suspect that you heard it wrong), and it is now possible to sustain the tension in a suitable manner. Become. As a result, while the BGM playback sound is being output as usual in a non-suppressed manner, the emphasis has been placed on ``how to avoid overlooking the reception-acceptable sound,'' which creates a sense of tension until the reception-acceptable sound is output. This can also be maintained in a suitable manner. In order to increase this sense of tension, the operation reception performance in which ``a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in such a manner that the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%'', Compared to the case of the operation reception performance where "a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is executed in such a manner that the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" It is desirable that the effect (pre-acceptable operation related display and pre-acceptable operation related sound) be executed in a relatively short period of time so that the validity period suddenly occurs.

In addition, in a state where the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner (in a situation where mishearing is likely to occur due to competition with the BGM playback sound), "Special reception permission sound is output and the operation The operation reception performance (valid period) in which the after-effect is not executed in such a way that ``when it appears, the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol becomes 100%'', and the operation reception effect (valid period) when the special reception permission sound is output and the after-operation effect is `` In the operation reception performance (valid period) that is executed in a manner that "when it appears, the rate of stopping at jackpot symbols becomes 100%", special reception permission sounds are output as reception permission sounds of different types. Alternatively, the same type of acceptance permission sound may be output. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM playback is output normally in a non-suppressed manner (when there is a situation where it is easy to mishear the reception permissible sound due to competition with the BGM playback sound), "Special reception permissible sound is output." The operation acceptance performance (validity period) in which the after-operation performance is executed in such a manner that ``when it appears, the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol becomes 100%'' may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation reception performance (valid period) in which ``the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in the manner that ``the ratio of stopping at the jackpot symbol when it appears is 100%'', reception is permitted. No matter which type of sound is output, the post-operation performance will not be executed in a manner that "when it appears, the rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol will be 100%", and this mode was not prepared in the first place. It may be something that has not yet been completed.

In addition, during the valid operation period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs when the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed and the normal valid period, an image display that imitates the operating means used as the operation target and a valid A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to urge the player to perform the operation. In this regard, at least during the operation validity period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed, if the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the "production ``Processing related to displaying a special effect that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing within the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)'' and ``the elapsed time from the timing when the effect was accepted. It is desirable to start "processing related to special effect sound that is continued until reaching a predetermined time value." According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the timing within the validity period at which the performance was accepted based on the remaining amount of the gauge left as a display after the performance is accepted. This makes it possible to predict whether the process related to displaying the special effect (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) will end soon. In addition, as a method for starting the post-operation performance while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, use any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, or use the contents described below. is possible.

In the above explanation example, regarding the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as "specific type production patterns" that output the sound of "BGM playback" in a suppressed mode or silently, the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number to be less than the number of performance patterns that are prepared (memorized) as "other performance patterns" that are not output without sound, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the relevant performance occurs. .

In addition, if multiple production patterns are prepared as "production patterns" in which the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, these production patterns include a mode in which the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed for a first set time. Alternatively, the production pattern includes a production pattern in which the sound is output silently and a production pattern in which the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed or output in silence for a second set time longer than the first set time, and in these production patterns, the jackpot symbol is It is desirable to have different levels of expectation. According to such a configuration, when the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed or output in silence, it is possible to indicate the degree of jackpot expectation based on how long the state continues. .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is enabled (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where symbol variation is not being executed (demonstration state, etc.), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even when symbol variation is being executed, it is possible to execute a process for changing the setting value by the player regarding the volume (volume setting value). However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always outputted even if the volume setting value is changed while the symbol variation is being executed. In other words, in a pachinko machine 1 in which a "performance pattern in which the BGM playback sound is suppressed or output without sound" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is always not output during symbol fluctuations regardless of the production pattern. In this case, players who see that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not being output become aware of the possibility that a "volume suppression effect" is being executed, and are expected to maintain their enjoyment of the game. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the production display device 1600 displays a display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed. This is desirable in order to make the person aware of the possibility that a "volume suppression effect" is being executed. "Do not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but in addition to being output with a volume of 0, the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. .

Regarding the special performance sound that is output based on the reception of the production when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state, the special production sound is output for a period of time that is more than twice the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable to configure it so that the output state is maintained. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed, It becomes possible to make the output time (special effect sound) longer than the output time up to timing ts15.

[Game machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
Incidentally, in the above description, a gaming machine is described in which the tray unit 320 is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player by pressing and can also present a performance image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 143 to 165, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's desire to operate will be described. Note that the performance control of the performance operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 143 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit 5000. FIG. 144 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit 5000. Here, the sword performance operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, and the same components as described above will be given the same reference numerals, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword performance operation unit 5000 stores a sword part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a blade part 5011 of the sword part 5010. It constitutes a sword decoration body 5001 consisting of a sheath part 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 is movable in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the direction of drawing the sword and the direction of shedding the sword. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 stored in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing performance, the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player due to the sword drawing action. Then, the sword section 5010 in the unsheathed state can function as an operation means that receives a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of an opportunity to execute a sword drawing performance involving movement of the sword performance operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001). FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword drawing performance can be performed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of variation pattern. and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform battohon effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed after the battou preparation transition performance is executed, a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance performed in advance, and a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance performed in advance. However, there are patterns in which the battō main performance is not performed, patterns in which neither the battō preparation transition stage nor the battō main performance is performed, and the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the battō main performance. Two patterns are provided: one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 145(A), depending on the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect. Here, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation when winning a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation when winning a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for losing fluctuation when a loss occurs, and fluctuations that result in an advantageous result for the player. It is set such that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the drawing preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition performance is executed with a 50% probability when the variation pattern is for a jackpot variation, with a 30% probability when it is a variation pattern for a small hit variation, and when it is a variation pattern for a loss variation. It will be executed with a 20% probability. In addition, the probability of the deviation variation time fluctuation pattern may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a reach effect so that the probability of performing a draw preparation transition effect is higher when a reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), depending on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition effect, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to perform the drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is set to be higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set such that the probability that the battohon performance will be executed increases as the variation pattern yields an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword draw preparation transition effect is executed is higher than the probability that the sword draw main effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed with the fluctuation pattern for winning fluctuations, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed is higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is not performed with the fluctuation pattern for small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for jackpot variation, the main drawing performance is always executed regardless of whether or not there is a drawing preparation transition performance.

In addition, when the battou main performance is executed, the battou preparation transition performance is executed in advance, and the more advantageous the result is for the player, the higher the probability that the battou main performance with the aura member will be executed. It is set so that In addition, here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the battohon performance with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition due to the unsheathing action of the sword decoration and the movement of the aura member)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword drawing motion of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing performance (sword preparation transition performance and sword drawing main performance) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself that can accept the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword part 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 146, 147), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011), and the sword part 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (the aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 148 and 149).

FIG. 146 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself. The sword is drawn, and (C) the second sword is drawn. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 147 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

The sword decoration body 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 146(A). In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition performance, only the part of the blade 5011a that is fitted in the hand of the blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and is visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 146(B). It becomes the state where the first sword is drawn. Then, as shown in FIG. 146(C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the main sword drawing performance is a second drawn sword in which the blade part 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting a sword sheathing operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently apart from the unsheathing operation of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is attached to the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 146(A)) to the first drawn state (FIG. 146(B)). The blade portion 5011 is deformed by moving the movable range inside the portion 5020 from the closed state (FIG. 147(A)) to the open state (FIG. 147(B)) as far as possible (maximum movement). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state (FIG. 146(C)). Note that, as will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is operated at its maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is enclosed in the blade portion 5011, as shown in FIG. 147(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear movement of the rack 5031a in the right direction and the rack 5032a in the left direction. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

Further, below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it becomes possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the state changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011 to change from the closed state to the open state. Although an example has been shown in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state after deforming the sword, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the mode in which the sword is fully moved, but also includes the mode in which the motion is stopped midway) ).

FIG. 148 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath 5020, (A) sheathed state, (B) first unsheathed state, (C) Shows the second sword drawn state. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 149 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 147 and 148 described above are given the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 148(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that accommodates the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is While the aura member 5030 provided therein is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Moreover, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member attached, the aura member 5035 can change the state of the blade part 5011 (in the sheathed state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. ⇔ First sword drawn state ⇔ Second sword drawn state). This allows the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integrated decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 149(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that its upper end is below the leaf 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and includes a hollow cylindrical enclosing aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011, and an enclosing aura member 5036 It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow space, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is transferred to the right side of the rack. This is converted into an upward linear movement of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second drawn state, as shown in FIG. 149(B). At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED board having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

In addition, here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade part is moved while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start its operation (combining) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final state based on the performance pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state with maximum movement, but also the intermediate appearance with stopping the movement midway) (including a form with an aura member attached). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sheathed state to the first sword drawn state.

(Other performance pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 150 to 152 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decoration body 5001 described above. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means and detects a sword draw operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbols form a ready-to-reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-reach state (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 150(A1)). 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is held still above the display area with a part of the blind visible to the player (initial state). There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach effect, after an image of the princess heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 150 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is started and the valid operation period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved vertically little by little from the time the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Good too. Then, when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player is an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001, lifts the sword 5010 upward, and pulls out the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword unsheathing operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel a movement different from his/her own sword drawing operation through the handle 5012 held by the player, such as vertical movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012). Bye. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player takes his hand off the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing it again to confirm the detection, etc.) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body. I can do it.

When the player performs a sword drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the level of expectation, when the player performs a sword drawing operation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible to the player. You can do it like this.

When the ending pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is placed in a stationary state (initial state) above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. state), and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect using the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a detached mode "767" (FIG. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result shown in FIG. You can do it like this.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the center of the front (lower part of the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is moved to fall to a state where only the hold display area is visible (full fall state) (FIG. 151 (D1)).Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600.At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second drawn state (FIG. 151 (D2)). Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns may be provided for displaying the princess's shadow in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For example, By varying the color and size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterward, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Hime Reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the gaming profit when winning, etc.) .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second drawn state due to the sword drawing operation by the player, that is, after the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword drawn state changes. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). When the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is An image of the princess being surprised when the blinds are removed is displayed (FIG. 152 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword drawing operation was performed, and if the result of the current variable display is a win, the win will be announced with a smiling princess in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image is displayed (FIG. 152 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the princess of the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIG. 152 (F1) (F2)).

Note that when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but a movable effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is used. If the player is unable to move due to the player holding the sword when executing the command, an announcement or display such as "Please let go of the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration body 5001, but the sword decoration body 5001 will be operated by the player at the timing of movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction (FIG. 151 (D3)). If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movement performance in the left and right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left-right direction has been performed, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the effect of the falling movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) have progressed. Since the game is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. Note that the sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to perform a movement effect in the left and right direction immediately when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured so as not to perform a movement effect. You can.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation performance (operation valid) of the sword decoration 5001 is moved to fall by the player's unsheathing operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved to the left (to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, it becomes possible to move the sword decoration body 5001 itself to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, increasing the value of the player's operation and increasing the player's motivation for the operation. It is possible to suppress the decline of In addition, one operating means is configured to be able to operate in stages that differ in accordance with the player's operations (in the vertical direction during operation, and in the left and right directions after operation), thereby providing an effect that uses multiple movable modes. The operating value of the operating means can be increased compared to conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Note that the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction is performed for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory). Although the operation position is displaced from the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after performing a sword drawing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. You may also perform a horizontal movement effect in which the object is displaced to the left (to the left end of the frame). Furthermore, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration 5001 in this example is a vertical movement (a sword drawing movement that pulls up the sword part 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation is based on the operation. As for the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (such as the left-right direction in this example) that is different from the direction of movement (up-down direction here) during operation by the player.

Furthermore, when a sword draw operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the end of the operation. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, unnecessary contact such as touching the operating section again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and the subsequent movement performance of the sword decoration body 5001 being delayed, or from damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movable effect cannot be performed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to take his/her hand off, and the player is requested to perform the operation during the operation validity period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection and notification operation is completed, the operational value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other performance pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 153 to 155 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the fluctuation in execution will be a jackpot, and an operation effect of the operation button 410 are shown. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as a performance will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 153(A)), first, the valid operation period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is reached. The game is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 153(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which an expectation level suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Afterwards (FIG. 153 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation level is displayed (FIG. 154 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current variable display (big hit, miss) is announced (FIG. 154 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggesting effect for the fluctuating display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation level (FIG. 154 (N2)), a pre-reading effect may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character may appear that changes the pending display.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In FIG. 153 (M1), an effect image is displayed that suggests that an operation performance that requests the sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a start image for the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message with the title "Chance to draw your sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to sheath your sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second sword is drawn, and the effective period for operating the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state, and the production is performed. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). Then, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, an effect is performed based on the result of the current variable display.

If the result of this variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) will be moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state ( Figure 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is incorrect, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will only stop moving in small increments in its initial state. , In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") notifying the miss is displayed (FIG. 155 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the level of expectation and developing operation effects of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible, and the player presses the operation button 410. It is not possible to determine the subsequent development at the time of operation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to operate and a decrease in interest in the game, which may occur due to the monotonous performance after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing the sword decoration 5001) are different in the operation mode (pressing operation and sheathing operation). This request is made to the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operations.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sheathing the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operating means that is effective for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has relatively lower expectations than the sword decoration 5001 used for the first time. is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 156 to 160 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-reach performance. Here, a pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that results in a jackpot when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) does not move based on the pressing operation and is displayed in a dislocated state, the pattern display in the dislocated state is re-varied and the player is given the opportunity to operate it again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) I will explain about it.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , the message "You can move the movable body with a single button press" is displayed (FIG. 156(B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the press operation of the operation button 410 starts. An operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the user (FIG. 156(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a press operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one time), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state during the valid operation period of the operation button 410. You can do it like this. Further, if the sword decoration body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves and a jackpot is achieved, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully fallen state. (FIG. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image notifying the jackpot (a decorative pattern The stop mode "777" and the message "Good job" are displayed (FIG. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is only stopped from moving in small increments and is allowed to fall. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 158 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern that is set, A pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a dislocated manner ("767") or a revival pattern in which the ready-to-reach state is restored again is developed.

In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 changes from the oscillating display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-place mode shown in FIG. samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 158 (P3)), the decorative pattern becomes ready again and is displayed in a reduced size at the top right of the screen, and the operation button 410 or the operation means of the sword decoration 5001 is placed in the center of the screen. An operation-enabled suggestion image (the face of an ally samurai with closed eyes) is displayed (FIG. 158 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically little by little in the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). This increases the player's expectations for the performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory). Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down while changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Then, depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY is based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001. (bamboo blind yakumono) will be performed. Note that the pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower level of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as an operation means, an image of sweat on the forehead of a samurai (operation button confirmation image), which is an operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 159 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) continues to move in small increments, and the operation button 410 is illuminated with light, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, and an operation that prompts the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 159 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light-emitting decoration is no longer displayed.

If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the full falling state. (Figure 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbols that had been displayed at the top right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the screen so that they can be viewed by the player. Note that, as in the case described above (FIG. 155 (M4)), the mode of the decorative symbols may be made difficult for the player to grasp at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and the screen An image notifying the jackpot (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed in the center (FIG. 159 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is off, when the press operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 159 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as an operation means, the operation effectiveness suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is an image in which a samurai whose eyes are closed opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration (confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member attached (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 is valid; however, at this point, the player cannot determine whether the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member attached or not. This can be understood by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved little by little, the second sword drawn state is reached and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the operational validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the display on the production display device 1600 In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that shown in FIGS. 159 (R3) and (R4) described above will be followed (FIG. 160 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same performance transition as in FIG. 159 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

In this way, the level of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so the level of expectation is more powerful than the level of expectation suggested by an image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decline in interest in games can be suppressed. In addition, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operating means that provides an operating opportunity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operation performances.

Although FIGS. 150 to 160 described above show three examples of reach performance patterns using the sword ornament 5001, various performance modes may be combined. This makes it possible to provide a wide variety of effects and further enhance the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 161. Up to now, the sword decoration body 5001 has been provided with two types: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, a form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle part 5012 is adopted. Two types are provided.

FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating the form of a sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-coupling. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so that its form can be changed in two stages by deforming the handle part 5012, and is also provided inside the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3, so that the player can see it from the left and right sides of the sheath part 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left and right direction similarly to the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 161A to 161D are diagrams showing the types (stage changes) of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, and sequentially show stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration body 5001 takes one of the stages 0 form to 3 forms depending on the performance.

As shown in FIG. 161(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 161(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath part 5012 due to the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 161(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 expands and moves from the center to the left and right in half from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 161(D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decoration part 5012b is further moved upward from inside the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decoration part 5012a. Indicates the form. In the stage 1 form to stage 3 form here, it is possible to change the form without bringing the sword decoration body 5001 into the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 that can accept operations by the player as the operating part of the operating means and the sheath part 5020 that does not operate work together to form an integrated decorative body, it is possible to provide a more powerful operating means. I can do it.

(Pre-operation suggestion performance using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 165, a pre-operation suggestion performance that is executed before the operation validity period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational in the ready-to-reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion performance, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation among a plurality of operation means by the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestion pattern based on a pre-operation suggestion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), the operation validity period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position. If the expectation of winning is set high and the operation becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion performance of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162(B)) is such that the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. If this is done, there is a 30% probability that the sword decoration 5001 will be enabled, and a 70% probability that the operation button 410 will be enabled. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 164 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggestion position, In this case, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. Below, examples of performance transitions according to the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern and second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be explained.

(First suggestion pattern)
162 and 163 show that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is selected during the reach effect based on the variation effect (ready-to-reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310 by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162(A)), an operation button is predetermined to be activated by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for either the operation means of the sword decoration body 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific presentation content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 162(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Furthermore, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 remain unchanged.

Then, while maintaining the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) at the initial position, a valid operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is predetermined to be valid. let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 will be valid at a higher rate than the sword decoration 5001. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 162(C), the valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that for the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 162(D), the operational validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with an aura member), allowing the player to sheath the sword.

In the above-mentioned FIG. 162(C) or (D), when an operation on a valid operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, The specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial state and remains unmoved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 164 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid for operation during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is similar to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-win effect that is executed. In addition, in FIG. 165, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration 5001 does not become operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational, and then the sword decoration FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 is enabled for operation.

As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is performed by selecting either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid for operation by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific presentation content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, in addition to displaying the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the production display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small increments in the direction. At this time, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament remain unchanged.

Then, in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position, the operation validity period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be valid is determined. generate. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is validated for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is at the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be considered valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 is determined while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is operating at the suggested position. to occur. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (form with an aura), allowing the player to sheath the sword. Furthermore, even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is activated. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion performance, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is moved from the state in which it is in the suggested position to the initial state. Alternatively, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) may be moved from the state of moving to the suggested position to the fully fallen state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

When an operation on a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected in the above-described FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 162 (C) or (D) is detected. Similarly, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial state and remains unmoved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to a pattern in which it is moved to the suggestion position, but may include a plurality of movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement, so the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is used. It is possible to increase the interest of the used pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance.

(Step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 164 (AA1) to (AA3) before the sword decoration 5001 becomes operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational and then the sword decoration 5001 changes. A step-up pattern that becomes operational is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the step-up pattern is a valid operation period for the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed, that is, before the operation promotion effect for the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of aura) as in FIG. 164 (AA1) described above is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small increments (FIG. 165 (BB1) ). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) being moved to the suggested position, an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Figure 165 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the valid operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most of the blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the valid operation period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operational means to enable the operation are changed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switching notification image (messages such as ``Chance to draw your sword'' and ``I would like you to sheath your sword'') is displayed (Figure 165 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in a state of being moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operational validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is activated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) described above is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (FIG. 163).

Note that in the case of FIG. 165 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect). It is only necessary to have the player operate the sword ornament 5001 after first directing the player's attention to the button operation 410. Furthermore, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the step-up pattern becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is displayed before the valid operation period of one of the plurality of operation means is activated. ) can be changed, and the position indicates the operating means that can be operated effectively. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162(B)) in which the valid operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is valid for operation. A second suggestion pattern in which the operational validity period is generated in a state where the expectation level is high and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position (in FIG. 164 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001 There is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.Therefore, in order to understand which operation means will be effective, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament). It can enhance the interest of the performance.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion performance. Furthermore, since the motion performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is also used to notify the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 163), the falling performance is sequentially performed from the up and down small movement of the pre-operation suggestion performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game. In addition, in the above, we have shown the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that can be operated by the movable body will be valid for operation, but this is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the level of expectation. Furthermore, when the operating means to be enabled is determined, not only is the operating button 410 turned on or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, but the operating means to be enabled is moved by vibration or the like. You may also

In addition, the second suggestion pattern includes the operation button 410 once activated (or after it appears to be activated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position. B) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally effective. This makes the player interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operational immediately after the pre-operation suggestion presentation, the user can expect that the sword ornament 5001 may become operational afterwards, which reduces the motivation to operate and the interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion presentation, an operation presentation suggestion image is displayed before the operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid. (FIG. 162(B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may be arranged to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part, and to move in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. Note that when the operation validity period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so the operation performance suggestion by the first suggestion pattern is given to the player. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), which is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image, is operated at the suggested position, the pre-operation suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a specific performance. Execute the performance based on the pattern. During a performance period in which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (validity period) can be generated in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period. Based on the establishment of specific performance execution conditions, a specific performance during operation (such as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits) can be executed. The degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits suggested as a result of a specific operation performance may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means for providing such an operation effect (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a privilege when operated), an operation is performed. In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include other operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the performance determination (when the specific performance execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), and There are cases in which an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (a case in which a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity, just because the pre-operation effect that gives the operation opportunity occurs, It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation regarding awarding of benefits (the degree of expectation of jackpot) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits suggested may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.), the operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.) It is possible to improve the interest in the game when the performance is at a preliminary stage before being performed and an operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, a desired performance result (such as a performance result that suggests that there is a high level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits) will not appear in the operation performance corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). Even if you are unable to operate the operating means within the specified performance acceptance period (validity period), you can still improve your gaming enjoyment through such operation-related performances. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such dramatic properties. In this case, common operation-related effects can be performed when providing these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the performance mode that generates the valid period (performance reception period) in which the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (performance reception is possible) is performed.
・After the "specific operation-related performance" that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration object 5001 is enabled (direction can be accepted), the operation on the corresponding operation button 410 is enabled (direction can be accepted) after the performance has started. ), a first production mode that generates a valid period (production reception period), and - the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled without the "specific operation-related production" starting to be produced (production can be accepted) A plurality of production modes are prepared, such as a second production mode that generates a valid period (production reception period), and by executing any of these production modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production is activated). A valid period (direction reception period) during which the performance can be accepted is generated.

According to such a configuration, there may occur a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In either case, if a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specified operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can accept production, a common (specific ) operation-related effects can now be executed, it becomes possible to add interest to whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept effects, and such effects can be performed. By having the player perform the operations while the game is being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance was started, the function corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001). A production acceptance period will occur, but at least at the time the production is started, it is not clear which of these operating means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the production reception period will occur. It is desirable to keep it confidential. In addition, for each operation-related production exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) before the production acceptance period occurs. It may also be possible to indicate whether or not the production result will be displayed (by displaying the production result display), or to display multiple operations within the relevant period after the production reception period has occurred, including at the same time as the production reception period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the operation opportunity is given (by displaying a performance result display), and to which timing the operation-related performance is executed. Whether or not to do so can be changed as appropriate.

Hereinafter, several presentation modes that can be adopted when performing such common (specific) operation-related presentation will be sequentially explained. Note that in each of the following explanation examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively used as a plurality of operation means that are the targets of a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of operating means are not limited to these, and three or more operating means may be provided as a plurality of operating means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related performance. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the content of production in the case where any production reception period occurs after a common (specific) operation-related production is executed. ) If any of the performance acceptance periods occur without any operation-related performance being executed, the content of the performance may be omitted. However, in the case that any production acceptance period occurs without any common (specific) operation-related production being executed, the content of the production is ``Unable to operate the operation button 410 without any specific operation-related production being executed. A general effect such as "an operation instruction image prompting the user to operate the sword ornament 5001 appears," or an operation instruction image prompting the user to operate the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and their separate examples, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when a ready-to-reach state is not formed, but if a ready-to-reach state is formed, A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as a separate image from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period when the jackpot game is being executed, or a common operation-related effect may be generated during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

In addition, each of the effects described below can be executed in appropriate combination with each of the different examples of effects described below, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each effect with each other example effect described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. In addition, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform effects of different examples to be described later. The same can be said for each different example of performance described below.

[First performance mode]
166 and 167 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect after the specific operation-related effect is started and during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (first effect mode).

FIG. 166(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, a variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance situation.

FIG. 166(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 166(a) is being executed.

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. A display that moves within each area is displayed. In this way, by simultaneously displaying multiple types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means within the display area, the operation buttons 410 and the sword While it remains unclear which of the decorations 5001 will be accepted for production, it is suggested that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will soon be accepted for production. You will be able to do it.

FIG. 166(c) shows that the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166(b) has progressed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting you to operate one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) while each of them is stopped and displayed within the area (here, a text display such as "Operate" and a direction reception) A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

According to such a performance mode, even though the performance can be accepted for operations on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) It becomes possible to make it unclear which of the following is considered to be able to accept productions. This means that the same performance mode (FIG. 166(c)) is obtained in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the performance and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the performance. It's only because it's displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) is activated even before the production can be accepted. (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001), common (specific) operation-related events as shown in FIGS. 166(b) and (c) I try to execute the performance.

Therefore, not only in this production example but also in each production example and other examples described below, the production content of a specific operation-related production is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 166(b) and (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect) It is sufficient if the problem occurs during the following period. With such a configuration, at least one of the operating means (the operating button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) can be used, while it remains unclear which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is capable of receiving the performance. It is possible to suggest that an operation for one can be accepted as a production. For example, multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, and button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously. It is also possible to make none of the images SYG appear and to make an effect image different from any of them appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is allowed to receive effects, it is important to keep in mind that there will be a presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 and for the sword decoration 5001. It is more desirable to set the same amount of time required from when a specific operation-related performance is executed (start of performance) to when the performance reception period occurs, regardless of whether the reception period occurs.

In addition, as for the operation instructions displayed while a specific operation-related performance is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting the user to operate one of the operation means ("Operate! '', etc.), or always operate a specific operating means among the plural operating means, regardless of how each of the plural operating means is enabled to receive the production. It may also be possible to provide a display prompting the user to do so. The point is that the same performance mode appears in both the situation where the operation instruction is accepted as an operation on the operation button 410 and the situation where the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted as the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of receiving a performance.

Furthermore, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 166(c), which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can be operated is kept secret. , when operations on the sword decoration 5001 can be performed, and when operations on the sword decoration 5001 cannot be accepted (in any of the first to third situations described below). ), only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a light-emitting state to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration 5001 side so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are not emitted. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. Either the first situation is that the performance can be accepted, or the second situation is that only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are the same. Both are set to be in one of the third situations in which the performance can be accepted. Note that among these multiple situations, when the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs, the first situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) occurs. The level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is set to be higher than when the situation (situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is lower than the rate at which the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) It is desirable to ensure that the rate of occurrence is lower than the rate at which the

In this production example (first production mode), the operation button 410 is operated when in either the first situation (operation button 410) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). is performed (the progress indicated by "FF" in the figure is made), or in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 (when "GG" progresses in the figure), a production is accepted and a production at the time of operation corresponding to the operation is performed (FIGS. 167(d) and 167(f)). is now being carried out.

In the operation performance, in either of the situations shown in FIGS. 167(d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. ("Chance!!") is executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "Chance!!" which suggests a relatively low level of expectation, and "Very hot!!" which suggests a relatively high level of expectation. A plurality of presentation modes such as the above may be prepared, and one of these presentation modes may be displayed in response to reception of the presentation, thereby indicating the degree of expectation regarding the granting of the benefit. Similarly, regarding the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, it is possible to have a presentation mode in which it does not move to the front of the display area, and to make one of these presentation modes appear in response to the reception of the presentation. , the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits may be indicated. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time performance according to this performance example (first performance mode), the performance is accepted by the player's operation in either of the situations shown in FIGS. 167(d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, control can be executed to place the operating means in an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(d), even though the player has performed an operation on the operation button 410, the operation is not performed in response to the reception of the performance. It is possible to perform control to reciprocate the sword ornament 5001 on the side that is not being operated between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which a production reception occurs as a result of an operation performed by a player on the operation button 410 and a production at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side is executed, the “operation Even if the button 410 was not operated and the sword decoration 5001 on the side with higher expectations was operated, the presentation reception occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 side was executed. ” It becomes possible to appeal to players the possibility of such a possibility.

On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(f), as a result of the player performing a sword drawing operation on the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sheathed position in response to the reception of the performance. It is possible to perform control to maintain the sword at the drawn position (sword drawn state) rather than returning it to the sheathed state. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sheathed position (sheathed state) to the drawn position (sword drawn state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in this drawn state. Occasionally, effects will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time By checking the operating state of the sword decoration body 5001, the user can feel that the operation effect caused by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 side is being performed.

After the operation effect (FIGS. 167(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 167(e). However, since there is a possibility that a performance using the sword decoration body 5001 will be executed during the execution period of the reach performance, whichever is the difference between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (at a stage before the reach effect starts), the sword ornament 5001 is set to a non-operated state (sword sheathed position (sword sheathed state)) Control will be carried out to return it to . However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword ornament 5001, at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position) It is desirable that the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance of the sword in the unsheathed state) be continued for a period of . In addition, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumption is required to terminate the operating state earlier than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

According to the production example (first production mode) shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001), whether or not the performance can be accepted, a common (specific) operation-related performance is started, and the common (specific) While an operation-related performance is being performed, a specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) may be enabled to accept the performance, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) may not be able to accept the performance. Since the operation button 410 is now enabled to receive effects, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are each enabled to accept effects. It will be possible to give the opportunity to operate while keeping the information hidden.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is enabled to receive production, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is Regardless of whether or not the operation buttons 410 are enabled to accept productions without being able to receive them, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, the operation buttons 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 is designed to emit light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is said to be able to accept performances, the sword decoration 5001 is not considered to be able to accept performances. You will be able to mislead yourself as if it is not there. In other words, in this case, when the performance is accepted, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side, rather than the sword decoration 5001, which is the side where a relatively highly expected performance is performed. It is expected that when a common (specific) operation-related performance is performed, it will be interesting to determine which operation means to operate.

In addition, if the operating means on the side that is not allowed to accept the production (the side for which the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to have the user enjoy the disadvantage that the performance acceptance period is used up and the remaining time is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept productions (the side for which the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, the above operation Although the performance reception required to execute the performance (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display performance, etc.) will not be established, the detection of the operation itself will be performed, and the operation on the side that can accept the performance based on the detection. Control may be performed to end the performance acceptance period for the means at that point. With such a configuration, there is a risk of losing the opportunity to operate, so it is recommended to have the player carefully consider which of the multiple operating means is available for production. become able to.

In addition, in the above production example (first production mode), the same production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is performed between the operation performance on the operation button 410 side and the operation performance on the sword decoration body 5001 side. However, these operations may be performed with different contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 side, in addition to the effect performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light) , the generation of unique performance sounds, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted as a performance.

In addition, when preparing another performance mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, the occurrence of the other production mode may be In the case where the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. A performance reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, it is the operation button 410). In either case, when the first operating means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 166(c), the operation effect may be performed. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the first operating means when a production reception period related to the occurrence of the above-mentioned different production mode is set while a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, but a production reception period related to the occurrence of the above-mentioned different production mode is not set while a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed ( When there is an operation on the first operation means (when the production reception period for the second operation means is set), another production mode is not executed as the operation time production, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same effect will be performed during the operation. In short, when the production reception period related to the generation of another production mode is not set for the first operation means, the production reception period related to the generation of the production at the time of operation on the second operation means side is set to the production reception period related to the generation of the production at the time of operation on the second operation means side. The settings are made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another performance mode appear as an operation performance, instead of making the other performance mode appear in addition to the performance mode performed in the operation performance on the second operation means side, the second operation The performance during operation may be performed as a performance content different from the performance during operation on the means side.

In addition, in the above production example (first production mode), a situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related production is being performed refers to A first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted as a performance, a second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted as a performance, and an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The settings are made so that both the operation and the operation of the above correspond to one of the third situations in which the performance can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect will appear when the effect is accepted, whereas in the third situation, the same operation effect will appear when the effect is accepted. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned different effect mode (different from the effects during operation in the first situation and the second situation) be made to appear. However, in the above production example, the third situation does not necessarily have to be present.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above production example is not provided as an operation means to which driving force is applied under control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above performance example (first performance mode), in the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(f), as well as in the performance situation shown in FIG. 167(d), no operation is performed by the player. Control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In addition, in this kind of control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side where no operation was performed by the player, and at this time, it is also important to operate the operating means on the side where the operation was performed by the player. Whether this is the case or not can be determined as appropriate. However, the control for operating the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to its initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end this operating state so that the player's gaze naturally returns to the game board 5 side.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies a driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, they may be driven by the same driving source. It goes without saying that the driving sources provided corresponding to these operating means are provided as a driving source different from the driving source for the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). In addition, examples of the "movement" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) generated by such a drive source include "movement", "rotation", "swinging", "vibration", etc. This is not limited to this production example, but also applies to other production examples.

[Second performance mode]
168 to 171, a specific operation-related performance is executed as a performance showing the performance progress until either the first performance result or the second performance result appears. When the first performance result appears as a result of this, it is suggested that a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means will occur, and when the second performance result appears as a result of the performance, the plurality of operation means It is a diagram showing an example of a performance (second performance mode) in which it is suggested that a performance acceptance period will occur for the sword decoration body 5001.

FIG. 168(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the current performance situation.

FIG. 168(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 168(a) is being executed.

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. It depicts the lightning image IZ acting on these images BTG and SYG simultaneously. In this way, by simultaneously displaying multiple types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means within the display area, the operation buttons 410 and the sword While it remains unclear which of the decorations 5001 will be accepted for production, it is suggested that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will soon be accepted for production. You will be able to do it.

FIG. 168(c) shows that the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168(b) has progressed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is being performed in which the players push each other within the display area of the device 1600 and try to push the other party out of the display area.

In other words, the specific operation-related performance (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) of this performance example (second performance mode) is as follows: "The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG push each other, Which of BTG and SYG will be left in the display area is executed as a production. When a production result (first production result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, production reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and a performance result (second performance result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, a performance reception period for the sword decoration object 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. This corresponds to "a specific operation-related performance that can appear prior to the occurrence of such period even if the period occurs."

Note that the diagram on the left side of FIG. 168(c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area, while the diagram on the right depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area. It depicts a favorable situation for remaining within the territory. In a specific operation-related performance, the situation of inferiority and superiority changes moment by moment as time passes.

FIG. 169(d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains within the display area. A performance depicting the following is being performed (first performance result). When the production progresses to this content, the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

In other words, a specific operation-related performance (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) indicating that an operation opportunity will be provided soon is performed while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to accept the performance. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 169(d)). By executing the above, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be performed (a period for accepting the effect on the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display prompting the operation (a text display such as "Press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed, so that multiple It becomes possible to recognize that the operation of the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (that the operation is in the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this performance example, the user is encouraged to operate the operation button 410 by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to a light emitting state.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) may be advanced through a specific operation-related effect (such as FIGS. 168(b), (c), etc.), or may be progressed without going through the specific operation-related effect. The presentation may progress (for example, the presentation progresses from the presentation state shown in FIG. 168(a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed, if the effect is performed after going through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is higher than that of the recipients.

In addition, regarding the length of the performance acceptance period, if a performance is performed in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 after a specific operation-related performance (FIG. 169(d)), the specific operation-related performance The rate at which the length of the production reception period that occurs for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the production in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without going through the process (FIG. 169(d)) is performed. It is desirable to have a high value. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to a delay in performance, which will be described later, when a specific operation-related performance is performed.

FIG. 169(e) shows that while the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is being performed, an operation is performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means, and as a result, the effect is accepted and the user responds to the operation. This is a depiction of the performance being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e) is the same as that in FIG. 167(d). That is, in the operation performance shown in FIG. 169(e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display performance ("Chance!!") is executed on the performance display device 1600. It has become. At this time, even though the player has operated the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation has not been performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the reception of the effect. Similarly, control for reciprocating movement to and from the position (control for bringing the device into an operating state) is also possible. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "Chance!!" which suggests a relatively low level of expectation, and "Very hot!!" which suggests a relatively high level of expectation. A plurality of presentation modes such as the above may be prepared, and one of these presentation modes may be displayed in response to reception of the presentation, thereby indicating the degree of expectation regarding the granting of the benefit. Similarly, regarding the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, it is possible to have a presentation mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not move to the front side of the display area, and to make one of these presentation modes appear in response to a presentation reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

After such an operation effect (FIG. 169(e)) is performed, a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 169(f). However, since there is a possibility that a performance using the sword decoration 5001 will be performed during the execution period of the reach performance, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the execution of the operation performance (the reach performance will start) At an earlier stage), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to a non-operating state (sword sheathed state). However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword ornament 5001, at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position) It is desirable that the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance of the sword in the unsheathed state) be continued for a period of . In addition, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumption is required to terminate the operating state earlier than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 170(g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is pushed inside the display area. A production depicting the situation left behind is being performed (second production result). When the production progresses to this content, the production reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

In other words, a specific operation-related performance (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) indicating that an operation opportunity will be given soon is executed while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to accept the performance. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 170(g)). By executing the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be performed (the period for accepting the performance for the sword decoration 5001 occurs). .

In addition, at this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001, an instruction display prompting for operation (such as a text display such as "Draw your sword" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the performance can be accepted (that is, during the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001). In particular, in this production example, of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, only the operation unit including the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to be in the light emission state) is set to the light emission state. This also prompts the user to operate the sword ornament 5001.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) may be advanced through a specific operation-related effect (such as in FIGS. 168(b), (c), etc.), or may be performed without going through the specific operation-related effect. The presentation may progress (for example, the presentation progresses from the presentation state shown in FIG. 168(a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed, if the effect is performed after going through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is set higher than that of the granting of benefits. Furthermore, if the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation regarding the granting of the benefit is higher than that in the case where the expectation level regarding the granting of the benefit is higher than that in the case where the performance shown in FIG. desirable.

FIG. 170(h) shows that while the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is being performed, an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means, and as a result, the effect is accepted and the operation is responded to. This is a depiction of the performance being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 170(h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e), in which the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, a production mode such as "Very hot!!" that suggests a relatively high level of expectation is displayed in response to the production reception, but it also suggests a relatively low level of expectation. "Chance!!" may be displayed. Similarly, regarding the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, a presentation mode is provided in which the action of not displacing it toward the front side of the display area is provided, and one of these presentation modes is made to appear in response to a presentation reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation performance shown in FIG. 170(h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the performance mode of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned multiple modes ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. The height is now suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170(i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 170(h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sheathed state, but is maintained in the unsheathed state. That is, in this production example, although not shown, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state, and then (during the period when the reach performance is performed, etc.), the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the sheathed state. Further operation opportunities are provided, and at that time, it is possible to further perform an operation performance corresponding to the operation to the sheathed state.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword drawn state) and the second stage operation (Operation to put the sword in the sheathed state) In response to each operation, a performance will be performed at the time of operation, so not only when operating the operation means (sword decoration body 5001), but also during the first stage. It is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained even during the non-operation period from when the first operation (operation to the sword drawn state) is performed until the second stage operation (operation to the sheathed state) is performed. Become so. Note that it is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation be in mutually different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Furthermore, it is desirable that the operation-time performance corresponding to the first-stage operation and the operation-time performance according to the second-stage operation have different performance contents.

In addition, when the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state; In this case, it is desirable that the second stage operation opportunity not be granted. In the operation performance corresponding to the first stage operation, is the sword ornament 5001 maintained at a position (sword drawn state) that allows the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from sword drawn state to sheathed state) to be given? It may also be performed as an effect that suggests the level of expectation of whether or not the event is expected. In other words, when the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the drawn state and is returned to the sheathed state, it is virtually impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (opportunity to change from the drawn state to the sheathed state). It is clear that this will become the case. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

Note that if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the unsheathed state as a result of the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation, when the predetermined time elapses, the reach effect is performed. (before the start of the process), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to a non-driving state (sword sheathed state). However, in this case, the sword ornament 5001 remains in its operational state (reciprocating It is desirable to continue the action (or to maintain the sword in a drawn state). In addition, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumption is required to terminate the operating state earlier than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 171(j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 169(d). An effect depicting the button image BTG being left in the display area is performed. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the production shown in FIG. 168(c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 169(d) or the production shown in FIG. 170(g) Either the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) or the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) appears. It should be noted that which performance content will appear is determined in advance in the performance pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the production shown in FIG. 171(j), unlike the production shown in FIG. (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) continues, suggesting the possibility that some kind of change will occur in the button image BTG due to such a lightning bolt image IZ.

Furthermore, in the performance shown in Figure 171(j), no instruction display prompting for operation (text such as "Press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is not displayed, as compared to Figure 169(d). ) is different from the case of the production shown in . As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains within the display area, the production acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something becomes recognizable.

FIG. 171(k) shows that as a result of the development of the effect shown in FIG. 171(j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, and the button image BTG is enveloped in mist MY, and even its outline is lost. A performance that will leave you completely blown away is being performed.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the effect can be accepted by operating the operation button 410 are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation where the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) once suggests that the effect can be accepted for the operation on the operation button 410, the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) appears. This makes it possible to raise doubts as to whether the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Note that in the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) continues. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the time remaining until it is definitively shown for which of the multiple operation means the production acceptance period will occur is becoming shorter. This suggests that

FIG. 171(i) shows that as a result of the development of the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), the outer shape of the mist MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production depicting what happened is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed yet, the appearance of the mist MY suggests that there is a possibility that a performance reception period will occur for the sword decoration object 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to do it.

Furthermore, in the performance shown in FIG. 171(i), the performance display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related performance (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) continues. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ has changed further (just before it disappears) than in FIG. This suggests that the remaining time is getting shorter and shorter.

In this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 171(i) further progresses and the mist MY comes to be hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The effect shown in (g) is now performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even in the case (FIGS. 169(d) and 171(j)), there remains a possibility that a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, so it is necessary to maintain the interest in the game. You will be able to do this.

In particular, in this production example (second production mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the production display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIG. 169(d), FIG. 171(j)) , by checking whether the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and 168(c)) is still continuing, the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 can be improved. It is possible to ascertain whether there is still a possibility that the acceptance period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain interest in the game.

In this production example (second production mode), at the time when the production shown in FIG. 171(j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the mist MY (FIG. 171(k)), and further When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) always occurs. In this sense, although the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG, contrary to this display content, the effect shown in FIG. It can also be said that this is a performance that suggests that a performance acceptance period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, as the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG ) may be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape of the button may also appear, and when this effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) may be performed. In addition, in the case where such a performance pattern can be performed, the performances shown in FIGS. 171(j) and (k) also conceal which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to accept the performance. This will be executed as a specific operation-related performance.

Further, in addition to providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, even in the production situation shown in FIG. 170(h) among the above production examples (second production mode), the production situation shown in FIG. 169(e) Similarly to the performance situation shown in , it may be possible to perform control to operate the operation button 410 on the side that has not been operated by the player. In addition, in this kind of control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side where no operation was performed by the player, and at this time, it is also important to operate the operating means on the side where the operation was performed by the player. Whether this is the case or not can be determined as appropriate.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies a driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different driving sources. Alternatively, they may be driven by the same driving source. It goes without saying that the drive sources provided corresponding to these operating means are provided as drive sources different from the drive sources for the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessories). In addition, examples of the "movement" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) caused by such a drive source include "movement", "rotation", "swing", "vibration", etc. This is not limited to this production example, but also applies to other production examples.

[Third performance mode]
172 to 175 are diagrams illustrating a production example (third production mode) that is basically the same as the second production mode with respect to a specific operation-related production, but is different from the second production mode. It is.

FIG. 172(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance situation.

FIG. 172(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 172(a) is being executed. However, as shown in FIG. 172(b), in the specific operation-related production according to this production example (third production mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the production display device 1600 is operated. This indicates that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will soon be able to accept the performance.

In particular, in this performance example (third performance mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. By doing so, it is easily possible that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be able to receive the effect even when the effect display related to the operation has not yet been performed on the effect display device 1600 side. I'm trying to make it recognizable. Note that here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to when they are respectively moved to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity. Each of them is operated at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, even if there is an operation means for which there is still time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means for which the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends, Regardless, these operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) operate respectively. Therefore, if there is still time left until the production acceptance period occurs, or if the production acceptance period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change ends, the gaming interest for those operations will be reduced. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In this performance example (third performance mode), instead of displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600, a specific operation-related performance is performed by each operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (FIG. 172(b)). After the start, basically the same performance progress as the second performance mode described above is made.

For example, among the effects shown in FIG. 172(c), the effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from each other except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operation button 410". , the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 168(b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172(c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168(b), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated from their initial positions (non-driving positions). It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 172(c), even with such a movable effect, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect.

In addition, in the performance shown in FIG. 172(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are placed in positions different from their initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related performance is started. In addition, the operating state (driving force applied state) is set at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is provided.

In other words, if such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect will be delayed compared to the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect being performed. If an operating means is employed, even if such an operation-related performance is finally completed, it will be necessary to operate the operating means on the side that is enabled to receive the performance at least to the operating position. Therefore, the performance related to the operation is further delayed by the time required for these operations, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this production example (third production mode), during the period when a specific operation-related production is performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are set to both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. He is trying to position it in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related production ends and a production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the production reception period occurred can be operated to the operating position in a shorter time, or the production reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest due to the prolongation of the performance related to the operation. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned in an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that even though it is in the operation state, the production reception period It becomes possible to easily recognize that this event itself has not yet occurred.

Then, as the effect shown in FIG. 172(c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is "movable operation button". 410'', the contents of the effect are as described with reference to FIG. 168(c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 172(d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. It is arranged to be in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 172(c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). In contrast to the simulated display, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, by deliberately making the aspects of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the aspects of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to make them consistent in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will change, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration object 5001 will operate) will occur.

Further, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 172(d), when the performance shown in FIG. The content of the effect is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 169(d), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operation button 410" at a certain time.

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 173(e), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 169(d), the operation button 410 is in an operating state at the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. (the position when not driven) and the operating position are different from the operating position. That is, in this case, the operation button 410 has been moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), so that the delay in operation-related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

In addition, as for the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), we first create a ``display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where it has been moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed.'' After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and a direction reception period for the operation button 410 is generated to prompt the operation (such as a text display such as "Press", or an effect). A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a state in which it has been moved to the operation position, whereas the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a state in which it has been moved to the operation position, whereas the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect is The mode 410 is different from the "mode of moving to the operating position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect in a manner different from the manner of the operation button 410 at that time, the gap between these aspects will be quickly filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), the effect shown in FIG. 173(f) is performed, and the effect display device 1600 uses the effect shown in FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173(f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169(e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position). , and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of operation at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 173(f)) is performed, a ready-to-reach state is formed and a ready-to-reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 173(g). This is also the same as described with reference to FIG. 169(f).

On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 174(h) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is The effect is as described with reference to FIG. 170(g), except that the instruction content is "push in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as "moved to the operation position". It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174(h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170(g), the operation button 410 is in a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state at the operating position. In other words, in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 has moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), so the length of the operation-related performance can be suitably suppressed. will be done.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 174(h) is "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where it has been moved to the operating position)" After performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and a direction reception period is generated for the sword decoration body 5001 to prompt the operation (a message such as "Push in" is displayed). display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a state in which it has been moved to the operation position, whereas the sword decoration image SYG at the time of the display is The decoration image SYG will be in a different form from "the form in which it has been moved to the operating position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect in a manner different from the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the discrepancy between these aspects can be avoided. It becomes possible to suggest in advance that it will be filled soon (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 174(h), when the performance shown in FIG. 174(i) is performed, the performance display device 1600 uses The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174(i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170(h), the operation button 410 operates in a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. In addition, the sword decoration body 5001 has been returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driven position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 174(i)) is performed, a ready-to-reach state is formed and a ready-to-reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 174(j). is as described with reference to FIG. 169(f).

On the other hand, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 172(d), when the performance shown in FIG. The content of the effect is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 171(j), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operation button 410" at a certain time.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) and the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are at their initial positions It is in an operating state at a position different from both the non-driven position) and the operating position. Even with such an operating condition, it is suggested that the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. You will be able to do this.

As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175(k) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 175(l) is performed, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect shown in FIG. 171(k). The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 have different positions between the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. Both of them are operating in different positions.

As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175(l) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 175(m) is performed, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect shown in FIG. 171(l). The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are in different positions between the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. Both of them are operating in different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 175(m), it is more desirable to make the outer shape of the mist MY closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operating position rather than the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

Note that when the effect shown in FIG. 175(m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174(h) always occurs. In this sense, although the effect shown in FIG. 175(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG, contrary to such display content, the effect shown in FIG. It can also be said that this is a performance that suggests that a performance acceptance period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, as the effect shown in FIG. 175(l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG ) may be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape of ) may also appear, and when this effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173(e) may be performed. In addition, in the case where such a performance pattern can be performed, the performances shown in FIGS. 175(k) and (l) also conceal which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to accept the performance. This will be executed as a specific operation-related performance.

In addition, in the above explanation example, if the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated and the effect is accepted during the valid period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is accepted. Accordingly, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is caused to reciprocate between the first position and the second position (FIG. 167(d), FIG. 169(e), etc.). However, it is sufficient that the sword ornament 5001 on the side that is not being operated is put into an operating state, and the operating state may be, for example, a mode in which it moves to another location and stays there, a mode in which it vibrates, etc. It is possible to adopt. In addition, during the validity period that occurs after a specific operation-related production is executed, if the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 of the sword decoration 5001 are operated and the production is accepted, the production will be processed according to the production reception. It is desirable that the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed is in an operating state (vibration, etc.).

In addition, for such a performance that puts the "operation part on the side that is not being operated" into an active state, the post-operation performance according to the operation will be "expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear, "0", Appears when executed in a mode with a high level of expectation (including ``100''), and the post-operation performance according to the operation is ``high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols, including ``0'' and ``100''). It may not appear when executed in a low mode.

Furthermore, when a post-operation effect is performed by operating one of the two operation sections (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001), the "operation section on the other side that is not being operated" is also activated. , when a post-operation effect is performed by an operation on the other side, the "operation section on the one side that is not operated" may not be brought into the operating state.

Note that in this performance example (third performance mode), the drive source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, they may be driven by the same driving source.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their separate examples, when a "button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)" appears as a presentation result of a specific operation-related presentation, the basic , an operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance, basically the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Among the body 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, the operation performance on the sword accessory side will be performed. In this regard, in the operation performance on the button side, the success performance (specific decorative member SDY is activated) and the failure performance (specific decorative member SDY is not activated) are determined based on the result of the performance lottery corresponding to the jackpot judgment. On the other hand, the operation performance on the sword accessory side is also based on the result of the performance lottery according to the jackpot judgment, and is a success performance (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and a failure performance. (Specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is to appear, and the content of their effect is the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an opportunity is given to operate the operation means on the side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 that is different from the side desired by the player.

It should be noted that the operation effects on the button side and the operation effects on the sword accessory side are the same effects regarding whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, as well as the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600. It may be set as the content.

In addition, in each of the production examples explained above regarding specific operation-related production, a production is performed to determine which of a plurality of operation means is given an operation opportunity, and depending on the result, the operation means on the side is Opportunities for operations will now be given to those who wish to do so. However, there may be cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed, such as a push-and-push between specific operation means, in which a specific operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means no matter which effect results. It may be set as such.

For example, one operation means can be operated in any manner (for example, in a manner to change the sword decoration body 5001 in a sheathed state to a state in which the sword is drawn, or in a manner in which the sword decoration body 5001 in a drawn state is brought into a sheathed state). The operation opportunity may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword ornament 5001 is moved to a state different from either the sheathed state or the unsheathed state while a specific operation-related performance is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 is operated in either mode with the specific operation-related performance. It is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 be moved to the sheathed state or the drawn state when the effect of whether to move the sword or not is shown.

In addition, when a symbol variation in a pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect will be performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. A suggested effect may be performed from within the execution period of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, although an operation opportunity is only given to one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means to which the operation opportunity is not given are For both players, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest related to the operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as for such a production, when the symbol variation in which a specific operation-related production is performed is in a pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation that was completed before this), the specific operation-related production is performed. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the above-described second and third presentation modes and their other examples, as specific operation-related presentations, a plurality of images (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 may occur afterwards. With such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that a performance reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, but the operation of those operations is not possible until the performance reception period occurs. It becomes possible to hide which of the means the performance reception period occurs for. Therefore, multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously, and button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously. It is also possible to make none of the images SYG appear and to make an effect image different from any of them appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even if a performance mode is adopted in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while a specific operation-related performance is being executed, the button image Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period will occur. It happens. In this case, the button image BTG (the image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. In order to execute the performance related to a specific image (for example, the lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) that has been previously used, it is possible to execute the specific operation-related performance as a production content that involves a specific image (for example, a lightning bolt image IZ). This can be said to be important in making it function as a suggestive performance. For example, a specific operation-related effect may be executed as one in which a lightning bolt is dropped towards one of two rocks, and when the lightning strikes one of the rocks, a button image BTG appears from within the rock, and the other By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from inside the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the effect to the effects shown in FIGS. 169(d) and 170(g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related performance may be executed as a performance in which a lightning bolt is dropped towards a rock, and when the lightning strikes the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may appear from within the rock. It is also possible to make the effect progress to the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) or FIG. 170(g). In short, it is desirable to advance the performance as a performance content such that a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance.

Furthermore, in the above-described second and third presentation modes and their separate examples, there are certain cases in which a presentation reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a case in which a presentation reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same amount of time required from when the operation-related performances are executed (start of the performance) until their performance acceptance periods occur. Further, after a specific operation-related performance is performed, it is desirable to set the performance acceptance period to occur for the same amount of time regardless of which operating means is given an operation opportunity.

In addition, multiple production modes are prepared as specific operation-related productions, and depending on which of these production modes the production is performed, the production reception period during which the specific production (operation-time production) can be generated is set. The ratios set for specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, in the second and third production modes described above, and their separate examples, based on the fact that the operation means on the side indicated in the specific operation-related production was operated, the corresponding operation was not performed. When operating the operating means on the side (such as in FIG. 169(e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that was not operated to the initial position after a predetermined time period based on when the operation was performed. You may also do so. However, the period from when the operation means on the side that did not perform the operation to the end of the operation is based on the timing of the operation during the performance reception period, not when the operation was performed. It is desirable to have different time lengths.

In other words, when the operation means on the side shown in a specific operation-related performance is operated, the less time remains in the performance reception period, the more likely it is that the operation means on the side shown in the specific operation-related performance should be operated. It is highly likely that the player was conflicted over whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the playback or the specific operation-related presentation. Therefore, depending on when the operation was performed during the performance reception period (depending on the high possibility that a conflict occurred), the operation means on the side that was not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. Length of time until (possibility that ``Even if you operated the operating means indicated by a specific operation-related effect, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed.'') By varying the length of time for appealing to players, interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, if after a specific operation-related performance is performed, none of the multiple operating means provided for the performance is operated, the multiple operating means provided for the performance when the performance acceptance period ends. It is also possible to operate all of them.

In addition, from the start of a specific operation-related performance until the performance result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectations as the performance result of the specific operation-related performance is displayed. A predetermined effect may be performed that indicates the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body performance may be performed as a predetermined performance, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, , specific decorative member SDY) allows the specific movable body to operate more reliably based on the performance reception within the performance reception period after the specific operation-related performance has been performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

Also, from the start of a specific operation-related performance to the time the performance result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, it corresponds to any one of the images that may appear as a result of the performance. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (eg, operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is used to generate a production reception period regarding a specific production (production such as operating a specific decorative member SDY) While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is intentionally generated only for one side of the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). As a result, it is possible to create a special performance mode in which the performance result is displayed even though the performance related to a specific operation is in the middle stage, and it appears as if the performance has ended, and the performance is performed. This makes it possible to suitably maintain gaming interest while playing. Note that, while a specific operation-related performance is being performed, if an operation on one side of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is accepted, a predetermined performance may be performed based on the reception of the performance. It is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the more highly anticipated performance image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the performance result of the specific operation-related performance.

Here, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001), the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect has a relatively high expectation level. It is desirable to use the lower operating means (for example, the operating button 410) in order to improve the player's interest in the game when the player realizes that the player is in the middle of a specific operation-related performance. .

In addition, if the production reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related production is being performed for multiple operation means, within the production reception period. When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, The degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits may be made to be the same regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) appears as a performance result. The expectation level may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the performance as a specific operation-related performance from the time the specific operation-related performance starts until the performance result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an opportunity to operate is given to the operation means for which the level of expectation is relatively low. However, when a special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed and the benefit is given more easily than when the opportunity to operate is given to the operation means with higher expectations among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to make such expectations high.

Additionally, during each performance acceptance period mentioned above, normally when there is an operation by a player, a performance will be generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the performance acceptance period will still elapse. It may also be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed earlier. According to such an automatic button performance state, each time the performance reception period occurs, the performance at the time of operation will occur without any operation, so it is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. If the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect is performed while such an automatic button effect state is set, and as a result of the effect, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs. Even if there is, the same operation performance as when operating the corresponding operation means will be executed even if the corresponding operation means is not operated within the performance reception period.

However, even if the automatic button presentation state described below is set, the presentation reception period is limited to the operation button 410 of the operation means while a specific operation-related presentation is being performed. In the case where the special operation effect is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period (the automatic button function is prevented from functioning). After this, even if a performance reception period for any of the above plurality of operation means occurs as a result of a specific operation-related performance being performed, the corresponding operation means cannot be operated during those performance reception periods. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed even without the operation (the automatic button function is made to function). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related performance is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. It is now expected to suppress the decline in

In addition, regarding the setting change related to the on/off of the automatic button production state, for example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible not only during the period when symbol fluctuation is not being executed, but also during the period when symbol fluctuation is being executed. It is desirable to do so. For example, when the automatic button presentation state is off and the presentation reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred, if the operation button 410 is operated, the automatic button presentation state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button presentation state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the production state is on, a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if the operation button 410 is operated within the production reception period, an operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed, and an automatic button production state is activated. It is possible to make it possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, it is thought that there may be cases where the player wants to generate an operation-time effect by an operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state on, so for example, if the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation on another operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled, and when the other operation means is operated, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the performance being executed while the automatic button performance state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different when the automatic button presentation state is changed from an off state to an on state and when it is changed from an on state to an off state.

In addition, in the second and third presentation modes described above and their separate examples, the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is imitated as a presentation result of a specific operation-related presentation. While the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, operation opportunities corresponding to the sword decoration images SYG are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (direction reception) is given to the operation button 410. period), and when the second display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (performance reception period) is given to the sword decoration 5001, the first display mode and the second display mode. Any display content may be adopted as the above.

For example, in the second and third presentation modes described above, instead of the presentation images shown in FIGS. 169(d) and 173(e), the presentation image CG shown in FIG. 176(a) (first 176(b) (second display mode) is displayed instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 170(g) and 174(h). Good too. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) are Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect of the specific operation-related effect (nearly the entire effect in the display area is 169(d), FIG. 170(g), FIG. 173(e), and FIG. 174(h) (button image BTG, sword). Unlike the case in which a decorative image SYG) appears, a performance display related to providing an operation opportunity is displayed using almost the entire display area (even by hiding other performance images such as the background part that may suggest the level of expectation). By doing so, it is expected that the game's interest in operation will be improved.

Note that in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176(b), the character is holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001. A second character is displayed to give a hint as to which operating means (operating button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. In this way, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode), there is no need to prepare a effect image that imitates the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 itself. , it is desirable to display an effect image that incorporates aspects such as at least part of the shape and part of the design of these operating means.

In addition, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode) that use the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (Second display mode) Depending on which one of the (second display modes) is displayed, the display may also serve as an effect that suggests different expectations. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a benefit is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of presentation modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared for the presentation image CG (first display mode) and presentation image TG (second display mode), and depending on which presentation mode the presentation image will be displayed. It may also be possible to indicate the level of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the level of expectation will be higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. You can also do this.

Regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the result of that effect (desirably a performance situation with relatively high expectations), and a case where a specific When the operation-related performance is displayed without being executed (for example, after a precursory performance described below that is not a specific operation-related performance is executed) (desirably in a performance situation with relatively low expectations), It may be set as such. In this case, for example, if a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, only the effect will be displayed for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. In contrast to generating a reception period, the button image BTG (first display mode) is If displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) that corresponds to the button image BTG, the production acceptance period also applies to other operation means that do not correspond to the button image BTG (for example, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related performance is not executed and expectations are relatively low, the specific operation-related performance will not be executed. It is now possible to add a different level of interest to the operation compared to when the button image BTG appears in a performance situation with relatively high expectations, and it is possible to improve the game's interest. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword ornament 5001.

In addition, if a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related performance is not executed and expectations are relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the performance acceptance period may be performed. When a performance is accepted, a special operation performance is executed if a predetermined performance condition is met, and when the special operation performance is executed, "a specific operation-related performance is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that a performance situation with a higher level of expectation exists than when the sword decoration image SYG appears in a performance situation with a high expectation level. The expectation level may be 100%.

Here, if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related performance is not executed and expectations are relatively low, the operation means (operation button 410) is operated, the production reception period for another operating means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated to prevent the special operation production from being executed, and in response to the operation on the operating means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect be executed when the user performs a specific operation.

On the other hand, if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related performance is not executed and expectations are relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the performance acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the performance acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also terminated, and the special operation performance can be executed when predetermined performance conditions are met. desirable. In this case, if the predetermined performance conditions are not met, the special operation performance is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is performed. An operation effect may be executed when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated even though an operation means different from the operation means is operated.

In addition, if a specific operation-related effect is executed while the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the above-mentioned button image BTG or sword decoration image SYG as a result of the execution of the effect. Even if a performance acceptance period occurs for an operating means, within the performance acceptance period, the same operation performance as when operating the corresponding operation means will be executed without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, if the button image BTG appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG , even if the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and another operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG will be activated even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the button image BTG is operated is executed, and that a special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

However, within the performance acceptance period, before the specific timing at which the operation-time performance (the performance when operating the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG) is displayed by the automatic button function described above, another If an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is met, a special operation performance is performed in response to the reception of the performance, and a special operation performance is performed when a specific timing has arrived. It is also desirable that the operation effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above will not actually function during the production acceptance period, but the automatic button production state will continue to be on even after the production reception period ends. This is desirable.

Further, in the example of effect described above, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then the effects described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be respectively applied. In other words, in this case, if the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a portent effect described below that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) that corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG, a production acceptance period may also be generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) that does not correspond to the sword decoration image SYG. becomes.

Furthermore, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their separate examples, "button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)", or If any of the "sword decoration images SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (second display mode)" is displayed, and if the presentation is accepted by the operating means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation performance (for example, the performance mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) is the performance content that suggests that the level of expectation is high, and the performance content that suggests that the level of expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make any of the second operation effects (for example, a effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation level is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation performance whose performance content suggests the following will be executed. However, if the first operation-time performance is executed based on a performance reception within the performance reception period that occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the first operation-time performance is (display mode)) is displayed based on the production reception for the operation button 410, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed. It is desirable to imply the same level of expectation when executed based on . The expectation level may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, if a performance image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low level of expectation is displayed as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance, However, as long as the first operation performance is executed based on the reception of the performance, the performance image (sword decoration Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there will be no disadvantages in terms of performance results, so a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes described above that is the target of the timer). In other words, in a timer performance that aims to "give an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity will be given to the operation means soon. This allows you to enjoy the effects during operation. In this case, in the "opportunity to operate the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the performance target of the timer performance, when the operation means is operated, the performance result will be advantageous to the player according to the result of a predetermined performance lottery. It should be possible for either an unfavorable performance result to appear. However, if the "opportunity to operate the operating means" is given as a timer effect, the percentage of effects that are advantageous to the player will be higher than when it is not targeted as a timer effect. It is more preferable to do so. The percentage may be 100%.

In this regard, if a performance pattern appears in which a timer performance is executed with the performance target as ``providing an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001),'' It may also be possible to further perform a specific operation-related effect using "Grant". That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an opportunity to operate the sword decoration object 5001 is given. , before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will appear will be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer performance and the specific operation-related performance are executed for the same performance, the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is provided with an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's enjoyment of the game when playing the game.

However, in this case, two different effects (timer effects, specific operation-related effects) may be simultaneously progressing for one effect (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until just before that effect. , there is a concern that players may not be able to understand which performance they should pay attention to, and their attention may become distracted, which may actually reduce their interest in the game.

Therefore, when performing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the following will be explained with reference to FIG. 177. , until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation related effect" is not executed, and the count value It is desirable to start the "specific operation-related performance" after the count reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when a specific timer performance and a specific operation-related performance are respectively executed for one performance target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). Note that the following timer effects correspond to the aforementioned timer effects on the preview side, and are executed as a result of various processes corresponding thereto.

FIG. 177(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the current performance situation.

FIG. 177(b) shows an effect in which the timer effect starts (here, a countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, "3") during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 177(a). It shows the situation. Note that in the performance situation shown in FIG. 177(b), the "specific operation-related performance" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which performance the timer performance is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer performance according to this example of a performance, first, the count value is set to a predetermined value ( Here, the count reaches "0" and is displayed. After "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value, as shown in FIG. 177(d), the "specific operation-related performance" is started. Note that at the time when the "specific operation-related performance" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the following will be displayed will be executed. In other words, in this case, even though two different performances (a timer performance, a specific operation-related performance) are executed for one performance target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), these performances are Since overlapping in series is avoided, it becomes possible to enjoy each different performance individually.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0") while a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect will target which effect. There is a concern that the player may not be able to recognize whether the game was played as a game or not, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 177(c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0") until a specific operation-related production is started, A performance is performed that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance (providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001).

In the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), first, the effect display device 1600 displays "sheathed sword". This suggests that it was a timer effect aimed at ``providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (operation opportunity by ``sheathing the sword'')''.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177(d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration object 5001 is displayed ("sheathed sword"). ``Specific operation-related effects'' will be started in a situation in which the player is aware that the player will be given an opportunity to perform an operation, which will improve the game's enjoyment. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), the count display (count "0") is changed to the time when "sword sheathed" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It may also be configured to continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer production reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), the sword ornament 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, This also shows that ``giving the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 (the opportunity to operate by sheathing the sword)'' is the target of the timer effect. I'm trying to suggest it.

In addition, regarding the predetermined operation by the sword decoration object 5001, the count is displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration object 5001", but also when the timer effect is directed to other effects. The process may be performed when the value becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as a performance that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance, but functions as a performance that suggests that the count display has reached 0. becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is performed after the count display reaches 0, and before the target performance starts, and when the timer performance is performed as the target performance. The performance that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance is executed at the same timing as or before the start timing, and during the execution state, the performance that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance is also executed. It can be said that it is important to ensure that the

FIG. 177(d) shows a production situation in which a "specific operation-related production" is started.
In this performance situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the performance that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 has also been completed. However, it is important to execute the performance that suggests the type of performance targeted by the timer performance and the predetermined action of the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related performance starts. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related performance has started.

After the "specific operation-related performance" is started in this way, the performance will progress in the order of FIGS. 177(e) to (h). ), FIGS. 170(g) to (i), or FIG. 172(d), and FIG. 174(h) to (j), so the details will be omitted.

Note that as a timer performance performed in conjunction with a specific operation-related performance, either the timer performance shown in FIG. 177 or a timer performance different from the timer performance may be performed based on the result of a predetermined performance lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer performance, the point that a specific operation-related performance is started after the timer performance is started is the same as the timer performance shown in FIG. 177, but the specific operation-related performance is not performed. If the count value does not reach a predetermined value (here "0") according to the start timing (strictly speaking, a little earlier than this), the specific operation-related performance will continue even after the performance has started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance, the benefit grant ( The expectations for hitting the jackpot are now the same. The expectation level may be 100%.

According to such a different timer performance, the specific operation-related performance and the timer performance are progressed at the same time, but when a performance situation in which the performance is progressed at the same time appears, the specific operation-related performance is Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as a performance result, their performance value is the same (the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits (jackpot) is the same). same). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related performance itself, so even if the specific operation-related performance and the timer performance are progressed at the same time, neither performance will be affected. This will avoid situations where the user is unable to understand what to focus on and becomes distracted. However, in order to improve gaming enjoyment, if a performance pattern appears in which a specific operation-related performance and a timer performance progress at the same time, the benefits will be given more easily than if the performance pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to make such expectations high.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), first, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the type of effect ( Although "sheathing of the sword") is performed, such a display suggesting the performance target may also be performed when another performance mode is set as the performance target as a timer performance. However, when a specific performance is set as a timer target among a plurality of performances that can be timed, a display indicating which performance is targeted by the timer may not be displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and their separate examples, prior to providing an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, the operation opportunity is not given to any of these operation means. We have decided to perform a specific operation-related effect regarding whether or not it will be granted. However, before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (prior to the occurrence of the production reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is provided to the sword decoration body 5001 It does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, or before an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (before the production reception period occurs). A performance pattern such as a second omen performance may appear. When performing these omen effects (first omen effect, second omen effect), the time required for the effects (omen effects) should be set to be shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to lower the level of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits when a performance appears, in order to increase the interest in the game when a specific operation-related performance is performed.

Here, as a premonition effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog appears. Display a specific image, such as one that depicts a crowded situation. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position that overlaps with the specific image to make it difficult to see (on the layer, at a position behind the specific image). After that, by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (by increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.), the button image BTG gradually becomes invisible. It is possible to perform it as a performance to make it exposed to the public. Incidentally, an example of a specific depiction mode related to such an omen effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations regarding awarding benefits (jackpots), As the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually revealed is progressing, it is possible to make it more interesting to see which display mode the button image BTG will appear in.

Note that the first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and the first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration A second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that these are executed as different performance contents. Furthermore, it is desirable that not only the content of the performance but also the time required for the performance be different.

In the sense of "a performance related to the provision of an operation opportunity when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means", such a precursor performance is not the same as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related performance". It can be said that it is a higher level concept that includes As for the precursor performance, including the "specific operation-related performance," as will be explained below with reference to FIG. It is possible to improve the game's interest when the precursory performance is performed by indicating the length of the performance acceptance period that occurs in response to the precursory performance, depending on whether the precursory performance is performed. It is more desirable to achieve this goal.

FIG. 178 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance contents for each type of performance when a plurality of types (foreshadowing effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the precursor effects.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 178(a) (harbinger performance A), when a first predetermined time has elapsed after symbol variation was started, the warning performance A is started. This omen effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the omen effect is When A is executed, a production acceptance period (validity period) T1 occurs for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the production result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178(a) (harbinger performance A), when the warning performance A is performed, no matter which operating means is given the operation opportunity, the same length of time is given. The production acceptance period (validity period) T1 will occur.

During the performance acceptance period (validity period) T1, an instruction display prompting the user to operate the specific operation means shown as a result of the precursor performance A (such as a character display such as "Press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) ) is displayed. Then, when a performance is accepted by operating a specific operation means within the performance acceptance period (validity period) T1, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 167(d) and (f), , 169(e), 170(h), 173(f), 174(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that point is executed. It is about to take place.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178(b) (foreshadow effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. The foreshadow performance B1 is now started. This precursor performance B1 is not a "specific operation-related performance" but a performance that is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (a specific operation-related performance). (It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (validity period) T2 for the specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is starting to occur.

During the production acceptance period (validity period) T2, an instruction display (a text display such as "Press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor production B1. be done. Then, when a production is accepted by operating a specific operating means within the production reception period (validity period) T2, a predetermined operation-time production different from the above-mentioned operation-time production is executed based on the production reception. At the same time, a process is performed to end the period T2 at that point.

In this regard, in this performance example, the performance acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor performance B1 is the performance acceptance period corresponding to the precursor performance A, as shown in FIGS. 178(a) and (b). (Valid period) This period is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). As a result, depending on which mode (foreshadowing effect A, omen effect B1) the omen effect is performed, it is suggested how long the performance acceptance period that occurs corresponding to the omen effect is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the game's interest when the precursor performance is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178(c) (harbinger performance B2), when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, the warning performance B2 is started. Similar to the precursor performance B1, this precursor performance B2 is not a "specific operation-related performance" but is executed prior to when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means.) However, when the omen effect B2 is executed, the effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) Production reception period) T3 is set to occur.

In addition, during this performance acceptance period (validity period) T3, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "Press" or a bar indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) prompting the user to operate a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor performance B2 is displayed. display) is displayed. In addition, when a performance is accepted by operating a specific operation means within the performance acceptance period (validity period) T3, based on the reception of the performance, an operation-time performance that is different from the case where the precursor performances A and B1 are executed. is executed, and at the same time, a process is performed to end the period T3 at that point.

In this regard, in this performance example, the performance acceptance period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor performance B2 is the performance acceptance period corresponding to the precursor performance A, as shown in FIGS. 178(a) and (c). (Valid period) This period is set to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even though the precursor performance B2 with relatively low expectations for awarding benefits (jackpot) was executed, the time is the same as when the specific operation-related performance with relatively high expectations was executed. Since it is suggested that a long production acceptance period (validity period) T3 will occur, a production situation that appears as if a specific operation-related production has been performed is created, and the precursor production B2 is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is different between when the performance acceptance period (validity period) T2 occurs and when the performance reception period (validity period) T3 occurs.

Regarding the precursor performances B1 and B2, the same performance mode appears from the start of the performance until a timing in the middle of the performance, and a different performance mode appears after the timing has elapsed, so that the specific The operation means may be provided with a performance as to whether to generate the performance acceptance period (validity period) T2 or the production reception period (validity period) T3. However, it is not necessary to have such a performance, and the timing at which the precursor performances B1 and B2 start can be set to start at different times after the start of symbol fluctuation. Alternatively, the portent effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178(d) (harbinger performance C), when the third predetermined time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, the warning performance C is started. This omen effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the omen effect is When C is executed, a production acceptance period (validity period) T4 occurs for the specific operation means shown as the production result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178(d) (harbinger performance C), when the warning performance C is performed, no matter which operating means is given the operation opportunity, the same length of time is given. The production acceptance period (validity period) T4 will occur.

Even during the performance acceptance period (validity period) T4, an instruction display prompting the user to operate the specific operation means shown as a result of the precursor performance C (a text display such as "Press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) ) is displayed. Then, when a production is accepted by operating a specific operation means within the production reception period (validity period) T4, the above-mentioned operation production (for example, FIGS. 167(d), (f) and , 169(e), 170(h), 173(f), 174(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that point is executed. It is about to take place.

In this regard, in this performance example, the performance acceptance period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor performance C is the performance acceptance period corresponding to the precursor performance A, as shown in FIGS. 178(a) and (d). (Validity period) It is set to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for precursor performance C itself is shorter than precursor performance A, if the precursor performance is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related performance" , since it is suggested that a performance reception period (validity period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of precursor performance A will occur, it is possible to suitably maintain the game interest when precursor performance C is performed. You will be able to do it.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 178, by associating the length of the production reception period (valid period) with the types of precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, the production reception period The length of the (validity period) is now indicated. However, by setting the rate at which a specific performance reception period (for example, performance reception period T2, etc.) with a predetermined length of time occurs to be different for each type of precursor performance, the production reception period (valid period ) may be suggested.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and their separate examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is When the performance acceptance period (validity period) occurs, a performance image (eg, button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173(e), the operation button 410 is in an operating state in the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating in the operating position accordingly, and FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is in a state in which it is operating at the operating position (sword drawn state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as being in a state in which it is operating in the operating position (sword drawn state). has been done.

However, a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (e.g., button image BTG) that mimics its appearance. If this happens, even though a specific operation-related performance with relatively high expectations is being performed, when displaying the result of the performance, the scope of the performance will be significantly narrowed, and the interest in the game will decrease. There are concerns.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as is, but is displayed as a state different from that of the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating performance examples of performance contents when a precursory performance that is not a specific operation-related performance is performed and performance contents when a precursory performance is performed as a specific operation-related performance.

First, FIGS. 179(a) to 179(c) show the performance contents when a precursory performance that is not a specific operation-related performance is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a fluctuating display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) in a specific effect pattern according to the result of jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. Suppose we are in a situation. Then, in this performance situation, as shown in FIG. 179(a), only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 side of the sword decoration 5001 are supported instead of the "specific operation related performance". If the foreshadowing effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 will be given soon. In addition, in the foreshadowing performance (same as foreshadowing performances in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operating means to which the operation opportunity will soon be given is displayed, a performance image imitating the operating means may be used. does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an opportunity to operate the sword decoration object 5001 will be given soon from a situation where the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed during the presentation reception period is not displayed yet. It came to be said that

Note that in the omen effect shown in FIG. 179(a), the sword decoration image SYGa has a blue aura with a relatively low expectation level, and the sword decoration image SYGb has a red aura with a relatively high expectation level. are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them will ultimately be left in the display area is displayed. Therefore, in this presentation situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration object 5001 soon, the sword decoration image SYGa, which has a low expectation level as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYGa, which has a low expectation level. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb will be displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 179(b) shows the final rendering result of the sword decoration image SYGb wrapped in a red aura. It is now suggested that there will be a production acceptance period for . In the display shown in FIG. 179(b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYGb wrapped in a red aura will not change to any other effect image (sword decoration image SYGa, etc.). .

FIG. 179(c) shows an example of a performance when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001. When the performance reception period occurs, an instruction display prompting an operation for the sword decoration 5001 (“Push ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are displayed. Furthermore, when the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the unsheathed state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sheathed state to the unsheathed state. I am trying to change the state from state to state. Note that when a performance is accepted within the performance acceptance period, a predetermined operation performance is performed based on the performance reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sheathed state. maintained. Further, processing is performed to end the production acceptance period at that point.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding only to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means of the operation target side (here, , sword decoration 5001) (here, sword decoration image SYGb) is displayed in the same state (sword drawn state) as the operating means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration 5001) at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production acceptance period for this production example, a production image that imitates the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration object 5001) are displayed. Both are stopped at predetermined positions.

On the other hand, FIGS. 179(d) to 179(g) show the performance contents when a specific operation-related performance is performed as a precursor performance. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a fluctuating display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) in a specific effect pattern according to the result of jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0. Suppose we are in a situation. Then, in this performance situation, as shown in FIG. 179(d), if a foreshadowing performance as a "specific operation-related performance" is started, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to someone.

FIG. 179(e) shows a performance situation in which a precursor performance as a "specific operation-related performance" progresses and the performance result appears. In this performance situation, the button image BTG is not displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, in order to suggest that an opportunity to operate the sword decoration object 5001 is given as a performance result of the "specific operation-related performance". has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 179(e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to other effect images (button image BTG, etc.).

FIG. 179(f) shows an example of a performance when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001. When the performance reception period occurs, an instruction display prompting an operation for the sword decoration 5001 (“Push ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are displayed. Furthermore, when the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the sword drawn state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the drawn state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 179(f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the drawn state (sword decoration image SYG (in a stopped state), whereas the sword decoration body 5001 continues to be slowly displaced upward over a period until the performance reception period ends, and is in a different state from each other. I try to do that.

In addition, during the performance reception period, no matter what position the sword decoration body 5001 is in, when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sheathed state, the performance reception will be performed, and the performance will be accepted. Based on the reception, a predetermined operation effect is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sheathed state. Further, processing is performed to end the production acceptance period at that point.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for production. While the other side is inactive, it will be possible to have the other side take on the role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 179(f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is in a stopped state and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the performance reception period, but this is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a stopped state.

In this manner, in the production example shown in FIG. 179, during the production reception period (FIG. 179(c)) that occurs without any specific operation-related production, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. In contrast, during the performance acceptance period (FIG. 179(f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related performance, one of the sword decoration object 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is brought to a halt state. , the other side is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when a performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the range of performance can be expanded, and the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which driving force is applied under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the operation While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is kept in a dynamic state and continues to be depicted, it is possible to continue the depiction after a specific operation-related effect. It is expected that the range of presentations when the presentation reception period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Note that either the sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura, which has a relatively low expectation, or the sword decoration image SYGb, which has a red aura, with a relatively high expectation, is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor performance that is not a specific operation-related performance is performed, but also when a specific operation-related performance is performed as a precursor performance. In other words, in this case, in a specific operation-related presentation, in addition to the presentation regarding which of the button image BTG, which imitates the operation button 410, and the sword decoration image SYG, which imitates the sword decoration 5001, is displayed, one of the two is determined. When an effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, it is determined whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with relatively high expectations or a display mode with relatively low expectations. This makes it possible to provide even more performance. This method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the presentation example shown in FIG. 179.

When such two effects are to be given to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is the effect of the specific operation-related effect. A state in which it is possible to recognize whether the effect image appears, and it is unclear whether the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears is a highly expected one (for example, a effect image that imitates the operation means is whitened out and only the outline is shown) (such as in a recognizable display state) will appear as the presentation progresses. Then, after this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image that appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect is one with a high degree of expectation (for example, a white outline of a effect image that imitates the operation means). It is desirable that the state (such as canceling the state and making the color visible) appear sequentially as the effect progresses. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such progress of presentation, under certain conditions, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected (for example, when the operation means is (such as canceling the white outline state of the simulated performance image), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration image SYG appears as a performance result of the specific operation-related performance. Yes, and it is unclear whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a white color so that only the outline can be recognized). It may also be possible to generate a performance pattern that further advances the performance. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance is a highly expected one (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) ). In this case, when the button image BTG is displayed in a display mode with high expectations (for example, red), it is displayed in a display mode with low expectations (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further performance progress occurs.

FIGS. 180(a) to (e) are diagrams showing other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 179(d) to (g) as effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180(a), a foreshadowing effect as a "specific operation-related effect" has started, but in this foreshadowing effect, a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is held. A first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a second character holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) It is depicted that the characters are facing each other, and it is suggested that the operation opportunity will be given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. That's what I do.

FIG. 180(b) shows a performance situation in which a performance result of a precursor performance as a "specific operation-related performance" is appearing. In this performance situation, the first character (the performance image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second character (the sword decoration A performance image corresponding to body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180(b) is almost the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 176(b) (the instruction display prompting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed), and the display image shown in FIG. While an operation-related performance is being performed, both the performance part (the confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related performance started) are The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 180(b)) as a result of a specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 180(c) to 180(e) show examples of performances when the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the performance acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 180(c), , an instruction display prompting the user to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (a text display such as "Push in" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is displayed.

Here, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to move from the sheathed state to the sword drawn state when the performance reception period occurs, As shown in FIG. 180(d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the movement (movement) from the sheathed state to the drawn state in a relatively short period of time after the start of the presentation reception period. It is supposed to be done. From then on, as shown in FIG. 180(e), unless the player performs an operation, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state until at least the performance acceptance period ends, and the player Waiting for the operation (from the sword drawn state to the sheathed state).

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 180(c) to 180(e), the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (swinging in the rotational direction). (lowering motion), the second character swings down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to take action. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the downward swing motion (FIG. 180(c)) to the end (FIG. 180(e)) within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated depending on the process.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period will not be affected by it, and the display change will progress by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Also, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the sword is drawn out while a series of displays from the start of the downward swing motion (FIG. 180(c)) to the end (FIG. 180(e)) are performed. It is supposed to complete the operation, but even if loop processing is performed, the sword will remain unsheathed without being affected by it. In addition, when an operation is performed on the operational object 141 to the sheathed state within the production acceptance period, production reception will be performed, and based on the production reception, a predetermined operation performance will be performed, and the above-mentioned The loop process is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. Further, processing is performed to end the production acceptance period at that point.

According to such a configuration, when a premonitory performance is performed as a specific operation-related performance, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the performance acceptance period. Their operation modes (motions that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (motions until moving to the operating position), loop motions used for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is completed. Even after this, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending it. As a result, when a production acceptance period (FIGS. 180(c) to (e)) occurs after a specific operation-related production, the production content of the specific operation-related production is continued until after the production reception period (Fig. 180(c) to (e)) occurs. This makes it possible to expand the scope of the performance, such as by making it possible to continue playing the background (the background also continues), and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 180, the content of the production (display of characters confronting each other) that appeared when the precursor production (FIG. 180(a)) was performed as a specific operation-related production. The effect (FIGS. 180(c) to (e)) is executed when the effect acceptance period occurs by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period for this production example, a production image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means and a character (a specific character different from the sword decoration image SYG) with a dedicated background (full moon) displayed. By dynamically displaying both the image and the image during the reception period, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period. In this sense, it is important to use at least one of a character and a performance image that imitates the operation means (sword decoration image SYG) in the harbinger production as well, so that the harbinger performance and the performance during the performance reception period are different from each other. This can be said to be more desirable in order to further improve the performance by creating a connection between them. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different expectations regarding awarding of benefits, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

In addition, for a premonition performance as a specific operation-related performance or a performance within the performance reception period, multiple performance modes will be prepared for these performances, and depending on which of these performance modes appears, the reception of the production will be changed. Suggestions may be made as to whether a highly anticipated mode will appear as a performance at the time of operation when a performance is accepted in a period. The degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits may be suggested using a background image that appears when the foreshadowing effect is performed.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 180, when a precursor production is being performed as a specific operation-related production, production reception is performed in a manner that changes both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production. We decided to execute the production within the period, but the above-mentioned precursor production that is not a specific operation-related production (for a specific operation means among multiple operation means (or for a specific operation mode among multiple operation modes) ) When a special precursor production when an operation opportunity is given) is being performed, when the production reception period occurs in a form that changes both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production. It may also be possible to perform a performance. In short, it is possible to generate an operation-related performance (pronounced performance) regarding the operation of the operating means, and the operation-related performance (pronounced performance) includes a first performance in which the performance regarding the first performance is accepted by the player's operation. At least one operation-related performance and a second operation-related performance in which a performance is accepted for a second performance different from the first performance according to an operation by the player are possible, and the second operation-related performance is displayed in the first operation-related performance. The first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not yet displayed is displayed, and the first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not yet displayed, and the The second operation promotion image displayed as a performance is displayed at the same time as the background image is changed to another background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed. Good to have. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, for example, a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, a gauge display, or "Press!" or "Sheath your sword!" ” can be displayed as appropriate. Furthermore, the "first performance" and the "second performance" may be different post-operation performances, for example, the "first operation related performance in which a performance reception regarding the first performance" is It is possible to exemplify this as a production that indicates which mode will appear as a conversation preview when a production is performed, and as a "second operation related production in which a production reception regarding the second production" is performed, a production reception is performed. This can be exemplified as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates when the specific decorative member SDY is activated. At this time, no matter which mode appears as a conversation preview, the production is designed so that there is a relationship in which the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing (including 100%) is higher when the specific decorative member SDY is activated. It is desirable to do so. Also, regarding the "second operation-related performance in which a performance is accepted regarding the second performance", please refer to FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, FIG. 223, FIG. This may be executed as any of the operation acceptance effects (operation acceptance effects under BGM suppression) which will be described later. On the other hand, regarding the "first operation-related performance in which a performance reception regarding the first performance" is performed, the operation reception performance (BGM non-suppression It may be executed as either one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects). In addition, each of these different examples of operation acceptance effects described later may be adopted as appropriate. In addition, the background image "continuously displayed" does not necessarily have to be a still image, but may be displayed as a moving image of a river flowing or characters fighting each other, It also includes those in which still images and moving images are displayed in a sliding manner (in which the coordinates are moved). In other words, a background image can be said to be "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in a chronological or coordinate manner with the displayed content. On the other hand, "changing a background image to another background image" does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer; for example, the background image itself does not have to be displayed in time series or coordinates. This also includes images that suddenly change or are replaced (switched) to ``images with different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the production reception period)'' that have no connection with each other. It also includes images that change to or are replaced (switched) to a "pure black image." In other words, if there is no connection in depiction content either in time series or coordinates before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image, effect images (blackout, whiteout, etc.) that hide the previously displayed background image are added to the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable that the second operation promotion image is displayed over at least half of the display area (more preferably, substantially the entire area), and after the display, the second operation promotion image is displayed together with the new background image. The first operation-related performance and the second operation-related performance may be displayed sequentially within one variation pattern. As for the timing of changing the background image to another background image, as mentioned above, it may be before the production reception period occurs, or it may be before the production reception period occurs, including the timing when the production reception period occurs. It may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 180(b) may be omitted and the effect may progress from FIG. 180(a) to FIG. 180(c)).

Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. Alternatively, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation is It is also possible to complete the responsible action before the production acceptance period occurs) and then maintain the stopped state.

In addition, even if an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001), there are cases where a display that changes the background image is displayed when the performance acceptance period occurs, and a case where the background image is changed. Alternatively, there may be cases where the display is not performed. In this case, if a display that changes the background image is displayed when the production acceptance period occurs, the expectation level for awarding benefits will be higher than when a display that changes the background image is not displayed when the production acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and their separate examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production When the performance is accepted, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation performance based on the performance reception. In this case, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 167(d), 169(e), and 170(h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button 410) is also activated, thereby improving the performance of the operation-time performance when a specific operation-related performance is performed. In this way, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time performance after a specific operation-related performance, the operation-time performance after a specific operation-related performance will depend on the result of that performance. Then, a successful production situation will appear in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (gaming machine main body side) operate, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side will operate. In contrast to a failure situation in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate, an operation effect that is performed without a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific Depending on the result of the performance, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side may be used. It is possible to display a performance situation in the case of a success in which only the game board 5 operates, or a performance situation in the case of failure in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and specific operation-related productions according to other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the production, and when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the production, The level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is set to be higher than before. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 181(a), the button image BTG is The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this manner, the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of a specific operation-related effect. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of a specific operation-related performance.

Furthermore, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (specific presentation manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 181(b). In this case, it is desirable that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, the level of expectation regarding the granting of the benefit is higher than when it is displayed in a normal mode.

Furthermore, as a performance pattern that may appear as a result of a specific operation-related performance, a first performance pattern (Fig. 181(a)), and a second performance pattern (FIG. 181(b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific performance mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related performance. )) may be prepared respectively. In this case, the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is set to be the same when the first performance pattern appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance and when the second performance pattern appears. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, not only can it be interesting to see whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, but also the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG can be displayed as a result of a specific operation-related effect. It becomes possible to provide a completely different kind of entertainment, such as whether or not a specific presentation mode (the mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of whether the decoration image SYG or the like appears. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, if it is possible to make such a specific presentation mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appear as a result of a specific operation-related presentation, when predetermined presentation conditions are met, As shown in FIG. 181(c), when the particular performance mode is at a stage where the performance result of the specific operation-related performance (which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. This may be displayed in advance (for example, in the middle of a specific operation-related performance). According to such a configuration, even though a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed is being performed, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed) is not displayed. By the appearance of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, the same performance value (the same expectation level) is created. In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related production itself will be lost, so even though a specific operation-related production is being performed, it will not be possible to use a ``premonition production by a princess character.'' It becomes possible to provide performances with completely different purposes.

Moreover, the sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their other examples is a sword decoration body 5001 in which the sword parts (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 are operable in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their other examples, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related performance may be performed as a performance regarding the above. The sword parts (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both movably (operably) supported by one main body support part (not shown) provided in the door frame 3, and Even when one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of movement (operation), the other side can be moved (operated). It is formed.

However, if a specific operation-related effect is performed in this manner, no matter which effect results appear, only the operation mode will be different, and it will not be possible to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that the player will make an operational error. In particular, even if an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, a performance image imitating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 (and its If an instruction display prompting an operation is displayed, there is an increased risk that the player will make an operational error between the first and second operation modes. Become. In other words, in this case, as the time remaining in the performance acceptance period is decreasing, the player should first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then have the player perform the operation in the original correct manner. It would be difficult to do so, and even if a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations was performed, the production acceptance period would end before the production was accepted. , there is a concern that interest in gaming will decline.

In addition, the sword decoration body 5001 has modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part, and modes such as "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and multiple complex operations that are not in a reversal relationship are possible. With an operation unit that can provide different modes, if you perform an operation on the wrong side when given the opportunity to operate, it will take time to perform the operation on the correct side, and the production acceptance period will end. This can be said to increase the risk of losing operational opportunities.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related performance as a performance regarding which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given the opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit, , as will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed without change, it is desirable to properly accept the performance and perform the performance at the time of operation in accordance with the reception of the performance.

FIGS. 182 and 183 show an example of a performance when an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode in a performance pattern in which a specific operation-related performance is performed. It is a diagram.

FIG. 182(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, a variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the current performance situation.

FIG. 182(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 182(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 182(b), the first performance imitates the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated from the drawn state to the sheathed state. The image OX and a second effect image TX imitating a second operation mode of moving the sheath part of the sword decoration body 5001 in the horizontal direction are displayed within the display area of the effect display device 1600. They are displayed simultaneously to suggest that an operation opportunity using one of these operation modes will soon be available for production reception. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration body 5001 that imitates the sword part is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, it is different from the first effect image OX. In both of the second performance images TX, the sword parts are displayed as images, and there is a possibility that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 182(c) shows that the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182(b) has progressed, and a first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and a second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode are displayed. An effect is being performed in which the effect image TX and the effect image TX are pushed against each other within the display area of the effect display device 1600 to try to push the other party out of the display area. When a performance result (first performance result) in which the first performance image OX is left appears, a performance acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and a performance result (second performance result) in which the second performance image TX is left appears. When the result) appears, a production acceptance period for the second operation mode occurs.

In addition, in the specific operation-related effect according to this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 182(c), when a situation prevails to leave the first effect image OX, a display such as "push in" becomes visible. When the situation is such that the second effect image TX is left behind, a display such as "slide" becomes visible. The details of the operation are made easy to recognize depending on the situation of the performance. However, these displays may not necessarily be displayed because there is a risk that the display may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production acceptance period has not yet occurred.

FIG. 182(d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 182(c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is inside the display area. A production depicting the situation left behind is being performed (first production result). When the production progresses to this content, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, a specific operation production (such as a movable production using a specific decorative member SDY) will not occur, and the first operation mode will not occur. When an operation is performed, a performance is accepted, and a specific operation-time performance (such as a movable performance using a specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the performance reception is generated.

That is, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 182(d), the performance reception period regarding the specific operation performance occurs only for the first operation mode of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, during the performance acceptance period, in addition to the first performance image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting the operation (such as a text display such as "push in" or indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) will be displayed. bar display) will be displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sheathed state to the sword drawn state so that the first operation mode can be performed.

FIG. 183(e) shows that even though the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) is performed using the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. It shows the performance situation when performed by a player.

That is, in this production example, even if the production acceptance period for a specific operation performance occurs only for the first operation mode of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first operation mode is Operation detection for the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the performance acceptance period, it is assumed that there was an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that would not have appeared when the operation in the first operation mode was accepted. (Here, "it's fine as is").

Further, as shown in FIG. 183(f), in such a specific notification, the content of the notification changes (here, ``calm down and push'') according to the passage of time so that the player can regain his or her calm. It looks like this. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complex, it can be successively notified in short words, so even if the player is in a panic state, this can be conveniently done. There will be an expectation of restraint. This allows the player to know that even if the sword ornament 5001 that is in the second operation mode is operated in the first operation mode, the effect will be properly accepted. be able to recognize it.

FIG. 183(g) shows that the correct operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation of FIG. 183(e) or FIG. As a result, the performance is accepted and the above-mentioned operation performance is performed in response to the operation. However, at this time, when the player's hand is removed from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second operation mode state to the non-operation state (normal state). ) will be returned to.

According to such a configuration, if an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if the game is performed from a state (a state of an operational error), since the presentation is properly accepted, a decrease in interest in the game when an operational error occurs is suppressed.

In the example above, when a player makes an erroneous operation, it is decided to notify the player that the player should continue to operate without correcting the operation error. Detailed notifications for the purpose of (should) not necessarily be provided. That is, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, the player may be in a panic, so providing notification with complicated content may have the opposite effect. Therefore, if there is an operational error by the player during the performance acceptance period, a specific notification that would not appear if the performance was accepted in the correct manner is not displayed as a message, but as an effect or a sound-only notification. It is desirable to make simple notifications such as: In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that he or she has made an operation error, but the special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is made based on the operation and no performance is performed at the time of operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation will be switched to the appropriate one.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players (particularly elderly players, etc.) may accidentally perform an operation of a specific operation-related performance even before the performance acceptance period occurs. For example, when an operation is being performed on the second operation part (such as moving the sheath part laterally) even though no operation instruction regarding the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) has been given, the first It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which a performance reception period for a specific operation performance occurs only for the operation part (for example, the sword part), and in this case, the player will have to decide how to operate it. There is a concern that people may not be able to recognize whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed regarding which of the first operation part (sword part) and second operation part (sheath part) will be given the opportunity to operate, the first operation part (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) 182(b) and 182(c)) where no operation instruction (remaining time bar display) has been given to the second operating unit. Even when an operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to make a specific notification that would not appear if the operation in an appropriate manner was accepted. This specific notification may be a message indicating that all you need to do is to maintain the operating state and operate the appropriate operating section that will soon be given an opportunity to operate, or a message may be used. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming the special situation where a specific notification is made based on the operation and no performance is performed despite the operation, it is possible to perform the operation on the appropriate side afterwards. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be an opportunity for people to go there.

In this case, for example, while the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being operated (the sword decoration body 5001 has moved leftward), the first operation part (for example, the scabbard part) is being operated. Even if the production acceptance period for a specific operation production occurs only for the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the state in which the operation is performed on the second operation part (for example, the scabbard part) 5001 moved to the left), when the first operation part (for example, the sword part) side is operated, the production is accepted and the above-mentioned operation production is performed in accordance with the operation. becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception that occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the performance reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will be corrected before the performance reception period occurs. Even when this occurs, a decline in gaming interest is suppressed.

However, within the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to the first operation part or the second operation part, the effect is shown and the effect is accepted. If the above-mentioned specific notification is made during the period immediately before the event occurs, the information will be mixed with the information notified (instruction display, etc.) during the presentation reception period, which will further confuse the players. There is a concern that it will get lost. Therefore, in a specific operation-related performance in which a performance result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the performance result is displayed. , the above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instructions regarding the second operation section (for example, the sheath part) are not displayed. and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period have passed sequentially, the above-mentioned notification is performed. It is desirable to generate a performance reception period for the first operation unit.

In the above performance example, when specific notification is given, the degree of expectation regarding the provision of benefits may be suggested. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-described presentation modes and their other examples, the presentation mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to any one of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 161 It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in Figure 1 to any of the stage 1 form to stage 3 form. In this regard, after a specific operation-related performance is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may also do so. Alternatively, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above when a production acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related production is performed.

In this case, the performance display device 1600 during the performance reception period displays an instruction display prompting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (a text display such as "push in", a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period), and a display prompting the sword decoration 5001 to operate. The sword decoration image SYG imitating is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). It happens.

However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration object 5001, it is not possible to add any interest to checking the sword decoration image SYG. First, the performance during the performance acceptance period will be poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to display the sword decoration image SYG in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. This is desirable in order to ensure performance during the performance reception period.

At this time, making sure that the aspect expressed in the sword decoration image SYG has a higher level of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 will improve the performance during the performance acceptance period. This is desirable in order to ensure adequate security. For example, if the sword decoration body 5001 is set to the stage 1 form, and the predetermined presentation conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is set not to the stage 1 form but to the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to understand that the expectation level is higher by checking the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. As a result, the game's interest in the game during the performance reception period can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration image SYG side should be greater than the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the forms of the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily need to be changed.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they feel that the display is false. There are concerns that this may reduce interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the mode of the sword decoration image SYG is a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as the modes of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the stage 0 mode to the stage 3 mode shown in FIG. 161). is prepared, and when a predetermined performance condition is met, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, thereby changing the mode of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the modes of the decorative images SYG and the decorative images SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decoration image SYG is changed by further deforming and merging, it may operate in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001, or it may operate in a manner that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001. It may also be one that emits light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG realizes a production expression that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001, thereby suppressing concerns that people may feel uncomfortable due to false display. Not only can the sword ornament 5001 be improved, but it can also be expected to improve the enjoyment of the game by providing performance that exceeds the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword decoration body 5001.

Note that even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special aspect in this way, each aspect prepared as the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 161) is applied to the sword decoration image SYG. It is desirable to also be able to display in Stage 0 form to Stage 3 form. In other words, in this case, the sword decoration image SYG is basically displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration object 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined presentation condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. Note that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special manner, it is desirable to suggest that the level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits is higher than when it is displayed in other manners. The expectation level may be 100%.

Furthermore, the method for displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special manner may be applied not only to cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also to other effects.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and their separate examples, for example, when a symbol variation is performed in the first production pattern based on the result of jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is pressed within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute a first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. In addition, when a symbol variation is performed in the second performance pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 within the symbol variation, and an operation opportunity is not given to the sword ornament 5001. It is possible to perform a second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is given. In addition, if the symbol changes in the third production pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, a third sign appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to perform a performance (specific operation-related performance).

In this respect, these portent effects are executed with different production contents, but their production contents include, for example,
・Display a specific image so as to cover at least a portion of the area where the performance image appears, before a performance image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area,
・After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to see due to the specific image,
・After that, the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (by increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is also possible to make it For example, in the first omen effect, a display effect using a "cloud effect" (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operating means) is performed as a specific image, and in the second omen effect, a "flame effect" is used as a specific image. A display effect (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see an image that imitates the operating means) is performed using the "water effect". In the third omen effect, a display effect that uses the "water effect" (an image that imitates the operating means) is used as a specific image. By making the types of specific images different, such as using display effects that gradually make them easier to see, it is possible to make their precursor effects different from each other.In other words, in this case, the "cloud effect" When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed before an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the display effect using the "flame effect" is performed. When the sword decoration object 5001 is given an opportunity to operate, it is possible to recognize that the second omen effect is performed, and when the display effect using the "water effect" is performed, the operation is not performed. It becomes possible to recognize that a third omen performance (a specific operation-related performance) is being performed as to which of the button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given the opportunity to operate.

When performing a harbinger (at least one of a first harbinger, a second harbinger, and a third harbinger) with such performance content, a performance image that imitates the operating means using a specific image is created. It is desirable to generate a performance acceptance period for the operating means during a period in which visual recognition is difficult. When such a configuration is applied to either the first omen effect or the second omen effect, the effect image that imitates the operation means has a display mode with high expectations (for example, red) and a display mode with low expectations. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it is not certain whether the display mode (for example, blue) will be displayed, the production during the production acceptance period. You will be able to improve your sexuality. Furthermore, even when such a configuration is applied to the third omen performance (specific operation-related performance), there is no certainty as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given the operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the user cannot hold the operation means, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance acceptance period.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a first omen performance is performed with such performance content, and FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a first omen performance is performed with the same content. FIG. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186, an example of a performance when a first omen performance is performed will be explained. It is also possible to apply it to an omen performance.

FIG. 185(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance situation.

FIG. 185(b) shows a performance situation in which the first omen performance is started while the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 185(a) is being executed.

Here, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 185(b), a display performance using a "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the performance display device 1600. After the display effect using the "cloud effect" starts at timing t1 shown in FIG. 186, the display area gradually changes to non-display (by increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself). (for example, by reducing the area in which a particular image is displayed).

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 186, at timing t2, which is an intermediate stage in which the display production by the "cloud effect" is gradually changing to non-display, the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 is At the same time, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are respectively displayed ( Figure 185(c)).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , blue) than when the button image BTG is displayed, the rate of operation effects being performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation is increased. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 185(c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode due to the "cloud effect". Despite this, when the operation button 410 is operated, the performance is accepted and the performance at the time of operation corresponding to the reception of the performance is executed. That is, in this case, since the operation effect is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in such a way that the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, the button image BTG is different from the first display mode and the first display mode. It is now possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes it will be displayed in.

Furthermore, in the production situation shown in FIG. 185(c), the "cloud effect" makes it impossible to be sure whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Despite this, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the performance acceptance period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, at timing t3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. is completely hidden (FIG. 185(d)). In such a situation, it is difficult to operate the operation button 410 while it is easy to recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation effect is executed in such a way that the effect is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 185(d).

According to such a configuration, the period from when the button image BTG is displayed until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden during the production reception period (timings t2 to t4) (timings t2 to t3). ), it becomes possible to provide an effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, in order to enhance the performance during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the period when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4) It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period from timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t3 to t4), a message such as "Press" is displayed. If the button image BTG, which was displayed in a static state during the period, is dynamically displayed during the period from timing t3 to t4, the performance during the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more suitably improved. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 185, an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 and a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the production acceptance period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, after the effect display using the "cloud effect" is performed, a presentation situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see will first appear, and after a predetermined period of time after this situation, the presentation situation will be changed to a situation in which it is difficult to see the button image BTG. Until then, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a performance situation where it is difficult to see before the production acceptance period occurs, a production pattern (third omen) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectations In the case of a performance, a performance pattern in which the button image BTG changes to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to this configuration, the more the button image BTG is in a presentation situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG, the more interesting it becomes to pay attention to the button image BTG. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to recognize by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 is not affected by the "cloud effect". The decision was made to display the information in such a way that its visibility is maintained. As a result, the user can enjoy watching the visibility of the button image BTG change with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the performance acceptance period.

However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until timing t3 due to the influence of the "cloud effect." In other words, in this case, it is possible to make the player feel conflicted about whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display format while being unable to properly grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period. This makes it possible to provide an unprecedented level of performance.

Furthermore, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 185, the above-mentioned or later-described "acceptance acceptance sound" may also be output. In this case, the "acceptance acceptance sound" will be output from when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to see due to the "cloud effect".

In addition, if such "acceptance acceptance sound" is output in any of multiple modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear, including "0" and "100"), the button image BTG It has become possible to properly recognize the level of expectation even before the entire game appears, and it is expected to improve the game's interest.

When a production reception (operation) is performed while the "acceptance permission sound" is being output, it is desirable to make the "acceptance permission sound" in the output state non-output at that point. In addition, each of the configurations described above or described below may be adopted as appropriate for the "acceptance permission sound".

The "cloud effect" may be transparent; in this case, the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but even with this configuration, visibility will still be maintained. .

The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear, including "0" and "100"). In this case, even though the operation button 410 functions to be difficult to visually recognize, if it indicates a high level of expectation, the game's interest will be improved.

Between the time when the "cloud effect" is displayed and the time when it is completely hidden, you can use the below-mentioned production method to suppress specific production sound (BGM), output it silently, or make it non-output. You may choose to adopt it. In this way, the specific performance sound (BGM) that has been set to a suppressed mode, output state of silence, or non-output state will be outputted in a non-suppressed state even when the player performs an operation. It will not be returned.

In addition, when applying this kind of performance to any of the first omen production, second omen production, and third omen production, the production image that imitates the operation means must be clearly displayed after the premonition production has started. Even if the length of time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different, the effect image that imitates the operation means is displayed and the effect image is clearly visible. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) to be the same time. In addition, when applying such performance to any of the first omen performance, second omen performance, and third omen performance, a performance in which the operating means is imitated after the first omen performance has started. Regarding the length of time until an image becomes clearly visible (the time until a specific image is hidden), we will prepare multiple versions to provide multiple effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operating means is displayed to when the effect image becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is preferable to set it to the time.

Further, as a method for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image that imitates the operating means, it is not necessary to use a separate image (specific image). For example, by changing the transmittance setting of the effect image imitating the operation means itself, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that makes it relatively difficult to see, and then The display mode may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easily visually recognized. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see may be before timing t2, and in this case, appearing in such a display mode is itself may be performed as a premonition effect, or while another display is being performed as a premonition effect, a performance image imitating the operating means may be made to appear in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see. Good too.

In addition, when a specific production pattern is executed according to the result of the jackpot determination, the specific operation-related production described with reference to FIGS. ) may be executed only when the event occurs. In other words, at the time when a specific operation-related performance is started, which of the multiple operating means is allowed to receive the performance is kept secret, and as a result of the progress of the performance, multiple Since there will be a production reception period that corresponds only to one of the operation means, if there is a delay in deciding which of the multiple operation means to operate, There is also a possibility that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been used up. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described below is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance, the player's operation of the operation means targeted for operation and the automatic performance function Since the performance is accepted by either of the above and the post-operation performance is always executed, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest when a specific operation-related performance is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute control to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state). When a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the performance is within the performance acceptance period. Even if the production is not accepted for the player's operation, it is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change in the production as when the player's operation is accepted within the production acceptance period. There is. According to such an automatic button performance state, a post-operation performance will be generated when the button is operated, even if the performance reception period occurs, even if the button is not operated, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate the button. You will be able to do this. Regarding the automatic production function, when the automatic production function is activated, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed so that the processing corresponding to the production reception is performed, or the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when the presentation is received may be performed.

In the embodiment related to the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in combination or replaced as appropriate.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which symbol variation is not executed, the automatic button can be pressed by operating the operating means multiple times. It is possible to set the performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). ``Various settings'' is selected and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed, and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "Setting automatic button effect state" displayed in the screen is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on a different operation means may be operated multiple times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the automatic button production state can be set by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, the automatic button production state can be set. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has expired, and from these players, it is difficult to operate the operation button 410. If the automatic button presentation state is set simply by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button production state while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be maintained for a predetermined period of time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode that is maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, the automatic button production state will not be activated. This makes it possible to make it less likely that the settings will be set incorrectly. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button production state is not made even if the operation is performed in a long press mode at least when the production reception period is occurring during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button presentation state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed can also be used as a method for canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period when the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operating means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "cancellation of automatic button presentation state" displayed within is selected, the automatic button presentation state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, It is made possible to cancel the setting of an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button presentation state, the operation button 410 can be moved to the operation state even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined period of time (even if the operation mode is not a long press). The automatic button presentation state is set to be canceled just by detecting that the button has been pressed (by only being operated in a single operation mode). In other words, when some operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, automatic button production is performed. By canceling the setting of the state and quickly returning to the normal presentation state, it is expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button production state set by the operation on the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is different based on the result of jackpot determination. A production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined production pattern in which a production reception period is set for the sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs and the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period, even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the performance is accepted. According to such a configuration, will there be a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted as a production, or will it be possible to perform the operation using another operation means (for example, , sword decoration body 5001)).When the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) is executed, the performance result As a result, even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be able to receive a performance, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- When a first side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) , when no operation is performed on the first operation means within the first side performance reception period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
- When controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the second presentation reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is When this occurs, when no operation is performed on the second operation means within the second side performance acceptance period, an automatic process is executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
Based on this structure, regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, the second production reception period will be executed when the same specific time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first-side production reception period and the second-side production reception period. Automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the first presentation reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means as the operation target are set. Even if any of the second side production reception period set as 2nd side production reception period occurs within the execution period of symbol variation, the automatic production function will be able to function when the same specific time has passed from the occurrence of those periods. As a result, you can enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

However, if a first-side production reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side production reception period occurs, The automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed, and when a time different from the specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first side presentation reception period. As the case may be, the presentation may progress within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means will be executed when a specific time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first-side performance reception period, but the timing differs from this. Since the production is accepted and the production automatically occurs after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

In addition, when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more operation opportunities within the symbol fluctuation period than when not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). The rate at which the performance acceptance period occurs may be increased. In other words, in this case, as the production reception period occurs more frequently, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period will also increase, but even if you forget to operate the automatic production Since the post-operation performance is executed when the function functions, the performance acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decline in game interest due to frequent forgetting of operations. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable that the occurrence rate of both the presentation reception period for the first operation means and the presentation reception period for the second operation means be high. However, as for the degree to which the occurrence rate increases, it is more desirable to make the effect acceptance period for the first operating means different from the effect acceptance period for the second operating means.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- If the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, the post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
- Enables execution of processing for establishing performance acceptance conditions based on operations performed by the player within the performance acceptance period (player operation acceptance means);
- When no operation is performed by the player within the performance acceptance period, it is possible to execute processing to establish the performance acceptance condition without receiving any operation by the player at a specific timing within the performance reception period (automatic performance reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production acceptance period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has passed from the start of the production acceptance period. I am planning to do so. As a result, the player will be given enough time to operate the automatic production function until it functions, and the player will also have the option of accepting the production through operation. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred, and the other case has been the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred. When the performance progresses within the symbol variation, such that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means may be executed when a different time has passed, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" may be used. Both of the "times different from the above" are set as time values longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if a production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button production state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the production reception period, , a process for generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance will be executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state may also be performed.

Similarly, when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, a presentation reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs during the execution period of symbol variation, and the presentation reception period occurs. Even if an operation for the sword decoration object 5001 is received within the period, a process for generating a post-operation performance according to the reception of the performance, and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed, respectively. is desirable. In this case as well, regarding the "post-operation performance according to performance reception", the performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button performance state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is not performed within the performance reception period. The effect will be executed with the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect for the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

In other words, after being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the desire to return to the performance state (normal performance mode) in which the performance can progress depending on the player's own operations (the specific performance state). A desire to end the condition may occur. Such a desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but there is a limited period of time from the start of the performance acceptance period until it ends. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity for operation may be lost. If so, interest in the game may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance acceptance period regarding a specific performance occurs while being controlled to an automatic button performance state (specific performance state), an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the performance reception period occurs. 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 just once (operated in a single operation mode), processing that ends the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) and processing that can cause a change in presentation. (Processing to execute the post-operation performance) is performed separately, so the desire to terminate the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and advance the performance depending on the player's own operation can be realized by receiving the performance. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, regarding the setting changes related to the automatic button production state (changing the setting to the automatic button production state or canceling the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state where symbol fluctuation is not executed) , settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration body 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given a lower frequency of operation opportunities than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given, the probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is something that is highly regarded. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed solely for the purpose of changing the settings related to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), and as a result, the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is not granted. It would be more desirable to maintain interest in the game by increasing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or other operation means) multiple times, the automatic button presentation state can be set or canceled.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation when the automatic button presentation state is not controlled, the automatic button presentation state can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", the automatic button presentation state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button presentation state is necessary. No operation is allowed on the sword ornament 5001 for the purpose of this purpose.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state are changed when the pattern is controlled to be in the automatic button presentation state. This is limited to the case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as a performance within the performance reception period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. . According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given. It becomes like this.

Note that the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment include an automatic button function that generates an effect upon operation even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period when in the automatic button effect state. In addition to operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be targeted by the "performance function", special operation means that are not targeted by the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" It may further include. In other words, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an opportunity to operate the special operation means is given, and if the performance is accepted for operation on the special operation means within the performance reception period, the corresponding The degree of expectation for a jackpot will be suggested by the performance after the operation according to the reception of the performance. However, even if the automatic button effect is controlled, if no operation of the special operation means is accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect was accepted may appear. There isn't. However, in this case, although the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted does not appear, it may be made to appear if it is different from the performance when the performance was accepted.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button production state using the operation button 410 (operation in the form of a long press), the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also the performance reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (the performance reception period in which the level of expectation is suggested when operating the sword ornament 5001, and the level of expectation is suggested when operating the special operation means) It is desirable to prevent this from being allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). In other words, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in a long-press mode) during the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" is enabled, so that the original performance reception (operating an operation means different from the operation button 410) is enabled. This may occur without any operation (when the performance is accepted), and from the perspective of a player who is unfamiliar with such automatic button performance states, it is difficult to determine whether the performance reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or whether the operation button 410 This is because the player may be confused as to whether or not there was a performance acceptance period for a different operation means, and there is a concern that this may reduce interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a precursor performance prior to the occurrence of the performance reception period, but it is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). A precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when the performance is not activated, and a precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may also be possible to perform the display in a different manner. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic performance function is in a performance state that can function within the specific performance reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the performance acceptance period. However, when the production reception period occurs, the specified image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (premonitor effect). In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the production image that is different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the place where the hidden "specific image suggesting the remaining time" will appear from now on. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific performance reception period ends due to the player's operation not being completed in time, and furthermore, Even if the player's operation is not completed in time, the automatic performance function functions and the post-operation performance is executed, so it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to set or cancel the setting of the automatic button production state by the player's operation, but the results of the jackpot determination, including the following explanation examples, are The state may be set to the automatic button performance state or the setting of the automatic button performance state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or performance. An example of how the state can be set or canceled depending on the progress of the game or performance is, for example, ``While the control is in the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button performance state, but when the state is controlled in the jackpot game state. There are control modes such as ``The automatic button presentation state is canceled when the state changes to a high probability time saving state,'' and ``The automatic button presentation state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state is terminated. There are control modes such as "generating a production pattern that is canceled when a predetermined time has passed from the occurrence of the button production pattern", and "generating an automatic button production state over a period in which multiple symbol changes are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as the following. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to be in an automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the "automatic button presentation state" are not canceled. This process itself will be eliminated.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be when the remaining time of the production reception period has expired, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). If the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when the remaining time of the performance reception period has expired or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the performance after the operation will be performed as if the performance had been accepted after the performance reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, if the automatic performance function described above functions at a timing (specific timing) when there is still time left in the performance reception period, the automatic performance function described above will function as if there was an actual operation. At the point in time (specific timing), the performance reception period ends and the post-operation performance is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the effect will occur after the operation even if you do not operate it when the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (the effect reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic performance function function at a specific timing within the period to start the corresponding post-operation performance. In other words, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function even though the specific timing within the performance acceptance period has arrived, the post-operation performance will be generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to cause anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button presentation state (for example, ``I am mistakenly thinking that I am being controlled to the automatic button presentation state even though I am not controlled to the automatic button presentation state.'') ``The automatic presentation function may not function due to some kind of trouble, and it may become impossible to check the presentation after operation.'') You will be able to do this.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button presentation state. Below, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, or each of the following characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above presentation examples. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

In addition, in explaining each of the following characteristic technologies, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), normally when the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is not controlled, When a performance reception period occurs, which can occur, even if no operation is performed within the performance reception period, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific valid period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the specific valid period. You can also do this. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation performance when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) (improvement of presentation performance by allowing the occurrence of a specific display presentation). Of course, even if a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) occurs, the automatic presentation function may not function during a different presentation reception period that is set when a specific display presentation is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions, which saves you the trouble of operating it, allowing you to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected to suitably increase interest in games. It should be noted that the automatic presentation function does not necessarily have to function in all other presentation reception periods that are set when a specific display presentation is not being performed, and the automatic presentation function does not necessarily function in at least some of the presentation reception periods. If the function is made incapable of functioning, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved when a specific effective period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. In addition, even if such a specific validity period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the arrival of a specific timing within the specific validity period, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start a post-operation performance accordingly.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
- If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will be executed at the timing when the first predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect,
- When a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific valid period occurs. At the timing when , the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions, ends the second specific validity period and generates a corresponding post-operation performance, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period will continue even though the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. Processes such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing if there is no operation until the end of the operation may be performed when in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the production acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while the production is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the first production period starts from the occurrence of the production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions when a predetermined time period has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function until a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period has elapsed; Even after the performance acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if the display is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), it is possible to check which type of specific display display was being performed when the display reception period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, if the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned The performance can be progressed with a sense of tension, such as wondering whether the automatic performance function will work or whether the automatic performance function described above will not work in the first place. Note that the first specific validity period, the second specific validity period, and the third specific validity period are all set when the operation means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410) enters the operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), the effect is accepted and a post-operation effect is generated.

Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) can be displayed. In this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Furthermore, the post-operation effects that occur when the effect is accepted during the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different presentation contents.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, at what timing within the performance reception period did the automatic performance function function? In order to make it possible to recognize whether there was enough time left, an automatic production function was activated for the bar display (a display that changes the image (in this case, area change) as time passes) indicating the remaining time in the production acceptance period. The post-operation effect may be generated while this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed at the time when the automatic production function functions, the production acceptance period can be changed to the first specific valid period ( A period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) and a second specific effective period (a period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time period has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) When the second predetermined time period, which is a late stage, has elapsed, it becomes possible to recognize which period the automatic presentation function is functioning.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the production acceptance period occurs) occurs, and when the second specific effective period ( The expected level of jackpot is different depending on when the automatic production function functions when the second predetermined time has passed after the production acceptance period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, you can expect a jackpot when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. They function in different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Additionally, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the automatic performance function described above may be used. As in the case where the "bar display" functions, the post-operation effect may be generated while the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed, for example, as light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decoration. Good too.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, during the performance reception period, an operation target suggestion image (for example, a target operation In addition, even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, the post-operation presentation is generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed instead of hidden. It is desirable to do so. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. Whenever the automatic presentation function functions, such as when the automatic presentation function functions within the above-mentioned first specific validity period or when the automatic presentation function functions within the above-mentioned second specific validity period, The post-operation effect may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

In addition, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. This makes it possible to simultaneously check the following information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed as, for example, a light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decoration. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-mentioned automatic production function, the operation target suggestion image (such as a mock image of the operation means) may appear only when the jackpot expectation level (for example, a jackpot has been obtained). If multiple modes are prepared in which the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed (the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed) is different, and the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the operation target will be changed at the time when the post-operation effect starts to be executed based on the operation reception. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image of the operation means) is left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of post-operation presentation can be changed. It becomes possible to check both at the same time, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when generating a valid period (direction reception period) during which the sample image is displayed, the type of the valid period (direction reception period) (conditions for the generation of the valid period, post-operation effects that occur when the operation is accepted), etc. (e.g., the type of display), the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is met), and the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied). It is desirable that there be a case where the display is not performed (a second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during a valid period in which no display is displayed and the display area is reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for accepting operations. You will be able to maintain a good sense of internal tension. Note that "not displaying a display area in which the display area of a specific image is reduced over time" means, for example, that normally (during the first effective period) the display area of a specific image is displayed in a manner that the display area is reduced over time. When displaying an image, this can be achieved by not displaying the gauge image itself during the second valid period, or by displaying the gauge image but by adopting a method in which the display area is not reduced over time. be.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second validity period (in the case where the display area is not reduced over time), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) It is desirable that at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect starts to be executed, so that the simulated image is not hidden but is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to understand that the operation was accepted while the sample image was displayed (before the expiration date), making it possible to feel anxious about not being able to complete the operation in time. will be able to be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary at least at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display state of the model image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the display state of the model image is not made difficult to recognize by other images. Therefore, if the sample image was dynamically displayed during the validity period during which operation reception was permitted, there would be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) within the first validity period, the change occurs. The sample image may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or as in the case of the second validity period described above, the sample image may be displayed instead of being hidden. Changes (changes in display, lighting of lamps, etc.) may occur in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the effective period in which "the display area of a specific image is not displayed to be reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated will still be displayed. As for images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time when operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image based on the sample image has progressed. This is possible, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes a first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and a second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as operating means, and the first operating means There are cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations for the second operating means are permitted, and cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations are permitted for the second operation means are generated. Among these, during the validity period in which the acceptance of operations on the first operation means is permitted, a first image of the first operation means is displayed, and during the validity period in which the reception of operations on the second operation means is permitted, the second operation means is displayed. The second sampled image is displayed. In addition, the validity period in which the operation reception on the first operation means is allowed and the validity period in which the operation reception on the second operation means is allowed are different from each other. The rate at which modes that only appear when a jackpot is executed is made to differ. In addition to the valid period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted (direction reception period) and the validity period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted (direction reception period), there are valid periods different from these. Furthermore, it may be something that can occur. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a valid period in which accepting operations on the second operating means is permitted), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, etc.) It is desirable that the simulated image (second simulated image) be in a displayed state, rather than being hidden, at the time when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lighting of a lamp, etc., starts.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. However, if you accidentally operate the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and leave the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) in the operating state (without performing the operation), Even if an operation is performed on the second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, the player is made to recognize that the effect has been properly accepted. You will be able to do this.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, it is necessary to It is desirable that the display state of the sample image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the sample image was dynamically displayed during the validity period during which operation reception was permitted, there would be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the performance has been properly accepted, it is necessary to make changes (such as display changes and lamp lighting) due to the player's operation within the first validity period. Even if such a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) in response to the operation reception is performed while the sample image (first sample image) is displayed without being hidden. , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "a determination means that performs a determination, a performance means that performs a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a performance device that performs a performance based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means." a special operation receiver disposed movably between a first position and a second position (an operation button 410 displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position); ), a first detection section capable of detecting a specific action (press operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving section to a second position, and a special operation receiving section different from the specific operation receiving section. (For example, a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, a sheathing operation) by a player on the sword decoration 5001), A plurality of production reception periods including a first production reception period and a second production reception period are prepared as production reception periods (of different types), and in the first production reception period, a specific production reception period that imitates the specific operation receiving section is prepared. A simulated image is displayed, and the performance is accepted by detection by the first detection section, and in the second performance reception period, a special simulated image that simulates the special operation receiving section is displayed, and the performance is accepted by the detection by the first detection section. The performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection unit, and even though a special imitation image imitating the special operation receiving unit is displayed during the second performance reception period, the specific operation by the player is When the specific operation receiving section is displaced from the first position to the second position, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the second detection Based on the detection by the section, the performance is accepted, and the performance after the operation is made executable based on the performance reception.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection section, and the corresponding At the time when the execution of the post-operation performance is started based on the reception of the performance, the special imitation image that simulates the special operation receiving part is kept displayed instead of hidden, so that it is not the side that operated by mistake. The player can be made aware that the post-operation performance is being executed as a proper operation.

In addition, when the special sample image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, the post-operation performance will start to be executed in the displayed mode. If the production is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the sample image may be left displayed instead of hidden at the time when the post-operation production starts, or the sample image may be left displayed after the operation. The simulated image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving part is lower than that in the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving part. This is considered to be one of the causes of many operational errors. Therefore, when the second production reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. It is desirable that a reception acceptance sound is output. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for the player to make operational errors. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or the reception This refers to a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Peekeen", for example.

However, even when the first production reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. A reception acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is preferable that the mode (tone, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether the first presentation acceptance period occurs or the second presentation acceptance period occurs. Alternatively, during the first performance reception period, even if a performance is accepted while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound that is in the output state will not be terminated and will continue, but during the second performance reception period. In this system, if a production is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is desirable that the reception permission sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and whether the operation on the specific operation receiving section or the special operation reception period will occur. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area is displayed, and then the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is displayed to become smaller as time passes. (For example, the display area will eventually be set to "0") to generate a small gauge validity period (performance reception period) that indicates the remaining time when operation reception is allowed. Displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then decreasing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, eventually reducing the display area to "0") In some cases, a large gauge valid period (performance reception period) indicating the remaining time in which operation reception is allowed is generated by displaying a display that indicates that the operation is accepted. The small gauge validity period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge validity period in which the large gauge image is displayed are based on the expectation level of jackpot that is suggested when the operation is accepted. The rate at which aspects that do not appear are executed) is different (for example, the expectation of a jackpot is higher during the large gauge validity period). In addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, a validity period different from these may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide an operation opportunity for the same operation object, or may provide an operation opportunity for different operation objects.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge validity period, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the large gauge image remain displayed rather than hidden. Additionally, the large gauge image becomes smaller over time even when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display continues without being terminated. As a result, while there was a sense of security as it appeared that there was a lot of time remaining due to the large gauge image being displayed, after the operation was accepted, there were questions about whether or not the operation was accepted properly. It becomes possible to make the patient feel a sense of anxiety, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color or transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be made difficult to see due to other images. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, the operation It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to an operation by the player within the small gauge validity period, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden in a state where a change in display (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (such as a display change or a lamp lighting) may be generated in response to an operation reception.

In addition, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound indicating that the production reception is now permitted or that the production reception is permitted. . This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge validity period has expired, making it possible to further emphasize the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or This is a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time during which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time when presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started at , indicating that the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "pikin", for example.

However, even when the small gauge validity period occurs, an acceptance permission sound may be output that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether a small gauge valid period occurs or a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the small gauge validity period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound that is being output will not end and will continue, but during the large gauge validity period, If the production is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period occurs, and it is possible to accept an operation during a small gauge valid period and a large gauge valid period. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation was accepted during the period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only be different in size, but also have different shapes (such as images that are not similar).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the simulated image is dynamically displayed so as to depict the displacement of the operation receiving part. It is to be displayed. In this regard, the sample image is not hidden but remains displayed at the point when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. In this case, the dynamic display of the simulated image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the sample image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated sample image, which will be described later, in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, "operation reception" refers to detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as detection by touch sensor of contact with a specific operation receiving part. An operation may be accepted, or an operation may be accepted by detecting the player's movement in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

In addition, when we refer to a performance that generates a performance reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) as an "operation-based performance," there is no relation to this operation-based performance. It may also be possible to perform it in parallel with another specific performance (for example, a movable body performance, a count performance, etc.) that does not have a specific effect. However, in this case, if the "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions is higher than when there is a performance situation in which "Specific Performance" is being performed concurrently. In other words, when there is a performance situation in which an "operation-based production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are concurrently performed, it is assumed that the production is not accepted for the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. In contrast, a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed because ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in the running state, whereas an ``operation-based performance'' is executed but ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in progress. If you are in a production situation where "Specific Production" is not being executed, if the production is not accepted for "Operation Production" and the production is not executed after the operation, you will end up in a situation where no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when an "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this one" is not being executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this one" are executed. By making the rate at which the automatic performance function functions as described above higher than when there is a performance situation in which "performance" is performed concurrently, it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest when an operation-based performance occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, foreshadowing performances that are performed before the production reception period occurs, and performances that operate the operation means that are the target of operation, are executed as "operation-based performances" or performances related to this. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, if the "another specific performance" is to be generated before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance), it is suggested in advance that the rate at which the automatic performance function described above will function will be higher. You will be able to do this. In this case, it is desirable that the performance be executed as a performance that ends after the performance reception period (preferably, post-operation performance) ends. On the other hand, if "another specific performance" is to be executed as a performance that occurs after the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance) and ends before the end of the performance acceptance period, for example, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately beforehand whether there is a high probability that the automatic presentation function will function, and it becomes possible to provide presentations with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific performance" is to occur before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably, the precursor performance), the "another specific performance" can be performed multiple times within one symbol change. If it is set to be performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the automatic production function is likely to function when "another specific production" is executed. It becomes possible to create a sense of tension as to whether or not the performance reception period will occur.

Also, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss fluctuations according to the result of the jackpot determination are sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss fluctuation is executed 999 times in a row, Until the 1000th loss variation is reached, a performance reception period may occur with a predetermined probability in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may function or may not function. On the other hand, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row). When the 1000th losing variation is reached, the symbol variation (performance pattern) that reaches the specific value will be given an operating opportunity to the operating means (any of multiple operating means) regardless of the result of jackpot determination. In addition to ensuring that there is a performance acceptance period in which a performance is granted, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function even if there is no operation by the player within the performance reception period, and there will be an operation by the player within the performance reception period. A process may be executed that always generates the same post-operation effect as before. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, "the player should perform an operation every time a performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is being executed continuously." As if feeling a sense of responsibility, the Pachinko machine 1 itself will always function automatically even if there is no operation by the player. Since the game is realized as a performance that makes the game more interesting, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. At this time, during the performance reception period that occurs when the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing fluctuation), the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is performed. A special display image (e.g., "Operate") that is different from the display image that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the number of times reaches a certain value (e.g., loss variation up to 999 times) (e.g., "Operate", etc.) It is desirable to display a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will handle the operation on your behalf." In addition, even after the symbol variation (performance pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is fulfilled, the symbol variation (Performance pattern), regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a performance reception period is always generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means), and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf.''), and even if there is no operation by the player within the production acceptance period, the automatic production function described above will function and respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row, The remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the 1000th losing fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), until the loss variation according to the result of jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value, during symbol variation, the first operation Both the production acceptance period for the means and the production acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. The performance may be advanced so that only one of the performance reception period for the first operating means and the performance reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to prevent expectations from being raised regarding the occurrence of the performance acceptance period itself. It becomes wet. However, this example shows that "despite the fact that we have been urging players to perform operations every time a production acceptance period occurs while losing fluctuations are being executed continuously, no results have been achieved. As if he felt a sense of responsibility, considering that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a performance that always makes the automatic performance function function even if there is no operation by the player, it is a transient situation. In order to prevent such expectations from building up any further, a performance acceptance period is generated for the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) with a relatively low level of expectation at the time of occurrence, and the second operating means (for example, It is desirable that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001) not occur.

In addition, for the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means, the control is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). This can occur both when not in use and when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). Regarding the second production acceptance period in which an opportunity to operate is given, this cannot occur unless the control is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), and the second production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may also be possible for the event to occur when the event occurs. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to enhance the performance when the control is in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when the control is in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state). This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in playing games.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the performance reception period based on the result of jackpot determination,
・Display a sample image of the operation means (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be operated) (sample image display means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if the player performs an operation while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any operation by the player while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without receiving any operation from the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the sample image may be displayed in one of several modes that differ in the rate (expectation level) that the effect will be executed after the operation in a ``mode advantageous to the player'' when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do so. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the player operation reception means and the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic performance reception means. It will be possible to generate effects after the operation.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, a sample image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the performance reception period, and at the same time, Even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, it is desirable to generate the post-operation presentation while the simulated image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance may be performed using at least an area of the performance display device 1600 that is different from the area where the sample image is displayed, or may be performed using a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decoration. It may also be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the sample image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectations, even if the post-operation effect occurs, the expectation level (the sample image) that was suggested during the effect acceptance period will be display mode).

The simulated image that continues to be displayed in this way is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side performance reception period has occurred, and when the specific time has passed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred, In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when different times have elapsed, the time from when the post-operation presentation is executed until the simulated image is hidden is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, you will be able to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the sample image is hidden. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed, there is a jackpot determination. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if a performance reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs while being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), two displays will be displayed during the performance reception period. Either of the display modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the production acceptance period, the production will be accepted (the automatic production function will always function) and the production will be executed after the operation according to the production reception, but the low expectations display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, a production is accepted (the automatic production function functions) when no operation is performed within the production reception period, and a post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. The presentation may be advanced so that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and there are cases where the presentation is not executed after the operation. In other words, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that you will lose interest in the game because you will not be able to confirm the performance after the operation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game's interest will not decrease significantly even if the player forgets to perform an operation. If you sometimes forget to perform an operation, the automatic performance function must function within the performance acceptance period to avoid a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to perform an operation. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic production function will not necessarily function during the production acceptance period to create a sense of tension in the game so that you will not forget to operate it. It is expected that this will increase the awareness of player participation. Note that when not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) does not appear. It may be made so that it cannot appear. Furthermore, during the performance acceptance period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

In each of the characteristic techniques described below, other examples of these automatic button presentation states may also be applied and implemented as appropriate.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As mentioned above, in the automatic button performance state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the performance acceptance period (in the case of applying the above-mentioned other example, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the corresponding button will be activated. It may be possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the operation is performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button performance state, when the performance is not accepted for the operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the same change as when the performance is accepted. It is possible that there may be performance patterns in which the process (automatic performance function) that causes the effect to occur in the performance is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button production state, if the automatic production function does not function if the operation by the player is not accepted within the production reception period, the symbol change will be greater than when the automatic production function functions. It is possible to execute a process in which the performance within the symbol variation is advanced so that the expectation level (ratio) of the appearance of the jackpot symbol is lowered. At this time, the expectation level (ratio) of a jackpot symbol appearing may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when a performance reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button performance state, the automatic performance function is activated when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the performance reception period. By checking whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button performance state, the post-operation performance itself, which could have been confirmed if the performance was accepted (operated on the operation button 410) within the performance acceptance period, cannot be confirmed. Although there is a risk that there may be disadvantages in terms of performance, innovative performance features such as allowing the player to exercise a performance option such as "do not operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period" Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production. The above-mentioned production (specific operation-related production (Figs. 166 to 186) )) is executable. In this regard, in the automatic button performance state, during the performance reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related performance, those performances are When there is no operation (performance reception) within the reception period, it is possible to execute a process in which the performance within the symbol variation is advanced so that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions is increased. At this time, the rate at which the automatic presentation function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related performance is executed before the production reception period occurs can also function as a production that suggests that the automatic production function described above has a high probability of functioning. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the game's interest when a specific operation-related performance is executed.

Also, as mentioned above, in a specific operation-related presentation, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given more than the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 as a result of the presentation. The setting is made so that when it is indicated that a jackpot symbol will be awarded, the expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state is higher. However, in the automatic button performance state, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when there is no operation (performance reception) within the performance reception period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related performance is determined by the operation button 410. It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the opportunity to operate is given to the sword ornament 5001 and the case where it is shown that the opportunity to operate is given to the sword ornament 5001.

According to such a configuration, even if a performance situation with relatively low expectations (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance; However, the rate at which the automatic production function described above functions will not change depending on this (the production result of a specific operation-related production), so regarding the expectations for the automatic production function described above to function, please refer to this. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different performances (specific operation-related performances, expectations suggested by the automatic performance function) that are not influenced by each other's performance results can be performed in parallel, thereby making it possible to increase the game's interest.

Hereinafter, specific examples of performances in which expectations are suggested by such an automatic performance function will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.

FIG. 187(a) shows that in the automatic button performance state, the number of reservations is 3, and the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button presentation state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button presentation state is being controlled is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 (here, "auto button presentation state" is displayed). "Configuring") appears continuously.

FIG. 187(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific performance reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 187(a). As shown in the figure, during a specific production reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, "press") prompting the operation button 410 is displayed. ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410.

Here, if the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the specific performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 187(b), the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) etc.), and also displays multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" with a relatively low expectation, and "super hot!" with a relatively high expectation). Either one will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button performance state is canceled and returned to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also ended at the time the performance is accepted without using up the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs), the rate is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function in 40% of cases, and the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance had been accepted is not executed. Thereafter, the performance will progress in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the occurrence of a specific performance reception period.

On the other hand, if the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 40%, even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period, as shown in FIG. 187(d), If the operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period, the post-operation performance will be executed with the same content as when the performance was accepted. In other words, as mentioned above, in the post-operation performance that occurs when a performance is accepted within a specific performance reception period, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain, etc.) is operated, and expectations differ within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" or "fierce heat!") is displayed, but a post-operation effect will occur depending on the operation within a specific effect acceptance period. In both the case where the automatic presentation function functions and the post-operation presentation is generated, the manner in which it is displayed in the display area is the same. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 187(e), the performance progresses in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the occurrence of a specific performance acceptance period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific performance reception period is generated as a "performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or a "performance reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" Regarding whether or not to occur as a production acceptance period in which the performance does not function, it is decided (selected) based on the result of jackpot judgment when executing symbol fluctuations, and as a result, 60% of the time during a specific production acceptance period The above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a jackpot has been won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding winning, it is determined that the automatic presentation function described above is activated. period" or "performance reception period in which the automatic performance function described above does not function" will occur, and if the jackpot is unsuccessful as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the time of failure is referred to, and the selection table for the time of failure is referred to. Based on the allocation ratio in the selection table, a "performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 60% during a specific performance reception period, and the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific production reception period is generated as "a production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions", "the above-mentioned production reception period" is generated. Which of these periods should the jackpot be generated in such a way that the percentage of jackpot symbols that appear when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than if it were to occur during the production reception period in which the automatic production function does not function? is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, when a production acceptance period occurs during which a highly anticipated aspect (such as "Very hot!") will appear as a production after the operation when the production is accepted, the automatic production function will function. On the other hand, when a production acceptance period occurs, it is determined that a low-expectation mode (such as "Chance!") will appear as a production after the operation when the production is accepted. The rate at which functions function becomes relatively low. Therefore, if a performance reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button performance state, it is difficult to determine whether or not the automatic performance function will function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated during the performance reception period. By checking, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol will appear due to symbol fluctuation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button performance state, the post-operation performance itself, which could have been confirmed if the performance was accepted (operated on the operation button 410) within the performance acceptance period, cannot be confirmed anymore. Although there is a risk that there may be disadvantages in terms of performance, innovative performance features such as allowing the player to exercise a performance option such as ``do not operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period'' Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

However, as shown in FIG. 187(d), even if the automatic performance function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance reception period, the performance after the operation is not as expected. Since low-level expressions (such as ``chance!'') can also appear, even if the automatic presentation function has functioned and suggests that the level of expectation is relatively high, this These successive suggestions of expectations (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic presentation function, suggestions due to the appearance of the presentation after operation) will result in the realization of a performance that will keep you on your toes, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. become expected.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 187(c), even if the automatic performance function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated during the performance reception period, the performance may not be accepted. Since there remains a possibility that a highly anticipated aspect would have appeared in the post-operation presentation that would have appeared if the player had done so, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be maintained in a favorable manner. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 187(c) (a situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production does not appear after the operation) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 187(d) (the automatic production function It is desirable that the level of expectation is lower than when the situation (in which a mode with a low level of expectation appears as a post-operation performance) in which a mode was functional but a mode with a low level of expectation appeared.

FIGS. 188 and 189 show a performance whose level of expectation is suggested by the automatic performance function when a performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance (see FIGS. 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button performance state. A specific example is shown.

FIG. 188(a) shows that in the automatic button performance state, the number of reservations is 3, and the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed. In this example as well, as shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button presentation state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button presentation state is being controlled is displayed within the display area of the presentation display device 1600 (here, , "Setting auto button") appears continuously.

FIG. 188(b) shows that during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 188(a), the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. may be a performance) indicates the performance status where the performance has started. In other words, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, there are cases in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and cases in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity is kept secret. . However, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of a specific operation-related performance, a performance situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated will appear as a first performance result with relatively low expectations. By the appearance of a production situation indicating that the sword ornament 5001 is in a state to be operated as a second production result with a relatively high expectation, the operation button 410 with a relatively low expectation and a production situation with a relatively low expectation It is now shown which of the sword ornaments 5001 with a high value will be given the opportunity to operate.

FIG. 188(c) shows that as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188(b), the operation button 410 is in a state where the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect with relatively low expectations. This shows that a production status indicating that the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred has occurred. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed within the display area, and an instruction display (here, a message such as "press") prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 is displayed. A text display and a bar display indicating the remaining time for a specific performance reception period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410.

Here, if an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the presentation acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(c), the specified decorative member SDY (blind ornament, etc.) is In addition to the production operation, one of multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "Chance!" with a relatively low expectation, "Very hot!" with a relatively high expectation, etc.) It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button performance state is canceled and returned to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also ended at the time the performance is accepted without using up the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the performance acceptance period (when no performance reception occurs), the above-mentioned rate is 20%. The automatic presentation function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions 80% of the time.

In other words, in a specific operation-related performance (specific display performance), the player is confused as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, the player is confused as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be activated, and as a result, the appropriate display effect cannot be determined within the performance acceptance period. A situation may occur where the operation becomes impossible. Therefore, in the automatic button performance state, if a performance acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related performance occurs (see FIG. 188(c)), the performance that occurs without the specific operation-related performance Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 187(b)), the production within the symbol variation is set so that the rate at which the automatic production function described above functions is increased when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period. This makes it possible to execute processing that progresses. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration can be controlled while suppressing the feeling of anxiety such as ``proper operation may not be performed within the performance acceptance period and the performance corresponding to the operation may not appear.'' It becomes possible to provide an interesting view of which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related presentation. In order to obtain such effects, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the level of expectation based on whether or not the automatic presentation function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button presentation state is controlled, after a specific operation-related presentation (specific display presentation) is executed, the corresponding presentation reception period begins. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the automatic production function is in a production situation where the rate of functioning is high (in this case, "Auto button high accuracy medium") continues. It is starting to appear.

In addition, if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 188(d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 was not accepted for presentation within the presentation acceptance period. The post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance had been accepted is not executed. Thereafter, the performance will progress in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the occurrence of a specific performance acceptance period. However, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), the automatic performance function described above does not function when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs). In this case, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b), the automatic performance function described above will function when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs). It is desirable that expectations are set higher than if they had not done so.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions at a rate of 80%, the presentation will be performed as shown in FIG. After the operation is performed within the reception period, the post-operation performance will be executed with the same content as when the performance was accepted. In other words, as mentioned above, in the post-operation performance that occurs when a performance is accepted within a specific performance reception period, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain, etc.) is operated, and expectations differ within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" or "fierce heat!") is displayed, but a post-operation effect will occur depending on the operation within a specific effect acceptance period. In both the case where the automatic presentation function functions and the post-operation presentation is generated, the manner in which it is displayed in the display area is the same. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188(f), the performance progresses in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the occurrence of a specific performance acceptance period.

On the other hand, FIG. 189(g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as a relatively highly expected second performance result as a result of the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 188(b). A production status indicating that the sword decoration object 5001 is present appears, indicating that the production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 has occurred. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, " A message such as "Sheath your sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time for a specific production reception period will now appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operating state to the original position. operations will be allowed.

Here, if an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as an effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 189(g), an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period as shown in FIG. 188(c). The same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed will be executed. However, when an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as an effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(g), an operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the effect acceptance period as shown in FIG. 188(c). Compared to the previous case, among multiple aspects with different expectations (for example, ``Chance!'' with relatively low expectations, and ``Very hot!'' with relatively high expectations), the aspect with higher expectations is The rate of appearance within the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as an effect within the effect acceptance period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time of the specific effect acceptance period is used up. The same point as in the case of the performance reception period shown in FIG. 188(c) is that the period ends when the performance is received without any delay.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if no operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 within the performance reception period in the performance situation shown in FIG. case), the presentation reception occurs in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 188(c) even though the presentation situation has higher expectations than when the presentation situation shown in FIG. 188(c) occurs. As in the case where no action is taken, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related performance, a performance situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first performance result with relatively low expectations (see FIG. Even if (see (c)) appears, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions will not change due to this (performance result of a specific operation-related performance), so the automatic performance function described above It becomes possible to suitably maintain expectations for the functionality to function properly. In this way, by paralleling two different performances that are not affected by each other's performance results (specific operation-related performances, and expectations suggested by the automatic performance function), an unfavorable performance result appeared for one side of the performance. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. However, in this case, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs). In this case, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 189(g), when no operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs), the automatic performance function described above is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

In addition, if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 189(h), it is assumed that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 was not accepted for presentation within the presentation acceptance period. , the post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance had been accepted is not executed. Thereafter, the performance will progress in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the occurrence of a specific performance acceptance period. However, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 189(g), the automatic performance function described above does not function when no operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs). Even if there is no operation, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs), the automatic performance function described above is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

In addition, if the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, even though no operation was performed on the sword ornament 5001 within the performance acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 189(i), If the operation is performed within the performance acceptance period, the post-operation performance will be executed with the same content as when the performance was accepted. In other words, as mentioned above, in the post-operation performance that occurs when a performance is accepted within a specific performance reception period, specific decorative members SDY (blind curtains, etc.) are operated, and expectations differ within the display area. If one of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" or "fierce heat!") is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within the effect acceptance period. In both the cases where the post-operation presentation occurs due to the automatic presentation function functioning, the manner in which it is displayed within the display area is the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 189(j), the performance progresses in such a way that a ready-to-win state is formed a predetermined time after the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related performance occurs.

It should be noted that whether the production reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related production (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)) is generated as "the production reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions" or "the production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions" is generated. As for whether or not the automatic production function is to occur during the production reception period in which the automatic production function does not function, as in the case of the production reception period in which a specific operation-related production is not executed (see Fig. 187(b)), the pattern fluctuation When executing, the decision (selection) is made based on the result of jackpot determination, and as a result, the automatic performance function described above will not function 20% of the time during the performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance. First, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a jackpot has been won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding winning, it is determined that the automatic presentation function described above is activated. period" or "performance reception period in which the automatic performance function described above does not function" will occur, and if the jackpot is unsuccessful as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the time of failure is referred to, and the selection table for the time of failure is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, a "performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or "a performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is generated. As a result, during the performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance (see Figures 188(c) and 189(g)), the automatic performance function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and 80% of the time, the automatic performance function does not function. The above-mentioned automatic presentation function is designed to function at a ratio of .

Similarly, the production acceptance period (see Figures 188(c) and 189(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related production is also generated as "the production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions". If this happens, the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped will be higher than if it occurs as a "production reception period in which the automatic production function described above does not function". , it is decided (selected) which of these periods to generate the jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Regarding the post-operation performance, there are two cases in which the performance reception period corresponds to a specific operation-related performance (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)), and a case where the performance occurs without the specific operation-related performance being executed. The performance may be executed differently depending on the performance acceptance period (see FIG. 187(b)). However, even when performing different effects, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%.

Furthermore, the sword decoration 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 161. In addition, in FIGS. 188 and 189, the explanation was given as an example in which "performance using automatic production function" is applied to the specific operation-related production shown in FIGS. 168 to 171. The ``effect using functions'' may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 166 to 186.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related production is executed in a state that is not controlled by the automatic button production state, the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production is In addition to disabling the setting operation to the automatic button effect state within the ``automatic button effect state'' state, the state in which the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted must be done before the effect acceptance period occurs. , it is desirable to cause this to occur from at least the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(b) (the performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance has started) and to continue this until the performance acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to set the automatic button performance state after confirming that a specific operation-related performance has started, this will not be accepted. It is now possible to provide "effects using the automatic effect function" only to those who continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state. You will be able to provide theatrical value to what you do.

In addition, there may be a production reception period that occurs without a specific operation-related production being executed (see Figure 187(b)), or a production reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related production (Figure 188(c), Figure 189(g)). ), the first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG, blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG, green sword decoration image SYG), image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, compared to when the first display mode appears, a state in which "a production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions" has occurred. It is desirable to have a high percentage of

In addition, there are production acceptance periods that occur without specific operation-related productions being executed (see Figure 187(b)), and production acceptance periods that correspond to specific operation-related productions (Figures 188(c) and 189(g)). )), the third display mode (for example, the red button image BTG or the red sword decoration image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the third display mode appears, the "automatic effect described above" It may be arranged such that a state in which a "performance reception period during which the function functions" always occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button performance state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation performance itself, which could have been confirmed if the performance was accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the performance reception period. To provide materials for deciding whether to exercise a direction option such as ``do not operate the operation button 410 within the direction reception period'' when there is a risk that such disadvantages may occur in terms of direction. It is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "performance using the automatic production function" is applied, the production acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related production" illustrated in FIGS. 166 to 186, 188, and 189. It is desirable that the period is longer than the performance acceptance period (such as FIG. 187(b)) in which a specific operation-related performance is not executed. In other words, in a specific operation-related performance (specific display performance), the player is confused as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, the player is confused as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be activated, and as a result, the appropriate display effect cannot be determined within the performance acceptance period. Although a situation may occur in which operations cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by allowing a long period of time for the production reception period corresponding to "specific operation-related production". becomes expected.

In particular, considering that in the examples of FIGS. 188 and 189, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions is set to be relatively high during the performance reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related performance". For example, setting the production acceptance period to be longer than the production acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related production" will determine whether the automatic production function will function or not. This can be said to be desirable in order to maintain the performance of the game for a longer period of time and to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the timing at which the automatic production function functions is that during the production acceptance period that occurs without a "specific operation-related production" being executed, the automatic production function will function when the first hour has passed after the period has occurred. On the other hand, in the performance acceptance period corresponding to a "specific operation-related performance", the automatic performance function is configured to arrive when a second period of time, which is longer than the first time, has elapsed after the period has occurred. It is important to maintain performance for a longer period of time as to whether or not it functions.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the production acceptance period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related production" and the production reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related production" Even if the gauge is set to be different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period will be displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge will decrease. It is desirable to only have different speeds. In other words, in this case, even if a production acceptance period corresponding to a "specific operation-related production" occurs, it will continue for the same amount of time as the production acceptance period that occurs without the "specific operation-related production" being executed. Since it becomes possible to make it seem like the automatic presentation function is working, it also creates a sense of irritation as it continues for a longer period of time than expected. You will be able to do so.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, when the control is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the first production reception period (production reception period for a specific operation means (operation button 410)) occurs, and even if no operation is performed on the specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first production acceptance period, the process by the first automatic production means (automatic production function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it may not necessarily be executed, during the production acceptance period that occurs when a predetermined time has passed after a specific display production (specific operation-related production) is executed, the first display production that occurs without the specific display production being executed. If no operation is performed on the specific operation means (operation button 410) during the first production reception period than the first production reception period (the production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)), The rate at which processing by the automatic presentation means (automatic presentation function for the operation button 410) is executed will be increased.

In this regard, in this automatic button production state, the rate at which the automatic production function functions ("60% - 40%", "20% - 80%") differs depending on the type of production reception period as described above. When the automatic button performance state to be set is the "first automatic button performance state", the rate at which the automatic performance function functions will vary depending on the type of performance reception period ("50% - 50%", "10 %-90%") and the automatic production function is set to always function when a production reception period occurs, regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button presentation state may be further provided, and any one of these presentation states may be set, including a normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function. In addition, we do not prepare a normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function, and always play the game in automatic button presentation states (first automatic button presentation state, second automatic button presentation state, third automatic button presentation state). Alternatively, a presentation may be performed.

Note that the above-mentioned "type of performance acceptance period" may mean that the type of post-operation performance that occurs when an operation is accepted is different. For example, in the first automatic button production state, there is a "first production reception period in which a post-operation production of a conversation preview is generated" and a "second production reception period in which a cut-in post-operation production is generated". If no operation is accepted for the operating means within the production acceptance period, the same post-operation production as when the acceptance was made will not be generated (although the reception will not be automatic). In the third performance reception period for generating a performance, when no operation is received on the operating means within the performance reception period, the same post-operation performance as when the reception is received is generated (automatic reception is performed). It happens. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button presentation state (second presentation state)" in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button presentation state (first presentation state)", "conversation notice In the first production reception period in which a post-operation production is generated, if no operation is received on the operating means within the production reception period, the same post-operation production as when the reception is received is not generated (automatic reception). However, in the "second production reception period for generating a production after the cut-in operation" and "the third production reception period for generating a production after the operation to move the movable body A", those production reception When no operation is accepted on the operating means within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic acceptance is performed). However, any of the multiple production acceptance periods, including the first production reception period (type of conversation preview), second production reception period (cut-in type), and third production reception period (type of movable object A), will occur. Even in the case where an operation is not accepted for the operating means, a "normal performance state" in which the same post-operation performance as when the reception is not generated is not prepared, but must be set to this. It will be made impossible to do so.

In other words, in this case, "an operating means that can be operated by the player, a determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and a game that can be played based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determining means" The present invention is equipped with a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to a person, and a performance state control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of performance states, and as a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is provided to the operation means, A plurality of production reception periods are prepared in which different types of post-operation production occur when an operation is accepted, and the plurality of production states include a corresponding one when any one of the plurality of production reception periods occurs. Depending on the type of production acceptance period that has occurred, there are cases where the same post-operation production is generated when the operation on the operating means is not accepted within the production acceptance period, and cases where the same post-operation production as when the acceptance is made; A first performance state in which the same post-operation performance is not generated, and when any one of the plurality of performance reception periods occurs, depending on the type of the production reception period that has occurred, A case where the same post-operation effect is generated when the operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect acceptance period, and a case where the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is not generated. However, the likelihood of occurrence of the same post-operation performance is determined by the fact that at least a second performance state different from the first performance state is included, and which of the plurality of performance acceptance periods occurs. Even in the case where an operation is not accepted on the operating means, the game machine does not include a performance state in which the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is not generated. It will be established as

Further, the distribution rate may also be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of performance acceptance period and the type of performance state.

Furthermore, the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic performance function functions during the first performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 187(b), the timing (first (timing within the performance reception period), the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to end the first performance reception period and generate a corresponding post-operation performance. However, if the automatic performance function does not function within the first performance reception period shown in FIG. 187(b), the timing (the first 1 timing within the production reception period), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function, and then the first production reception period ends without the post-operation production being executed (after that, the post-operation production will not be executed. ). On the other hand, if the automatic performance function functions during the second performance reception period shown in FIG. 188(c) or the third performance reception period shown in FIG. 189(g), the second performance reception period or The above-mentioned automatic performance function functions at the timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has passed after the occurrence of the third production reception period, and the second production reception period or the third production reception period is activated. The performance reception period is ended and a corresponding post-operation performance is generated. However, if the automatic performance function does not function within the second performance reception period shown in Figure 188(c) or the third performance reception period shown in Figure 189(g), the second performance reception period or The automatic performance function described above does not function when the second predetermined time period elapses after the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and after that, the second performance reception period or the third Ends the performance acceptance period (after that, the post-operation performance will not be executed).

According to such a configuration, during the first performance acceptance period where the automatic performance function functions at a low rate, the automatic performance function can function at a relatively early stage, and the automatic performance function can function at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to accept the performance by his/her own operations before the first performance acceptance period ends, so it is safe. You will be able to play games with care. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period where the automatic production function has a high rate of functioning, the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function is If the automatic presentation function does not function, there will not be much time left for the player to operate it himself, so even though the automatic presentation function has a high rate of functioning, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension. You will be able to do this.

Regarding the above modification, in the first production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first production reception period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the automatic production function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second production reception period). You can do it like this. Even with such a configuration, the automatic performance function can only function at a relatively late stage, and in the unlikely event that the automatic performance function does not function (due to some kind of trouble), it will take time for the player to operate it himself. Since it is thought that players fantasize that they do not have much leeway left, it can be expected that similar effects will be achieved.

Furthermore, in addition to the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other production examples as well, control to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of jackpot determination, or it may be always controlled as an automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state). Further, the setting itself to the automatic button performance state may not be performed, and the gaming machine may be configured so that the automatic performance function can always function at a predetermined rate.

[Unified operation control when in automatic button production state]
As mentioned above, in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the player's operation within the performance acceptance period (if the above-mentioned other example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period) Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the desire to return to the normal performance mode in which the performance can progress depending on the player's own operations (want to end the automatic button performance state) wishes) may occur. Such a desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but there is a limited period of time from the start of the performance acceptance period until it ends. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button presentation state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity for operation may be lost. If so, interest in the game may decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the performance acceptance period regarding a specific performance occurs while being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the performance reception period for the specific performance occurs. A process for ending the automatic button presentation state by just one operation on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is granted within the period, and after the operation according to the reception of the presentation. Performance (processing that can cause a change in performance) is performed separately (operation unified control in automatic button performance state). As a result, even if the desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operations occurs within the production acceptance period, the production mode can be switched without losing the opportunity to operate. It will now be possible to do this smoothly.

As mentioned above, when setting the automatic button production state while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is only allowed for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. .

On the other hand, as also mentioned above, when canceling the setting of the automatic button production state while the symbol variation is in the execution state, in the state where the production acceptance period has not occurred, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 must be operated. An operation for canceling settings is allowed only for button 410. On the other hand, in a state where a performance acceptance period is occurring, if an operation is performed on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) that is subject to the operation opportunity during the performance reception period. , a process for terminating the automatic button presentation state and a post-operation presentation (processing that can cause a change in presentation) in response to presentation reception are respectively performed (unified operation control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration object 5001 is occurring, the operation will not be accepted and the process to end the automatic button performance state will not be executed.

However, some players play games using selfish gaming methods, such as ``maintaining the automatic button presentation state (without switching the presentation mode) and proceeding with the presentation by performing operations only when desired.'' It can be assumed that there are some people who wish to do so. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special operation means (an automatic mode continuation button) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is further provided in the door frame 3. If the operation button 410 (or sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the performance reception period for a specific performance while being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the automatic button performance will be activated. Processing that ends the state (specific performance state) and processing that can cause a change in performance are performed respectively (unified operation control in automatic button performance state), but control is performed in automatic button performance state (specific performance state) If the above-mentioned special operation means is operated during the production reception period for a specific production when the button is set, the process to end the automatic button production state (specific production state) will not be performed and the production will change according to the operation. Processing that could cause this is done.

According to such a configuration, if the user wants to end the automatic button production state and actively play the operation game from now on, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the production acceptance period. In this case, if you want to operate only occasionally while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), you should operate the special operation means during the production reception period. By simply using different operating means in this manner, the player can realize the desired game.

The unified operation control in such an automatic button presentation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192.

FIG. 190(a) shows that in the automatic button performance state, the number of reservations is 1, and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of jackpot determination. The figure shows a state in which a performance reception period in which a pressing operation of the operation button 410 is accepted has occurred while a ready-to-win state has been formed in the current performance situation. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button presentation state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button presentation state is being controlled is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 (here, "auto button presentation state" is displayed). "Configuring") appears continuously.

In addition, as shown in the figure, during this performance acceptance period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, the bottom An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light-emitting state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the operation on the special operation means 1410 (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) that has not changed in any way is permitted.

190(b) to (d) show that although no operation was performed on the operation button 410 during the presentation acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), the automatic presentation function described above functions, The post-operation effect is being executed with the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was accepted. It should be noted that when the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, the presentation acceptance period that occurred in FIG. Any opportunity to operate the button) 1410 that has been pressed will be lost.

In other words, in the post-operation performance according to this example of performance, a staged performance progress appears, and it is difficult to determine which performance result among multiple modes with different expectations (FIGS. 190(c) and 190(d)). Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. 190(b), a specific effect image (here, explosion display a smoke image). After this, when the performance progresses to a relatively low-expectation performance result, as shown in FIG. 190(c), the specific performance image shown in FIG. As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (in this case, a "good fortune" fortune) is displayed that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations. When the effect progresses to a highly effective effect, as shown in FIG. 190(d), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 190(b) (here, the smoke image from an explosion) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (here, a ``Nakayoshi'' fortune) that suggests a relatively highly anticipated performance result will be displayed.

The flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 190(a) to 190(d) will appear as the basic progress of the effect when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation presentation (FIGS. 190(b) to 190(d)) is executed, the automatic button presentation state will be maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

However, as mentioned above, after being controlled to the automatic button performance state (a specific performance state), the player wishes to return to the normal performance mode in which the performance can progress depending on the player's own operations (the automatic button performance state is A desire to end it may occur. Such a desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but there is a limited period of time from the start of the performance acceptance period until it ends. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button presentation state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity for operation may be lost. If so, interest in the game may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), it is detected that the operation has been performed. (Detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position) is performed to terminate the automatic button presentation state and a post-operation presentation corresponding to reception of the presentation (automatic Unified operation control in button production state). It should be noted that at the time when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. The opportunity to operate the button 1410 (indicated as "PUSH" in the figure) will also be lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the production acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), the operation is performed within the production acceptance period and the production reception is completed, as shown in FIG. 191(e). As a post-operation effect in response to this, a specific effect image (in this case, an image of smoke from an explosion) is displayed. After this, when the performance progresses to a relatively low-expectation performance result, as shown in FIG. 191(f), the specific performance image shown in FIG. As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (in this case, a "good fortune" fortune) is displayed that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations. When the effect progresses to a highly effective effect, as shown in FIG. 191(g), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 191(e) (here, the smoke image from an explosion) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (here, a ``Nakayoshi'' fortune) that suggests a relatively highly anticipated performance result will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the production acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), processing for terminating the automatic button production state based on the operation will also be performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191(e) to 191(g), after the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "Auto button setting in progress") will be hidden. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the performance acceptance period that occurs in FIG. A suggestive display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 191(e)).

Furthermore, as described above, during the performance reception period that occurred in FIG. (button) 1410 is also permitted. This special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 allows you to "operate it yourself only when you like while maintaining the automatic button presentation state (without switching the presentation mode)." As mentioned above, it is provided to enable selfish gaming methods such as "to advance the performance."

Therefore, even if the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), the First, a specific effect image (in this case, an image of smoke from an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect in response to the operation being performed within the effect acceptance period and the effect being accepted. After this, when the performance progresses to a relatively low-expectation performance result, as shown in FIG. 192(i), the specific performance image shown in FIG. 192(h) (here, explosion As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (in this case, a "good fortune" fortune) is displayed that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations. When the effect progresses to a highly effective effect, as shown in FIG. 192(j), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 192(h) (here, the smoke image from an explosion) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (here, a ``Nakayoshi'' fortune) that suggests a relatively highly anticipated performance result will be displayed. Note that the production acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a) ends when an operation on the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted, and the above-mentioned automatic production is terminated. Not only will the function become inoperable, but the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 will also be lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the production acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), the automatic button production state is Processing to terminate is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192(h) to (j), even after the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed to indicate that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. The display (here, "Auto button setting in progress") will continue to be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is When an operation is performed, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions (FIG. 190(b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (FIG. 191(e)), a special message that cannot appear. It allows the performance to appear. Such a special performance may be a performance using a movable body, a lamp, etc., but in the example of the performance shown in FIG. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 190(b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191(e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed. I try to do that. Instead of the sparkling effect display, an additional effect using movable objects, lamps, etc. may be implemented.

According to such a configuration, the content of the change in performance that is caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the performance reception period regarding the fortune performance while being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) When the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is controlled, an operation is performed on the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the performance acceptance period regarding the fortune performance. The contents of the change in the effect caused in each case will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (in this case, a sparkling effect display) appears, the message "The operation on the operating means was performed and the effect after the operation appeared in response to the effect reception, but the automatic button effect state is You will be able to recognize that the settings have not been canceled and are still in this state while enjoying the post-operation effects. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(i), even when displaying a performance image that suggests a performance result with a relatively low level of expectation (here, a "good fortune" fortune), a special The effect (in this case, a glittering effect display) can appear.

In addition, such special effects (here, sparkling effect displays) are made to appear in addition to the above-mentioned post-operation effects at a predetermined rate based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect is When the effect additionally appears, it is desirable that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it would be beneficial for the player to operate not on the operation button 410 but on the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that operations will no longer be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the production reception period that occurred in FIG. If the effect display) does not appear, any performance result will not appear by operating the operation button 410 within the performance reception period that occurred in FIG. 190(a) or by the above-mentioned automatic performance function functioning. It is desirable that the rate at which jackpot symbols appear due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the case where the jackpot symbol appears.

According to such a configuration, by operating the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410, "the operation on the operation means was performed and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appeared". In order to create a state in which the automatic button presentation state is not canceled and continues, there are production disadvantages such as ``symbol fluctuations may suggest that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing is extremely low.'' Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in the game by allowing them to make such performance choices.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), although the same presentation mode as in the example shown in FIG. Therefore, the situation is such that it is possible to recognize that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the examples shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 191(f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), although it is made possible to recognize that the expectation level is low, the presentation mode is as shown in FIG. 190(c) and FIG. 191(f). By making the cases the same as each other, a third party who is not operating the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 can see that they are in a performance situation where they have failed in their performance selection. It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, no matter which performance selection is made within the performance reception period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), the performance selection shown in FIG. e), as shown in FIG. 192(h), we decided to display a specific effect image (in this case, an image of smoke from an explosion). The presentation may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the rate at which a highly anticipated performance mode (here, the "Nakayoshi" fortune) appears or the rate at which special effects appear differs.

In addition, no matter which direction selection is made within the direction acceptance period that occurred in FIG. (Here, either the "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to understand that a production situation in which the production selection has failed (FIG. 192(i)) appears, it is necessary to Here, in order to make either the "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune appear as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke from an explosion).

In addition, it is possible to perform a performance that suggests the degree of expectation even during the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. You can.

Further, the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily provided as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button presentation state when the state is in the automatic button presentation state. Alternatively, it may be performed by another operating means that is already prepared.

Also, during the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), will there be a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be performed? Or will there be a period during which operations on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be accepted? The above-mentioned effects (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) are executed. It may also be something that occurs as a result of something being done.

In addition, during the performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, the first performance is also given an operation opportunity to the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if it includes a reception period (see FIG. 190(a)) and a second performance reception period in which no opportunity to operate the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is provided. good. In this case, when the first production acceptance period (see FIG. 190(a)) occurs, the specific operation-related production described above (FIGS. 166 to 186) is more effective than when the second production reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate at which the symbols (see above) appear before the symbol variation is stopped is high. According to this configuration, the rate at which the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appear depends on whether the first effect acceptance period or the second effect acceptance period occurs. It comes to function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic performance processing]
As mentioned above, in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the player's operation within the performance acceptance period (if the above-mentioned other example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period) Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can accept effects, and a different effect is executed depending on which operation means is operated" The production reception period is allowed to occur. Therefore, such a special performance reception period occurs when the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is controlled, and during the special performance reception period, no operation is performed for any operating means. If there is no operation, which of the multiple operating means should the automatic production function be enabled? (Which of the multiple operating means causes the same change in the production as when the production is accepted?) becomes a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means can accept effects, and a different effect is executed depending on which operating means is operated" is provided. When the production acceptance period occurs, it is not "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher level of expectation will appear" but "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation level will appear". is the standard, and the process of activating the automatic performance function for an operation means that is different from the "operation means that can generate a performance that may result in a less expected performance result" (stable side automatic performance) processing) is executable.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest level of expectation among the plurality of production modes that may occur when a production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production acceptance period is: Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic presentation function is activated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as ``If you forget to operate the automatic presentation function, the least expected presentation mode will appear.'' This will allow you to avoid this in an appropriate manner.

The stable side automatic performance processing when in such an automatic button performance state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195.

First, an example of a performance when a special performance acceptance period occurs while the automatic button performance state is not controlled and the normal performance state is in effect will be described. In FIG. 193(a), in the normal performance state, the number of reservations is 3, and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of jackpot determination. In the situation where the performance is being performed and a ready-to-reach state is formed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. This shows a production situation in which a production display indicating that a special production acceptance period has started has appeared. Note that in this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration object 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration have not yet been activated. The operation button 410 is in a light-emitting state, and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sword drawing position in order to facilitate a judgment as to which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Furthermore, in the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are respectively displayed.

FIG. 193(b) shows a period during which a special effect is accepted (either by pressing the operation button 410 or by sheathing the sword ornament 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 193(a). This shows the production situation in which the production acceptance period (production acceptance period that can be selected by the user) has occurred. In this performance situation, at least part of the performance display (here, the button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) on the performance display device 1600 that has appeared since the performance situation shown in FIG. 193(a), and the operation button While the states of 410 and sword decoration 5001 continue, an instruction display prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 (here, an instruction display is displayed on button image BTG or sword decoration image SYG). A corresponding downward arrow, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special performance reception period, etc. will appear.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 193(b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "turbulent" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are enabled to receive the performance. Furthermore, the dedicated mark may not be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of receiving presentations. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, "the image of the operation button 410 is not displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed". It may be configured such that a simulated image is displayed, or a simulated image of the operation button 410 is displayed, but a simulated image of the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed.

That is, in this performance example, when a performance is accepted for the operation button 410 within the special performance acceptance period shown in FIG. After what has been accomplished is displayed (FIG. 193(c)), "50 enemies destroyed" is displayed as a performance result that suggests that the smaller the number of enemies destroyed, the lower the expectations are, and the larger the number of enemies destroyed, the higher the expectations are. An effect (FIG. 193(d), FIG. 193(e)) that causes one of "defeat 100 bodies" to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the presentation after button operation when winning a jackpot, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(d) appears at a rate of "40%", and the mode shown in FIG. 193(e) appears at a rate of "60%". The performance mode shown in FIG. 193(d) appears at a rate of "60%" and the performance mode shown in FIG. It is possible to make the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(e) appear.

On the other hand, if a performance is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 within the special performance acceptance period, the effect after the sword side operation is first displayed that the performance has been accepted for the sword decoration 5001, and then ( Figure 194(f)) shows that the lower the number of enemies defeated, the lower the expectations, and the higher the number of enemies defeated, the higher the expectations. An effect (FIG. 194(g) to FIG. 194(i)) in which one of "777 bodies destroyed" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the performance after the sword side operation when winning a jackpot, the performance shown in Figure 194 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and the style shown in Figure 194 (h) appears at a rate of "50%". The performance mode shown in FIG. 194(i) appears at a rate of "40%", and the performance mode shown in FIG. At a rate of "50%", the production mode shown in FIG. 194(g) appears, at a rate of "50%", the production mode shown in FIG. 194(h) appears, and at a rate of "0%", the production mode shown in FIG. 194(i) appears. It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, regardless of whether the effect appears as a result of the button side operation effect or the sword side operation effect, the effect mode has a small number of defeats. The level of expectation is lower than the production mode with a large number of defeats. Also, if the number of defeats is the same in the presentation mode (for example, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(e), the presentation mode shown in FIG. 194(h), the presentation mode shown in FIG. 195(e) described below) , the expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special production reception period is generated in which production reception is allowed for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means operated within the production reception period, it is possible to generate different operation effects depending on the type of operation means operated on the side. This improves the monotonous performance of playing the game, making it possible to improve the game's interest.

In particular, rather than displaying the same level of expectation regardless of whether the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is operated, the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) Only when the operating means 2) is operated, a specific production mode (herein, shown in FIG. 194(g) Since we have made it possible for the "defeat one enemy" production mode) to appear, we want to see the production on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (the production after the sword side operation) even if we take such a risk. It is now expected that players will maintain their interest in the game by providing conflict and stimulation.

In this case, the performance after button side operation is the "least expected specific performance mode" among the performance modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special performance acceptance period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeat one object" shown in FIG. 194(g))'' is eliminated, which means that it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. In addition, the sword-side post-operation performance is the “specific performance mode with the lowest level of expectation” (here In this case, it functions as a relatively turbulent post-operation performance, in the sense that there is a risk of the appearance of the ``defeat one creature'' performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g).

Furthermore, in this performance example, from the appearance of the performance situation shown in FIG. 193(a) until the appearance of the performance situation shown in FIG. 193(b) (here, within the special performance reception period), The performance mode shown in FIG. 193(a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the performance mode appears, the performance mode is better than when the performance mode does not appear. , when an operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001, the rate at which "a specific presentation mode with the lowest level of expectation (here, the presentation mode of "defeating one object" shown in FIG. 194(g))" appears is low. This makes it possible to advance the production in a variety of ways. This percentage may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, even if there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation level (here, the production mode of 'defeating one creature' shown in FIG. 194(g))" may appear, This makes it possible to use the performance result of whether the performance mode shown in FIGS. 193(a-b) appears as a basis for determining whether to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. , it is expected to suitably improve gaming interest when the special performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 193(b) occurs.

In addition, in the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193(b) occurs but no production is accepted within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production The function does not function, and the effect progresses without being executed after either the button side operation effect or the sword side operation effect.

On the other hand, FIGS. 195(a) to 195(e) show examples of effects when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is being controlled.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), FIG. 195(a-b), and FIG. 195(b), even when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, the automatic button presentation state is controlled. Except for the fact that a display indicating that a special production reception period has started (in this case, "Auto button setting in progress") is continuously displayed on the production display device 1600, no production display indicating that a special production reception period has started has appeared. From then until the end of the special production acceptance period, the production will be performed with the same content as in the normal production state described above (Fig. 193(a), Fig. 193(a-b), and Fig. 193(b)). progress will be made.

However, as mentioned above, if neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 194(g), the automatic performance function is enabled for the operation button 410 that is different from the "sword decoration object 5001" that can generate the performance in which the "defeat one body" performance mode) may appear. It is possible to execute the process (stable side automatic performance process).

In other words, in this case, the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is enabled even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special performance reception period shown in FIG. 195(b). By doing so, the same change will occur in the performance as if the operation of the operation button 410 had been accepted within the special performance reception period. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after displaying that the effect has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 195(c)), the smaller the number defeated, the lower the expectation level, and the higher the number defeated. As a performance result that suggests that the level of expectation is high, either "defeat 50 bodies" or "defeat 100 bodies" will appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (Figure 195 (d), Figure 195 (e)) ) will now be executed.

According to such a configuration, the least expected performance mode among the plurality of performance modes that may occur when a performance reception is made for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration object 5001 within the special performance reception period. The production mode (here, the production mode of "defeat one enemy" shown in Fig. 194(g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function is activated, so the "If you forget to operate it" This makes it possible to suitably avoid a situation where the automatic performance function causes the least expected performance mode to appear.

Here, there is a concern that due to the convenience of the automatic presentation function, the player may not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button presentation state. However, as mentioned above, during the special performance acceptance period, the performance mode shown in FIG. 195(a-b) can appear based on the result of jackpot determination, and when the performance mode appears, , the appearance rate of ``a specific performance mode with the lowest level of expectation (here, the production mode of ``defeating one enemy'' shown in Figure 194(g)'') is low, and the performance after the sword side operation is Since an opportunity to have fun will be provided, it is expected that operations on the sword ornament 5001 will be suitably encouraged.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted as a production and a period in which an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted in the production occur at the same time, and a special period in which the production is accepted and ends at the same time is performed. Although it has been decided to control the production reception period, these periods do not necessarily have to occur at the same time. For example, if a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted as an effect and a period in which an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted as an effect partially overlap, these periods may be separated into separate periods. It may be made to occur at the appropriate timing.

In addition, when a specific performance pattern is selected from among multiple performance patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "multiple operation means can accept the performance, and the performance will differ depending on which operation means is operated. The above-mentioned special performance acceptance period such as "is executed" may always occur. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time the symbol variation starts with a specific performance pattern, it is difficult to determine which of the multiple operation means should be operated within the special performance acceptance period, and furthermore, when the special performance acceptance period occurs. You will be able to think about production strategies based on the assumption that a special production reception period will occur, such as "Should I set the automatic button production state before doing so?" . For example, it will be possible to check "how many preview productions have been performed and in what production style (expectation level)" until the special production reception period occurs. It is now possible to use the results as a basis for determining which of the multiple operation means should be operated within the special performance acceptance period, and the game can be used until the special performance acceptance period occurs. It also becomes possible to suitably maintain interest.

However, even if a specific performance pattern is selected, if there is an operation on the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 within the special performance acceptance period, or even if the automatic performance function Which production mode will appear when it functions is determined by lottery (judgment) based on the result of jackpot judgment at the start of symbol variation or production reception (or when the automatic production function is activated). It is desirable to do so.

Furthermore, even if there is a performance situation in which a special performance reception period has not yet occurred, the player can be made to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is a production situation in which a production display indicating that a special production reception period has started (Fig. 193(a), Fig. 195(a)) is being performed, setting to the automatic button production state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period to prevent this from happening. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special production reception period is started in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. Even if you try to set the automatic button performance state after confirming that the "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It is now possible to provide "stable side automatic performance processing when in the automatic button performance state" only to those who are playing the game continuously while maintaining the automatic button performance state. be able to provide value.

In addition, in the production examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the "specific production mode with the lowest level of expectation (Figure 194(g))" that may appear when the production is performed after the sword side operation is We decided to execute it as a unique performance mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-effect is performed, but regarding the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation level", the performance after the button side operation is It may also be executed in the same manner as the production mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, "defeat 50 bodies" shown in FIG. 193(d)).In other words, in this case, the production after the sword side operation Even if a ``specific production mode with the lowest level of expectation'' appears as a result of this, visually the same mode as the production mode that could appear when the production is performed after button side operation will appear. Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 was operated to realize that the performance situation is such that expectations are extremely low. In other words, in this case, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "a specific performance mode is being displayed based on the performance reception". Even though the presentation situation is only appearing, the pattern changes depending on whether the presentation situation is caused by the operation on the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the degree of expectation for the appearance of a jackpot symbol differs depending on (symbol variation in the execution state), it is possible to make the performance even more interesting using a plurality of operating means.

However, if the "specific performance mode with the lowest level of expectation" in the production after the operation on the sword side is executed as the same production mode that can also appear when the production after the button side operation is performed. However, regarding the "most highly anticipated special performance mode" for the performance after the sword side operation, a unique performance mode that is different from any of the performance modes that can appear when the button side operation is performed (for example, ("Defeating 777 bodies" shown in FIG. 194(i)). According to such a configuration, in the performance after the sword side operation, "the specific performance mode with the lowest expectation" is executed. When this appears, it is difficult for a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 has been operated to realize that they are in a performance situation where their expectations are extremely low. On the other hand, when the "most highly anticipated special performance mode" appears in the performance after the sword side operation, even if a third party does not know which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 was operated. This allows players to easily recognize when they are in a performance situation where expectations are extremely high.Therefore, players can take on the risks mentioned above without worrying about what third parties will notice. You will be able to enjoy the performance on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (the performance after the sword side operation).In addition, a third party will be able to tell you about the "most anticipated special performance mode". It only needs to be recognizable, and for example, uniqueness among other performance modes may be ensured by performing movable body movements or lamp light emission.

In addition, in the production examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the production mode of "777 bodies defeated" (Figure 194 ( i)) can appear, and when the "777 bodies defeated" production mode (Figure 194 (i)) appears, any other production mode (Figure 193 (d), Figure 193 (e) , FIG. 194(g), FIG. 194(h)) appear, the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing in the corresponding symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher. This percentage may be 100%. However, the presentation mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 194(i)) does not necessarily have to appear, and in this case, in contrast to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(d), The appearance rate of the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(h) is made higher than the appearance rate of the performance mode shown in FIG. 193(e) by the amount that the expectation level of the performance mode shown in (g) is lowered. becomes.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the production after button side operation (Figures 193(c) to 193(e)) and the production after sword side operation (Figure 194(f) to Figure 194(i)) ), a common presentation mode (here, the presentation mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can be made to appear, but the common presentation mode is not allowed to appear. Good too. Further, in the button-side post-operation performance, only a display change appears, whereas in the sword-side post-operation performance, in addition to the display change, movable body movements, lamp lighting, etc. may also be made possible. Further, the performance after the button side operation and the performance after the sword side operation may not have any commonality in the performance content regarding the number of kills, and the performance content itself may be executed as a mutually different performance.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, when a production is accepted, including when the production is accepted due to the automatic production function functioning, first, any of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is pressed. Although we decided to display a display (Fig. 193(c), Fig. 194(f), Fig. 195(c)) that suggests whether or not the presentation has been accepted, the level of expectation is indicated without displaying the display. It is also possible to perform a performance that causes a performance result to appear.

In addition, in the production examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the production mode of "777 bodies defeated" (Figure 194 ( i)) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation-related The rate at which the effects (see Figures 166 to 186) appear before the symbol variation is stopped, and furthermore, when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword decoration) with higher expectations 5001), it is desirable to increase the rate at which operation opportunities are given. According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, it is possible to suitably prompt the user to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the production risk is high.

[Restoration processing for movement abnormalities that reduces the impact on movement performance]
As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state (more precisely, a situation in which a specific state does not occur), the system responds to symbol fluctuations. When the restoring operation time (for example, the start time or stop time of symbol variation, etc.) arrives, a process for causing the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoring operation can be executed. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of the presentation, it will be disconcerting and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol variation" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation". Now, as shown in FIG. 196, when a timing tm1 has arrived at which a new symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. will be executed.
- Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is started, a production pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set production pattern is used to perform the symbol variation. Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when processing and symbol fluctuations to advance the production are started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuations), specific A process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the movable decorative body of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that a "specific performance pattern that allows a specific movable ornament to operate at a specific timing tm2 within symbol variation" is set as the performance pattern. Therefore, when timing tm1 arrives, the performance progresses according to "a specific performance pattern that allows a specific movable decorative object to operate at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and a predetermined restoring operation is performed on the specific movable decorative object. A situation will arise in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 that is capable of executing such a specific performance pattern, a performance pattern that is a pair relationship with the specific performance pattern (a performance pattern with a relative level of expectation) is generally used. A low production pattern) is prepared. In a pairwise performance pattern (a performance pattern with relatively low expectations), even though a specific movable decoration is not operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, it is moved towards a specific timing tm2. The same effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (a relatively highly expected effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is made to be performed. Ru. In this way, by preparing two performance patterns that are in a pair relationship in terms of performance (a performance pattern that causes a specific movable decoration to operate, and a performance pattern that does not operate a specific movable decoration), it is possible to (For example, the predetermined time until the arrival of the specific timing tm2) is a predetermined effect that indicates whether or not a specific movable decorative object operates (for example, a display indicating whether or not it operates). It is now possible to carry out such effects, and the interest in the game can be suitably maintained through such performance.

However, if the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation is still in progress even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol variation has started, the specific timing Even though tm2 has arrived, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot perform a performance operation. In other words, in this case, even if the above-mentioned predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function of the predetermined effect, which has the effect of determining whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates, may be lost. , there is a concern that interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, among the performance patterns, the performance progress related to "a specific performance pattern that allows a specific movable decoration to operate at a specific timing tm2", and the predetermined performance progress for a specific movable decoration When a situation arises in which the process of performing the restoration operation (restoration process based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, the ``specific The process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as "processing to perform a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decoration", but in the following explanation, "processing to perform a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative object" will be explained below. The following description assumes that a process in which a restoring operation is repeatedly performed on a specific movable decorative object until a predetermined upper limit is reached is executed.

More specifically, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative object to perform a predetermined restoring operation," restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative object is abnormal. The time required to complete the process will vary. For example, when a specific movable decorative object is restored (restored) to its original position after the abnormal condition is resolved by just performing the first restoring operation, the following message is displayed: The timing tx at which the "process to perform the action" is completed will arrive relatively early, but the number of times this will be repeated before the restoring action for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restored) will be relatively early. As the number increases, the timing tx at which "the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed will be postponed to a later time. At the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and it has not been restored (restored) yet, but if the restoration operation is performed again, the timing tx will be exceeded, then the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing a predetermined restoring action while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of causing the predetermined restoring action to be completed until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoring situation. It becomes like this.

In addition, when performing a restoration operation for a specific movable decoration once takes x hours, the pattern is adjusted once so that the relationship "x hours x n times < time from timing tm1 to tm2" is established. An upper limit number n of repeating a predetermined restoring operation within the fluctuation is set, so that when the upper limit number n is reached, the process of performing the predetermined restoring action is completed even if the restoration (restoration) has not been performed. By doing so, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation may be completed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

According to such a configuration, the performance progress according to a specific performance pattern that allows a specific movable decorative object to operate at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative object are performed in parallel. When a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is terminated until the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration situation. In other words, in this case, even if the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, or even if the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific movable decoration is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from its original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may trigger some behavior or the movable decoration may not operate. However, it is possible to have a hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (assuming that the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the movable decoration performs a performance action). .

However, in reality, if there is a situation where a specific movable decoration is performing a restoring operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, there is a performance that determines whether or not the specific movable decoration will operate. The function as the predetermined performance may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which "the process of causing a specific movable decorative object to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed is such that it is completed before the above-mentioned predetermined effect is started, regardless of the restoring situation. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decoration object "operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear." When a specific movable decoration is provided as a "something that does not occur", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that stimulates whether or not a specific display result will appear", and if a specific movable decoration is " ``A production that operates based on a production accepted by a player's operation (or a production that does not operate even though the production is accepted)'' is a ``production that displays a specific display that prompts the player to perform an operation.'' It is possible to give an example.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, at the timing tx when "the process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the specific movable ornament returns (restores) from the abnormal state. This assumes that the condition has returned to normal. In this way, even if it is in an abnormal state at the start of the fluctuation (or at the "restoration operation time" such as when the previous symbol stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation comes after the normal state has been restored. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it becomes possible to cause the specific movable ornament to perform a performance operation.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when "the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoring operation time arrives. becomes. In other words, in this case, although it is not possible to cause a specific movable decorative body to perform a performance operation at a specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decoration body operates. When the specific performance pattern is based on jackpot fluctuations, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body did not perform a performance operation at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise performance. You will be able to do this.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable decorations that have a more complex structure and can perform multi-step movements, and the restoration process for such movable decorations is taking longer to complete. This is often time consuming. However, on the other hand, in certain production patterns that allow a specific movable decorative body to operate at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or production patterns that are paired with this, when those production patterns are started, Even if a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol variation until the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined performance is performed). As mentioned above, it is required to complete the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable ornament. In other words, in this case, each time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can only be restored in a simple and temporary manner, which will accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decoration. It could also become.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is prepared, and when symbol variation is started, the main control MPU 1310a side When the special performance pattern is selected based on the sent command, while the special performance pattern is progressing (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special performance pattern is being performed), the specific movement The decoration is controlled so that it does not operate and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not it operates) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A(a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the performance progresses according to the special performance pattern. When a situation arises in which the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative object is performed in parallel, at least while the special performance pattern is being performed (the period until the pattern is stopped). allows the restoration process to continue without terminating.

More specifically, in the restoration process started at timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the movable decorative object is returned to its original position (restored) by simply performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative object. Even in this case, the restoration process is not ended at least while the special performance pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is executed for the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, restoration processing is performed in a more full-fledged manner (for example, normality diagnosis is performed even after restoration), aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special performance pattern is performed. As a result, the special performance pattern in question will now function as a performance pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will also be able to carefully restore it in this way. You will be able to watch the situation and enjoy the performance afterwards with peace of mind. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special performance pattern that can be selected only when the player loses in the jackpot determination. Furthermore, as for the display content on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to have a unique display mode such as "This is the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis. Please wait for a while."

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, as shown in FIGS. 197A(a) and (d). When the above-mentioned special performance pattern is performed, the restoration process started at timing tm11 is continued without being terminated even after the timing tm12 when the special performance pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the constraint that ``despite the occurrence of an abnormality in a specific movable decorative object, the restoration process must be performed for each unit in which pattern variation is performed'' is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform restoration processing in a more full-fledged manner.

However, at timing tm12 when the special production pattern ends, if the pending consumption is not interrupted and a production pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation timing (here, the next The symbol change start time) has arrived. At this time, if the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state (such as not being located at its original position). It will be done. Then, based on this determination, if the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is started anew, it can be completed within the time it takes for one symbol change to occur. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately deal with abnormalities may lead to hastening the deterioration of the particular movable decoration. .

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Sometimes, when the next restoring operation time (in this case, the next symbol fluctuation start time) arrives, the restoring process that is in the execution state is not terminated, but is continued across the next restoring operation time. . According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when restoration processing is suspended while executing a specific movable decoration, "despite an abnormality occurring in a specific movable decoration" Since the restriction that the restoration process must be executed for each unit of symbol variation is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-fledged manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 197A(c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started while the restoration process is being executed for a specific movable decoration, the new symbol variation is In some cases, a "specific performance pattern that allows a specific movable ornament to operate at a specific timing tm2 within symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A(a) to (c), regardless of the status of the game or performance (furthermore, the restoration status, etc.) after the special performance pattern is finished, it is started from timing tm11. Regarding the timing tx at which "the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable that the process be completed within a shorter time than the time required for the predetermined performance to be performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time from timing tm11 to tm12 (the time required to digest the special performance pattern), the specific movement is performed for a relatively long time until the time from timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue performing restoration processing on decorations.

In addition, if a situation arises in which the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is executed continuously after the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) has ended, the corresponding Do not end the restoration process within a new special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) and span three or more symbol changes (performance pattern) (after one restoration process has started, A single restoration process may be continued in such a way that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 197A, at timing tx when "processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state to normality. Assuming that the situation occurs. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation time (in this case, the next symbol fluctuation start time), serious abnormal conditions that could not be restored in the past can be avoided. However, this can now be restored, and it has become possible to cause a specific movable ornament to perform an effect at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, even though the first restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation time (in this case, the next symbol fluctuation start time), at timing tx, a specific movable decoration is abnormal. When it is not possible to recover (restore) from the state, the stopped state is maintained until the symbol variation is ended from timing tx and the next restoring operation time arrives. In other words, in this case, although it is not possible to cause a specific movable decorative body to perform a performance operation at a specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decoration body operates. When the specific performance pattern is based on jackpot fluctuations, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body did not perform a performance operation at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise performance. Be able to do things.

In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration has not been executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for a movable decoration is started many times, if a specific movable decoration is malfunctioning to the extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decoration There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease due to repeated body restoration processes. Therefore, after a specific movable decoration has been brought into an abnormal state, even though the restoration operation timing has arrived a predetermined upper limit (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) has reached the predetermined upper limit), If the abnormal state has not been restored (despite the fact that the movable ornament has been removed), it is desirable not to start a new restoration process for the specific movable decoration even if a new restoration operation time arrives.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state, only the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is executed (started) continuously for the predetermined upper limit number. , If a situation arises in which a performance pattern (for example, a specific performance pattern) different from the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special performance patterns and their The first restoration process may be continued over the next performance pattern. In other words, in this case, after the specific movable decorative object was brought into an abnormal state, it has not been restored from the abnormal state even though the restoring operation timing has arrived for the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the "+1" restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is not ended and is continued. In this manner, in the case where one restoration process is continued across restoration operation periods, no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration process continues, the above-mentioned upper limit number will be applied. It is desirable to treat this as one restoration process and prevent it from being terminated, so that performing the restoration process in a more full-fledged manner is not hindered.

By the way, for such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol fluctuation), the board side movable decoration provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back In addition to the medium movable presentation unit 3200, specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain functionary), etc.), the process is basically performed in the same manner as described above for the frame side movable decoration body provided on the door frame 3 side. Ru. However, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation button 410 that is operable, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) In this case, the movable decorative body may be restored (restored) in a manner different from that of the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body (disc-side movable decorative body).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbols are changed, a movable operation is performed in which an operation opportunity granting effect is executed to grant an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. A series of effect patterns (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177) are prepared. As also mentioned above, in such an operation opportunity presentation, "the process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177(f))", ``Processing to generate a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 (see Figure 177(f))'', and further ``display prompting operation (such as text display such as ``push in'', and bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period)'' ) (see FIG. 177(f))" are respectively performed. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, a pushing operation) and the performance is accepted, based on the reception of the performance, "specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory)" is performed. ) and the like (see FIG. 177(g))" and "processing to cause a change in display content (see FIG. 177(g))" are performed. Become. Note that the board-side movable decoration that is performed in this process may be the specific movable decoration described in FIG. 196 or FIG. 197A.

However, among these operations opportunity provision effects, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from its original position to the operation position using a predetermined driving force" is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state and is not normal. On the other hand, "processing to generate a performance reception period for sword decoration 5001" and "processing to display a display prompting for operation" can be executed when sword decoration 5001 is in a normal state. It is possible to execute it both when there is a certain condition and when there is an abnormal condition. Therefore, in the movable operation type performance pattern, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, if the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player who saw the "display prompting operation" and the performance is accepted, ``Processing for causing a board-side movable decorative object such as a specific decorative member SDY (blind screen accessory) to perform an effect'' and ``Processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600'' are respectively performed. Not only that, in the movable operation type performance pattern, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration 5001 receives external force and the operation part moves due to the operation by the player, causing the abnormal state to occur. There may also be cases where the problem resolves itself.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorations (for example, the operable operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) that are also used as operation means are When an abnormal state occurs, a return process (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A Restoration processing) is carried out at each timing of ``the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol fluctuation)'' and ``after the performance is accepted by the player's operation within the performance pattern of the movable operation system.'' It is considered executable.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decoration is moved at a timing such as the start or stop of symbol variation (more precisely, after the start or stop). While the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is not only possible to use timings such as the start or stop of the pattern fluctuation, but also a unique timing other than this (during the fluctuation period). Among them, the frame side movable decoration (operation means) is activated at a timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal condition is likely to be resolved. Since processing for restoring (returning) the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state will be performed, it is expected that it will be possible to quickly return the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) to its original position. .

FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of the processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame side movable decoration (operation means). be.

As shown in FIG. 198, the performance pattern of the movable operation system (the performance pattern in which the operation opportunity granting performance is executed for granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 during the period in which the symbol is changed) is being executed. Assume that the "process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operating position" is executed at timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is located at the operating position, "processing to generate a performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001", "display prompting operation (such as a character display such as "push in", a performance reception period Suppose that the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and the effect is accepted (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time is being executed (timing tm22). A process of causing the board-side movable decorative body to perform a performance operation'' and a process of causing a change in the display content on the performance display device 1600 are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 198, the specific movable decoration described in FIGS. 196 and 197A is operated as a board-side movable decoration based on reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 at timing tm22 when the performance is received, and it is no longer returned to its original position, and the specific movable decoration that performed the performance based on the performance reception It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (the movable decorative body on the board side) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration. When determining that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, a specific notification sound and display are set so that they are not executed. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be performed. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3), and if it is made to notify that it is in an abnormal state, it will be possible to repair the abnormal state. While the player is expected to play the game by hand, certain movable decorations are "placed out of the player's reach (game board 5)," and this has caused an abnormal state. This is because even if the player is notified of this, he or she cannot help the player in any way, and simply emphasizing that the movable performance is not being performed may further reduce interest in the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decoration while performing "processing to cause a specific movable decoration to perform an effect" based on the reception of the effect at timing tm22. However, by allowing the "processing that causes a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600" to be executed normally, it is possible to recognize that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration. It is desirable to make it difficult. After this, the performance pattern of the movable operation system will continue to be performed while the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in an abnormal state, and the pattern fluctuation will be stopped at timing tm23. .

In the example shown in FIG. 198, at timing tm23, the symbol variation that is already in a pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol It is assumed that the specific performance pattern explained in FIG. 196 is executed as a performance pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in a specific performance pattern, a specific movable decoration is performed at timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, but at the restoration operation time (here, at the start of symbol variation) ) is completed within a time shorter than timing tm2 (more preferably, As mentioned above, the predetermined effect is ended until the start of the predetermined effect.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, based on the arrival of the restoring operation time (in this case, the start of symbol variation) for the sword decoration 5001, the "specific movable decoration" A process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoring operation and a process of causing the body to return to its original position (applying a driving force) can be performed in parallel with at least part of the operations. Moreover, the timing at which such "processing for performing a predetermined restoring operation on the sword ornament 5001" is completed is also within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, within a predetermined effect) regardless of the restoring situation. (before it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of a specific movable decoration is resolved and a movable performance is performed by the specific movable decoration at timing tm2, the restoring operation by the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Since there is no longer a situation where the restoration operation and movable performance are performed in parallel, it is possible to avoid confusion when the restoration operation and the movable performance are performed in parallel.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for a specific movable ornament starts and ends is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 starts and ends. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or both of these timings may be different.

Furthermore, as explained with reference to FIG. 197A, "the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is performed when a special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued even after the special performance pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special performance pattern ends are immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, it is possible to continue the process (first restoration process) without ending it when the next restoration operation period (in this case, the next symbol fluctuation start time) is reached. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative object 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation can also be performed in the same manner (as described with reference to FIG. 197A). In other words, in this case, when a special performance pattern appears in the "process of causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring action", the process straddles the next restoring action time (here, the next symbol variation start time). Although it will be executed in the form of a pattern, it should be completed regardless of the restoration situation until the time required from the start of the next symbol variation to the arrival of timing tm2. Become.

Furthermore, since the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is executed continuously for a predetermined upper limit number of minutes, and then the special performance pattern ( If a situation arises in which a performance pattern (for example, a specific performance pattern) that is different from the performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis (restoration/diagnosis performance pattern) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special performance patterns and the next performance pattern are executed. The first restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that at timing tx, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object and the restoration process for the sword decoration object 5001 are respectively completed, but both restorations fail. Therefore, at timing tm2, no movable performance is performed by the specific movable decoration, and the specific performance pattern is progressed while both the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in an abnormal state. Therefore, the symbol fluctuation is stopped at timing tm24.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific movable ornament is moved by an external force (no driving force from a motor or the like is applied) within a period from timing tx to tm2 within a specific production pattern. Even if the movable decorative body is returned to its original position (or brought to a normal state) by , the specific movable decorative body will not perform any performance operation at timing tm2. That is, the fact that an external force (no driving force from a motor or the like is applied) is applied to a specific movable decoration within the period from timing tx to tm2 can itself be said to be an abnormal situation. Under such unreliable conditions, even if a specific movable decorative object performs a performance action, there is a high possibility that it will fail, so it is best to avoid this to prevent a decline in game interest. This can be said to be desirable in terms of

Further, if the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 fails and a notification is issued each time the abnormal state reappears, it may create a misunderstanding as if the player is to blame for the abnormal state not being resolved. Therefore, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) should be made to prompt the player to perform repair work only when an abnormality occurs for the first time when the normal state changes to an abnormal state. is desirable.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are A case is assumed in which only a specific movable decorative body recovers from an abnormal state. Now, the performance pattern of the movable operation system is performed again while only the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, and as shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration 5001 that was in an abnormal state at timing tm25 is Assuming that the performance is accepted by the player's operation, it is possible to expect that the abnormality occurring in the sword ornament 5001 may be resolved by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration 5001 that was in an abnormal state at timing tm25 is accepted for production by the player's operation, the sword decoration 5001 is subsequently changed to the original state. A driving force can be applied to return it to its original position (to keep it in its original position). At this time, considering that a movable performance is performed using a specific movable decoration based on the reception of the performance, the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position is performed for a period (one time). The period when the return operation is successful is to occur after the movable performance by a specific movable decoration has started, and when the movable performance by the specific movable decoration has ended (when the specific movable decoration returns to its original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before the return process is executed (and return) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that the possibility of returning the sword decoration 5001, which has been unable to return to normal due to such external force (operation by the player), is increasing, there is now a rare opportunity to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position. If the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to the original state (return operation to the sword decoration 5001) fails, the sword decoration 5001 will be returned to its original state for a period after the movable performance by the specific movable decoration ends. By continuously executing the process of applying a driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to its position (re-executing the returning operation to the sword ornament 5001), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this recovery process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this failure be performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the returning process (returning to the original position) for the sword ornament 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after this, , the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration will continue to be in their normal state, and the performance pattern of the movable operation system will be advanced, and the symbol variation will be stopped at timing tm26.

In this way, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is set to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoring operation timing (when the symbol fluctuation starts), the restoring operation timing (timing after the performance is accepted) using external force (operation by the player) is set. In other words, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is easily brought into an abnormal state because it is touched directly by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it remains intact. Abnormal conditions can be resolved by providing more opportunities to return to the position and using various return methods (a method of returning only by applying a driving force, a method of returning by using at least an external force). There is also a higher possibility that the player's interest in playing the game will decline.

Note that after the sword decoration 5001 that is in an abnormal state has been accepted as a performance by the player's operation, the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position is performed when the pattern fluctuation starts. The driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different content (different operation mode) than the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since this process uses an external force (operation by the player) to restore the sword ornament 5001, it is recommended that the process be performed with different contents from the process when no external force is used. This can be said to be desirable in terms of increasing the probability. In addition, the process will be executed in a simple manner such that the return process will be completed within the symbol change regardless of the return situation, and if the return fails, a more full-fledged return operation will be carried out at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to perform proper recovery processing.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, when the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) has arrived a predetermined upper limit number of times and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for the number of times, However, even if the abnormal state is not restored and a new restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 will not be started again. Even if the operation-based performance pattern is started and the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted as a performance by the player's operation at timing tm25, after the performance is accepted, the sword decoration 5001 is It is desirable to apply a driving force to return it to its original position (to keep it at its original position). In other words, as described above, the return process after the production is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword ornament 5001, which has been unable to return due to an external force (operation by the player), is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where recovery without external force has been given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, ``processing to generate a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177(f))'' and ``display prompting operation (such as text display such as ``push in'' and a bar indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period)'' It is also important to ensure that the process for performing "display" (see FIG. 177(f)) is performed normally even in the above-mentioned situation where return without external force is given up.

In addition, when the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, the first operation opportunity is given so that it is pushed (moved to a specific detection position), and when it is at the original position, it is pushed (moved to a specific detection position). If the operation means is provided in such a way that a second operation opportunity may be given to cause the sword decoration 5001 to operate, even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 that is in an abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when a presentation reception occurs in the first operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 that is in an abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the performance is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state will be resolved is naturally low.

Furthermore, after the sword decoration 5001 that is in an abnormal state receives a performance through an operation by the player, the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position does not necessarily require the performance reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that the performance has been performed, for example, it may be executed after the performance acceptance period has ended.

Note that the restoring operation timing may be a predetermined timing that comes at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed, and for example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start time and the symbol variation stop time. . If the symbol fluctuation stop time is used as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process will be started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start The restoring process may be completed before the timing tm2 of a specific performance pattern that has been put on hold is reached, or it may be executed so as to extend beyond the end of a special performance pattern that has been put on hold. The above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Furthermore, the appearance frequency of special performance patterns (performance patterns for restoration/diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, if a special performance state occurs in which the movable decorative object moves more frequently, abnormal states are more likely to occur as the frequency of movement increases. It is desirable to enable the game so that the special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears more frequently than when the game is in the game.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) which is also used as an operation means, the specific movable decoration, etc. are in an abnormal state. Sometimes, when the above-mentioned special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. The first restoration process for the movable decoration can be executed continuously. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol change start time) arrives while the first restoration process is being executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative object in the abnormal state must be performed again. Since the restoration process that is already in progress will be continued without terminating, a movable decorative object that is different from the movable decorative object that is the target of the restoration process will be restarted. The problem is when to start the restoration process for another movable decoration when the decoration newly enters an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for a specific movable decoration started at timing tm11 starts at a new restoration operation time (the next It is designed to continue to be executed without ending even when the symbol change start time) is crossed. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decorative object other than the specific movable decorative object between the time when the timing tm11 passes and the arrival of a new restoring operation time (start time of the next symbol change). If so, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, "both method 1 and method 2", or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to restore the other movable decorative object. It is desirable to carry out the following.

Method 1: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration is provided as a board-side movable decoration, while the other movable decoration described above is provided as a frame-side movable decoration," When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol variation) arrives while the first restoration process for the movable decoration body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol variation) arrives. ), the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is newly started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as valid for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be processed at this timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to start a new restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation will arise in which the restoration process for a specific movable decoration (board side movable decoration) and the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) are executed simultaneously. There is no concern that interference will occur between these movable decorations, and early recovery of these movable decorations is expected.

Method 2: At least if there is a relationship such as "both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", the first restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, restoration processing for another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) will not be started at that point, and a specific After waiting for the first restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (board side movable decoration The restoration process will be started anew.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as valid for another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, we have decided to wait until the first restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed before starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (board side movable decoration). There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early recovery of the movable decorations can be expected.

Method 3: At least if there is a relationship such as "both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", the first restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoring action time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives during the execution, another movable decorative object is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring action time (starting time of the next symbol variation). Instead of executing the restoration process for a specific movable decoration, wait until the first restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, and use the subsequent restoration operation time as a trigger to restore another movable decoration (board side movable The restoration process for the ornament (decoration object) is started anew.

According to such method 3, the new restoring operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoring process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not yet in the execution state. It will be treated as invalid even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration unless the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed. No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. In other words, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes abnormal while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in execution, those movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. By making it possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, it is expected that the speed of deterioration of these movable decorations will be suppressed.

Next, refer to FIG. 197B and FIG. 197C for the manner (methods 1 to 3, etc.) when a new restoration operation timing (such as the start timing and end timing of symbol fluctuation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. I will explain in detail.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of explanation, movable decorations that can perform performance operations include a first movable decoration (the above-mentioned "specific movable decoration"), a second movable decoration, and a second movable decoration. The present invention includes at least a third movable decorative body, a fourth movable decorative body, and a fifth movable decorative body. If only one of the movable decorations is not in the normal state, the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are the "first movable decoration," the "second movable decoration," and the "third movable decoration." Regardless of whether it is a "movable decorative object", a "fourth movable decorative object", or a "fifth movable decorative object", the movable decorative object that is not in its normal state will be affected by the restoration operation timing (pattern The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the start timing, end timing, etc. of the fluctuation has arrived.

However, if there are multiple movable decorations that are not in a normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state will restore at the same time with the restoration operation time as a trigger. If (restoration processing) is started, there is a concern that the player will not be able to concentrate on the performance according to the symbol changes and will become disinterested.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, if there are multiple movable decorations that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, some of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state Only the movable decorations that are not in a normal state can start the restoration operation when the restoration operation time has arrived, thereby avoiding a situation where all the movable decorations that are not in a normal state start the restoration operation at the same time. , the restoration operation is realized in a manner depending on the situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, the timing tm32 has arrived when the symbol variation (first time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts (restoration corresponding to the symbol change). When the operation time has arrived), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration. Suppose that Note that "abnormality" here means that an "abnormality" has been detected by the detection means, but it does not necessarily have to be a situation in which an "abnormality" has been detected, and the movable decoration It may simply mean that an "abnormality" is occurring (an undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this illustrative example, based on the arrival of the restoring operation time (timing tm32), the restoring process is executed for the movable ornament in the abnormal state. However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, and the fourth movable decoration are started in parallel, but the restoration operations of the third movable decoration and the fifth movable decoration are started in parallel. The movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and remains in an abnormal state on standby. This prevents all of the movable ornaments that are not in a normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring action can be performed in a manner appropriate to the situation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable ornament that did not start the restoring operation at timing tm32 and remained in an abnormal state, the pachinko machine 1 waits for the next restoring operation time (timing tm35) to arrive. First, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed. This makes it possible to return all movable decorations that are not in a normal state to a normal state relatively quickly while avoiding all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state to start restoring operations at the same time. become.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decoration that did not start the restoring operation at timing tm32 and remained in an abnormal state, when the next restoring operation time (timing tm35) arrived. However, the restoring operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object is completed. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid a situation in which a plurality of movable decorations perform restoration operations in parallel in a combination that obstructs concentration on the performance.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the second movable decoration is finished before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decoration is finished; When the restoration process for the decoration is completed, the "third movable decoration" and the "fifth movable decoration" do not start the restoration operation. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is ended after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decoration is ended; The third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and remains in a standby state until the restoring process for the body is completed, and when the restoring process for the fourth movable decorative body is completed, the fifth The "movable decorative body" does not start the restoring operation.

That is, the third movable decoration starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoring process (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoring process (restoring operation) of the first movable ornament (1) to be completed.

Furthermore, if the first movable decoration and the third movable decoration are not in an abnormal state, the fifth movable decoration starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives. If the movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) to be completed.

In this way, by preventing the restoration process from being performed in parallel for movable decorations in a specific combination (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorations, it is possible to It becomes possible to perform restoration processing while suitably maintaining an environment where one can concentrate on production.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, even though the "fifth movable decoration" is in the abnormal state earlier than the "third movable decoration", the "first movable decoration" When the restoration process for ``3rd movable decoration'' is completed, the restoration process for ``3rd movable decoration'' is started first. In this way, by not performing the restoration process in the order in which the abnormal state occurred, it is possible to restore the movable decorations to normality first, starting from the most important movable decoration, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. be expected to maintain it.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in a situation where the third movable decorative body is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol It is assumed that the timing tm35 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) when the variation (third time) starts arrives. Such a restoring operation timing essentially functions to cause the third movable decoration that has not yet returned to its normal state to start a new restoring action. However, in this case, for the third movable decoration, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm35). ing. This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of timing tm35. For example, if the symbol variation (3rd time) is to perform a movable effect using the 3rd movable decorative object, then the "Moveable effect using the 3rd movable decorative object in the pattern change (3rd time)" This increases the probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to its normal state before the start of the third movable decoration. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration has returned to its normal state at the time the movable presentation using the movable decoration is started. Then, it becomes possible to carry out a production operation as a movable production using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the third movable decorative body is moved to the timing tm32 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol fluctuation. Then, as a result of timing tm32 (restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arriving in the abnormal state, the restoring process (restoring operation) is started with a delay (timing tm34) after timing tm32.

However, for the third movable decoration, the timing is later than timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) and within the period in which the first movable decoration is performing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until "timing tm33," which is the timing of ) is desirably started on the basis of the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed. In other words, in this case, even though the third movable decoration has entered the abnormal state at timing tm33 and the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change has not yet arrived, the third movable decoration The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 that came before timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament (movable decoration body No. 1). This makes it possible to quickly return to a normal state. Details regarding the "restoring process (restoring operation) using the restoring operation timing at timing tm32" will be described later.

At this time, if the restoration process for the first movable decorative object is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable to continue executing the restoration process so as to straddle the timing tm35. Further, at timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is not started, and at the timing when the restoration process for the first movable decoration that was executed so as to straddle timing tm35 has been completed, It is desirable to start a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decoration.

In this case, even though the fifth movable ornament was in an abnormal state when timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrived, it was in an abnormal state when timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrived. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration" that had not been activated before the "fifth movable decoration", the movable decoration with high production importance This will allow the body to return to normality preferentially. The "fifth movable decoration" is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration" which was in a normal state when timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrived. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32 is started. "Restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32" means restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object in a program that is executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. , a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body, and each of these restoration processes is performed sequentially. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decoration" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "third movable decoration" is in the abnormal state, Restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decoration" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that it is in the abnormal state, the "fifth movable decoration" is Restoration processing for "Movable Decoration Object No. 5" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth movable decoration" is not restored. Determine whether the movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, restoration processing for the "fifth movable decoration" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration" is in a normal state at timing tm34, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started based on the arrival of timing tm34. becomes.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the "restoration process for the first movable ornament" started at the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is changed to "the restoration process for the first movable ornament". Even when the timing tm42 has arrived (when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) when the next symbol variation (second cycle) has finished (stopped losing) and the next symbol variation (second cycle) has arrived, it has not finished and is still in progress. , and when the timing tm42 arrives, the "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration" This assumes that both are in an abnormal state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of timing tm42, but at the timing tm42 ( The process is executed continuously so as to straddle the restoration operation period). This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of timing tm42. For example, if the symbol variation (second time) is to execute a movable effect using the first movable decoration, the "movable effect using the first movable ornament in the symbol variation (second time)" This increases the probability that the first movable decorative body can be returned to its normal state before the start of the process. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration has returned to its normal state at the time the movable presentation using the movable decoration is started. Then, it becomes possible to carry out a production operation as a movable production using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process is executed for the movable ornament that is in an abnormal state based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42). However, in this case, for the fourth movable decoration, each restoration operation is started in parallel with the first movable decoration which is in the middle of execution, but for the second movable decoration and the third movable decoration, The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoring operation and stand by in an abnormal state. This prevents all of the movable ornaments that are not in a normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring action can be performed in a manner appropriate to the situation.

In particular, regarding the second movable decoration, when the first movable decoration is in a situation where it is "not in a normal state and is not performing restoration processing (restoration operation)" as shown in FIG. 197B, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decoration. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it is "not in a normal state and is performing restoration processing (restoration operation)", the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 ), the restoring process (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started at the time when the restoring operation time (timing tm42) arrives.

In other words, a situation in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoring process (restoring operation) over the restoring operation period (timing tm42) means that the first movable decorative body is returning to normal (returning to its original position). It can be said that the player is also becoming distracted by the "first movable decoration" in such a state. Under such circumstances, if many movable decorations start the restoration process (restoration operation) anew, the player will not be able to concentrate on the performance according to the symbol fluctuations and will become disoriented. This is a concern.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, among the movable decorations (see FIG. 197B) that can perform the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration Even in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decoration which is in the middle of execution. On the other hand, regarding the second movable decoration, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable decoration which is in the middle of execution, The decoration is maintained in a standby state until the restoration process for the decoration is completed. Then, in a state where the restoration process for the first movable decorative object is completed, the restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) is newly arrived, and based on the arrival of the timing tm45, the restoration operation is performed. Restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body No. 2 is started. As a result, many movable decorations are prevented from starting a new restoration process (restoration operation) when the first movable decoration is taking time to return to normal, and this prevents the above-mentioned concerns. will be resolved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the third movable ornament that did not start the restoring operation at timing tm42 and remained in an abnormal state, the next restoring action timing is determined as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. Instead of waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object is completed. This makes it possible to return all movable decorations that are not in a normal state to a normal state relatively quickly while avoiding all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state to start restoring operations at the same time. become.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decoration that did not start the restoring operation at timing tm42 and remained in an abnormal state, the next restoring operation time is determined as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoring operation is not started even when (timing tm45) arrives, but the restoring action is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoring process (restoring action) for the third movable decorative object is completed. That's what I do. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid a situation in which a plurality of movable decorations perform restoration operations in parallel in a manner that obstructs concentration on the performance.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is finished before the timing tm44 at which the restoration process for the first movable decoration is finished; Once the restoration process for the decoration is completed, the "second movable decoration", the "third movable decoration", and the "fifth movable decoration" do not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decoration starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoring process (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoring process (restoring operation) of the first movable ornament (1) to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) to be completed.

In this way, by preventing the restoration process from being performed in parallel for movable decorations in a specific combination (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorations, it is possible to Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment where one can concentrate on production.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in a situation where the third movable decoration is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol It is assumed that the timing tm45 (restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) when the variation (third time) starts arrives. Such a restoring operation timing essentially functions to cause the third movable decoration that has not yet returned to its normal state to start a new restoring action. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm45). ing. This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of timing tm45. For example, if the symbol variation (3rd time) is to perform a movable effect using the 3rd movable decorative object, then the "Moveable effect using the 3rd movable decorative object in the pattern change (3rd time)" This increases the probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to its normal state before the start of the third movable decoration. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration has returned to its normal state at the time the movable presentation using the movable decoration is started. Then, it becomes possible to carry out a production operation as a movable production using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the third movable decorative body is moved to the timing tm42 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation. Then, as a result of timing tm42 (restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arriving in the abnormal state, the restoring process (restoring operation) is started with a delay (timing tm44) to timing tm42.

However, for the third movable decoration, the timing is later than timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation) and within the period in which the first movable decoration is performing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until "timing tm43," which is the timing of It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm44 when ) is finished. In other words, in this case, even though the third movable decoration is in an abnormal state at timing tm43 and the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change has not yet arrived, the third movable decoration The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that came before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament (1). This makes it possible to quickly return to a normal state. The details of the "restoring process (restoring operation) using the restoring operation timing at timing tm42" are as described in the section "restoring processing (restoring operation) using the restoring operation timing at timing tm32".

In this case, even though the fifth movable decoration was in an abnormal state when timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrived, it was in an abnormal state when timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrived. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration" that had not been activated before the "fifth movable decoration", the movable decoration with high production importance This will allow the body to return to normality preferentially. Note that the "fifth movable decoration" is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration" which was in a normal state when timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrived. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42 is started. "Restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42" means restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object in a program that is executed based on the arrival of timing tm42. , a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body, and each of these restoration processes is performed sequentially. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decoration" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "third movable decoration" is in the abnormal state, Restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decoration" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that it is in the abnormal state, the "fifth movable decoration" is Restoration processing for "Movable Decoration Object No. 5" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth movable decoration" is not restored. Determine whether the movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, restoration processing for the "fifth movable decoration" is started. That is, in this case, if the "third movable decoration" is in a normal state at timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started based on the arrival of timing tm44. becomes.

According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body, second movable decorative body, third movable decorative body, fourth movable decorative body, and fifth movable decorative body), the restoring operation period (design variation ( For the movable decorative object (first movable decorative object) that is performing the restoring operation triggered by the start timing of the first time), the restoring action is ignored and continued without redoing the restoring action. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not performed the restoring operation, the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) can be used as an opportunity to start the restoring operation without ignoring the restoring operation timing (timing tm42). In other words, in this case, depending on the situation in which the multiple movable decorations are in an abnormal state, some of them will ignore the function of the restoration operation, and some of them will not. While this is being done, it becomes possible to implement restoration processing that is appropriate for the situation.

Furthermore, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, the "first movable decorative object" performs the restoring action when the restoring action timing corresponding to the symbol variation (starting timing of the symbol variation (first time)) has arrived. If the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (start timing of symbol variation (second)) comes again during the execution, for the first movable decorative object that is performing the restoring operation, the second movable decoration comes again. The restoring action timing (start timing of symbol variation (second)) is used as an opportunity to continuously execute the restoring action without having to redo the restoring action. In other words, in this case, it takes time to return to normality, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, this will be ignored, so it will be in a state in the middle of execution. It becomes possible to continue the restoring operation without interruption, and thereby it becomes possible to prompt the movable decorative body in an abnormal state to return quickly.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed on the first movable decoration across multiple variations, another movable decoration (third movable decoration) is When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation when the restoring operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change arrives, and the third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation with respect to the first movable decorative body that is in the middle of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is not redone when the restoration operation time arrives (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is performed as the restoration operation. Immediately after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" that was continuously executed without starting when the time (timing tm42) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. Restoration operation) will now start, so the restoration process will not be executed in parallel for certain combinations of movable decorations (for example, combinations that would disturb concentration on the performance). However, it becomes possible to restore the plurality of movable ornaments to normal condition relatively quickly.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decoration becomes abnormal at timing tm43, the restoration operation time for the third movable decoration has not yet arrived since the abnormality. The restoring process (restoring operation) is started based on the arrival of timing tm44 (the end timing of the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" executed so as to straddle the restoring operation period). ing. In other words, in this case, even though the third movable decoration is in an abnormal state at timing tm43 and the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change has not yet arrived, the third movable decoration The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that came before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament (1). This makes it possible to quickly return to a normal state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation period, the movable decoration body is returned to normal during the symbol variation in which the movable decoration body is used. When the execution timing of the performance has arrived, the movable decoration can be executed using the movable ornament that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuing to execute the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative object can be returned to normality at an early stage by the time when the movable effect is started.

In addition, even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change occurs multiple times during the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship in which the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed in parallel, as shown in FIG. 197B. be. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, if a new restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration operation, the second movable decoration body Restoration processing (restoration operation) for the decorative object is not started, and each restoration operation is prevented from being performed in parallel. This prevents many movable decorations from newly starting restoration processing (restoration operation) when the first movable decoration is taking time to return to normal.

Then, when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decoration is completed and the restoration has returned to normal, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get it started. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started immediately after the situation in which the first movable decoration takes time to return to normality is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative object is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the performance. It becomes possible to suitably arrange the environment.

At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is ended in failure, a new restoration operation time ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable ornament is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. In other words, in this case, since it is no longer possible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decoration, it is necessary to restore normality with only the second movable decoration and perform a movable effect using the second movable decoration. It is desirable to make it executable.

In the example shown in FIG. 197(C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and the restoration is normal, until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives. If the first movable decoration becomes abnormal again in It is desirable to start the processes (restoration operations) in parallel.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the first movable decoration It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Furthermore, even if the restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object ends in failure (does not return to the original position). It is desirable that the restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decoration is started based on the completion of the restoring operation.

In the above example, if the third movable decoration is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed (timing tm34, tm44), the first movable decoration It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. In addition, if the third movable decoration newly becomes abnormal within the execution period of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" started in this way, the fifth movable decoration When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation), and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation has arrived. It is desirable to perform restoration processing (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, if the restoring process (restoring action) for the fifth movable decoration has not yet been completed and is still in progress when a new restoring action time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the restoring action time has arrived. When the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object" is not started when the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative object" is completed, the restoring operation time arrives after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative object" It is desirable to start the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body".

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorations that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative object that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) with the restoration operation time corresponding to the restoration operation time (timing tm42) However, for the fourth movable decorative object that has not undergone restoration processing (restoration operation), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation is performed using this as an opportunity. I'm trying to get started. In this respect, even if the fourth movable decoration starts the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), a new When the restoration operation time (timing tm43) has arrived, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and continue to execute the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation time.

When there is a movable decorative object in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) and a movable decoration object in the state of waiting for the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation), the effect display related to the pattern change is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above-mentioned notification is being executed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, Restoration processing (restoration action) that is already in progress will continue to be executed without being canceled, and movable decorations that are waiting for restoration processing (restoration action) to be performed will be restored when the restoration operation time arrives. It is desirable to start the restoration operation anew.

When there is a movable decoration that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration action) or a movable decoration that is waiting for the restoration process (restoration action) to be executed, those movable decorations cannot be used in the pattern variation. When the timing for executing a movable performance that has been set has arrived, driving force for restoration processing (restoration operation) may be applied to those movable decorations, but driving force for executing the performance may be applied. It is desirable to have no effect (no performance operation) in order to achieve an early return to the normal state. However, although no driving force is applied to these movable decorations to execute the performance, the light emitting lights provided on each movable decoration are provided so that the lighting mode corresponding to the movable performance will appear. It is desirable to allow the parts to emit light normally. In other words, in this case, it is not that the movable effect itself is not executed, but that part of the effect that makes up the movable effect (the light emitting effect) is executed properly, so the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) increases. , "0", and "100"), different lighting modes will appear even on the "movable decoration that is not in a normal state", making it possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, for movable decorations whose restoration processing (restoration operation) has ended in failure, the restoration processing (restoration operation) will not be performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least the power will continue to be turned on. It can be said that as long as the movable decorative body is moved, the movable decoration is not operated with a movable effect. However, even if the movable decoration is in such a state, when the time comes to perform a movable effect using the movable decoration, the movable effect itself will not be executed, but the movable effect will be configured. It is desirable that some of the effects (light emitting effects) be executed appropriately. In other words, in this case, the light emitting mode differs depending on the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear, including "0" and "100"). ”, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

In addition, a movable decorative object is in a state where restoration processing (restoration action) is being executed, a movable decoration object is in a state where restoration processing (restoration action) is waiting to be executed, or a state where restoration processing (restoration action) has ended in failure. Regarding the movable decorative body in , the light emitting section may be able to emit light as usual even when other effects are performed.

The restoration operation timing may include not only one that occurs in response to symbol fluctuations, but also one that occurs due to other conditions. If the restoration process (restoration operation) is to be started at a specific time that arrives under conditions different from the symbol fluctuations, a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, while When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started (executed) in a non-notification state without giving a specific notification (movable object abnormality notification). is desirable.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) with the restoration operation time corresponding to the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) However, for the fourth movable ornament that has not undergone restoration processing (restoration operation), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation is performed using this as an opportunity. I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative object is taking a long time to return to normal, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed without ignoring this. The "fourth movable decorative body" that will start is used for important effects such as when a winning result is derived by symbol fluctuation, or when it operates during the start and execution of a jackpot game. It is desirable that there be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, regarding the third movable decoration, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is successful in returning to normal (reference position detection) and failure (reference position detection). Regardless of whether the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object. It is desirable to do so.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object" has ended with failure in returning to normal, and that the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object" has ended, This is a case where the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object" that has been performed ends with successful return to normality, and the third movable decorative object is abnormal again within the pattern variation that has successfully returned to normality. When the state is reached, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next pattern change comes, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not performed, but the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is performed. It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol change arrives, the "fifth movable When the "restoring process for the decorative object (restoring operation)" is in the execution state, the "restoring process for the first movable decorative object (restoring operation)" and the "restoring process for the third movable decorative object (restoring operation)" are executed. Without performing any of the above, the "restoring process for the first movable decorative object" is carried out at the "restoring operation time corresponding to the pattern change" that comes after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative object" is completed. It is desirable to perform the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decoration" instead of "(restoring operation)".

In addition, after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object" is completed with successful return to normality, while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration object" is being executed, Even if an abnormality occurs in the first movable decorative object again, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object" is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation period corresponding to the next symbol change. In this case, it is desirable that the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" not be started at the restoring operation time. In other words, in this case, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" is performed at the restoring operation time that comes after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object" ends with success or failure in returning to normal. ' will be started.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorations that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1 For the first movable decorative object that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) with the restoration operation time corresponding to the restoration operation time (timing tm42) Ignore this and continue executing. Regarding the third movable decorative object, the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" is completed, and then The restoration process (restoration operation) is now started based on the In this regard, if the first movable decoration becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" started in this way is being executed, the "third movable decoration Instead of starting the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" based on the completion of the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the body", the timing of the restoring operation corresponding to the symbol variation is It is desirable to start "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" based on the new arrival.

However, at this time, when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" has not been completed and is in the middle of execution (straddling the restoration operation time). In such a case, it is desirable to ignore the restoring operation timing and wait for the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object" to be completed. Then, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" is started at the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change that has arrived after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object" is completed. It is desirable that the

In other words, in this case, when both the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" are in an abnormal state, the "first movable decorative body" is restored so as to return to normal state first. Even though the third movable decoration is not in a normal state and the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change comes, the first movable decoration will perform the restoration operation. When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decoration is not performing the restoration process) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decoration is (if the user is in a situation where restoration processing is being executed), it becomes possible to implement restoration processing according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting changing means that can change the winning probability related to hit determination and the selection probability related to performance patterns. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable to use the same timing (for example, when the symbol fluctuation starts) as the restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation.

The first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration are movable decorations provided at positions that can be touched by the player. The body may also be included. In this case, it is considered that the movable decoration placed in a position where the player can touch is most likely to be in an abnormal state, so the restoration operation time has come regardless of the status of the other movable decorations. Then, it is desirable to provide it as a "fourth movable decorative body" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation).

In addition to providing a light guide plate in which a light guide pattern is displayed in front of the movable decoration, the display of the light guide pattern is not restricted even during restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration. It is desirable to make it executable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration.

The "first movable decoration" and "second movable decoration" shown in FIGS. 197B and 197C are prepared so that they have a performance relationship in which they both become active in a specific movable performance. It is desirable to do so. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" may be decorated with mutually related decorations, or they may operate at the same time as a movable performance based on pattern variation (performance pattern). Prepare decorations (characters, character string completion, etc.) as shapes. The third movable decoration is prepared so that it is not used for a specific movable effect or when forming the first decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is avoided that the first decoration is formed in the same manner (operation at the same time) as the movable performance based on the symbol variation (performance pattern). As a result, a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

Regarding the "first movable decoration", "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration", the game board They may be arranged separately, one provided on the 5 side and the other on the door frame 3 side.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the "first movable decoration", the "second movable decoration", the "third movable decoration", the "fourth movable decoration", and the "first movable decoration" However, regarding the "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration" does not necessarily have to include all of these movable decorations, and may include "one", "two", or "three" of these movable decorations as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C (in what manner the restoration process is performed in relation to the "first movable decorative body") should be provided. becomes.

[Penalty when operating the control section that can produce light emitting light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is enabled (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, apart from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), the pachinko machine 1 has It is equipped with a button for adjusting the brightness of the various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various performance lamps is adjusted. It is possible to execute a process for changing a setting value (brightness setting value) by a player (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light). It happens. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is decreased or increased.

In addition, regarding acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, there are two conditions: when the pattern does not change, and when the pattern changes. In either state, each can be executed by an operation by the player.

Incidentally, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, there has been a tendency for the number of operation parts that are operated by players to increase, but these operation parts are sometimes handled roughly, and as a result, only one of these operation parts is used. If any of them breaks down, the operability and presentation performance will be significantly reduced, which will inevitably lead to a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, as described above,
- A sword decoration body in which the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011, handle part 5012, tsuba part 5013) is movable (variable) between the sheathed position and the unsheathed position by a predetermined operation (sword unsheathed operation, sword sheathed operation) 5001 (see Figure 146, Figure 161, etc.)
"Operation to remove the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011, hilt part 5012, tsuba part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (sword removal operation)" and "sheathing the sword" even though the operation opportunity is not given. If this operation is performed repeatedly, it may cause a malfunction.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, effect light emitting parts (not shown) are respectively disposed on the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the collar part 5013, and the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are in a specific position (original position) where the sword is sheathed relative to the sheath portion 5020. Then, at least during the period in which the demo screen is displayed (a non-gaming state in which game effects and symbol variations according to the jackpot judgment are not executed), the sword part 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that the object is not at the original position, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a performance restriction period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least when in a non-gaming state where no symbol variation is performed, the sword portion 5010 is activated by a predetermined operation along with the production light emitting portions (blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013). If it is detected that the operating section is not located at a specific position as a result of being displaced, a performance restriction period may occur, so that rough handling of the operating section can be suitably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the setting value related to the output volume of the performance sound (volume setting value)" and the above-mentioned "setting value related to the light emission brightness (brightness setting value)" The above-mentioned performance restriction period is generated while the change in the performance limit is maintained in a state where it can be accepted by the player's operation. However, as will be explained later, during this performance restriction period,
・Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value related to the output volume (volume setting value) is changed, the production sound will not be output at the volume according to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment While the confirmation sound is also not output,
- Regarding the effect lamp, if the setting value (brightness setting value) related to the luminance brightness is changed, the effect light emitting part provided in the sword part 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1 will be changed. Although the (blade part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) do not emit light at a brightness according to the brightness setting value, they are provided in different parts from the sword part 5010 that is the detection target. The effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5) are put into a state where they can emit light with a brightness corresponding to the set value. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the production restriction period occurs, even though both volume and brightness setting values can be accepted, changes related to the volume setting cannot be accepted. The degree of restriction will differ between processing and processing related to brightness settings.

In other words, although the volume setting value for the production sound is secretly changed internally, the production sound is not output in a way that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By not outputting any information, the player is given a sense of tension (he may have done something he shouldn't have done).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting parts (blade part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) included in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the changed brightness setting value is not reflected in the effect light emitted, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword section 5010" operated by the player does not emit light in a manner that reflects the changed brightness setting value. By making it possible to emit light in a way that reflects the brightness settings (e.g., emitting light to match the timing of a specific preview effect), we will be able to correct the issue caused by the rough handling of "Katanabe 5010". Although it is possible to recognize that performance restrictions are imposed and to warn of this, it is possible to suitably emphasize that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue playing and performing. In this sense, the effect lamps on the game board 5 where game balls flow down or win prizes are designed to emit light in a manner that reflects the changed brightness setting value as normal. is desirable. As a result, it is possible to appropriately avoid situations such as ``decreasing the player's desire to start playing or encouraging the player to end the game,'' while giving a warning against rough handling of the operation panel. become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the conditions for canceling the restrictions are different for the restrictions on the processing related to the volume setting and the restrictions on the processing related to the brightness setting. . In particular, we will strongly encourage continued gaming by ensuring that "processing related to volume settings," which was initially subject to relatively strict restrictions, is greatly improved to normal status relatively quickly. On the other hand, although there is a trend of improvement in "processing related to brightness settings", which had initially imposed relatively lenient restrictions, the overall speed of improvement has been slowed down, and some It is hoped that this will maintain a moderate level of tension over a long period of time and prevent rough treatment from occurring again.

[Help image to promote understanding of the production]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes performance pattern determination regarding which of a plurality of performance patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, which one of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is selected. It is possible to perform a preview performance judgment as to whether to selectively make the expected performance (plurality) appear. Note that depending on the result of this preview performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be sequentially executed. There may be cases in which none of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) is executed.

Then, when such performance pattern determination and preview performance determination are performed, by controlling the performance display device 1600 to display the performance contents according to the results of these determinations, variations due to decorative symbols according to the result of the jackpot determination are performed. The performance will be executed together with the expected performance (preview performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (character performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function that definitively indicates whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction and movement The expected performance related to body movements, etc. will be provided as a performance with ``a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won.'' In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

However, when realizing this kind of expected effect as a background depiction (background preview), the basic effect is to determine the degree of effect, such as ``What value should be set for the proportion of highly anticipated images to appear?'' The only thing that can be done is to let it happen. Therefore, the fundamental problem that ``if a highly anticipated image (expected performance) does not appear, it will be difficult to have a sense of expectation of winning the jackpot'' has not yet been resolved.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a special performance will be performed as a result of the preview performance determination (when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction It is possible to execute processing to display a background image used in a special mode different from the original image data, and when the background image is displayed in the special mode, the expectation level ( This makes it possible to suggest that the probability of a jackpot symbol appearing is high.

Here, "processing to display in a special mode" includes, for example,
・Processing that displays the original image data as rotationally processed data that has been rotated by a predetermined angle (such as rotation around any of the x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area);
- It is possible to exemplify processing such as displaying original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of "blurring" added.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined presentation condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to slight processing (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) and then We have purposely created a special effect to display this (display in a special manner). According to such a configuration, even if a special effect is performed in which the original image data is slightly processed, it becomes difficult for the player to conclusively detect and recognize that fact. However, in exchange for this, even if the special effects are not being performed, it is possible to make the player feel the feeling and illusion that ``Maybe the special effects are being executed.'' Therefore, even if a highly anticipated image (special effect) does not appear, it is expected that the expectation for a jackpot can be suitably maintained.

However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status regarding such "processing to display in a special mode", it will be difficult for the player to even recognize the possibility of a situation with high expectations. In the end, the very meaning of special production may be lost.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a help image is displayed to indicate whether "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed in response to an operation by a player. It is possible to execute the process to According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed in response to the operation by the player, the game enjoyment may be reduced due to the inability to recognize whether the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It is expected that this will suppress the decline in expectations and maintain a favorable level of expectations.

However, the "help image" in this explanatory example does not clearly indicate whether or not "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, but it intentionally includes the difficulty of recognition. ing. Precisely because we purposefully create this kind of recognition difficulty, we cannot be sure that "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed even if it does not appear that it is being executed. It becomes possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

FIG. 199 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the state is transitioned between a non-gaming state where no game is being executed (during a demo screen, etc.) and a game execution state where a game is being executed. .

FIG. 199(a) shows an example of a display on the effect display device 1600 when the game is in a non-gaming state (such as during a demo screen) where no game is being executed. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the effect display device 1600 in the non-gaming state displays a character image PG (here, A guide image AG is displayed that suggests that a character imitating a penguin (a character imitating a penguin) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.). In this explanatory example, an explanatory text and a character image PG are respectively displayed as the guide image AG.

When a starting prize occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 199(a) and the game (variation of special symbols according to the jackpot determination) is started, the effect display device 1600 first displays the screen shown in FIG. 199(b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable performance using the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected performance (preliminary performance) related to the background depiction (background preview), the motion of the movable body (accessory performance), and the like. In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid a negative effect on the performance during the game execution state, and The existence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) can be suitably emphasized.

FIG. 199(c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the variable effect using the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 199(b) is finished (stop display).

If pending information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199(c), the pending information is digested and a new variation effect using the decorative pattern SZ is started, so that the guide image AG is not displayed. The performance situation shown in FIG. 199(b) will appear again in the same state as shown in FIG. On the other hand, if no pending information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199(c), the state is again shifted to a non-gaming state (during a demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199(a)) will appear again. Note that in the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is being displayed, the decorative pattern SZ may remain stopped and displayed, or the decorative pattern SZ itself may be hidden.

The "process of displaying in a special mode" according to this production example is a state in which a variable production using the decorative pattern SZ is executed in a "specific production pattern" (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the production judgment). , and within a period in which a specific effect image appears (a predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

FIG. 200 shows a state in which a variable effect using the decorative pattern SZ is being executed in a "specific effect pattern", and an expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as a background image is being performed. An example of a display on the effect display device 1600 when in a state where

In other words, in this production example, when at least the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed, on the condition that the predetermined production conditions are met, It has become possible to perform a process of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode). There is. When a princess character (specific effect image) for which "processing to display in a special mode" is displayed, a princess character (specific effect image) for which "processing to display in a special mode" has not been executed is displayed. The percentage of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when they are displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the "process for displaying in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are different from each original image data. It is displayed as is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(b), each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated 3 degrees to the left before being displayed. Processing (processing to display in a special mode) is being executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. Processing for displaying these images after performing rotational processing on them (processing for displaying them in a special mode) is being executed.

As is clear from FIGS. 200(a) to (c), even when "processing to display in a special mode" is performed, each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) Only a slight rotational process is applied to the part. In particular, in the same figure, you can compare and see between Figures 200 (a) to (c), but in actual production, Figure 200 (a) according to the result of the production judgment. ) to (c) are displayed, and comparisons cannot be made between them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 200(b) and 200(c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode; It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation level), and even if FIG. 200(a) appears, it will not be displayed in a special manner. It is difficult to be certain of this, and people have come to expect something at the level of maintaining hope (maintaining a sense of expectation), such as ``it may be in the state displayed in a special manner.''

In addition, the process of rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) by 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode) ) may be executed as a process for displaying each original image data after performing rotation processing on each data separately, or after converting each original image data into a single image and then displaying it. The image may be rotated and displayed.

Regarding Figures 200(b) and (c), when the image shown in Figure 200(c) is displayed, the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when the image shown in Figure 200(b) is displayed. It may be possible to create a relationship in which the value is high. Alternatively, when "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, after displaying FIG. 200(a) once, displaying it as a moving image whose tilt changes moment by moment in the order of FIGS. 200(b) and (c). You may also do so. Alternatively, it is not necessary to provide both of FIGS. 200(b) and 200(c), and only one of FIGS. 200(b) and 200(c) may be displayed.

However, as mentioned above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status of such "processing to display in a special manner", the purpose of performing such special effects will be lost. There is no other way. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when at least the "expected performance in which the princess character (specific performance image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed, the operation button 410 By operating a predetermined operation means such as , it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image regarding whether a "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

FIG. 201 shows that a help image is displayed based on an operation by a player being accepted in a state where "an expected performance in which a princess character (a specific performance image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is being performed. A display example on the effect display device 1600 at the time is shown.

That is, in this production example, when at least the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed (see FIG. 200), the player's operation (operation button 410, etc.), a character image PG (in this case, a character imitating a penguin) is displayed as a help image, which is useful for checking whether a special effect (in this case, a tilt effect) is being executed. It is now displayed.

More specifically, if the player performs an operation (operation button 410, etc.) in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the situation shown in FIG. 201(a) will appear, and the situation shown in FIG. If the player performs an operation (operation button 410, etc.) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 201(b) will appear, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200(c), the situation shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation (operation button 410, etc.), the situation shown in FIG. 201(c) will appear.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 201(a) to 201(c), when a character image PG (help image) is displayed, it is useful to check whether "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. , it is not made clear whether or not "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. Because we purposely create this kind of recognition difficulty, we can become acutely aware of the possibility that "processing to display in a special mode" appears to be being executed. Even if it appears that "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed, one cannot be sure, and one can remain hopeful that the processing can be implemented, and it is difficult to maintain expectations. It becomes possible.

Here, the character image PG (help image) according to this production example is in a state where "processing to display it in a special mode" is being executed, as shown in FIGS. 201(a) to (c). Regardless of the mode of execution, it can be displayed only in one mode, which is at a predetermined position and held as if holding a ruler in the horizontal direction. In this way, by making an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "processing for displaying in a special mode" and displayed extending in the horizontal direction appear by the player's operation, the image (Here, a ruler) can now function as a guide image (help image) for determining whether or not a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed.

In particular, in this production example, a horizontal direction that is not affected by the "processing to display in a special mode" is placed in a position that overlaps with the image (princess character) that is the target of the "processing to display in a special mode". A reference image (in this case, a ruler) is made to appear, which is displayed so as to extend over the area. Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) on which special processing is to be executed, it can be more useful in determining whether special processing is being executed. become.

In other words, in such a production example, the special production that has been subjected to "processing to display in a special mode" is a production that is slightly tilted, and when the tilted production is performed, the tilted production is Expectations will be higher than if it were not done. Therefore, the player has to operate a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) in order to determine whether the tilting effect is being performed. It is purposely designed to have difficulty in recognizing that it does not definitively notify whether "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that players will be aware of the possibility that their expectations are high when it appears that a tilting effect is being executed, and even if it does not appear that a tilting effect is being executed. It has come to be expected to leave a feeling of hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) that ``a tilting production may be in progress.''

Furthermore, the image (in this case, a ruler) that indicates whether or not a "special effect (in this case, a tilt effect) is being executed" is subject to ``processing to display it in a special mode.'' Displaying at least a part of the image (decorative design SZ, background image) in a manner that overlaps it is one effect, and the standard image (here, the ruler) alone is different from the effect (expectation level). ), but only when compared with the already displayed performance image (in this case, the princess character), it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it becomes possible to advance the performance without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the player's selection (depending on the operation). When the player is not confident that the effect (in this case, the tilt effect) is being executed, the player can intentionally refrain from performing any operations, allowing the player to enjoy various ways of playing. Become.

In this production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as "the process of rotating the original image data and then displaying it," but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, image data created based on the original image data may be rotated and then displayed. Further, instead of performing rotation processing on image data, other processing or conversion may be applied. In short, it is possible to execute special processing to convert and display an image in a manner different from the normal aspect, and when the special processing is in a situation where the special processing can be executed, the player can perform an operation to make the image subject to the special processing. As long as it is possible to display a reference image that does not occur, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" can be executed when the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed. However, depending on the result of the performance determination, it may be possible to make it possible to execute it multiple times within the period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts to fluctuate until it stops fluctuating. At this time, when the number of times the "process for displaying in a special mode" is executed is large, it is desirable that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when the number of times is small.

In addition, regarding the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here), not only when the "expected performance in which the princess character (specific performance image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed, but also when the decorative pattern SZ It may also be possible to make it possible to display the entire period from the start of variation until the variation is stopped by an operation by the player. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern SZ is in a stopped state, it may be possible to make it displayable by an operation by the player.

That is, in this case, no matter what kind of background image is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, the process of making the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) appear is executed. becomes. However, considering that the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) is a "comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image," the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image in each case. It is clear that it differs depending on the type of However, if you change the display position and display form of the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) according to the type of background image each time, the character image PG will become the comparison standard. There is a risk that the essential function as an image (reference image) will be lost, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease due to suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an unchanging and absolute image regardless of the production situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG be able to be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions in response to the player's operation (operation button 410, etc.). . However, it is important that the display format is the same no matter which display position it is displayed.

FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change its display position by an operation by the player.

FIG. 202(a) shows a performance situation in which a specific background image is displayed in a ready-to-reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has suspicions that ``a process to display in a special mode may have been executed,'' and performs an operation to display the comparison reference image (target image). In this case, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at one of a plurality of predetermined display positions (see FIGS. 202(b) to (d)) depending on the mode of operation. Processing is performed to

For example, if the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the left position in the display area (FIG. 202(b)). Processing to display is performed. On the other hand, if the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position within the display area (FIG. 202(c)). When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed on the right side of the display area (FIG. 202(d)). ) will be displayed.

As is clear from FIGS. 202(b) to 202(d), the form of the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) is the same no matter which display position it is displayed. , since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (in particular, the ruler in this case) that can be subject to the "processing to display in a special manner" is different, "displaying in a special manner" The ease with which it can be determined whether the ``process to cause a change'' is being executed also naturally differs.

For example, when displaying a character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) at the position shown in FIG. When displaying the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) at the position shown in FIG. 202(d) (the right position in the display area), , since the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) overlaps the background image to be compared, it will be displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (billboard). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to judge whether or not the "process to cause a problem to occur" is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is placed in a "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since the information can be displayed by a user's operation, it becomes possible to suitably provide information for determining whether the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of operations on the operation button 410 within a predetermined period of time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable depending on the length of time the operation button 410 is held down, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation means may be operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position depending on the operating means operated. If the character image PG is displayed by operating an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG should be displayed even in a situation where the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate (reception period). becomes possible.

In addition, the character image PG (especially the ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as a production (expectation level) by itself, so it is necessary to compare and judge with the background image. After a sufficient period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the image becomes a worthless image that only makes it difficult to visually recognize the expected effect (background image). Therefore, it is desirable that when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the screen was displayed as a result of an operation by the player, the screen is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of the background image, "processing to display it in a special mode" may be executed. There may be cases where the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare and judge whether the current state is present or not. Therefore, in the above production example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to make the character image PG appear is operated again. If the character image PG is displayed continuously, the time period during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated again, it may be hidden after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) based on the timing of the operation, and the display may be hidden intermittently until the player is satisfied. By performing these operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, allowing careful comparison and judgment.

However, if such endless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may become extremely easy to determine whether special processing is being executed. . In other words, the player may always come to a certain conclusion that ``the special process is being executed'' or ``the special process is not in the status of being executed.'' The purpose of the above-mentioned purpose of "making it difficult to recognize rather than clearly indicating whether or not the process to be displayed is being executed" is lost.

Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time for which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, Reduce the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG), such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler that the character image PG has by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image in this way. That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. , since the overall display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) becomes smaller. While making it possible to extend the time period, it is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether a process for displaying in a special mode is being executed.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (displaying the length of the ruler too short), it will no longer be useful for comparison with the background image, which may reduce the interest in the game. It could be connected. Therefore, for the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG), the minimum size (in this case, the length of the shortest ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum size is set in advance. When the size is reduced to a size of It is also desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

Further, it is desirable that the overall size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) be carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operating means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the overall display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is gradually becomes smaller (in this case, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear, so when you really want to know whether "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, Users will now be able to prompt users to perform only certain operations, and will be expected to concentrate on the original content of the performance for the rest.

Note that the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be carried over even after the relevant variable effect ends and the next variable effect is started. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide a comparison standard image (character image PG) as an extremely valuable production opportunity, and basically, just by looking at the background image or decorative pattern SZ, "special aspect" can be displayed. It is now possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 200) that predicts whether the "process to display in" is being executed.

Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by operating a predetermined operating means after the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared). From now on, each time an operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole will gradually become smaller (here, the ruler will gradually become shorter), and eventually it will no longer even appear. . However, when a specific detection is made or a specific condition is met, the comparison reference image (if it appears in multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to one of those positions) Processing may also be prepared in which the overall display area is increased (in this case, the ruler is lengthened). According to such a configuration, the remaining number of times the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear can be restored by operating the predetermined operation means.

Furthermore, as described above, if multiple operating means are provided in which the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is set to be different, the corresponding operation will be performed depending on which of the operating means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In this case, the remaining number of times the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) is set for each operating means (display position), and the When an operation is performed on the specified operation means, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed in a smaller size (the ruler is displayed shorter).

For example, in the case of the performance example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operating means is operated in the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(a), the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(b) will appear. becomes. In the production situation shown in FIG. 202(b), when the first operating means is operated again, this is As mentioned above, the ruler is displayed smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, even if the second operating means is operated after this, only the production situation shown in FIG. 202(c) appears, and the comparison standard due to the re-operation of the first operating means The reduced display of the image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by operating the second operating means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the production situation shown in FIG. 202(d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the re-operation of the first operating means The reduced display of the character image PG is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed on the right side by the operation on the third operation means.

In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the center position shown in FIG. 202(c)) (within 3 seconds), the comparison reference image (character image PG) If another operating means (for example, the first operating means) that does not operate is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is already displayed at the specific position (center position) remains displayed. It is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at a different position (left side position) corresponding to the other operating means (first operating means).

In other words, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears in a position that is difficult to compare with the background image due to the operation on the predetermined operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may appear in a position that is difficult to compare with the background image. By operating the operating means, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at a different display position. This makes it possible to add interest in searching at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at a different display position, this will be used as an opportunity to remove the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed. The display state is maintained without being displayed. According to such a configuration, multiple comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, which increases the number of materials for comparison with the background image (here, two rulers lined up) (and the horizontal length becomes substantially longer), so a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. This provides an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at times when you really want to know if something exists. However, this simultaneously consumes two of the "remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached)" that is set for each of the multiple operation means. This can be said to be a large cost for greatly improving comparability, since it can be generated in exchange for

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the player's operation, multiple comparison reference images (character image PG) are hidden. In order to extend the time during which PG) are simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. In other words, in this case, should we judge whether or not the "special processing is being executed" only based on the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears as a result of the operation on the first operating means, or should we increase the cost? However, a quick decision is required as to whether to perform further operations on the second operation means to significantly improve the ease of comparison, and the delay in making this decision will result in a disadvantage to the player. Since the image is enlarged, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, the timings at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden are different. In addition, the size (length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs depending on the operating situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if you operate a specific operation means, but the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed when you operate another operation means. (Character image PG) is displayed." Therefore, it is difficult to determine which operating means should be operated in order to make the comparison reference image (Character image PG) appear. In addition to the type of background image to be compared, judgment elements can be added to the judgment, making it even more interesting.

As mentioned above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the player's operation, but the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is in a stopped state due to a loss before this, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to hide the display. That is, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, the content of the performance in the display area becomes difficult to see, and when compared with the background image etc. This makes it difficult to concentrate on the content of the performance. As a result, if you do not notice that it has entered a stopped state due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be useful for production will be lost. When this occurs, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to hide the character image PG.

However, when the character image PG is in a stopped state due to a jackpot, the character image PG may not be hidden, but may continue to be displayed until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In other words, when the game stops due to a jackpot, the jackpot game will start even if you do not notice this, so when the character image PG disappears after a predetermined period of time, there will be a surprise It has come to be expected that it will function as a performance.

Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be outputted. Even if you are watching closely, you will be able to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed.However, if you want to output such a specific sound, please follow the steps below. It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain interest in the game.

In other words, although the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) is set for each operation means (display position), If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, the content of the performance in the display area becomes difficult to see, and the user is forced to concentrate on the original performance. This becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) can be output as a sound, while this specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is "displayed in a special manner." The sound output is allowed only when the is not being executed. In this way, regarding the execution of "processing to display in a special manner", rather than using a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, a specific sound (for example, , a penguin's cry), players who dislike such specific sounds are more likely to concentrate on the original presentation and execute ``processing to display in a special mode''. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry), the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed by the player's operation when the "process for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed. Even if this occurs, it is desirable that the sound output is not necessarily permitted. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image that was already in the display state is changed to be smaller (the length of the ruler is shorter)) by the player's operation. Sometimes, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is output, it is definitely recognized that the "process to display in a special mode" is not being executed, but when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is output, For example, if a penguin's cry) is not output as a sound, it may be that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed or the "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed. This makes it possible to maintain the interest when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is not output.

Note that the specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) may be output under the above-described predetermined conditions regardless of which of the plurality of operating means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operating means is operated among a plurality of operating means, then the specific sound may be output. Either a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, or a "special mode The player can now select whether or not to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the "process for displaying" is being executed.

In addition, in the above production example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, it is displayed in a smaller size (the ruler is shorter), thereby displaying it in a special manner. Difficulty in recognizing whether processing is being executed is suitably maintained. In this regard, if a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large. For example, if the volume of the penguin's cry is made lower than when it is output, the difficulty of recognition when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended can be reduced to some extent. be expected to maintain it.

In addition, the size of the comparison reference images (character images PG) and their display positions are determined so that they do not overlap when the comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously at multiple display positions (see FIG. 202). It is desirable to set both. Since each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping, the number of materials for comparison with the background image can be increased.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, it is possible to compare the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). You will be able to do it properly.

In addition, in the above production example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a smaller size (shorter ruler) each time a predetermined operating means is operated, but this is not necessarily the case; Any aspect may be used as long as it increases the difficulty of recognizing whether the process to be displayed in this manner is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operating means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remain the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively high is gradually enlarged. You can also do this. In other words, when the comparison standard image (character image PG) is "displayed with a specific transparency", the part of the comparison standard image (character image PG) that is displayed with a specific transparency is It is important to display the part that is displayed at a certain transparency by shortening it, so it is possible to hide the part that is no longer displayed at a certain transparency, or to display it at a transparency higher than the specific transparency. It may also be displayed to increase visibility.

As mentioned above, "processing to display in a special mode" means, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(b), and then to the display state shown in FIG. Dynamic depiction processing may also be used to change the display state to a different display state. When the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is realized as such dynamic depiction processing, when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is finished, for example, the display state shown in FIG. After passing through the display state shown in FIG. 200(b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a).

In this regard, as mentioned above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but as a dynamic depiction process, It is desirable that the "process of displaying in a special mode" be performed in a shorter time than the predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the player's operation while the "process for displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, the corresponding While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains its display state (within 3 seconds), the display state changes from the display state shown in FIG. 200(c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a)" will always appear, making it easier to compare and determine whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

However, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed for a longer time than the predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, suppose that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the player's operation while the "process for displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 200(b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 200(a)," which does not necessarily occur, making it difficult to compare and determine whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. You will be able to make it happen. Furthermore, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended, which adds a strategic aspect.

In addition, regarding "processing to display in a special mode" as dynamic depiction processing, depending on the result of the production judgment, there are cases where it is performed in a shorter time than the predetermined time (3 seconds), and cases where it is performed in a shorter time than the predetermined time (3 seconds). The process may also be performed over a long period of time. In addition, "processing to display in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within the period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts changing until it stops changing; ``Processing for displaying in a special mode'' as dynamic depiction processing performed for a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

In addition, the comparison reference image (character image PG) was made to be hidden after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) was displayed, For specific sounds that can be output (e.g., penguin cries), the sound output should be interrupted at a time significantly shorter than the predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). is desirable. In other words, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, the specific sound is not displayed even after the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed. (for example, a penguin's cry) will be suppressed from being maintained, so even if "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, specific sounds (for example, a penguin's cry) will not be maintained. , penguin's cry) makes it difficult to create a production situation in which it seems as if this is being denied.

In this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained in its display state (for 3 seconds) from before to after the "process for displaying in a special mode" is executed. Become. Therefore, when "processing to display in a special mode" as dynamic depiction processing is executed, for example, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, the display shown in FIG. The state changes from the display state shown in FIG. 200(b) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(c).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character imitating a penguin and a ruler, it is also possible to display only either the character imitating a penguin or the ruler. In short, it is sufficient that the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not subject to the "process for displaying in a special mode" can be made to appear by the player's operation. However, if you display a reference image (ruler) that shows the length unit in the horizontal direction, it will be easier to judge whether or not "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the above explanation example, methods for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound include not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, and The confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be assigned to a channel, but this can also be achieved by setting the volume value to "0".

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if a variety of sounds are used as confirmation sounds, a situation may arise in which the player becomes aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease. This is for the purpose of

[Prevention of mischief on multiple operating methods]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes performance pattern determination regarding which of a plurality of performance patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, which one of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is selected. It is possible to perform a preview performance judgment as to whether or not to selectively appear the expected performance(s). Note that depending on the result of this preview performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be sequentially executed. There is a possibility that none of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview performance judgment) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected effect (preliminary effect) regarding the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object effect). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function that definitively indicates whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of jackpot determination", and the background depiction and movement The expected performance related to body movements, etc. will be provided as a performance with ``a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been obtained.'' In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing to be changed can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, apart from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), the pachinko machine 1 has It is equipped with a button for adjusting the brightness of the various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various performance lamps is adjusted. It is possible to execute a process for changing a setting value (brightness setting value) by a player (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light). It happens. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is decreased or increased.

In addition, regarding acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, there are two conditions: when the pattern does not change, and when the pattern changes. In either state, each can be executed by an operation by the player.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has many operation means (operation button 410, sword part 5010, effect selection left button 331) that can be operated by the player. , an effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), etc.). When predetermined performance conditions are met, the player is given an opportunity to operate while a variable performance using decorative symbols is being performed, and through such operation performance, the game's interest is increased. We are trying to maintain this.

However, when a game machine is provided with such a large number of operating means, the existence of these operating means becomes conspicuous, making it easy to become a target for pranks by players. As a result of rough handling, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and performance will be significantly reduced, and a decline in game interest will be inevitable.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even though it is in a non-gaming state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation performance cannot occur) in which the game performance according to the jackpot determination is not executed, When a situation arises in which there is a high possibility of being pranked due to operation detection occurring on multiple operating means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) will occur, and this will prevent the operating means from being handled roughly. I'm trying to do what I can.

More specifically, in a state where the game has not started (non-gaming state), among the plurality of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operating means ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword section 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity to
- With the performance display device 1600 displaying (playing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear while the game performance corresponding to the jackpot determination is being executed,
・Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value for the production sound output volume will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed.
・Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, changes to the brightness settings for the brightness of the performance lamps will not be accepted, and the current brightness settings will not be displayed. control period) to occur over a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes). Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the specific video will be hidden, and operations related to the volume will be allowed and the volume will be changed. The adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the normal state as a non-gaming state will be returned, in which operation reception regarding brightness is allowed and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will also be output.

In addition, during the performance restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value related to the output volume of the performance sound are not accepted, and the current volume is changed. The setting value will not be displayed either, and even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, changes to the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. However, only one of the processing related to volume adjustment and the processing related to brightness adjustment may be limited.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is provided with a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that are used as triggers for generating such performance restriction period (function restriction period). This is expected to complicate the conditions under which the performance restriction period occurs and create a sense of tension, such as the feeling that ``the hall is actually monitoring the mischievous behavior.''

FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of a process for generating a performance restriction period based on the fulfillment of a predetermined performance restriction condition in a non-gaming state (during a demo screen, etc.). be.

Currently, the game is being controlled in a state where the game has not started (non-gaming state), and a standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (a situation where decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a demo screen ). As mentioned above, in such a situation, if the volume adjustment button (the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value will be changed, and some production sound will be output at the time of the operation. If it is, the process to adjust the volume (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value will be changed, and if a predetermined performance lamp is in the emitting state at the time of the operation, the brightness will be adjusted (using the brightness setting value as the light amount) process) will now be executed. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

In this way, in a non-gaming state, when a player starts a game, he or she can set the volume and brightness to suit his/her preference by operating the volume adjustment button and brightness adjustment button. Reception is allowed. When the operation is accepted, it is expected that the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be changed accordingly to prompt the player to start playing the game.

However, as described above, in a non-gaming state, a plurality of operation means including the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button may be operated for prank purposes. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and performance will be significantly reduced, and a decline in game interest will be unavoidable.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as prank detection are prepared. Based on the fact that an operation has been detected, it is possible to execute a process of generating a performance restriction period (function restriction period) during which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detected patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state, it is determined that the conditions related to performance restriction are satisfied. It is said that
a. A first timer period (for example, 3 seconds) is started upon detection of an operation on the sword part 5010, and a new operation on the operation button 410 is detected before the first timer period ends; In addition, a second timer period (for example, 3 seconds) is started upon detection of a newly generated operation on the operation button 410, and an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected before the second timer period ends. An operation pattern (detection pattern) that has a detection condition such as that it will occur again.
b. A third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started in response to detection of an operation on the operation button 410, and a new operation detection on the sword portion 5010 occurs before the third timer time ends; In addition, when the newly generated operation detection on the sword part 5010 is triggered, a fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation detection on the operation button 410 is started before the fourth timer time ends. An operation pattern (detection pattern) that has a detection condition such as that it will occur again.

Note that these operation patterns a and b are only examples, and a production restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions for other operation patterns are satisfied, or the detection It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Furthermore, the first to fourth timer times may all be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or different timers may be used to measure the time.

Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "repeated tap operation (multiple operations) on the operation button 410" are also not required in a state where the game has not started (non-gaming state). I can say that. However, these modes are modes in which operation instructions can be given during the operation performance in the game execution state, so even in the non-game state, the player may have some purpose (for example, making a wish or practicing) before starting the game. It is assumed that these operations can be performed in a computer, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, "a combination of operations on multiple operation means (for example, an operation in the order of "sword section 5010 → operation button 410 → sword section 5010")" that is detected for prank purposes will not be detected in the game execution state. It can be said that it is important in order to avoid erroneous detection that it is set as something that will not be instructed to operate as an operation effect at a certain time. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 decreases significantly.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation on a different operation means (for example, the sword section 5010) is performed before and after an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). As a condition, only when operations on multiple operation means are mixed within a relatively short period of time, the detection conditions for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) are met and a performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. I have to. Therefore, players who touch the pachinko machine only once, not with the intention of playing a prank, but just because it is a novelty, can now be exempted from penalties, and the performance restriction period occurs relatively frequently. This makes it possible to better avoid a significant drop in the operating rate of the system.

The purpose of tightening the detection conditions in this way is to avoid a relatively frequent occurrence of performance restriction periods and a significant drop in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming jumbled due to mischief. This is because it is assumed that various combinations of operations will be performed when the device is operated, so even if the detection conditions are made stricter, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will eventually be met.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, at timing tq1 when the player is in a non-gaming state, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time ends. The user is placed in a state (first stage state) in which it is determined whether the

That is, as mentioned above, in "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", three conditions (sword section 5010 → operation button 410 → sword section 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the performance restriction period, and these conditions Each time one of these is satisfied, the stage for generating a performance restriction period is ascended one step at a time.

At timing tq1, the player ascends the first of the three stairs until the performance restriction period occurs. The state of the first stage can continue until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired, and the state of the first stage can continue until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired, and if the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has expired, the vehicle is returned to its original state (the state of the 0th stage after descending one flight of stairs) in which none of the three conditions described above are satisfied.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, an operation on the operation button 410 is detected at timing tq2 when the first timer time has not yet expired (first stage state), and the operation pattern (Detection pattern) Among the three conditions that a has, the "second stage detection condition" is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and sets the third stage detection condition (here, the last A state (second stage state) is entered in which it is determined whether or not the detection condition (detection condition) is satisfied.

That is, at timing tq2, the player ascends the second staircase out of the three stairs until the performance restriction period occurs. The state of the second stage can continue until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired, and the state of the second stage can continue until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired, and if the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword section 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has expired, the vehicle is returned to its original state (the state at the 0th stage after descending two stairs) in which none of the three conditions described above are satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at timing tq3 when the second timer time has not yet expired (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detected Among the three conditions of pattern) a, the "third stage detection condition (last detection condition)" is satisfied. Therefore, based on the detection, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the performance display device 1600 to display (play) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear while the game performance according to the jackpot determination is being executed. Let it start. At the same time, even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound will not be accepted, the current volume setting value will not be displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound will not be output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, changes to the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, the current brightness setting value will not be displayed, and of course the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will not be output. , causing performance restrictions. Then, the performance restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

According to such a configuration, if a plurality of operations are performed in a jumbled manner, a performance restriction period will occur, so that mischievous operations can be suppressed.

Also, in order to trigger the performance restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (climb the stairs), but if the time runs out in the middle of the way, the I am trying to completely eliminate the status level and return it to its original state. As a result, even if the game ends with the state level raised, it is also preferable that the performance restriction period may unintentionally occur when a new player attempts to start the game. can be avoided.

In addition, in the process of increasing the status level (climbing up the stairs), when the performance restriction period occurs, the operation means that are subject to restrictions, such as the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness It is also conceivable that the "adjustment button" is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) have a reception desk so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his/her preference before starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how many times these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (climbing the stairs), this will trigger the state to change. It is desirable to avoid causing a change in the level or affecting the first timer time, second timer time, etc.

That is, in this case, no matter how many times the volume adjustment button or the brightness adjustment button is subjected to prank operations, it is not possible to use this as an opportunity to generate a performance restriction period. However, at least the state level that has already increased will not drop due to these operations, and once the performance restriction period occurs, the target of the performance restriction will be the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness adjustment button". Since all operations on these buttons will be disabled, pranks on the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness adjustment button", which are not detected as prank operations, will also be effectively suppressed. become expected to do so.

In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, a pattern that is sandwiched between "two operations (timings tq1 and tq3 in FIG. 203) on another operation means (for example, the sword part 5010)" Regarding the "operation on a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 203)", the condition is set that the operation is performed not once but a predetermined number of times. It is more desirable to

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer period (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and a seventh timer period (for example, 3 seconds) according to the detection. When the operation on the sword part 5010 is detected again within the period, the detection condition related to the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" is satisfied and a performance restriction period occurs. Furthermore, the fifth to seventh timer times may all be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or different timers may be used to measure the time.

Note that if an operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer period (for example, 3 seconds) and an operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer period (for example, 3 seconds) is reset and then It is more desirable to prevent the production restriction period from occurring due to the detection conditions related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) being not satisfied. Also, within the seventh timer period (for example, 3 seconds), an operation on the operation button 410 instead of an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected again (a specific number of times (here, here) that is greater than the number of times (here, two times) to be detected. Then, even when the third time) is detected, the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset, and the detection conditions for the operation pattern (detection pattern) are not met and the performance restriction period does not occur. It is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (in this case, 2 times) in succession at the timing between two operations of the sword part 5010, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is When the detection conditions are met, the performance restriction period will occur. In other words, if the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) between two operations on the sword part 5010, the performance restriction period expires. Since this will no longer occur, it is expected that the conditions for the performance restriction period to occur will be made more complex, creating a sense of tension such as ``Isn't the mischievous act actually being monitored by the hall side?'' Become.

In addition, in order to make this kind of complexity, it is necessary to operate the operation button 410 only m times (<n times) and then operate the sword part 5010 again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is When the operation is performed twice (>n times) within each timer time, it is desirable that the control is set to a different state from the original state (the state may be different between m times and l times). . Therefore, even if an operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" under these different controlled states, the performance restriction period will not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) between two operations on the sword part 5010, the performance restriction period does not occur, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (>l times) By making it possible for a performance restriction period to occur (same as when the operation is performed n times), the conditions for the performance restriction period to occur will become more complicated, and it will become clear that the mischievous behavior is not actually being monitored by the hall. It is now expected to create a more appropriate sense of tension. In this case as well, it goes without saying that a timer time is generated each time the operation button 410 is operated, and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that are used as triggers for generating the performance restriction period are prepared.

However, such mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnetism, and dealing with them too harshly may lead to the disadvantage of the hall. Therefore, with regard to specific videos that appear during the performance restriction period, rather than displaying strong warning content, the content should be limited to explaining the proper handling method of games and performances, etc., to suppress a decline in gaming interest. This is desirable.

As mentioned above, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the above-mentioned specific video will be hidden, and the message "Volume-related operations are allowed" will be displayed. and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output as the brightness operation is accepted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the player starts playing at timing tq4, which is before a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurred. It can be assumed that by generating a starting prize, a transition is made to a game execution state in which a variable display of decorative symbols is performed. In such a case, the above-mentioned purpose of trying to get the prankster to stop and start playing has been achieved, so if the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed, End the performance restriction period (functionality restriction period) of something.

However, if the game is started before a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed, there is a possibility that the game has not been fully reflected, so at least the change in the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period Until the display ends, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value will be displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound will not be output, and the brightness It is desirable to perform control as a partial restriction period, such as "even if the brightness is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 204, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is disabled, regardless of whether it is controlled during the partial restriction period or not. Become so. Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the sword part 5010 or an operation on the operation button 410, the first timer time and the second timer time will not be counted due to these operations, and the performance restriction period will not occur. do not have.

According to such a configuration, if the game execution state is entered without waiting for the original duration of the performance restriction period, the game will continue with some of the restrictions during the performance restriction period remaining. Since the state is shifted to the execution state, it is possible to encourage the player to reflect on the mischievous act without interfering with the progress of the game performance.

In addition, regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period ends, but also the decorative pattern is stopped when the number of pending is 0. The game may be continued at least until (until the non-gaming state is reached).

In addition, at the timing when the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-gaming state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), a predetermined safe time is set, and the time period until the predetermined safe time elapses is set. It is desirable that the detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" continue to be disabled even though the player is in a non-gaming state. In other words, in a situation where the game execution state has just ended, it is assumed that the player's excitement has not cooled down and he/she performs operations on multiple operation means with too much force. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to immediate suspension of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game transitions to the non-gaming state.

In addition, if you are placed in a non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period mentioned above, there is a possibility that you have not yet fully reflected on your mischievous behavior, so partial restrictions will be applied until the safe period has elapsed. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" will be allowed again when the safe time has elapsed.

In addition, the safe time will now be set as a longer time value than the shortest time value among the multiple time values that can be selected as the symbol fluctuation time from the start to the end of the decorative symbol fluctuation display. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, even if the fluctuating display of decorative patterns is ended immediately, the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" cannot be detected until at least the safe time ends. It will be possible to continue the invalidation state or to continue the partial restriction period.

In addition, if the display of decorative symbols starts to fluctuate after the performance restriction period (function restriction period) ends, a symbol fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned safe time will always be selected, and only the selected symbol fluctuation time will be displayed. It is desirable that the decorative pattern be displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the above-described partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

In addition, in the above explanation example, even if a detection close to the production restriction period is made within the detection period for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (the part with fine dots in FIG. 203), no This behavior no longer appears. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time you go up a staircase that generates a penalty), to encourage you to stop the operation due to pranks. You can do it like this. This specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of operating means that is the detection target. Similarly, each time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (each time you go up a staircase where a penalty occurs), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is caused to change. Good too.

In addition, in the above explanation example, methods for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound include not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, and The confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be assigned to a channel, but this can also be achieved by setting the volume value to "0".

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if a variety of sounds are used as confirmation sounds, a situation may arise in which the player becomes aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease. This is for the purpose of

[Noise prevention with adjustment confirmation sound when opening]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes performance pattern determination regarding which of a plurality of performance patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, which one of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is selected. It is possible to perform preview performance judgment as to whether or not to selectively appear the expected performance(s). Note that depending on the result of this preview performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be sequentially executed. There is a possibility that none of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview performance judgment) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected effect (preliminary effect) regarding the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object effect). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function that definitively indicates whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of jackpot determination", and the background depiction and movement The expected performance related to body movements, etc. will be provided as a performance with ``a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been obtained.'' In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing to be changed can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, apart from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), the pachinko machine 1 has It is equipped with a button for adjusting the brightness of the various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various performance lamps is adjusted. It is possible to execute a process for changing a setting value (brightness setting value) by a player (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light). It happens. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is decreased or increased.

In addition, regarding acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, there are two conditions: when the pattern does not change, and when the pattern changes. In either state, each can be executed by an operation by the player.

By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start playing games for a while after the hall opens, the volume and brightness may be adjusted frequently in order to start the game with set values that suit their preferences. However, in this case, if a volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume or brightness is adjusted, the adjustment confirmation sound will echo throughout the hall and spoil the atmosphere. I'm confused.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to accept operations related to volume adjustment or brightness adjustment from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when a predetermined condition is met, a state in which it is possible to accept changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value while the volume setting value and brightness setting value are set to their respective "predetermined specific values" We are planning to do so.

According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the setting value for the output volume of the performance sound (volume setting value) and the brightness setting value are set to their respective "predetermined specific values". It will be set automatically. In other words, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the volume setting value that many players tend to prefer, it is possible to increase the number of games played immediately after the hall opens. This can be expected to make it difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value or brightness setting value to suit his or her preference. Note that the establishment of the predetermined condition may mean that a certain period of time has passed since the power was turned on, or that a predetermined command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a, or that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has established the predetermined condition. It may also be the end of the specific process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the Acceptance of changes to brightness setting values is allowed, but a special period (exclusive opening period) in which no volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output even if changes to these setting values are accepted for a specified period of time (for example, 1 hour) First, let it occur. After this special period (exclusive opening period) ends, a period (normal business period) will occur during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when changes to these setting values are accepted. There is. As a result, for a while after the hall opens (until the time required for new customers to complete all adjustments), various adjustment confirmation sounds will not be output. This allows players to have the opportunity to adjust the volume and brightness in order to start the game with set values that match their preferences.

FIG. 205 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing related to the special period (period exclusively for store opening).

Now, as shown in FIG. 205, if the power is turned on at timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the player can control the volume until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in a state in which acceptance of operations related to adjustment and operations related to brightness adjustment is not permitted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to the game, such as starting winnings, is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) appears while the power is being restored, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (such as a stop display of symbols or a demo screen) is not yet displayed. Do not show.

Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is reached, detection related to the game, such as starting winnings, is allowed, and the game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state in which it waits for a starting prize. A stop symbol (standby screen) is also displayed on the effect display device 1600, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in a waiting state for variation.

In addition, in this case, if the volume setting value and brightness setting value are each set to a ``predetermined specific value'', ``acceptance of changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value is permitted; Even if a change in setting value is accepted, a special period (exclusive period for store opening) is generated in which no volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. Such a dedicated opening period can continue until timing tr2, which is when a predetermined period of time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the start of the period, and when the period ends at timing tr2, the volume is reduced. When a change in the setting value or brightness setting value is accepted, a period (normal business period) is generated during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output. In addition, in the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbols are displayed (pattern change waiting state) is maintained, and the decorative symbols in the stopped state and the background thereof are maintained. Various background images (images with lower priority in the layer than decorative patterns) displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) will be displayed as a result of the transition from the exclusive opening period to the regular business period. Nothing will change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbols are displayed (standby screen) appears and the game is in the waiting state to start playing, the game continues until the timing tr2 arrives (until the dedicated opening period ends). Since the adjustment confirmation sound is maintained in a state in which the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period of 100 days, it is possible to suitably avoid a situation where the adjustment sound echoes immediately after the store opens. On the other hand, when timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), the system automatically shifts to a state where an adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When the various adjustments by new customers have calmed down, more detailed adjustments can be made while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, the system automatically transitions to the normal business period where the adjustment confirmation sound can be output while maintaining the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), so a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the store opened. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game is controlled during the store opening exclusive period in which no adjustment sound is output until the game is completed.

Note that after the predetermined condition is established and the game is in a waiting state (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume setting value or brightness setting value is accepted, the effect display device 1600 changes the setting value according to the changed setting value. Parameter display (volume side parameter display, brightness side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by checking these parameter displays, it is possible to adjust the setting values to suit one's preference.

However, even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way during the period immediately after the store opens (opening-only period), changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be reflected in the volume and light intensity. In the end, this could lead to the atmosphere in the hall becoming dominated by adjustments, and there are concerns that the atmosphere would be ruined and the audience would be less excited. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the volume setting value is accepted before timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value will not be reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable to avoid this. Similarly, regarding brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in brightness setting value is accepted before timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value will be used as the light amount. It is desirable to prevent it from being reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (opening exclusive period), each player adjusts the setting value according to his/her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. In other words, in this case, while providing an opportunity to adjust the setting values according to one's preference, the atmosphere in the hall is improved because the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

Note that among the volume and brightness, only the brightness may maintain a state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light even after timing tr2 arrives. In other words, it is necessary to avoid adjusting the power consumption by mischievous operations until the game has started, and it is necessary to avoid adjusting the brightness, which consumes more power than the volume, until the game has started. It is desirable to prevent adjustments from being reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed.

However, even if timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time dedicated to opening the store has not yet expired), symbol fluctuations (fluctuating display of decorative symbols) will start based on the starting winnings. After that, the volume adjustment and brightness adjustment by the player has been completed, and it is assumed that the frequency of these adjustments will decrease significantly. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if a starting winning is detected after timing tr1 and before timing tr2 arrives, the opening exclusive period is ended early based on the detection. It is now possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

However, during the decorative pattern fluctuation display period due to the start-up winnings that caused the opening exclusive period to end early, changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value were accepted, and an adjustment confirmation sound was output due to the change. If something like this happens, it is expected that many players will end the exclusive opening period early and then adjust the volume and brightness, which could put the cart before the horse.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a starting winning is detected after timing tr1 and before timing tr2 arrives, the opening exclusive period is ended early and the normal business period is started. However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed until at least the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern that has occurred as a result of this is terminated (fluctuation suppression process).

FIG. 206 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a game is started during a special opening period (special period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that a starting prize is detected at timing tr3 when the special period has not yet expired. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the processing related to the exclusive opening period is ended, the period shifts to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppression process is started in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression process allows changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value to be accepted while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to execute a process that reflects the volume and light intensity of the lighting lamp in the lighting state, but a process that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or brightness setting value is changed. The difference from the "processing required during the exclusive opening period" is whether or not the decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and changes in setting values are reflected in the volume and light intensity. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such fluctuation suppression processing is performed in a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of reservations is 0 and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed). It will continue to run unless it is migrated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to be in the game execution state (symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming state is entered at timing tr4. (The number of pending items is 0 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed) immediately. (For example, if one hour has not passed since the opening exclusive period that ended early) Even if the store has just opened, the special period (opening-only period) will not occur again.

In other words, in this case, in the non-gaming state after timing tr4, the period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume setting value or brightness setting value is accepted is It will be controlled. During normal business periods when fluctuation suppression processing is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also reflected in the light intensity of the lighting lamp in the lighting state. It is now reflected as. In addition, in the performance display device 1600, a stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in a waiting state for change.

Players who create a situation such as "ending the opening exclusive period (special period) early and then immediately ending the game execution state" are not satisfied with the adjustment details made without the adjustment sound being output, and once they start Since it is assumed that the player has a desire to make even more detailed adjustments even if it means interrupting the game that has been played, the special period (opening exclusive period) is ) is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In addition, in the above explanation example, the time (timings tr1 to tr2) during which the opening-only period (special period) continues may be a certain period of time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs. , it may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to their respective "predetermined specific values" may be timing tr1, or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

In addition, in the above explanation example, there is a technical feature in the configuration regarding the exclusive opening period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the processing in the period before timing tr1 is different from the above-mentioned content. It may be realized as different processing.

Further, in the above explanation example, at timing tr2, no change is made to the decorative patterns and background images in the effect display device 1600, but the display changes to the extent that an image different from the decorative patterns and background images is additionally displayed. If so, you may do so.

In addition, in the above explanation example, methods for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound include not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, and The confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be assigned to a channel, but this can also be achieved by setting the volume value to "0".

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if a variety of sounds are used as confirmation sounds, a situation may arise in which the player becomes aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease. This is for the purpose of

Furthermore, in the example described above, only the set value of either the volume or the brightness may be changed.

[Control regarding volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes performance pattern determination regarding which of a plurality of performance patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, which one of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is selected. It is possible to perform a preview performance judgment as to whether to selectively make the expected performance (plurality) appear. Note that depending on the result of this preview performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be sequentially executed. There may be cases in which none of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) is executed.

Then, when such performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview performance judgment) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected effect (preliminary effect) regarding the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object effect). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function that definitively indicates whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of jackpot determination", and the background depiction and movement The expected performance related to body movements, etc. will be provided as a performance with ``a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been obtained.'' In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing to be changed can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, apart from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), the pachinko machine 1 has It is equipped with a button for adjusting the brightness of the various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various performance lamps is adjusted. It is possible to execute a process for changing a setting value (brightness setting value) by a player (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light). It happens. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player setting value (brightness setting value) regarding the brightness is decreased or increased.

In addition, regarding acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, there are two conditions: when the pattern does not change, and when the pattern changes. In either state, each can be executed by an operation by the player.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are two cases in which the first hit determination is made in response to a game ball being received in the first starting port 2002, and a case in which the first hit determination is made in response to a game ball being received in the first starting port 2002. Regardless of whether a second hit determination is made in response to the game ball being accepted in After that, an advantageous benefit (jackpot game) can be given to the player. However, the expected values for those benefits are set so that the second win determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first win determination (first symbol variation).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, in the case of a jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening/closing pattern of opening the big prize opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times at maximum, and only approximately 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the change of the volume setting value is accepted only in the "game start waiting state where neither the above-mentioned first symbol variation nor the above-mentioned second symbol variation is executed", " "The first execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed," and "the first execution state in which the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is not executed." The change of the volume setting value is allowed in any of the "second-side execution states," and the numerical range within which the volume setting value is allowed to be changed is the same in all of these states.

According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range, etc., regardless of which state (game start waiting state, first-side execution state, second-side execution state) the player is in. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game by adjusting the sound according to each situation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the above-mentioned "game start waiting state" and "first side execution state", the setting value related to the output volume of the performance sound (volume setting value) is changed. When the volume adjustment confirmation sound is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

In other words, in the "game start waiting state", no performance sound is output because the game is not being executed, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change will not be made. The subsequent volume cannot be confirmed as an audible sound. For this reason, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the performance sound is changed.

In addition, in the "first execution state", although there is a situation where the production sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game where the probability of getting a jackpot is relatively low. In many cases, the game is controlled to a low-precision, non-time-saving gaming state, and the performance is not very promising. In recent years, it has been confirmed that when players are in a gaming state with low expectations, they play the game while watching a mobile device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first-side execution state," a volume adjustment confirmation sound is set to ensure that the player is informed of the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output the following.

On the other hand, in the "second-side execution state", the production sound according to the second hit determination is output, and the probability of getting a jackpot is relatively high (high-precision time-saving gaming state). ) is often controlled by In such situations, expectations for the performance are high, and people tend to adjust the volume in order to enjoy the performance. Therefore, it is a good idea to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed. If it becomes difficult to hear the performance sound or BGM according to the 2 hit determination, the game's interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", even if the volume setting value is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. This makes it possible to clear the production sound and BGM according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to maintain interest in the game by providing an opportunity to adjust the volume in an environment where the player can listen.

However, in the "second-side execution state", expectations for the performance are high, and even after the second symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a loss mode, the player is aware of the possibility that it will fluctuate again and change to a jackpot mode. It can be said that securing time (afterglow) to make the player aware of the game is important in maintaining interest in the game. In this regard, if the normal processing in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" The player will be able to easily detect that the game has been terminated in a losing manner and is in a state of waiting for the game to start, and there is a concern that interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, when the processing related to the "second-side execution state" is completed and the transition is made to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" Control is performed so that normal processing (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when in the "game start waiting state" is not performed. It is desirable to do so. For example, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after transitioning from the "second-side execution state" to the "game start waiting state," "Changes in the volume setting value are allowed, but the volume setting value is not changed." It is desirable to perform a process such as ``processing in which no volume adjustment confirmation sound is output even if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output'' or ``processing in which changes in the volume setting value itself are not permitted.'' However, the possibility of the "second-side execution state" still continuing for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second-side execution state" to the "game start waiting state" is more actively considered. In order to make people aware of this, it is necessary to "permit changes in the volume setting value, but do not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed", as in the "second-side execution state". It is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first execution state", expectations for the performance are not high, and the first symbol variation is basically stopped and displayed in a losing manner. Therefore, when the processing related to the "first-side execution state" is completed and the transition is made to the "game start waiting state", unlike the case of the "second-side execution state" described above, the "first-side execution state" is The above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) that is performed even when the volume setting value is changed will continue to be performed even when the volume setting value is changed. It is desirable to do so.

By the way, in a situation where the control is in the "first-side execution state", the stress of not winning the jackpot easily causes mischievous operations such as a jumble of operations on multiple operating means to be performed within a relatively short period of time. This is a concern. That is, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of the operating means as a result of rough handling, the operability and performance will be significantly reduced, and further decline in game interest will be inevitable.

Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection occurs with multiple operation means and pranks occur not only when the control is in the "game start waiting state" but also when the control is in the "first-side execution state". When the situation becomes high, a performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated in the above-described example of "preventing mischief on multiple operating means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)".

In other words, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 in either the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" or the "first-side execution state" are performed. When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword part 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection triggers the
- With the performance display device 1600 displaying (playing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear while the game performance corresponding to the jackpot determination is being executed,
・Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value for the production sound output volume will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed.
・Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, changes to the brightness settings for the brightness of the performance lamps will not be accepted, and the current brightness settings will not be displayed. control period) to occur over a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if an image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before it. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the specific video will be hidden, and operations related to the volume will be allowed and the volume will be changed. Adjustment confirmation sound is also output, brightness-related operations are accepted and brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output, which is a normal state as a "game start waiting state" or "first-side execution state". It will be returned to.

Note that for detailed contents and other examples regarding such performance restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the contents in the explanatory example of "preventing mischief on multiple operating means". However, in this case, even if the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "first-side execution state" during the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the performance restriction period (function restriction period) will not end early. Various processes related to the performance restriction period are continued under the same conditions as in the "game start waiting state". This is expected to suppress mischievous operations when the device is controlled to the "first-side execution state" with low expectations.

On the other hand, if the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "second-side execution state" during the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the "performance restriction period (function restriction period)" described above with reference to FIG. ``Processing related to early termination of function restriction period'' and its modifications will be adopted and executed as appropriate. As a result, the atmosphere when the highly anticipated "second-side execution state" finally comes to be executed is maintained, and it is expected that interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above explanation example, methods for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound include not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, and The confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be assigned to a channel, but this can also be achieved by setting the volume value to "0".

Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, some "confirmation sound" has been output. It is desirable to make it recognizable. In other words, if a variety of sounds are used as confirmation sounds, a situation may arise in which the player becomes aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease. This is for the purpose of

Furthermore, in the example described above, only the set value of either the volume or the brightness may be changed.

[Period during which operation reception is allowed (validity period) and its own performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected performances (pre-announcement performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform performance judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected effects (e.g., a plurality of expected effects) should be selectively made to appear. Note that depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared corresponding to the type of variation pattern selected above may be sequentially executed. There may be cases in which none of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) is executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) is performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby changing the result of the jackpot judgment. A variable performance based on the corresponding decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is selected regardless of the result of the preview performance determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception performance ("intrinsic reception performance" to be described later) in which performance reception is permitted when the pattern performance based on the game progresses to a specific timing. Furthermore, even if the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the above variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the preview effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern When the symbol presentation based on the variation pattern 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing, it is possible to generate an operation acceptance presentation (“additional reception presentation” to be described later) in which presentation reception is permitted. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the preview performance judgment, the operation reception performance (valid period) will not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns that can generate an "intrinsic reception effect" and a plurality of second variation patterns that can generate an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the "intrinsic reception performance" and the "additional reception performance" can each be generated sequentially.

However, the operation reception performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as the operation is detected within the validity period, a predetermined change (performance Since only a post-operation performance is executed that causes at least one of a display change on the display device 1600, a sound performance change on a speaker, a light emission change due to a lamp, and a performance operation using a movable decoration, the operation reception performance (valid (period) This itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease after the operation until the performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- a first operation performance means capable of executing a post-operation performance in which an execution state is continued until a predetermined timing within a symbol performance based on a variation pattern arrives when an operation by a player is detected;
- A second operation performance means capable of executing a post-operation performance in a manner that when an operation by a player is detected, the elapsed time from the timing of the detection is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. We are planning to prepare.

According to such a configuration, the operation reception performance (valid period) itself differs between when the operation reception performance is performed by the first operation performance means and when the operation reception performance is performed by the second operation performance means. Since different presentations will be provided to players, it is expected to improve the game's interest after the operation until the presentation is executed.

That is, in the operation acceptance performance by the first operation performance means, the post-operation performance is executed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed early or late within the validity period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to operate the effect immediately after the validity period occurs, since the execution state of the effect after the operation is maintained for a long time and the effect can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the operation acceptance performance by the second operation performance means, no matter which timing within the validity period the operation is performed, the elapsed time from the operation timing continues until the time reaches a predetermined time value. After the operation, the performance will be executed. Therefore, it is recommended that you do not perform any operations for a while after the validity period occurs, and instead perform the operations at a later time, in order to maintain the overall performance time from the start of the validity period to the end of the performance after operation for a long time. This can be said to be advantageous in terms of enjoying the performance.

In this case, the performance generation conditions for the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means and the operation reception performance by the second operation performance means are different. For example, in the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means, the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the first fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing. The operation reception performance by the second operation performance means is generated when the second fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the preview performance determination corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. It is possible to realize this as something that occurs when a special result is obtained and the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means occurs when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination and the symbol performance based on the first fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. The operation reception performance by the second operation performance means is such that the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol performance based on the first fluctuation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may also be realized as something that occurs when the timing has progressed.

FIG. 207 shows the first post-operation effect that continues until a predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about the operation acceptance performance.

Now, suppose that the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to timing tr1 while the first performance condition required for the occurrence of the "first operation reception performance for which performance reception is permitted" is satisfied. A first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. This first operation reception performance (valid period) is configured to end without executing the post-operation performance when timing tr3 arrives when a predetermined set time has elapsed without reception of the performance. During the execution period of the first operation reception performance in which performance reception is permitted, an image representing the operation means to be operated and a gauge displaying how much valid time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. An operation promotion performance is performed.

When the first operation reception performance (valid period) is started, a reception acceptance sound is output that indicates that the performance reception is permitted (or that the performance reception is permitted). . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue outputting the acceptance permissible sound for the predetermined set time, but at an intermediate stage when the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, the signal is put into a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

Note that "acceptable sound is output" here refers to not only newly assigning "sound data including acceptable acceptance sound" to the channel at timing tr1, but also the case where the channel is already assigned. This concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data corresponding to the timing tr1 arrive. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptance sound" may be output from before the timing tr1 to after the timing tr1 so as to span the timing tr1. In addition, "putting into a non-output state" here means not only canceling the assignment status of "sound data that includes acceptable sound" to the channel, but also maintaining the assignment status of the sound data to the channel. However, the concept also includes the fact that the "reproduction period of acceptance-permitted sound" in the sound data ends and shifts to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

As described above, in such a first operation reception performance, the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" as a post-operation performance is performed based on the fact that an operation by the player has been detected and the performance has been accepted. However, for the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) started in this way, no matter when the performance is accepted at any timing within the validity period, the performance is based on the fluctuation pattern. The game is ended when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol performance (performance pattern) arrives. The "operation-induced process using the first performance member" can be executed as, for example, a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform a performance operation based on reception of the performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if the performance is accepted at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) is as follows. It is executed over a relatively long period of time from timing tr1a to timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, if the performance is accepted at a relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) is executed only for a relatively short period of time from timing tr2a to timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception performance, the execution state as a post-operation performance (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first performance member) is to perform the operation immediately after the validity period occurs. It becomes possible to provide a performance that is maintained for a long time and is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

As will be described later, in the first operation reception performance, the performance is accepted when the reception permission sound is in the output state, and the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) is executed based on the performance reception. Even in this case, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception performance in which the post-operation performance is executed in a manner that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of detection reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, suppose that the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to timing tr11 while the second performance condition required for the occurrence of the "second operation reception performance in which performance reception is permitted" is satisfied. A second operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As with the first operation reception performance, this second operation reception performance (valid period) also does not execute the post-operation performance when timing tr13 arrives when a predetermined set time has elapsed without reception of the performance. It is scheduled to end. The predetermined set time in the first operation reception performance and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception performance may be set to different time values. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception performance in which performance reception is permitted, an image representing the operation means to be operated and a gauge displaying how much valid time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. An operation promotion performance is performed.

When the second operation reception performance (valid period) is started, a reception acceptance sound indicating that the performance reception is now permitted (or that the performance reception is permitted) is output. Ru. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue to output the acceptance permission sound for the predetermined set time, but is in the middle of the process when the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At timing tr12, the signal is put into a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

Note that "acceptable sound is output" here means that "sound data including acceptable acceptance sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr11, and also when the channel has already been assigned. This concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data that is available coincide with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptance sound" may be output from before timing tr11 to after timing tr11 so as to span timing tr11. In addition, "setting to non-output state" here not only cancels the assignment status of "sound data containing acceptable sound" to the channel, but also maintains the assignment status of the sound data to the channel. This concept also includes the fact that the "reproduction period of acceptance-permitted sound" in the sound data ends and shifts to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

As mentioned above, in such a second operation reception performance, the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" as a post-operation performance is performed based on the fact that the player's operation has been detected and the performance has been accepted. However, for the post-operation production (operation-induced processing using the second production member) started in this way, no matter when the production reception is received within the validity period, the production reception is The process continues until the elapsed time from the time when the activation reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as the validity period). Note that the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed as, for example, a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect based on the acceptance of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if the performance is accepted at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance member) is as follows. The process is executed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 at which a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, if the performance is accepted at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance member) is executed from timing tr12a to timing tr15 (timing that comes after timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

According to such a second operation reception performance, it is possible to avoid operating it for a while after the validity period occurs and to operate it at a later time, from the start of the validity period until the end of the post-operation performance. It becomes possible to provide a performance that is advantageous in enjoying the performance by maintaining the overall performance time for a long time.

As will be described later, in the second operation acceptance performance as well, the performance is accepted when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, and the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance member) is performed based on the performance reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

As explained with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208, the first and second operation reception effects (valid periods) are given different effects, and the operation reception effects (valid periods) are different from each other. By generating the game based on the establishment of the conditions, it is expected that the game interest can be suitably maintained from the time the operation acceptance performance (validity period) occurs until the post-operation performance is performed.

However, simply adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (valid period) leaves the following problems. In other words, for these operation reception performances (validity periods), it may be more advantageous to operate them early within the validity period in order to enjoy the production, or it may be more advantageous to operate them later in the validity period in order to enjoy the production. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the performance is fixed, such as when the game is active, there is still a lack of performance within the validity period, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation reception performance as a special operation reception performance having the aspect described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception performance.
Now, if the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to timing tr21 while the special performance conditions required for the occurrence of the special operation reception performance are satisfied, the special performance will be executed based on the progress to timing tr21. Generates an operation reception effect (validity period). As will be described later, this special operation reception performance (valid period) is different from the first and second operation reception performances, and timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time has elapsed without reception of the performance. Even if there is no operation, the production reception will always occur within the validity period and the post-operation production described below will be executed. Although this will also be described later, the predetermined set time for the special operation reception performance is set to a longer time value than the predetermined set time for the first operation reception performance and the predetermined set time for the second operation reception performance.

Also, when the special operation reception performance (valid period) starts, a reception permission sound is output that indicates that the reception of the performance has become permitted (or that the reception of the performance is permitted). be done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment converts this reception permission sound (FIG. 209) into reception permission sounds (FIGS. 207 and 208) generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects. The output state is made to continue for a longer period of time. In this explanatory example, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 209 is also rendered inaudible by being rendered non-output at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage before the predetermined set time has elapsed. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 209 may continue to be output until timing tr23 arrives.

Note that "acceptable sound is output" here also means that "sound data that includes an acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr21, or when the channel has already been assigned. This concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data included in the sound data coincide with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptance sound" may be output from before timing tr21 to after timing tr21 so as to span timing tr21. In addition, "setting to non-output state" here not only cancels the assignment status of "sound data containing acceptable sound" to the channel, but also maintains the assignment status of the sound data to the channel. This concept also includes the fact that the "reproduction period of acceptance-permitted sound" in the sound data ends and shifts to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played back.

In this regard, in the special operation reception performance, if an operation by the player is detected within the validity period and the performance is accepted, based on the reception of the performance, the "first movement" shown in FIG. ``Operation-induced processing using the decoration body (first effect member)'' and ``operation-induced processing using the second movable decoration element (second effect member)'' shown in FIG. 208 are started in parallel. It has become something to do. Therefore, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" will be started, but the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" started in this way can be executed at any timing within its validity period. Even if the production is accepted, it will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol production (production pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and the "operation using the second production member" will be completed. However, for the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" that has been started in this way, no matter when the effect is accepted at any time within its validity period, the effect will be accepted. This will continue until the elapsed time from the time when it was made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as the validity period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, if the performance is accepted at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timings tr21 to tr23), then among the post-operation performances, "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is performed after a predetermined time value starts from the timing tr21a. The process ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if the performance is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timings tr21 to tr23), then in the post-operation performance, "The result of the operation using the first performance member" "Processing" is executed only for a relatively short period of time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the "operation-induced processing using the second production member" is predetermined from the timing tr22a. The process continues until timing tr26 (timing that arrives after timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

In this way, the special operation reception performance according to this embodiment is generated when a specific performance pattern is executed based on the result of jackpot determination, and the performance content as the specific performance pattern has progressed to a specific timing. When the performance is accepted within the special operation reception performance (validity period), "the first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives" is used. ``operation-induced processing'' and ``operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value'' are executed, respectively.

According to such a special operation reception performance, if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" among the post-operation performances can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" of the post-operation performance will arrive at a relatively early stage. However, if you do not operate it for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it later, this will affect the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" of the post-operation performance. Although it becomes possible to have the process arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a disadvantage that it becomes impossible to maintain the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" among the post-operation performances for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception performance, there is no optimal operation timing to liven up the performance.
・In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" ends, you can enjoy it by extending the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" (Is it to be operated at an early stage within the validity period?) or,
・Would you like to enjoy this by prolonging the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" ends in exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member"? (Do you want to operate it at a later stage within the validity period?) or
・The overall performance is improved by gradually sacrificing the time during which the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" is maintained in the execution state and the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" is completed. (Will it be operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the validity period?)
It is now possible to provide a special operation reception performance with strategic operation performance such as this, thereby providing a boring operation reception performance that allows the player to select the operation timing according to his or her mood. You will be able to do it.

As will be described later, in the special operation reception performance, when the performance is accepted while the reception permission sound is in the output state, the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member, The operation-induced process using the second performance member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptance permission sound is canceled at this point.

Here, in the above explanation example, when the performance is accepted in the special operation reception performance (FIG. 209), "the first performance member whose execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" ``The operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect was accepted reaches a predetermined time value'' are executed respectively. . However, even if a special operation reception performance occurs, when the predetermined performance conditions are not met (for example, when the jackpot judgment is unsuccessful, or when the predetermined performance judgment is unsuccessful) In this case, even if the performance is accepted within the special operation reception performance, the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" is not performed, compared to the case where the predetermined performance conditions are satisfied (FIG. 209). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short be performed in a different performance mode.

According to such a configuration, even if a special operation reception performance occurs, if the predetermined performance conditions are not met, the execution state will continue until a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives. ``operation-induced processing using the first effect member that is performed'' and ``operation-induced processing using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value''. Since the content of the performance will be the same as the operation reception performance where only one of them is executed (the first and second operation reception performance), by creating such a performance risk, the tension will be reduced when the special operation reception performance occurs. It becomes possible to maintain a good feeling. In this sense, in the special operation reception performance, there are "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "processing caused by the operation using the first performance member that continues from the timing when the performance is accepted". When a post-operation effect is executed in parallel with "operation-induced processing using a second effect member that continues until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value," the first operation reception effect and the second operation It is desirable that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing in the reception performance is higher than when the post-operation performance appears.

However, even if you operate within the special operation reception performance, this may not be detected properly (detection error) and the performance reception may not be performed, and as a result, the validity period ends without the performance reception being performed. When something like this happens, a player who sees that the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" is not performed even after performing an operation may misunderstand that the operation reception performance is only executed on one side. As a result, there is a concern that interest in gaming will decline. Therefore, as mentioned above, for the special operation reception performance, even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the validity period, "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues to be executed until the specified timing arrives," and "operation-induced processing that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value." 2. It is desirable that the "operation-induced processing using a presentation member" be executed. As a method for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a presentation mode related thereto, it is possible to use any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, or furthermore, the contents described in the notes. .

In the above explanation example, when the first operation reception performance, the second operation reception performance, and the special operation reception performance occur, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the performance reception is permitted is outputted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the reception permission sound output when the special operation reception performance is generated is changed to the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance. This sound is used as a performance sound that can continue to be played for a longer period of time than the acceptance permission sound that is output when the performance occurs.

According to such a configuration, when the performance reception is allowed (when an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated or a gauge display showing how much valid time remains) is displayed. By checking how long the reception permission sound that is set to the output state continues, the operation reception performance can be changed to "the first state in which the execution state continues until a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives." ``operation-induced processing using a presentation member'' and ``operation-induced processing using a second presentation member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the presentation is accepted reaches a predetermined time value'' are executed, respectively. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception performance. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the performance is accepted). Therefore, by the time the player recognizes whether or not the operation reception performance is a "special operation reception performance", there arises a disadvantage that the strategic nature of the performance that can be selected by the player is narrowed down.

However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception performance, it is important to maintain some level of strategic performance. Therefore, regarding the output time (timings tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the reception permission sound that is output when the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance occurs, the “predetermined period as the special operation reception performance (valid period) It is desirable that the output is set to a non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the set time (timings tr21 to tr23) has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the acceptance permission sound is set to a non-output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation acceptance performance (valid period)" has elapsed. If the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception performance is being executed. It is now possible to provide strategic performance with more than half of the time remaining from the timings tr21 to tr23).

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception acceptance sound that is output when the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance is generated is not accepted when the reception permission sound is in the output state. Even if the output state is maintained, the reception permission sound that is output when the special operation reception performance occurs is forced to terminate the output state if the reception is accepted while it is in that output state. I have to. In other words, in this case, when the performance is accepted in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception performance (in a situation where the above specified time has not elapsed since the reception permission sound was output), the operation reception performance is An important point of interest is whether the operation reception performance was a "special operation reception performance" or whether a more highly expected form appeared as a post-operation performance. This can be easily recognized by simply checking whether or not the output state of the acceptance permission sound has been terminated with the production acceptance as an opportunity. For example, even if you recognize that the output state of the acceptance permission sound has not ended and as a result, the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance has occurred, you may change your mind and say, People are now expected to focus on whether a high-level aspect has emerged. In this case, the production is designed so that when a more highly anticipated mode appears as a post-operation production, the proportion of new special operation reception production increases until the symbol is stopped. This is desirable.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the first operation reception performance, second operation reception performance, and special operation reception performance, an image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception performance and the effective time are displayed. An operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate by displaying a gauge indicating whether there are any remaining players. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception performance, when the performance is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives. ``operation-induced processing using the production member'' and ``operation-induced processing using the second production member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the production is accepted reaches a predetermined time value'' are started, respectively. This is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the timing within the validity period at which the performance was accepted based on the remaining amount of the gauge left as a display after the performance is accepted. This makes it possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first performance member will end soon. Note that as a method for starting the post-operation performance while leaving the gauge display (bar display) as described above, it is possible to use any one of the above-mentioned or below-mentioned examples, or an appropriate combination.

In the special operation reception performance, it is possible to perform the operation immediately after the special operation reception performance occurs by executing an operation-related display (precursor performance) that suggests the occurrence of the performance even before the performance reception is allowed. It is desirable to tighten it. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player can suitably enjoy the strategic nature of the performance over the entire period within the special operation reception performance (validity period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception performance and the second operation reception performance, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (precursor performance) that suggests the occurrence of the performance even before the performance reception is permitted. , Regarding the operation-related display, it is recommended that it be executed as a ``short-term precursor effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function'', which will reduce transient expectations compared to the case where a special operation reception effect with high expectations occurs. This is desirable in order to prevent them from having it.

Here, the operation-related display (a short-time precursory performance lacking a timing suggestion function) performed on the performance display device 1600 before the validity period of the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance occurs is as follows: For example, it is possible to realize an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white image) when an "image display imitating the operating means" is made to appear in a fade-in manner.

FIG. 210 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to operation-related display when the first operation reception performance and the second operation reception performance are performed, and the processing related to channel assignment of sound data including reception permissible sound. be.

In other words, from an ergonomic point of view, simply displaying the suggestion image (operation-related display) several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the occurrence of the effective period is enough to prevent the occurrence of the effective period from occurring. It is known that it is possible to perform an operation such that a presentation is accepted at an unexpected timing. However, even if it is just a few frames, if the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the validity period has not occurred, the "operating means There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the presentation is not accepted even though the player operates the game while the "image display imitating" is displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the timing trA arrives several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception performance and the second operation reception performance occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the operation, but in a situation where the validity period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

More specifically, at the timing trA, an "acceptable image" that can be realized as a fade-in image in which "an image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, or a predetermined effect image, etc. "Previous operation related display" is started. Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "pre-permissible operation related display" is being displayed, the "image imitating the operating means" is changed from the state where the "pre-permissible operation related display" is displayed. "display" will be shifted to a state where it is displayed in the normal mode.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the validity period occurs, an acceptance permission sound is output that indicates that the production acceptance is permitted. As for this acceptance permission sound, as shown in FIG. 210, the output is not started at timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

In other words, in order to make it possible to perform an operation so that the production reception is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the acceptance permission sound should also be output several frames before the validity period occurs. It may be desirable to do so. However, if the acceptance permission sound is output several frames before the validity period occurs, the output timing may deviate from the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operation means". As a result, the player may feel as if the sound is out of sync, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a pre-acceptance operation related sound that is different from the acceptance acceptance sound. However, if the pre-acceptable operation-related sound is output in such a short period of time, the pre-acceptable operation-related sound may be heard integrated with the accepted acceptance sound, rather than as an independent production sound. In the end, there is a concern that this may create an unnatural feeling as if the sound is out of sync.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before the validity period of the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance occurs, the operation related display (operation related display before permission) is displayed for several frames. On the other hand, the operation-related sound (pre-acceptable operation-related sound) is intentionally not executed, and the acceptance permission sound is only output when the validity period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, based on the arrival of timing tr1, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" is assigned to the channel, thereby causing the acceptance acceptable sound to be output.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" itself may continue to be assigned to a channel even after timing tr2. For example, the state of assignment to a channel may continue until timing tr3 arrives. You may also do so. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" within the sound data ends at timing tr2.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 210, when a production is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 and tr12), the state in which the production is accepted is terminated, and the display of an image simulating the operating means is terminated. ” is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the acceptable sound", the assignment state to the channel is maintained, and as mentioned above, the acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle.

FIG. 211 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing related to operation-related display when a special operation reception performance is performed and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including reception permissible sound.

As shown in FIG. 211, also in the special operation acceptance performance, the operation related display (pre-permission operation related display) is performed from the time when the timing trB, which is earlier than the timing tr21 at which the validity period occurs, arrives. However, the "period from timing trB to tr21" has a length more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the "period from timing trA to tr1" shown in FIG. The display related to the permissible pre-operation shown in As suggested, any one of a plurality of performance modes can be selectively appeared. Note that in a situation where the validity period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal mode, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 210.

For example, the "pre-permissible operation-related display" that starts at timing trB is different in content from the "pre-permissible operation-related display" shown in FIG. A foreshadowing effect with a slight storyline, such as repeatedly moving and displaying multiple effect images toward a location displayed at timing tr21) and hiding them at that location (explained with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184) Any aspect of the ``specific operation-related effects'' described above may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of aspects can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of these aspects is displayed. Then, when the above-mentioned timing tr21 arrives while the "pre-permissible operation-related display" is being displayed, the "image display imitating the operating means" changes from the state in which the "pre-permissible operation-related display" is displayed to the normal mode. It will be moved to the displayed state.

In this regard, in the special operation reception performance, as mentioned above, when the validity period occurs, a reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception is permitted is output. As for the sound, as shown in FIG. 211, it is output from timing tr21 as a performance sound played in a partial section of the sound data assigned to the channel at timing trB.

In other words, as mentioned above, in the special operation reception performance, the time required before the effective period occurs is significantly longer than the ``minimum ergonomically necessary time to enable operation immediately after the effective period occurs.'' A long period of time (timings trB to tr21) is used to display a highly effective pre-permission operation display. Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance during such a performance period (timings trB to tr21), it is necessary to output a performance sound (sound related to a pre-permissible operation) that matches the "pre-permissible operation-related display" displayed within the same period. It is desirable that the In addition, since the production period (timings trB to tr21) is long enough to perform the production, even if the production sound (sound related to the pre-acceptable operation) is output within the period, the reception is still acceptable. There is no possibility of any inconvenience caused by the sound being heard as a sound integrated with the sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, a display related to the pre-allowed operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a sound related to the pre-allowed operation is outputted, and these output states are changed to the timing tr21. I'm trying to keep it going until then. Then, when timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "pre-permissible operation related display" is displayed is shifted to the state in which the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-permissible operation related display" is displayed in the normal mode. A transition is made from a state in which a "sound" is output to a state in which a "reception acceptance sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, based on the arrival of timing trB, one piece of sound data including the playback section of "pre-permission operation related sound" and the playback section of "acceptance permissible sound" is transmitted to the channel. By allocating to the above, the above-mentioned effect sound output during the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception performance, the reception permission sound that is output when the validity period occurs is a part of the sound data that is assigned to the channel from the precursor performance to the special operation reception performance. It will be output as a performance sound that will be played during the period. In other words, in this case, just by assigning one sound data to a channel before the special operation acceptance performance occurs (such as when a precursor performance occurs), the first half is a performance corresponding to the precursor performance (display related to the operation before being allowed). By playing a sound (sound related to pre-acceptable operation), it is possible to indicate the timing when a special operation reception performance will occur, and after the validity period occurs, the channel assignment will be done based on the reception of the performance. Since the special operation reception performance can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation reception performance has been executed even after the performance has been accepted. In addition, as an output method for "one sound data" that includes the playback section of the "pre-acceptable operation related sound" and the playback section of the "acceptance permissible sound", first, the expectation level (when the pattern fluctuation is stopped) is After preparing multiple pieces of sound data with different ratios of jackpot symbols appearing, any one of these sound data (single sound data) is used as the result of jackpot judgment (or performance judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-mentioned effect sound output during the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating channels based on this. In this case, for the multiple sound data, the same effect sound is output in the playback section of "pre-acceptable operation related sound (pronouncement effect)", but different sound effect is output in the playback section of "acceptable reception sound (operation reception effect)" It is more desirable that first sound data and second sound data configured to output performance sounds are included.

That is, in the special operation acceptance performance, if the performance is accepted between timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the performance acceptance is permitted is ended, and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition to this, we also terminate the assignment state for the channel for "sound data that includes acceptable sounds", so that the output related to accepted acceptable sounds will not be forcibly terminated in the middle of the process. As mentioned above. Therefore, by checking whether the reception permissible sound is forcibly turned off when the performance is accepted, the player can be informed that the special operation reception performance has been executed even after the performance has been accepted. be able to recognize it.

In addition, even if it is one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half) of the production sound (sound related to pre-permission operation) corresponding to the precursor production (display related to pre-permission operation) is in the playback state. In this situation (timings trB to tr21), even if the player performs an operation, this will not be forcibly terminated. The allocation state for the channel is canceled based on the player's operation only in a situation (timing tr21 to tr22) where the section (second half) of the production sound (acceptance permissible sound) corresponding to the valid period is in the playback state. becomes.

The one sound data (sound data including the pre-permission operation related sound and the reception permissible sound) is allocated before timing trB and is already in the allocated state at timing trB. Good too. Further, as described above, the state of channel allocation may be continued after timing tr22, for example, the state of channel allocation may be continued until timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data ends at timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel is terminated, so that the acceptance acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" itself may continue to be assigned to a channel even after timing tr2. For example, the state of assignment to a channel may continue until timing tr3 arrives. You may also do so. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" within the sound data ends at timing tr2.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, "a plurality of reception permissible sounds whose output states are maintained for different lengths" are prepared as reception permissible sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation reception performance, and when the performance is accepted. Different acceptance permission sounds are generated between a special operation reception performance and a first operation reception performance (or a second operation reception performance) in which the post-operation performance is different. Therefore, if you check how long the output state of the reception permissible sound continues, although there is a disadvantage that the above-mentioned performance strategy will be narrowed down, the special operation reception performance and the first operation reception performance (or the first operation reception performance) It becomes possible to recognize which one (2) (operation reception effect) is occurring.

In addition, the plurality of reception permissible sounds include a first reception permissible sound (special operation reception performance) whose output state ends when the player's operation is accepted as a performance, and a first reception permissible sound (special operation reception performance) whose output state continues. A second reception permission sound (first and second operation reception effects) is included. Therefore, when an operation is performed so that the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the special operation reception can be performed by checking whether the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the performance and the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance) is occurring.

However, the acceptance permissible sound is originally something that should be in a non-output state when the valid period ends, and it is possible that the output state is maintained when the production starts after the operation. If there is, it may interfere with the performance. In this regard, in the above explanation example, the reception production sound whose output state is terminated when the production reception is made is changed to the first acceptance production sound whose output state is maintained for a relatively long time setting ( It is used as a special operation reception performance).

In other words, in this case, when the production is accepted in the output state of "the second reception permissible sound for which the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively short", that output state will be maintained. However, since the time setting value for which the output state of the second acceptance permission sound is maintained is short in the first place, it will soon be set to a non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely to interfere with the performance. On the other hand, when the production is accepted in the output state of "the first acceptance permissible sound for which the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting for which the output state is maintained Even if the value remains, its output state is terminated, so it no longer interferes with the performance.

Furthermore, by checking how long the output state of the acceptance permission sound continues, it is possible to recognize whether the special operation reception performance or the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance) is occurring. Even if there is a player who attempts to do so, if the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is maintained after the time set value for the second acceptance acceptance sound has elapsed, the first acceptance acceptance sound will be used instead of the second acceptance acceptance sound. It is possible to predict that there will be a situation where . In this regard, without confirming that the output state of the first reception permissible sound is terminated, by checking how the first reception permissible sound is set to a non-output state when the production reception is generated, It becomes possible to check at an early stage whether the prediction that a special operation reception performance is occurring is correct.

Furthermore, in the configurations shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the validity period of the operation reception effect occurs, a pre-permission operation-related display indicating that the validity period will soon occur is displayed, but before the permissible operation The operation-related displays include a first pre-allowable operation-related display with a short display time (see FIG. 210) and a second pre-allowable operation-related display with a long display time (see FIG. 211). In this regard, when the first permissible pre-operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data that includes the acceptance permissible sound" is not assigned to the channel, and the "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" is unassigned to the channel and By assigning "sound data including the acceptable sound" to the channel, the acceptable sound is outputted. In other words, in this case, although the production sound corresponding to the first permissible pre-operation related display is not output, it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation from the time of the validity period without causing an unnatural feeling as if the sound is out of sync. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second pre-permissible operation-related display with a long display time is performed, "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" is sent to the channel from the moment the second pre-permissible operation-related display is performed. The reception permission sound is brought into the output state by setting it in the allocation state and making the reproduction section of the reception permission sound arrive at the timing when the validity period occurs. According to such a configuration, just by assigning one sound data to a channel before the special operation acceptance performance occurs (such as when a precursor performance occurs), the first half is a precursor performance (display related to the operation before being allowed). Not only will it be possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception performance by playing a production sound (sound related to the pre-acceptable operation) according to the operation, but after the validity period has occurred, the performance will be changed based on the production reception. Since the channel assignment can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance performance has been executed even after the performance has been accepted.

That is, in the pre-permissible operation-related display shown in FIG. 211, a corresponding pre-permissible operation-related sound is output, and when the validity period occurs, an acceptance permission sound is further output, but the pre-permissible operation-related display shown in FIG. 210 In the display, a corresponding pre-acceptance operation related sound is not output, and an acceptance acceptance sound is output when the validity period expires.

In the above explanation examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, the effect display device 1600, a speaker, a effect lamp, a movable decoration, etc. can be used as the "effect member." Further, as the "first effect member", it is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, a speaker, a effect lamp, and a movable decorative body, and as the "second effect member", It is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decoration that is different from the "first effect member."

Furthermore, in the above explanation example, the operating means to be operated in the special operation reception performance and the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance) do not necessarily have to be the same, and may be different. When the operating means to be operated are different, the sample images displayed within each validity period will be different.

In the first operation reception performance, we decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" as a post-operation performance. "Operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues in the execution state until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "Execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" may be executed as post-operation performance. Further, an operation-induced process using a performance member different from the first performance member and the second performance member may be further executed, but in the post-operation performance according to the first operation reception performance, any operation The originating process is also executed with the execution state continuing until a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception performance, "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of the performance reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as a post-operation performance. However, "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the performance is accepted reaches a predetermined time value" and "the predetermined timing within the performance pattern has arrived" "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that continues to be executed until the operation is performed" may be executed as a post-operation performance. Further, an operation-induced process using a performance member different from the first performance member and the second performance member may be further executed, but in the post-operation performance according to the second operation reception performance, any operation The attribution process will also be executed as if it were to continue until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect was accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

In the special operation reception performance, "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "the elapsed time from the timing at which the performance was accepted" are performed in advance. It was decided to perform "operation-induced processing using a second performance member that continues until a predetermined time value is reached" as a post-operation performance, but a performance member different from the first performance member and the second performance member was used. The used operation-induced process may be further executed. In the special operation reception performance, there is an operation-induced process that is executed as if the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, and a predetermined time elapsed from the timing when the performance was accepted. It may be any combination of operation-induced processing that is continued until the value is reached.

Furthermore, in the above explanation examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, the validity period of the special operation reception performance is set as a time value longer than the validity period of the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance). I try to do that. By setting a long time in this way, it becomes possible to enjoy the effective period with the above-mentioned strategic effect.

The first permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 210), which has a short display time, shows "the level of expectation regarding whether the post-operation performance that will be performed when the performance is accepted will be performed in a highly expected manner" or "the jackpot. However, in the second permissible pre-operation related display (see Figure 211), which has a long display time, the expectation level for the appearance of the symbol is not suggested. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be played in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear."

In the "validity period of special operation reception performance" which is set as a relatively long time value, by making one of multiple display modes with different expectations appear, "after the operation performed when the performance reception is performed" It is desirable to be able to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether the performance will be performed in a highly expected manner or the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear.

In addition, in the special operation reception performance, no matter when the performance is accepted within the effective period, "the performance by the first performance member that occurs due to the reception of the performance" is "the performance caused by the reception of the performance". In order to make the player recognize that the performance content is the same as the post-operation performance, it is possible to have a relationship in which the execution state ends earlier than "the production by the second production member that occurs". desirable.

In the above explanation example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception performance, the second operation reception performance, and the special operation reception performance based on the establishment of different performance conditions. However, if the first operation reception performance is not installed, this will not occur, and the second operation reception performance and the special operation reception performance may be generated based on the establishment of different performance conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception performance may be not installed so that this does not occur, and the first operation reception performance and the special operation reception performance may be generated based on the establishment of different performance conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception performance and the second operation reception performance may be not installed so that they do not occur, and the special operation reception performance may be generated based on the establishment of predetermined performance conditions. .

The special operation reception performance shown in the above explanation example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211 outputs specific performance sound data (for example, BGM performance sound data) assigned to a channel in a suppressed mode or in silence. Among them, a state may be generated in which reception of the production is permitted.

[More detailed performance regarding acceptable reception sounds]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected effect (preliminary effect) regarding the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object effect). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which the performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect occurs is made to differ in form depending on the result of the effect determination, and as a result, the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the percentage of winnings and the percentage of jackpot symbols being stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, Even if a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is met), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the operation acceptance production (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception performance (validity period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, there is a variation pattern other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern". It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing is not included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect element that is the target of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). The operation only executes a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration). The reception performance (validity period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception performance,
・During the execution period of the symbol production (production pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of a low-expectation non-suppression reception performance that provides operation opportunities while being output, or a symbol performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is Is the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" suppressed or output without sound, or is in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which audible sound is recorded among the sound data has ended, or whether the channel assignment It is possible at least to generate a high-expectation suppression reception performance that provides an opportunity for operation even when the application has been terminated).

In such a configuration, when providing an operation opportunity, there are two cases in which the output of "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is maintained in a non-suppressed mode (low expectation non-suppressed reception performance), and a case in which "BGM playback (specific type of sound performance)" (Specific type of production sound)" may be suppressed or output silently or in a non-output state (suppression operation reception production). Since the percentage of winning the jackpot (expectation level) will differ depending on the performance (high expectation suppression reception performance), the performance when the operation opportunity is granted (the high expectation suppression reception performance) will be different. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest by controlling whether BGM playback (specific types of performance sounds) is suppressed or not.

However, in the high expectation suppression reception performance, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or without sound, so compared to the low expectation non-suppression reception performance. There is concern that the performance will be poor.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception performance is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception performance is generated is changed to the reception permissible sound. It is possible to output it as . Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of performance when the high expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the reception permissible sound output when the high expectation suppression reception performance occurs is set to be higher than the reception permissibility sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception performance occurs. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained over a long period of time, and thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the performance from becoming poor when the high expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception performance, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed mode, silently, or in a non-output state. There is also the aspect that when a post-effect occurs, it becomes possible to make the effect sound that corresponds to it stand out, and in this respect it can be said to be beneficial in improving the interest of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, regarding the acceptance permission sound that is output when the high expectation suppression reception presentation occurs, the presentation is accepted when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the acceptance of the production. Thereby, it becomes possible to highlight the performance sound according to the post-operation performance without being interfered with by the reception permissible sound.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception performance is defined as "If no operation is detected within the set time in which the performance reception is allowed, the set time ends without generating the post-operation performance. Not only can this be generated by a non-automatic reception mode in which a production is performed, but also an automatic reception mode in which a production can be generated after an operation even if no operation is detected within the set time in which production reception is allowed. This can also occur due to

In other words, when the operation reception performance is generated in an automatic reception mode, even if no operation is detected within the set time period in which the reception of the performance is allowed, the same post-operation performance as when the operation was detected will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and as a result cannot confirm the performance after the operation. However, as will be explained later, more strictly speaking, the output time for the performance sound in the post-operation performance is the same as when the operation was detected, but the output time for the LCD display in the post-operation performance is the same as when the operation was detected. It is now shorter than when it was originally created.

In addition, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception performance) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if no operation is detected, a performance reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is enabled). Then, the post-operation performance is executed based on the automatically generated performance reception. In other words, in this case, since the performance reception will always occur by the time the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the performance reception will not be accepted within the set time after the specific timing. As a result, the length of the valid period during which performance reception is allowed will be substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the performance is started after the operation after the set time has ended, the activation of such an automatic button function does not cause a delay in the performance, and on the contrary, it accelerates the performance tempo. It becomes possible to realize it.

In addition, if the automatic button function is activated within the set time in this way, you will essentially lose the opportunity to operate it even though the set time has not yet passed. It is expected that players will be afraid of this and will actively perform operations at an earlier stage within the set time, or play games with a sense of tension over the performance.

In addition, in order to obtain these effects, the "gauge display of how much effective time remains" displayed on the performance display device 1600 should be adjusted until the specific timing when the automatic button function is activated. It is preferable that the display not indicate the remaining time, but rather indicate the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, the performance reception will always be performed before the remaining time on the gauge display reaches "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation reception performance is performed in the non-automatic reception mode as well as in the operation reception performance performed in the automatic reception mode, when the operation reception performance is generated, It is possible to output a reception permission sound indicating that the state is such that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which a performance reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to perform an operation, and a situation in which the performance reception cannot be generated by the user's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception effect executed in an automatic reception mode occurs, a specific information that is not output when an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode occurs. Since the sound can be output as the above reception permissible sound, by checking the type of reception permissible sound, an operation reception effect that is executed in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode will occur. You will be able to recognize that there are

On the other hand, in the post-operation performance, there is usually a risk that the performance will be performed in a manner with low expectations, so it is not necessarily a good idea to operate so that the post-operation performance is performed in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. There is also the aspect that there is no limit. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception permission sound is output for a sufficient period of time to indicate that the performance reception is permitted, the reception permission sound in the output state is output. By ending the process relatively early, it is possible to create ``time to consider whether or not to generate a performance reception'' while the reception permission sound is not being output.

However, if the reception permissible sound were to end early even in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, there is a concern that it would lead to a misunderstanding that "the reception is no longer permitted due to the automatic button functioning". arise. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the reception permission sound is maintained for a relatively long time, so that the automatic button is not yet functioning and the performance reception is permitted. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the automatic button while giving a sense of security that the automatic button is not yet functioning.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is outputted in a suppressed mode, silently, or in a non-output state as the operation reception performance. A suppression reception performance (in this case, high expectation suppression reception performance) that provides an opportunity to operate while the user is in the room, and an opportunity to operate while “BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)” is output in a non-suppression mode A state in which a non-suppressed reception performance (here, a low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance) is allowed to occur in an automatic reception mode or a non-automatic reception mode, or a state in which a production reception is allowed, or a production reception The technical feature lies in the fact that the reception permissible sounds that indicate that the system is in a permissible state are generated in a manner that further enhances their unique performance.

These technical features will be explained below. In order to explain the technical features, I would like to explain the "acceptance permissible sound" again. The output starts within the set time and indicates that the production reception is allowed, or the output starts before the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed. For example, it is output as a sound effect such as "pikin". However, if the output state is set before the set time when production reception is allowed occurs, the output state of the "acceptance permissible sound" must be maintained across the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (during the period in which production reception is permitted), and the time from when the "reception permissible sound" is set to the output state until the set time occurs is It is desirable to set the time so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptance permission sound" is longer. In this sense, "acceptable sound" is something that can be output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in the output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can also be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by a player or as the output time elapses.

Furthermore, the "acceptance permissible sound" may be output by being assigned to a channel as independent performance sound data (see FIG. 210), or may be output using other performance sounds (for example, set time ) that is assigned to a channel and output as a single performance sound data, such as a precursory effect that is executed before the occurrence of the ``specific operation-related effect,'' etc.) (see FIG. 211), and the implementation method may be adopted as appropriate.

FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception performance is executed in a non-automatic reception mode.

Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (pending completion), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, the "predetermined fluctuation pattern" among the "low expected fluctuation patterns that do not even form a reach state" If the "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. After this, a variation production of the decorative pattern (production depiction according to a predetermined variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to a predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a preview production is performed within the execution period of the variation production. A performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) according to the selected "predetermined variation pattern". In addition, including each production example explained below, production pattern judgment (sub control side) is performed based on the result of fluctuation pattern judgment (main control side), and preview judgment (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the production pattern judgment. (control side), regarding the processing related to the preview performance, the "fluctuation pattern determination" may be replaced with the "performance pattern determination" and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with the "performance pattern".

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to a predetermined variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a variation effect of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 212(b). When a timing tr32 arrives at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, an operation acceptance performance (valid period) is generated in which the performance reception is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation acceptance performance (validity period) that occurs during the execution period of the performance related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern),
・“Non-suppressing reception performance (Fig. 212(a), (b))" and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which presentation reception is allowed, the relevant presentation will not occur after the operation. “Non-automatic reception mode (see Figure 212(j))” where the set time ends
It is made to occur as a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the production (production pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the "background music playback sound" is suppressed, thereby preventing the occurrence of the operation acceptance production. Since the set time (validity period) during which presentation reception is allowed is suddenly set without any presentational effects such as suggestions (non-suppressive reception presentation), it can be a surprise from the player's perspective. This results in a sagging shape, which tends to cause a delay in the start of movement when trying to operate it. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). By making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to produce a performance after an operation, it is possible to appropriately create a sense of tension during the execution period of a performance (performance pattern) related to a low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern). be able to maintain it.

However, although it is executed as such a "non-suppressing/non-automatic reception performance", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) ends without the post-operation performance occurring, against the player's will. If such occurrences occur frequently, there is a concern that interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The output of the "acceptance acceptance sound" is started when timing tr31 arrives a little earlier, and the output state is maintained across timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is allowed at timing tr31, which is a little before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, It is expected that it will be less likely to occur frequently that the set time period (timings tr32 to tr33) ends without any effect occurring. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) occurs; It may also be generated by

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Push!" and "Push!" are used as "acceptable sound". and a second permissible sound that is output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 212(d) and (h), in the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output, and even with the output restriction on the "reception permissible sound", it is difficult to play the game. This makes it easy for a person to experience a delay at the start of movement when attempting to operate the device.

By the way, during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the setting time (validity period) being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic reception mode, It is thought that some players may try not to miss an opportunity to generate a post-operation performance by repeatedly hitting the operating means (in this case, the operation button 410) even when the performance reception is not permitted. It will be done. However, in this case, since the post-operation performance will start immediately after the reception of the production is accepted, the started production is "the one that is being performed in response to the production reception (post-operation production)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether the game is actually a preview performance that is not related to the reception of the performance, or whether the performance is automatically generated as a mere preview performance unrelated to the reception of the performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly, FIG. 212(c)), in the low-expectation non-suppression reception performance, the "acceptance permission sound (first permission sound)" is emitted after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production is accepted at timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is ended, but the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not ended prematurely, and the first permissible sound is not ended. The output state is maintained until the timing when it finishes outputting as 1 permissible sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (Fig. 212 (g)). As a result, the started production is changed to "In response to production reception". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes difficult to recognize whether the event is being performed (post-operation performance) or whether it is automatically generated as a mere preview performance unrelated to the reception of the performance. become able to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, when the production is accepted within the set time (validity period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the production display device 1600 (the At least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tr33. In contrast, the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, no matter at which timing the production is accepted, if the timing tr33 has not yet elapsed, both the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation production sound output (production sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

In the production example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (validity period) is set arrives, the production display device 1600 displays the operation means to be operated in the low expectation non-suppression reception production. The simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed. For example, it is possible to adopt the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) as a display method for the sample image and gauge display, and these display images (sample image, gauge display) can be displayed according to the occurrence of production reception. (both are hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a "special performance mode (automatic button performance state)" that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception performances for which operation instructions are given. Alternatively, it may be possible to set and cancel the setting of a "special performance mode" through an operation by the player. In other words, in this case, even if the operation reception performance occurs during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), when the "special performance mode" is set, , it is a "non-suppressing reception performance" and will be executed in the "automatic reception mode" described above, and only when the "special performance mode" is not set, the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance" is performed. This will occur as follows. However, in the specification (in particular, ``More detailed presentation of permissible reception sounds'' and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, the ``special presentation mode'' is not set. This is an example of a performance when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a "special performance mode."

FIGS. 213 and 214 are time charts showing an example of the content of the performance when the high expectation suppression reception performance is executed in an automatic reception mode.

Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability change/non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, there is a high expectation that it will develop into SP reach (reach performance with background change, etc.) If a ``specific variation pattern'' is selected from among the ``variation patterns,'' the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After this, a variation production of the decorative pattern (production depiction according to a specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to a specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and production judgment is made within the execution period of the variation production. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) related to the selected "specific variation pattern".

However, as mentioned above, in the performance (performance pattern) related to the "specific variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (notice judgment), as shown in FIG. 213(b), Then, when a timing tr42 (timing within the SP ready-to-read state) arrives at which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols, an operation reception performance (valid period) is generated in which performance reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation acceptance performance (validity period) generated at timing tr42 within a specific fluctuation pattern,
・“Suppression reception performance” (Figure 213 (a) , (b))" and - Even if no operation is detected on the operating means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which presentation reception is allowed, When timing tr42A within the set time arrives, a production reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the production is started after the operation based on the reception of the production. aspect (see Figure 213(j))”
It is made to occur as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by. Note that methods for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a suppressed mode or in silence include a method in which a silent section (suppression section) is set in advance in the data of the "BGM playback sound" itself, It is possible to adopt a method of changing the volume value for a channel to which "BGM playback sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), or a combination thereof. As will be described later, this "suppression/automatic reception performance" is also called the "second suppression operation reception performance", and the suppression mode here is also called the "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the performance (performance pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern), the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed. This is because a set time (validity period) is now set during which the production reception is allowed with a production that suggests the occurrence of the operation reception production by being output silently or silently (suppression reception From the player's perspective, it becomes easier for the player to perform the operation immediately after the operation reception performance occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect will automatically occur when timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that you will not miss the post-operation performance that occurs during the operation reception performance when expectations are high.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance", similarly to the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", FIGS. 213(b), (c), and (g) As shown in , when timing tr41 arrives, which is a little before the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) at which production reception is permitted, the output of the "acceptance permission sound" is started, and the output is made to straddle timing tr42. to maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound" is in a suppressed mode or in a state in which it is output without sound, a state will soon occur in which production reception is permitted at timing tr41. It is expected that this will make it less likely that ``a player's performance is accepted against the player's will by activating the automatic button function rather than by his/her own operation.'' Become so. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) occurs; for example, it may be generated in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time. You can do it like this.

However, regarding the timing tr40 at which the "BGM playback sound" is shifted from the state in which it is output in a non-suppressed mode to the state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or silently (or a state in which it is not output), the above-mentioned effect will be applied. In order to suitably obtain the effect (suppression reception performance), as shown in FIGS. 213(a) to 213(c), a relationship such as "length of timing tr40 to tr41>length of timing tr41 to tr42" is established. It can be said that it is important to set it so that it arrives well before the "output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound that occurs in advance of the set time" so as to maintain the same effect.

Furthermore, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213(c), (d), (g), and (h), '', the "acceptance acceptable sound" includes not only the first acceptable sound that is output as a sound effect such as ``Pikin!'' but also the second acceptable sound that is output as a message sound such as ``Push!'' The output is also started when timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained across timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, the performance display device 1600 indicates which of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) of the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that the image of the operation device to be operated can be recognized even when it is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), immediately after the operation reception performance occurs. This makes it easier to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the preview performance determination. When the operation button 410 is selected, a message sound such as "Press!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound).

Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 213, the output of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started at the same time, but the timings at which the output of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started are made to differ from each other. It is also possible to sequentially put the output state into the output state. In this case, output of only one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound may be started from a state where the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 213(g) and (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the production sound that is output for a relatively short period of time, and the "second permissible sound" is adopted as a performance sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as for the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound", as shown in FIGS. 213(g) and (h), the output state shall be maintained for different times, and the output It is desirable that the times at which the state is ended (the times at which the state is made inaudible) occur at different timings before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance permissible sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated arrives. It is expected that this will make it less likely that ``a performance is accepted against the player's will by activating an automatic button function rather than by the player's own operation''.
- A first situation in which both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintain their output states. - The output state of one of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" is maintained. but the other has finished its output state (has been rendered inaudible). ・Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" have finished their output state. Third situation (made inaudible)

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. 212 and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikin!") is outputted as the "first permissible sound". In other words, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "non-suppressing/non-automatic reception performance", but the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is Regarding the first permissible sound), it can be output as a production sound even in "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production", so when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed. While suitably maintaining performance (second permissible sound), it becomes easier to recognize that the performance reception is permitted (first permissible sound).

Note that the timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) in the case where the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is outputted in advance of the set time (valid period) or the display of the sample image The time may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of two or more frames. In other words, if the output can be made even a little in advance of the set time (validity period) or the display of the sample image, the player will be able to understand that the performance is in a state where acceptance is permitted, and that the operation means that is the target of operation can be output. Since there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which one is earlier by the preceding time, it is possible to recognize which one is earlier by the preceding time. It is expected to prevent people from forgetting to perform operations during the period until the arrival of the device.

By the way, as mentioned above, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost even within the set time (validity period) due to the automatic button function being activated (timing tr42A). It is. Therefore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213(c) and 213(d), unlike the production example shown in FIG. 212(c), the acceptance acceptable sound (at least one of the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound If a production is accepted while the output mode is in the output state, the output state is ended based on the reception of the production. In other words, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that point, and as a result, the state in which production reception is permissible ( Since it will be possible to recognize that the period of validity (validity period) has ended, "a state in which the production reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function may be activated (a state in which the opportunity to operate may be lost)" It will be possible to avoid misunderstandings that may occur. In addition, if the operation is performed and the production is accepted at a timing before the automatic button function activation timing tr42A within the set time (validity period), the production will be started at the time when the production is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if timing tr42A arrives, since the state in which reception is permitted is now terminated.

Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, when the production is accepted within the set time (validity period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the production display device 1600 ( At least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), no matter when the effect is accepted within the set time (validity period), it will be displayed at a specific timing that comes after timing tr43. While it is hidden (invisible), the post-operation production sound output (production sound) will remain output for a predetermined period of time from the timing when production reception is received. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 213, no matter when the production is accepted within the set time (validity period), the production sound output after operation (production sound) will be "BGM playback sound". '' is desirably set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 for returning the output from the suppressed state (silent state) to the non-suppressed mode has arrived. On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the example of effect shown in FIG. 213, the output state is ended at timing tr44 when the "BGM playback sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at timing tr44, both the "background music playback sound" is returned to output in a non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display performance is switched, so the performance is improved. It is expected that major changes will be made to improve gaming interest. Note that the "sound of BGM reproduction" may be gradually restored by a technique such as a fade-in when returning to output in a non-suppressed mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended not at timing tr44 but at a specific timing after timing tr44.

Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (validity period) is set arrives, the production display device 1600 displays the operation means to be operated in the high expectation suppression reception production. The simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed. In this regard, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "Press!") is output as the second permissible sound in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, the performance display device 1600 also performs the operation reception performance in the non-automatic reception mode. A message (for example, ``Press!'') that does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in is displayed. Note that as a display method for the sample image, gauge display, and message display, it is possible to adopt, for example, the method shown in FIG. will be hidden (both will be hidden at the same timing) at the stage where the set time has not yet finished based on the occurrence of presentation reception. The message display does not necessarily have to completely match the content of the message sound, and may be anything that prompts an operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213(g) to 213(i), the automatic button function within the set time (validity period) is The output state of the message sound ends (becomes inaudible state), while the message display maintains the display state even at timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. After the automatic button function is enabled, the button does not become hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 when the set time period ends. The display state may be maintained even after that. Note that the set time (validity period) ends when the performance is accepted, so in reality, it will end at the latest when the timing tr42A when the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, "timing tr43 at which the set time ends" strictly refers to the timing at which the set time ends if it were to continue, and refers to the time at which the set time ends at timing tr42. This is a timing that arrives after the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button function is activated and the production is accepted, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be prematurely terminated (inaudible state). , since the message display will no longer be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production will be accepted by detecting the operation on the operation target prompted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or message display. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that there is no such situation. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display, etc. is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that no performance reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception performance that is not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 212) and the operation reception performance that is executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 213). Within the set time (validity period), a remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the end of the state in which presentation reception is permitted can be performed. In the operation acceptance effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the end of the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when this time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception performance (FIG. 213) that is executed in the automatic button mode, if a specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without any operation being detected, the automatic button function is enabled and the performance reception is automatically performed. As described above, even if the set time has not yet elapsed, the performance reception is no longer permitted after the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Therefore, if a "remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state in which the performance reception is permitted" is to be performed within the set time of such an operation reception performance (Fig. 213), normally It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the arrival of the specific timing tr42A.

In this regard, in the operation acceptance performance (FIG. 213) that is executed in the automatic button mode in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the performance reception is not allowed after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A. However, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the end of the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0". However, here, before the set time reaches "0", the state is always changed to a state in which reception of the performance is not allowed, so reception of the performance is not allowed while the gauge amount remains. It will be transferred to the state.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button function is enabled and the performance is accepted, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention is not affected. On the other hand, it is now possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'', and this allows the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount in the next set time (valid period). You will be able to encourage them to do the following.

Moreover, in the operation reception performance (FIG. 213) that is executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the performance reception occurs due to operation detection, the remaining time is displayed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (invisible). On the other hand, when the production reception occurs due to activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not yet elapsed, and at least the corresponding setting Until the time has elapsed, a "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button function is activated and the performance is accepted, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that there is no situation in which the performance has been accepted by detecting an operation on the operation target that is prompted to operate by a message sound, a message display, etc. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display, etc. is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that no performance reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

As mentioned above, in the operation acceptance performance that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 213, based on the result of the advance notice performance determination, there are two options: ``When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target'' and ``When the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target.'' There is a ``case''. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is the target of operation after the set time (validity period) for which production reception is allowed occurs, the set time may be set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no "case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, regarding the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, setting it later than the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed after the set time (validity period) occurs is not enough for the player to operate against his will. This is desirable in order to prevent the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

In addition, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 213, if the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target remains in the incorrect operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable that the effect is accepted and the effect is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation arises in which the performance is not accepted despite operating the operating means, the player may become confused. Since it is cruel to request further operation of the operating means on the side, even if the incorrect operating state is maintained, the performance will be accepted when the operating means on the side that is the target of operation is operated. It is desirable to do so.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, it is possible to appropriately adopt the matters described in the above-mentioned "Suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 142)" and the description of other examples thereof. That is, in this case, timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the production example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the production example shown in FIG. 142, respectively. Become.

However, as mentioned above, in the suppression operation reception performance, when the operation opportunity is given, a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, so the performance is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception performance. There are concerns. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permissible sound output when the suppressing operation reception performance is generated is higher than the reception permissible sound output when the non-suppressing operation reception performance is generated. It is possible to output a sound that maintains its output state over a long period of time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (for example, multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are used as the first allowable sound. One of the plurality of modes is selectively outputted as the first permissible sound based on the result of the preview performance determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212(c), (g) and FIGS. ” is set as the shortest mode among the above plurality of modes. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of jackpot symbols appearing when symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is outputted in.

Note that "which of the multiple modes should be output as the first allowable sound" and "Which of the multiple operating means should be used as the operation target" are obtained as separate judgment results in the above preview performance judgment. Alternatively, it may be obtained as one determination result within the above-mentioned preview performance determination. However, for at least the above-mentioned first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first permissible condition applies regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to make it selectable as a sound. Furthermore, the second and third modes can also be selected in either case, whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. You can do it like this.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptance permission sound when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 214, this production example is basically the same as the above production example explained with reference to FIG. is the same. However, in this production example, as a result of the advance notice production determination, at timing tr41, the first permissible sound is output not in the first mode but in a second mode that is longer than the first mode. The difference is that here, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer period of time than that of the second permissible sound.

According to such a configuration, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the suppressing operation acceptance performance occurs is kept in the output state for a longer period of time than the acceptance permissible sound (first aspect) that is output when the non-suppressing operation reception performance occurs. Since it can be output as a sound that is maintained, the performance can be suitably maintained even in situations where "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is suppressed or output without sound when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in order to improve the performance of the suppression operation reception performance, for the first permissible sound output in the second mode, a sound that is not output as the reception permissible sound in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212 is used. It is desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 213 and 214, there are cases in which "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the case in which the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the preview performance determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target in both cases. Therefore, in this production example as well, the second permissible sound is output in the same manner as in the production example shown in FIG. 213 (for example, "Press!"). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Also, by making the output state of the first permissible sound end (inaudible state) before timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function can be activated even in this production example. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the acceptance permission sound.

In particular, in this production example, even after the output state of the "second permissible sound" which is also output in the production example shown in FIG. 213 ends, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained. By checking this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated arrives than in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 213. become. In addition, by making only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound output in a longer different form (second form), the player can first Estimate the "remaining time until timing tr42A arrives" based on the timing at which the output state of the second permissible sound ends, and, with a sense of security that you have made a normal guess, select the first permissible sound. Since it becomes possible to make more detailed guesses in a challenging manner by using this method, it is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 214, other matters are the same as in the production example shown in FIG. The point that the state is terminated midway is also similar to the case of the production example shown in FIG. 213.

In addition, if the high expectation suppression reception effect (Figures 213 and 214) occurs while the above-mentioned "special effect mode" is set, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated will be set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, the automatic button function can be activated by the player's will, so even if the automatic button function is activated and the performance is accepted, the message will not be displayed. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until timing tr43, and that it is hidden before timing tr43 (at the timing when the production is accepted or at a timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). In addition, in this case, regarding the timing at which the automatic button function is activated, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. When the first permissible sound is output in the output state, it is desirable that the first permissible sound, which is output in the second mode, is terminated midway.

Also, there are two cases in which the first permissible sound (sound effect as reception permissible sound) is output in the first manner and the case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as reception permissible sound) is output in the second manner. , not only the length of time that the output state is maintained may be different from each other, but also different effect sounds may be used. For example, when outputting the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) in the first mode, a production sound such as "pikin" is output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. In the case of outputting in a certain manner, it is possible to output a performance sound such as "gao-gao".

In the above explanation example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as "a fluctuation pattern that does not even form a reach state", but it is also defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which the symbol is stopped without becoming an SP reach state", and the low expected fluctuation pattern When a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the variation patterns, the effect example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed.

In addition, regarding the "suppression/automatic reception performance" exemplified in the above explanation example, it is desirable to prevent it from appearing in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the performance pattern corresponding to) during the normal gaming state. Regarding the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" illustrated in the explanation example, it can also appear in high-expectation fluctuation patterns (performance patterns corresponding to them), including the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" during the normal gaming state. . In other words, even if there is a high expected fluctuation pattern (the performance pattern corresponding to it), in the period before the performance progresses to the SP reach state, such as a non-reach state, basically the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the performance pattern) Since the performance that appears also in the performance pattern) is executed, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear within the period. Even with this configuration, when a "suppressed/automatic reception performance" appears (high expected fluctuation pattern), when a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" appears (low expected fluctuation pattern or high expected fluctuation pattern) It can be said that the situation is such that the ratio (expectation level) of a jackpot symbol appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

In addition, in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding performance pattern) that occurs during the normal gaming state, when giving the operation opportunity, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or without sound. It is desirable that the low-expectation, non-suppressed reception performance is not executed in an automatic reception mode. Note that this applies when the "special performance mode" is not set, or when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the "special performance mode".

In addition, regarding the length of time from "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated" to "timing tr43 when the set time has elapsed after the reception of the production is allowed", the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be one frame) or may be two or more frames. For example, the message display becomes visible at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated", and this visible state is made visible at least at "timing tr43 when the set time ends after the reception of the production is allowed". If it continues until the player arrives, it will be possible to indicate the original length of the set time (validity period), and there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize that the player did not perform an operation. You will be able to In the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception performance, a message sound (second allowable sound) or message display is set at the "timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time. It is desirable to output the above-mentioned relationships (see FIGS. 213(h) and (i) and FIGS. 214(h) and (i)).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 213(i) and FIG. 212(e), 213(e), etc.), due to the standardization of the program, it also appears when production reception occurs at other timings (e.g., Fig. 212(e), Fig. 213(e), etc.). The automatic button function may only occur when the automatic button function is enabled. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212(e), the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213(e), the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr42a. Become.

In addition, in the above explanation example (FIGS. 212 to 214), the display performance (liquid crystal display) after the operation on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the performance sound output (performance) after the operation by the speaker (second performance member) (sound) are started at the same time, but the effects may be performed after the operation so that the start timings of these effects are shifted. For example, in a situation where the speaker (second performance member) starts outputting a post-operation performance sound (performance sound) at timing tr42, the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) outputs a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is hidden (or the fade-out process is started) if it is not displayed yet. By starting this, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the display effects.

As explained above in "Operation sound output processing under suppression (FIG. 142)", in the production examples shown in FIGS. A presentation (for example, the above-mentioned "specific operation-related presentation") may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes in which the degree of expectation of the appearance of the jackpot symbol differs as the foreshadowing effect, and to perform the foreshadowing effect in one of these modes. Also, in this case, multiple modes are prepared for the omen effect sound to be output during the period when the omen effect is performed, and which of the multiple modes to output as the omen effect depends on the execution mode of the omen effect. It is desirable to make the selection based on the On the other hand, regarding the first allowable sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed while the sample image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display "Press!" It is to be output in one of a plurality of formats.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the operation reception production shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 occurs, the specific sound (the second Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the mode can be outputted as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to suitably suppress the performance from becoming poor when the suppression operation reception performance occurs. You will be able to do this. Furthermore, by checking the type of reception permissible sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the user is in a situation where an operation reception effect is occurring in an automatic reception mode rather than a non-automatic reception mode.

Furthermore, regarding the reception permissible sound of the non-suppressing operation reception performance (FIG. 212), there are a first permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a sound effect, and a second permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, whereas the permissible sound for the suppression operation reception performance (FIGS. 213 and 214) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. Both of the two permissible sounds are output. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

In addition, in the above example of production, when the same production sound is output as the first permissible sound in the non-suppression operation reception production (FIG. 212) and the suppression operation reception production (FIGS. 213 and 214) (FIGS. 212 and 213) ) and cases where a different effect sound is output as the first permissible sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

That is, if a different acceptance acceptance sound than normal is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the presentation acceptance is allowed, and the opportunity for operation may be lost. Therefore, while the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is normally output as well. This is desirable. Then, while the reception permissible sound is output in such a manner, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is also output as a production sound (second mode) that is not output in normal times with a predetermined probability, and at this time If the proportion (expectation level) of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when output in the first mode, it will be possible to recognize that the presentation reception is allowed, and "BGM playback (specific It is now possible to suitably maintain performance when the performance sound of the type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. In order to obtain such effects, when a suppression operation reception performance is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first aspect is output as the first reception permission sound in performance judgment such as advance notice performance judgment. It is desirable that the rate of determination that the second aspect be outputted is higher than the rate of determination that the second mode is to be output.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation reception production executed in the non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 212) but also the operation reception production carried out in the automatic reception mode (FIGS. 213 and 214) When this occurs, a reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted may be output, so if you forget to perform the operation, the performance reception may be automatically performed. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user loses an opportunity to operate as a result.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when timing tr41 arrives, and a specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (valid period). Then, when the specific timing tr42A arrives without receiving the performance according to the operation detection, the performance acceptance is automatically generated. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect can be started within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether there is an operation or not. It will be possible to make the button automatic without changing the flow of the subsequent performance or causing a delay in the performance.

In addition, in the above production example, a "message sound (second permissible sound) that prompts you to perform an operation" may be output as a reception permissible sound, It is not output in the case of "operation reception performance performed in non-automatic reception mode" where the performance is not accepted, but can be output only in "operation reception performance executed in automatic reception mode" in which the performance is accepted without any operation. There is.

In other words, in the operation reception performance performed in a non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses that the operation should be performed is output, and many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, It may be possible to output a second permissible sound, but since there is usually a risk that the post-operation performance will be performed in a manner with low expectations, it is recommended that the post-operation performance be performed. Operating the game is not necessarily the best way to improve the game's interest. In this regard, "operation reception performance executed in a non-automatic reception mode" is a performance in which it is allowed to make a selection such as ``do not intentionally generate a post-operation performance.'' Avoid directly expressing the message as a message (second permissible sound), do not output a message sound (second permissible sound), and create an "automatic receptionist" without the right to choose whether or not to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second permissible sound) only in the "operation reception performance executed in a specific manner" or to output more types of reception permissible sounds. In addition, in the "operation reception performance executed in a non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without reception of the performance, the post-operation performance and related performances will not be performed, so please be aware of the following expectations. The production progresses without any indication of the level of progress. In addition, in the non-active reception performance, no message sound is output for any operation reception performance, but in the "operation reception performance executed in automatic reception mode", there are types in which no message sound is output. An operation reception effect may also be included.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple modes ("Push!" and "Sheath your sword!") as the message sound (second permissible sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 In the example, depending on whether the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (based on the result of the preview effect judgment), any one of these multiple aspects is selectively selected. I am trying to output it. In this case, when the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and a corresponding message sound ("Press!") is output, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword ornament 5001, and this corresponds to the operation button 410. Compared to when the message sound (``Sheath your sword!'') is output in response to the production, the post-operation production in response to the production reception suggests that ``the jackpot symbol will appear when the symbol variation is stopped.'' The rate at which the performance mode appears (expectation level) is set to be low. The rate at which the performance mode appears (expectation level) may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second permissible sound) is never output, and when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the operation target is not the sword decoration body 5001, but the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect that is executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal gaming state, the post-operation performance that is executed when the performance is accepted in the operation reception performance in which no message sound is output suggests that ``the jackpot symbol will appear when the symbol variation is stopped.'' The rate at which the production mode appears (expectation level) is determined by the number of times when the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped in the post-operation production that is executed when the production is accepted in the operation reception production where a message sound is output. ” is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) of appearance of production modes that suggest that. Note that the rate (expectation level) at which the above presentation mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation reception performance occurs, the first step in determining whether the level of expectation is whether a message sound (second permissible sound) will be output is the turning point, and the message sound (second permissible sound) is output. When the second permissible sound) is output, it becomes possible to know whether the level of expectation is high or low based on its appearance. Furthermore, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation effect with relatively high expectations. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to perform the post-operation performance in an automatic reception mode to prevent the post-operation performance from being overlooked. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the level of expectation is relatively low, and the "sword ornament 5001", which is used only when the level of expectation is high, becomes the operation target. will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the right to choose whether or not to generate the post-operation performance by allowing the post-operation performance to be executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode.

In addition, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed when the set time (validity period) occurs. In this regard, as shown in Figures 213 (g) to (i) and Figures 214 (g) to (i), regarding the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (validity period) is While the output state is terminated (becomes inaudible state) before tr42A, the message display is maintained in the display state even at timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, it does not become non-displayed (invisible) at least until timing tr43 when the set time period ends. In other words, in this case, if the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display may be hidden before the set time has elapsed in response to the effect acceptance, but the message display may be hidden within the set time. When the automatic button function is enabled, the message display ("Press!" or "Sheath your sword!") will continue to be displayed at least until the set time is over.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button function is activated and the production is accepted, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be prematurely terminated (inaudible state). , since the message display will no longer be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production will be accepted by detecting the operation on the operation target prompted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or message display. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that there is no such situation. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display, etc. is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that no performance reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

In addition, in the operation reception performance where the automatic button function is enabled (FIGS. 213 and 214), when the automatic button function is activated at timing tr42A and the performance is accepted, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) Since the gauge amount will be left intentionally, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will, and this will allow the player to During the set time (validity period), you can be prompted to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge.

In addition, in the operation reception effect where the automatic button function is enabled (FIGS. 213 and 214), if the effect is accepted due to the automatic button function being enabled, the remaining time display (gauge display) will be displayed at least according to the setting. The dynamic display continues until the time has elapsed. Therefore, by detecting an operation on an operation target that is prompted to operate by a message sound or a message display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is not such that the performance has been accepted. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display, etc. is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that no performance reception has occurred due to the operation. become able to.

Furthermore, since the same performance sound (first permissible sound of the first aspect) is output as the reception permissible sound between the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212 and the operation reception performance shown in FIG. Even when an operation acceptance presentation occurs, it is possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is being given. Moreover, in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 213, the second permissible sound that is not output in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212 is also output, so it is difficult to determine which of these operation reception performances is occurring It will also be possible to recognize the Furthermore, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode in a specific variation pattern (the corresponding production pattern), the proportion of operations performed in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high, and as shown in FIG. 214. The rate at which the game is executed in the manner shown is relatively low, and the rate at which the game is stopped at a jackpot symbol is relatively high when the game is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 214. That is, in this case, in order to avoid overlooking the post-operation effect, the first allowable sound is not the "first mode" but the "second mode" which is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212. Since the game is outputted in the following manner, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, compared to the production example shown in FIG. (Fig. 214), it is possible to suitably maintain performance when "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is suppressed or output in silence. become able to.

In addition, in the production examples (suppression operation acceptance production) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the acceptance permission sound (first permission sound) is not necessarily used as the production sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time. , the same reception permission sound (first permission sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressing operation reception performance (FIG. 212) is generated can also be generated. On top of this, if the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the effect sound whose output state is maintained only for a short time (the first A new effect is added by making the rate at which symbols are stopped at jackpot symbols higher than when the first permissible sound is output in (aspect) (FIG. 213). This makes it possible to recognize that production reception is permitted, while also controlling the performance when "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is suppressed or output without sound. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the first permissible sound is output (FIG. 214) with the production sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time, the first permissible sound is If the production is accepted during the period when the sound is being output, the sound is set to a non-output (inaudible) state even during the output stage (see Figure 214(c)). . On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output with a performance sound whose output state is maintained for a short period of time (first mode) (FIGS. 212 and 213), the first permissible sound is "suppression operation reception performance". ” or “operation reception performance executed in automatic reception mode” (Figure 213), if the performance is accepted during output, it will be rendered non-output (inaudible) at that point. (See FIGS. 212(c) and 213(c)). In other words, in this case, in the operation acceptance performance shown in FIG. 212, even if the performance is accepted while the first permissible sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first permissible sound remains in the output state during the period from timing tr41 to tr42, but within this period, even if an operation is detected, no presentation is accepted, so the first permissible sound is output. Needless to say, the output state is not interrupted.

In other words, as mentioned above, in the non-suppressing operation reception performance, unlike the suppressed operation reception performance, the operation reception performance occurs without suppressing "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)", so the post-operation performance is missed. The possibility is relatively high, and if the operation reception mode is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated, unlike when the operation reception mode is executed in an automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception performances occur, it is assumed that some players will hit the game repeatedly even before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, there is a concern that it will be difficult to understand whether the effect occurred as a post-operation effect or a preview effect unrelated to the operation, so the first allowable sound is It is desirable to eliminate such concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception performance and the non-automatic reception performance, there is no need to hit repeatedly, so in order to suppress games by such repeated hits, the first permissible sound changes to the first mode and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize when the output is performed (the output is stopped midway).

Furthermore, even if the performance is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message will not be displayed within the set time only when the operation is detected late, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. The remaining time display (gauge display) may be displayed continuously until the end of the set time, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may be dynamically displayed until the time is ended within the set time (as described above). standardization of programs, etc.).

In addition, as mentioned above, there is usually a risk that the post-operation performance will be performed in a manner with low expectations, so it is important to operate so that the post-operation performance is performed in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. Not necessarily good. In this regard, in the production example (non-automatic reception production) shown in FIG. By using the mode (first mode) in which the process ends in , "time for determining whether or not to generate a performance reception" is created while the reception acceptance sound is not being output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), since there is no need to create such a time, the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is output in the same manner (first manner). In addition to this, there are also cases in which the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the level of expectation differs depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptance permission sound for a relatively long period of time, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function is not yet activated, and it can also be used to create a sense of security. Among them, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform operations.

In addition, in the automatic reception effect (Figs. 213 and 214), the automatic button function is enabled even when the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output in the long mode (second mode) (Fig. 214). The reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is rendered inaudible before timing tr42A arrives, and the two reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) are made inaudible at different timings. I'm trying to finish it.

As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated will not arrive until the reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) become inaudible. , the inaudible state can indicate that the automatic button function may soon be activated if an action is not taken soon. At this time, at least in the longer mode (second mode) or the second allowable sound whose output state is maintained longer than the first allowable sound in the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound change over time. It is desirable to change at least one of the above in order to easily recognize how much time has passed.

In addition, in the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or silently, thereby generating a post-operation effect. When this happens, we will take creative measures to make the sound that corresponds to this sound stand out. In this regard, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when such a suppression operation reception performance occurs, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is in the output state, based on the fact that the performance reception has been performed, Since the output state is terminated, it becomes possible to highlight the performance sound according to the post-operation performance without being disturbed by the acceptance permission sound.

In addition, in the above production example, when a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production" occurs, even if production reception is made while the reception permission sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And so. However, instead of this, if the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs in the SP reach state within (the performance pattern corresponding to) the high expectation fluctuation pattern, for example, the expectation level is relatively high. Only in certain situations, in order to encourage concentration on the performance, the production is performed when the reception permissible sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first permissible sound) is in the output state. This may be interrupted once the reception is completed.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the case where a "suppression/automatic reception performance" occurs is explained, but "non-suppression/automatic reception performance" or "suppression/non-automatic reception performance" etc. also occur. It is also possible to make it possible for the performance to progress in the same manner even when "non-suppression/automatic reception performance" or "suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs.

Furthermore, when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs, it is possible to output a third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (Fig. 213) and the second mode (Fig. 214) as the first permissible sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the level of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and the set time (valid This makes it possible to better maintain interest in the game within the period (period).

At this time, regarding the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated arrives. In other words, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that it is being output in the third mode rather than the first or second mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (validity period) during which production reception is allowed. It becomes like this. Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as those explained in FIGS. 213 and 214, such as the fact that if the production is accepted while the third mode is in the output state, this will be interrupted. be.

Regarding the automatic button function, it may be configured so that it is always activated when timing tr42A within a specific variation pattern (the corresponding performance pattern) arrives, or when a jackpot has been obtained, a specific variation may be activated. It is activated when the timing tr42A within the pattern (the corresponding performance pattern) arrives, but if the jackpot has not been obtained, when the timing tr42A within the specific fluctuation pattern (the corresponding performance pattern) arrives. It may not be enabled.

We have prepared multiple types of performances as non-automatic reception performances in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (validity period), and in some of these performances, when the set time (validity period) occurs, the reception permission sound (first The permissible sound and the second permissible sound) may not be output. In other words, in this case, when the set time (validity period) during which production reception is permitted occurs, there are two cases in which the number of acceptable sounds is "0" and one case in which the number of acceptable sounds is "1" (first allowed sound). ), and cases where there are "2" acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound), which suggests how much the pachinko machine 1 is "prompting operation". You will be able to do this.

As a method for hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method may be adopted in which a fade-out is started when the timing to hide the display has arrived.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in silence during the period from timing tr40 to tr44. The output state may be set (such as whether the playback period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded has ended, or the channel assignment has been completed, etc.). That is, in this case, at timing tr44, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and brought into the output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above production example, as described above, as a result of the variation pattern determination, a highly expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) If a specific variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a performance judgment (notice judgment, etc.), if the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the performance will be accepted. The operation reception performance (validity period) that is allowed is
・“Suppression reception production” (Figure 213 (a), (b)) that sets a set time during which production reception is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” is output in a suppressed mode or silently according to the fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 214(a) and (b)), and no operation is detected on the operating means that is the target of operation within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) during which production reception is permitted. Even in such a case, when timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the performance reception will be automatically generated internally (the automatic button function will be activated), and the performance will be started after the operation based on the reception of the performance. "Automatic reception mode (see Figure 213 (j) and Figure 214 (j))" in which
It is made to occur as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by.

In addition, at this time, based on the result of the production judgment (notice production judgment), it is determined in which of multiple modes including the first mode and the second mode the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the accepted acceptable sounds is to be output. , determines whether to output the message sound (second permissible sound) among the permissible reception sounds as "Push!" or "Sheath your sword!", and outputs the permissible reception sound (first permissible sound) in a manner according to the determination result. As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are respectively output (FIGS. 213 and 214). As mentioned above, when the second mode is output as the first acceptable sound, the expectation level is higher than when the first mode is output, and the second acceptable sound is "Sheath your sword!" When "Press!" is output, expectations are higher than when "Press!" is output. At this time, the order of highest expectations is "Second mode & sheath your sword!", "Second mode & push!", "First mode & sheath your sword!", "First mode & push!" '' is desirable in order to maintain the game's interest when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

As also mentioned above, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to the above performance example, no matter which of the plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound, the first permissible sound is in the output state. Sometimes, when a presentation is accepted, this is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Also, regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output as "Push!" or "Sheath your sword!", if the production is accepted while the second permissible sound is in the output state, this will occur. We decided to suspend it.

However, instead of this, if the production is accepted while the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the production. However, if the production is accepted while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being ended. In other words, in this case, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance", the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted midway, and even if the expectation level cannot be recognized, the first mode with the lowest expectation level among the multiple modes is Since it is possible to recognize that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed. In addition, even if a mode with a low expectation level appears in the post-operation performance, if the output state of the first permissible sound with the lowest expectation among multiple modes is maintained, the post-operation performance will be changed. By re-recognizing that the performance was in a state where it was difficult to have expectations in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result that appeared as the performance after the operation, and it is expected that a significant drop in game interest will be suppressed.

Even when such a modification is adopted, if the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs within the above-described predetermined variation pattern, it is as explained with reference to FIG. 212, and the above-mentioned The case where the first permissible sound of the "suppression/automatic acceptance performance" is output in the second mode within a specific variation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 214. In other words, among the above-mentioned production examples, the ``production mode shown in FIG. 215".

As shown in FIG. 215, the ``production mode shown in FIG. 215'' is basically the same as the content explained in ``the production mode shown in FIG. 213'' and the content described in its other examples. be. However, in the "production mode shown in FIG. 215", even if the production is accepted at timing tr42a when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted with the production reception as a trigger. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first permissible sound. On the other hand, even if the "suppression/automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the first permissible sound may be in a mode different from the first mode with the lowest expectation among the multiple modes (e.g. , second mode) (for example, FIG. 214(c)), when the presentation is accepted at timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the presentation acceptance as described above.

According to such a configuration, when a "suppression/automatic reception performance" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the performance reception is performed at an early timing where it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first permissible sound. Even if this happens, the degree of expectation can be recognized by checking whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is ended using this as an opportunity. In particular, in this production example (FIG. 213, FIG. 215, etc.), the first permissible sound is output from timing tr41 before the set time (valid period) occurs to timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first permissible sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the time when it becomes the output state at timing tr41 until the arrival of timing tr42, the first permissible sound is set as the first permissible sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "distinguishing" which mode is being used.

In this regard, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared such that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. It is said that As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first allowable sound is being output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first allowable sound are different. It becomes possible to shorten the time during which each output state overlaps, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first permissible sound output in the first mode can also be output in the production example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212(c)). In this production example, the production is not interrupted when the production is accepted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound, so the first permissible sound is Even if a situation arises that is not interrupted by the performance reception, it becomes possible to provide a performance that does not feel strange.

However, if the production is accepted while the second allowable sound is in its output state, no matter which mode is output as the first allowable sound, the production will be accepted based on the production acceptance. 214(d) and FIG. 215(d)). In other words, in this case, the first permissible sound functions to suggest the level of expectation when the production is accepted early, whereas the second permissible sound functions to indicate the situation in which the production is accepted due to operation detection ( The automatic button function has a function that suggests whether or not the user is in a situation where the opportunity for operation may be lost.By having these different functions in the reception permission sound, when the operation reception effect occurs. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in playing games.

On the other hand, the acceptance permission sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212 occurs may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in a special mode. However, even if a production is accepted while being output in a special mode, it is desirable to maintain this output state without terminating it. In addition, when outputting in the special mode, it is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbols are stopped is higher than when outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be output in a manner different from the first aspect and the special aspect.

In other words, in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is maintained in the output state in a non-suppressed manner, and problems such as poor performance can be avoided. Therefore, it is more desirable to make it possible to confirm the form of the first permissible sound even in a situation where the post-operation performance is started, and to recognize the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the case of "suppression operation reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate while a specific type of performance sound is suppressed or output silently, or in a non-output state", the specific type of performance sound is suppressed or output. It goes without saying that even in a situation where the sound is inaudible, other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above production example, "suppression that provides an opportunity to operate while a specific type of production sound is outputted in a suppressed mode, silently, or in a non-output state. In ``Operation reception production (Figures 213 to 215)'', the acceptance permission sound that is output when the set time (valid period) occurs is set to one of ``multiple modes with different lengths of time maintained as output status''. It is possible to output in a non-suppression mode, and the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, even in the case of "a non-suppressing operation reception performance that provides an operation opportunity while a specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressing manner", the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is In addition to outputting in a non-suppression mode in the first mode (FIG. 212), the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound ) may be output in a non-suppressing manner, and the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) may vary depending on the output manner. According to such a configuration, the reception permissible sound that is output when the "non-suppressing operation reception performance" occurs and the reception permissible sound that is output when the "suppressing operation reception performance" occurs are both set as the "output state". It becomes possible to output in one of several modes with different durations of time, and furthermore, the level of expectation will differ depending on the output mode, so it is called "non-suppressing operation reception performance". In both the "suppressing operation reception performance" and the "suppression operation reception performance", it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest until the performance is accepted.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific manner when the "non-suppressing operation reception performance (here, non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance)" occurs.

As shown in FIG. 216, this presentation example is also basically the same as the presentation example shown in FIG. 212, except for parts that do not have any particular disclaimer. However, in the non-suppressing/non-automatic reception performance (timings tr31 to tr33) according to this example of a performance, a performance judgment is made as to which of the plurality of modes should be used to output the first permissible sound (for example, when the first permissible sound is output at the time of the start of symbol variation). As a result of the performance judgment, as shown in FIGS. 216(c) and (g), it is not the "first mode" but the "specific mode". It is assumed that the game is output in the "first mode", and the performance situation is such that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than in the case where the jackpot symbols are output in the "first mode". The specific aspect is output for a longer period of time than the first aspect.

Here, in both the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppression/automatic reception performance", when the operation reception performance occurs, the first permissible sound can be output according to the first mode. As described above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). In other words, in this case, in both the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppression/automatic reception performance", when the operation reception performance occurs, the same performance sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same period of time. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output in a specific manner when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs (Fig. 216), and when the first permissible sound is output when the "suppression/automatic reception performance" occurs, the first permissible sound is In the case of output in two modes (FIG. 214), different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound over different times. In this production example, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode, it is output for a longer period of time than when the first permissible sound is output in the specific mode.

However, on the other hand, when the same production sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same period of time (see the first mode (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) is whether the "first mode" is output when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 212)" occurs or the "suppression/automatic reception effect (Figure 213 (or Figure 215)"). It differs depending on whether it was output when the ``non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 212)'' occurs and the ``first mode'' appears. The degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the post-operation performance according to In this case, it is lower than the expectation level (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear after the operation according to the production reception.The expectation level (proportion) may be 0% or 100%. .

On the other hand, the expectation level ( The rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is set to be the same as a predetermined value regardless of whether it is output during the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" or the "suppression/automatic reception performance". The expectation level (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound for the same period of time, either "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" or "suppression/automatic reception effect" will occur. Expectations will not necessarily be the same depending on who you are. In addition, even if a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs, when a specific mode is output as the first permissible sound, "suppression/non-automatic reception effect" will occur when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound. The same level of expectation as ``Automatic Reception Production'' is suggested.

In other words, in this case, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" have different expectations even if the first permissible sound is output in the same mode (first mode). Furthermore, since the first permissible sound can be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode or a specific mode, the expectations are set to be the same even though they are different production sounds and have different output times. It becomes possible to have a secret relationship between people. For example, when the set time (valid period) for which production reception is permitted occurs, there are two cases in which "BGM playback" is suppressed and a case in which "BGM playback" is not suppressed: (in the case where the performance is output as ``)'', different post-operation performances (different expectations) are started when the performance is accepted, thereby making it appear that the performances have no relation to each other in terms of performance. However, if the reception permissible sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, although it will appear as if a different effect has been performed depending on whether or not "BGM playback" is suppressed, the operation when the effect is accepted As a post-production, it is now possible to present the same content (same level of expectation), and by creating a secret production relationship, it is expected to provide a surprising performance.

In this case, for both the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppression/automatic reception performance", multiple modes will be prepared as the first permissible sound, but the commonly used "first mode" ”, it is preferable that any operation acceptance performance be set as the mode with the shortest output time among the multiple modes. Furthermore, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the "suppression/automatic reception effect" occurs, and The "specific mode" as the first permissible sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" occurs. It is desirable to have different output times (for example, "output time of the specific mode" < "output time of the second mode") in order to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other.

In addition, in the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", even if the first permissible sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output will not be terminated at an intermediate stage regardless of whether or not the production reception has been made. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. In other words, in this case, even after the post-operation performance has started, the output of the first permissible sound can remain, so the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" with relatively low expectations is executed. In this situation, even though the first permissible sound is being output in a "specific manner" that raises the expectations to the same level as the "suppression/automatic reception performance", which has relatively high expectations, it is difficult to hear it. This will eliminate the possibility of getting lost. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the performance is accepted in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned production, the second mode is output as the first permissible sound in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" (Fig. 214), and the second mode is output as the first permissible sound in the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance". The expectation level is made to be the same when the specific aspect is output (FIG. 216). However, in the "suppression/automatic reception effect", as the first permissible sound, the output time is maintained for a longer time than in the "first mode (Fig. 213)" and "second mode (Fig. 214)". When it is possible to output the "third mode" of "Suppression/automatic reception effect", there are two cases where the "third mode" is output as the first permissible sound instead of the "second mode" mentioned above, and " The expectation level is set to be the same as in the case where "specific mode" is output as the first permissible sound in "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance". The "third aspect" is as described above.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 216, when the production is accepted within the set time (validity period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the production display device 1600 (the At least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tr33. In contrast, the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, no matter at which timing the production is accepted, if the timing tr33 has not yet elapsed, both the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation production sound output (production sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

In addition, in the above production example, the length of time required for "the time for which the reception permissible sound is output" is not the length of time required for "the time for which the sound data of the reception permissible sound is assigned to the channel", but It means the length of time it takes to output an audible sound.

In addition, in the above production example, in order to make it appear that there is no production relationship between the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception production" and the "suppression/automatic reception production", it is necessary to use the "second mode" and "third mode". Regarding the ``mode'', it is assumed that output is possible only with the ``suppression/automatic reception effect'' out of the ``suppression/automatic reception effect'' and the ``non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect'', and regarding the ``specific mode'', the output is possible with the ``suppression/automatic reception effect''.・Out of the "automatic reception performance" and the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance," it is desirable that only the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" be outputtable. In addition, if you prepare the "second mode" and "third mode" as output candidates for "suppression/automatic reception performance", the reception permission sound (second mode) specific to "suppression/automatic reception performance" Even if the third mode) is output, the level of expectation will not necessarily be the same as when the unique reception permissible sound (specific mode) of "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" is output. It becomes possible to more suitably improve the performance of the reception acceptance sound output when the "suppression/automatic reception performance" occurs.

In addition, the non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance (timings tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as a performance related to a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), for example, a high As described above, among the performances related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern), it may be possible to occur within the performance period before the SP reach state develops.

By the way, in the above production example, regarding the "suppression operation reception production" in which a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) can be suppressed, the "weak suppression mode (first A plurality of modes including at least a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or a non-output state is prepared. Good too. Note that when a specific type of performance sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, when the set time (validity period) for which production reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to set the performance as to how much the specific type of production sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to suitably obtain the above effects, the expectation level depends on whether the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" or the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" has occurred. It is desirable that (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) be different. In addition, here, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs, the expectation level (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the "post-operation performance according to the performance reception" is " It is lower than the expectation level (proportion) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the "post-operation performance according to the performance reception" when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" occurs. The expectation level (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)", there is a performance according to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (such as a reach performance with a background change), and a performance in which even a reach state is not formed (or, It is possible to appear in both productions that correspond to a low expected fluctuation pattern (a reach state can be formed, but it does not develop into an SP reach state), whereas a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)" is possible. )" may not occur in the low expected performance pattern, but may occur as a performance in accordance with the high expected variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the expectation level when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs is the same as the expectation level when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special performance state" that can be transitioned to based on the fulfillment of special performance conditions, and in this "special performance state", the player Each time a production is accepted during the set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (sample image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is displayed. ) is suppressed, it is desirable to execute (start) the post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance. According to such a "special performance state", each time the set time (validity period) during which production reception is allowed occurs, how much a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. In addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation performance, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such performance (the degree to which it is suppressed). Therefore, it is expected to further improve the interest in the game when the performance reception is permitted.

In addition, a performance pattern (for example, a high expected fluctuation A performance corresponding to a specific variation pattern among the patterns may be prepared. In other words, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs on the side with relatively low expectations, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" on the side with relatively high expectations occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of a specific type of performance sound is small (weak suppression mode). You will be able to do this.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in gaming interest when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" is
・If a specific variation pattern is selected among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern judgment, the performance judgment will be made. No matter which result is obtained (e.g. advance notice judgment), it will occur when the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. Regarding “Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the production judgment (e.g. preview judgment), the effect will not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in performance determination (such as advance notice determination), this occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs in a performance according to a specific fluctuation pattern, a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs in a performance corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern. Compared to when "" does not occur, when the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)", the rate at which the post-operation production is executed in a highly expected manner will be higher. It is desirable to

In such a configuration, in a performance according to a specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" is always generated. " will no longer necessarily occur, and when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs, a highly anticipated post-operation performance will be performed in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" Since the rate at which is executed becomes high, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" becomes possible to attract attention. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest when the "first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs.

FIGS. 217 to 219 show "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception presentation)" in the production according to a highly expected variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern). )" is a time chart illustrating an example of a performance when "" occur sequentially. FIG. 217 shows an example of a performance when an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs, and FIG. 218 shows a comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. This shows an example of a performance when an operation is detected at a late stage, and FIG. 219 shows an example of a performance when no operation is detected within a set time (validity period).

Now, as a result of the start condition being met (pending consumption) and the fluctuation pattern being determined, a "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected among the "highly expected fluctuation patterns that will develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.)" If the above is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After this, a variation production of the decorative pattern (production depiction according to a specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to a specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and production judgment is made within the execution period of the variation production. A performance (such as a preview performance) corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" (such as a preview performance) is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) of the selected "specific variation pattern".

However, regarding the performance contents that appear after the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) has arrived when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation performance in the "specific fluctuation pattern". This is the same as in the example of effect described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. That is, first, when timing tr40 arrives, no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance determination, "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence" (or a non-output state).Here, the state related to this suppression is referred to as a "strong suppression mode", and while the "strong suppression mode" is appearing, timing tr42 (decorative pattern When a certain period of time has passed since the fluctuating performance started (within the SP reach state), no matter which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, operation reception is allowed to accept the performance. A performance (validity period) is generated. Here, the operation reception performance that occurs while the "strong suppression mode" is appearing is referred to as the "second suppression operation reception performance."

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (timing before the SP reach state develops), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation production of decorative symbols, comes, the preview production is determined. An operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted on the condition that a special result is obtained is additionally generated for the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs at the timing tr51 is different from the operation reception performance (non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than "Production (Strong Suppression Mode)", under certain conditions, processing can be performed to suppress the volume of "Specific Type of Production Sound (Sound of BGM Playback)".

According to such a configuration, even if there is a situation where a performance according to a "specific variation pattern" is being executed, if a special result is not obtained as a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment), the process shown in FIG. The production example shown in FIG. 214 will appear, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception production)" will not occur in the production according to the fluctuation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)" will not occur. Only the "Operation reception effect)" will now occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment), as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation 213 and 214. Then, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 starts to occur.

In the performance examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the content of the performance after the timing tr40 arrives is as described with reference to FIG. 213, so a description thereof will be omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode), depending on the result of the performance judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the first permissible sound may not be in the first mode shown in FIG. 213 or FIGS. 217 to 219. 217 to 219. The contents described above regarding the effects related to the effects shown in FIG. 213, other examples, and modified examples, such as the fact that they may be output in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, are shown in FIGS. It goes without saying that among the examples of performances shown in FIG.

As mentioned above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 (develops into SP ready state) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation production of decorative symbols (production according to a specific variation pattern) When the timing (before the execution) arrives, an operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted occurs as a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception performance)" that is generated at timing tr51 within the fluctuation performance according to a specific fluctuation pattern,
・Set the set time (valid period) during which production reception is allowed while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, but within the set time (valid period) When the performance is accepted, the ``conditional suppression reception performance'' (Fig. 217 (see (a), (b))", and if no operation is detected on the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) during which presentation reception is permitted, The production is not accepted, and as a result, various processes triggered by the production reception (processing to change the "BGM playback sound" from non-suppression mode to weak suppression mode, and post-operation production (LCD display, production ``Non-automatic reception mode'' (see Figures 219(a), (b), and (f)) in which the set time (validity period) ends without any sound (sound, etc.) being performed.
It is made to occur as a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. Note that as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned is set in a strong suppression mode (for example, if the volume value (audible volume ) may be set to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is "10") that has a lower degree of suppression than "0").

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (first suppression operation reception performance)", unless the performance is accepted by the player's operation, the "specific type of performance sound ( Since the BGM playback sound is not shifted to the state in which the sound is output in a suppressed manner, it can be made to appear as if the "non-suppressed reception effect" shown in FIGS. 212 and 216 is occurring. It becomes like this. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the system, the player realizes for the first time that it is not a "suppression acceptance performance" because it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode." Since the game becomes easier to play, it becomes possible to improve the game's interest through surprise performances.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)" can be generated depending on the result of performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) Regarding the variation pattern, it is set so that it can only be selected when it is in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone, etc.), and when it is in the special performance state, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance ( 212, 216)" can be generated depending on the result of production judgment (pre-announcement judgment, etc.) A jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped than in the normal production state where a variation pattern can be selected. It is desirable to make the ratio (expectation level) high. According to such a configuration, when a "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" appears, the level of expectation is higher than when a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance (Figure 212, Figure 216)" appears. This, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance elements, makes it possible to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)" can occur in both the "normal production state" and the "special production state". In the "normal performance state", the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 212, Fig. 216)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Fig. 213, Fig. 214)" are made to occur sequentially, and in the "special performance state", one fluctuation pattern (win/loss) is made possible. ``Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/Non-automatic reception effect (Figures 217 to 219)'' and ``Suppression (strong suppression mode)/Automatic reception'' It is desirable that the "effects (FIGS. 213 and 214)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the case of "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (valid period) ends without reception of the performance, "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly suppressed manner, and the subsequent production progresses without transitioning to the state in which ") is output in a weakly suppressed manner" (FIG. 219). In other words, in this case, whether "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" or "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" was occurring, and furthermore, what is the difference between "normal performance state" and "special performance state"? Since it is difficult to recognize which situation the situation is in, and the subsequent production progresses, expectations are relatively low. Even if the "operation acceptance effect (valid period)" occurs, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases in which "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" and "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" occur. 212), the same production sound (first mode) is output for the same period of time as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound), and this also results in "conditional suppression (weak It is made difficult to recognize which one is occurring: "Suppression mode)/Non-automatic reception presentation (FIGS. 217 to 219)" or "Non-suppression/Non-automatic reception presentation (FIG. 212)."

In addition, in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figures 217 to 219)", as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 212)" occurs,
- When timing tr50 arrives, which is a little before the set time, the output of the "acceptance permission sound (first permission sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across timing tr51. point,
- The second permissible sound (e.g. message sound) is never output, and only the first permissible sound (e.g. sound effect) is output. - The set time (validity period) is set. When timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operation means to be operated in the operation reception effect, and also indicates the remaining time until the set time ends. We have also adopted various configurations such as the point where the gauge display is performed, etc., and this also allows for "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figures 217 to 219)" and "non-suppression/ This makes it difficult to recognize which of the following is occurring: ``Non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 212)''. Therefore, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) should be adopted as the display method for the sample image and gauge display, as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs. It is desirable that the display images (sample image, gauge display) be hidden based on the occurrence of a production reception, and the same mode as the production example shown in FIG. 212 can be adopted. desirable.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" according to this embodiment, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. If the production is accepted at the timings tr51a and tr52a (FIG. 217(c), FIG. 218(c)) when the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the corresponding setting While the time (validity period) itself ends, the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not terminated prematurely, but the timing at which it finishes outputting as the first permissible sound (same as when no operation is performed) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219(c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the performance is accepted by the player's operation, simply listening to the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) will not result in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance". It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize which one is occurring: the effect (FIGS. 217 to 219) or the non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212). In other words, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, a state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed state is reached. Since it becomes necessary to hear whether the transition has been made or not, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained each time a production is accepted.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)", if the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timings tr51a, 51b ), as a post-operation performance in response to the performance reception, a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member), and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member). and at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker remain in the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tr52. However, the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, no matter at which timing the production is accepted, if timing tr52 has not yet elapsed, both the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation production sound output (production sound) Settings must be made to maintain the output state.

In addition, for the reception permission sounds and operation-related displays that appear in the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance (Figures 217 to 219)," other examples or modifications of the production example shown in Figure 212 may be adopted as appropriate. It is possible, and it is desirable to use the same method.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first suppression operation reception performance (conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance)" that is generated at timing tr51 in the performance according to a specific variation pattern is A process is performed in which the "background music playback sound" is output in a weak suppression mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the reception is made.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (validity period) occurs (FIG. 217), the "BGM playback sound" is changed to a weak suppression mode (the degree of suppression is The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppression mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the "BGM playback sound" is set to the weak suppression mode and the "BGM playback sound" There is a relatively long interval (timings tr53a to tr40) between the period in which the signal is put into the strong suppression mode. On the other hand, if the production is accepted at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (validity period) occurs (FIG. 218), the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, there is a difference between the period in which the "BGM playback sound" is in a weak suppression mode and the period in which the "BGM playback sound" is in a strong suppression mode. Only a short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is maintained.

In other words, in this case, the later the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation acceptance performance (the closer it gets to timing tr52), the more the period for setting the "BGM playback sound" to the weak suppression mode ends, and the " This means that the time until the period in which the "BGM playback sound" is strongly suppressed starts is shortened. As a result, depending on whether the timing of the operation performed by the player in the first suppression operation reception performance is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode ends is relatively early, and the continuous It is possible to make it appear as if a suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or to make it appear that the strong suppression mode appears relatively late after the weak suppression mode ends, so that the strong suppression mode appears. This makes it possible to make the player feel a sense of anxiety, such as, ``I might not be able to show up.'' This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this production example, the length of time (predetermined fixed time) in which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weak suppression mode can be changed after the operation (LCD display, production sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weak suppression mode is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (LCD display, effect sound). It is desirable to do this in order to make the post-operation performance stand out when the performance is accepted. Furthermore, even if the performance is accepted at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the "first suppression operation reception performance (conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance)", the weak suppression mode is not activated. It is desirable to set the length of time for which the "BGM playback sound" is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing to end it comes before the timing tr40 to start the strong suppression mode. Note that in this performance example, the time between timings tr51a-53a and the time between timings tr51b-53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the performance according to one variation pattern,
- A first suppression operation reception performance (period from timing tr50 until the end of the post-operation performance) that suppresses a specific type of performance sound (for example, the performance sound of BGM playback) at a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode) ), and - A second suppression operation reception performance that suppresses a specific type of performance sound (for example, the performance sound of BGM playback) at a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (the post-operation performance ends from timing tr40) period)
can occur sequentially. As mentioned above, the second suppression operation reception performance is a "variable pattern in which the performance mode (type of reception permissible sound, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the performance judgment, but it will not not be executed." In contrast, the first suppression operation reception performance can occur on the condition that a special result has been obtained in the performance judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment). ing.

Also, as mentioned above, the first suppression operation reception performance is determined by performance judgment (such as advance notice judgment) even in a performance according to a low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not cause the second suppression operation reception performance. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during symbol fluctuation, there are cases where only one of the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance occurs, and a case where only one of the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance occurs. There are cases where each of the two suppression operation reception performances occurs sequentially.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed during the period from "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to "timing at which the strong suppression mode is started" with the first suppression operation reception production. Since it is set as a variable period that is variable depending on the timing of the execution, after the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) ends, the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode) is further extended. It becomes possible to give an effect as to whether or not the occurrence occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that if the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (rate of stopping at jackpot symbols) is higher than when only the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode) occurs. In addition, in a variation pattern in which a second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode) is generated, the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) is generated before the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode). If this occurs, the second suppression operation acceptance presentation is in a more highly anticipated manner (for example, the first permissible sound is output in the second mode) than when the first suppression operation acceptance presentation (weak suppression mode) does not occur. (e.g.), the rate of execution will be higher.

By the way, when an operation reception performance that can suppress a specific type of performance sound (for example, the performance sound of BGM playback) occurs, the degree of suppression is either high (second suppression operation reception performance in strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode). As mentioned above, the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode (first suppression operation reception performance). However, when a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode). In reality, it is difficult to estimate without a comparison target whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not made to have such a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, which creates a sense of tension when the operation reception performance occurs. This makes it possible to maintain a favorable level of performance and attract players to the performance.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first suppression operation reception production and the second suppression operation reception production are output when the set time (validity period) during which the reception of these productions is permitted occurs. The first permissible sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same period of time (in the figure, output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it becomes difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode). This makes it possible to better maintain a sense of tension with respect to the performance and to attract players to the performance.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is a strong or weak suppression mode, there is a fear that the game's interest will be diminished. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance elements useful for guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode are set within the period from the start of the operation reception performance until the end. The following information will be prepared in a chronologically distributed manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-mentioned situation occurs in which the first permissible sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same period of time (in the figure, they are output in the "first mode"). Even if there is, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

In other words, the first permissible sound that is output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect occurs is output for a predetermined period of time without ending the output midway even if the effect is accepted while in the output state. On the other hand, the first permissible sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception performance is generated is the first permissible sound that is output based on the performance reception when the performance reception is made while in the output state. The output is ended midway (see FIGS. 217 and 218). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first permissible sound in both the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance, and it is possible to output the same mode as the first permissible sound, and it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. While increasing the tension of the performance by making it difficult to guess, the first allowable sound itself also has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. This makes it possible to prevent players from losing interest in the game due to inability to make such guesses.

In addition to the first mode, the first permissible sound that is output when the second suppressing operation reception effect is generated is in a mode (second mode, third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppressing operation reception effect is generated. ) is also possible. In other words, in this case, depending on the manner in which the first permissible sound is output, it may be a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, even if the production reception is not made when the first allowable sound is in the output state. It is now possible to easily guess whether the player is playing the game, and it is expected that the game player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension regarding the performance, the output in modes that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception performance occurs (second mode, third mode, etc.) is better than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to keep the execution rate low.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation acceptance performance is generated, the second permissible sound is also output in addition to the first permissible sound. By checking whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is also possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily need to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppressing operation reception performance and the second suppressing operation reception performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (validity period) in which presentation reception is allowed, the first suppression operation reception presentation and the second suppression Since the operation reception effect is different, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears later than the acceptance permissible sound, there are only some differences between the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance. This makes it somewhat difficult to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, in order to maintain a sense of tension regarding the performance.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound and the operation-related display is finished. Also, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In other words, in the post-operation performance in response to the first suppression operation reception performance, both the ``liquid crystal display performance'' and the ``performance sound performance'' are ``performed for a certain period of time from the time the performance reception is received.'' On the other hand, in the post-operation performance that corresponds to the second suppression operation reception performance, the "performance sound performance" is "something that is performed for a certain period of time from the time the performance reception is received," but the "liquid crystal display The "performance by" is "one that ends when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives." In other words, in this case, in the post-operation performance in response to the second suppression operation reception performance, the time from the end of the "direction using the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "performance using the sound performance" depends on the timing of the reception of the performance. is considered to be variable, and large deviations occur, so by checking these deviations, it becomes possible to infer whether the suppression mode is strong or weak. .

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are prepared in a chronologically scattered manner like this, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong or weak suppression mode. If it becomes impossible to guess, the player's interest in the game may eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode), the performance sound of BGM playback is based on the reception of the performance within the set time (validity period). is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM playback is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the sound of the BGM playback is set to the strong suppression mode. During this period, a set time (validity period) occurs and the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound of BGM playback) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode). Since the timings at which the control is performed are different, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the timings.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (validity period). When this happens, the set time period ends without automatically generating the performance reception (see FIG. 219). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (validity period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the acceptance of the production of a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Although this comes at the cost of not being able to confirm the performance after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode was weak rather than strong mode.

In addition, in the second suppression operation reception production (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process for changing the "BGM playback production sound" to the strong suppression mode is completed is the same as the end timing of the post-operation production. or earlier. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback performance sound" to the weak suppression mode is completed is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation performance. For example, by checking the timing at which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception performance according to the above example of performance, regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (validity period), the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) The length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are performed in parallel remains unchanged (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception performance, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) depends on at which timing within the set time (validity period) the performance was accepted. The length of the period in which the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel varies (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

According to such a configuration, the performance depends on "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

In addition, in the above configuration, the first tolerance is set so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance, which have different execution modes of the post-operation performance. Sounds are output as the same sound over the same period of time, and performance elements useful for distinguishing between them are distributed in chronological order. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension regarding the performance.

Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance, which have different execution modes of the post-operation performance, can be intentionally mixed within the performance according to one variation pattern. Therefore, each time an operation reception performance occurs, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension regarding "when to perform the performance reception (operation)". In addition, in order to obtain such effects, in addition to a mode in which the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance are mixed within the performance according to the first fluctuation pattern, it is also possible to mix the first suppression operation reception performance and the second restraint operation reception performance within the performance according to the first fluctuation pattern. It is desirable to enable execution of a mode in which only the second suppression operation reception performance (or first suppression operation reception performance) appears multiple times.

In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the effect of the performance regarding "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", it is necessary to use a specific type of performance in the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance. The sound (effect sound of BGM playback) may not be suppressed, and the output may be maintained in a non-suppressed mode.

In addition, regardless of when the production is accepted within the set time (validity period), the display production (liquid crystal display) after the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) and the speaker (second production member) ) for operation reception performances in which the length of the period in which the production sound output (production sound) is performed in parallel after the operation is unchanged, the condition is that a special result is obtained in the production judgment (previous judgment, etc.) It is desirable to make it possible for this to occur, and to prevent it from appearing as a symbol presentation (performance pattern) based on a fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this case, by checking the execution mode of the performance after the operation, it is possible to infer that a special result has been obtained in the preview performance judgment (that the expectation level is relatively high). The variation pattern that always occurs regardless of the result of the preview performance judgment is different from the production itself (symbol production), and when it is recognized that it has been performed additionally, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes like this. Furthermore, depending on when within the set time (validity period) the performance is accepted, the display performance (liquid crystal display) after the operation on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the display performance on the speaker (second performance member) may be displayed. Regarding the second suppression operation reception performance in which the length of the period in which the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) is performed in parallel, the second suppression operation reception performance changes, even if the variation pattern is made to occur only as its own performance (design performance). Alternatively, the variation pattern may occur both as an effect of its own (symbol effect) and as a condition that a special result is obtained in effect judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the weak suppression mode in which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is output with a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, it is possible to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). You may also do so. That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM playback" is put into the weak suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears, including the first suppression operation reception performance, within the performance according to the first fluctuation pattern, the rate at which the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped ( By increasing the rate at which the second suppression operation reception performance is further executed, it is possible to further improve the performance through the suppression of the "performance sound of BGM playback." In addition, when a production is accepted within the set time (valid period) that occurs while the "production sound of BGM playback" is not set to the suppression mode, "Whether the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases or not" 212 or the mode shown in FIG. 217).

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" may also be made to appear when no operation opportunity is given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is put into the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception production occurs, the "BGM playback production sound" is The mode is set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode). However, instead of this, even if the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM playback effect sound" will start before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs. may be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (validity period) during which presentation reception is permitted while in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may be generated. In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the "BGM playback performance sound" will be changed when the predetermined timing arrives, depending on whether a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (e.g., preview judgment). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) or not the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) can be applied, the range of effects can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception performance, the timing at which the "BGM playback performance sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing when the post-operation production ends, or later. It is desirable to have it arrive as soon as possible.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and 217 to 219, in the second suppression operation reception production (strong suppression mode), the "effect sound of BGM playback" is controlled in the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or I tried to end the process to output the sound silently or in a non-output state at the same time as or before the end of the post-operation performance, but the end timing of the post-operation performance has arrived. It may be terminated later. In this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is fluctuating (as long as the symbol fluctuation is not stopped), even if the "effect sound of BGM playback" is not returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, good.

As described above, the acceptance permission sound does not have to be generated slightly before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the generation of the set time (valid period).

In the operation reception performance in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219 (second suppression operation reception performance), the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) ) shall be terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 within the performance according to the variation pattern, while the performance sound output (performance sound) after the operation by the speaker (second performance member) is performed when the performance is accepted. It is to be terminated when a certain amount of time has elapsed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) can be changed. Each may be ended at a predetermined timing within the performance according to the pattern, or the display performance (liquid crystal display) after operation on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the speaker (second performance member) Both the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be terminated when a certain period of time has elapsed from the time when the performance was accepted.

In addition, the specific type of performance sound that is subject to suppression (performance sound of BGM playback) is at the start of symbol fluctuation, or at the timing when the performance changes within the performance according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, when the SP reach performance starts. It is output when the timing (such as timing) has arrived. On the other hand, the post-operation performance is started at an undefined timing within a set time (when the user wants to perform the operation).

The specific variation patterns explained in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation patterns explained in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 may be different variation patterns, or may be the same variation pattern. It may be a fluctuating pattern. Further, the above-mentioned special performance state may be not a look-ahead performance zone but a performance state when the jackpot probability associated with jackpot determination is relatively high.

In addition, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Therefore, the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of production sound" inaudible (either output with silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel assignment)). good.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is provided in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation reception performance", only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation reception performance", see FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as mentioned above, based on the result of the preview performance determination, there are two options: ``When selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)'' and ``When selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)'' )”. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that when the production is accepted in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" The content after the corresponding operation is the same.

That is, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated are:
- A first operation mode in which the operation receiver (the part that the player touches when operating) does not move when the set time (validity period) occurs, and - The operation receiver is moved by driving force when the set time (validity period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be provided in any of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode for moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. This assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is "something that can provide the player with an opportunity to operate the sword while being moved to a specific position." However, one operation means (one operation receiving part) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be provided using either of these modes.

As also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
・A non-suppressing operation reception performance in which a specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressing manner, and the process is performed from the generation of the set time (validity period) to the execution of the post-operation performance, and・We have prepared a suppression operation reception performance that suppresses a specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM playback), outputs it silently, or outputs it in a non-output state.Furthermore, as a suppression operation reception performance,
・The first suppression operation reception performance that suppresses a specific type of performance sound (for example, the performance sound of BGM playback) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception performance") ''), and - A second suppression operation reception effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM playback) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned ``suppression / automatic reception "Direction")
are available.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception performance, in addition,
・While the specific type of performance sound is being suppressed in a strong suppression mode (while being outputted in a suppressed mode, silently, or in a non-output state), the first operation mode is applied to the operating means. (in this case, the operation button 410) is given a non-moving reception performance under suppression, and a specific type of performance sound is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (in a suppression mode or output without sound). (while the user is in a non-output state), the control means is given an opportunity to operate in the second operation mode (in this case, the sword ornament 5001 is unsheathed). By preparing this, the performance when an operation opportunity is given is further improved.

FIG. 220 shows an example of a performance (movement reception performance under suppression) that appears “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance). FIG. In addition, regarding the production example (non-movement reception production under suppression) that appears when "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception production (suppression/automatic reception production), This is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 217 (period from timing tr40 until the post-operation performance is finished).

As shown in FIG. 220, in the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance), “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the second suppression operation reception performance is also In the presentation (suppression/automatic reception presentation), "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" is basically the same unless there is a disclaimer (Fig. 213, Fig. 214, 217 to 219), the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can also be adopted as appropriate.

However, when executing the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) in the second operation mode, the process of moving the operation receiving part to a specific position by driving force when the set time (validity period) occurs is performed. However, there is a problem as to when to perform this process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or variable time saving gaming state), as shown in FIGS. 220(c) and 220(h), first, The process of moving the operation receiver to a specific position is not performed until a timing tr40 at which a specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM reproduction) is set to a strong suppression mode arrives. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of production sound (production sound of BGM playback) is in a non-suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, even if the set time when production reception is allowed occurs, there is no opportunity to operate in the second operation mode. is not provided, and only the opportunity to operate in the first operation mode is provided. In other words, in this case, unless the specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM playback) is in the strong suppression mode, even if the operation opportunity is given, this will not be the second operation mode, so the player This makes it possible to prevent the user from performing an operation in an incorrect manner.

On the other hand, when a specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM playback) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility that the user is given the opportunity to operate in the second operation mode. However, when a specific type of performance sound (performance sound for BGM playback) is set to a strong suppression mode, the player may be asked to decide whether the operation opportunity will be given in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. ”, it is possible to prevent operational errors from occurring between them.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by keeping secret which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is provided until immediately before an operation opportunity is provided, from timing tr40 to A sense of tension and interest in the game are suitably maintained from the reception of the performance to the start of the performance after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 220(c) and 220(h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (validity period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. We are planning to do so. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the expectation level (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. A preview performance judgment is made to ensure that.

However, in this case, the production reception itself is permitted until a short time after the set time (validity period) occurs (until movement to a specific position by the operation receiver is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving section, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220(c) and 220(d), the time required to move the operation receiving part from the original position to the specific position is determined by the reception allowable sound. He is trying to set it as a time shorter than the time until the 1st aspect with the shortest output time finishes outputting among (1st permissible sounds). As a result, even if any mode (in addition to the first mode, the above-mentioned second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the acceptance permissible sound (first allowable sound), the production is accepted in the middle of the output state. (The output can be ended midway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult to cause any inconvenience in terms of performance.

Also, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiver from the original position to a specific position by driving force is such that there is no operation on the operation receiver and the operation receiver is moved to the specific position by driving force. The object is moved at a faster speed than the time required to move from the original position to the original position (see FIG. 220(h)). According to such a mode of movement, it becomes possible to emphasize that efforts are being made to reduce the amount of time that is actually saved as the set time (valid period), and it becomes possible to emphasize that the time that is actually saved as the set time (validity period) is reduced. It is now expected that employees will suppress their dissatisfaction.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when generating the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance), the set time (valid period) is set to the non-suppression period shown in FIG. 212. "Operation reception performance" for the setting time (valid period) of the operation reception performance of the mode (from timing tr31 to the post-operation performance) and the operation reception performance of the weak suppression mode (from timing tr50 to the post-operation performance) shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of "the time required to move the part from its original position to a specific position." According to such a configuration, when executing the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) in the second operation mode, a longer time value that more than compensates for the time that is substantially reduced is used. Since the set time (validity period) that lasted is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is possible to set a similar length of time when executing the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as mentioned above, during the period from timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, no production is accepted, and the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when generating the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance), the setting time (valid period) is the operation reception performance in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 212 (from timing tr31 to post-operation performance). ) and the set time (valid period) of the weak suppression mode operation reception performance (from timing tr50 to post-operation performance) shown in FIG. It is more desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of "time" and "time from timing tr42A to tr43 after activation of the automatic button function", respectively. In this case as well, in order to standardize the program, the same length of time should be set when the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) is executed in the first operation mode. is desirable.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) is being executed in the second operation mode, and there is no operation on the operation receiver within the set time, the same As shown in 220(a), (h) to (l), a production reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and based on the production reception, a post-operation display production is displayed on the production display device 1600 (first production member). (liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are at least each executed as the post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from comparing FIG. 220(g) and 220(l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) becomes shorter. There are concerns that interest in gaming will decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If there is no operation on the operation receiver within the set time, the "speed at which the operation receiver is moved from the specific position to the original position by driving force" is changed to "the speed at which the operation receiver is moved from the original position to the specific position". The speed is intentionally set to be slower than the actual speed, so that it can be maintained in a moving state for a relatively long period of time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for shortening the execution time of the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member), the operation receiving section can display the movable performance (post-operation display). Since the game can be expected to function as a part of the game, interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 220(h), the "move production from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation in response to the production reception being automatically generated (automatic button function). Although it is designed to start when a predetermined timing arrives during the execution of the performance, it may be started at the timing tr42A when the performance reception is automatically generated, similar to the post-operation performance.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from the specific position to the original position" is, this alone will not be enough time for the movable performance, and there is a concern that it will be difficult to maintain the interest in the game. Therefore, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 220(h), after the operation receiver is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), a vibration effect is performed in which the operation receiver is vibrated. As a result, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a nearby position) until the end of vibration of the operation receiver is determined by "the operation receiver that was not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a moving performance period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize a movable performance using "the operation receiving part that was not operated by the player", and as a result of automatically generating the performance reception, the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) It is now expected to suitably maintain the performance when the execution time of the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) becomes short. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiver is used as a movable effect if the operation receiver is made to emit light while the operation receiver is being moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to

Here, regarding the movable performance period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving part that was not operated by the player", it is assumed that the timing tr44 when the strong suppression mode ends is reached. , it is desirable that the process be completed before the timing tr44. As a result, the performance sound of the specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and it becomes possible to smoothly promote progress (switching of effects) in the production content in accordance with this.

Other points that differ from the case where the second suppression operation reception performance (suppression/automatic reception performance) is executed in the first operation mode include a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" as the second permissible sound (message sound). A message such as "Push in" and a simulated image based on the "Sword Decoration Image SYG" may be displayed as operation-related displays, thereby making it difficult for operational errors to occur. become.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode, but when the "specific type of performance sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operator is provided with an opportunity to perform an operation, it may encourage operational errors when the user makes a mistake in recognizing whether a weak suppression mode or a strong suppression mode is present. In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception production (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is The weak suppression mode was made to appear based on the reception of the production without being given, so there is no sense of unnecessary tension or anticipation that ``I might be given an opportunity to operate in the second operation mode.'' It will be possible to provide performance without having to have it.

In addition, in the above production example (second operation mode), even if there is an operation on the operation receiver within the set time, the same effect as shown in FIG. 220 ( As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) arrives within the period during which the post-operation performance is being performed, a vibration performance is performed in which the operation receiving section is vibrated. According to such a configuration, irrespective of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will soon be terminated and a new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the vibration effect will be started early based on the reception of the effect by the operation, so that the vibration effect will be started early during the period when the effect is being performed after the operation. It may be possible to further improve the game interest. That is, in this case, if there is an operation on the operation receiver within the set time, the vibration effect will be performed for a longer time than if there is no operation on the operation receiver within the set time.

Furthermore, in the above performance example, the process of moving the operation receiver to a specific position is not performed unless the specific type of performance sound (performance sound of BGM reproduction) is in a strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, if production reception is allowed when a specific type of production sound (production sound for BGM playback) is in a strongly suppressed mode, the specific type of production sound (production sound for BGM playback) will be in a non-suppression mode. or when the production sound of a specific type (BGM playback production sound) is in the weak suppression mode, the rate at which the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is granted (0 or 100) may be made higher.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation reception production in which the automatic button function can be activated, the set time (valid period) is set as the operation reception performance in which the automatic button function is not activated. It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the set time (valid period) plus "the time from when the automatic button function is activated until the set time ends". . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) with a longer time value is generated, which more than compensates for the time that is actually cut as the period during which production reception is allowed. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

By the way, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception performance that may occur during the normal gaming state,
・An operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) that is executed as a performance of the fluctuation pattern itself (design performance) based on the result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, and ・A special result is obtained in the performance judgment (notice judgment, etc.) As a condition, an operation reception performance (additional reception performance) that is performed as an additional performance to the variation pattern itself (performance pattern)
We are trying to prepare at least the following.

In other words, the "intrinsic reception effect" means that when a special result is obtained in the variation pattern judgment (determination as to which variation pattern to execute the symbol effect) based on the result of the jackpot judgment (a special variation pattern is selected). ), it is determined that the performance will be executed in accordance with the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, for "additional reception effects", even if a "predetermined result that can generate the relevant additional reception effects" is obtained in the variation pattern judgment (even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected), the corresponding This is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an "additional reception performance" is to be generated is obtained through a performance determination (such as a preview determination) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, once the performance according to the fluctuation pattern has started, the performance judgment is more important than the occurrence of the "intrinsic reception performance" which is linked to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. It can be said that the occurrence of "additional reception performance" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (advance judgment, etc.) is more beneficial to the player and more important in increasing interest in the game. In addition, even if the same performance content (performance pattern) appears as a performance according to the variation pattern, if an "additional reception performance" occurs within the performance, "additional reception performance" will occur within the performance. The proportion (expectation level) of a jackpot symbol appearing when symbol variation is stopped is higher than when "" does not occur.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception performance that may occur during the normal gaming state, the performance sound of a specific type (the performance sound of "BGM playback") is suppressed or Cases in which production reception is allowed while the sound is being output in silence or in a non-output state, and cases in which a specific type of production sound (production sound for "BGM playback") is being output in a non-suppressed manner. There are cases in which reception of performances is permitted. On the other hand, in the case of an additional reception performance that can occur during the normal gaming state, the reception of the performance is not allowed while the production is suppressed, output without sound, or in a non-output state. Production reception is allowed while a specific type of production sound is being output in a non-suppressed manner. In other words, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the performance reception is permitted, by paying attention to whether the specific type of performance sound is suppressed, output silently, or in a non-output state, additional It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that a reception performance will occur, and it is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the inherent reception performance that can occur during the normal gaming state can be performed even if no operation is detected within the set time when the performance reception is allowed. When executed in an automatic reception mode that allows post-effects to be generated, and when no operation is detected within the set time during which post-operation effects are allowed, non-automatic operation where the set time ends without generating post-operation effects. There are cases where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that may occur during the normal gaming state is not executed in an automatic reception mode, but is executed in a non-automatic reception mode. In other words, in this case, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception performance is occurring by paying attention to whether or not the performance reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time in the normal gaming state. As a result, players are expected to maintain their interest in the game until the performance is accepted.

FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 221, when fluctuation pattern 1 is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination performed at the start of symbol fluctuation (such as a preview determination according to fluctuation pattern 1), the preview performance At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute A. As a result of this performance determination, if it is determined that the preview performance A is to be executed, the preview performance A is applied to the symbol performance (performance pattern) when timing tr61 in the symbol performance based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. It is additionally executed (timings tr61 to tr62), and if it is not determined that the preview effect A is to be executed, the preview effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 within the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 will only be executed.

Here, if it is determined that the preview performance A is to be executed as a result of the performance determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display performance but also the performance sound and lamp performance are changed to the variation pattern 1. performed additionally to the performance). Note that "executing additionally" can be realized, for example, by displaying preview effect A on a layer with a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of variation pattern 1 itself appears. be. At this time, the preview effect A may be displayed in such a way that it covers all the symbol effects based on variation pattern 1 so that it is not visible, or it may cover only part of the symbol effects based on variation pattern 1. Preview effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of a lamp effect, the aspect of ``lamp effect according to the occurrence of preview effect A'' is output with priority over the ``lamp effect based on variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)''. In addition, in the case of production sound, by assigning "production sound according to preview production A" to a channel different from "production sound based on variation pattern 1", "production sound based on variation pattern 1 (production pattern)" can be assigned to a different channel. The ``effect sound corresponding to the preview effect A'' is additionally outputted in addition to the ``presentation sound''.

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 222, when variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of variation pattern judgment, first, in the performance judgment (such as advance notice judgment according to variation pattern 2) performed at the start of symbol variation, "additional At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the "target reception presentation". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this production example is the same as the "predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212." Therefore, as a result of this performance determination, if it is determined that the "additional reception performance" is to be executed, the "additional reception performance" is changed to a symbol performance based on variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the timing tr31 within comes, it will be additionally executed for the symbol production (production pattern) (from timing tr31 until the post-operation production is finished), and the "additional reception production" will be executed. If it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol presentation based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception presentation" will not appear and the symbol presentation (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 will only be executed. Become.

Here, regarding the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. 222, the performance sound of "BGM playback" based on variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in a non-suppressed mode. The first permissible sound is output at timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at timing tr32, and the set time ends at timing tr33 without the automatic button function being activated. , these have been described above with reference to FIG. 212 and the like, so a description thereof will be omitted. In other words, the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. 222 is the "performance content when the low expectation non-suppression reception performance is executed in a non-automatic reception mode" shown in FIG. 212, without any special disclaimer. The parts are basically the same, and the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can also be adopted as appropriate.

However, in the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) according to this production example, as shown in FIG. 222, the post-operation performance according to the performance reception is executed in the form of the above-mentioned another example in FIG. 212. It is written as. Therefore, in the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. Then, the "post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member)" and the "post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member)" are defined as the post-operation performance. At least it will occur, but regarding the performance after the operation,
・The "post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member)" ends at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the performance is accepted. ,
・The "post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member)" is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined certain period of time has elapsed from the timing when the production reception was received. It happens.

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in Figure 223, when variation pattern 3 is selected as a result of variation pattern determination, which result will be obtained in the effect judgment (such as advance notice judgment according to variation pattern 3) performed at the start of symbol variation. At timing tr40 in the symbol performance based on the variation pattern 3, the processing to change the production sound of "BGM playback" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed regardless of whether the "strong suppression mode" At timing tr41, which arrives while the is appearing, an "intrinsic reception performance" will occur as a symbol performance based on the variation pattern 3 (from timing tr41 until the post-operation performance is ended).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this production example is the same as "the specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 213 to 215, or 217 to 220, etc." Therefore, regarding the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) shown in FIG. output state or non-audible state such as non-output state), when timing tr41 arrives, the first permissible sound is output, a set time (valid period) occurs at timing tr42, and the set time When "timing tr42A" before the timing tr43 that ends elapses without reception of the effect, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated. 217 to 220", etc., so the explanation will be omitted. That is, the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the content of the "suppression/automatic reception performance" shown in FIG. 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, etc.) can also be adopted as appropriate.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period when the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in a strongly suppressed mode, the "intrinsic reception" is performed as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Although "additional reception performance" may occur, "additional reception performance" that is executed additionally to the symbol performance based on the fluctuation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM playback" ”During the period when the production sound is in a non-suppressed mode, an “intrinsic reception production”, which is a symbol production based on a fluctuation pattern, may occur, and additional effects may occur to the symbol production based on a fluctuation pattern. There are also cases where "additional reception effects" are executed.

In other words, in this case, when the operation reception performance occurs while the performance sound of "BGM playback" based on the fluctuation pattern is strongly suppressed, the possibility that the operation reception performance is an "additional reception performance" is excluded. Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a set time (validity period) during which the production reception is allowed while an environment is created in which the user concentrates on the mode in which the operation reception production is executed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is being output in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to recognize that an additional reception effect may be occurring. As a result, players are expected to maintain their interest in gaming.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3, it is necessary to make them appear in one variation pattern (e.g. It is desirable that the "additional reception performance" and the "intrinsic reception performance" be allowed to appear sequentially even within the performance corresponding to a specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the "additional reception performance" occur at a timing before the "intrinsic reception performance".

More preferably, within the performance corresponding to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the production sound of "BGM playback" is set in a non-suppressed mode, and the "additional reception production" and the "intrinsic reception production" '' can appear one after another, and while the effect sound of ``BGM reproduction'' is strongly suppressed, ``intrinsic reception performance'' can further appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether "additional reception performance" or "intrinsic reception performance" is occurring depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , cases where it is difficult to determine whether "additional reception performance" or "intrinsic reception performance" is occurring (non-suppression mode) appear, and the suppression mode for the production sound of "BGM playback" Through this, it becomes possible to improve one's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, if an operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) occurs when the production sound of "BGM playback" is strongly suppressed in a symbol production according to a specific variation pattern, It is desirable to prevent the "additional reception performance" from occurring within the period from the end of the reception performance until the symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, when an operation reception performance occurs while the performance sound of "BGM playback" is strongly suppressed, there is a possibility that the operation reception performance is an "additional reception performance". Not only will it be eliminated, but even the possibility of "additional reception effects" appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped will be eliminated, so "additional reception effects" will occur. In order to avoid creating any sense of expectation, we will determine in what manner the generated "intrinsic reception effect" will be executed (acceptable reception sound, type of operating means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.). You will be able to concentrate.

In addition, when an "additional reception performance" occurs, "intrinsic reception performance (both non-suppression mode and strong suppression mode)" occurs later than when the "additional reception performance" does not occur. As mentioned above, it is desirable to increase the rate of execution in a highly anticipated manner (acceptable sound, type of operation means, manner of post-operation effect, etc.).

Also, as mentioned above, when the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) will always occur during the period when the strong suppression mode is set. You can. In this case, among the multiple fluctuation patterns that are selected as selection candidates in the fluctuation pattern determination, there is a "strong suppression mode, but the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) is not performed during the period of the strong suppression mode." "Variation patterns that do not occur" are not included, but "variation patterns that, when set to a strong suppression mode, generate an operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) during the period of the strong suppression mode" are included. . Alternatively, even if the production sound of "BGM playback" is set to a strong suppression mode, the period during which the production sound is set to the strong suppression mode may end without the operation reception production (intrinsic reception production) occurring. You can also do this. In this case, among the multiple fluctuation patterns that are selected as selection candidates in the fluctuation pattern determination, there is a "strong suppression mode, but the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) is not performed during the period of the strong suppression mode." A variation pattern that does not occur, and a variation pattern that causes an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) to occur during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set.'' .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) occurs while the performance sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "strong suppression mode" is selected. Even if the player does not notice that the player is in a "suppression mode", he or she can recognize that the possibility of the "additional reception performance" occurring is eliminated based on the following performance elements.

In other words, if the ``intrinsic reception effect'' occurs while the effect sound of ``BGM playback'' is in the ``strong suppression mode,'' first, even when the first permissible sound is the ``additional reception effect,'' Even if the production sound that can be output is output for the same period of time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"), based on the first allowable sound, it is not "additional reception production" but " This makes it possible to recognize that "intrinsic reception performance" is occurring. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 222) that is output when the "additional reception effect" occurs is such that even if the effect is accepted while in the output state, the output will be terminated midway. However, when the production sound of "BGM playback" is in "strong suppression mode" and the "intrinsic reception production" occurs, The first permissible sound (see FIG. 223) is such that, when a production is accepted while in the output state, the output is ended midway based on the production reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the first permissible sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, by checking whether or not the second permissible sound is output, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second permissible sound does not necessarily need to be prepared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, operation-related displays (displays prompting operation) that appear within a set time (validity period) in which presentation reception is permitted are also provided. , When the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "strong suppression mode", the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs (with a message displayed), and the "additional reception performance" occurs. (no message displayed), and this also makes it possible to recognize that the possibility of an "additional reception effect" occurring has been eliminated.

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception performance" that occurs when the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", the automatic button function described above can be activated. In "additional reception effect", the automatic button function mentioned above is not activated, and this also eliminates the possibility of "additional reception effect" occurring. It is possible to recognize.

In this way, if the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the production elements related to the "suppression mode", various production It is relatively clear that the possibility that "additional reception effects" are occurring has been eliminated, as a different aspect appears than when "additional reception effects" are occurring in the element. It can be easily recognized, and it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the "intrinsic reception performance."

On the other hand, if the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", there are similarities between the "additional reception performance" and various production elements. By making it difficult to recognize whether an ``intrinsic reception effect'' or an ``additional reception effect'' is occurring, it is possible to prevent an ``additional reception effect'' from occurring. We are trying to provide a performance that makes people aware of the possibility that they might be there.

FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the production contents that appear when the "intrinsic reception production" as a symbol production based on the fluctuation pattern occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is set to the "non-suppression mode". It is. In addition, the "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224 is a variation pattern that is different from the "fluctuation pattern that can generate the operation reception performance shown in FIGS. 222 and 223" when a variation pattern is selected. It may also be something that occurs as a pattern effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception production shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is selected, a symbol production corresponding to the specific variation pattern is generated. .

As shown in Figure 224, the ``intrinsic acceptance performance'' that occurs when the ``non-inhibition mode'' is set is also the ``intrinsic reception effect'' that occurs when the ``strong inhibition mode'' is set, as shown in Figure 223. Similar to the "target reception performance", no matter which result is obtained in the performance judgment (advance judgment), it always occurs when a predetermined timing within the symbol presentation (here, timing tr71) arrives. It has become a thing.

However, the first permissible sound (first mode) output when the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224 occurs is the same as the first permissible sound (first mode) output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if a performance is accepted while in the output state, the output is not ended midway, but is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish based on this whether an "intrinsic reception performance" or an "additional reception performance" is occurring. .

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the second permissible sound is not output together with the output of the first permissible sound (first mode), and in this respect also the second permissible sound is not output as shown in FIG. It is the same as "additional reception performance".

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224, the operation means to be operated is displayed as an operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (validity period) in which reception of the performance is permitted. Only the simulated image and a gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed.In this respect, this is similar to the "additional reception effect" shown in Fig. 222. It has become.

Furthermore, in the "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword ornament 5001" is not the object to be operated. This point is also similar to the "additional reception presentation" shown in FIG. 222.

Furthermore, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, if no operation is detected within the set time (validity period), the automatic button function described above will not be activated and the post-operation effect will not be activated. Timing tr73 is reached when the set time (validity period) ends without any occurrence, and in this respect, it is similar to the "additional reception performance" shown in FIG. 222.

In this way, if the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the sound effect of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", the sound effect of "BGM playback" will change to the "strong suppression mode". Unlike the case where an ``intrinsic reception effect'' occurs, various elements of the effect are the same as when an ``additional reception effect'' occurs, and it is possible that an ``additional reception effect'' occurs. You will be able to become aware of your sexuality.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", the "intrinsic reception production (intrinsic reception production in which the automatic button function is not activated)" ” occurs, there are cases in which the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output, and cases in which the set time occurs without outputting the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the "additional reception performance" occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) itself is not output. The set time is not generated, and the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, if the production reception is allowed while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", when the reception permission sound is output, the "intrinsic reception production" On the other hand, when the reception permissive sound is not output, it is not the "additional reception performance" but the "intrinsic reception performance" that is occurring. You will be able to recognize that you are in a state that is occurring. In addition, when generating the "intrinsic reception performance" while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", whether or not the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output is determined. , it is desirable to determine it according to the type of variation pattern rather than the performance judgment. An "intrinsic reception performance" in a non-suppressing mode in which a reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output, and an "intrinsic reception performance" in a non-suppressing mode in which a reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is not output. may be executed sequentially within the same symbol presentation (for example, a symbol presentation based on a specific variation pattern).

Furthermore, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception performance in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, when the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is output, the "intrinsic reception performance" and the "additional reception performance" are activated. On the other hand, when the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception performance is an "intrinsic reception performance". It becomes like this.

As mentioned above, in the "additional reception performance", it is possible to output the first permissible sound in a manner different from the first manner based on the result of the performance determination (notice determination). It may also be possible to set it so that it cannot be output when the "intrinsic reception performance" occurs while the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode" (for example, the "specific reception production" shown in FIG. ``Aspect''). However, regarding the different modes, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first allowable sound is lower than that of output in the first mode.

With respect to the "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224, other examples and modifications regarding the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212 may be used as appropriate for parts where there is no particular disclaimer.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the production judgment is performed while the symbol production is being performed, but the production judgment is actually This is performed at the start of symbol variation.

In addition, in the performance examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 224, the appearance of the performance after the operation according to the reception of the performance is when a jackpot is obtained in the jackpot judgment and when the jackpot is lost in the jackpot judgment. It may also be different. For example, if a jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination, the effect will be as shown in Figures 212 to 224, whereas if the jackpot has been lost in the jackpot determination, The post-operation presentation may be performed in a manner different from the presentation example shown in 224.

As described above, effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been achieved by executing a combination of programs that individually control various effect devices, programs that link a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs were created by highly skilled programmers, and were written using program codes that expressed the operation details and control procedures of the performance device for each preview content in addition to commands related to the fluctuation patterns. In LCD drawing, individual effect drawing data is called up in the frame in which the effect is executed, and multiple effect drawings (background, design, preview, pending, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent years, gaming machines have been required to execute a wide variety of performances in order to improve the performance of the hardware and to increase the interest of the gaming machines, and it has been necessary to implement complex performance control. As a result, individual programmers were required to have sophisticated skills, the number of development steps increased, and it became difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of program code for the production control program increases, the number of man-hours required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving its quality also increases.

Therefore, as mentioned above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of this embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve quality, it is recommended that the effects executed in conjunction with liquid crystal drawing (image display) be realized by program code. By outputting program data for gaming machines using a tool that creates LCD drawing effects, and executing various effects based on the output program data, development time can be shortened and quality improved. I try to do that.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks, each of which indicates the content of the effect. Each block is attached with a flag (usability information) indicating whether or not a performance based on the block can be executed. This flag (usability information) is stored as rewritable information on the RAM, for example.

In the scenario data, for example, blocks as many as the number of performances prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the performance determination are combined in chronological order. In other words, when the starting conditions for starting symbol fluctuations are met, first a performance judgment is made as to which type of performance is to be generated among these effects, and once the result is obtained, the corresponding Based on the obtained results, the flag (availability information) is set to ON for the block corresponding to the production type for which the judgment result that it should be executed is obtained, and the judgment result that it should be executed is obtained. For the block corresponding to the performance type that is not available, the flag (usability information) is maintained in an off state. As a result, after the symbol fluctuation (fluctuation pattern) starts, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) chronologically (every unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the block set to the on state. Only the type of performance will be selectively executed.

Here, the scenario data may be different data prepared for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared independently of the variation pattern. If different data are prepared for each type of variation pattern, only the blocks corresponding to the production types that may occur separately for each variation pattern will be configured as scenario data that are combined in chronological order. Among these blocks, only the flag (availability information) of the block determined to be the execution target is operated to the on state. On the other hand, when data is prepared in common for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to blocks) corresponding to all production types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure, etc. This may be realized by turning on only the flag (usability information) of the block determined to be the execution target among those blocks. Furthermore, the scenario data that is prepared without depending on the fluctuation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing that is read out while processing (analyzing) the block (described below). In this case, scenario data that corresponds to the type of variation pattern and scenario data that does not correspond to the type of variation pattern will be prepared, and the scenario data that corresponds to the type of variation pattern will be prepared. Since the scenario data that is not used can be used in common for multiple types of variation patterns, processing load and storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, it is necessary to display or hide effects related to the lottery, replace effects and symbols, and perform interactive effects in response to external input by the player. It is impossible to achieve all the effects with just that.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, processing identification information (effect SW) for calling a program that executes an effect at a predetermined timing or executes a predetermined control is stored in a block or in a block. It can be set (incorporated) in the LCD display scheduler data associated with the . Here, the processing identification information (effect SW) is prepared as many types as the types of programs to be called, and each type is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (performance SW) that can always function in an on state may be prepared. As a result, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, LCD presentation scheduler data, etc., the The process with the specified content will be called, and the called process will be executed. Note that the process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or may indicate a number in a table in which the numbers of the program functions to be called are stored. It may be.

When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) embedded process identification information while executing and analyzing scenario data, blocks, LCD display scheduler data, etc., it executes a program function according to the type of the acquired process identification information. Dynamically invoke (callback). Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than LCD effects (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of accessories, etc.), and it is also possible to It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting and updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling a program function using process identification information, it is possible to display or hide drawings using a plurality of blocks, replace effects and symbols, and realize interactive effects in response to external inputs by the player.

The program functions called by the callbacks are built into the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and there is no need to newly create them for each type of gaming machine. Therefore, even designers and project creators who do not have advanced programming knowledge only need to design the various production contents, and all that is required is to set process identification information that calls predefined program functions. This makes it possible to easily realize even complex presentation specifications. Furthermore, by using the production creation tool to create production blocks (LCD production scheduler data) for each production unit, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period. By performing a test using flags (availability information) and process identification information without performing a test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control board 1310), a production control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing related to various productions based on a variation pattern according to the determination, and image data to a display area based on the processing performed by the production control means. The effect control means reads out time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.) and outputs the time-series image information. The apparatus is equipped with image information processing means capable of executing processing for displaying an image based on.

Furthermore, the time-series image information according to this embodiment (the above-mentioned scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal display scheduler data, etc.) may include processing identification information at least in part. The information processing means is capable of acquiring process identification information from the time-series image information and calling a process according to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while image-related processing is performed for each unit of time (for example, one frame), processing related to production elements (lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) other than images can be performed based on the schedule for image display. As a result, when different production elements collaborate to realize a single production, it is possible to prevent the start time from being different between production elements. Become.

This point will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, processing identification information is acquired for each unit time in time-series image information read when a specific variation pattern is executed as a variation pattern. It is possible to include intervals. In such a configuration, if the time-series image information itself, which is data that specifies "processing for displaying an image" in chronological order, includes processing identification information, which is data that specifies reading out the process. The time-series image information that is read when a specific variation pattern is executed as a variation pattern can include an interval in which processing identification information is acquired for each unit time, so detailed timing Even if it is necessary to perform the effect processing in the display image, it is possible to prevent a deviation from occurring between the effect and the effect based on the display image.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, production reception is performed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is outputted in a suppressed mode, silently, or in a non-output state. It is possible to execute the special operation reception performance that is allowed. In this regard, although this will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a pre-permission operation related display is displayed when such a special operation reception performance occurs, and a display indicating that the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception performance. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the device is in the permissible state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the scenario data and blocks described above, or liquid crystal performance scheduler data, etc.). That is, in the special operation reception performance according to the above configuration, the reception of the performance is allowed while the specific type of performance sound is suppressed or output silently, or in a non-output state. They will be expected to concentrate on However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be poor as the specific type of performance sound is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display that is performed when the special operation reception performance occurs, and the permissible operation-related display that is performed when the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception performance. Since the images are displayed based on mutually different time-series image information, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display performances, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if no operation is detected within the period in which presentation reception is allowed, a special operation reception performance that can generate a post-operation performance is executed. It is considered possible. In this regard, although this will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a pre-permission operation related display is displayed when such a special operation reception performance occurs, and a display indicating that the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception performance. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the device is in the permissible state is displayed based on mutually different time-series image information (the scenario data and blocks described above, or liquid crystal performance scheduler data, etc.). That is, in such a special operation reception performance, even if no operation is detected within the period during which performance reception is permitted, a post-operation performance can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and as a result cannot confirm the performance after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the display related to the pre-allowed operation that is performed when the special operation reception performance occurs, and the display related to the operation that is being allowed, that is performed when the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception performance, are as follows. Since the images are displayed based on mutually different time-series image information, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display performances, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data associated with the block, and uses the read information to control the liquid crystal display. It is possible to output the information to the section 1512. This point will be explained later, but there are two types of blocks: type 1 blocks that are read out after the wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives, and type 1 blocks that are read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A second type block will be prepared.

More specifically, the first type block is a block whose availability information is set to ON at the start of a variation pattern, and which has a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the timing to start the performance arrives. It is possible to configure the data to be read out later. Regarding the second type block, for example, in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data associated with the first type block, the availability information corresponding to the second type block is used. It is possible to configure the data to be read out without passing a wait time (wait processing period) by setting it to the on state.

In other words, in this case, the type 2 block no longer depends on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at multiple timings and between multiple fluctuation patterns. As a result, it is expected that processing load and memory capacity will be reduced, and it will also be possible to facilitate production design and production changes.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the time-series image information (blocks or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) While the process based on the scheduler data) is in the execution state, the second time-series image information (second block or second liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) is made readable, and the second time-series image information is read out. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is brought into an execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information, which is in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to save the effort of terminating processing based on the first time-series image information midway, and a reduction in processing load and memory capacity is expected.

These technical features will be explained below. Before explaining the technical features, the "block" according to this embodiment will be explained again. When the image displayed on is composed of "multiple image elements (multiple layers)", it is prepared separately from those image elements (layers), and in order to display the image element. It is used for processing for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output by the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

Here, the process (processing within the peripheral control unit 1511) for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data is executed within the "peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 95)" which is activated for each frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out, and each A drawing list is created based on the information read out for each frame and sent to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512) reads image data based on the drawing list to create a display image, and then outputs it to the display area, thereby displaying it on the effect display device 1600. The performance will be realized.

Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies "information corresponding to image data (image number)" for each unit time, and in this case, the "LCD Since it has the function of "production scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal production scheduler data" separately from the "block", and it is possible to omit this.

However, the "block" in this explanatory example specifies the type of "LCD presentation scheduler data", and the current display is based on the "LCD presentation scheduler data" associated with the "block". It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and if the information is present, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). A plurality of "LCD presentation scheduler data" may be associated with one "block", and in this case, these "LCD presentation scheduler data" are to be executed in a predetermined order, or Alternatively, any of these "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data" will be selectively executed.

In addition, in the "block" according to this explanatory example, the "liquid crystal display" includes a schedule for each frame regarding information (image number) corresponding to "image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)". In addition to ``scheduler data'', there is also information on which to execute as ``processing related to lamp emission'', information on which to execute as ``processing related to movable body movement'', and information on which to execute as ``processing related to sound output''. It also includes information on whether to execute it. That is, in this case, if a "block" for realizing a specific preview effect is read out, based on the "block", "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific preview effect and " "Processing related to lamp light emission", "Processing related to movable object movement", and "Processing related to sound output" are read and executed respectively, so different production elements (images, lamps, movable objects, sound ) to realize one performance (specific preview performance) in cooperation with each other, it is possible to prevent the start times from shifting between the performance elements.

As mentioned above, a "block" constitutes one scenario data together with other blocks or alone, and among the scenario data, "blocks" whose availability information is on are By selectively executing (analyzing) only the following, the performance is executed in a manner according to the result of the performance determination.

However, regarding scenario data and blocks, it is sufficient that they have a relationship such as "scenario data can be configured as a combination of multiple blocks, each of which indicates the content of the production", and it is separate from "blocks". There are no limitations on the detailed implementation method, including whether "liquid crystal display scheduler data" is provided.

FIG. 225 conceptually shows an example of the processing procedure for realizing various display effects using "scenario data" and "blocks" when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of jackpot determination. This is a time chart. In addition, in FIG. 225, "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data" is described as "animation list", but these terms have the same meaning.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, in the "layer 2" scenario data, there are multiple The blocks (symbol block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, symbol block D) are combined in chronological order. However, in this embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data is also included, for which only one block indicating the content of the effect is prepared.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this explanatory example also includes "one that is configured so that any one of a plurality of blocks that are associated with each other can be selectively executed." In this case, by operating only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected block among multiple blocks to the ON state, and leaving the unavailability information corresponding to other blocks to the OFF state, multiple blocks can be Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the blocks according to this explanatory example also include "configured to be able to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated liquid crystal presentation scheduler data", In this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected LCD performance scheduler data among the multiple LCD performance scheduler data is turned on, and the unavailability information corresponding to other LCD performance scheduler data remains in the OFF state. By doing so, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal presentation scheduler data may be made selectively executable.

Now, assuming that the starting conditions for symbol variation (pending consumption) are satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information regarding the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information regarding fluctuation patterns, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads scenario data according to this information (fluctuation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution. A performance determination is made as to which block (performance) is to be executed among a plurality of blocks (such as a block corresponding to a preview performance). Then, among the multiple blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for those blocks (effects) for which it has been determined that the effect will be executed, the availability information is turned on (set) and the block is executed. For blocks (effects) for which no effect judgment has been made, the usability information remains in the OFF state.

In addition, the availability information associated with each block (performance) should be operated (set) to the off state when starting a pattern presentation (variable presentation using decorative patterns), such as when reading out scenario data. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described process regarding which block's availability information is to be operated (set) to the on state is performed.

Here, regarding the "block" whose availability information is operated (set) to the on state when starting the symbol presentation, the symbol presentation will be executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol presentation starts based on the scenario data, or the scenario It is executed (analyzed) following another block (effect) started based on the data, or executed (analyzed) after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block. analysis). However, blocks (effects) include things that may be executed at multiple timings within a single variation pattern, and items that may be executed at multiple variation patterns. In other words, if you create a system in which the availability information of all blocks to be executed within the variation is operated (set) to the ON state when starting a symbol production, "even if the production mode appears with the same content, , it becomes necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) with different wait times (wait processing periods) set just because their execution timings are different. That is, in this case, different data is prepared even though the content of the effect is the same, and the effect is executed based on the data, so there is a concern that the processing load and memory capacity may be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution, but when executing a symbol effect, the specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution. ) without operating (setting) the availability information of ) to the on state, it is possible to start the symbol production with the off state. Examples of such specific blocks (specific effects) in FIG. 225 include "block E for appearance EF," "block E for waiting for operation," and "block E for after operation," but these blocks This will be discussed later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as a performance that clearly indicates whether the player has won or lost the jackpot (a performance for which special performance content for the jackpot is prepared).

Furthermore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if a block (effect) is determined to be executed as a result of the effect determination, this block (effect) may be executed in a different variation pattern or at a different timing. In the case where there is a possibility that the symbol performance may occur, the availability information is not operated (set) to the ON state when the symbol performance is executed, and the symbol performance can be started while the symbol performance remains in the OFF state. Examples of such blocks include "block A for waiting for operation" and "block D for waiting for appearance EF & operation" in FIG. 225, and these blocks will also be described later.

The example shown in FIG. 225 assumes that the starting condition is satisfied at timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of variation pattern. Next, a performance judgment is made as to which of the blocks associated with the scenario data thus read out and the availability information attached to the LCD performance scheduler data should be operated (set) to the on state. Then, an operation (setting) is performed on the availability information based on the result of the performance determination. The scenario data is then executed (analyzed) for each layer under the operation (setting) of the availability information, so that the performance progresses in a manner according to the result of the performance determination.

However, instead of this, before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern, the performance judgment according to the type of fluctuation pattern may be performed. good. In other words, in this case, the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the LCD performance scheduler data are the results of the performance judgment performed before the scenario data is read. Each operation will be performed based on the following.

Here, in "Layer 1" among the multiple layers, regarding the "background image" that is displayed when the symbol presentation is not being executed (the symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is not being executed). This corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in "Layer 1", a new block is not read out upon the arrival of timing ts1, and blocks that are already in the execution state (normal background blocks) are continued to be executed ( analysis).

More specifically, in the normal background block, "which image data" should be output as "image data for background image" stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and "at which timing"? ``LCD presentation scheduler data for normal background'', which is information about (time-series image information), is associated. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "liquid crystal display scheduler data for normal background" every unit time (one frame), and as a result, "image data for background image (video or Each time information corresponding to a still image) is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (a drawing list) may be created by combining the information obtained from other frames, and the information may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule specified by the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Regarding the blocks and scenario data associated with this "LCD production scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on process is completed, the corresponding production state (normal production state, high precision production state, special production mode, etc.) ) It is desirable that the background image (background video) with the same content be set as time-series image information that is displayed in a loop every predetermined time. In addition, instead of creating a single piece of information (drawing list) together with information obtained from other frames, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 displays information corresponding to "image data for background image (video or still image)". It may also be sent to. In short, any form of information corresponding to "image data for background image (moving image or still image)" may be sent to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512.

In addition, the normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is SP When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on "layer 3" is preferentially displayed and is hidden in the effect display device 1600. However, as for internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3", "LCD production scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on "Layer 1". The processing related to the normal background image based on the . It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach ends, the normal background is displayed again. ``Symbol block D'' for displaying a stopped symbol is executed. Thereby, when a jackpot symbol appears, it becomes possible to easily recognize in which performance state the player has won, and it becomes possible to appropriately promote understanding of the game.

On the other hand, "Layer 2" corresponds to a block (design block) of scenario data regarding "effect design (design displayed on the effect display device 1600)". In the specific variation pattern shown in Figure 225, the SP reach effect is developed, so in the "layer 2" scenario data, "LCD effect scheduler data for pre-reach variation" is associated. "Symbol block A" is associated with "LCD presentation scheduler data for normal reach variation" and "symbol block B" is associated with "LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach variation". It is determined that "block C" and "block D for symbols" which are associated with "liquid crystal production scheduler data for stopped symbols" are executed (analyzed) in sequence.

However, in recent years, during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, the "effect design" is often displayed in a small size in the effect display device 1600, and furthermore, "after the SP reach background is displayed, it is temporarily changed to the normal background." There may also be a production progress such as "The SP reach background is then displayed again." In other words, in this case, if we simply execute (analyze) the display schedule for the "production design" and the display schedule for the "SP reach background" for each layer, there is a concern that discrepancies may occur if some abnormality occurs. Therefore, the "symbol block C" associated with "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach variation" may be executed based on the display schedule related to "SP reach background". In this case, the processing related to the background image will function to manage the schedule of the production symbols.

For example, to call "processing to turn on the availability information of symbol block C" at a predetermined timing in "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" corresponding to "SP reach background block" described later. By attaching processing identification information, "symbol block C" and "symbol block D" can be executed based on the display schedule related to "SP reach background". In this case, the availability information for "symbol block C" and "symbol block D" will not only remain in the off state when starting the symbol presentation, but also that "symbol block A" will remain in the off state. ” and “symbol block B” and are not included in the scenario data corresponding to “symbol block B” and are configured as separate scenario data.

Furthermore, "Layer 3" corresponds to blocks of scenario data (SP reach background blocks, SP ending background blocks) regarding "background images after the start of the SP reach effect". In this respect, the "background image after the start of the SP ready-to-reach effect" should not be displayed at the time when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the "Layer 3" scenario data, a wait time (wait processing period) is set that functions to prevent the block of "background images after the start of SP reach effect" from being executed until the corresponding timing arrives. There is. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has passed since the start of the symbol production, the "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" are sequentially executed (analyzed) and the processing is performed accordingly. Since the information can be read out frame by frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

In other words, in this case, the blocks include type 1 blocks (blocks corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) that are read out after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives; This includes type 2 blocks (blocks corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) that are read out without a wait time (wait processing period). Type 2 blocks are no longer dependent on the set value for wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as common data at all presentation timings, helping to reduce processing load and memory capacity. Not only is this expected, but it will also be possible to facilitate production design and production changes.

In this regard, in the SP reach production, after starting the display production with the same content regardless of whether the jackpot is won or lost, in the middle of the production, the display content for the jackpot (for example, production content where the character wins) and the content for the loss It is often configured to indicate a jackpot determination result by branching to one of the production contents (for example, production contents in which a character loses, etc.). In this case, even though the same display effect is executed until the middle stage of the SP reach effect regardless of whether there is a jackpot or not, they are displayed in different blocks (a block for the jackpot, a block for the loss). ) or image data, there is a concern that it will have an adverse effect on the processing load and memory capacity.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the scenario data regarding the SP reach performance includes a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the jackpot and the loss, and the block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the jackpot and the loss. It is divided into blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data depending on the time of failure, and these blocks are executed sequentially. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and memory capacity.

By the way, in the scenario data regarding the SP ready-to-reach performance, the "SP ready-to-reach background block" is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, "LCD display scheduler data for SP ready-to-reach background" corresponding to the "SP ready-to-reach background block" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, but in the "LCD production scheduler data for SP reach background", there is a section in which the same processing identification information is acquired for each unit time (1 frame). This allows the production acceptance period (validity period) to be generated by frame-by-frame management of liquid crystal production scheduler data, rather than time management using a timer or the like.

For example, in the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed (analysis ) Processing identification information of "X1" is attached to each frame from timing ts31 immediately after processing. Each time the processing identification information of "X1" is read out, the following "processing X1" is read out and executed.
Processing X1. A process in which a performance determination is performed as to whether or not to generate a post-operation performance corresponding to "post-operation block C" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time is the "performance reception period (in which production can be accepted by operation)". In the "processing The operation (setting) is performed. As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out every unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal display scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read out every unit time. Data C" will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, as well as "processing related to lamp emission" and "processing related to movable body movement" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing related to sound output", etc. are started, thereby making it possible to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block C".

In addition, even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block C" is started, the "LCD display scheduler for SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" will be executed. data” is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when a production is accepted in the middle of a section (production reception period) in which processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time, "SP reach background The process identification information (here, ``X1'') is read out from the ``LCD presentation scheduler data'', and the ``process X1'' corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "processing By determining that the execution has started, the "processing X1" is ended without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, "X1") are lined up from timing ts31, but the second process identification information (here, "X1") is read out first. The production was accepted in "Processing I am assuming the case. In this case, although there is no longer a need to read out the third and fourth processing identification information (here "X1") that is blacked out in the figure, "LCD display scheduler for SP reach background" The data will be automatically read out as the data is executed every unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, a process such as ``The post-operation effect has been executed, so end the process X1'' is executed in the above ``process X1'' corresponding to the process identification information (here, ``X1''). As a result, the processing related to performance determination is substantially invalidated (the performance reception is not allowed).

On the other hand, when no performance judgment is made in "Processing The processing X1 is ended with the availability information kept in the OFF state. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (here "X1") is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the "LCD display scheduler for SP reach background" is displayed for each unit time (1 frame). The processing identification information (here, "X1") is read out from the "data" and the corresponding "processing X1" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above section ends at the fourth process identification information (here "X1"), the fourth process identification information is read and If the performance determination is not made in the process X1, the subsequent performance will proceed without executing the post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect is determined in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the “SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out the "processing X1 that can generate a post-operation performance" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data" is acquired. However, simply by analyzing such information, it becomes possible to effectively function as a production acceptance period (validity period), so it is possible to suitably facilitate and standardize production design. Become.

Note that FIG. 225 merely shows such processing as a concept, and in reality, processing identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If the period is to function as a presentation reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same processing identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the production reception period that occurs at timing ts31, but the same can be said for production reception periods that occur at other timings. Further, as mentioned above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. good.

Furthermore, in the "LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, processing identification information (here, "1") related to the operation presentation is attached even at timing ts41. However, the process identification information of "1" does not read out the "process in which a production judgment is made as to whether or not to generate a production after operation", but the following "process 1" is read and executed. It has become.
Processing 1. Precursive effects (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggest that the ``performance acceptance period (valid period) during which the production can be accepted by operation'' will occur soon, and players who are in a state where the production acceptance period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" to the ON state in order to perform the operation waiting production (the above-mentioned sample image, gauge display, etc.) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "block D for appearance EF & operation waiting (LCD presentation scheduler data D for appearance EF & operation waiting)" in addition to "LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach background". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background". become. In other words, in this case, the execution of the "Appearance EF & operation waiting block D" may be started at any timing in the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" or at multiple timings, or the "LCD display for SP reach background" Since it is easy to start execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "LCD performance scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "performance scheduler data", the performance design is simplified and standardized. It becomes possible to suitably achieve this.

Here, when the "Appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "LCD presentation scheduler data D for appearance EF & operation waiting" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read out. . These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD production scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting", first of all, while production reception is not allowed, "production reception by operation" A section is provided in which image information (moving images or still images) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a production acceptance period (validity period) in which a production can be performed will occur soon is obtained.

However, in the "LCD effect scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting", the effect reception period is occurring from the middle of the process, and the operation waiting effect prompting the player to operate (the above-mentioned sample image and gauge A section appears in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to the display (display, etc.) is acquired, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "LCD presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, "Y3" is executed for each frame from timing ts42. The processing identification information is attached so that it is lined up. Each time the processing identification information of "Y3" is read out, the following "processing Y3" is read out and executed.
Processing Y3. A process in which a performance determination is performed as to whether or not to generate a post-operation performance corresponding to "post-operation block D" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, "Y3") is attached for each unit time is defined as "the production acceptance period (valid period) during which the production can be accepted by operation. )”. Moreover, in the "processing Y3", when the performance is determined, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D (liquid crystal performance scheduler data D for appearance EF & operation waiting)" is the basis for reading out the "processing Y3". The availability information of the "post-operation block D" associated with the same "layer 6" is operated (set) to the on state.

In other words, in this case, when the "post-operation block D" is read, various processes including the "post-operation LCD presentation scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block D (LCD presentation scheduler data for after-operation)" is replaced by "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" which was in the middle of execution. The liquid crystal display scheduler data D) will be put into the execution state at "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, by simply reading out the "post-operation block D," the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D This makes it possible to virtually invalidate the production scheduler data D) and even the process identification information of "Y3" for reading out the "process Y3" (putting the production reception in a state in which it is not permitted). , it is no longer necessary to separately perform judgment and processing for terminating these, and it becomes possible to suitably facilitate and standardize the production design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information is read from the second process identification information (here, "Y3") in "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D (LCD Production Scheduler Data D for Appearance EF & Operation Waiting)". The production is accepted in the "processing Y3", and the "post-operation LCD production scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis). It is assumed that the Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray part" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting LCD production scheduler data D)" is the section erased by overwriting (substantially (disabled section).

In other words, the processing identification information of "Y3" can be attached to the "LCD production scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side, similar to the production reception period that occurs from timing ts31. However, "LCD presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting" (block D for appearance EF & operation waiting) which is associated with the same layer as "block D for after operation (LCD presentation scheduler data D for after operation)" )” side, it can be said that it is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, during the performance acceptance period that occurs from timing ts42, the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation performance is: In addition to the process identification information of the above “Y3” included in “Appearance EF & operation waiting block D)”,
・Processing identification information of "Y2" included in "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" will be prepared.

That is, as mentioned above, "LCD presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (Appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is the same as "Layer 6 block D for after operation (LCD presentation scheduler data for after operation)". ”, so if you attach the process identification information of “Y3” to this, when “post-operation block D (LCD presentation scheduler data for post-operation)” is executed. This is useful in that it will automatically be erased (invalidated). However, "LCD effect scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (block D for appearance EF & operation waiting)" is "1" included in "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)". '' is executed (analyzed) when the availability information is turned on based on the process identification information. Therefore, if frame processing with processing identification information of "1" is skipped when the processing load is high, etc., the "LCD presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting" (appearance EF & operation waiting Waiting block D)" itself will not be executed, and furthermore, the production acceptance period (validity period) based on the process identification information of "Y3" may not occur.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as process identification information for reading a process related to operation performance (a process in which a performance determination is made as to whether or not to generate a post-operation performance based on operation detection information), Prepare the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3", and store the processing identification information of "Y2" on the "LCD production scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" side. In addition, the processing identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (block D for appearance EF & operation waiting)" side. In this way, as process identification information for reading processing related to operation effects, a predetermined wait time (wait process The wait time (wait process To reduce the above-mentioned risk that the production acceptance period (validity period) will not occur by preparing both the block that corresponds to the second type block that is read without passing the period). You will be able to do this.

In addition, in "Processing Y3" executed based on the processing identification information of "Y3", when the performance judgment is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned "After-operation block D" is operated to the ON state. , a post-operation display effect (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600 is executed. On the other hand, in "Processing Y2", which is executed based on the processing identification information of "Y2", once the effect is determined, "Processing related to lamp emission", "Processing related to movable body movement", "Processing related to sound output", etc. "Processing" is started to be executed. Therefore, even if the processing identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize post-operation effects using the processing identification information of "Y2" by emitting lamps, moving the movable body, and outputting sound. has been done. "Processing Y2" and "Processing Y3" may be anything that can generate mutually different post-operation effects.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, "Y2") are lined up from timing ts42, but the second process identification information (here, "Y2") is read out first. It is assumed that a presentation is accepted in "Processing Y2" and a post-operation presentation is executed by emitting a lamp, moving a movable body, and outputting a sound. In this case, although there is no longer a need to read out the third processing identification information (here "Y2") that is blacked out in the figure, "LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach background" It will naturally be read out while executing this every unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, a process such as ``The post-operation effect has been executed, so end the process Y2'' is executed in the above ``process Y2'' corresponding to the process identification information (here, ``Y2''). As a result, the process related to performance determination is substantially invalidated (the performance reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
・The first special operation in which production reception based on operation detection information is permitted, which occurs when a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is suppressed, output silently, or in a non-output state Reception performance (performance reception period)”,
・Regardless of the production state (production mode), a second special operation reception production (production reception period) that can generate a post-operation production even if no operation is detected
As mentioned above, the following can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 224, etc.).

In the first special operation reception performance, the performance reception is allowed while a specific type of performance sound is suppressed, outputted silently, or in a non-output state, so that the user can concentrate on the operation performance. becomes expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be poor to the extent that the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a pre-permissible operation-related display (precursor performance) that is performed when the first special operation reception performance occurs, and a state in which the performance reception is permitted in the first special operation reception performance. (During the validity period), the display related to the permitted operation (the above-mentioned sample image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display performances, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a pre-permissible operation related display (precursor performance) that is performed when the second special operation reception performance occurs, and a state in which the performance reception is permitted in the second special operation reception performance. (during the validity period), the display related to the permitted operation (the above-mentioned sample image, gauge display, etc.) is also displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display performances, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

More specifically, in the "LCD production scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, production reception is allowed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner. In addition, even if no operation is detected, it is possible to generate a special operation reception performance (first special operation reception performance or second special operation reception performance) that generates a post-operation performance, and at timing ts51, the corresponding operation reception performance is generated. Processing identification information "2" is read out in order to start processing related to special operation reception performance. However, the process identification information of "2" does not read out the "process in which a production judgment is made as to whether or not to generate a production after operation", but reads and executes the following "process 2". .
Processing 2. Availability of use attached to "Block E for Appearance EF" for performing a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "Performance Acceptance Period (Validity Period) During which the Production Acceptance Period (Validity Period) During which Production Acceptance can be Accepted by Operation" will occur soon. Processing to operate (set) information on

According to such a configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background)", a block dedicated to this (block E for appearance EF) related to the permissible pre-operation display (precursive effect) is created. Although it is necessary to prepare the corresponding LCD effect scheduler data (LCD effect scheduler data E for appearance EF), for the ``block E for appearance EF'', the ``LCD effect for SP reach background'' must be prepared. Execution can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) determined by the "scheduler data". In other words, in this case, the execution of the "block E for appearance EF" may be started at any timing in the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" or at multiple timings, or the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" may be started to be executed. Since it is easily realized to start execution of the "appearance EF block E" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "data", it is possible to suitably facilitate and standardize the performance design. You will be able to do this.

Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (expectation level for the appearance of jackpot symbols) are prepared separately for the pre-acceptable operation-related display (precursive effect) and the acceptable operation-related display, respectively. Since it becomes possible to combine them as appropriate, it becomes possible to have a wide variety of variations in the performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest. Become. In addition, when adopting other variation patterns, it is possible to realize effects such as displaying operations related to operations before being allowed (precursor effect) in a common manner, but displaying operations related to operations being allowed being executed in a unique manner that is not shared. It is now possible to do so.

Here, when the "block E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the "liquid crystal display scheduler data E for appearance EF" corresponding to the "block E for appearance EF" is read out and executed (analyzed). be done. When this "liquid crystal performance scheduler data E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the performance by predetermined effect display (display related to pre-permission operation) will be changed from "section where performance reception is not permitted" to "performance reception Image information (video or still image) to be executed across the "area in which "is permitted" is acquired.

However, "block E for appearance EF" and "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF" are required to perform ``processing that can make a judgment to generate a post-operation effect based on operation detection information.'' Since no processing identification information is attached, a production reception period will not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when timing ts52 comes in the "SP reach background block (LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background)", "3" is set in order to generate the production acceptance period. Processing identification information is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "a process in which it is possible to make a production determination to generate a post-operation production based on the operation detection information", but is data that associates with "Process 3" below. .
Processing 3. ``Information regarding the availability of ``operation waiting block E'' for performing operation waiting effects (such as the above-mentioned sample image and gauge display) that prompt players to perform operations when the production reception period is occurring. Process to operate (set) on state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background)" and the "appearance EF block E (LCD effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)", A block (block E for waiting for operation) dedicated to the display related to the operation being allowed (the above-mentioned sample image, gauge display, etc.) and liquid crystal presentation scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E for waiting for operation) are provided. Although it is necessary to prepare, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) determined by "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background". become able to. In other words, in this case, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" may be started at any timing in the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" or at multiple timings, or the execution of the "LCD display scheduler data for SP reach background" may be started. Since it is easily realized to start the execution of the "operation waiting block E" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "data", it is possible to suitably facilitate and standardize the design of the performance. You will be able to do this.

Here, regarding the production acceptance period that occurs at timing ts52, the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached for each frame, similar to the production reception period in which production reception is allowed at timings ts31 and ts42. It may also be configured as a performance section. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized using a method different from the production reception period that occurs at timings ts31 and ts42, and the other production reception periods are also configured using the method described below. You may also do so.

In other words, for the production acceptance period that occurs at timing ts52, depending on the state manipulation of the operation status flag (off state, on state), there is a state in which production reception is not permitted (off state) and a state in which production reception is permitted (on state). ). When this method is adopted, the production based on the operation detection information is performed every unit time (every frame) within the "peripheral control unit steady processing" shown in FIG. 95, not within the process called based on the process identification information. It is desirable that a judgment be made.

For example, each time the "peripheral control unit steady processing" is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and if the operation state flag is in the on state (condition is that it is in the performance reception period), the operation detection information is To enable performance determination to be made to generate a post-operation performance based on the following. When the effect is determined, the availability information of the block (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation status flag that is in the on state is turned on ( setting).

In other words, in this case, the operation state flags are prepared for each type of post-operation effect, and after determining which type of operation state flag is on, the corresponding post-operation effect is prepared. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the on state. The process of setting the operation state flag to the off state may be executed within the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the on state, or it may be executed when the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect is turned on. It may be executed within a process that is called based on process identification information attached to a block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) whose state has been operated.

The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be explained again from the point where the above-mentioned process identification information "3" is read at timing ts52 and the above-mentioned "process 3" is executed. Block E (liquid crystal performance scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" will be read out and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation status flag may be performed in the above-mentioned "Processing 3", but in the example shown in FIG. At the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the process identification information of "Z1", which is associated with "process Z1" below, is read out.
Processing Z1. Among the operation status flags, the process of turning on the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E"

As a result, the operation status flag corresponding to the "post-operation block E" is operated (set) to the on state at timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information is made in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady processing". By performing the process, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the on state can be made to function as the "effect reception period". In addition, while the operation status flag is maintained in the on state, the display related to the operation being allowed based on the execution (analysis) of the "block E for waiting for operation (LCD presentation scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" (as described above) (sample image, gauge display, etc.) will now be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the permissible pre-operation related display (block E for appearance EF (LCD presentation scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permissible pre-operation associated display associated with layer 6 The intermediate operation related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)) is executed so that the display periods thereof partially overlap.

Here, the pre-permissible operation-related display associated with layer 7 is displayed on the front side of the permissible operation-related display associated with layer 6, and is displayed with priority. It has become so. Therefore, production reception is permitted from the time when at least a part of the operation-related display during permissibility is made difficult to see by the pre-permission operation-related display, and as a result, any level of expectation as the pre-permission operation-related display is To provide such performance that it is possible to receive a performance in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize whether an aspect with a certain aspect is appearing.

In this regard, when the production is accepted at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage where the production acceptance period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal production scheduler data E for operation waiting)" The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" associated with 6 in the "on" state is executed within the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady processing". As a result, each process (lamp, movable object, sound, etc.) including "LCD display scheduler data E for after operation" associated with "block E for after operation" will be executed. . At this time, in layer 6, "LCD presentation scheduler data E for after operation" that is associated with "block E for after operation" is "wait for operation" that is associated with "block E for wait for operation" Since this process is executed in place of the ``liquid crystal performance scheduler data E'', there is no need to perform special processing to terminate the ``operation waiting block E'' prematurely. In addition, at this time, the processing identification information of "Z3", which will be described later, included in the "block E for waiting for operation (LCD presentation scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" can also be automatically deleted (invalidated). Become.

Note that the process of turning the operation status flag into the off state is performed when the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the on state is performed in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady processing". However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame ( By reading the process identification information of "Z2" and executing the corresponding "process Z2" below at the processing timing), the process based on "post-operation block E" is executed after the production reception period has ended. I try to do that.
Processing Z2. Among the operation status flags, processing to turn off the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E"

However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-permission operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal production scheduler data E for appearance EF)) is left on the screen (displayed). As mentioned above, there are cases in which a presentation reception is made. Therefore, in "Processing Z2", it is determined whether the block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, processing to terminate it midway is also performed. It is desirable to However, after making sure that "block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal display scheduler data E for appearance EF)" continues without ending halfway, the image display based on "block E for after operation" is changed to "block E for appearance EF". Give priority to execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on block E for appearance EF) in a range that includes at least the entire range (for example, the entire screen) of the "range where the image display based on block E is performed" Therefore, the image display based on the block E for appearance EF may be hidden.

In addition, in the "block E for waiting for operation (LCD production scheduler data E for waiting for operation)", when the process at timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), it corresponds to "processing Z3" in order to end the production acceptance period. The attached processing identification information "Z3" is read out. Here, the case where "block E for operation waiting (LCD presentation scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54 means "block E for after operation (block E after operation)" corresponding to the same layer 6. This means that the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E for operation waiting)" has not been overwritten by the "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E)", that is, the timing ts54 has arrived. This means that the production has not been accepted until now. However, during the production acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52, even if the production is not accepted from timing ts52 to timing ts54, the same "post-operation block E" as when the production was accepted. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" that operates (sets) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "processing Z3" that is executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read out at timing ts54 in the "block E for waiting for operation (LCD presentation scheduler data E for waiting for operation)", the following processing is executed. It is supposed to be done.
Processing Z3. Among the operation status flags, processing is performed to turn off the operation status flag of the type that is associated with "post-operation block E", and the availability information of "post-operation block E" is turned on. The operation (setting) process is performed.

According to such a configuration, in the performance acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52, even if the performance is not accepted within that period, the same block as when the performance was accepted is read out, and the block is read out. Since the post-operation performance associated with the ``operation'' is executed, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player forgets to perform the operation. In addition, the post-operation performance is not executed after the performance reception period (timings ts51 to ts52) ends, but is executed within the final frame (processing at timing ts52) of the process related to the performance reception period (timings ts51 to ts52). By performing the process to read the same block as when the reception was made, it is possible to realize smooth production progress without causing any discrepancies between when an operation is performed and when there is no operation. become able to.

In addition, according to such a configuration, the display image (sample image or gauge display) based on the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal performance scheduler data E for operation waiting)" can be used to receive the performance by the player's operation. In both cases, when the production is accepted by activating the automatic button function, the processing to hide the production based on the acceptance of the production (here, "operation") is performed. Since the "later block E") will now be executed, even if the player forgets to perform an operation, the performance can proceed in the same manner, and it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest. become expected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 225, the production acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52 is the same as the above-mentioned “first It also functions as a special operation reception performance. Also in the "first special operation reception performance" shown in FIG. 225, when the performance is accepted, the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is not returned to the non-suppressing mode and continues to be output in the suppressed mode. Then, the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is set to be returned to output in a non-suppressed mode within the period during which the post-operation performance is being executed.

In addition, "specific type of production sound" means "BGM playback" sound (BGM playback for normal background or SP background), but here it specifically corresponds to "SP reach background block". This corresponds to the sound (BGM playback sound for SP reach) that is output by executing the "processing related to sound output" attached. As for the suppression mode and method, the above-mentioned modes and methods can be adopted as appropriate.

In the above configuration, when the operation reception performance (timings ts52 to ts54) is generated while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed (or even if the performance is not accepted, the performance is accepted) (When generating an operation reception effect in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed), the display related to the operation before being allowed (block E for appearance EF) and the display related to the operation being allowed (block for waiting for operation) are displayed at the time of occurrence. Regarding E), they are executed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal display scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display performances, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the operation reception performance (first special operation reception performance, second special operation reception performance) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images (pre-permission operation related display) displayed by mutually different blocks (liquid crystal performance scheduler data) , permissible operation related display) are now displayed so that there are overlapping periods. Therefore, it becomes possible to achieve a performance (such as the above-mentioned difficulty in visibility) that is intertwined with the "display related to operations before being allowed" and "display related to operations during being allowed", and the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed. become.

On the other hand, such as the operation reception performance that occurs at timing ts41, the operation reception performance that occurs when the "specific type of performance sound" is not suppressed (or the operation reception performance that occurs when the performance is not accepted) In the operation-related display (no operation reception presentation), the pre-allowed operation-related display and the allowed operation-related display are displayed using the same block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data). That is, unlike the operation reception performance at timings ts52 to ts54 (operation reception performance that suggests a jackpot or loss based on the post-operation performance), such an operation reception performance is generated according to the result of performance judgment (preliminary judgment). Therefore, the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (LCD performance scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the judgment results. It can be said that it is more beneficial to do so.

However, even if the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (LCD presentation scheduler data), although they are on one layer, the pre-permission operation-related display The display and the display related to the operation being allowed overlap over time (there are times when both the display related to the operation before being allowed and the display related to the operation being allowed are displayed; for example, one of the displays related to the operation being allowed It is desirable to perform these effects so that the parts are difficult to visually recognize.

For the block displaying operations related to being allowed (operation waiting block E), processing identification information is read out based on the block displaying operations related to pre-allowed operations (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E for appearance EF)). The availability information may be turned on in a process corresponding to the above.

The operation reception performance for which performance reception is permitted at timings ts52 to ts54 may be performed as at least one of the first special operation reception performance described above and the second special operation reception performance described above, for example. , 142, 212 to 215, 217 to 220, 223, etc., which are executed as any of the operation reception effects (operation acceptance effects under BGM suppression). Good too. In this case, for other operation reception effects among the operation acceptance effects shown in FIG. 225, for example, the operation acceptance effect described above with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. It may be executed as either one of the following. In addition, each of the different examples of operation acceptance effects described later may be adopted as appropriate.

For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (block E for waiting for operation) that occurs at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (block D for appearance EF & operation waiting) that occurs at timing ts42, but the operation In the reception performance, the same reception permissible sound may be outputted when the performance is accepted (the first permissible sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

In addition, in the operation reception performance (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts52, if the performance reception is performed while the reception permission sound is being output, the output state is prematurely terminated, but the operation reception performance that occurs at timing ts42 ( In the operation waiting block E), various configurations can be adjusted as appropriate, such as maintaining the output state even if a presentation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output (the first acceptance sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). It is possible to adopt it.

By the way, regarding the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, there are two blocks: a block corresponding to image data that can be shared between jackpot and loss (SP reach background block), and a block corresponding to different image data for jackpot and loss. (SP ending background block) and are executed sequentially as described above. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the "SP reach background block" is shifted to the "SP ending background block" is within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed. It is set so that it always arrives.

In other words, in an operation reception performance in which performance reception is permitted at timing ts52, the performance reception (including the automatic button function described above) is not performed at any timing within the performance reception period (timings ts52 to ts54). However, a predetermined time from timing ts54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is always executed (setting the time required to execute the post-operation effect). During the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the "post-operation block E" (post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600) The effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is displayed with priority over the display based on the LCD effect scheduler data for the SP ending corresponding to the "SP ending background block". (Displayed in front of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). In addition, in this case, the display time of the image executed based on the block E for after operation will be set as a longer time than the display time of the image executed based on the block E for waiting for operation, and the longer time The minute will function as a "period during which the post-operation effect is always executed."

Within the period when the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such ``post-operation block E'' is being executed, the ``SP reach background block'' will be transitioned to the ``SP ending background block.'' By doing this, the ``display of the SP reach background block (a block that is shared in winning and losing)'' and the ``display of the SP ending background block (a block that is only used in either winning and losing)'' will have a completely different atmosphere. Even if the performance is designed to make the game more appealing, it will not make the player feel uncomfortable, so a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the scenario data of "Layer 4" and "Layer 5", blocks (LCD presentation scheduler data) that are not related to any image and simply function as time series data to call processing at a certain timing. It corresponds to In other words, the block (LCD presentation scheduler data) itself does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is not involved in any image display. It adopts a data structure (time-series image information of the sky) that can be called "data)". Even if such a block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data).

There are two types of methods for such a data call block (LCD presentation scheduler data for data call). Firstly, in the scenario data corresponding to "layer 4", at the start of symbol variation, the timing ts21 for calling the process A wait time (wait processing period) is set that functions to prevent the data call block B (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for data call) from being executed until the arrival of the data call block B (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for data call). Then, when timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the "data call block B" corresponding to the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed). "Liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data recall" is executed (analyzed).

Here, processing identification information of "X2" is added to the "data calling block B" or the "liquid crystal display scheduler data B for data calling" corresponding to the "data calling block B" for each unit time. Each time the processing identification information of "X2" is read out, the following "processing X2" is executed.
Processing X2. A process in which a performance determination is made as to whether to generate a post-operation performance corresponding to "post-operation block B" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)

In this "data call block B (liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data call)", the section where the process identification information of "X2" is attached for each unit time is defined as "performance reception where the production reception can be performed by operation". In the above-mentioned "Processing An operation (setting) is performed on the state. As a result, the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "post-operation LCD production scheduler data B" associated with the "post-operation block B" is executed ( analysis), as well as "processing related to lamp emission", "processing related to movable body movement", "processing related to sound output", etc. associated with the "post-operation block B". By starting the execution, it becomes possible to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

In addition, even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block B" is started, the "data call block B (LCD display scheduler data B for data call)" is Executed (analyzed). Therefore, when a production is accepted in the middle of a section (production reception period) in which processing identification information (here, "X2") is attached for each unit time, "data calling block B The process identification information (here, ``X2'') is read out from ``(LCD presentation scheduler data B for data recall)'', and the above-mentioned ``process X2'' corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "processing When it is determined that the execution has started, the "processing X2" is terminated without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information, and this is explained in "processing That's exactly what I did.

On the other hand, when no performance judgment is made in "Processing The processing X2 is ended with the availability information kept in the OFF state. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here "X2") is acquired every unit time (1 frame), "Data call block B (data call block The process identification information (here, ``X2'') is read out from the ``liquid crystal display scheduler data B)'', and the corresponding ``process X2'' is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above section ends at the 6th process identification information (here "X2"), the 6th process identification information is read and If the performance determination is not made in the process X2, the subsequent performance will proceed without executing the post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block B".

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect is determined in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the "data calling block B (Liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data recall)", the same process identification information (X2) for reading out "processing X2 that can generate a post-operation performance" is acquired. However, simply by analyzing such information, it becomes possible to effectively function as a production acceptance period (validity period), so it is possible to suitably facilitate and standardize production design. Become.

Here, the block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) corresponding to "layer 4" does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and "processing X2" read from the processing identification information of "X2" The "block waiting for operation" will not be read even if Therefore, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing ts21, the performance reception is allowed without any sample image or gauge display. ” will be realized.

According to such a configuration, the "data call block B (liquid crystal display scheduler data B for data call)" can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected, By preparing scenario data with different wait time (wait processing period) setting values, it becomes possible to make the characters appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 5", the data call block A (LCD presentation scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing through the wait time (wait processing period), but the data A substantial wait function operates within the calling block A (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data A for data calling). That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal display scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or process identification information is read out until timing ts11 arrives, and when timing ts11 arrives, "4" is read out. Processing identification information is read out. However, the process identification information of "4" does not read out the "process in which a performance judgment is made as to whether or not to generate a performance after operation", but the following "process 4" is read and executed. It has become.
Processing 4. Precursive effects (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggest that the ``performance acceptance period (valid period) during which the production can be accepted by operation'' will occur soon, and players who are in a state where the production acceptance period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A" to the ON state in order to perform the operation waiting production (the above-mentioned sample image, gauge display, etc.) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (LCD presentation scheduler data A for data call) separately from the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" needs to be prepared. Regarding the "waiting block A", process identification information of "4" is also attached from a block (LCD presentation scheduler data) different from the "data calling block A (LCD presentation scheduler data A for data calling)". Since it becomes possible to call it up as appropriate by just using the above command, it becomes possible to suitably simplify and standardize the production design.

Here, when the "Appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "LCD presentation scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read out. . These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD production scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting", first of all, while production reception is not allowed, A section is provided in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a production acceptance period (validity period) in which an application can be accepted will occur soon is obtained.

However, in the "LCD performance scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting", there is a state in which the performance reception period is occurring from the middle of the process, and the operation waiting performance (the above-mentioned sample image and A section appears in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to the gauge display, etc.) is acquired, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "LCD presentation scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts11, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, "Y1 '' processing identification information is attached so that it is lined up. Each time the processing identification information of "Y1" is read out, the following "processing Y1" is read out and executed.
Processing Y1. A process in which a performance determination is performed as to whether to generate a post-operation performance corresponding to "post-operation block A" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such process identification information (here, "Y1") is attached for each unit time is defined as the "performance acceptance period (valid period) during which production can be accepted by operation". )”. Moreover, in the "processing Y1", when a performance judgment is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A)" is the basis for reading out the "processing Y1" (liquid crystal performance scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting) The availability information of the "post-operation block A" associated with the same "layer 6" is operated (set) to the on state.

In other words, in this case, when the "post-operation block A" is read, various processes including the "post-operation LCD presentation scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block A (LCD presentation scheduler data A for after-operation)" is changed to "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A)" which was in the middle of execution. In place of the liquid crystal display scheduler data A), the execution state is set to "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, by simply reading out the "block A for after operation", the "block A for appearance EF & operation waiting" (LCD for appearance EF & operation waiting) which no longer needs to be read out due to the effect judgment This makes it possible to virtually invalidate the production scheduler data A) and even the process identification information of "Y1" for reading out the "process Y1" (put the production reception in a state where it is not allowed). , it is no longer necessary to separately perform judgments and processes for terminating these, and it becomes possible to suitably facilitate and standardize production design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information is read from the second process identification information (here, "Y1") in "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Liquid Crystal Production Scheduler Data A for Appearance EF & Operation Waiting)". The production is accepted in the "processing Y1", and the "post-operation LCD production scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis). It is assumed that Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray part" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A)" is the section erased by overwriting (substantially (disabled section).

In addition, in "Layer 4", it was decided to set a production section in which processing identification information is attached to each frame on the "data call block B (liquid crystal display scheduler data B for data call)" side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from the "data call block", such as "layer 5". Also, in "Layer 4", as shown in "Layer 5", this is achieved by using a substantial wait function within the data call block (LCD display scheduler data for data call). Good too.

In addition, in "Layer 5", a production section is set in which processing identification information is attached to each frame on the block side read from "data call block A (liquid crystal display scheduler data A for data call)". did. However, the performance section may be set in "data call block A (liquid crystal performance scheduler data A for data call)" like "layer 4". Also, in "Layer 5", as shown in "Layer 4", this is achieved by setting a wait for the data call block (LCD display scheduler data for data call) itself to wait. Good too.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when processing identification information of "1" or "4" is acquired, it is suggested that "a production acceptance period (valid period) during which a production can be accepted by operation" will occur soon. In order to perform a precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned sample image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation when the effect reception period is occurring, It was decided to execute a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block" to the on state. However, it is not necessary to carry out precursory effects (displaying effects, etc.), and it is not necessary to perform premonitory effects (such as the above-mentioned sample image or gauge It is also possible to perform a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "operation waiting block" for displaying (display, etc.) to an on state. That is, in this case, as soon as the "operation waiting block" is read out, the process identification information associated with the "process for which performance determination can be made" is acquired.

Further, as described above, the production acceptance periods occurring at timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may also be realized by setting the operation state flag, similar to the production acceptance period occurring at timing ts51.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3" are set to be read out at the same timing, but they are set to be read out at different timings. You may also set it.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the blocks and the corresponding liquid crystal display scheduler data are separately provided, but these may be configured in a form that can be combined into one data.

In addition, regarding the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data (block) in which information corresponding to image data is acquired every unit time (every frame), all of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data (block) is acquired at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured such that information corresponding to video data over a period of time can be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and after that, although it is analyzed every unit time (every frame), the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame). It is never acquired, and only when processing identification information is attached will the corresponding processing be executed.

Blocks (LCD presentation scheduler data) for which availability information is set to ON may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing for which availability information is set to ON, or blocks with availability information set to ON may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing for which availability information is set to ON. The processing timing may be executed (analyzed) one processing timing after the processing timing set in .

Also, regarding "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data A)" and "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D)" Although different processing identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data." Further, the length of the block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) and the length of the valid period may be set to be the same. In other words, in this case, the same sample image and gauge display are displayed for the same period of time.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a jackpot (predetermined judgment result ) is obtained and not obtained, the display data is shared (SP reach background block), and the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and not obtained. The execution is divided into a performance section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. In such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, instead of using different display data for the entire period depending on whether a predetermined judgment result is obtained or not, Display data is shared until the interval (timing ts55), and different display data is used only during the remaining period to indicate wins and losses (judgment results), which is expected to reduce processing load and memory capacity. Become.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 225, in "Layer 6" which is different from "Layer 3" where the background display effect for a specific reach is executed, the post-operation effect ( The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is given priority display (SP) over the background display effect for a specific reach (layer 3). By making the image displayed on the front side of the image based on the reach background block and the SP ending background block, it is possible to distinguish between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained in layer 3. "Switching from a performance section in which display data is shared when there is no hit, to a performance section in which different display data is used when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not." (or make it difficult to see). As a result, there is a "performance section in which display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Even if there is a situation where the presentation cannot be designed well, this can be concealed (disguised) by the post-operation presentation. This allows for easier performance design. In this sense, it is desirable that in the post-operation performance, a process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen is also executed.

Additionally, for post-operation effects (block E for post-operation) that are executed across (including) timing ts55, even if no operation is detected within the production acceptance period, the effects will be automatically executed regardless of the production mode. Since it is configured to be executed periodically, there are two types of performance sections: ``a performance section in which display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained''; It becomes possible to reliably conceal the connection with the performance section in which different display data is used depending on whether the judgment result) is obtained or not.

In order to obtain such effects, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the production section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation production (liquid crystal display) is hidden. (If the end time of the post-operation performance is delayed depending on the operation timing, the post-operation performance (liquid crystal display) is This means that the setting must be made within a period (before the timing of the hidden display). In such a configuration, although display processing (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in "Layer 3", there will be a display section that will not appear on the liquid crystal display. .

However, there are two areas in which display data is shared between cases where a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and cases where a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is not obtained. Regarding the configuration that hides the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used depending on when it is not obtained, it should be possible to execute it when the jackpot has been won. It may also be configured such that it is not executed when the jackpot has not been won. For example, even when the jackpot has not been won, a post-operation effect (for losers) is executed, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and only a partial effect is displayed. By performing this as follows, it is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, as one of the plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific variation pattern, the "post-operation block E" is read out based on the reception of the effect within the period from timing ts52 to ts54. ” will be prepared. Regarding the "post-operation block E," the performance reception is automatically performed even when no operation is detected within the period from timing ts52 to ts54 (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). (by executing), it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance that has not been seen before.

In this regard, although illustration is omitted, even if a first variation pattern or a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the "post-operation block E" can be executed. Good too.

For example, in the first variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the production content according to the first variation pattern are executed sequentially, as shown in FIG. 225. Similarly to the specific variation pattern described above, the process identification information of ``2'' and the process identification information of ``3'' are respectively read out based on the ``SP reach background block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data)''. In other words, in the first variation pattern, although the production content of the SP reach background ("information regarding image data" obtained from the LCD production scheduler data) is different, the same permissible pre-operation related display (precursor production) as the specific variation pattern is used. ) and display related to the allowed operation (sample image, gauge display, etc.) are executed. Block E' is now executed.

In addition, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception performance, the performance reception is automatically performed, and the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" This is similar to the specific variation pattern in that the post-operation effect is executed so as to straddle (include) the switching timing of '', thereby hiding the switching of the background effect.

In addition, there is a "performance section where display data is shared when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not" and "a presentation section where the display data is shared when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained. Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used depending on when data is not obtained, the first variation pattern is similar to the specific variation pattern. , may be executed when the jackpot has been won, and may not be executed when the jackpot has not been won. According to such a configuration, even though different background effects (SP reach effect) are executed between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, when a jackpot is won, the different background effects are hidden. The same performance (post-operation performance) will always appear in the form of a , and this will make it possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot. On the other hand, when you have not won the jackpot, you can recognize that you have lost the jackpot at the timing when a background effect (SP ending background block) with different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. You will be able to do this. In other words, in this case, when a player wins a jackpot, the user can intuitively recognize that he or she has won a jackpot by hiding the "background effects" that have different effects depending on the variation pattern and making sure that the first effect appears. In contrast, when a player loses a jackpot, the "background effect" with different effects depending on the fluctuation pattern is displayed instead of hidden, making it difficult to intuitively recognize that the player has lost the jackpot. You will be able to maintain a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the second variation pattern as well, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the performance contents corresponding to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (LCD presentation scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the processing identification information "1", but the processing identification information "2" or "3" Processing identification information is not included, and an operation reception effect that can generate a post-operation effect that straddles the transition timing will not occur immediately before transitioning to the "SP ending background block". .

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal production scheduler data)" related to the second variation pattern, processing identification information of "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing when production reception is not permitted. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", the process of "turning on the availability information of the post-operation block E (process 5)" is executed. It looks like this.

Then, by turning on the availability information of "post-operation block E" in this way, in the second variation pattern, as well as the "specific variation pattern" and "first variation pattern", "operation The same post-operation effect based on "Post-operation block E (LCD production scheduler data for after-operation)" straddles (includes) the switching timing of "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" It will be executed on a separate layer.

In such a configuration, when a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the period during which production reception is allowed is changed, whereas originally it would be necessary to design the production as a display related to the background production. Because we purposely executed the "post-operation block E" as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing within the production section where no occurrence occurs, the sample image and gauge are not displayed, and the operation Even though the player has not done so and is not even allowed to accept the production, the post-operation production (block E for post-operation) will suddenly appear when the production is accepted in another variation pattern. , it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, there is a "performance section in which display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "a performance section where the display data is shared between cases where a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained." Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a performance with a good performance connection, there are cases where different display data is used depending on whether the (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not. It becomes possible to hide (disguise) the situation, and it becomes possible to simplify production design.

In addition, there is a "performance section where display data is shared when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not" and "a presentation section where the display data is shared when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained. Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used depending on when data is not obtained, the second variation pattern also has a specific variation pattern or As with the 1-variation pattern, it may be possible to execute it when a jackpot has been won, but not to execute when a jackpot has not been won. According to such a configuration, even though a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is executed, when a jackpot is won, the different background effect is hidden. The same performance (post-operation performance) will always appear in the form of a , and this will make it possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot. On the other hand, when you have not won the jackpot, you can recognize that you have lost the jackpot at the timing when a background effect (SP ending background block) whose content is different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. You will be able to do this. In other words, in this case, when a player wins a jackpot, the user can intuitively recognize that he or she has won a jackpot by hiding the "background effects" that have different effects depending on the variation pattern and making sure that the first effect appears. In contrast, when a player loses a jackpot, the "background effect" with different effects depending on the fluctuation pattern is displayed instead of hidden, making it difficult to intuitively recognize that the player has lost the jackpot. You will be able to maintain a sense of expectation.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, the operation reception effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach). , these processing identification information does not have to be attached to the SP reach background block (LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach). ), a calling block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for calling), or another block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, in the process read out based on process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3", In the performance determination, a performance determination based on operation detection information for a specific operating means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operating means is not limited to the operating button 410, and may be any other operating means. In addition, multiple operating means (operation buttons 410, It is determined whether an operation opportunity has been given to any one of the sword performance operation units (such as the sword production operation unit 5000), and whether or not there has been an operation on the operation means to which the operation opportunity has been given (production judgment). It may also be possible to determine whether the According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword production operation unit 5000, etc.) should be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means corresponding to the determination is given an operation opportunity. In order to realize an operation reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given only to the user, it is necessary to standardize the process identification information, the liquid crystal display scheduler, the blocks, etc., regardless of which operation method is given the operation opportunity. You will be able to do so. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both different operation means, and a post-operation effect based on the processing identification information may be executed based on the fact that the effect has been accepted for one of the operation means that was operated first. .

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, a plurality of pre-permission operation related displays in the block E for appearance EF may be provided. For example, there is a block E1 for normal appearance EF that does not involve movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a block E2 for special appearance EF that involves movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410. An example of this would be to provide one or more of them and execute (analyze) one of them depending on the variation pattern. In this case, if the blocks following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E) are used in common, blocks can be saved. It becomes like this.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and its other examples, processing identification information (such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", "Y3", etc.) attached to blocks or LCD presentation scheduler data is By executing the read process, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operation means. However, in addition to this, regarding predetermined operation means different from specific operation means, processing that is completely unrelated to the processing identification information attached to the block or LCD presentation scheduler data (for example, peripheral control unit steady processing) An operation may be accepted in , and a change corresponding to the acceptance may be caused to occur in the performance being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the progress of the performance based on blocks or LCD performance scheduler data, operations on the predetermined operation means will be properly accepted, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In addition, the block itself can be prevented from appearing by player operations that are separate from the processing that determines the performance based on the processing identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". It may also be possible to disable all performance elements (display, sound, movement) related to the target block. With such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

In addition, during the performance determination period, a part of each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" is converted into other process identification information by player operation. You may also change the timing.

A specific layer may be scheduled for use before the start of the target variation, and may be used across multiple variations.

Blocks may be used not only during fluctuations but also during winning games and the like. In addition, a block that spans from a winning game to a winning game, and a block that spans from a winning game to a probability change may be provided, and processing identification information is also included in these blocks and the LCD performance scheduler data corresponding to the blocks. It may be attached.

Further, the type of processing identification information read out may be changed depending on the gaming state, such as "Y3" being attached only to blocks (or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) executed during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, during error notification (abnormality notification) and the like, although an error image is displayed and an error sound is output, it is desirable that the block being executed and process identification information are not erased at all. This makes it possible to properly restore the effects after the error is cleared.

Furthermore, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, the described effects can be achieved without necessarily using techniques such as blocks (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) or processing identification information. If it is possible to do so, it may be realized using other methods.

[Performance judgment based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
Generally, when a performance acceptance period (validity period) in which performance acceptance is permitted occurs, the above-mentioned "sample image" or "gauge display (bar display)" is displayed in accordance with the timing of the occurrence. In this regard, if you play the game for a long time or play the game many times, you will be able to predict at what timing within the fluctuation pattern the "sample image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. As a result, some players cannot wait to operate the game and try to operate the game at a time when they anticipate that the ``sample image'' or ``gauge display'' will be displayed. At this time, if an operation is performed just before the "sample image" or "gauge display" is displayed (just before the production reception period occurs), the "sample image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. I mistakenly thought that the operation was performed in a state where the production acceptance period has occurred (a state in which the production acceptance period has occurred), and as a result, redoing the operation within the production acceptance period (validity period) was delayed, and the production was not accepted. There were cases where the production acceptance period (validity period) ended without any notice.

In this regard, in the special operation reception performance according to this embodiment (for example, the performance reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), the performance reception period (valid period ) occurs, as described above, even if no operation is performed within the performance acceptance period, the automatic button function will make a performance determination and the performance after the operation can be generated. According to such a configuration, even if there is a delay in redoing the operation within the production acceptance period (validity period) in the above-mentioned situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production cannot be confirmed after the operation. become able to.

However, in this case, even if it is possible to confirm the post-operation performance, it is impossible to feel that the post-operation performance was caused by the player's operation, so there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment only allows performance determination to generate a post-operation performance within the performance acceptance period (validity period), but does not allow detection of the operation state. , even if it was done within a period (immediately) before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurred, it is deliberately used as a target (judgment material) for the production judgment. According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period), the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). The post-operation effect will now be executed as if it were an object. In other words, in this case, the player will also feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation, so that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operating state is detected within a period (immediately before) before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs, the operating state will not be detected if the operating state exceeds the specified time. When the performance acceptance period (validity period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the performance is accepted within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to fairly impart performance acceptance conditions to players, and it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception performance, when the performance reception period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame starts. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "mock image of the operating means (or the gauge display indicating the remaining time)" is not yet displayed. In other words, in this case, there is a period in which production reception is internally permitted from when the sample image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, so the player may get ahead of himself. As a result, even if the operation is performed just before the sample image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect will be accepted and the effect may not be confirmed after the operation. be able to suppress it.

These technical features will be explained below. In order to explain the technical features, we will explain once again the "performance acceptance period (validity period)" according to this embodiment. (Validity period)" refers to "the period from the start of the process for generating a state in which presentation reception is permitted until the process is ended.'' Here, the "processing to generate a state in which presentation reception is permitted" refers to the "operation status flag (see FIG. 225)", although the details differ depending on the implementation method of the "performance reception period (valid period)". This corresponds to "processing to turn on", "processing to set a timer", "processing to call a process for determining reception of production based on process identification information (see FIG. 225)", etc. In other words, the "performance acceptance period (valid period)" corresponds to "the production period (period) from the execution of the process that generates the state in which the production reception is permitted until a predetermined period of time has elapsed." This predetermined time is either ``the time until the operation status flag is turned off'' or ``the time until the timer times out'' or ``the time until the timer times out'' is the end of the production section in which the same processing identification information is attached in every frame. This corresponds to the amount of time it takes to Then, within such a "performance acceptance period (valid period)", a determination process as to whether the production is accepted or not is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operating state. However, in the "determination process as to whether or not a production is accepted" according to this embodiment, not only the "detection of the operation state" performed within the "production reception period (validity period)" but also the A feature is that it also targets "detection of operation status" performed before the "performance reception period (validity period)" occurs. Such a "performance acceptance period (validity period)" is generally created as a period of about 100 frames, for example.

FIGS. 226 to 231 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for processing performed before and after the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs. Note that each example described below shows a case where an image is displayed using the "block" and "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 225, but the display method is not limited to this. , any implementation method may be used as long as it is a general method that performs image control on a frame-by-frame basis. In addition, "processing to generate a state in which production reception is permitted" is exemplified as "processing to turn on the operation status flag", but is not limited to this, and can include "processing to set a timer", " Other methods such as "a process for calling a process for determining whether to accept a production based on process identification information" may be used.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when no operation is detected before and after the production acceptance period (validity period).

Now, when a special operation reception performance occurs in a specific variation pattern (for example, the performance reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), the "performance It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state as a process for generating a state in which reception is permitted. Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state at the halfway "timing t1 (m)" in the "m"th frame. Even if this process itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m"th frame, more precisely, the start timing of the "m"th frame in relation to other processing execution etc. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including this process, and while various processes are executed in a predetermined order, there are times when the process is delayed with respect to the "frame start timing". This is because it always happens.

When the operation status flag is turned on in this way, a production section (production reception period) in which production reception is permitted will occur, and within the production reception period, the operation detection information is A "determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" is performed.

The performance acceptance period according to this example is explained as "special operation reception performance" shown in FIG. 225. Therefore, regarding the "determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect", as mentioned above, regardless of whether or not the effect acceptance period has occurred (whether the operation status flag is in the on state), the "peripheral control unit steady state This process is executed as "performance determination based on operation detection information" every unit time (every frame). By continuing this process even after the performance reception period, the "determination process for determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" will be performed at predetermined time intervals based on the operation detection information even during the performance reception period. (In the figure, these are executed at "timing t2(m)," "timing t2(m+1)," "timing t2(m+2)," and "timing t2(m+3)," respectively.) In other words, in this case, the "determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" will be executed even in frames before the "m"-th frame, but the operation state flag is in the off state. As mentioned above, this is substantially disabled in some situations, so it is omitted in the diagram.

In addition, in this example, the order of various processes to be performed in response to the arrival of a new frame is the order in which "processing to operate (set) the operation status flag to the on state" is executed, rather than the order in which "processing to operate (set) the operation status flag to the on state" is executed. The order in which the "judgment process for determining whether or not to generate a performance" is executed is set later, so that the performance is executed within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the on state. A reception (determination to generate a post-operation effect) can be made. However, regarding this order, it is not necessarily necessary to execute "the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" first; on the other hand, it is not necessary to execute "the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" first; The order in which "determination processing" is executed may be set first. In this case, within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the ON state, the "determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect" itself will not be performed, so the effect will be No reception (determination to generate post-operation effects) is made.

Conventionally, at timing t1 (m) in the "m"th frame, "processing to generate a state in which presentation reception is permitted (here, "processing to turn on the operation state flag")" is executed. If so, based on the operation detection information acquired during the period after the process was executed (in this case, the period in which the operation status flag is on), the ``judgment processing'' was executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at timing t2(m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period from timing t1(m) to t2(m), and the operation is determined based on the operation detection information. If it is determined that the operation has occurred, the post-operation effect is executed, and if it is not determined that the operation has occurred (or the operation state has been detected, but the length of time that the operation state was maintained is unreasonable). When it is determined that the operation is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at timing t2 (m+1) in the next frame, it is operated whether or not there was an operation within the period from timing t2 (m) to t2 (m+1). The process of re-judging based on the detection information was performed for each frame.

However, in this case, if someone who cannot wait to operate the operation and tries to operate it at a timing that anticipates that the production reception period will occur, the production reception period will be extended without receiving the production reception. As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (validity period) may expire. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, "determination of performance to generate a post-operation performance" is permitted only within the performance acceptance period (validity period); "Detection of status" itself, even if it was done within the period (immediately before) the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs, it will be considered as the target (judgment material) of the operation detection judgment. I try to use it on purpose.

For example, in such operation detection determination, in order to avoid false detection due to chattering etc., it is usually possible to use "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms) or more" as a determination condition. It will be done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment also uses operation detection information before timing t1(m), and within the period from timing t1(m) to t2(m). ``Even if the operating means (e.g., operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 ms) or more, even if the operating means (e.g., the operation button 410) is not maintained in an operating state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 ms) or more, If the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state for a period of time, it is determined that an operation has been performed, and a post-operation effect is performed.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period), the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). The post-operation effect will now be executed as if it were an object. In other words, in this case, the player will also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

There is no particular limitation as to which one to use as a more specific configuration regarding such operation detection information. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the operating state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms) or more on a frame-by-frame basis. For frames whose operating state is maintained (continued) for a period of time (for example, 3ms) or more, a history is left as an "ON frame", and a frame that has no history as an "ON frame" is treated as an "OFF frame". I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or the start of the next frame, or the history may be left as an "ON frame" when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms). You may also do so.

As will be described later, in the "determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames whose history is left as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are used. When operation detection information is obtained in a manner in which the characters are lined up, presentation acceptance (determination that there has been an operation) is made, and the post-operation presentation can be executed.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an "ON frame" or an "OFF frame" at the end of the frame and leaves a history thereof. In the "determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" performed at the timing t2(m) shown in , the "m"th frame that includes the timing t2(m) is not used as a determination material. In other words, in this case, the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame are used as judgment materials, and these are the "OFF frame," "ON frame," and "ON frame." It is determined whether or not a history is left as "frame". On the other hand, if a history is left as an "ON frame" when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation" performed at timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. In the process of determining whether to generate a post-effect, the "m"th frame that includes the timing t2(m) is also used as a determination material. In other words, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are "OFF frames," "ON frames," and "ON frames." As a result, it is determined whether or not a history is left.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before or after the production acceptance period (validity period). Therefore, at the determination timing in each frame after the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (timings t2(m), t2(m+1), t2(m+2), t2(m+3) in the figure), It will be determined that the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", "OFF frame" is left, and the production will not be accepted (determination that there was an operation) and the production will be performed after the operation. Not executed.

By the way, regarding the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, there is a delay of two frames (or one frame) from the start of display processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 until it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing within the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing of deciding which image to use as an image according to various judgments and creating a drawing list based on the decision), and Processing within the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512) that receives the processing results (image-related information such as a drawing list) from the peripheral control section 1511 (preparation buffer (buffer in non-display state) of so-called double buffering) This occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the ) side.

Therefore, conventionally, for the processing related to the "effect during valid period (block E for operation waiting)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, the process is performed two frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect accepting period (valid period) occurs. (the "m-2"th frame), so that the effect appears on the effect display device 1600 during the valid period from the "m"th frame.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "effect during valid period (operation waiting block)" is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time the m-th frame starts. One of the features is that the period up to the "m-1"th frame immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs is "pre-validity production (effect production etc.)". "Processing period for "Block E for appearance EF")", and the period from the "m"th frame when the production reception period (validity period) occurs is "Processing period for "Block E for appearance EF"). The processing period for the block E for waiting for operation is set as ``processing period for operation waiting block E''). As shown in FIG. 225, the "processing period for the pre-validity effect ("block E for appearance EF" such as effect production) is made to continue from the "m"th frame onwards, and It may be made to overlap with the "processing period for the period effect ("operation waiting block E" such as a sample image and gauge display)".

More specifically, during a predetermined period until the arrival of the "m"th frame (or even a period after that), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to "pre-validity effects (effect effects, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). On the other hand, during the predetermined period after the arrival of the "m"th frame (the period during which the effect is performed during the valid period), drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to the "effect during the valid period (sample image, gauge display, etc.)" A list is created and sent to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the "pre-validity period effect (block E for appearance EF)" up to the "m-1"th frame (or even after that). Processing related to the "m"th frame and subsequent frames will be executed processing related to "effect period effect (operation waiting block E)", but in the effect display device 1600, in the "m"th frame The "pre-validity effect (display based on the block E for appearance EF)" is still in progress, and the "during the valid period effect (display based on the block E for waiting for operation)" finally starts at the "m+2"th frame. will be done. In other words, in this case, the production is internally accepted from the time when the "effect period effect (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" is not yet displayed (the "m"th frame, the "m+1"th frame). Since there is a period during which this is allowed, the player may get ahead of himself, and as a result, the player may operate just before the "effect during the valid period (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the performance will be accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the performance cannot be confirmed after the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 226, the processing related to "pre-validity effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" and the process related to "during validity period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" are For convenience of explanation, each is executed for each frame within the peripheral control unit 1511. However, when displaying these effects using video data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on "information corresponding to the video" at the start frame of these processes. In other words, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically reads and displays the image data, so each of the above processes is performed by peripheral control. The processing may not necessarily be performed for each frame within the section 1511.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started at the "m+1"th frame during the production acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226.

As mentioned above, in the "determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames whose history is left as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are When operation detection information in a lined up manner is obtained, presentation reception (determination that an operation has been made) is made, and a post-operation presentation can be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m+1) in the "m+1"th frame (a timing before the judgment timing of production reception). The "m+1"th frame itself also leaves a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at timing t2 (m+1) within the frame, all of the three frames to be determined (the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame) are Since this is an "OFF frame", no performance reception (judgment that an operation has been made) is made.

Even at timing t2 (m+2) of the next frame, the "m+2"th frame, the three frames to be determined (the "m-1"th frame, the "m"th frame, and the "m+1"th frame) are , each has a history of "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame", so there is no performance reception (judgment that an operation has been performed).

Furthermore, at timing t2 (m+3) of the next frame, the "m+3"th frame, the three frames to be determined (the "m"th frame, the "m+1"th frame, and the "m+2"th frame) are A state is reached in which a history is left as an "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively, and thereby the performance is accepted (determination that an operation has been performed) is made.

According to such a configuration, the "m+1"th frame and the "m+2"th frame are "ON frames", so that the operation state remains for a predetermined time or more over two frames within the production acceptance period (validity period). (For example, 3 ms) It can be determined that the state is maintained. Further, since the "m"th frame is an "OFF frame", it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the production acceptance period (validity period). In other words, in this case, it means that the operation was properly performed within the period in which presentation reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the presentation reception period (validity period ) (here, timing t2 (m+3)), the performance is accepted, and the corresponding post-operation performance (here, "post-operation block E") is executed (started). Note that in this example, the process of turning off the operation status flag is executed when the production is accepted, but the operation status flag may also be turned off at the end of the frame, etc. In short, Any method may be used as long as the operation determination process is not (substantially) performed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a production is accepted at timing t2 (m+3), "post-operation production (operation Processing related to the subsequent block E) is to be performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display according to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m+5"th frame (not shown) two frames later.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started at the "m-2"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226.

As mentioned above, in the "determination process as to whether or not to generate post-operation effects" according to this embodiment, three frames that have a history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are When operation detection information in a lined-up manner is obtained, presentation reception (determination that an operation has been made) is made, and a post-operation presentation can be performed.

Also, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows "performance determination to generate a post-operation production" only within the production reception period (validity period); Detection of state" This itself is subject to the operation detection judgment (judgment I purposely use it as a material.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started within the "m-2"th frame, which is two frames before the "m"th frame in which the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, information obtained through operations at such timings would not be used in decisions regarding performance reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs at timing t1 (m) within the "m"-th frame, timing t2 within the "m"-th frame occurs. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the previous three frames (“m-3” frame, “m-2” frame, and “m-1” frame) is sent to the production reception. It will be used in such judgments. In this example, these frames (the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame) are the "OFF frame," "ON frame," and "ON frame," respectively. As a result, the performance is accepted (determination that an operation has been performed) is made.

According to such a configuration, the "m-3" th frame is an "OFF frame", and the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame are "ON frames". By this, it can be determined that the operating state has been maintained for a predetermined period of time or more (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs. In other words, in this case, it means that the operation is started within the "m-2" frame, which is two frames before the "m" frame where the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 228, the production is accepted within the production reception period (validity period) (here, timing t2(m)), and the corresponding post-operation production (here, "post-operation block E") ) will now be executed (started). If such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. Even if the operation is started immediately before the expected period), this will be treated as an operation performed within the production acceptance period (validity period) and a post-operation production will be generated. You will be able to do so. In other words, in this case, the player will also feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation, so that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

However, if performances are accepted in this manner frequently, the significance of the performance acceptance period (validity period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame, the performance is accepted based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the performance acceptance period (valid period). When this is done, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a sample image or gauge display. In other words, in this case, there can be some doubt as to whether the "post-operation performance" occurred due to the fact that the operation opportunity was granted. It can be expected that the operation will be suppressed from starting before the period) occurs.

Note that there are no particular limitations on the method for realizing "the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a sample image or gauge display." As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process related to the "effect during the valid period (block E for waiting for operation)" is performed from the "m"th frame without intentionally considering the delay of two frames. Then, when the production is accepted at timing t2 (m), processing related to the "post-operation production (post-operation block E)" is performed from the frame (the "m"th frame) for which the production is accepted. That's what I do. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the process related to the "effect after operation effect (block E for after operation)" is executed without executing the process related to the "effect during the valid period (block E for waiting for operation)". As a result, the post-operation effect will be executed without displaying a sample image or gauge display.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2"th frame is maintained across timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame. Based on this assumption, we will explain what kind of judgment is made and how the performance will be executed according to the judgment. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2"th frame is not maintained across timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame; Even if it is terminated within the ``-1''th frame, if the ``m-2''th frame and the ``m-1''th frame each leave a history as an ``ON frame'' (each If the operating state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination will be made at the timing as explained with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect will be executed in accordance with the determination.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, no operation by the player is detected after the production acceptance period occurs, and is only performed within the period before the production acceptance period occurs. However, the judgment conditions for accepting the production at timing t2 (m) (the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame are "OFF frames") , "ON frame", "ON frame") is satisfied, the production is accepted even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m), and the operation is performed. Post-production will be performed.

Regarding such a configuration, the same can be said when an operation is performed within the production acceptance period (validity period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the operating state is not maintained at timing t2 (m+3), and the timing is before timing t2 (m+3) in the "m+3"th frame, or at "m+2". Even if the operation state has ended within the th frame, the judgment conditions for accepting the production at the timing t2 (m+3) (the "m" th frame, the "m+1" th frame, and the "m+2" th frame are 227 even if the operating state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m+3). The production is accepted as shown, and the production is executed after the operation.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether the operating state is maintained at the timing when the "judgment regarding reception of presentation" is made, but rather the timing when "judgment regarding reception of presentation" is made. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period before (in this embodiment, the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), the target operation It is assumed that the operation has been properly performed on the means, and the performance is accepted, and the post-operation performance is executed.

Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (validity period) occurs is used in the "judgment process for production reception" that is performed after the production reception period (validity period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, the operation will start when the precursor effect (appearance effect) has not even been executed and there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (validity period) will occur. There is a concern that by maintaining this state, someone will appear who will try to accept the presentation. That is, if operations in this manner are allowed, the significance of the performance acceptance period (validity period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether an "OFF frame" and an "ON frame" exist, instead of determining only the "ON frame". This is intended to eliminate the above-mentioned concerns. In this embodiment, ON/OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but this is not necessarily the case. It is also possible to adopt a method such as "the performance is accepted on the condition that the operating state is maintained for a predetermined period of time or more from the timing." Even in such cases, it is possible to determine how long before the rise or fall of the sensor signal occurred before the production acceptance period (valid period), or to determine how long the operation state has been maintained. The above problem can be solved by determining how long the process has continued.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when an operation is started from the "m-3"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in FIG. 226.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, the operation started within the "m-3" frame, which is 3 frames before the "m"-th frame in which the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs, is It is assumed that the process continues up to the "m+2"th frame within the acceptance period (validity period). In this example as well, when the production reception period occurs, first, at timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame, a "judgment regarding production reception" is made, and in this judgment, it is determined that the production reception period will occur. The operation detection information acquired previously (here, the operation detection information acquired at the “m-3”th frame, “m-2” frame, and “m-1” frame) is used as the material for the judgment. It is now possible to

However, in this example, the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame are recorded as "ON frame," "ON frame," and "ON frame," respectively. Therefore, as a result of the "determination regarding reception of performance" at the timing t2(m), the performance is not accepted (determination that there has been an operation). Not only that, but also in the "judgment related to presentation reception" that is made from the next frame onwards, such as timing t2 (m+1), the three frames that are subject to the judgment are "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON frame", "ON frame", Therefore, as long as the operation status from the "m-3" frame is maintained, the performance will be recorded as the result of the "judgment regarding production reception" made within each frame. No reception (judgment that an operation has been made) is made.

In other words, in this case, unless the operation state that has been maintained from the "m-3" frame is terminated and the operation is performed again after creating a frame with a history as an "OFF frame", the production will not be accepted. It is possible to prevent the determination (determination that an operation has been made) from being made. As a result, even if you maintain the operation state from a situation where the precursor effect (appearance effect) has not been executed and there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (validity period) will occur, the It becomes possible to suitably avoid a situation where a performance reception is required.

As mentioned above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, if the effect is accepted at timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame, the effect is not displayed after the operation without displaying the sample image or gauge display. (See especially FIG. 228). However, in this case, you will not be able to feel that the performance has occurred after the operation due to the operation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. However, the performance may be advanced so that the simulated image and gauge display are always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature that "at the time when the m-th frame starts, the 'effect during the valid period (block for waiting for operation)' is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600", Although it is not necessary to leave this in place, it is more desirable to leave it in place.

There are no particular limitations on the method for realizing such a configuration. This can be achieved by setting the timing at which "processing" is performed to be opposite to that in the example shown in FIG. 226.

FIG. 231 shows the performance reception period (valid 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the period.

As shown in FIG. 231, if the "m"th frame has now arrived, first, at timing t12(m) in the frame, the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. It will be done. As a result, a production acceptance period (validity period) will occur, but in the "m"th frame, "judgment processing related to production reception" will be performed after the production reception period (validity period) occurs. Never.

In other words, although not shown in the drawing, in the "m"th frame, the timing at which "determination processing related to presentation reception" is performed arrives before timing t12(m). At this time, either the "judgment process related to production reception" itself is not performed, or the "judgment process related to production reception" has been carried out, but the production reception period (validity period) has not yet occurred. If there is, a determination will be made that the performance will not be accepted.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the presentation from being accepted in the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the presentation acceptance period (validity period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (in this case, the "m"th frame) in which the production reception period (validity period) occurs, regardless of the operation status, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays "Production during the validity period (operation waiting block E )" is now always performed, and the display image (effect during the valid period) corresponding to the process can be made to appear on the effect display device 1600 at the "m+2''th frame two frames later. become.

In other words, in this case, after the production acceptance period occurs, the production reception is performed at the earliest when the "m-2"th frame, "m-1" frame, and the "m"th frame are "OFF frames". , "ON frame", and "ON frame" remain, and timing t11 (m+1) in the "m+1"th frame has arrived. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs processing related to the "post-operation performance (post-operation block E)" based on the reception of the performance. At this time, the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512) uses the preparation buffer ( The drawing process is already being performed on the non-displayed buffer (see "processing within image control means" in FIG. 231).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the performance is accepted at the shortest possible time after the production acceptance period has occurred, the production display device 1600 will display the "during effective period production" in the "m+2"th frame. ” will be displayed, and the “post-operation effect” will be displayed in the “m+3”th frame, so the post-operation effect can be started after displaying the sample image or gauge display. become.

However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the sample image or gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. 231. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 226, even in the frame in which the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (in this case, the "m"th frame), production reception can be made at timing t2 (m). Even if the performance is accepted at the timing t2(m), the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the processing related to the "performance during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" at the timing t2(m). It may also be done.

In other words, in this case, based on the acceptance of the effect, the peripheral control unit 1511 processes one frame for the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" for the frame for which the effect has been accepted. This will cause a delay. Therefore, even if the performance is accepted at timing t2 (m) in the "m"th frame, in the "m"th frame, the peripheral control unit Processing related to "block E)" will be performed, and in the next frame, the "m+1"th frame, processing related to "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" will be performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. . This kind of "delay" occurs not only in the frame where the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (in this case, the "m"th frame), but also when the production is accepted in any frame. . Even with this method, even if the production is accepted at the earliest after the production acceptance period has occurred, it is now possible to start the production after the operation after displaying the sample image and gauge display. Become.

In this way, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, in the "judgment process regarding production reception" performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the processing is performed before the m-th frame starts. The "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the previous "m-1"th frame will also be used as a material for determining the performance reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, "from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-1"th frame before the "mth" frame starts. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2"th frame are used as materials for determining the performance reception. In other words, in this case, even if the operation is performed just before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short period of about 33ms to 66ms before the validity period occurs), this production will not be executed. Since the post-operation effect will be executed assuming that the operation was performed within the acceptance period (validity period), the player will also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. learn to remember.

Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "judgment process regarding production reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detection means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame The production reception can be made based on "detected information from". In other words, in this case, even if the operating state is maintained only immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short period of about 33ms to 66ms before the validity period occurs). , since the post-operation performance will be executed assuming that the operation was performed within the performance acceptance period (validity period), the player will also be able to avoid the post-operation performance due to the operation. You will begin to feel the sensation of what happened.

However, as mentioned above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to an "ON frame" at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the "ON frame" when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed within the frame. It may also be configured to operate (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired from the start of the m-th frame until the production reception period (validity period) occurs is also used as the judgment material for the production reception. It will be used. That is, in this case, an operation (for example, maintaining the operation state for 3 ms or more) is performed in the "m-1"th frame and the "m"th frame, and the operation is not performed in the "m-2"th frame. When it is determined that the operation has not been performed (for example, the operating state is less than 3 ms), the performance is accepted. According to such a configuration, since the time required for the operation by the player to be used as determination material is shortened, it becomes possible to provide a post-operation performance with high immediate responsiveness.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and other examples thereof, when the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs, the sample image and gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect is accepted in the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or gauge display. In other words, in this case, even if the operating state is maintained only immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short period of about 33ms to 66ms before the validity period occurs). , Although this is assumed to be an operation performed within the production acceptance period (validity period) and the post-operation production is executed, "If the post-operation production is generated in this manner, It is now possible to give a performance disadvantage such as "Button images and gauge display are not displayed", and it is now possible to encourage proper operation within the performance acceptance period (validity period). For example, if a button image or gauge display is displayed in one of multiple modes, it may not be possible to visually recognize which mode it is displayed in, and the This results in disadvantages in terms of presentation, such as the inability to grasp the level of expectations.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, when the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs while the operating state is maintained for a long time, the production is not accepted. It becomes possible to encourage the user to operate in an appropriate manner for the performance reception period.

However, on the other hand, when the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a shorter time than a specific time, rather than for a long time, the production reception will be accepted. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the expiration date (validity period), the performance after the operation will be treated as if the operation was performed within the production acceptance period (validity period). As a result, the player also feels that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation.

Moreover, in order for the performance to be accepted, it is not enough that the operating state is maintained for a period shorter than a specific time, but it is also required that the operating state is maintained for a longer period of time than the predetermined time. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 231 and other examples thereof, no matter what kind of operation detection information is obtained in the process in the "mth" frame in which the production reception period starts, the process related to the post-operation production ( At least regarding the display processing in the performance display device 1600 (display processing in the performance display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body movement), “information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation performance” , processing to read out in the peripheral control unit 1511 is not executed, and the process when the production is not accepted (processing to read out information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. I decided to implement it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained within the m-th frame in which the performance reception period starts, in the m-th frame, processing (direction processing) when the performance is not accepted is performed. At least a portion (the display processing in the effect display device 1600) of the display processing in the display device 1600, the processing related to lamp emission, the processing related to sound output, the processing related to movable body movement is always performed. That is, in this case, regarding the display on the effect display device 1600, the processing in response to the reception of the effect (the process of reading out information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the production is not accepted (the process of reading out information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation performance" is a performance that was started due to an operation by the player.

Note that, as described above as a different example to the example shown in FIG. In the frame for which the determination has been made, "the process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not executed, and in the next frame, "the process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect" is not executed. , "reading process within the peripheral control unit 1511" may be executed. In other words, in this case, among the processes related to post-operation effects (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processes related to lamp emission, processes related to sound output, processes related to movable body movement), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is determined by the effect determination. In the frame in which the processing has been performed, processing for when the production is not accepted (processing of reading information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. However, in this case, among the processing related to post-operation effects (display processing in the presentation display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body movement), for example, "processing related to lamp emission" and "processing related to sound output" Regarding "processing", a process may be performed to read out "information regarding the light emitting mode after operation" and "information regarding sound output after operation" in the frame in which the effect has been determined. That is, in this case, the output of the lamps and sounds will start in the same manner as after the operation based on the read information within the frame in which the effect has been determined or within the next frame.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 225, when a method of displaying effect images using blocks is adopted, and when the effect by operation is accepted, the "post-operation block" for executing the post-operation effect is used. In addition, "Disappearance EF block (LCD effect scheduler data for Disappearance EF)" is added to display the disappearance effect image until the operation promotion images such as the simulated image and gauge display that were displayed until then are hidden. It may also be executed. According to such a "disappearance EF block (liquid crystal performance scheduler data for extinction EF)", for example, an image in which a sample image or a gauge display fades out in response to a production reception (an image that gradually disappears) can now be displayed. Further, such "extinguishing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinguishing EF)" may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without performing the effect after the operation. The "extinguishing EF block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for extinction EF)" is also attached to the background block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for background), the operation waiting block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for waiting for operation), etc. It is possible to configure the process to be executed when the availability information is turned on in the process read out based on the process identification information.

In addition, regarding the "processing to generate a state in which production reception is permitted (processing to operate (set) the operation state flag to the on state)" explained in FIGS. 226 to 231, the scheduler after the symbol variation starts. (elapsed time), etc., and does not necessarily have to be executed based on a frame.

Further, the "sample image" and the "gauge display" may also be displayed as a pre-validity effect (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, when the pre-validity effect (display based on appearance EF block E) is being performed, the display mode may be made semi-transparent, or may be displayed hazy due to other effect displays. It is required to display the "sample image" and the "gauge display" in a manner different from that when the "effect period effect (display based on the block E for waiting for operation)" is being performed, such as by In addition, in this case, in the effect before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the "sample image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the effect may progress while the other is not displayed. .

[Further performance regarding sample image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) is performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating performance using decorative patterns will be executed together with expected performances (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of movable bodies (actual object performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected presentation will be provided as a presentation with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which the performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect occurs is made to have a different form depending on the result of the effect judgment, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation. It is designed to suggest the percentage of winnings and the percentage of jackpot symbols being stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, Even if a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is met), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the operation acceptance production (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception performance (validity period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, there is a variation pattern other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern". It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing is not included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect element that is the target of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). The operation only executes a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration). The reception performance (validity period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
・During the execution period of the symbol production (production pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of a low-expectation non-suppression reception performance that provides operation opportunities while being output, or a symbol performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is Is the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" suppressed or output without sound, or is in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which audible sound is recorded among the sound data has ended, or whether the channel assignment As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as making it possible at least to generate a high-expectation suppression reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate when the system is closed (e.g., has been terminated) (see Figure 144). ~Figure 195, Figure 207~Figure 231).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the simulated image displayed in the operation reception performance as an integrated simulated image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image. This is intended to improve the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) occurs. For such an integrated mock image, there is an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display this in both the reception performance (validity period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, and 207 to 231) is realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated sample image with one of the integrated sample images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve gaming interest.

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which a sample image is displayed as an "integrated sample image."
First, to explain the "sample image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance includes the "operation receiver" that is operated by the player, and the periphery of the operation receiver. A "peripheral decoration part" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the term "simulation image" refers to an image that simulates the "operation receiver" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's manipulation, and the "peripheral decoration part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving section" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "periphery decoration section" corresponds to the frame unit 415. This corresponds to . Furthermore, in the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 161, the "operation receiving part" corresponds to the sword part 5010, and the "peripheral decoration part" corresponds to the sheath part 5020. Become.

FIG. 232 shows an "integrated image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs on an operation means provided with an "operation receiver" that receives a "press operation" by a player. It is a figure showing an example.

In this example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiver" on the upper surface of the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle part 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used to determine the effect (such as the trigger for executing the effect after the operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving parts with a possible "handle part 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 232 describes the "integrated image" when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below including FIG. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation acceptance performance (validity period) for which an opportunity is given occurs. In other words, in this case, the "simulated images of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, and FIGS. 207 to 231) are respectively treated as "integrated simulated images" described below. It is possible to replace it, and in this case, the handle button 5014 will not be provided and will be omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception that gives an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) When generating an effect (validity period), in the effect display device 1600, a button pattern image BMG that imitates the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410) is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. The images are displayed as integrated images IGa to IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). They are displayed only as morphological images IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated image IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompts such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation performance executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) is a "first performance mode with relatively low expectations" and a "relatively low expectation performance mode". A plurality of performance modes are prepared, including a "second performance mode with high expectations," and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d),
・The mode shown in FIG. 232(b) (integrated model image IGb) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 232(c) (integrated model image IGc) is better than the mode shown in FIG. 232(b) (integrated model image IGb) in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
- The mode shown in FIG. 232(d) (integrated model image IGd) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 232(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) Based on the result of jackpot judgment (performance judgment), so that a relationship is established that when ``2nd production mode with relatively high expectation level'' appears as a post-operation production when . One of the morphological images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGa to IGd. Just by preparing at least two aspects, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation performance within the effective period. Furthermore, it is possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated image IGa to IGd) and display any of the prepared modes.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword decoration body 5001, production operation unit 400),
- integrated model image display means for displaying a model image of the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image;
- an operation reception execution means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving part due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed; The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

The details of the "integrated simulated images" shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d) will be explained separately for each aspect (integrated simulated images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated pattern image IGa" shown in FIG. 232(a) is configured to include a normal button pattern image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as "an image that simulates the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is "a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415), but instead decorates the periphery of the normal button pattern image BMGa as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is determined which of the operating means is given the opportunity to operate based on the operating means to be operated ( It can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa that imitates a part of the button image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button pattern image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated pattern image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and performance. ), it is expected that the visual impact when the normal button sketch image BMGa is displayed will be greater, and that it will increase the interest in the game. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space required to make the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible presentation that is not limited by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 232(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and on its top surface, A predetermined decoration is applied to warn that the button is highly dangerous. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have shapes different from the actual peripheral decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG changes from the predetermined maximum display area to the predetermined minimum value (including "0") when no operation is accepted within the validity period. The display area decreases over time until it reaches the display area of . That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has the function of indicating the operation means to be operated, but also indicates the remaining time until the state (validity period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has the function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232(a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by this divided image KG will function as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the partition image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 232(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is displayed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

Note that when realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area with the predetermined decoration. In addition to the display method, a method may be adopted in which the color of the display target area itself, which is decorated with a predetermined decoration, is changed in color between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 232(a), the normal peripheral decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is Since it is arranged to extend over other areas within the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself. It is expected that the player's enjoyment of the game will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 232(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGa". In other words, as will be described later, the button drawing image BMG has a plurality of modes with different expectations, and the button drawing image BMGa is normally displayed as one of these modes. If this is adopted, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the handle button 5014 that is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa.

The "button drawing image BMGa (FIG. 232(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact copy of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation target; It is sufficient if it is displayed with a level of reproduction (deformation, etc.) that allows one to recognize which operating means it is.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 232(b) is basically the same as the "integrated model image IGa" described above, and is similar to the button model image BMG that simulates the operation target. , and a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated map image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", but the button map image BMG is displayed as the "button map image" described above. Instead of "BMGa," the button is displayed as "special button image BMGb," which has a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. The button pattern image BMGa (FIG. 232(a)) is displayed as an image having a different shape from that of the button pattern image BMGa (FIG. 232(a)), which is a pattern of the button pattern 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is being operated.

However, as mentioned above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa", which is a model of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the operation target, is displayed integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of indicating that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object to be operated. In this regard, in the "integrated map image IGb", the "special button map image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", so the "special button map image Even if "BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated simulated image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" must be operated by a different operation means than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display the handle part 5012 and the like when it is the object of operation.

According to this configuration, by displaying the button drawing image BMG, which imitates the operation receiving part, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the periphery thereof, as an integrated image, it is possible to The button drawing image BMG, which is only a part of the fake image, can now be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operating means to be operated, resulting in a more outstanding presentation. It is expected that the game will be made more interesting through its sexiness and decorativeness.

Note that the "special button drawing image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 232(b) is depicted with a more stylish design than the "button drawing image BMGa" as a button with a streamlined shape, and the top of the button is depicted with a more stylish design. The words "DANGER" are written on it. By appearing such a "special button drawing image BMGb" that does not exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, it becomes possible to make it easier for players to remember the premium feeling, and a "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are now expected to instinctively sense that expectations are higher than they used to be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 232(b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGc" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated map image IGc", the button map image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button map image BMGa", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image" described above. Instead of "image SSGa", the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape is displayed.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided around the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the effect display is The periphery of the button pattern image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display performance on the device 1600.
- A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such an "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232(c))", when using the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" as a reference, it is possible to perform an operation on any operating means. It is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated map image IGc" (FIG. 232(c)) without causing a change in the shape of the "button map image BMG" that indicates whether an opportunity will be given. become able to. Thereby, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggesting function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232(c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232(a))". It is displayed as . Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) is applied.

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate member with special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232(a))". The image is enlarged and displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as a developed version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the expectation level is higher than when the "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are expected to be able to instinctively sense things that are expensive.

Furthermore, although the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232(c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232(a))," the gauge image (predetermined image) No change is made to the display target area of GG itself.

In other words, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, are the display target area and the gauge image "merely part of the decoration" or "the rest?" It is difficult for the player to discern whether the part has a function of indicating time or not. In this regard, in the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232(a))" and "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232(c))," there is a gauge that has an important function of "suggesting the remaining time." The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, but the shape is changed in other parts, so it is possible to change the shape without sacrificing the remaining time suggestion function. This makes it possible to achieve decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 232(c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, when the "integrated map image IGc" is displayed, the normal button map image BMGa is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated map image IGa" is displayed. You may also do so. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGd" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated button drawing image IGd", the button drawing image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "normal button drawing image BMGa" but as a "special button drawing image BMGb" which has a different shape. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 232(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 232(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc" (FIG. 232(c))" is displayed as an integrated image with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the effects produced by the "special button map image BMGb" described above regarding the "integrated map image IGb (FIG. 232(b))" and the "integrated map image IGc (FIG. 232 (b))" can be achieved. In addition to obtaining the effects achieved by the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above with respect to "c))", when using the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" as a reference, Since the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that the level of expectation is high.

On the other hand, even though the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are changed, the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the edge decoration image SSG. Specification for the same post-operation effect when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGd (Fig. 232(d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that the operation reception effect (validity period) is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 232(d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which an "integrated image IGd" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, when the "integrated map image IGd" is displayed, the special button map image BMGb is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") than when the "integrated map image IGb" is displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) When this occurs, an integrated button image IG in which the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one manner. The other side can be displayed in one of a number of ways. For example, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "normal button drawing image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( Figures 232(a), (c)). Furthermore, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "special button drawing image BMGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( Figures 232(b), (d)). Furthermore, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", the button print image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 232(a), (b)). Furthermore, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button print image BMG may be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 232(a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the aspect changes. Therefore, if you look at one side whose appearance has not changed, you can easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception performance (validity period) is occurring, regardless of which form the other side is displayed on. Therefore, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect of one side of the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and only the aspect of the other side may be changed.

Furthermore, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception performance (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. It is considered possible. In other words, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has the function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends, and indicates which operating means is the object of operation. By being displayed as an integrated button image IG that is integrated with the ``button image BMG'' that performs the suggesting function, it is possible to understand the remaining time and the operation target, and also recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the player will be able to suitably maintain the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) is occurring, such as by being able to do so.

In addition, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (There are both parts with a remaining time suggestion function and parts without a remaining time suggestion function). That is, the purpose of the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), but also to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (validity period). Since it is possible to proactively adopt display formats with the aim of "increasing the user experience," while indicating the remaining time, it is also possible to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be significantly improved. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG be displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say that.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button pattern image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, in reality, when the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part has one mode, the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the operation receiving part has multiple modes (multiple luminescent colors). ). Therefore, when the button drawing image BMG changes, it can be confirmed simply by checking the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of copying.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as a matter of fact, the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decorative portion does not change into any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button pattern image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the aspect of the "pattern part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part, and can perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the performance. Note that the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part may be provided as something that cannot be changed into a plurality of modes, such as being non-emissive.

In addition, in the integrated drawing image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the aspect of both the button drawing image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (see FIG. 232(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable that the aspects of both the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part is in one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the “handle portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration part, depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” or the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. You can do it like this. However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape between the case where it is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the peripheral decoration In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to cause only a change in the aspect (for example, a change in the light emission manner) without a change in shape. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration part so that its shape cannot change in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern images include a button pattern image BMG in which the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is patterned, as well as a pattern image in which the pattern portion 5012 is patterned. TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to vary depending on which of the simulated images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b that decorate the periphery of the button pattern image BMG cannot be displayed when a pattern image different from the button pattern image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral edge The decorative images SSGa, b themselves can also be expected to have a "function that suggests which operating means is the object of operation."

Note that if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the pattern image (button pattern image BMG, pattern pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image , length) are also preferably different. The operation reception effect in which the button drawing image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the button drawing image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (you can select which one occurs depending on the effect judgment) It may also be an effect that occurs in a different variation pattern or at a different timing. The periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is not a periphery decoration part, and the periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image TMG is a periphery decoration part is not an imitation of the periphery decoration part. You can. However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation acceptance effect (validity period) may be the same.

In addition, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG include those areas. A predetermined decoration (in this case, a "striped pattern") is applied over the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner over a display target area that has been given a predetermined decoration. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is changed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration Since the number of predetermined decorations also decreases, players who dislike the loss of predetermined decorations are encouraged to perform operations early.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the machine is not imitated, and the image represents an intangible object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a higher degree of freedom without being limited by the substance of the gaming machine parts.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), among the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button drawing image BMG, so which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target. It becomes possible to realize a display with higher performance and decoration by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while appropriately indicating whether the image is being displayed or not.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button drawing image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the edge decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and because the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button drawing image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

Note that in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed to increase its size. As will be explained later, methods for changing the shape include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), or using multiple methods with different contour shapes (cuboids, spheres, etc.) It is possible to adopt methods such as expanding the range of objects displayed within a predetermined object expressed as an image. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, a stepwise change from a form with low expectations to a form with high expectations is performed, and then, finally, It may be possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception performance while the changed form is maintained.

Furthermore, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the gauge image ( The display target area of GG (predetermined image) is not changed (at least the shape) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to suitably maintain the function of suggesting how much time is left, and in this way, the important function can be maintained. While maintaining this, the degree of expectation can also be suggested by changes in shape in a region other than the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, and may be a peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiver. It may also be displayed as an image of a portion of the image.

Furthermore, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform the operation.

However, in the integrated pattern image IG according to this embodiment, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is displayed statically. According to such a configuration, one side uses dynamic expressions to contribute to improving the performance when a button effect, which is an important effect, occurs, while the other side uses a dynamic expression to maintain the display in place. By doing so, when the integrated image IG is viewed as a whole, it will not be displayed moving, so visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the button model image BMG is dynamically created so as to depict how the operation receiver to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. The peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated image IG that has ensured suitable visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG, which is the side that is not dynamically displayed). Therefore, although we are trying to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs by dynamic display using the button drawing image BMG, it is difficult to understand how much remaining time is allowed for the reception of the performance. can be easily recognized.

In addition, in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, on the side of the integrated image IG that has ensured suitable visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), the gauge image ( Predetermined image) Also includes an area where GG is not displayed. That is, in this case, when performing a performance that suggests the level of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the performance is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect.

A region of the peripheral decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG have multiple aspects with different expectations, and these Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, In addition, if the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the time limit is 100%, or has a function that indicates the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced because it becomes difficult to grasp to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, it is possible to display an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is used as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area. Then, a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is also displayed to be displaced in the same way.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, the validity period ends, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) is just a decoration or indicates the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking this, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 233, if timing A0 has now arrived at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception performance) in which operation reception is permitted within the predetermined variation pattern starts, the performance display device 1600 , an integrated image IG, and operation promotion images such as "Push!" and "Downward Arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in (). Regardless of the manner in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the relevant validity period, the display of a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below as time passes.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" "Specific image whose aspect has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. By simply checking, it becomes possible to easily understand whether a predetermined period of time has already passed since the operation was accepted (a situation where the remaining crotch space is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first processed from timing A0 (start timing of the validity period). Until a predetermined time period (time required for the entire image of a specific image to appear) has elapsed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such that the display area increases according to the elapsed time. is displayed in the display target area.

For example, in the integrated image IG at timing A1, which is a short time after timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), as shown in FIG. A "specific image TG" as a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appears to the point where about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is increasing as time passes.

In the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 233(c) and (d), a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) The "specific image TG" as a "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety, and the gauge image can be displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the image is displaced within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is a gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (image) is displayed at or near the end of the GG, and is displayed in such a way that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It becomes.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed as an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, for example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a manner in which the end portion thereof is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time has run out when the display area reaches the minimum value (here "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (or all of it may be) is not hidden and remains displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is set to "0", leaving about half the display area of the "specific image TG". If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left, and such a configuration You may also do so.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the validity period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display position of the "specific image TG" is adjusted (continuously) according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player's side, how much of the image is displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG? It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether the predetermined image is GG or not.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and most (more than half, or all) of the display area remains, the player does not When viewed, it appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is longer than it actually is, so it is possible to make it appear that the validity period is longer than it actually is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the validity period of the operation reception performance ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and ends, so the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy between the display timing and the end timing of the validity period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a partial change in the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" specific image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is used as a part of the gauge image GG. As a result, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the valid period is longer than it appears, and the enjoyment of the game when the valid period occurs. They will be expected to improve their skills.

FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation reception is permitted.

Suppose now that timing A0 has arrived at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has started within the predetermined variation pattern, and in the example shown in FIG. 234, the effect display device 1600 , an integrated image IG, and operation promotion images such as "Push!" and "Downward Arrow" are displayed.

In this example as well, the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, but based on the result of the effect judgment, FIGS. 232(b) to ( It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Regardless of the manner in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the relevant validity period, the display of a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" causes changes in the modes shown in FIGS. 234(a) to (d) over time. .

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234(a), in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG covers the entire area of the display target area. Instead, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed. At timing A0 (start timing of the validity period), only a portion of the "specific image TG" may be displayed, but here, the entirety is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the "specific image TG" functions as a part of the "gauge image GG", so it seems that there is more time remaining than it appears. It is possible to

The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image expressing an “eraser”, and it does not fit within the area surrounded by the partition image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG), but is placed in another area (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , an area whose appearance can change depending on the level of expectation, etc.). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the "specific image TG" more prominent than the "gauge image GG", and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 234(b) and (c), the "specific image TG" The area through which the "" has passed changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased with an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the amount of displacement of the "specific image TG". In some cases, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so the contrast around the "specific image TG" becomes more prominent, suggesting how much time is left. This makes it possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is about Note that it is desirable that the color appearing in the reduced area be a color that is not used in the "gauge image GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 234, the "specific image TG" is a gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time has run out when the display area reaches the minimum value (here, "0"). Since it does not originally function as a part, at least a part (or all of it may be) is not hidden and remains displayed even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends). Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0". , so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, in this example as well, in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and a part remains. It may be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, since the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player side, it is possible to make it ambiguous how much of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It becomes like this.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and most (more than half, or all) of the display area remains, the player does not When viewed, it appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is longer than it actually is, so it is possible to make it appear that the validity period is longer than it actually is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the validity period of the operation reception performance ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and ends, so the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy between the display timing and the end timing of the validity period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. Furthermore, the validity period during which the images of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, and the image of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" in the manner shown in FIG. It may be arranged so that the validity period during which the is displayed can occur under different conditions. In this case, the shape of the integrated image IG itself or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG is different from each other between the valid period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 233 appears and the valid period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 234 appears. It is desirable to make them different.

As mentioned above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the validity period of the predetermined operation reception performance, as shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(e) and FIGS. This can be displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation. However, as mentioned above, while the button pattern image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range, the peripheral decoration image SSG is prevents this from being displayed dynamically. In the peripheral decoration image SSG, which is the side where such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image (predetermined image) GG is changed, it is easy to recognize how much time remains until the validity period ends even in the dynamically displayed integrated image IG. You will be able to do this.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configurations shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the "specific image TG" has a display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" within the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is decreased, and whose display position is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it is made unclear to what extent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG out of the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value, and a predetermined time elapses after the operation is accepted. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is increased to compensate for the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". We are trying to increase this. According to such a configuration, initially from the start of the validity period until the predetermined time elapses, it appears as if the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has not decreased. Since it becomes possible to give the player a positive image, it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the integrated image IG is displayed in one of multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (e)) based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination). However, the display shape of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" should be the same regardless of whether they are displayed in any of these modes. It is desirable to do so. Each aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" (pattern, color, etc.) may be changed according to expectations, but a function that indicates the remaining time may be changed. In order to maintain it preferably, even if one aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" changes, it is desirable that the other aspect is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. As the "Image) GG" gradually decreases, the expectation level (double circle) becomes visible, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game will improve.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, even when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the "specific image TG" is non-activated. The display status is maintained instead of being displayed. However, regarding the operation acceptance effects shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, if timing A4 arrives without any operation being performed by the player, the operation is accepted internally and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, It is desirable to have the system function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception performance" in which a sound is output in response to reception. In this case, timing A4 may be the timing at which the validity period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after this timing. In any case, timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (at the timing when it is hidden or a timing later than that), and when the "specific image TG" is It is desirable to set the timing to arrive when at least a portion of the screen is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after operation acceptance is no longer permitted, the " Since the "specific image TG" is now displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display and post-operation sound output were started in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation being accepted. become able to. The "specific image TG" may also be displayed at the time when the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts (for example, it may fade out after the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts). (such as those that are gradually hidden from view).

When the validity period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second validity period that is different from the first condition. When the conditions are met, a second validity period during which automatic acceptance is not performed can be generated. Even during the second validity period, the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a gauge image (predetermined image ) GG display target area is included. However, within the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is no longer displayed. Other than the fact that the "specific image TG" is not displayed, the integrated model image IG displayed within the first validity period and the integrated model image IG displayed within the second validity period are displayed as the same image. It can be done.

That is, in the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is met, unlike the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is met, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, The second valid period ends in a manner in which the automatic reception does not function and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) does not occur. Therefore, if the "specific image TG" remains displayed at the time when the reception of operations by the player is no longer permitted, the validity period ends even though the remaining time has not yet been used up. This may give rise to a misunderstanding as if the player is playing the game, and may even reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" not be displayed during the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the lengths of the set times (the time from when operation reception is permitted until the end) are different between the first valid period and the second valid period. Further, it is desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted are different from each other.

Furthermore, in addition to the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third validity period during which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth validity period during which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). The point is that the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid periods with different occurrence conditions for each period) includes at least the first valid period during which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above, and automatic reception is performed. It is sufficient that at least the second validity period in which the processing related to display and sound is performed in the manner described above is included in the validity period in which the display and sound are not performed (validity periods with different generation conditions).

Also, the "first validity period" here is
・It does not mean that only when set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period.
・Represents something that outputs post-operation display and post-operation sound output regardless of the performance state and regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period. In the first place, it is not necessary to provide a "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "a plurality of performance states" as the performance state. In addition, if the ``second validity period'' occurs while the ``special presentation state (automatic reception mode)'' is set, either method may be adopted as to whether automatic reception is enabled or not. (For example, "automatic reception may not always be enabled regardless of the performance state") is not related to the configuration related to the technical feature described here.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the validity period of the operation reception performance occurs, the integrated model image IG (periphery decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated model image IG (periphery decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of 1, a display is performed in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is decreased as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time passes becomes decorative in itself, so that the remaining time as the valid period is used up. This makes it possible to suitably maintain interest in playing games.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a specific pattern applied to the display target area and has a predetermined transmittance. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a superimposed manner, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself has a specific pattern applied to it, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes over time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself which reduces the display area of GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) It becomes possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself which reduces the display area of GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 233 and 234 is defined as the "first display target area". When, a second display target area has a shape different from the non-linear specific shape (non-similar shape) and has a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts reducing the display area to when it ends. The operation reception effect (validity period) in which is displayed can occur under different conditions. The operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, and The operation reception effect (validity period) in which the second display target area is displayed is designed to be terminated at least when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed. may be terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player. I'm trying not to let it get terminated.

In this regard, the operation object to which the operation opportunity is given is determined by the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. By making the (operation receivers) different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set time is the same when the operation targets are different. Coupled with this, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (validity period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (validity period) in which the second display target area is displayed are based on different operation reception parts. The replica image will be displayed in a form that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Regarding the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (validity period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in either case, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will be provided in a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed with different display shapes.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, there are two cases in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “specific non-linear shape” and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “specific non-linear shape” and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output may indicate "Jackpot". It is desirable that the rate at which "aspects suggesting this" appear is different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed are for the same set time (first set time). Sometimes, it is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept operations regarding the same post-operation display or post-operation sound output. It is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept operations regarding different post-operation displays and post-operation sound outputs at different set times.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, by displaying an operation-related display such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" over the integrated model image IG, When you look at these images, it will be more clearly expressed that you are in a situation where you need to perform an operation. However, here, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" will not be displayed overlapping the button sketch image BMG (at any timing of dynamic display) that suggests the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG that indicate the remaining time are not displayed overlapping each other.

In such a configuration, operations such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" can be performed while avoiding important information such as the button pattern image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG in the integrated pattern image IG. Since the related display is displayed superimposed on the integrated image IG, it becomes possible to appropriately convey important information to the player and strongly urge the player to perform the operation. Needless to say, this is because the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display that is performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted. There are multiple (types) of validity periods with different contents and sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these valid periods are different, and when any of the generating conditions is satisfied, a corresponding type of valid period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of valid periods, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period (first valid period). and a period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period). Hereinafter, in this example, these "first validity period" and "second validity period" will be defined as the above-mentioned "first validity period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second validity period" in which automatic reception is not performed. These terms and conditions will be explained as being the same as the term 'validity period', but they may be applied as a validity period different from these.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) indicating that operation reception is permitted, the precursor effect (specific display) is may be executed before and after the occurrence timing of the permitted validity period. According to such a premonitory performance (specific display), since the validity period occurs while the flashy performance is being performed, it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the validity period occurs. become able to.

However, when executing a precursor effect (specific display) in such a manner, the precursor effect (specific display) is displayed with priority over the integrated image IG, so when the validity period starts, the Even if the fake image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the portion that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (is not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to decrease under such conditions where visibility is difficult.

In other words, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the part that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears, and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed) By the time the visibility of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's perspective, the validity period (set time) You may get the impression that it has become substantially shorter.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of valid periods, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but In the second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the precursor effect (specific display) is ended, the second valid period is from the time the second valid period occurs until the end. The "specific image TG" is not displayed at all during this period. On the other hand, among the valid periods of multiple (types), by the time the indicator effect (specific display) occurs in the middle of execution and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easily visible), the gauge image (Predetermined image) In the first valid period in which the display area of GG is reduced, the specific image TG is displayed within the first valid period.

According to such a configuration, during the first valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the gauge image (predetermined image) Since the "specific image TG" is now displayed in the display target area of GG, the gauge image It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of GG has not decreased much, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

On the other hand, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second validity period during which the omen effect (specific display) is not performed. For example, in the case of the display mode shown in Fig. 233, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the validity period occurs, and the "specific image TG" is displayed when the validity period occurs. When observing how the "specific image TG" gradually appears over time, it is possible to find out that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease due to the exaggerated representation of the remaining time, so the "specific image TG" is displayed in such a second valid period. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring in order to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition to the second validity period, the validity period of multiple (types) includes "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed". ) may be prepared with different occurrence conditions, or a period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not decreased (fifth validity period) when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is completed. In addition, there is a phenomenon that occurs during the execution of a precursor effect (specific display), and by the time the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. The valid period (sixth valid period)" may be prepared with different occurrence conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed at this time may be set as appropriate. good. In short, the plurality (types) of validity periods include at least the second validity period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the first validity period in which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when the validity period occurs, the above-mentioned effects will be achieved in relation to the precursor effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG may be replaced with the manner shown in FIG. 234. It may also be executed.

FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance progress when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 235(a) shows a performance display device 1600 in which, in a normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is in a specific performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of jackpot determination. Shows the current performance status.

FIG. 235(b) shows a performance situation in which a precursory performance (specific display TH) is started on the performance display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 235(a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235(b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated pattern image IG has not yet appeared. However, from the time the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated image IG is displayed internally, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed with priority, so that the integrated image IG is displayed internally. The entire sample image IG may be made invisible (or made difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). In other words, in this case, operation acceptance is permitted (validity period starts) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

FIG. 235(c) shows that as a result of the progress of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235(b) and the reduction of the area in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed, This shows a situation in which a portion that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears and is displayed in a highly visible state.

In other words, the integrated image IG is at a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 235(b) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 235(b)), and at a timing shown in FIG. 235(c). At least internal processing (display on layer processing) is executed when the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation that occurs. It becomes. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 235(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are not visible (or are not visible) because they overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH) that is preferentially displayed. However, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing performance (specific display TH) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and the foreshadowing performance is performed for a predetermined time after the validity period occurs. (Specific display TH) makes at least a part of the integrated image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In the example shown in FIG. 235(c), the button drawing image that imitates the operation target is difficult to visually recognize, but the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery is not displayed in the "special periphery decoration image SSGb". It is in a state where it can be recognized that it is a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 235(c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the "specific image TG" is of the type that is displayed in the first place ( (see Figure 234), or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see Figure 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that executing the precursor performance in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

FIG. 235(d) shows that as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235(b), there is no longer any overlap with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). (Here, the foreshadowing effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 235(d), when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility condition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. This makes it seem as if the display area has not decreased that much. Thereby, it can be expected to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor performance (specific display TH) ends.

In FIG. 235(e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the execution) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 235(e), at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the validity period ends. In this regard, in the first validity period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed are performed (Fig. 235 (see (f)).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the validity period has ended (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display will be displayed. Since the "specific image TG" will be displayed even just before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation will be displayed in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation reception occurring. It becomes possible to make it appear as if after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, by the time the entire image of the integrated sample image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is well visible, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. In other words, in this case, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting sound after a game or operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Regarding the progress of the presentation in the manner shown in FIG. 235, there are two cases: when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, and when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to either.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 235, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in separate layers, and by displaying the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) with priority, it appears in the figure 235. We decided to realize the progress of the production in various ways. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and, for example, the progress of the effect in the manner shown in FIG. 235 may be stored as one piece of moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 235, the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated image IGa) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mock image IG may be made to appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). . When such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursor effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 in order to improve the game's interest.

FIGS. 236 to 238 are diagrams showing modified examples of the presentation progress when the first effective period occurs among the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

FIG. 236(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the first performance pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination by the performance display device. 1600 shows the production status being performed.

FIG. 236(b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 236(a) is being executed. It shows the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect will be performed. It functions as a performance.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor performance (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination), " Either the image shown in FIG. 237(c) or the image shown in FIG. It is designed to suggest which of the "button drawing images BMGb" is likely to appear.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that "normal button drawing image BMGa" will be displayed as the button drawing image BMG (here, "100%") This suggests that.

In the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" according to this example, the "integrated image IGa" is in a different form (in this case, translucent) from the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 232(a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa'. However, this is not necessarily the case; for example, for the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)," the "integrated image IGa" may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232(a). Alternatively, the "normal button pattern image BMGa" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Even when displaying the "normal button drawing image BMGa" as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)), or it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)). ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (in this case, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237(c), the "normal button drawing image BMGa" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGa' having the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the "normal button pattern image BMGa" is displayed as the "integrated button image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" that is integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period will occur, which is displayed as the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232(a))" that is integrated with the "image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in FIG. 237(c) is displayed, the image IGa' (image BMGa') is not the "integrated image IGa" (FIG. 232(a)). , an effect suggesting (reminiscing) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232(c))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 237(d), "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed for the image IGa' expressing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' expressing the normal button model image BMGa)". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb' is gradually brought closer. As a result of this kind of effect, "the image IGa' that expresses the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' that expresses the normal button model image BMGa)" is changed to "the image that expresses the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated in such a way that the image SSGb' is added, a valid period in which the integrated image IGc (FIG. 232(c)) appears will occur. In contrast, "image SSGb' expressing special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGa' expressing integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' expressing normal button model image BMGa')" If the images are not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" appears will occur.

FIG. 237(e) shows a performance situation in which a second precursory performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in FIG. 237(d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has progressed to the second timing, and suggests that operation acceptance is permitted. It is performed as a performance. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa' representing the integrated map image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button map image BMGa)" It is to be started as the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching, and at the time it is started, "the image IGa' (representing the integrated pattern image IGa)" is to be started. Alternatively, it is unclear whether the "image BMGa') representing the normal button pattern image BMGa" and the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

As the performance shown in FIG. 237(e) progresses, based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 237(f)" or "the image shown in FIG. 237(h)" is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIG. 237(f) and FIG. 237(h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235(c)," and the situations and image contents shown in FIG. 237(e) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. , a portion that does not overlap with the premonitory effect (specific display) appears and indicates the situation and image content in which the portion is displayed in a highly visible state.

That is, the integrated image IG is at a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 237(e) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 237(e)), and at a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation shown in 237(h) appears, it is displayed at least in internal processing (display on layer processing). ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 237(f) or FIG. 237(h), at least a portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed as a second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and after the validity period occurs, For a predetermined period of time, at least a portion of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237(f) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated sample image IG is not the “special edge decoration image SSGb” but the “normal edge decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 237(d) and (e), the "image IGa' representing the integrated map image IGa" (or the image IGa' representing the normal button map image BMGa) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the image BMGa') has failed to be associated with the image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 237(g). The whole picture will be revealed. The progress of the performance after that is as described above with reference to FIGS. 235(d) to (f), so a description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the situation shown in FIG. 237(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is a "special edge decoration image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 237(d), the "image IGa' representing the integrated pattern image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button pattern image BMGa)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is possible to recognize that the image SSGb' expressing the image SSGb' was successfully connected. That is, in this case, when the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237(i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 232(c)) The whole picture will be revealed. The subsequent development of the effect is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGc (see FIG. 232(c)), and FIGS. 235(d) to 235(d) Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the "image shown in Figure 238(j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that "special button drawing image BMGb" will be displayed as the button drawing image BMG (here, "100%"). is suggested.

In the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" according to this example, the "integrated image IGb" is in a different form (in this case, translucent) from the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 232(b)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb'. However, this is not necessarily the case; for example, for the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)", the "integrated image IGb" may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232(b). Alternatively, the "special button image BMGb" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa." Even when the "special button drawing image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(b)), or it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(b)). ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (in this case, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238(j), the "special button drawing image BMGb" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGb' having the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the validity period in which the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the "integrated button image IGb (Fig. 232(b))" that is integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period will occur, which is displayed as the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232(d))" that is integrated with the "image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. 238(j) is displayed, the image IGb' (image BMGb') is not the "integrated image IGb" (FIG. 232(b)). , an effect suggesting (reminiscing) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 232(d))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 237(k), for the "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)", "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb' is gradually brought closer. As a result of such an effect, "the image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" is changed to "the image expressing the special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the addition of "image SSGb'", a valid period during which "integrated image IGd" (FIG. 232(d)) appears will occur. In contrast, "image SSGb' expressing special border decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb' expressing integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' expressing special button model image BMGb)" If they are not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232(b))" appears will occur.

FIG. 238(l) shows a performance situation in which a second precursory performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in FIG. 238(k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second omen effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third omen effect (third specific display) different from this.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation reception is permitted. It is executed as a performance that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" It is to be started as the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching, and at the time it is started, "the image IGb' (representing the integrated pattern image IGb)" is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether the "image BMGb') expressing the special button pattern image BMGb" and the "image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

As the performance shown in FIG. 238(l) progresses, based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 238(m)" or "the image shown in FIG. 238(o)" is selected. is displayed.

The situation and image content shown in FIG. 238(m) and FIG. 238(o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image content shown in FIG. 235(c)", and the situation and image content shown in FIG. 238(l) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. , a portion that does not overlap with the premonitory effect (specific display) appears and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a highly visible state.

That is, the integrated image IG is at a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 238(l) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 238(l)), and at a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 238(m) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation shown in 238(o) appears, it is displayed at least in internal processing (display on layer processing). ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 238(m) or FIG. 238(o), at least a portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed as a second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and after the validity period occurs, For a predetermined period of time, at least a portion of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238(m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated sample image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 238(k) and (l), "Image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or "image IGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb" It is possible to recognize that the image BMGb') has failed to be associated with the image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. That is, in this case, when the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238(n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 232(b)) The whole picture will be revealed. The subsequent development of the effect is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGb (see FIG. 232(b)), and from FIG. 235(d) to Since this is the same as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the situation shown in FIG. 238(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special edge decoration image SSGb". As a result of the rendering shown in FIG. 238(k), the "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It can be recognized that the image SSGb' expressing That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238(p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 232(d)) The whole picture will be revealed. The development of the effect after that is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGd (see FIG. 232(d)), and from FIG. 235(d) to Since this is the same as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when the image shown in FIG. 237(c) appears, the probability that "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to 0%, but as the button image BMG The probability that the "special button drawing image BMGb" will appear may be set to be small. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 237(e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 237(f)→(g), (h)→(i), FIG. 238(m)→(n), ( There is also a possibility that the performance progresses in the form o)→(p).

According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 237(f) and (h) and FIGS. 238(m) and (o) appear, it is not clear in which manner the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it is recognizable, it becomes impossible to recognize in which manner the button pattern image BMG is displayed. In other words, in this case, the level of expectation will be suggested in stages according to the situation regarding the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and it will be possible to improve the game's interest. . In particular, if the button drawing image BMG can suggest one of multiple operating means with different operation targets depending on its display mode, the validity period has started and it also suggests the expectation level related to the operation. Since there will be a situation in which it is not possible to recognize which one is the operation target even though the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is unable to recognize which object is being manipulated, it becomes possible to significantly improve the degree of attention to the performance.

However, even in situations where FIGS. 237(f) and (h) and FIGS. 238(m) and (o) appear, the button on the operating means (operation receiver) that is the target of operation by the player is It is desirable to emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the sample image BMG (for example, emit light from the time the validity period occurs). According to such a configuration, a person who is highly motivated to operate and tends to look directly at the operation means (operation receiver) can quickly recognize "the type displayed as the button drawing image BMG". This makes it possible to encourage the player's desire to operate the game.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 236(a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 237(c) or FIG. 238(j).

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIG. 237(d) or FIG. 238(k) is changed to the situation shown in FIG. 237(g), (i) or FIG. 238(n), (p), good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 237(d) and 238(k) will function as a precursor effect. At the time of migration, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already been reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have been reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be changed in the situation shown in FIG. 237(d) or FIG. (Predetermined image) GG will start reducing its display area.

Furthermore, some of the effects shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 may be omitted depending on the form prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, if the forms shown in FIGS. 232(b) and 232(d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238. In addition, at this time, FIG. 237(c) may also be omitted.

In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, before the operation reception is permitted (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG' (or even the button pattern image BMG itself) that represents the button pattern image BMG is displayed. 237(d), FIG. 238(k)), but in this situation (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG' (or button drawing image BMG) representing the button drawing image BMG is displayed. is not dynamically displayed to depict how it is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiver. According to such a configuration, even if the button drawing image BMG or the image BMG' expressing this is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, it is possible to be in a situation where the valid period has not yet occurred. Since it becomes possible to suggest implicitly, the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining time of the valid period. It should be noted that since presentation reception is allowed when the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) makes it impossible to see or is difficult to see. The button drawing image BMG will be dynamically displayed.

FIGS. 239 to 243 are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance progress when the second valid period occurs of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, a valid period (first valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced occurs at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. We have explained examples of how the performance progresses in this case. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is checked to see if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not decreased at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. An example of the progress of the effect will be explained in the case where the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being delayed.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined precursor effect (premonitor display) upon the occurrence of a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has characteristics" within the validity period, and such When performing a performance, in order to make the feature stand out, when the validity period occurs, a predetermined precursor performance (warning display) itself is not performed, or even if a predetermined precursor performance (warning display) is performed, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and is at its maximum value at the time when the entire display target area is made visible.

Here, as the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the validity period. The validity period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (in this case, "0"), and "no operation is performed within the validity period, and no post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed." However, at the time the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has the predetermined display area. It is possible to cite the first display mode in which According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that there is a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can Since the user becomes aware of the possibility that the validity period may end suddenly, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

Furthermore, as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the validity period. However, it is possible to cite "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period". According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is only a short time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can The player becomes conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and a decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, at least one of the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" is used to create a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG". A display example is shown when executing .

First, Fig. 239(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced in a second performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed on the display device 1600.

FIG. 239(b) shows that during execution of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. This shows a presentation situation in which the integrated image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 239(b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not been reduced yet. .

In addition, when executing the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG" within the validity period, the time (setting time) set for the validity period (second validity period) is " The period of time (set time) is set longer than the period of time (first period of validity) in which the display mode in which the movement of gauge image GG is characterized is not executed. This means that if a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the validity period is to be executed, it will take time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, there is a first valid period during which the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed, and a "movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed. Although the setting time until the validity period ends is different from the second validity period in which the "display mode with characteristics is given to" is executed, is the integrated image IG itself the same? They are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic" is not executed, and the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation occurs where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time period when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set. By adding , it becomes possible to estimate that the setting time is longer than it appears.

Note that when the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(b) occurs, a precursory performance that suggests the occurrence may be performed. However, at the time when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the "display target area of gauge image GG" included in the integrated model image IG) is displayed without overlapping with the precursor effect, the display area of gauge image GG is at its maximum value and is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

In other words, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the validity period) in which operation reception regarding the display after a predetermined operation and the sound output after a predetermined operation is permitted. When the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(c) appears after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(b), the gauge image GG changes from the previous state. The display area is reduced by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) and maintained, and a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" begins.

Such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” continues for a predetermined time after the period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 239(c) and (d). It has become. However, even during the "period in which the display area of gauge image GG is not reduced," operation acceptance remains permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation means that has been given the opportunity to operate, the validity period will expire. 239 (g)), and accordingly, the integrated image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 239(g)).

According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the validity period, compared to a case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced at a constant speed. This makes it possible to indicate that there is plenty of time left before the validity period ends.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an acceptable state, so it is possible to create an image as if the validity period has been extended. , it is expected to improve gaming interest during the validity period.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239(c) and (d), during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed until then is hidden or difficult to see. This is to encourage attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized."

However, if a situation occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the player may be misled into thinking that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred, in which the image on the display screen suddenly becomes static. In other words, since "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time and the state cannot be released, there is a misperception that operation acceptance is no longer allowed. There is a concern that this may cause players to lose their desire to operate the game, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or difficult to see, this may also lead to a false recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated model image IG itself is not kept in a stationary state in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated model image IG is The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept in a static state, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is displayed dynamically (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiver is depicted). (display) continues.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button drawing image BMG continues, a state appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, so that operation reception is no longer permitted ( This makes it possible to suppress the possibility of erroneously recognizing that a freeze effect has occurred, and it is expected that the player's motivation for operation can be suitably maintained.

Here, the dynamic display using the button drawing image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (such as an action of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiver). In this regard, during the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238, etc.) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden, the setting The predetermined action based on the button drawing image BMG is repeated n times until the time ends, but the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but is not displayed. During the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased at the time when the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased (the second valid period shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the predetermined action using the button sketch image BMG be made repeatable m (>n) times even within a "period in which the button pattern is not performed".

According to such a configuration, when a state occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 etc. This means that even if you are surprised by the occurrence of a situation and take time to understand the situation, you will have enough time to take action. , it is expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner. Note that the valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is a valid period different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 etc. If a period (that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is provided, then the longest of each time (setting time) set for those valid periods is It is desirable that the number of predetermined operations performed by the button drawing image BMG is greater during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" among the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 239 to 243, etc. .

As mentioned above, at the time when such a second validity period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a situation where its visibility is well ensured, and its display area is at the predetermined maximum value. It is now displayed (FIG. 239(b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in a well-visible state within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG may appear to be reduced, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 233, if the specific image TG appears in a good visibility state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may It becomes clear that the gauge image GG does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be diminished due to exaggerating the length of the remaining validity period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 239(b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is When is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time (FIGS. 239(c) and (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without an operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible. After this, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239(e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) times out. The second valid period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 239(f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, it is not displayed (FIG. 239(e)), the time set for the second valid period (setting time) is timed out. Then, the second valid period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 239(f)).

In this way, in the second validity period, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 239(f)), the same operation as when the operation was accepted within the second validity period will be performed. Post-display and post-operation sound output are not performed (automatic reception effect functions), and this point also differs from the first valid period. However, instead, during the second validity period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the time set for the first validity period, and operations are not accepted even during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, it can be said that a situation in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be completed in time is less likely to occur. .

In the example shown in FIG. 239, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.) the gauge image GG is displayed in a predetermined manner as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG". In the case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed, a case has been described in which "the second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the validity period" is applied. However, as mentioned above, as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), when no operation is performed within the validity period, gauge image GG is When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the valid period ends, and if no operation is performed within the valid period, post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed. Despite the fact that the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has the predetermined display area. It is also possible to further apply the first display mode. When adopting such a method, it is recommended to execute it in either the manner shown in FIGS. 240 and 241 or the manner shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. more desirable.

FIGS. 240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the performance when the second valid period occurs of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 240(a) to 240(d) are the same as the contents and other examples described above with reference to FIGS. 239(a) to 239(d). Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second validity period, and including this period, the second validity period When the operation is accepted, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without an operation being accepted by the player, gauge image GG will be able to reduce its display area again. It will never be displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time (set time) set for the second valid period has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (predetermined value), as shown in FIGS. 240(d) and 241(e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (FIG. 241(e)), the operation is accepted within the second validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as before (the automatic reception effect will function) will no longer be executed. However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state, and also cannot be operated during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period ends with the display area remaining for the predetermined value. Since the second valid period ends, there is a possibility that the second valid period ends because the player is unable to operate even though he/she intended to do so, which reduces interest in the game. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, certain conditions (for example, the symbol has stopped, or the period has not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stops, etc.) are met. While the operation is not performed, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second validity period, and the operation opportunity for the operation means is When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period will occur from the point at which the second validity period occurs again. I can say that it is.

According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation in FIG. ) It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in (). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 241(e), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241(f)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240(b) to 240(d) and FIGS. 241(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the second validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see Figure 241(g)). ).

Note that when an operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 241(e), the image shown in FIG. 241(f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 240(b)) appears as the post-operation display. It happens. Such an image is different from the post-operation display that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation during the second validity period (FIGS. 240(b) to 240(d), FIG. 241(f), etc.). They are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output performed based on the operation acceptance during the special validity period shown in FIG. 241(e) is also performed during the second validity period (FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in 241(f), etc.).

FIGS. 242 and 243 are diagrams illustrating a modification example of the performance progress when the second valid period occurs of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 242(a) is the same as the content and other examples described above with reference to FIG. 239(a) and FIG. 240(a). However, in this example, when the second valid period occurs and the integrated pattern image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. A "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined period of time from the time when the integrated image IG is displayed (FIGS. 242(b) and 242(c)). In this example, at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value. It will remain as it is.

Note that operation reception is allowed even during periods when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and when the operation is accepted, the post-operation display and operation The configuration and progress during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the after-sound output, are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241 and other examples thereof. .

Also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced until the time set for the second validity period (set time) elapses. The period during which the Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. 242(c) and 243(d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (FIG. 243(d)), the operation is accepted within the second validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as before (the automatic reception effect will function) will no longer be executed. However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state, and also cannot be operated during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example as well, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period remains with the display area for the maximum value remaining. As a result, on the player's side, there is a risk that the second validity period will end because the player is unable to operate the game even though he or she intended to do so, which reduces interest in the game. There are concerns that Therefore, in this example as well, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, certain conditions (for example, the symbol has stopped, the symbol has not stopped 10 seconds before the symbol is stopped, etc.) are met. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second validity period. When an operation for is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period occurs for re-occurring the second valid period.

According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation in FIG. ) It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in (). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 243(d), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 243(e)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242(b), (c), and FIGS. 243(d) and (f). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the second validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see Figure 243(f)). ).

However, in this example, even if the second valid period re-occurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the point of re-occurrence, as shown in FIG. 243(e). In the situation shown in , the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 243(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when an operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 243(d) is the "image shown in FIG. 242(b)". is the same as Such an image is displayed in the post-operation display (Fig. 243 (f) )) has a different image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation during the special validity period shown in FIG. 243(d) is also performed during the second validity period (FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243(f)) that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in 243(d), etc.).

In this way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second validity period functions as a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced." Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

Note that in the situations shown in FIGS. 241(e) and 243(d) (special validity period), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second validity period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that are generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period, special validity period), the second validity period and special validity period are It is desirable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated image IG be different from the valid period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the special validity period is new. will be displayed. When displaying the integrated image IG during the special validity period, a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced'' may occur within the validity period, or a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced.'' ” may be prevented from occurring.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has characteristics" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 can be executed when the integrated model image IGa of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed. Therefore, it is desirable that the process is not executed when the integrated model images IGb to IGd among the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. That is, although the integrated model image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation level, when the integrated model image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 Since there is a possibility that a "display mode with characteristics" may appear, a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when the operation-related image (such as the integrated image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", the player Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined setting period (second validity period) elapsed without any operation being performed, the operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , sound output after operation). More specifically, even if the predetermined setting period (second valid period) has ended, if you operate the operation receiver (operation means) that was previously prompted by the integrated image IG, It is possible to re-generate a predetermined setting period (second valid period), and operation reception is allowed during the re-generated predetermined setting period (second valid period) (Fig. 241(e), (f) and FIGS. 243(d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined setting period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has characteristics" , since the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be re-generated, a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined setting period (first valid period) in which operation-related images (integrated image IG, etc.) are not displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of gauge image GG," operations are not accepted. Even if you operate the operation receiver (operation means) that was previously prompted by the integrated image IG after the predetermined setting period (first valid period) has ended without being (second validity period) will not be regenerated (FIGS. 235 to 238).

Please note that the predetermined setting period (second valid period) in which operation-related images (integrated image IG, etc.) are displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of gauge image GG" does not necessarily mean that symbol fluctuations will occur. It does not have to occur during the execution period. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol fluctuations, or it may be a period during which symbol fluctuations are not performed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game starts. ” may occur.

Furthermore, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, the second validity period (FIGS. 239 to 243) is set longer than the first validity period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, in the first validity period and the second validity period, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same manner or in a similar manner (in the above example, The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When displaying the integrated image IG in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image will be the same, so the set time (setting time) The expected length is to appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic" is not executed, and the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation occurs where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time period when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set. By adding , it becomes possible to estimate that the setting time is longer than it appears.

When displaying the integrated model image IG in a similar manner between the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the "gauge image It is desirable that a smaller integrated image IG than in the first effective period be displayed during the second effective period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized" appears.

Furthermore, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, during the first validity period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) will be reduced to a specific value (here, " However, in the second validity period (FIGS. 239 to 243), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It will be terminated in the state where it is. In other words, if the time set for the valid period (setting time) is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but if the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a certain value (here, " By providing the possibility that the validity period may end even if the period does not reach 0'', it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the integrated image IG is displayed such that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the omen effect is being performed (first effective period), and when the omen effect is being performed, When no performance is performed, or when a precursor performance is performed but the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor performance is being performed (second effective The images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG are made to differ depending on the period). In this case, the modes of the gauge images GG themselves may be different from each other. "Although the precursor effect is performed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor effect is performed" means that the gauge image GG is displayed for the entire validity period, as illustrated in FIGS. This includes the case where the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned example, during the first validity period (FIGS. 235 to 238), the specific image TG is displayed, and when the set time elapses without any operation being performed, the specific image TG is displayed. However, during the second validity period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display (target area) is now displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first validity period, it becomes possible to make the validity period appear longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the validity period, and in the second validity period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear as if the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to suitably obtain such effects, in the second validity period, most of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value) is left at the end of the validity period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is decreased every unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238) over the entire period. However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), a mode in which the display area is not reduced is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize the remaining time based only on the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the button drawing image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the operation receiving part in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, while the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) during the first validity period, it is displayed in the first mode during the second validity period. It is displayed in a different second manner (a manner in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above example, although the button drawing image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated drawing image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG), , when the button pattern image BMG of the integrated pattern image IG is dynamically displayed, the gauge image GG is in a decreasing state and the gauge image GG is in a non-decreasing state. I try to make sure that there is. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not decreasing, the dynamic display of the button pattern image BMG indicates that the integrated image IG is in a state where operation reception is permitted. Be able to make suggestions.

Further, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button image BMGa is displayed among the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb, "characteristics in the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed. It is possible to display the "display mode". In addition, when the normal button drawing image BMGa is displayed, a ``display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' may be displayed, as well as a ``gauge image (predetermined image) ) is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the manner (normal manner) that appears even when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed. I made it so. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the normal button pattern image BMGa, which has a lower expectation than the special button pattern image BMGb, is displayed.

In particular, in the second validity period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display aspect (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is However, only one aspect is displayed. In other words, in this case, the remaining time suggesting function and expectation level suggesting function by the gauge image GG itself have been lost, and even though no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG The integrated model image IG in which the gauge image IG is formed is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in a manner that its area does not change) within the integrated model image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second validity period is not an image suggesting remaining time or expectation level, but functions only as a mere decorative image within the integrated model image IG. Therefore, it is possible to make the function significantly different from the gauge image GG displayed within the first validity period, and the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG improves the enjoyment of the game. things come to be expected.

Note that the first valid period and the second valid period may have different occurrence conditions. For example, they may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. In addition, the first valid period means a period during which operation reception regarding the display after the first operation and the sound output after the first operation is permitted, and the second valid period means the period during which the reception of operations regarding the display after the first operation and the sound output after the first operation is permitted, and the second valid period It means a period during which operation reception is permitted for a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output, and within each of these periods. The reactions (display changes, sound output) that appear when an operation is accepted are different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated image IG,
- After the precursor effect (specific display TH) starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG changes every unit time from when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects in which it is reduced (FIGS. 235 to 238),
- The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect starts to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects (Figures 239 to 243)
I made it so that there is. According to such a configuration, the display area may have already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured as a result of the performance of the precursor effect, and regardless of whether the precursor performance has been performed or not. The display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced at the time when the entirety of the gauge image GG is made visible, so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. You will be able to do this.

In particular, when adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect is performed (FIGS. 239 to 243), As far as possible, since a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period can appear, it is possible to further increase attention to the gauge image GG.

Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the omen effect is not displayed, or even if the omen effect is started to be displayed, at least when the omen effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. In the case of adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (FIGS. 239 to 243), in addition to the case where a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the validity period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the display area of the gauge image GG is It may be configured such that a display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the second condition is the occurrence condition of the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, a display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set as the second condition. The condition for the occurrence of a specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, while the button drawing image BMG is being displayed, there are cases in which the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced depending on the passage of time, and cases in which this display is not performed. did. If this display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the validity period. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is displayed to be reduced as time passes, but also the second valid period in which the display area is not reduced in accordance with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the validity period, it is expected that it will suitably indicate that the presentation reception is permitted.

In the above example, the time set for the valid period (second valid period) has elapsed without the gauge image GG displaying to reduce the display area over time. When the valid period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. In other words, if the automatic reception function is activated, the tension due to the gauge image GG not indicating the remaining time may be completely lost. ), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not enabled (regardless of the presentation mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function be enabled for the above-mentioned first validity period (regardless of what production mode).

In addition, when a display method is adopted in which the button drawing image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, a method is adopted that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG. If this is the case, the user will feel very uncomfortable that the remaining time suggestion function is not performed even though the gauge image is GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that includes the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern is made visible on the back side, and the gauge image GG itself has multiple colors. Since this itself becomes decorative in the integrated model image IG, it is expected to suppress the sense of discomfort when a situation arises in which the remaining time suggesting function by the gauge image GG is not performed. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first validity period, the "button drawing image BMG" is divided into a mode with a low expectation level (normal button drawing image BMGa) and a mode with a high expectation level. (Special button drawing image BMGb), and the aspect with low expectation (normal edge decoration image SSGa) and the aspect with high expectation (special edge decoration image) as "peripheral decoration image SSG". SSGb) and the presentation of which one will appear are made to appear in stages. However, such performance can also be achieved by the method described below.

FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation regarding the integrated image IG.

First, FIG. 244(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced using the first performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed on the display device 1600.

FIG. 244(b) shows that during execution of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. This shows a performance situation in which a button drawing image BMG is displayed.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), the button drawing image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "edge decoration image SGG", but is only displayed as a standalone image. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(b), the button drawing image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation level (normal button drawing image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation level (special button drawing image BMGb). The figure provides an example of the case where a highly anticipated mode (special button drawing image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

FIG. 244(c) shows a presentation situation in which the special button drawing image BMGb shown in FIG. 244(b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). For example, the button print image BMG (normal button print image BMGa, special button print image BMGb) shown in FIG. ), it becomes effective after the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) and the integrated image IG has been created. The period (first valid period) occurs, or the valid period (first valid period) occurs without the effect progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) and the integrated image IG does not occur. You will be able to provide some interesting information about what you are doing. If the validity period (first validity period) occurs without becoming an integrated pattern image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as a separate image from the button pattern image BMG. ) The display area of the gauge image GG is depicted to be reduced within the divided area. In this case, it is desirable that the specific image TG is not displayed.

In addition, when the validity period occurs after the button drawing image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, the expectation that it will stop at the jackpot symbol is higher than when the validity period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). Furthermore, when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), the case shown in FIG. ) It is desirable that the rate of integration with the peripheral decoration image SSG is increased. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(c), the button drawing image BMG is divided into a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation level (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation level (special peripheral decoration The image BMGb) is designed to provide an effect as to which of the images BMGb) is integrated with the image BMGb), and the figure shows an example of a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears. . Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

For convenience of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 232 to 244). Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same functions. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button pattern image BMG, and although the peripheral decoration image BMGa normally has a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a checkered pattern is applied. Of the areas where these patterns are applied, "the area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 244(c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button pattern image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated, and in terms of presentation, the image shown in FIG. 232(d).

FIG. 244(d) shows a presentation situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244(c).

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). For example, if the first additional decoration HS1 is not added to the integrated simulated image IG (integrated simulated images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244(c), the valid period (first valid period) If you prepare a mode in which this occurs, it will become effective after the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 has been added. period (first valid period), or the effect progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added and the valid period (first valid period) occurs. It will be possible to provide some fun about what happens.

Note that if the validity period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated replica image IG, the validity period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated replica image IG. It is desirable that the expectation level (ratio) of being stopped at a jackpot symbol is higher than that in the case of a jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the special button sketch image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c), the image shown in FIG. 244(b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) compared to the case where the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided to provide an effect as to whether it is added in a manner with a low expectation level or a manner with a high expectation degree. You may also do so.

FIG. 244(e) shows a presentation situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244(d).

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e). For example, if the second additional decoration HS2 is not added to the integrated simulated image IG (integrated simulated images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244(d), the valid period (first valid period) If a mode is prepared in which this occurs, it will become effective after the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 has been added. period (first validity period), or the performance progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added and the validity period (first validity period) occurs. It will be possible to provide some fun about what happens.

In addition, if the validity period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the validity period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the expectation level (ratio) of being stopped at a jackpot symbol is higher than that in the case of a jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the special button sketch image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c), the image shown in FIG. 244(b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) compared to the case where the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(e), the second additional decoration HS2 is provided to provide an effect as to whether it is added in a manner with a low expectation level or a manner with a high expectation degree. You may also do so.

FIG. 244(f) shows a performance situation in which the valid period (first valid period) occurs while the integrated simulated image IGd shown in FIG. 244(e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 244(f), when the validity period (first validity period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and operation acceptance is also permitted by confirming the specific image TG. be able to recognize that. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from those shown in the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 232 to 244), but they are basically the same. Displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the "end part of the gauge image GG" which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. I will do it.

Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed using the same method as the example shown in FIG. or may be displayed using a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (a method in which the entirety is displayed at the time the validity period starts).

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (a snail character, which is not shown) or a high-expectation mode (a frog character). The figure provides an example of a highly anticipated situation. The specific image TG is displayed in a more expected manner when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). The ratio is high, and the expectation level is higher when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). It is desirable that the specific image TG be displayed at a high rate. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide a performance that shows how much the operation-related image can progress to a highly expected form before the validity period occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest in terms of operation even in a state where the validity period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button drawing image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) indicate the level of expectation until the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs, , by using a different image (specific image TG) to further indicate the level of expectation, it is possible to suitably increase interest over the period from before the expiration date to after the expiration date. Become.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 244(b) to FIG. 244(c), and the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 244(c) to FIG. At the timing of whether or not to proceed, and the timing of whether or not the effect will progress from FIG. 244(d) to FIG. It may be temporarily hidden. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed again, it is interesting to see whether the presentation has progressed or whether the validity period has expired. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 244, the button pattern image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period before the validity period occurs, but this is different from this. It may also be displayed (blinking, semi-transparent, etc.).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable that the time required to suggest the level of expectation step by step using operation-related images before the validity period occurs is longer than the set time for the validity period. .

By the way, the sword decoration body 5001 according to this embodiment includes a "handle part 5012" which can move (move vertically) relative to the sheath part 5020, and a "handle part 5012" which can move (move vertically) relative to the handle part 5012. It was mentioned above that two operation receivers with the button 5014 are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a valid period (operation reception effect) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the valid period (operation reception effect) is generated. In the reception presentation), both a "pattern pattern image TMG" that imitates the handle part 5012 and a "button pattern image BMG" that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, operation reception on the handle button 5014 is not allowed, and during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 ), operation reception on the handle portion 5012 is not permitted.

In such a configuration, when a valid period (operation reception performance) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, whether the operation reception on the handle 5012 is allowed or whether the operation reception on the handle button 5014 is accepted This will make it difficult to recognize whether or not this is permissible. In other words, when an operation is accepted during a valid period in which an opportunity to operate is given to the handle 5012, the period after the operation is accepted is longer than when an operation is accepted during a valid period in which an opportunity to operate is given to the handle button 5014. There is a high rate of appearance of a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a sound output after operation). The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception on the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 is permitted, the operation reception on the handle 5012 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize this, he or she will operate the handle part 5012 in a sense of excitement, and his or her enjoyment of the game will be significantly improved.

In order to obtain such effects, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether an operation on the handle 5012 or a handle button 5014 is allowed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the handle 5012 (the light emitting part thereof) is not allowed to emit light. , the handle button 5014 (the light emitting portion thereof) on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light. In other words, in this case, during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which both the "pattern drawing image TMG" that imitates the handle part 5012 and the "button drawing image BMG" that imitates the handle button 5014 are displayed, the handle part 5012 Even if the handle part 5012 or handle button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. In such a situation, the player comes to realize that accepting operations on the handle 5012 is permitted, and as a result, the player performs operations on the handle 5012 in a sense of excitement, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be significantly improved.

In other words, during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, it is not possible to view the handle by directly looking at the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 or by briefly looking at the performance display device 1600. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5012 or the handle button 5014. At least from the perspective of a person playing the Pachinko 1 for the first time (beginner) or a person who is unfamiliar with the complicated production specifications (elderly people, etc.), the opportunity to operate either the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 is given. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "validity period during which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given an opportunity to operate" is generated, and Although it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate within its validity period, it is possible to recognize it after a certain amount of time. The button drawing image BMG and the pattern drawing image TMG are respectively displayed.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, a "pattern image TMG" imitating the handle 5012 and a handle button 5014 are displayed. Both the "button drawing image BMG" which is a copy of the ``button drawing image BMG'' are displayed respectively, but the ``button drawing image TMG'' on the side where operation reception is allowed is dynamically displayed, but the operation acceptance is not allowed. ``Button drawing image BMG'' on the side where this is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. "Dynamic display" here refers to, for example, a display that depicts how the operation receiver moves within its movable range (in the case of the handle 5012, it depicts how it moves (up and down) relative to the sheath 5020. In the case of the handle button 5014, this corresponds to a display depicting the movement (up and down movement) of the handle 5012).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an opportunity to operate within its validity period. However, when a predetermined period of time long enough to be recognized as a dynamic display (video) has elapsed, the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the pattern image TMG, but the behavior during operation appears in the button pattern image BMG. Since the user notices that the button is not displayed as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. Then, when the player comes to recognize that the operation reception part (handle part 5012) on the side with higher expectations is allowed, the player performs the operation on the handle part 5012 in a feeling of elation. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern drawing image TMG" and the "button drawing image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle part 5012. Also, by displaying these simulated images as an "integrated simulated image" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the simulated images, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when an operation reception performance (validity period) occurs. I am trying to achieve this. The functions and modifications of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 is displayed to further display (include) the ``pattern pattern image TMG'' in addition to the ``button pattern image BMG''. good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button drawing image BMG" and the "pattern drawing image TMG" are displayed as a "composite drawing image HMG" that imitates at least a part of the sword ornament 5001. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of the “integrated image IG” that is displayed when an operation acceptance effect (validity period) occurs for the handle portion 5012.

As shown in FIGS. 245(a) to 245(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (valid period) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, the "pattern pattern image TMG" which is a copy of the handle part 5012 is made into a "composite pattern image HMG" which is integrated with the "button pattern image BMG", and then the "compound pattern image TMG" is The image "HMG" is displayed as integrated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image HMG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), "pattern pattern image TMG", "button pattern image BMG", and "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not prepared individually as image data, and they are The images are displayed as one integrated image data (integrated images IGe to IGh). Further, when the integrated image IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompts such as "push in" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "relatively Multiple presentation modes are available, including a "first presentation mode with low expectations" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectations," and these presentations are selected based on the results of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). It is assumed that one of the aspects will be executed. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d),
・The mode shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated model image IGf) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 245(a) (integrated model image IGe) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 245(c) (integrated model image IGg) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 245(d) (integrated model image IGh) is better than the mode shown in FIG. Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment), so that a relationship is established that when ``2nd production mode with relatively high expectation level'' appears as a post-operation production when . One of the morphological images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGe to IGh. Just by preparing at least two aspects, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation performance within the effective period. Furthermore, it is possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated image IGe to IGh) and display any one of the prepared modes.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving part (handle part 5012) that is displaced by a player's operation, and a peripheral decoration part (scabbard part 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part (handle part 5012);
・Integration of displaying a simulated image (pattern image TMG) of the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) as integrated simulated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image. A sample image display means;
・Operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed; The integrated model image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details of the "integrated model images" shown in FIGS. 245(a) to 245(d) will be explained separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated pattern image IGe" shown in FIG. 245(a) includes a pattern pattern image TMGe, a button pattern image BMGe (composite pattern image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates its periphery. It is composed of However, in the "integrated model image IGe", the handle model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (combined model image HMGe) are "an image that simulates the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given" and " ``An image that imitates the pattern button 5014 that is not an object to which an operation opportunity is given'' is displayed as an integrated image, whereas a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is ``an image that is a copy of the pattern button 5014 that is not an object to which an operation opportunity is given.'' The peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided around the periphery of the handle part 5012 is not imitated.In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) is imitated. Most of the image SSGe is used to decorate the periphery of the pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. There is.

In the “integrated pattern image IGe” shown in FIG. 245(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box containing several treasures including the pattern pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe). As mentioned above, these "treasures" and "treasure boxes" have shapes different from the actual peripheral decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG changes from the predetermined maximum display area to the predetermined minimum value (including "0") when no operation is accepted within the validity period. The display area decreases over time until it reaches the display area of .

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245(a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by this divided image KG will function as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as a section image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed within the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In addition, as shown in FIG. 245(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the handle to be operated is 5012 in the first mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the "integrated pattern image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a))). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGe in the "integrated pattern image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a)). ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, they may be different colors in the first aspect and the fifth aspect.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGf" shown in FIG. The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge of the composite image HMGf are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGf", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGf and the button pattern image BMGf (composite pattern image HMGf). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the treasure chest itself are displayed as the same thing, but the "first special peripheral It is displayed as a "decoration image SSGf". The quantity and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

In addition, in the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 245(b), as the amount and type of treasure increases, the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is The shape has changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs depending on which of the multiple modes with different expectations (not even similar shapes), so the display area is It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left as the time is being reduced, and it will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which "integrated image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is generated. The section 5012 is made to emit light in a second manner (eg, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the "integrated pattern image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 245(b))). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGf in the "integrated pattern image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 245(b)) ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the second aspect and the sixth aspect may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGg" shown in FIG. The image HMGg) and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGg", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGg and the button pattern image BMGg (composite pattern image HMGg). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the treasure itself are displayed as the same thing, but the treasure box (shape) that stores them is different. It is displayed as "Image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is also similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (sheath part 5020, etc.) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the virtual decoration part on the display performance on the performance display device 1600 The periphery of the pattern sketch image TMGg (composite pattern image HMGg) is decorated as decoration.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 245(c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which "integrated image IGg" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is generated. The section 5012 is made to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 245(c), for example, it emits light in the same color (for example, "red") as the pattern image TMGg in the "integrated pattern image IGg"). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGg in the "integrated pattern image IGg" (for example, "red" in FIG. 245(c)) ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the third and seventh aspects may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGh" shown in FIG. The image HMGh) and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGh", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGh and the button pattern image BMGh (composite pattern image HMGh). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, compared to the above-mentioned "regular peripheral decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasures are increased, and the treasure box (shape) that stores them is also different. It is displayed as a special peripheral decoration image SSGh.

In addition, in the "integrated image IGh" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is also similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" etc. in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (sheath part 5020, etc.) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the virtual decoration part on the display performance on the performance display device 1600 The periphery of the pattern sketch image TMGh (composite pattern image HMGh) is decorated as decoration.

That is, in the "integrated image IGh (FIG. 245(d))", a part (treasure) of the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGf (FIG. 245(b))" ) and a part (treasure box) of the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGg (Fig. 245(c))" are displayed as a combined image. There is.

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the case where the "integrated image IGe (Fig. 245(a))" appears and the case where the "integrated When the "sample image IGh (FIG. 245(d))" appears, it becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) that targets the same post-operation performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 245(d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGh" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated is 5012 in a fourth manner (e.g., emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the "integrated pattern image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 245(d))). . Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGh in the "integrated pattern image IGh" (in FIG. 245(d), for example, "rainbow color"). ”) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect may have different colors.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to 245(d), the pattern image TMG and the button pattern image BMG (composite pattern image HMG) are displayed in the same shape regardless of the mode. However, as the amount and type of treasure changes (Fig. 245 (b), (d)), or as the treasure chest changes (Fig. 245 (c), (d)), the pattern image changes. The TMG and the button drawing image BMG (composite drawing image HMG) may have different shapes.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), in each aspect, the pattern drawing image TMG and the button drawing image BMG (composite drawing image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color It may be displayed as .

When displaying a button drawing image BMG that imitates the handle button 5014, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are displayed integrally with the button drawing image BMG. I decided to do so. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to 245(d), a button pattern image BMG imitating the handle button 5014 is displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are not displayed. . In other words, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, it is different from the case of the examples shown in FIGS. It is possible to display completely different images from those in the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby making it possible to provide a variety of effects.

In addition, among the configurations according to the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), parts having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) are as shown in FIGS. It goes without saying that the same effects as those described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to 245(d), the above-mentioned modifications and effects to the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d) can be appropriately adopted.

Also, during the valid period in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the above-mentioned ``Specific image TG'' is displayed.

However, in the validity period (multiple validity periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. Depending on the type (type, etc.), the "specific image TG" may be displayed or the "specific image TG" may not be displayed. In the validity period (multiple validity periods) in which IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is It is always displayed.

That is, during the effective period (multiple effective periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is It does not include the validity period that occurs as a performance. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When displaying the "specific image TG", the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

When the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the "specific image TG" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, or in the manner shown in FIG. 234. You may also do so.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 245, an opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is provided while the handle 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, thereby allowing the handle 5012 to move from the specific position to the original position. Manipulation (sword sheathing) is allowed. However, when providing an opportunity to operate the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from its original position to a specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle 5012 while the handle 5012 is in the original position, thereby allowing a movement operation (sword drawing operation) from the original position to a specific position.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of the effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245.

FIG. 246(a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which in a normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is in a specific effect pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of jackpot determination. This shows a performance situation in which a display related to a precursory performance (specific display TH3) is started on the performance display device 1600 in a performance situation being performed. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238, or may be different. When the effect pattern is the same, the effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 (operation reception effect) and the effective period shown in FIG. 246 occur at the first timing and second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of these valid periods (operation acceptance performance) may be generated at a predetermined timing within the performance pattern based on the result of performance determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, and at this point, the operation reception (specific display TH3) for the handle 5012 is executed. Direction reception) is not allowed and the validity period has not yet occurred.

In this regard, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated model image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid of the treasure chest). At the time shown in FIG. 236(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated pattern image IG is displayed in a "closed mode", and as a result, the pattern pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe) Some treasures, including , are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and are in a state where they cannot be seen (or are difficult to see).

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is in a state with relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 245(a) and 245(b). 245(c) and 245(d), and the mode with relatively high expectations shown in FIG. 245(c) and (d). The case where the screen is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 245(a) and 245(b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination). In addition, we will not explain the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with high expectations, but the production progresses from this point on in the same manner as ``When the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with low expectations'' explained below. will be held.

FIG. 246(b) shows that as the omen effect shown in FIG. 246(a) progresses (the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) is opened and the area displayed overlapping the "treasure" is In "Treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and the part is displayed in a good condition for visibility. It shows.

That is, as the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246(a) progresses, a specific timing comes and the validity period for the handle 5012 begins to occur. When the valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the handle 5012 that is the object of operation starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" to be operated and the "handle button 5014" which is not to be operated start emitting light in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246(a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the integrated model image IG shows that the lid portion of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) changes from a "closed state (fully closed)" to an "open state". It is in a state that depicts a change to "(full throttle)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 246(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are "predetermined effects (specific display TH3) that are depicted (expressed) as being on the front side thereof". Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the ``gauge image (predetermined image) GG'', the reduction in the display area of the ``gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the ``specific image TG'' has also already started (progressed). ). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and the predetermined time after the validity period occurs is , at least a part of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH3). In other words, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated pattern image IG (pattern pattern image TMG, button pattern image BMG (composite pattern image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually revealed within the validity period. As a result, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated pattern image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the object of operation (the aspect of the pattern image) are interesting. It can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(b), the "treasure" contained in the treasure box is displayed in a manner with a small amount and type (a manner with relatively low expectations as shown in FIG. 245(a)). There are at least two cases in which the information is displayed in a manner with a large amount and variety (a manner with relatively high expectations as shown in FIG. 245(b)), and in any of these manners. It provides direction in terms of how it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a manner with a large amount and type (a manner with a high degree of expectation). ing. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the "specific image TG" is of the type that is displayed in the first place ( (see Fig. 234), or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see Fig. 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that executing the precursor performance in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest. Note that we will omit the explanation of the case where "treasure" is displayed in a manner with low expectations, but this is done in the same manner as "when "treasure" is displayed in a manner with high expectations" explained below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

FIG. 246(c) shows that as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (display related to specific display TH3) shown in FIG. This shows a situation where a portion (a portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the “treasure”) has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, but remains displayed while the integrated image IG is displayed. It is now possible to provide the same level of performance from the beginning to the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility condition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. This makes it seem as if the display area has not decreased that much. This suppresses a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (the effect of opening the lid part which is the specific display TH) ends. You can expect that. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" that is displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246(c), the pattern image TMG of the integrated pattern image IG is a dynamic display (a display depicting the movement of the pattern portion 5012 within its movable range). However, as described above, the button drawing image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display depicting the movement of the handle button 5014 within its movable range).

In FIG. 246(d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and when the valid period (set time) ends (or An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the validity period ends) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 246(d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely permissible in terms of time; It may be made so that it is no longer allowed. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state where each light emission has already been completed at that point. In this case, images such as "Push in!" and "Lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the validity period ends.

When the validity period ends, both the light emission of the handle portion 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, even if the player does not perform any operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed will be displayed. (See FIG. 246(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception that functions within the first validity period described above (FIGS. 235(e), 235(f), etc.).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the validity period has ended (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display will be displayed. Since the "specific image TG" will be displayed even just before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation will be displayed in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation reception occurring. It becomes possible to make it appear as if after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, by the time the entire image of the integrated sample image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is well visible, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. In other words, in this case, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting a sound after a game or an operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, in this example, the handle button 5014 on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light when the validity period occurs, and the operation opportunity is given to either the handle part 5012 or the handle button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize what is happening. In other words, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the validity period, it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest when the operation cannot be completed in time.

Regarding the progress of the presentation in the manner shown in FIG. 246, there are two cases: when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, and when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to either.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 246, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in separate layers, and by displaying the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) with priority, it appears in 235 of the same figure. We decided to realize the progress of the production in various ways. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and, for example, the progress of the effect in the manner shown in FIG. 246 may be stored as one piece of moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the mode shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated image IGa) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may be made to appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). .

According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, prior to the occurrence of the validity period, when a treasure chest that is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed, the treasure chest is marked as "Highly Expected Mode" and " The first effect is provided as to whether the content is displayed in a "low expectation mode". In addition, after the validity period occurs, the treasure chest in the integrated image IG is depicted as being gradually opened, and the "treasure" is divided into "highly expected form" and "lowly expected form". A second effect is provided as to how the image is displayed. In other words, in this case, the validity period occurs because the level of expectation is suggested by the staged effects (first performance, second performance) that are carried out over the occurrence of the validity period. It is expected that interest in gaming will be suitably improved during the period from before to after the occurrence.

In addition, since we have decided to realize such a step-by-step effect by the depiction of the integrated image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest), we have decided to realize this step-by-step effect by using the depiction of the integrated image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest). The player will feel less stress than if the visibility of the integrated image IG is obstructed by interference (such as), and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. However, even in the example shown in FIG. 246, the omen effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 237. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 237, the foreshadowing effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 246.

In FIG. 246, when the first performance condition is satisfied, a simulated image of the operation target is integrated with a "peripheral decorative image (first decorative image)" that includes the display target area of the gauge image. An example of the development of the presentation (first operation acceptance period) in the case of displaying the image as a sample image has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 247 and 248, when the second performance condition is satisfied, the simulated image of the operation target is referred to as the "periphery decorative image (first decorative image) including the display target area of the gauge image". This section describes an example (second operation acceptance permissible period) of the progress of the presentation in the case where the image is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the image". The example shown in FIG. 246 and the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 do not necessarily give the operation opportunity to the same operation target, but since the operation opportunity is given to the same operation target, If so, it is desirable that the simulated image of the operation target itself be displayed as the same image (including similar images).

Here, as a mode in which the simulated image that simulates the operation target is displayed as an "image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the simulated image that simulates the operation target is displayed as "the peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image". In some cases, the image is displayed as a stand-alone image without being integrated with the decoration image, and in some cases, a sample image of the operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt such a mode as described above. According to such a configuration, when the validity period occurs, there are cases where a gauge image is displayed within the image when a sample image of the operation target is displayed as one image, and a case where the gauge image is displayed within the image when the sample image of the operation target is displayed. Since there are cases where the gauge image is not displayed within the image when the sample image is displayed as one image, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which a simulated image of the operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image."

First, Fig. 247(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a specific performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the performance situation being performed on the device 1600, a performance situation in which a display related to a precursory performance (specific display TH3) is started on the performance display device 1600 is shown. This performance pattern may be the same as the performance pattern shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 or 246, or may be different. If they are the same performance pattern, they may be generated at the first timing and the second timing within the same performance pattern, or depending on the result of the performance judgment, which of the effective periods (operation reception performance) may be generated. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the performance pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 247(a) and 247(b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)" which is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247(b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 246(b). The content is different from that of the "treasure (first decorative image)". In other words, as described above, the "sample image of the operation target" in this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image." Regarding the "edge decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", there are parts that are displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "edge decoration image that includes the gauge image display target area" and parts that are displayed as a different image. It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(c), the "treasure (second decoration image)" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes the "holy grail" as shown in FIG. 246. This is similar to the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown in FIG. However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 246 are not displayed, and instead An image of a box filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 247(c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 246(c), and the treasure box is also displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 245.

According to such a configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is no longer depicted as being in front of the "treasure (marginal decoration image SSG)" (FIG. 247(c)), The gauge image GG is no longer displayed within the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". In other words, in this case, while the "treasure (marginal decoration image SSG)" is gradually becoming more visible due to the specific display TH3, even if you try to find the gauge image GG, you cannot find it, so what is left? This allows you to maintain a sense of tension about how much time you have left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. In this case, the same image (such as the holy grail) is intentionally displayed as in the case (FIG. 245(c)). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make it seem as if the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is also displayed somewhere, and thereby the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG can be made to appear. By the time you search for it and realize that it is not displayed anywhere, you will be in a situation where a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so you will feel nervous during the validity period. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 247(b) to (d), the pattern image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the gauge image Not only is the display target area not provided, but also the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as a separate image from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, since the gauge image is not displayed and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left in the validity period, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period. Note that the area to be displayed for the gauge image does not necessarily have to be hidden; for example, the gauge image may be displayed as a separate image from the integrated image IG, and its display area may be reduced over time. You can do it like this.

FIG. 247(d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, no gauge image is displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(d), there is no indication that the validity period is about to end, and even if the player visually views the image, it is not suggested that the validity period is about to end. I can't recognize something.

However, even during the validity period according to this example, in the handle pattern image TMG that is the operation target, a display depicting the reciprocating movement of the handle part 5012 within its movable range (reciprocating movement from the original position to a specific position) is displayed. (dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, the validity period in this example is set to end when the above-mentioned reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N does not need to be an integer) after the occurrence of the period. By continuing to watch the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time (how many reciprocating movements) is left in the validity period.

Note that even during the validity period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 247(c) and 247(d), in the button pattern image BMG, a display depicting the handle button 5014 reciprocating within its movable range (motion) is displayed. (indications) will not be made. In this regard, during the validity period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, if the operation receiving part (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the sample image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated. Even if it is, a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output may be performed in response to the operation reception.

In other words, during the validity period according to this example, the player operates in a hurry because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, and as a result, the operation receiving section on the side that is not dynamically displayed Since it is assumed that there is a higher possibility of operating the It is desirable to output the after-sound in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output may include, for example, a display or sound output such as "Push in the handle, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiver on the side that is not displaying dynamically is operated and the corresponding post-operation display or post-operation sound is output, the valid period will end or the set time will expire. It is preferable that the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG is continued without being reset without being reset. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the valid period thus continued, a corresponding post-operation display and post-operation sound output will be performed (see FIG. 248(h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiver on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, "The handle button is not the handle button, but the handle button It goes without saying that the content is different from the content of "Push it in!"). However, "within the validity period, if the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the button drawing image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, Display and sound output after operation when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!")" and "Button drawing images that are not displayed dynamically within the applicable validity period. After the operation receiver (handle button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the display after the operation when the operation receiver (handle 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated. In order to improve the game's interest, it is desirable that the post-operation sound output (for example, "I'm glad you made it in time, congratulations!") is executed with different contents.

FIG. 248(e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the operation is not accepted within the time (set time) set for the validity period according to this example.

That is, in the validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIGS. 247(d) and (e)), no operation is accepted for the handle 5012 within the validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed will not be executed (the automatic reception performance will function).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is also not displayed as a separate image. There is a possibility that a situation may occur where the effective period ends because the user is unable to operate the game even though the user intended to operate the game, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this example, after the validity period ends without any operation by the player, unless certain conditions (for example, the symbols have stopped, or the period has not reached 10 seconds before the symbols stop, etc.) are met, , the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (in this case, the handle 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the validity period, and when the operation for the operation means is accepted, Based on this, the above validity period can be re-occurred. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for re-occurring the valid period starts from the point of expiry.

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation shown in FIG. 248(h) by the player It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special validity period), when the player performs an operation on the handle 5012, the validity period starts and ends based on the acceptance of the operation. Start from the state (FIGS. 248(f) and (g)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d) and FIGS. 248(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed in the manner described above (see Fig. 248(h)). reference).

Note that when the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special validity period), the images shown in FIGS. 248(f) and (g) (FIGS. 247(b), ( (same as the image shown in c)) will appear sequentially. Such an image is an image display that is executed based on an operation acceptance during the validity period (Figs. 247(b) to (d), Figs. 247(f), (g), etc.). are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output performed based on the acceptance of the operation in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special validity period) also applies to the validity period (FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d) and The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in 248(f), (g), etc.).

Since the specific image TG is not displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, it is not necessary to perform a precursory effect (dynamic display using the specific display TH3) in order to generate the valid period. Good too. For example, when a predetermined condition for allowing operation acceptance regarding a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 247(c) appears. , thereafter, the display may progress in the same manner as in the example described above.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern drawing image TMG and the button drawing image BMG are displayed as one image (composite drawing image HMG), but these drawing images are each displayed as separate images. It may also be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the "button drawing image BMG" and the "pattern drawing image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite drawing image HMG) that includes both of these drawing images. The ``composite image HMG'' is displayed as an ``integrated image IG'' that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, the "button print image BMG" and the "pattern print image TMG" are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the button print images is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery. It may also be displayed as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button pattern image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern image TMG" can be displayed as a separate image. Even though both "TMG" and "Button drawing image BMG" are displayed simultaneously, "Pattern drawing image TMG" can now stand out more, and the operations corresponding to "Button drawing image TMG" can now be displayed. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving part (handle part 5012) should be operated. In addition, at this time, the "pattern drawing image TMG" in the integrated drawing image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button drawing image BMG" displayed as a single image is not displayed dynamically, and other points are noted. The same applies to configurations and other examples.

In addition, in the validity period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. Only the sample image TMG) may be displayed.

Further, it is desirable that the valid period (operation acceptance performance) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 be generated with a set time longer than the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 246. In this case, the manner in which the pattern image (in this case, pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (reciprocating speed, etc.) within the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. It is desirable that the dynamic display mode (reciprocating speed, etc.) of the pattern images (here, pattern image TMG) be the same within the indicated validity period (operation reception performance). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, by checking "the state of dynamic display of the sample image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, it is possible to You will be encouraged to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be a "treasure" image, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving part corresponding to the model image that is not dynamically displayed is the "first operation receiving part", in the example shown in FIGS. The operation receiving section corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving section." However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving part is set as the "second operation receiving part", in the example shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the operation receiving section corresponding to the "second operation receiving section" be a "third operation receiving section" that is different from the "second operation receiving section". According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship between the three operation targets (operation receivers) slides. , it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Further, the valid period (operation acceptance performance) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of symbol variation. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol fluctuations, or it may be a period during which symbol fluctuations are not being executed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game is started. ” may occur.

In addition, during the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed until then is hidden, as in the valid period in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243. Alternatively, it may be made so that it is difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easier to notice that the gauge image is in a special effect state where it is not displayed.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 246(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 246 does not have to occur in all of these valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIG. 246 occurs in at least one valid period.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 247(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not need to occur in all of these valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 occurs in at least one valid period.

In the validity period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, unlike the validity period shown in FIG. It may be possible to display the information only in the following manner.

The valid period during which the gauge image is not displayed (operation acceptance effect) can occur only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is not given to the other. A valid period (operation reception performance) may occur in which a gauge image is always displayed when the gauge image is given.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced during the effective period during which the integrated image is displayed (the effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241), and the gauge image A valid period in which an integrated image is displayed for which no GG display area is provided in the first place (valid period shown in Figures 247 and 248) can occur as one of multiple types of valid periods. There is. In this regard, in these valid periods (FIGS. 239 to 241, FIG. 247, and FIG. 248), in order to maintain a good sense of tension, when the operation by the player is not accepted, and when the operation is accepted, 235 to 238, 246), the same effect after the operation is not performed (no automatic button function), and the gauge image GG is displayed to become smaller as time passes (Figures 235 to 238, Figure 246). In order to maintain a good performance, it is desirable that when an operation by a player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this respect, there is a valid period during which the integrated image is displayed in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not become small (valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241), and an integrated image in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity has been given during the validity period during which the sample image is displayed (the validity period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248), the change (display It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a change or lamp emission, starts to be executed. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image is continued. As a result, it is expected that the feeling of tension will be better maintained by creating a feeling of anxiety as to whether or not the performance reception has been properly performed when the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image. Become so.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. On the other hand, during the valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238, FIG. 246) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be smaller as time passes, changes (display changes and , when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp emission, etc.) occurs, the integrated sample image (both the sample image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be hidden, or, as in the above case, changes in response to operation reception (display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) may be made while the integrated image is displayed instead of being hidden. It may be made to occur.

However, even during the effective period in which "the display area of a specific image is not displayed to be reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated will still be displayed. As for images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time when operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image based on the sample image has progressed. This is possible, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

[Integrated image, effect before validity period, image disappearing effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (validity period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the reception permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined state for the performance component that is the target of the performance, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (validity period). Since only a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a sound performance change on a speaker, a light emitting change due to a lamp, and a performance operation using a movable decorative body) is executed, the reception The permissible state (validity period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which an operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving part, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is activated. By displaying the simulated image as an integrated simulated image (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image, the enjoyment of the game after the operation is performed until the performance is executed. We are trying to suppress the decline. For such an integrated mock image, there is an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display this in both the reception performance (validity period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, and 207 to 231) is realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated sample image with one of the integrated sample images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve gaming interest.

Note that the "integrated image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image," and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the acceptance acceptance state has entered the acceptance acceptance state or that the acceptance acceptance status is in the acceptance acceptance state is emitted. This makes it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, whether the reception permissible state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states including a first acceptance acceptance state and a second acceptance acceptance state are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (validity periods). There is. Here, the first acceptance acceptance state can occur when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), but the first acceptance state can occur when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns). A valid period that cannot occur under a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or under any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the first condition being satisfied in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) period). In addition, the second acceptance acceptance state is when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), and when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns). The validity period that can occur (or at least in any of these fluctuation patterns) (the second condition different from the first condition in the production judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) (validity period that is generated based on the establishment of the contract).

The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first acceptance-permitting state and the second acceptance-permitting state. Here, it is assumed that the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state occur as reception permission states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The "integrated simulated image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state is an image that simulates the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated image", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first acceptance-permitting state and the second acceptance-permitting state. Among them, it is possible to display only in the first reception permission state, and in the second reception permission state, it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). ing. In the first reception acceptance state, it is determined which of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) to display the "integrated image" including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. The "integrated image" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second reception acceptance state, there is a question as to which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) to display the "integrated image" based on the result of the jackpot determination, which does not include the special mode. A determination may be made, and the "integrated image" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

In such a configuration, in the first acceptance permission state, two types of acceptance permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are output, and in the second reception permission state, One type of acceptance permission sound (third acceptance permission sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third permissible sound are, for example, output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!", and may be output as the same sound or may be different from each other. It may also be output as sound. On the other hand, the second permissible sound is output as a message sound such as "Press!", for example. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and as long as it is a different sound from the first permissible sound and is output for a different output time, two types of permissible reception sounds can be used. It is possible for the player to suitably recognize that the sound (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) is being output.

Here, as mentioned above, in the first reception acceptance state, the "integrated image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectations). In this case, two types of acceptance permissible sounds (a first permissible sound and a second permissible sound) are output. In other words, in this case, when the acceptance permission state occurs (displaying the integrated model image), if only one type of acceptance permission sound is output, the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated model image" and the special mode will not be displayed. Different modes will be displayed, but when two types of acceptance permissible sounds are output, there are cases where the special mode is displayed as an "integrated image" and cases where a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There comes to be.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" will be displayed in a special mode based on the mode in which the acceptance acceptance sound is output, and It becomes possible to improve the interest in the game when such a situation occurs.

In addition, when the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception acceptance state or the second reception acceptance state, a preliminary effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated image is displayed. is displayed so that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the "image related to the pre-effect" (displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize) while such a pre-effect is being executed. Then, in the integrated image, as the "image related to the pre-effect" is gradually reduced, the portion that overlaps with it is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the "image related to the pre-effect" is gradually reduced. By increasing the height and finally being hidden, the aspect (the whole) is exposed (displayed in a state where it is easy to see) after the occurrence of the acceptance permission state. Such foreshadowing effects are, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 235(b) and 235(c) and FIGS. 237(c) to (f), and are executed in the same manner. You may also do so.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start outputting at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts outputting with a delay. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound starts outputting in advance, it is possible that ``the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize its form''. Of course, even at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started after a delay, at least a part of the integrated image is in a state where the image related to the foreshadowing effect is displayed overlapping from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. The acceptance permission state (validity period) is such that it occurs when or during the execution of the pre-effect (precursive effect), and at least when the output of the second permissible sound starts. Either it has already occurred, or it will occur in conjunction with the start of its output.

According to such a configuration, at least in a situation where "the first permissible sound is output and the second permissible sound is not output", two types of accepted permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are not output). Either the first reception permissible state in which the second permissible sound) is output occurs (or is occurring), or the second reception permissible state in which only one type of reception permissible sound (the first permissible sound) is output occurs ( It is difficult to recognize whether this is the case (or is occurring). However, if a situation such as "the second permissible sound starts outputting after the first permissible sound is output" occurs, two types of accepted permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) will be output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissive state has occurred, and that there is a possibility that the integrated image may be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, in a state where it is difficult to recognize in which manner the integrated image is displayed (or whether it is being displayed),
・When transitioning from "a state in which only the first permissible sound among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (first acceptance permissible state) and,
・When the state does not shift from "a state in which only the first permissible sound among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (second acceptance permissible state) This makes it possible to suggest the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special manner based on the manner of the "transition in the output of the acceptance acceptance sound." Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output", before the image related to the foreshadowing effect is hidden, It becomes possible to make the player interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound starts, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image related to the foreshadowing effect is being displayed, an integrated image with a special aspect will be displayed (being displayed). It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation, and it becomes possible to provide a performance in which the integrated image is gradually revealed while there is a sense of expectation.

As described above, even at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a portion of the integrated simulated image is made difficult to see due to the "image related to the pre-effect". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special manner, it is difficult to at least easily recognize in which manner the integrated model image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started, the first permissible sound may maintain its output state, or the first permissible sound may end its output state. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (a third acceptance acceptance state) that is different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptance state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptance state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound or second acceptable sound), and the operation means (here, , the operation button 410), the display may change or an output sound may be generated after the operation, as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance acceptance state or the second acceptance acceptance state. good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of acceptance acceptance state (first acceptance acceptance state, second acceptance acceptance state, third acceptance acceptance state).

In other words, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it is possible to make it difficult to understand when operation reception became permitted, and It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs in which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and is left as it is when integrated. Since the image is now hidden, it is now possible to maintain a sense of tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and to better improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. You will be able to aim for it.

Alternatively, if the integrated model image is to be displayed without outputting any acceptance permission sound, the integrated model image is displayed in such a manner that the gauge image is not displayed and even its display target area is not provided. Good too. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, "The display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is The display target area of the gauge image is not intentionally displayed as including the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the target area is displayed, nor is the target area of the gauge image displayed as a separate image from the integrated image. The same technical ideas can be applied in the same way. Even with this configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to better improve the game's enjoyment related to operations. become able to.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state according to this example, there are two cases in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner, and a case in which the operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner. ) is output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, and there are cases in which operation reception is permitted. In this example, "outputting a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) in a suppressed manner" includes the case where a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). be. The term "non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no channel is even allocated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there is a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner, and There are multiple reception permission states in which operation reception is permitted while sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. "Permissible state" and "Third reception permissible state" are reception permissible states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and the above-mentioned "second reception permissible state" is a state in which operation reception is performed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner. It is included as one of the permissible acceptance states.

According to such a configuration, when the BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound) is suppressed or not output, it is not necessary to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special manner. This allows the user to concentrate more and enjoy the performance while the BGM playback sound is suppressed or not output, while avoiding situations where the performance is poor. You will be able to do it.

Note that "a reception allowing state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state" refers to the state in which the operation is allowed to be accepted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode. The specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) that is being played may be output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state before the reception acceptance state is generated. A reception permission state is generated while BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressing manner, and while the reception permission state is occurring (or at the same time), a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed. It may be output or non-output. In short, it is sufficient that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state.

Furthermore, even in the reception permission state according to this example, if no operation is detected within the set time period in which operation reception is permitted, the automatic reception mode is executed in which the same display change as when the operation is detected is performed. There are cases where the operation is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation was detected.

Here, among the reception permissible states, the reception permissible state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed is as described above,
・It does not mean that only when set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period.
・Represents something that outputs post-operation display and post-operation sound regardless of the production status (state of production settings) and regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period. In the first place, it is not necessary to provide a "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "a plurality of performance states" as the performance state. In addition, if the reception permission state in which "non-automatic reception mode" is executed among the reception permission states occurs when a special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is set, whether automatic reception will be enabled or not. Either option may be used as to whether or not to do so (for example, it may be set to ``Automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the performance status'' or ``When set to a special performance status (automatic reception mode) "Auto-reception may be enabled only in the following cases"), which is not relevant to the configuration of the technical features described here.

More specifically, if settings related to the game are possible during the demo screen (period when symbol fluctuations are not being performed), no matter which of those settings is selected, the " In the reception permission state where the automatic reception mode is executed, automatic reception is always enabled. Among these settings, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the reception permissible state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception permissible state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed are different occurrence conditions. It has become possible for this to occur. Settings related to games include settings such as the volume, brightness, and appearance probability of effects, in addition to special performance states (automatic reception mode), and settings related to special performance states (automatic reception mode) are not always included. It doesn't have to be something. If a setting related to a special performance state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special performance state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the "automatic reception mode" is executed in an acceptance permission state, and the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed. There are multiple reception permissible states, but the above-mentioned "first reception permissible state" is included as one of the reception permissible states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second reception acceptance state" and "third reception acceptance state" are included as one of the reception acceptance states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, the first reception acceptance that there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (that is, there is a possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to operate it) In this state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate the integrated image when it is displayed in a special mode with high expectations (a mode with a higher rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol than other modes), the effect will be displayed after the operation. (At least one of display changes in the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes in the speaker, light emission changes by the lamps, and effect operations by the movable decoration) can be generated, and a decrease in game interest can be suppressed. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, there is a second reception acceptance state in which there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (a possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate it), and a third reception state. In the reception permission state, the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, so this is preferable for suppressing the decline in gaming interest when you forget to perform an operation, while also reducing the feeling of tension when operation reception is permitted. will be able to maintain it.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the reception permission sound is output overlaps with the reception permission state, and when the reception permission sound is in the output state, the operation is not accepted. When the operation is accepted, the output state of the acceptance permission sound can be ended midway (it can be made into an inaudible state) based on the acceptance of the operation.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance permission sound ends midway is the timing at which an operation by the player is detected (operation accepted), You will be able to avoid feeling anxious about whether the operation has been accepted or whether the operation has not yet been accepted.

However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the reception permission sound is output overlaps with the reception permission state, but when the reception permission sound is in the output state Even if an operation is accepted, the output state of the acceptance permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated midway (making it inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation. I have to. As will be described later, there are multiple reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound ends midway, and multiple reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound does not end midway, but the above-mentioned "first reception permissible state" is included as one of the reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound is terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "second reception permissible state" is a reception permissible state in which the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway. It is included as one of the

According to such a configuration, the first reception acceptance that there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (that is, there is a possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to operate it) In this state, if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the operation will be terminated midway. Therefore, when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with high expectations (a mode with a higher rate of stopping at jackpot symbols than other modes), you may be asked whether the operation has been accepted or not yet. You can concentrate on the post-operation effects, such as the post-operation display, post-operation output sound, changes in light emitted by lamps, and production movements using movable decorations, without worrying about whether something is being done or not. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state where there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (possibility that the game's interest will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate it), the reception Even if an operation is accepted while the permissible sound is being output, it will not be terminated midway, so while suppressing the drop in interest in the game, this also reduces the feeling of tension when operating. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or if operation reception is permitted while the output is not output, When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232(a) to (c)). I try to make sure that there are times when I feel comfortable.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first reception permission state that occurs when the above-mentioned When the model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) However, in the fourth reception acceptance state, the integrated image is not displayed in the special mode (see FIG. 232(d)), but is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 232(a) to ()). c)). In the first acceptance permission state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance of the operation (inaudible). On the other hand, in the fourth reception permission state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permission sound is changed midway based on the operation acceptance. I try not to terminate it (make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, a reception permission state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, and the reception is permitted. When the integrated image is displayed in a special manner in the permissible state, the reception permissive sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, a reception permission state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, and in the reception permission state, When a fake image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases in which the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception, and cases in which the reception permissible sound is maintained without being terminated midway. It becomes like this.

In other words, in this case, in a reception acceptance state in which a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, operation reception is permitted, the integrated simulated image is in a special mode. is displayed in a different manner (a manner in which there is a low possibility that the game's interest will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to perform an operation). Since there are cases where the permissible sound is maintained without being terminated midway, it is possible that when the permissible sound is not terminated midway, the reason is that the operation has not been accepted. It is now possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is that the fourth reception permissible state has occurred even though the game has been canceled, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while suppressing a decline in interest in the game. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception permission state occurs, prior to this, a wide area When the execution of the pre-form display is started and the second reception permission state occurs, the pre-form display of a narrow area that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started before this. It is supposed to be done. Then, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (in this case, an integrated simulated image) is displayed both during the period when the wide-area front effect is being executed and during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring. are displayed in different manners during the period when the wide-area pre-effect is being executed and during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated sample image (sample image) is displayed during the period when the wide-area pre-effect is being executed, and the integrated sample image (sample image) is displayed during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring. The integrated simulated images (simulated images) displayed are based on different image data, even though they simulate the same operation receiving part (operation button 410). As a result, not only the color scheme but also the outline shape itself is displayed as being different.

According to such a configuration, when performing a wide-area pre-production, it is possible to have a greater degree of freedom without being constrained by the form (image data) of the integrated sample image (sample image) displayed in the first reception permission state. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated simulated image (simulation image) with a high level of independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing pre-production over a wider area (wide-area pre-production). It becomes like this. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

In addition, in the reception acceptance state where a wide-area pre-effect is executed, compared to the acceptance acceptance state where a narrow-area pre-effect is executed, as a post-operation effect, there is a jackpot effect that only appears when a jackpot has been obtained. The proportion of cases in which this aspect appears is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the wide area type pre-effect (in which the wide area type pre-effect is executed), and these acceptance acceptance states are A first acceptance permitting state and a third acceptance permitting state are each provided. In addition, there are multiple reception acceptance states that correspond to the narrow-area pre-production (in which the narrow-area pre-production is executed), and one of these acceptance acceptance states is the second reception acceptance state. A state and a fourth acceptance permission state are prepared respectively.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, an operation is performed while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. As mentioned above, the second reception permission state is such that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed. That's exactly what I did. In other words, when a narrow-area pre-production with relatively poor performance is performed, it is difficult to accept operations while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed but is set to a non-suppression mode. (second reception permission state), it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the failure of the wide-area pre-performance, which is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, if an operation can be accepted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state, a wide-area type with relatively superior performance is possible. Since the pre-production is being performed (first reception permissible state), the game is played due to the operation not being accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressing manner. A decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one production state) is in place, no operation is detected within the set time period in which operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. When the operation is detected, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception permission state, the operation is detected within the set time when the operation reception is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not detected, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception acceptance state in which a wide-area pre-performance is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease if someone forgets to operate it due to its high performance. Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a user forgets to perform an operation. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where a narrow-area front performance is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the performance must be properly controlled. Only those who are paying attention and realize that the operation reception is allowed will be able to enjoy post-operation effects such as post-operation display and post-operation output sound, which will suitably create a sense of tension. be able to maintain it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode, or is in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted in a non-output state. is such that it includes at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is met, and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is met. As mentioned above. In this regard, in the fourth reception permission state, an operation can be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppression mode, but in the first reception permission state, In the state, it is possible to accept an operation while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth reception permission state occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started in advance. In other words, when a narrow-range pre-production with relatively poor performance is performed, even if a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is suppressed, the degree of suppression is reduced. (Fourth acceptance acceptance state), it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the wide-area pre-performance, which is relatively superior in performance, not being performed. On the other hand, an operation may be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first reception permissible state), a wide-area pre-production with relatively superior production performance was performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decline in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the sample image (integrated image) is displayed, the operation acceptance is performed. The corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a effect movement by a movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and the simulated image (integrated image) When hiding an image), a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing effect) using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600, etc.) is executed. If the second acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, a post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation acceptance occurs. At least one of the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is hidden. A narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600, etc.) is executed.

Here, the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) is a form that makes part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) difficult to see or invisible. It refers to the displayed "image other than the sample image" or the "display effect on the sample image." Such a disappearance effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, for example. , display the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (disappearance effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and in the moving image, part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) becomes the image (disappeared). It may be a method that expresses how the image becomes difficult to recognize due to an effect), or it may be performed by changing the display mode of the sample image (integrated image) itself (display effect). It may be. However, in order to suggest the level of expectation or to improve the enjoyment of the game, such a disappearing effect is used when hiding the simulated image (integrated simulated image). It goes without saying that it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

Also, ``When hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)...the disappearance effect is executed'' means ``When hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)... ...The disappearing effect is executed.'' Or, as the model image (integrated image) becomes invisible, the transparency of the image (integrated image) itself is high. (e.g., the disappearing effect is executed), or it may be "the disappearing effect is executed after the sample image (integrated image) is hidden". , the meaning includes any of these aspects. In addition, the fact that the transmittance of the sample image (integrated sample image) increases in the process of hiding it is also known as ``when hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)''. . . . the disappearance effect is executed."

According to such a configuration, when the execution of the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the operation by the player is started and the simulated image is hidden, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there will be cases where the image disappears and cases where the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed, it is possible to improve the performance up to the time when the model image (integrated image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when executing such a disappearance effect (image at the time of disappearance), in the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type image at the time of disappearance), the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type image at the time of disappearance) is executed. The background image that was displayed before the narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is displayed until the narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is hidden, or after the operation. (Post-operation display and post-operation output sound) are displayed (maintained) without being changed while they are being executed. On the other hand, the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed before the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed based on the operation reception by the player. The background image is changed to a different background until the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is hidden, or while the post-operation effect (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being executed. We are planning to change it into an image.

In other words, when a wide-area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide-area disappearance) is executed, not only the sample image (integrated image) but also at least a part of the background image will be affected by the wide-area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide-area disappearance). (image) makes it difficult to see, so the background image should be changed (replaced) with a different background image at the timing when such a wide area disappearing effect (wide area disappearing image) is executed. This makes it possible to achieve a smooth performance transition (transition to a new performance phase) using the button performance. For example, a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is an image that is displayed on a separate layer that is in front of the layer where the sample image (integrated image) is displayed and the layer where the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as one video prepared in advance, and one of the model images (integrated model image) may be displayed in the video. It may be possible to express a state in which part or the whole of the background image becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the image (disappearance effect).

On the other hand, if a narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing image) is executed, the narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing image) is hidden, or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the performance (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being performed, the performance transition (transition to a new performance phase) will not be realized. Therefore, in addition to the post-operation effect, players are interested in whether a wide-area disappearance effect (a wide-area disappearance image) or a narrow-area disappearance effect (a narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed. As a result, the gaming interest associated with the simulated image (integrated simulated image) can be suitably maintained from when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when a wide-area extinction effect (wide-area extinction image) is displayed, the jackpot will be obtained as a post-operation effect than when a narrow-area extinction effect (narrow-area extinction image) is displayed. There is a high probability that the appearance of the jackpot effect, which only appears when the game is in progress, will appear. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (in which the wide area disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image). As one of these acceptance acceptance states, a first acceptance acceptance state and a third acceptance acceptance state are prepared, respectively. In addition, there are multiple acceptance states that correspond to narrow-area disappearance effects (images at the time of narrow-area disappearance) (in which narrow-area disappearance effects are executed), and these acceptance acceptance states As one of these, a second reception permission state and a fourth reception permission state are prepared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output. The second reception permission state is such that the player can accept operations while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is set to a non-suppressing mode. What is happening is as described above. In other words, when a narrow-range extinction effect that is relatively poor in performance is performed, the player's response to a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed but is set to a non-suppressing mode. Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance acceptance state), it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the failure of the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, if a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner, or if an operation can be accepted by the player while it is in a non-output state, the performance is relatively affected. Since the superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception permissible state), it is not possible for the player to accept operations while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner. A decrease in interest in games due to failure to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one presentation state) is met, an operation is detected within a set time period in which the player's operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. If the operation is not detected, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception permission state, the operation is executed within the set time when the player is allowed to accept the operation. As described above, when no operation is detected, the process is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception acceptance state where the wide-area extinction effect is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease if someone forgets to operate it due to its high performance. Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a user forgets to perform an operation. That is, in this case, even if the automatic reception functions without the player's operation being accepted, the wide-area extinction effect will be executed in the same manner as when the player's operation was accepted. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state in which the narrow-area extinction effect is performed, it is executed in the non-automatic reception mode described above, so the set time elapses without any operation by the player (the second reception permissible state When the state is completed), the simulated image is displayed without any post-operation effects (at least one of the display change on the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change on the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decoration). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptance state, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed even when the sample image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which may cause users to forget to perform the operation. As a result, a decline in gaming interest is suppressed when the post-operation performance is no longer executed. At this time, the narrow-area extinction effect may be executed in the same manner (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception acceptance state according to this example, there are two types of narrow-area disappearance effects that appear when an operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed, and a narrow-area disappearing effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. The narrow-area vanishing effect that appears in the image is designed to have different aspects (images) from each other.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception desk in which a player's operation is allowed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first acceptance permissible state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As mentioned above, there are In the fourth acceptance permission state, the player can accept an operation while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptance acceptance state, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player while it is in a non-output state. As mentioned above, it is also possible to accept applications. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by a player in the fourth reception acceptance state, a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed instead of a wide-area disappearance effect. . In other words, when a narrow-range extinction effect with relatively poor performance is performed, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed in advance, but the degree of suppression is set to be low. Therefore (fourth reception acceptance state), it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to not performing a wide-area extinction effect that is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, an operation may be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first reception permissible state), a wide-area extinction effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

FIG. 249 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the second acceptance permission state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 251(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “second variation pattern” selected above. It happens.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the process as shown in FIG. 249(b). , the above-mentioned second reception acceptance state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the second post-operation performance is permitted when a timing tB3 has arrived at which a second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern SZ. (corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(d)"). However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptance permission state (validity period),
- "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" according to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, operation reception while the normally fluctuating BGM playback sound maintains the output state in a non-suppressed mode. The state is in the permissible "non-suppression reception permissible state (see FIGS. 249(a) and (b))" and - No operation was detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) in which operation reception is permissible. In this case, the "non-automatic reception mode" (see FIG. 249(h)) does not generate the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) corresponding to the second reception permission state.
It is made to occur as a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period ) is suddenly set (non-suppressive reception effect), the player is caught off guard, and there is likely to be a delay in the start of the movement when trying to perform an operation. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). A sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making the user aware of the risk of missing an opportunity to generate a post-operation effect (here, a second post-operation effect).

However, in this "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) is performed in a manner that only appears when a jackpot occurs, rather than the "suppression/automatic reception performance" described later. Even though the percentage (it may be 0% or 100%) is low, if there are frequent occurrences where the post-operation effect does not occur against the player's will, the interest in the game may decrease. There are concerns. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 249(b), (e), and (i), it is necessary to When the timing tB2 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"), and the timing within the set time is Even if an operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained across this. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tB2, which is a little earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. However, the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs; for example, the generation timing of the set time It may be generated in accordance with the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Push!" and "Push!" are used as "acceptable sound". and a second permissible sound that is output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 249(f) and (j), in the second reception permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. is output, and the output restriction on such "acceptance permission sound" also tends to cause a delay in the start of a movement when a player attempts to perform an operation.

By the way, in the second reception permission state, as a countermeasure against the setting time being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation It is conceivable that some players may try not to miss an opportunity to generate a post-operation effect by repeatedly hitting the button 410). However, in this case, since the post-operation performance will start immediately after the operation reception is accepted, the started performance is "one that is being performed in response to the operation reception (post-operation performance)". This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game is a simple warning effect unrelated to the operation reception, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (in particular, FIG. 249(e)), in the second acceptance permission state, the "acceptance permission sound (first permission sound)" is not activated after the set time (valid period) has elapsed. When the performance is accepted at timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself ends, but the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not ended prematurely, but is set as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output ends (timing tB3c (FIG. 249(e), (i)), which is the same as when no operation is performed. As a result, the started production is "in response to the operation reception". It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the event is being performed (post-operation performance) or whether it is automatically generated as a performance unrelated to operation reception. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 249, when the production is accepted within the set time of the second acceptance permission state (timing tB3a in the figure), the production display device At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 249(d)) ). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tB4. In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be configured to maintain its output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, if timing tB4 has not yet passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) will not be output. It is required to maintain the status.

In the production example shown in FIG. 249, when timing tB2, which is earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time of the second acceptance permission state is set, arrives, the production display device 1600 displays the operating means to be operated. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tB2, which is a little earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. In this example, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) starts outputting, but the timing is not limited to this, and one of the two may start earlier. You may also do so. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the acceptance acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tB3.

In addition, as mentioned above, the sample image displayed when the second reception permission state occurs (the image that simulates the operation receiving section to which the operation opportunity is given) is the periphery that decorates the periphery of the sample image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined A display target area (section image KG) of image) GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image" that are in the second reception permission state, special modes with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) are selected by lottery (selection). ), and only modes that are different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated model image IGa with the lowest expectation level is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 249(c) to 249(f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives and an operation is accepted while such an integrated image is being displayed. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display changes on the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes on the speaker, light emission changes from the lamps, and movable decorations). As at least one of the performance operations), output related to the liquid crystal display and output related to the production sound are respectively started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251(f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 249(c), (d), and 251(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed at the time when the post-operation effect is started. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point (timing tB3a), no change is caused in the integrated image IG (specific layer), and after a short period of time ( Until timing tB3b (predetermined time period) has elapsed, the "display on the integrated image IG" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image GG is also being reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 251, a preview of the conversation by the princess character (this may be a chance) is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or the whole of the integrated image in the display state difficult to view or invisible appears (see "Fig. 251 (corresponds to the situation indicated in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image that is displayed on a separate layer before the integrated model image IG and the image (disappearance effect). ) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and in the moving image, a part or the whole of the integrated image IG becomes difficult to see due to the image KSE (disappearance effect). As mentioned above, it may be.

As shown in FIG. 249(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, no change due to it will occur in the integrated model image IG. First, the display area of the gauge image GG is also being reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a layer earlier than that, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to view or become invisible.

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide-area disappearing effect image HSE described later) is used to make the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) difficult to view or invisible. Even though it is displayed on a predetermined layer, the sample image (integrated image IG) that is displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) is itself The display remains as it was when operation reception was permitted, and no changes occur. Furthermore, the display of the gauge image GG, whose display area continues to be reduced, continues across the operation acceptance period. As a result, even in the process of making the sample image (integrated sample image IG) difficult to view or making it invisible, it is possible to visually confirm (at least part of) the state when operation reception was permitted. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to maintain the state shown in FIG. 251(f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image IG ends within the period (timings tB3b to tB3d) during which the disappearing effect image KSE is displayed (as shown in FIG. 251(i)). After this, the disappearing effect (here, a narrow-area disappearing effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) is applied in situations where the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer. (effect) image KSE will be displayed. The image KSE with such a disappearing effect is made to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) after its display started (timing tB3b) (as shown in FIG. 251). j)). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d at which the display is hidden, regardless of when the operation is accepted, the change in display on the performance display device 1600 (in this case, the liquid crystal display) among the effects after the operation is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period in which it is being executed. That is, as will be described later, the image KSE of the disappearance effect and the integrated image IG are displayed on a layer in front of the image related to the display change (conversation preview by the princess character) on the effect display device 1600, It is displayed in a way that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251(g) to (i), while the disappearing effect image KSE is displayed, the image related to the display change (conversation preview by the princess character) on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. It's becoming more difficult. The same applies to the wide-area extinction effect.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only the post-operation presentation is started, but also the manner in which the integrated image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted. 232(a) to 232(d), how much time is left as suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.). 251(f)). After this, the display of the disappearing effect image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600" and the integrated image IG among the post-operation effects is started. (corresponds to "the situation shown in Figure 251(g)"). As mentioned above, there are two types of extinction effects: narrow-area disappearance effects with low performance and wide-area disappearance effects with low performance, and here they are executed as narrow-area disappearance effects. While the image KSE of such a disappearing effect is displayed, the integrated image IG becomes hidden (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251(i)"), and after that, the image KSE of the disappearing effect is When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (conversation preview by the princess character)" of the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (" (equivalent to the situation shown in FIG. 251(j)).

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, the user can first enjoy what the integrated image IG looks like, and then enjoy how it will appear as a disappearing effect. Since you will be able to enjoy what kind of presentation will appear after the operation (in this case, which of several conversation preview modes with different expectations), when the operation is accepted with such a variety of presentations. It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games.

In order to suitably obtain such effects, the timing at which the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) is started to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 should be set at timing tB3b instead of timing tB3a, or when the disappearing effect is started. It is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, in this case as well, since the post-operation performance using sound and lamps starts to be executed at timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation performance itself remains at timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 249(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, so if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode. The sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa) will be hidden.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 249(b) and 249(g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state) ends, The sample image on the specific layer (here, the integrated sample image IGa) is not hidden, but maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even if operation reception is no longer permitted, at that point (timing tB4), no change is caused to the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa), and no change is caused thereto. Until timing tB4a arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the sample image" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area remaining even after the state in which operation acceptance is allowed (second acceptance acceptance state) ends, and the display area decreases after timing tB4. The display area is reduced so that it becomes "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation, the sample image will be displayed in any mode (any of multiple modes with different expectations). It will now be possible to confirm whether the In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to ``0'' after the validity period ends, it can encourage you to feel ``too bad'' when you are unable to receive the operation in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In this example, the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation reception, which is longer than the time from timing tB3a when the operation reception is made until the sample image is hidden (invisible). The time from timing tB4 until the sample image is hidden (invisible) is made shorter.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second reception acceptance state, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player being detected, the post-operation performance will not be executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249(g), when hiding the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa), a narrow-area disappearing effect is executed. While the narrow-area vanishing effect is being executed, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-area disappearing effect (FIG. 249(g)) when the after-operation effect is not performed is different from the narrow-area disappearing effect when the after-operation effect is executed. (FIG. 249(c)) is executed in a different manner (image).

According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation was accepted (whether or not it was done in time), it is possible to properly understand it by checking the mode of the narrow-range extinction effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to grasp whether or not a post-operation performance is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to change the form of the narrow-area disappearing effect (Fig. 249(c)) when the post-operation effect is executed, to the aspect of the narrow-area disappearing effect (Fig. )) is desirable. However, for example, when the post-operation effect is executed, the narrow-area disappearing effect (FIG. 249(c)) can be changed to "A (for example, a change in the sample image itself)" and "B (for example, a change in the sample image itself)". If the two aspects of ``Displaying another image)'' are to be executed together, the narrow-area disappearing effect (Figure 249 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed should be executed in ``A''. You can. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted when the mode "B" does not appear in the narrow-range disappearance effect, and it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted, and the situation where the post-operation effect is being performed. A decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to grasp whether the game is in progress or not is avoided.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 249, when timing tB1 comes before timing tB3 at which the second reception permission state occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251(b)"). Then, during the period in which the image KTH related to such narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed, and the first tolerance is displayed. The sound output is started (timing tB2, corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). At the time when the display of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect. It's getting harder. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the narrow-area front effect is displayed is reduced, and its transmittance increases, thereby creating a "simulation image (integrated image)". 251 (b) to (d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the narrow-area front performance is being executed and the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is being displayed, the second Timing tB3 when the acceptance permission state occurs has arrived, and operation acceptance is now permitted (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251(d)"). In other words, in this case, since the operation reception becomes permitted at a stage when the visibility of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is being increased, Check the appearance (expectation level) of the image (integrated image IG), whether to hide it by allowing the operation reception (post-operation performance) to be performed without checking the appearance (expectation level) It becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation by accepting the operation (post-operation effect) after the operation has been completed.

Here, the image KTH used for such narrow-area front presentation is, for example, an image that is displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is displayed. It is also possible to display the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (narrow area type front effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and improve the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) in the moving image. It may also be designed to express a state in which the value is gradually increased.

Note that in the narrow-area pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of related effects may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operations, the narrow-area pre-production is It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

Further, as a narrow-area pre-performance, a plurality of modes with different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. . However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and if the operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect will not be executed, so regarding the narrow area type pre-effect, It is desirable to provide only one mode and to display only that one mode, in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the first reception permission state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 252(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “first variation pattern” selected above. It happens.

As mentioned above, in the performance related to the "first variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-announcement judgment), as shown in FIG. 250(b), the decorative pattern The above-mentioned first reception in which operation reception regarding the first operation post-effect is permitted when timing tC4 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) has arrived at which a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ fluctuation effect. A permissible state (validity period) is generated (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the first reception permission state (validity period),
・“Suppression reception permission state” (Fig. 250(a), (b))" and - Even if no operation is detected on the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) during which operation acceptance is permitted, "Automatic reception mode" (see FIG. 250(h)) in which the post-operation effect starts when timing tC4f within the set time arrives.
It is made to occur as a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a "strong suppression mode."

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to accept operations while the "BGM playback sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state (suppression acceptance effect), so that the game From the user's perspective, it becomes easier to perform operations immediately after the set time (validity period) occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) will be performed at timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it will occur automatically when the robot arrives (automatic reception mode), you will be able to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation performance. . In other words, in such a "suppression/automatic reception performance", the percentage of post-operation performance that appears only when a jackpot is achieved (not 0% or 100%) is higher than in the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance". As mentioned above, the value of

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance", similarly to the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", FIGS. 250(b), (e), (i) As shown in , when timing tC3 arrives, which is a little before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which production reception is permitted, the "acceptance permission sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is generated. The output is started and the output state is maintained across the timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)" is being output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, the operation can be performed at timing tC3. It is now possible to recognize that a state in which acceptance is permitted will occur soon, and that ``actual acceptance is done by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, against the player's will.'' It is expected that it will be difficult to appear frequently. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs; for example, it may be generated in accordance with the generation timing tC4 of the set time. You can do it like this.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect (suppression reception performance) more favorably, it is necessary to change the "BGM playback sound" from "the state in which it is output in a non-suppression mode" to the "state in which it is output in a suppression mode or in a non-suppression mode". The timing tC2a at which the transition to the "output state" takes place is different from that shown in the figure, but the timing tC2a is changed so that the relationship "length of timings tC2a to tC3>length of timings tC3 to tC4" is established. It can be said that it is desirable to set it considerably before the output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound which occurs in advance of the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide-area pre-effect is started.

Furthermore, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250(f) and (j), unlike the case of the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" described above, Not only the first permissible sound which is output as a sound effect such as "Push!" but also the second permissible sound which is a message sound such as "Push!" is output as the "acceptable sound". Furthermore, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound starts, and the operation reception is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at timing tC4a, which arrives at tC4a.

In other words, in this case, in the second reception acceptance state (validity period) in which the integrated sample image IG (sample image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is set during the set time (validity period). The second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first reception permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated sample image IG (sample image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound is The output of the second permissible sound is started immediately after the occurrence of the second permissible sound, and the output of the second permissible sound is started after the set time (validity period) has elapsed.

According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started when the aspect of the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) is difficult to be recognized or is not visible due to the pre-production. After that, when the first acceptance permissible state (validity period) is occurring, it is possible to shift to a state in which both the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) will be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output. You will be able to do this. In other words, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated model image with a specific highly expected aspect (special aspect) is generated. The user can now have a sense of anticipation for the IG (simulation image) to be displayed, and in this environment, the integrated image IG (simulation image) is gradually revealed (clarified). sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. is displayed), the output of the second permissible sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" are determined based on the result of the preview performance determination. When the operation button 410 is selected, a message sound such as "Press!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound).

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 250(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short time. Although the "first permissible sound" is employed as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, the length relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as for the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound", the output state is maintained for different periods of time, as shown in FIGS. 250(e), (f), (i), and (j). In addition, the timing at which these output states are terminated (the timing at which they are made inaudible) is set to arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to According to this configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance permissible sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated arrives. It is expected that this will make it less likely that ``a performance is accepted against the player's will by activating an automatic button function rather than by the player's own operation''.
- A first situation in which only the "first permissible sound" maintains its output state among the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" - Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" The second situation in which the "first permissible sound" maintains its output state is maintained, but the "second permissible sound" has ended its output state (it has been made inaudible). Third situation: 4th situation where both "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" have finished outputting (being rendered inaudible)

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikin!") is outputted as the "first permissible sound". In other words, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "non-suppressing/non-automatic reception performance", but the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is Regarding the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound even in "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production", "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" is suppressed. This makes it possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in a permissible state (the first permissible sound), while maintaining a suitable performance when the production is in a situation where the reception is permissible (second permissible sound). acceptable sound). However, in the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" in the production example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" in the production example shown in FIG. 250, different reception permissible sounds are used as the first permissible sound. It may also be output.

Note that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in the above-mentioned figures and the figures to be described later may be the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be 2 frames. The time may be longer than that. For example, if the reception permission sound (first permission sound) can be output even slightly in advance of the set time (validity period), the player will be in a state where operation reception is permitted (or Since it is possible to recognize the event earlier by the amount of time that preceded it, it is possible to recognize it earlier by the amount of time that preceded it. It is now expected to prevent users from forgetting to perform internal operations.

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 250, unlike the production example shown in FIG. When the operation is accepted, the output state is terminated midway based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. In other words, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that point, and as a result, the state in which the operation is permissible ( This makes it possible to recognize that the validity period (validity period) has ended. As a result, it is difficult to misidentify that an operation has been accepted even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the automatic reception function from being activated against the player's intention. become able to. In addition, if the operation is performed and the operation is accepted at a timing before the automatic button function activation timing tC4f within the set time (validity period), the operation will be executed at the time when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if timing tC4f arrives, since the state in which reception is permitted is now terminated.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250(e) and 250(f), the first permissible sound starts to be output without delay when the set time (valid period) occurs, and the second permissible sound starts outputting after the set time (valid period). The output is started after the occurrence of the period). According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound will start no matter how quickly the operation by the player is accepted, but the output of the second permissible sound will start depending on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation is accepted ends without starting output, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends. ) will now be executed. Note that if the operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, the operation will not be accepted and the first permissible sound will not be terminated with this as an opportunity. Further, if the operation is accepted before timing tC4a arrives, output of the second permissible sound will not be started.

According to such a configuration, should the post-operation performance be started after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first reception permissible state is established), or after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first permissible sound is in the first reception permissible state), or 2. Whether to start the production after the operation without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception permissible state or the second reception permissible state), the game Since the choice can be left to the player's discretion, the range of games available will be expanded, and it is expected that the player will be able to enjoy the game more.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 250(c) and 250(f), at least one of the images related to the pre-effect (in this case, wide-area pre-effect) is displayed within the period from timing tC3 to tC4a. Some of them are not hidden and remain visible. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timings tC3 to tC4a), the state (expectation level) of the integrated sample image (sample image) is not clearly visible due to the pre-production. This makes it possible to make the above-mentioned gameplay, which is ``left to the player's choice'', more interesting.

Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 250(d), when an operation is accepted within the set time (validity period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation production according to the operation reception is performed. (Here, the first post-operation performance) includes a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member). At least this occurs (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 249, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not change the timing regardless of when the operation is accepted within the set time (validity period). In contrast, the output sound after the operation (direction sound) is set in advance from the timing when the operation is accepted, whereas it is hidden (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that comes after tC5. The output state is maintained for a certain period of time. In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background preview by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 250, no matter when the operation is accepted within the set time (validity period), the output sound after the operation (direction sound) is "BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to maintain the output state when the timing tC6 arrives when the specific type of performance sound) changes from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the non-suppressed mode.

On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" becomes output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, both the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed manner and the content related to the display performance is switched, so the performance is greatly improved. It is expected that changes will be made to improve gaming interest. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained when timing tC6 arrives. Furthermore, the "background music reproduction sound" may be gradually restored by a technique such as a fade-in when returning to output in a non-suppressed mode.

Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3, which is earlier than the timing tC4 at which the setting time of the first acceptance permission state is set, comes, the production display device 1600 displays the operation to be operated. A simulated image of the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tC3, which is a little earlier than timing tC4 at which the setting time (timings tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. In this example, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) starts outputting, but the timing is not limited to this, and one of the two may start earlier. You may also do so. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the reception acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tC4.

Furthermore, as described above, the sample image displayed when the first reception permission state occurs (the image that simulates the operation receiving section to which the operation opportunity is given) also has a periphery that decorates the periphery of the sample image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG ( A display target area (section area KG) of the predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second acceptance acceptance state, in the first acceptance acceptance state, a special aspect with a high degree of expectation among the multiple aspects prepared as the "integrated image IG" (for example, As described above, the mode shown in (d) (integrated image IGd) is included as a lottery (selection) target and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first reception acceptance state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first reception acceptance state (FIG. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed ( Gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the end of the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

According to such a configuration, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left when the post-operation effect is started due to activation of the automatic button function. It is now possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will, and as a result, regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge at the next set time (validity period) It will be possible to encourage users to perform operations at an early stage.

However, regarding the first reception acceptance state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is received does not necessarily have to start within the set time; It may be started when or after the end of the process.

Furthermore, the integrated sample image IG (sample image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 does not necessarily have to be the same as the integrated sample image IG (sample image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 249. good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operating means (operation receiver) to be operated is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operating means (operation receiver) to be operated is depicted. may be depicted realistically.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiver) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated image IG (simulation image) imitating it. In the example shown in FIG. 250, a handle 5012 (sword ornament 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiver) to be operated, and this is displayed as an integrated image IG (reference image) (Fig. 245(a)-(d)). These "integrated images IGe to IGh" are as described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area (section image KG) of GG is provided. Further, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed.

As described above, in the operation acceptance performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, based on the result of the preview performance determination, there are two options: "When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "When the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target." ”. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is the target of operation after the set time (validity period) for which production reception is allowed occurs, the set time may be set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, as for the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, setting it after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed after the set time (validity period) has occurred is not enough for the player to operate against his will. This is desirable in order to prevent the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

In addition, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, if the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target remains in the incorrect operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable that the effect is accepted and the effect is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation arises in which the performance is not accepted despite operating the operating means, the player may become confused. Since it is cruel to request further operation of the operating means on the side, even if the incorrect operating state is maintained, the performance will be accepted when the operating means on the side that is the target of operation is operated. It is desirable to do so.

As mentioned above, in the suppression operation reception performance, the specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state before the operation opportunity is given, so it is different from the non-suppression operation reception performance. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) that is output when a suppression operation reception performance is generated is not output when a non-suppression operation reception performance is generated. It is possible to output the sound as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer period of time than the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (for example, multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are used as the first allowable sound. One of the plurality of modes is selectively outputted as the first permissible sound based on the result of the preview performance determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIG. It is something that exists. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is outputted in.

Note that "which of the multiple modes should be output as the first permissible sound" and "which of the multiple operating means should be used as the operation target" are obtained as separate judgment results in the above preview performance judgment. Alternatively, it may be obtained as one determination result within the above-mentioned preview performance determination. However, for at least the above-mentioned first aspect among the plurality of aspects, regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target, the first tolerance is It is desirable to make it selectable as a sound. Furthermore, the second and third modes can also be selected in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation target and the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to also provide a mode in which output is possible only when the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. Even if the first permissible sound is output in any of these modes, the output state will be maintained for a length longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 249.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 250(c) to 250(f), it is assumed that timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (here, integrated image IGd) is being displayed. are doing. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display changes on the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes on the speaker, light emission changes from the lamps, and movable decorations). As at least one of the performance operations), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the production sound are respectively started.

However, as mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 250(c) and (d), even in this example, the integrated image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. , maintains the display state from when it was in the reception-permitted state. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(i)"), it is considered as the cause of the integrated image IG. No change is made, and until timing tC4c arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "integrated image IG The display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state difficult to see or cannot be seen appears ("disappearance effect"). 252(j)). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before the specific layer on which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image that is displayed on a separate layer (predetermined layer) that The image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and in the moving image, a part or the whole of the integrated image becomes difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). As mentioned above, it may be the same.

As shown in FIG. 250(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE ( Even when the disappearance effect (extinction effect) starts to be displayed, it is not hidden and remains displayed as it was when it was in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even in a situation where the disappearing effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated map image IG is displayed, no change will occur regarding the integrated map image IG due to it. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a predetermined layer in front of it, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to visually recognize or gradually become invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated model image IG will be finished during the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed, and from this point on, the integrated model image The image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, a wide-area disappearance effect that uses more than half of the predetermined display area) is displayed in a situation where the IG is not displayed even on a specific layer. The disappearing effect image HSE is hidden from display when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) after its display started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g at which the display is hidden, regardless of when the operation is accepted, the change in display on the performance display device 1600 (in this case, the liquid crystal display) among the effects after the operation is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period in which it is being executed. In other words, as will be described later, the disappearing effect image HSE and the simulated image (integrated simulated image) are displayed on a predetermined layer in front of the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600. and is displayed in a manner that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed (FIGS. 252(j) and (k)), the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 is made difficult to see. There is.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only the post-operation presentation is started, but also the manner in which the integrated image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted. (Which mode shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), how much time is left as suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be maintained in a state where it is possible to know. After that, among the post-operation effects, the disappearing effect image HSE is created in such a way as to make it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" and the integrated image IG. will start displaying. As mentioned above, there are two types of disappearance effects: narrow-area disappearance effects with low performance and wide-area disappearance effects with low performance, and here they are executed as wide-area disappearance effects. While the image HSE of such a disappearing effect is displayed, the integrated image IG will be hidden, and after that, when the image HSE of the disappearing effect is hidden, the after-operation effect will be The "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(l)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, the user can first enjoy what the integrated image IG looks like, and then enjoy how it will appear as a disappearing effect. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of mode will appear as a performance after an operation, it becomes possible to improve the game interest when the operation is accepted by such a variety of performances.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, the timing at which the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600 starts to be displayed is not at the timing tC4b but at the timing tC4c, or when the disappearance effect is set. It is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, in this case as well, since the post-operation performance using sound and lamps starts to be executed at timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation performance itself remains at timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the first reception acceptance state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, since the first reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, even if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the post-operation performance will not be performed. During this process, the model image (in this case, the integrated model image IG) is hidden.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250(b) and 250(g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the operation by the player is the same as when the operation is accepted. , the sample image (here, the integrated sample image) is not hidden, but maintains its display state. More specifically, even if the automatic button function is enabled, at that point (timing tC4f), no change is caused to the sample image (here, the integrated sample image), and no changes are caused thereto. Until timing tC4fa arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the sample image" continues in the same manner as when operation acceptance is permitted. There is. Furthermore, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area remaining even after the state in which operation acceptance is allowed (second acceptance acceptance state) ends, and the display area decreases after timing tC4f. The display area is reduced so that it becomes "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the sample image will not be displayed in any mode (any of multiple modes with different expectations). It will now be possible to confirm whether the

In addition, in this example, the time from timing tC4c when an operation is accepted until the sample image is hidden (not visible), and the time from timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated until the sample image is hidden (not visible). ) is made to be the same.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IG) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 250(g). When this happens, a wide-area vanishing effect is executed, and while the wide-area vanishing effect is being executed, the replica image (in this case, the integrated replica image) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image affected by the wide area disappearing effect (FIG. 250(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and the image affected by the wide area disappearing effect (FIG. 250(c)) when the automatic button function is enabled. The image related to the wide-area extinction effect (FIG. 250(g)) is executed in the same manner (both images are "image HSE"). This is different from the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow-area disappearing effect when the sample image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from that during operation).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not received in time at the last minute, the same appearance as when the operation reception is on time will appear, so that "the operation reception is completed in time and the post-operation performance It will be possible to encourage players to think that the execution has started, and it is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, when timing tC1 comes before timing tC3 at which the first reception permission state occurs, a wide-area pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started. (corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"). Then, during the period in which the wide-area pre-effect is being executed, the display of a simulated image of the operation receiving section (in this case, the integrated simulated image IG) and the output of the first permissible sound are started ( This is timing tC3 and corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). At the time when the display of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IG) starts, part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) becomes difficult to see due to the image related to the wide-area front effect. ing. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the wide-area front effect is displayed is reduced or the transmittance thereof is increased, thereby creating a "mock image (integrated model image)". 252(f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, while the wide-area front production is being executed and the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IG) is being displayed, the first reception Timing tC4, at which the permissible state occurs, has arrived and operation reception is permitted. In other words, in this case, since the operation reception becomes permitted at a stage when the visibility of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is being increased, Check the appearance (expectation level) of the image (integrated image IG), whether to hide it by allowing the operation reception (post-operation performance) to be performed without checking the appearance (expectation level) It becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation by accepting the operation (post-operation effect) after the operation has been completed.

Here, the image used for such wide-area front presentation may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed. , the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (wide-area front presentation) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is gradually increased in the moving image. It may be something that expresses how things are going.

Regarding the wide-area front presentation, considering that it suggests the occurrence of the first reception acceptance state, which has relatively high expectations, unlike the case of the second reception acceptance state, the performance display device 1600 It is desirable to output not only images but also related sound effects. Then, a part of the performance sound related to such a wide area type front performance may be executed so as to function as the first permissible sound.

In addition, as a wide-area pre-performance, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations, and selectively display one of these modes based on the result of the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. This is desirable in terms of improving gaming interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250(c), the wide-area pre-effect according to this example is started when timing tC1 in the "first variation pattern" arrives, and the first reception permission state occurs. The process is executed over the timing tC4, and is completed within the set time of the first acceptance permission state. However, from the time such wide-area pre-performance is started until it is ended, the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance are sequentially executed as the wide-area pre-performance. It looks like this. These two wide-area pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data, or may be displayed as mutually different moving image data.

Here, the first wide-area type front effect is one that starts displaying when timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"), and the second wide-area type front effect is one that starts displaying when timing tC1 arrives When tC2 arrives, the display starts in place of the first wide-area pre-effect (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(e)"), but which of these pre-effects is displayed? Even if it is during the period, a "simulation image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-effect is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 250(c), the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed when timing tC1a arrives during the period in which the first wide-area pre-effect is being executed. As a result, it is possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the plurality of operating means will be given an operating opportunity (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(c)"). In FIG. 252(c), it is depicted that the image HTH1 produced by the first wide-area pre-rendering creates "an image in which the entire sample image (here, the integrated sample image) is whitened out"; It is just a blank image, and it cannot be said to be an imitation of the production button that is the target of operation. After that, "Image A1 in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is whitened out" is created by "image A1 in which at least the outline of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is made white by at least one of the decoration and the pattern." 252(d)" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(d)"), thereby indicating that the object to be operated is the effect button. From this, it can be said that such "image A2" is a simulated image of the operating means to be operated. That is, the effect is executed to make such image A2 appear as if it were produced by "image HTH1 based on the first wide-area type front effect." The term "outline of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image)" means the outline of the operation receiving part (here, the outline of the operation receiving part and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when timing tC2 arrives, "Image A2 as a sample image (integrated sample image)" and "Image HTH1 related to the first wide area type front effect" that have been displayed until then are respectively hidden. The execution of the "second wide-area front effect" is started in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(e)"). Then, when timing tC3 arrives during the period in which the second wide-area pre-effect is being executed, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed again (in the "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). (equivalent to the situation shown in FIG. 252(g)), timing tC4 is reached when the first reception permission state occurs in the displayed state (equivalent to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). In other words, the second simulated image (FIGS. 252(f) to (k)) is continuously displayed after the operation is accepted until at least it is no longer accepted. An operation is accepted while the image is being displayed, and a post-operation effect (here, a first post-operation effect) is started.

In other words, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance permission state, the pre-effects are executed twice, and in these pre-effects, ``before the operation acceptance is allowed, the pre-display is 252 (c) and (d)),” and “2nd sample images (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) that continue to be displayed even after the operation is accepted.” are displayed separately. With this configuration, it is not necessary to take into consideration the manner in which the display should be displayed (such as the result of performance judgment) when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and the display has a higher degree of freedom. Since it becomes possible to display a sample image (a sample image that is hidden before the operation is accepted (the first time)) based on the production design, the range of production can be expanded. In this sense, the "sample image that is hidden before the operation acceptance is allowed (first time)" cannot be displayed while the operation acceptance is allowed. It is desirable that the display be displayed in a mode (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232).

Here, the sample image displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed (second time) is similar to the sample image displayed while the narrow-area type pre-effect described above is being performed. Since the display state continues even after the state in which operation reception is permitted occurs, it will be displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250, , a special aspect of the integrated image IGd). On the other hand, the sample image displayed while the first wide-area pre-effect is being performed (first time) has at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232. It is desirable that the image be displayed as an image (here, image A2) with . For example, the shape of the operation means (operation receiver) that is the object of operation is deformed, such as giving rounded outlines of the image, or using curves less often and less straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying it as an image. In addition, in the above-mentioned narrow-area front presentation, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from that in the acceptance permission state does not appear.

Furthermore, if the target operating device is a specific operating device, the sample image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-effect is being performed is Regardless of whether the image is displayed in any of the modes, the sample image that is displayed while the first wide-area pre-effect is being performed (the first time) can be displayed in one mode (the same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide-area pre-presentation can be used exclusively for ``indicating which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity.'' According to such a first wide-area pre-presentation, it is possible to make the player recognize the operation object without reducing the interest in the game, and thus to make the player recognize the operation object. From then on, the transition is made to the second wide-area pre-production that hints at the level of anticipation.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to select the operating means (sword decoration) with higher expectations among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) for the first wide-area front effect. It can be said that it is more desirable that the process be executed only when the operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). In other words, in this case, either an acceptance permission state occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, or a reception permission state occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. However, for the first wide area type front presentation, there is no opportunity to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 of the sword decorations 5001. It will be executable only when it is granted. In this case, the first acceptance acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide-area front presentation is performed regardless of whether the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate or the sword ornament 5001 is given the opportunity to operate. It is considered possible. At this time, the second wide-area front effect is executed in the same manner when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. or may be executed in a different manner.

In addition, when the simulated image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type front effect is being performed is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG will be The image may be displayed as an image that does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the sample image (integrated sample image) will be different. In this case, the sample image may be displayed as an integrated sample image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. It may also be displayed as .

According to the production example described above, in the second acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 249, the sample image (integrated image IG) is not displayed in a special manner, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance acceptance sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 250, the sample image (integrated image IG) can be displayed in a special manner, and the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound are respectively It is possible to output. However, in the first reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 250, even if a mode different from the special mode (a mode with low expectations used in FIG. 249) is displayed as a sample image (integrated sample image IG), Regarding the acceptance permission sound, the processing described with reference to FIG. 250 will be performed, and it goes without saying that the first permission sound and the second permission sound can be respectively output as the reception permission sound.

When the output of the second permissible sound (message sound) is started, the image related to the wide area type front effect remains, and the form of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is difficult to visually recognize. The state in which only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output changes to the state in which the second permissible sound (message sound) is also output in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG). Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the sample image (integrated sample image IG) will be displayed in a special manner using the reception acceptance sound. In other words, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, the user can expect that a model image with a special aspect (integrated model image IGd) will be revealed, and such Inside, the replica image (integrated replica image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but it is not clear whether the integrated model image IG is displayed in a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). Even if the display area of the gauge image GG (the target area where the gauge image GG is displayed and the area that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the form of the simulated image.

Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 232, not only the simulated image but also the aspect of the peripheral decoration image is different between the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Furthermore, the operating means (performance buttons, etc.) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the simulated image, but the peripheral decorative member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decorative image SSG.

According to the production example described above, when in a predetermined gaming state, there is an acceptance acceptance state during suppression in which operation reception is allowed while a specific production sound is suppressed, and an acceptance permission state when the specific production sound is suppressed. There are multiple acceptance acceptance states during non-suppression in which operation acceptance is allowed when the operation is not suppressed, but in the first acceptance acceptance state among the acceptance acceptance states during suppression, the integrated image IG is in a special mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptance acceptance state among the acceptance acceptance states when not suppressed, the integrated image IG is not able to be displayed in a special mode (IGd) and is different from the special mode. It can now be displayed. In the second reception acceptance state, the integrated image IG is not displayed selectively from multiple modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectations except for the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). It may also be possible to display only the According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the effect is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (a third acceptance acceptance state) that is different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptance state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptance state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in any one of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) is used for display as described above. However, when generating such a third reception permission state (a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), as in the first reception permission state, prior to this, "BGM playback sound (specific type The production sound) is changed from a non-suppressed state to a suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display ( It is desirable to perform post-operation effects) and post-operation output sounds. In other words, when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or non-output state) when the reception permission state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, it becomes noticeable that the performance is inferior to when the "BGM playback sound" is output without suppression, and the game There are concerns about a decline in interest. In this regard, in the third reception acceptance state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is allowed to appear, and a post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special aspect does not appear in the integrated image IG, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

However, regardless of whether it is in the first reception permissible state or the third reception permissible state, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) will be triggered by the operation reception. It is preferable to change the display and output sound after an operation while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state) without restarting the output in a non-suppressed state.

Furthermore, even if the reception permission state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)" is suppressed (or non-output state), when the third reception permission state occurs, the Unlike the case of 1 acceptance permission state, it is possible to prevent the integrated image IG from being displayed in a special mode and to allow it to be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" is put into the suppressed state (or non-output state), which of the first reception permission state and the third reception permission state It becomes possible to add interest to what happens.

Furthermore, in the third reception acceptance state, the display area of the gauge image GG is assumed to be executed as a valid period in which it is not reduced. 248) may be executed as a valid period during which a model image (which may or may not be an integrated model image) is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is no longer displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types with different occurrence conditions are prepared as the acceptance acceptance state, but if an acceptance acceptance state different from the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. However, if this is a specific type of acceptance state, it is desirable that the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, in the acceptance permission state where the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), it is recommended to execute it in the automatic acceptance mode in order to prevent a decline in gaming interest when an operation is forgotten. desirable.

In the production example shown in Figure 250, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but the automatic button function is activated when the set time (valid period) ends or after the set time (valid period) ends. The button function may be activated to start executing "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period." In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIGS. 250(g) and (h).

Regarding the images affected by the disappearing effect shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, it is possible to set a predetermined transmittance on the image itself so that the image behind it can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. good.

According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled and the execution of the post-operation production is started, the sample image (integrated Both the form of the fake image IG) and the form of the gauge image GG are displayed in a highly visible state without being made difficult to see by the disappearing effect (FIG. 251(f), (See Figure 252(i)). As a result, you can enjoy the post-operation performance while knowing in which form the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 251, even if an operation is accepted in the second acceptance permission state and a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed, the background image is changed before and after the after-operation effect is started. This is maintained without any switching. On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 252, when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance permission state and a post-operation production (first post-operation production) is executed, before and after the post-operation production is started, I am trying to cause a change in the background image (after the operation, it becomes a space background).

According to this configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the user forgets to operate the function, the background image can be switched appropriately, which improves the performance. will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception acceptance state where the automatic reception function is not enabled, the background image does not change, so if you forget to perform an operation, the background image may not be switched or only the background image This makes it possible to avoid inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second reception acceptance state, after the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated), a large part of the display area overlaps with the image HSE related to the wide-area disappearing effect and becomes invisible. However, as mentioned above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide-area disappearance effect, you can check the image in that part and change the appearance after the operation. It becomes possible to recognize this, and it becomes possible to eliminate the disadvantages caused by the execution of a wide-area annihilation effect. In order to suitably obtain such effects, if the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated) in the second acceptance acceptance state, the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing after the operation is relatively high. To make background images different when a post-operation performance is performed when the performance is performed and when the post-operation performance is performed in a manner in which the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is relatively low. is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, when the post-operation effect is executed in a manner in which the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is relatively high, the background image itself is changed; When executed, the background image may be maintained without changing.

In the example of production described above, when giving an operation opportunity, there are two cases: a case where a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressing mode (second acceptance permission state), and a state where a specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode. There are cases where the game is in a non-output state (first reception permissible state), and depending on the type, the rate (expectation level) at which the post-operation performance is executed in a manner that only appears when winning a jackpot is different. As a result, it is possible to improve performance when an operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception acceptance state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of performance sound is outputted in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state, so that when a post-operation performance occurs, In response to this, the production sound will be designed to make it stand out. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the reception permissible sound that is output when the first reception permissible state occurs, if a production is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, it is assumed that the production has been accepted. Since the output state is terminated based on the result, it is possible to highlight the performance sound according to the post-operation performance without being disturbed by the acceptance permission sound.

There are multiple types of reception permission states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), but in any of these reception permission states, an operation reception is performed when the reception permission sound is in the output state. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound be terminated midway. On the other hand, there are multiple types of reception permissible states in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd), but these reception permissible states include: There is an acceptance acceptance state in which the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated midway when an operation acceptance is made, and an acceptance acceptance state in which the acceptance acceptance sound is not terminated in the middle if an operation acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both (such as the second acceptance permission state) (which can occur under different conditions).

As mentioned above, the acceptable sounds include sound effects and message sounds. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the production is accepted while the integrated image is in the output state even if it is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), whereas the sound effect is , When the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), when the production is accepted in the output state, it will be interrupted (first acceptance acceptance state), and when it will not be interrupted. It is desirable that there be a time (second reception permissible state). As the acceptance acceptance state in which a message sound is output, it is desirable to provide a plurality of types of acceptance acceptance states including a first acceptance acceptance state.

The wide-area front performance shown in FIGS. 250 and 252 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area front performance and the second wide-area front performance. In this regard, in both the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect, a simulated image (integrated simulated image) of the operating means (operation receiver) that is the operation target is displayed. However, the sample image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide-area pre-effect is the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed within the set time of the reception permission state (first reception permission state). It is different from the above image, and it does not gradually change to the image (integrated image IG).

In other words, the sample image A2 (FIG. 252(d)) displayed in the first wide-area type pre-effect is not displayed when the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first reception permission state. Displayed (invisible). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (FIG. 252(e)) in which no simulated image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as an invisible state), the simulated image within the execution period of the second wide-area pre-effect is displayed. , an image different from the sample image A2 displayed in the first wide-area pre-effect is displayed (FIG. 252(f)). This "sample image within the execution period of the second wide-area pre-production" is the exact replica image (integrated sample image IG) that is displayed within the set time of the reception permission state (first reception permission state). By displaying the image HSE related to the second wide-area front effect in a manner that straddles the occurrence of the acceptance permission state (the first reception permission state), the said sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed. It will now be possible to accept operations while the The simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is also displayed at the time when the operation is accepted and the execution of the post-operation effect is started (FIG. 252(i)). It is displayed for a period from before the reception permissible state occurs to after it ends.

Here, if the sample image A2 is displayed in the wide-area pre-production (first wide-area pre-production), the sample image A2 will soon be displayed on the operating means (operation receiver) being simulated (other production (without intervening) will be given the opportunity to operate. In other words, it would be sufficient to generate the reception permission state while maintaining the display state of the sample image A2, but in the above-mentioned production example, the sample image A2 is hidden and the "operation target" is set in the wide-area front production. After creating a state in which no simulated image is displayed, the simulated image of the operation means (operation receiver) is changed to an image that is depicted differently from the first time (A2). It is displayed as an integrated image (IG).

According to such a configuration, operation acceptance is permitted even when a simulated image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect to suggest that a highly anticipated acceptance acceptance state will occur. People will now be expected to prompt operations without delay. In other words, if a sample image is displayed for a long period of time as a pre-effect, and the acceptance permission state is generated while the sample image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted will suddenly arrive. This may result in frequent operation delays even though the pre-effect is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, before the first acceptance acceptance state occurs, a sample image having a depiction different from that displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is preceded. In addition to displaying the image, after a period of time during which no image is displayed, the image that will be displayed within the set time of the reception permission state is displayed. In other words, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the first reception permission state can only occur within the period after the sample image displayed within the set time of the reception permission state. Therefore, it is possible to display the simulated image for a long time as a pre-effect while making it difficult for operation delays to occur.

In order to suitably obtain such effects, it is more important to consider the "time required for the first wide-area pre-effect" or the "time for which the sample image A2 is displayed" to be set after the second wide-area pre-effect is executed. It is better to set the "time until the first reception permissible state occurs" and "time from when the sample image (integrated image IG) is displayed until the first reception permissible state occurs" to be shorter. The desirability is clear. The sample image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area pre-effect.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to use the "motion in the movable area" function as the operating means (operation receiver) for the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front presentation. ” and “behavior when operated” (see Figure 233, etc.), whereas the sample image A2 displayed in the first wide-area front presentation is displayed in this way. It is more desirable to display the information without dynamic display. Note that the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed in the second wide-area pre-presentation continues to be in its dynamic display state even after the first reception permission state occurs. In addition, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed in the narrow-area front presentation is also a form that expresses the ``movement in the movable area'' and ``behavior when operated'' as the operation means (operation receiver). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state continues even after the second acceptance permission state occurs.

The simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252(f) and the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252(g) are Although they are the same, the transmittance may be different.

As for the image KTH related to the narrow-area front effect shown in FIG. 251, it is more desirable to display it as an image of a size that can cover the entire sample image (integrated image IG) from the front side. . Then, by reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing its transmittance, the screen image (integrated image IG ) is desirably displayed in a manner that gradually becomes more exposed as time passes.

Among the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide-area front effect shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the sample image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the sample image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image of a size that can cover the entire simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the front side, like the image KTH related to the narrow-area front effect (see FIG. 252). e)) By reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is removed from the part where the image HTH2 was displayed. It is designed to gradually become exposed as time passes. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed to highlight the depiction of the sample image A2, there is a disadvantage of making the sample image difficult to view when giving operation opportunities (whichever operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether an opportunity to operate a means is given or not, resulting in a delay in operation.

The wide-area front performance is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area front performance and the second wide-area front performance, but the performance sound output in the wide-area front performance is combined into one sound data (1 It is desirable that the output be performed by playing back sound effects/music).

In addition, in the narrow area type front effect shown in FIG. 251, the background image that has been displayed before is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-effect, the background image that has been displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). With this configuration, the background change can be performed as part of the wide-area front effect, so it is possible to perform the background change as a part of the wide-area front effect, so it is possible to perform the background change as a part of the wide-area front effect. It will now be executed as a performance. Note that the background image that was displayed before the narrow area type front effect was performed (Figure 251 (a)) and the background image that was displayed before the wide area type front effect was performed (Figure 252 ( The background image may be different from a)).

In the second wide-area front effect shown in FIG. 252(f), the integrated model image is integrated with the "periphery decoration image decorated (depicted) with the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG". Although it was decided to display a simulated image as IG, in the first wide-area front presentation shown in FIG. 252(d), it was decided to display a simulated image without such a division image KG decorated (depicted). Thereby, in the first wide-area pre-performance, at least the player can enjoy the pre-performance without worrying about the remaining time. Note that the sample image in which the partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image in which the partition image KG to be decorated (delineated) in the integrated pattern image IG is not displayed, and at least a part of the integrated pattern image IG. In addition to a mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from that of the integrated model image IG may be adopted.

As mentioned above, "a reception acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and is executed in an automatic reception mode" A plurality of "acceptance acceptance states" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and a "first acceptance acceptance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states. However, these reception permission states include the first wide-area front presentation in which the sample image is displayed and then hidden (Fig. 252(c) to (e)), and the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In addition to "the first reception acceptance state in which the second wide-area pre-production (FIGS. 252(e) to (g)) in which a sample image is displayed is performed," there is also a state in which a sample image is displayed and then hidden. Specific reception permission in which the first wide-area pre-effect is not performed and the second wide-area pre-effect (FIGS. 252(e) to (g)) is performed, in which a sample image is displayed over the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. It is desirable to include the state. In other words, in this case, in the first reception permissible state, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that only appears when a jackpot is achieved is higher than in the specific reception permissible state, so that the timing when the operation reception is permissible is higher. It becomes possible to increase the interest in the game from the time when the timing (the timing at which the first wide area type front performance appears) arrives significantly earlier. In this case, the content of the second wide-area pre-performance that is performed when the first reception permissible state occurs and the second wide-area pre-performance that is performed when the specific reception permissible state occurs does not necessarily have to be the same; It may also be executed as different performance contents (images). Moreover, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state.

As mentioned above, the "acceptance acceptance state in which operation acceptance is allowed while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressing mode and is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode" is defined by the occurrence conditions (fluctuations). A plurality of different acceptance states (patterns, etc.) are prepared, and a "second acceptance acceptance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states.

The wide-area pre-production that is performed when the first reception is permitted is performed under the condition that "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM playback)" is executed for a longer period of time than the narrow-area pre-production (second reception permissible state) which is executed while output is not suppressed, so it is preferable to maintain the game interest. You will be able to do it. In particular, by making only the first wide-area pre-presentation of the wide-area pre-presentation run for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-presentation, it is possible to start playing games well before the reception acceptance state occurs. You will be able to increase your The timing at which the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or non-output may be made to arrive while the first wide-area pre-production is being executed, or may occur while the first wide-area pre-production is being executed. It may be arranged to arrive before the execution of the performance is started.

According to the example of effect described above, when the wide-area front effect (FIG. 252) is performed when the first reception permissible state occurs, a change in effect including the background image is caused, whereas when the second reception permissible state occurs, When the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 251) is performed, the background image is not changed and the effect is changed while maintaining this image. Furthermore, in the first reception acceptance state that occurs while such a wide-area pre-production is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether the operation is performed or not. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state that occurs while the narrow-area pre-effect is being performed, the background image is not changed by the post-operation effect and the effect is maintained while the effect progresses. There is. According to such a configuration, in the first reception acceptance state, the background image is changed twice before and after this occurs, so the effect is different compared to the second reception acceptance state. You will be able to significantly improve your performance, and you will be able to encourage more concentration on operations-related performances.

In the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above production example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 252(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may be set to come after the timing at which the wide-area disappearing effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252(i), the post-operation effect (background preview by the princess character) starts to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide-area disappearing effect first makes the background image that was displayed when the reception is allowed to be made difficult to see or becomes invisible (Fig. 252(j)). (in the situation shown in FIG. 252(k), the background image remains unchanged), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (in the situation shown in FIG. 252(k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252(l)). Other background images may be displayed in a manner that is gradually revealed while the wide-area vanishing effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area vanishing effect ends. You can.

In the example shown in Fig. 252, as the post-operation effect, we decided to first start executing a display change on the liquid crystal display (background preview by the princess character), but instead of this, light emission from the lamp and output sound after the operation were started. The execution may be started first as a post-operation effect, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As mentioned above, there are multiple reception permissible states with different occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.) in which the automatic reception mode is executed and the wide-area extinction effect is executed, and one of these reception permissible states is One of these is a "first reception permission state." However, in addition to the ``first reception permission state'', these reception permission states include ``a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) that is the same as the first reception permission state, but a wide-area disappearing effect. It is desirable to include a special reception permission state in which images are executed as different images (the timing of display may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if the same post-operation performance is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so it is possible to improve the performance, and it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. become. The special reception permission state may be the above-mentioned specific reception permission state. The specific reception permission state and the special reception permission state are executed in the same manner as the first reception permission state with regard to aspects such as the display timing of the sample image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, and the processing related to the disappearance effect. .

As mentioned above, there are multiple acceptance acceptance states with different occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.) that are executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and a narrow-area extinction effect is executed, and these acceptance acceptance states. A "second reception acceptance state" is prepared as one of the states. However, in addition to the "second reception permission state", these reception permission states include "post-operation effects (third post-operation effect) of types different from the second reception permission state (for example, conversation previews and movable body movements, etc.)". ), but it is desirable that the narrow-area vanishing effect include a special reception permission state in which it is executed as the same image (the timing of display may also be the same). In other words, in this case, even if a different post-operation effect is performed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to see that the operation has been accepted regardless of the type of post-operation effect. be able to recognize it. The special reception permission state is executed in the same manner as the second reception permission state with respect to aspects such as the display timing of the sample image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, and the processing related to the disappearance effect.

In the case of a narrow-area disappearance effect, even when the sample image (integrated image IG) is hidden after the post-operation effect is started, the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is hidden. The display state is maintained without being displayed (see FIG. 251(i)). In this respect, the time from when the operation is accepted (when the execution of the post-operation effect starts) until the sample image (integrated image IG) is hidden is longer ) is desirably set so that the time from when the image KSE related to the narrow-range extinction effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, even after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the display state of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) can be maintained so that its state can be confirmed, but the post-operation effect is The reason why it is not clearly revealed is not due to the ``simulated image whose display state is maintained'', but appears to be due to the effect of the ``image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearing effect''. As a result, a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-area vanishing effect is performed not by a fade-out that ends relatively quickly, but by a dynamic display of an image other than the simulated image. Regarding the "dynamic display with another image" as such a narrow-area disappearance effect, we have prepared multiple types with different expectations, and it appears selectively depending on the type of acceptance state with different occurrence conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

According to the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-described production example, it is possible to expect a function that indicates that the first reception permission state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state, operations are accepted only by operations by the player and post-operation effects are not executed, so it is easy to recognize that post-operation effects are executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous to perform the execution using a narrow-area disappearance effect in which the image related to the disappearance effect is small, in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed with good visibility. According to this configuration, in the case of a wide-area vanishing effect, it is required to change the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow-area vanishing effect, it is necessary to change the background image and maintain its visibility. It is now possible to ensure visibility simply by performing post-operation effects while maintaining the .

As mentioned above, in the second reception acceptance state, there are a plurality of modes (the first mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the performance judgment corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment. , including the second mode), the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed. In this regard, when the first mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears as a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) and when the second mode (a mode with a relatively low proportion) appears, In both cases, the narrow-area extinction effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first reception acceptance state, there are a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the production judgment corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment. , including the fourth mode), the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed. In this regard, when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears as the post-operation effect (the first post-operation effect) and when the fourth mode (a mode with a relatively low proportion) appears, When the wide-area disappearing effect is executed in mutually different modes (images), or when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively high rate mode) appears. It is desirable that a narrow-range extinction effect be executed when a mode with a low ratio) appears. The narrow-area extinction effect at this time may be the same as the narrow-area extinction effect performed in response to the second acceptance permission state, or may be different.

According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance acceptance state where there is a possibility that a wide-area extinction effect may occur, out of the first acceptance acceptance state and the second acceptance acceptance state, the extinction effect itself has a high expectation level. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of the post-operation performance being lowered by the wide-area disappearance effect. In addition, not only the first acceptance acceptance state and the second acceptance acceptance state, but also the fourth acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, which will be described later, apply to both the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was unsuccessful and the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was won. This is because the first fluctuation pattern and second fluctuation pattern described above, as well as the fourth fluctuation pattern and fifth fluctuation pattern described later, are "fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot and fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (at the time of winning)". Needless to say, these are prepared in pairs.

Further, the second acceptance permission state may be made possible to occur not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance permission state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance permission state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) regarding the sample image (integrated sample image IG) ends within the period when the disappearing effect image is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it becomes hidden) may be different between the first permissible acceptance state and the second permissible acceptance state.

If an operation is accepted in the "situation where the image KTH related to narrow-area front effect is displayed" as shown in FIG. 251(d), the image KTH will not be hidden using this as an opportunity. , it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image KTH continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251(f). After this, when the narrow-area type disappearance effect starts to be executed, the "image KSE related to the narrow-area type disappearance effect" makes the "image KTH related to the narrow-area type front effect" difficult to see or becomes invisible. It is desirable to advance the production so that it is possible to do so.

Furthermore, even if an operation is accepted in the "situation where the image HTH2 related to the wide-area front effect is displayed" as shown in FIG. 252(g), this should not be used as an opportunity to hide the image HTH2. First, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image HTH2 continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252(i). After that, when the wide-area extinction effect starts to be executed, the "image HSE for the wide-area disappearance effect" makes the "image HTH2 for the wide-area front effect" difficult to see or becomes invisible. It is desirable to advance the performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, if the operation is allowed to be accepted while the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is not output, then the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is allowed to be accepted. "BGM playback)" does not necessarily have to be re-outputted until the symbol is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, which of the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" that has already been turned off and the "production sound related to the post-operation production" that starts outputting when the operation is accepted is determined. It is also possible to start outputting a new special effect sound that is different from the original sound. The output of the special effect sound is not started when an operation is accepted, but is started when a predetermined timing within the variation pattern arrives.

Images related to wide-area pre-effects and images related to narrow-area pre-effects are displayed until the set time for the reception permission state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). Good too. Furthermore, the output state of the first permissible sound may also be maintained until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the simulated image of the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide-area front display and the narrow-area front display, but in the wide-area front display (the first wide-area front display) , the image data is displayed in a different form (image data) from the form (image data) that appears during the period in which operation reception is permitted (first acceptance permission state). As a result, in the wide-area pre-presentation (first wide-area pre-presentation), even if a sample image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, it will be recognized that the operation reception is permitted. It is now possible to appeal to the fact that an operation reception performance (reception acceptance state) will occur while making it difficult for misrecognition to occur, and this makes it possible to perform large-scale preliminary performances that take a relatively long time. become. In addition, in the second wide-area type front presentation and narrow-area type front presentation, the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed as it appears (image data) during the period in which operation reception is permitted (acceptance permission state). As the previous effect is hidden (the display area is reduced), this becomes gradually exposed. That is, in this case, the sample image displayed on the specific layer when the reception permission state occurs will continue to be displayed in that state from before the reception permission state occurs to after the reception permission state occurs. This also applies to the fourth acceptance permission state, which will be described later.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the production example shown in FIG. Yes, and at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp lighting, etc.) is displayed without hiding the simulated image (gauge image) (furthermore, dynamic display). (See Figure 251(f), Figure 252(i), etc.). After that, execution of the extinction effect (narrow-area extinction effect or wide-area extinction effect) is started (see FIG. 251(g), FIG. 252(j), etc.). However, in a wide-area disappearance effect that is executed over a relatively large area, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the changes (post-operation effect) that have once appeared clearly, and there is a concern that the game's interest will be reduced. Therefore, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, prior to the execution of the narrow-area disappearance effect, changes in response to the operation reception (changes caused by post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp lighting) (at least one of the above) is started to be executed, and at this point, the sample image (gauge image) is not hidden and is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearing effect, but is displayed. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, prior to the execution of the wide-area disappearance effect, changes are made in response to the operation reception (such as display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) at least one of the resulting changes) may not be initiated. In other words, in this case, at the time when the change corresponding to the reception of the operation (the post-operation effect, which is at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, the sample image (gauge image) is not hidden but is displayed, but the wide-area disappearing effect makes it difficult to see (FIG. 252(j)).

In other words, when a narrow-range extinction effect is executed, at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, the operation The display state of the sample image (gauge image) will be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception was made. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect starts to be executed, the simulated image (gauge image) will not be made difficult to see due to the narrow-area disappearing effect. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, the image shown in FIG. 250(j) may appear after passing through FIG. 250(i), or the effect after the operation may be 250(j) may appear at the time when execution is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the reception permission state executed in the "suppression operation reception performance" in which a specific type of performance sound can be suppressed is a state where the degree of suppression is relatively high or there is no output. In addition to the first reception acceptance state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low, the "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 249)" As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance permission state executed in ")" are prepared. In this case, the specific type of performance sound to be suppressed may be a different performance sound, for example, a performance sound of BGM playback, etc., which is output as a performance sound that has the same function. Bye.

According to such a configuration, when the set time (validity period) for which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to give a performance effect as to how much the performance sound of the specific type is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the expectation level (jackpot It is desirable that the proportions at which the patterns appear are different. Here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs, the percentage (expectation level) of "post-operation performance according to operation reception" being executed in a mode that only appears when winning the jackpot is , when the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" occurs, the "post-operation performance according to the operation reception" is executed in a mode that only appears when winning a jackpot, which is lower than the rate (expectation level). ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)", there are productions according to high expectation fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background changes, etc.), and performances that do not even form a reach state (or reach The state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach).In contrast, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" is possible. '' may not occur in the low expected performance pattern, but may occur as a performance in accordance with the high expected variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the expected jackpot when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs. I can say that.

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special performance state" that can be transitioned to based on the fulfillment of special performance conditions, and in this "special performance state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (sample image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is displayed. ) is suppressed, it is desirable to execute (start) a post-operation effect in response to the operation reception. According to such a "special performance state", each time the set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, how much a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. (Which of multiple modes including a weak suppression mode or a strong suppression mode will appear) can now be provided, and apart from the expectation level suggested by the post-operation presentation, such performance Since the degree of expectation is also indicated by the degree of suppression (to what extent it is suppressed), it is expected that interest in the game will be further improved when the performance reception is permitted. In this case, the above-mentioned second reception permission state does not occur in the "special performance state", but can occur in a performance state different from this (normal performance state).

In addition, within the symbol variation, "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" and "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" are sequentially executable in a variation pattern (for example, a high expectation variation pattern). Among them, a performance corresponding to a specific variation pattern) may be prepared. In other words, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs on the side with relatively low expectations, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" on the side with relatively high expectations occurs. )", it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of a specific type of performance sound is small (weak suppression mode). It becomes like this.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in gaming interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" is as follows:
・If a specific variation pattern is selected among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern judgment, the performance judgment will be made. No matter which result is obtained (e.g. advance notice judgment), it will occur when the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. Regarding “Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the production judgment (e.g. preview judgment), the effect will not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in performance determination (such as advance notice determination), this occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs in the performance according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs in the performance according to the specific fluctuation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, the percentage of post-operation performances that are executed in a highly anticipated manner when the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" (a mode that only appears when a jackpot is achieved) It is desirable to have a high rate of execution.

In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" always occurs in the performance according to a specific variation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" always occurs. When this does not necessarily occur, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs, a highly anticipated post-operation performance is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" becomes possible to attract attention. )" occurs, it is possible to improve the game's interest in the game.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)"; for example, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" may occur within the first fluctuation pattern, and "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissive state)" may occur within the fourth fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the fourth reception permission state occurs.

Now, for example, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the "special performance state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will: First, performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the process as shown in FIG. 253(b). The above-mentioned fourth reception acceptance state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation performance is permitted when timing tD3, which is a fourth predetermined time period after the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, has arrived. to occur. However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance permission state (validity period),
・Set the set time (valid period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted, a conditional suppression reception performance (see figure 253(a), (b))" and - If no operation is detected within the set time (timings tD3 to tD4) in which operation acceptance is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance permission state “Non-automatic reception mode (see Figure 253(h))” that does not generate post-effect (fourth post-operation effect)
It is made to occur as a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. Note that as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, , a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "10") having a lower degree of suppression than a volume value (audible volume of "0") can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (fourth reception permission state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, "specific type of performance sound (BGM Since there is no transition to the state in which the playback sound is output in a suppressed mode, it appears that the non-suppressed reception performance (first reception permissible state) shown in FIG. 249 is occurring. You will be able to do this. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the system, the player realizes for the first time that it is not a "suppression acceptance performance" because it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode." Since the game becomes easier to play, it becomes possible to improve the game's interest through surprise effects.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects, the fourth variation that allows "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 253)" to occur depending on the result of the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) As for the pattern, it is set so that it can only be selected when it is in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone), and when it is in the special performance state, it is set to be selectable only when it is in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone, etc.). 249)" which can be generated depending on the result of production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.). The rate at which jackpot symbols appear when symbol variation is stopped (expectation level ) is desirable. According to this configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" appears, the level of expectation will be higher than when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 249)" appears. This, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance element, can improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" can occur in both the "normal performance state" and the "special performance state". In the "normal performance state", the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 249 )" and "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Fig. 250)" are made to occur sequentially, and in the "special performance state", one fluctuation pattern (the pair of "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/Non-automatic reception effect (Figure 253)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode)/Automatic reception effect (Figure 250)" are performed in sequence according to the variation pattern of It is desirable to allow this to occur.

Moreover, in the case of "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without any operation being accepted, "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly suppressed manner. In other words, in this case, whether "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" or "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" was occurring, and furthermore, what is the difference between "normal performance state" and "special performance state"? Since it is difficult to recognize which situation the situation is in, and the subsequent production progresses, expectations are relatively low. Even if the "operation acceptance effect (valid period)" occurs, it becomes possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are two cases in which "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)" occurs and a case in which "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)" occurs. ” occurs, the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time. (Fig. 253)" or "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" is made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)", as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs,
a. Prior to the acceptance of operation, a narrow-area front performance is performed at timing tD1;
b. When timing tD2 arrives, which is a little before the set time, the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The second permissible sound (e.g., message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (e.g., sound effect) is output.
d. When timing tD2 arrives, which is a little before the set time occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) that simulates the operation means to be operated in the operation reception effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time until the set time has elapsed.
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptance sound that is being output will not be terminated prematurely.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the sample image (integrated sample image) and the gauge image are not hidden, but continue to be displayed g. A narrow-area vanishing effect is executed while a sample image (integrated sample image) and a gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed, but the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed in a different manner (image) than when the operation is accepted, etc. Each configuration is also adopted, and this also results in either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 253)" or "non-suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect (Figure 249)" I try to make it difficult to recognize what is happening. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode." Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has transitioned to "a state in which a performance is performed", it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained each time a production is accepted.

Therefore, as a display method for a sample image, a gauge image, a narrow area type front effect, and a narrow area type disappearing effect, as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs, for example, as shown in Fig. 251. It is desirable to adopt the method shown above, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the production example shown in FIG. 249 regarding the timing at which these images are hidden. However, the same aspect does not necessarily need to be adopted.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 253)", if an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. As the corresponding post-operation performance, at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are generated. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tD4. In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be configured to maintain its output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing at which the operation is accepted. However, even if the production is accepted at any timing, if the timing tD4 has not yet passed, both the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (production sound) will not be output. It is required that the settings be made to maintain the state.

In addition, the reception permissible sound, operation-related display, pre-effect, extinction effect, and post-operation effect that appear in the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 253)" are different from the effect examples shown in Figures 249 and 251. It is possible to adopt examples and modifications as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same method.

In addition, in this production example, the length of time (a certain predetermined period of time) in which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weak suppression mode is determined by "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception production (the first one)". Even if the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 of the set time (valid period) of ``4 acceptance permissible state)'', the timing at which the weak suppression mode ends is the same as the end timing of the production sound applied to the post-operation production. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode regarding the "BGM playback sound" ends may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the performance sound of the post-operation performance ends. With either of these configurations, it becomes possible to highlight the post-operation performance when the performance is accepted.

By the way, when an operation reception performance that can suppress a specific type of performance sound (for example, the performance sound of BGM playback) occurs, the degree of suppression is either high (strong suppression mode or first reception permission state of no output) or low ( As mentioned above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the fourth reception acceptance state is a weak suppression mode or not. However, when a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode, no output, or weak suppression mode). However, in reality, it is difficult to estimate without comparison whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not made to have such a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, which creates a sense of tension when the operation reception performance occurs. This makes it possible to maintain a favorable level of performance and attract players to the performance.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is a strong or weak suppression mode, there is a fear that the game's interest will be diminished. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance elements useful for guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode are set within the period from the start of the operation reception performance to the end. The following information will be prepared in a chronologically distributed manner.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound that is output when the fourth reception permissible state occurs, even if the performance is accepted while in the output state, the output is not output midway. The first permissible sound is output for a predetermined period of time without ending, whereas the first permissible sound that is output when the first permissible state occurs is accepted for production while in the output state. Then, based on the production reception, the output is ended midway. In such a configuration, since the first allowable sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, it is difficult to play the game without being able to guess. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance permissible state occurs, the second permissible sound is also output in addition to the first permissible sound. By checking whether or not sound is output, it is also possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily need to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first and fourth reception permissible states.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (validity period) in which presentation reception is permitted also includes special modes in the first reception permission state. 232(a) to (d)), while in the fourth acceptance state, any of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) excluding the special mode is displayed. Since the display is displayed as follows, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound and the operation-related display is finished. Also, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In other words, in the post-operation performance (fourth post-operation performance) that corresponds to the fourth reception permission state, both the ``liquid crystal display performance'' and the ``performance sound performance'' are ``constant from the time the performance reception is received.'' On the other hand, in the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) according to the first reception permission state, the "performance with sound production" is "a performance that takes place for a certain period of time from the time the performance reception is received". However, the "performance using liquid crystal display" is "something that ends when a predetermined timing arrives." In other words, in this case, in the post-operation performance according to the first reception permission state, the time from the end of the "direction using the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "direction using the sound performance" depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, by checking such deviation, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the execution mode of the pre-production and disappearance effects for the acceptance permission state. It is now possible to do this as well. In other words, in the pre-effect and disappearance effect according to the fourth reception permission state, the image related to the pre-effect or the image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-effect and disappearance effect according to the first acceptance state, the image related to the pre-effect or the image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. We are planning to do so as well. By confirming such a mode, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are prepared in a chronologically scattered manner like this, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong or weak suppression mode. If it is not possible to guess, the player's interest in the game may eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the performance sound of BGM playback is adjusted based on the reception of the performance within the set time (validity period). Set to weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or no output), the effect sound of BGM playback is set to strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. A set time (validity period) occurs during the mode, and the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing at which a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound of BGM playback) is suppressed is determined between the fourth reception permission state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception permission state (strong suppression mode). Since the values become different, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the first acceptance acceptance state (strong suppression mode or no output), operation detection is not possible within the set time (validity period). If there is no post-operation effect, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253(h)). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (validity period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the reception of an operation for a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is also performed. Although there is a cost of not being able to confirm the performance after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode was a weak suppression mode rather than a strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the first reception acceptance state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process for setting the "BGM playback production sound" to the strong suppression mode is set to the end timing of the post-operation production. I try to set the timing to be the same as or earlier than that. Therefore, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback production sound" to the weak suppression mode is completed may be set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation production. For example, by checking the timing at which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the fourth reception acceptance state according to the above production example, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) is not affected regardless of when the production reception is made within the set time (validity period). The length of the period in which the post-display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are performed in parallel remains unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception permission state, the display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on when the effect is accepted within the set time (validity period). , the length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel varies.

According to such a configuration, the performance depends on "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

In addition, the weak suppression mode in which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is output with a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the fourth reception permission state does not occur). You can. That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM playback" is put into the weak suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth acceptance permission state, within the production according to the first variation pattern, the rate at which the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol variation is stopped (the By increasing the rate at which the 1 reception permissible state is further executed, it is possible to further improve performance through the suppression of "performance sound of BGM playback."

Further, the strong suppression mode for "BGM playback effect sound" may also be configured to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first acceptance permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is put into the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth reception permission state occurs, the "production sound of BGM playback" is suppressed in a mode (weak) based on the operation reception being made within the set time (valid period). suppression mode). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception permission state occurs, the "effect sound of BGM playback" will be suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the first reception permission state occurs. mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (validity period) during which presentation reception is permitted while in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (e.g., preview judgment), the "BGM playback performance sound" may be suppressed (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives, or Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may not be applied, the range of effects can be expanded. In the fourth reception permission state, the timing at which the "production sound of BGM playback" returns from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation production ends, or comes later. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Therefore, the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of performance sound" inaudible (output with silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel assignment)). good.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is provided in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth reception permissible state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception permissible state", as described above, the result of the preview performance judgment is Based on this, there are two types: ``a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)'' and a ``case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)''. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that when the production is accepted in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" The content after the corresponding operation is the same.

That is, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated are:
- A first operation mode in which the operation receiver (the part that the player touches when operating) does not move when the set time (validity period) occurs, and - The operation receiver is moved by driving force when the set time (validity period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be provided in any of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode for moving to a specific position. Note that here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. This assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is "something that can provide the player with an opportunity to operate the sword while being moved to a specific position." However, one operation means (one operation receiver) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be provided using either of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first reception acceptance state, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 may always be given.

According to the above-mentioned production example, the reception permission state (suppression When the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232(d)) in the reception presentation), the reception permitting state is the "first reception permitting state (strong suppression mode)". This means that when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)), the reception acceptance state is "first reception acceptance state". (strong suppression mode or non-output mode)" or "fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode)."

In other words, in this case, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232(d)), if the operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is in the middle of being output, this will be terminated prematurely. (first reception permissible state). On the other hand, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is in the middle of being output, this may be terminated prematurely. There may be cases where the process is not terminated midway (first reception-allowed state, fourth reception-allowed state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the game interest when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)).

Further, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232(d)), the reception acceptance state is executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception acceptance state). On the other hand, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the case in which it is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. This results in the following (first acceptance-permitting state, fourth acceptance-permitting state). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)).

In this regard, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)), the display differs between when the first reception permissible state occurs and when the fourth reception permissible state occurs. It is also possible to vary the magnitude of the difference. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway or whether it is executed in an automatic acceptance mode or a non-automatic acceptance mode.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned production example, by checking whether the pre-production is performed as a "wide-area pre-production" or a "narrow-area pre-production", it is possible to select a specific type of production sound (BGM playback). When a sound (sound) is suppressed, it becomes easier to confirm whether it is a "weak suppression mode" or a "strong suppression mode or no output". After that, when the operation is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is checked whether the sound is terminated prematurely, and whether the mode is "weak suppression mode (not terminated prematurely)" or "strong suppression mode" is confirmed. It becomes possible to reconfirm whether the output mode or non-output (terminated midway) is being performed while the post-operation performance is being performed.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is set to the strong suppression mode or non-output, and the wide-area type When the weak suppression mode is adopted while the production is executed, the narrow-range pre-production is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance when the narrow-area type front performance is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a mode that only appears when a jackpot is executed as a post-operation effect is executed at a higher rate in the first acceptance acceptance state than in the second acceptance acceptance state (the expectation level is As mentioned above, This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the first reception permission state (special reception permission state) occurs and the second reception permission state (predetermined reception permission state) occurs before the operation is accepted. Since different production contents (reception permissible sound, simulated image, pre-production, etc.) appear depending on when the second reception permissible state occurs (or , occurrence)), there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptance acceptance states, a fifth acceptance acceptance state (specific The fifth reception permissible state is made difficult to distinguish from the second reception permissible state until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing a performance progress that reminds the user of the first reception acceptance state, it is made difficult for the player to lose interest in the game, at least until the operation is accepted. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, the first acceptance acceptance state is required to be maintained from then on until the symbol is stopped, than when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is desirable to set the settings so that the occurrence rate is high. Further, it is desirable to set the rate at which the jackpot symbols are stopped to be different between when the second reception permissible state occurs and when the fifth reception permissible state occurs. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state, after an operation is accepted in the fifth reception permissible state, the performance progresses so that it is reminiscent of the first reception permissible state. As a method to do this, for example, first, the same mode of reception permission sound is output when the second reception permission state occurs and when the fifth reception permission state occurs, but the same mode is output when the first reception permission state occurs. In this case, in a manner that cannot be outputted as an acceptable sound in either the second acceptable state or the fifth acceptable state (for example, in addition to different types of sounds as the first acceptable sound, in addition to changing the type of sound as the first acceptable sound, In addition, the mode of output, etc.) will be output. Then, when an operation is accepted in the second acceptance permission state, a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time the operation was accepted. In contrast, in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, when an operation is accepted, (all) of the sounds that were in the output state at the time the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. state or non-output state, and a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance or fifth post-operation performance) is executed while in the state. In this regard, if the specific performance movable body is used as a target for causing a change in both the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to distinguish between the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state. Although this is made difficult, after an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance acceptance state, it is possible to realize a progress of performance reminiscent of the first acceptance acceptance state. This will make people more aware of the possibility that the first reception permissible state has occurred (the possibility that they may have misheard the reception permissible sound), and is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. .

That is, in this case, in the first acceptance permission state, at least a performance using the specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), but such a performance may include, for example, Performing a movable performance that moves the specific performance movable body to the front side of the display area of the performance display device 1600 (such as the performance shown in FIGS. 162 (C), (D), and FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3)). is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth reception permission state, at least a performance using the specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), but as the performance, the first operation It is desirable that the content of the performance is significantly different from that of the post-effect. In other words, the fifth reception permissible state simply means that even if a situation occurs where the pre-production or reception permissible sound suggests the possibility of the occurrence of the second reception permissible state with low expectations, at least the operation reception is It is prepared for the purpose of "maintaining the interest in the game until the performance is completed", and it may give the erroneous impression that the first reception permissible state has occurred at the time the post-operation performance is executed. If you do this, you will inevitably lose interest in the game when you realize the misrecognition.

Therefore, it is desirable for such a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) to be performed with a tendency that is more suppressed than in the case of the first post-operation performance.For example, when an operation is accepted, A performance change in which a specific performance movable object that was in a light emitting state at the time of the change is not operated (does not generate driving force), but its light emitting range is reduced or it is in a non-light emitting state. It is possible to perform this as a performance that causes Note that in the second post-operation performance, performance changes that tend to be suppressed, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific performance movable body or setting it in a non-emission state, do not occur. In this case, the specific movable decoration will have a predetermined light emitting section.

According to such a configuration, by causing a performance change using the specific performance movable body, the first reception permissible state (the performance after the first operation) is evoked, and thereby the second reception permissible state (the second While trying to make them aware that it is not a post-operation performance), as the content of the suppressed performance is gradually revealed, they calmly judge that it is not in the first acceptance permissible state (post-operation performance). It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, in order to make the fifth post-operation performance more suitably executed as a performance with a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation performance, in the first post-operation performance, it is necessary to When the operation is accepted, the operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) is made to emit light (or the light emission changes), and the drive means (such as a motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is activated. ) to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, the user operates the operation means (operation receiver such as a performance button) that is the target of operation. When the reception is received, the light is turned off (the light may be turned off gradually), and the drive means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means is not driven and a predetermined movement is performed. It is desirable to avoid causing (vibration, etc.). In this way, while performing post-operation effects (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative object in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, By making a mode in which the contents of the presentation after the first operation and the presentation after the fifth operation appear completely opposite, the above-mentioned effects can be suitably produced.

FIG. 254 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. The variation pattern will be described as the fifth variation pattern, but as described above, it may be the first variation pattern.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will , First, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(b), when the timing tE3, at which the fifth predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, the fifth operation is performed. The fifth reception permission state (valid period) is generated in which operation reception regarding post-performance is permitted. However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance permission state (validity period),
・“Non-suppression reception permission state” in which operation reception is permitted while the “BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)” according to the fifth variation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 254(a) and (b)), and - no operation is detected on the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) during which operation reception is permitted. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation performance is started (see FIG. 254(i)).
It is made to occur as a "non-suppressed automatic reception effect" executed by. Timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, but may arrive when or after the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second reception permission state has occurred until the execution of the post-operation performance is started, whereas the automatic reception mode causes the execution of the post-operation performance to start. If this is done, the progress of the performance will be realized as if it were reminiscent of the first reception permission state, so it will be possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game until the performance starts after the operation. .

Also, in the fifth reception permission state, as in the second reception permission state, as shown in FIGS. 254(b), (e), and (j), the set time (timings tE3 to tE4 ) when the timing tE2 arrives, which is a little before the occurrence of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is outputted, and its output state is changed over the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I'm trying to maintain it. The length of time from when the output of the first permissible sound is started until the operation reception is permitted is also the same. Furthermore, not only the sound itself output as the first permissible sound is the same, but also the fact that the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output is similar to the second reception permissible state. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the acceptance acceptance sound appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so it is possible to suitably maintain gaming interest. Be expected.

However, as mentioned above, in the second reception permissible state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (Fig. 249(e)) when the "reception permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in the output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred. When an acceptance is made, the set time itself ends, but the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not ended prematurely, and the timing at which it finishes outputting as the first permissible sound (when no operation is performed) is set. The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249(e)) as when If an operation is accepted at timing tE3a (FIG. 254(e)) when the "acceptable sound (acceptable sound)" is in the output state, not only the set time itself is terminated, but also the "acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is output. In other words, regarding the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)", this behavior (abrupt termination) occurs when an operation is accepted in the first reception permissible state. Therefore, even though the fifth reception permissible state is occurring, the production progresses as if reminiscent of the first reception permissible state (Fig. 250(e)). It is expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance permission state (timing tE3a in the figure), the production display device A display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation in 1600 (first effect member) and an output sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (see FIG. 254(d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) remains in the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) remains in the execution state for a predetermined time. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, although not shown, in this production example, there is a post-operation production (fifth post-operation production) corresponding to the fifth acceptance permission state, and a post-operation production (first post-operation production) corresponding to the first reception permission state. In both cases (post-operation performance), at least a ``performance using a specific performance movable body'' is executed. The contents of each of the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the first reception permissible state and the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception permissible state are as described above. It is. For example, as the first post-operation effect, a movable effect that moves the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 162 (C), (D), FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3) )). In addition, as the fifth post-operation effect, a change in effect occurs, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body that was in a light emitting state at the time the operation was accepted, or changing it to a non-light emitting state. It can be performed as a performance.

According to such a configuration, by causing a performance change using the specific performance movable body, the first reception permissible state (the performance after the first operation) is evoked, and thereby the second reception permissible state (the second While trying to make them aware that it is not a post-operation performance), as the content of the suppressed performance is gradually revealed, they calmly judge that it is not in the first acceptance permissible state (post-operation performance). It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Also, in the presentation example (fifth acceptance permission state) shown in FIG. 254, similar to the presentation example (second reception permission state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operating means to be operated, and also displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time ends. are carried out respectively. Further, the display mode of these sample images and gauge images is the same as that in the second acceptance permission state, for example, they are displayed as an integrated sample image IG. Similarly, the special aspect shown in FIG. 232(d) is not displayed as the integrated image IG. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the sample image and the gauge image appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so that the interest in the game is suitably maintained. It is expected.

In this example as well, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts, but this is not a limitation; one of the two may start earlier. It is also possible to do so. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the acceptance acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tE3. However, even when adopting these different examples or the other different examples mentioned above, the configuration until the operation is accepted must be the same between the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state. is desirable.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254(c) to 254(f), when the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image) is being displayed. is assumed. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs the fifth post-operation effects (display change on the effect display device 1600, effect sound change on the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the performance after the fifth operation is started, the integrated pattern image (simulation image, gauge image) is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tE3a), no change is caused in the integrated image (specific layer), and after a short period of time (at a predetermined time) Until timing tE3b arrives when the time period) has elapsed, the "display of the integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image)" continues in the same manner as when operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image is also being reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) in the display state is made difficult to see or cannot be seen. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. maintain the condition. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) (image), no change is caused by this, and the display area of the gauge image continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a layer earlier than that, the model image and the gauge image become difficult to view or become invisible.

In other words, in this case, even though the image with the disappearing effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making the sample image and the gauge image (integrated sample image) difficult to see or invisible, The sample image and gauge image (integrated sample image) displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) remain as they were when operation reception was permitted. The display will be maintained and no changes will occur. Furthermore, the display of the gauge image whose display area continues to be reduced continues across the operation acceptance period. As a result, even in the process of making the sample image and gauge image (integrated sample image) difficult to see or in a state where they cannot be seen, the state (at least part of) of when operation acceptance was allowed will be changed. become visible.

In addition, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) is finished during the period (timings tE3b to tE3e) during which the disappearing effect image is displayed, and from then on, the integrated image The disappearing effect image will be displayed in a situation where the sample image (sample image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

Regarding the sample image and the gauge image, since the display method after the operation is accepted is the same in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, there is no possibility that this will reduce the interest in the game. There isn't.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 254, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. A narrow-area pre-effect that uses only the area starts to be executed. Then, during the period in which the image related to such narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (in this case, an integrated simulated image) is displayed, and the first allowable sound is displayed. The outputs are respectively started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the simulated image (in this case, the integrated simulated image) is started, part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is difficult to see due to the image related to the narrow area type front effect. There is. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the narrow-area front effect is displayed is reduced, and its transmittance is increased, thereby creating a "simulation image (integrated image)". This will gradually increase the visibility of images). In this regard, even in the fifth reception permissible state, while the narrow-area front presentation is being executed and a simulated image (in this case, an integrated simulated image) is being displayed, the fifth reception permissible state When the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs, the operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-area front performance is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

Here, the image used for such narrow-area front presentation may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed. Then, the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (narrow area type front effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may also be designed to express the state of being elevated. However, it is desirable to use the same image for the narrow-area type front effect corresponding to the second reception-permitting state as the image for the narrow-area type front effect corresponding to the fifth reception-permitting state.

Note that in the narrow-area pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of related effects may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operations, the narrow-area pre-production is It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

In this way, even with regard to the narrow-area pre-effect that occurs before operation acceptance is permitted, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, which increases the game's interest. It is expected that it will be maintained appropriately.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the performance progresses in the same manner as the performance contents shown in FIGS. 251(a) to (e), so that the performance is relatively Even if the player side is aware in advance that the highly anticipated first reception permissible state has not occurred, it is still interesting to see whether the second reception permissible state or the fifth reception permissible state will occur. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

However, as mentioned above, after an operation by the player is detected in the fifth reception permissible state and the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) is started, the state is not in the second reception permissible state but in the first reception permissible state. The performance will be developed in a manner reminiscent of.

In other words, in the production example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation accepted) in the fifth acceptance permission state, the sound ( ) are brought to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first acceptance permissible state), when an operation is accepted, the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" which were in the output state in the non-suppressing mode are changed to the strong suppressing mode. However, in the example shown in FIG. 254 (fifth reception permissible state), when an operation is accepted, the output is not suppressed. The "BGM playback sound" and the "first permissible sound" which were in the output state in the mode are brought into the output state in the strong suppression mode or in the non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. As a result, (all) sounds that were in the output state in a non-suppressing mode before the operation was accepted will be triggered by the operation in both the second reception allowed state and the fifth reception allowed state. As a result, the first acceptance permission state can be recalled at timing tE3a shown in FIG. It is now expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming.

In this case, it may be either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are different. It is desirable to perform the same processing in For example, if in the second reception permissible state, the sound that was previously output in a non-suppressing mode is set to non-output state when an operation is accepted, then also in the fifth reception permissible state, when the operation is accepted, the sound is set to non-output. The sound that had been output in a non-suppressed manner until then is now in a non-output state.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 254(g) to 254(k) assume a case where the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, since the fifth reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, it is assumed that the operation reception has been performed. The same process will be executed.

Therefore, at timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) start to be executed, but also the sound that has been output in a non-suppressed manner (here, the sound of BGM playback) is strongly suppressed. In this case, they are brought to an output state or a non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. Even in the first reception permissible state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, the first permissible sound) is output in a non-suppressing manner until the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated arrives, and the timing tC4f In this case, the output state may be set to a strongly suppressed mode, or the output state may be set to a non-output state, and this may be terminated prematurely.

Further, at timing tE3d, while the fifth post-operation effect is already in the execution state, the "wide-area disappearance effect" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned disappearance effect. Regarding the "wide-area disappearance effect," the image itself does not necessarily have to be the same as in the case of the first reception acceptance state, but the disappearance accompanied by a change from the background image that was displayed until the operation reception was made. It is desirable to run it as an effect. In other words, it goes without saying that in this case, at least half of the display area is used for execution. As a result, the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) is the same in both the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state (wide-area disappearance effect). Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed), the first acceptance permissible state can be recalled, and it is possible to suitably maintain gaming interest. The manner in which such a disappearance effect is applied is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c). The same applies to the first acceptance state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 254, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is output again in a non-suppressing mode in the fifth acceptance permission state is determined by the end of the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance). Although the timing tE5 is set as the timing tE5, it may be set as the timing tE5 when the after-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or it may be set as the timing tE5 when the after-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed. The timing may arrive after the end of the process.

Also, in the first reception permission state, as in the fifth reception permission state, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state is set when the operation reception is performed. Good too.

In the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state, the process of changing the sound that had been output in the non-suppression mode to "output in the suppression mode" or "the non-output state" and the output sound after the operation are performed. The processes to be output do not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, as long as they are all started based on the acceptance of the operation.

In addition, as mentioned above, when an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance permission state, this is used as a trigger to turn off the specific effect movable object that has been in the light emitting state for a predetermined period of time (the fifth operation If an operation is accepted in the first reception permission state, use this as a trigger to apply driving force to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect movement appears (after the first operation). Direction) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated for the drive means corresponding to the operation means that is the operation target, so that a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.) appears on the operation means. On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation performance, it is preferable not to perform such processing. In addition, in this case, in the first post-operation performance, the light emitting mode of the operating device that is the target of operation is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, the light emission of the operating device that is the target of operation is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state be such that they can occur when the same result (for example, winning the jackpot) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

Further, when a movable performance is performed by a specific performance movable body in the first operation performance, it is desirable to be able to emit light in a manner that does not appear when the specific performance movable body is not in operation.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance, the production sound corresponding to the operation reception is outputted continuously after the output starts, whereas in the fifth post-operation production, the production sound corresponding to the operation reception is output continuously. It is desirable that when the sound is output for a predetermined period of time, a state in which no effect sound is output in a non-suppression mode (a state in which it is output in a strongly suppressed mode or a state in which it is not output) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation presentation, although the production sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is appropriately executed, the performance has a tendency to be suppressed compared to the case of the first post-operation presentation. It is now expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

Further, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sound outputted when the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state occur are different. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance state, the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth acceptability state, the second allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, but the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself is also output as a different sound.

Furthermore, as described above, the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state) have the same aspect (as shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c) mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same aspect is displayed as a sample image (integrated sample image) in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state), the size of the display It is desirable that the characters are made to be different (have similar shapes), and that they are displayed in a smaller format in the fifth acceptance acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state) than in the first acceptance acceptance state. However, the size will be displayed in the same manner in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state. Note that in the first reception acceptance state, a special aspect can be displayed as a sample image (integrated image), but in the fifth reception acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state), a special aspect can be displayed as a sample image (integrated image). ) as described above, the special aspect is never displayed.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception permissible state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the production sound not triggered by the operation reception (fluctuation pattern It is desirable to start outputting (effect sounds output at predetermined timing within) in a non-suppressed manner (for example, return of BGM). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth acceptance permission state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the production sound that is not triggered by the operation reception ( It is desirable to prevent the production sound (which is output at a predetermined timing within the fluctuation pattern) from starting to be output in a non-suppressed manner. In other words, in this case, after the post-operation output sound in response to the operation reception is set to non-output state, the performance sound that is not triggered by the operation reception (the performance sound that is output at a predetermined timing within the fluctuation pattern) becomes non-output. Since output is started in a suppressed mode, interest in the game can be maintained more favorably by adopting such a suppressed mode compared to the case of the first acceptance permission state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the second reception permissible state can be generated in both a fluctuation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs and a fluctuation pattern in which the first reception permissible state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth reception permissible state can also occur in both a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state does not occur, so that the fifth reception permissible state occurs. When this occurs, the first acceptance permission state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, if the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first acceptance acceptance state within the period until symbol fluctuation is stopped will be higher than when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is desirable to set it to . This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player realizes in advance that the first reception permissible state has not occurred before the operation is accepted, the fifth reception permissible state has occurred. Since the player can look forward to possibilities, a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

According to the above-mentioned production example, as a result of an operation being accepted while the sample image (integrated sample image) is being displayed in a manner different from the special aspect (the manner shown in FIG. 232(d)), the operation is If the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway based on the acceptance, not only the acceptance acceptable sound but also other sounds that were output in the non-suppressing mode (such as "BGM playback sound") will be output in the non-suppressing mode. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of an operation being accepted while the sample image (integrated image) is being displayed in a manner different from the special aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 232(d)), based on the operation acceptance, If the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway, not only the acceptance acceptable sound but also other sounds that were output in the non-suppression mode (such as "BGM playback sound") will be output in the strong suppression mode or not output. (See FIG. 254).

According to the example of production described above, in a situation where a jackpot has been obtained in the jackpot determination, an operation is accepted while a sample image (integrated sample image) is being displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permissible sound is terminated midway, based on the operation reception, "When the specific effect movable body is to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect action is to be generated (FIG. 250)" There is a case in which the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the light is turned off, and no effect is performed (FIG. 254). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest in a situation where the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway. In addition, when ``a specific effect movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect operation is generated (Fig. 250)'', it is possible to make the specific effect movable body emit no light by ``reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or turning it off''. It is desirable that the portions marked as such also emit light.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and each presentation example to be described later, the integrated image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, when displaying the sample image and the gauge image separately as separate images instead of as an integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, it was decided that the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are outputted so that there is a time when they overlap with each other, but after the first permissible sound has finished outputting. The output of the second permissible sound may be started.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state in each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the sample image is displayed as an integrated sample image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. You don't have to.

The acceptance acceptance state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each example to be described later can occur in both the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss.

In each reception acceptance state described above and each reception acceptance state described later, when the post-operation effect is executed, the disappearance effect is executed as a separate image from the simulated image, but it was executed in a non-automatic reception mode. As a result, it is desirable to perform a disappearing effect by fading out the simulated image itself only when the post-operation effect is not performed, in order to prevent the user from recognizing the degree of expectation. In this case, a process is executed in which the pattern image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the state in which it is in the reception-permitting state.

In each acceptance acceptance state described above and each acceptance acceptance state described below, even if the acceptance acceptance state is the same, there will be times when you win the jackpot, when you lose the jackpot, or when you change the performance after the operation. The type of disappearance effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such a mode.

The wide-area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen, but if "the display area of the wide-area disappearance effect > the display area of the narrow-area disappearance effect" is not necessarily the case. It does not have to satisfy more than half or less than half of the conditions. Similarly, regarding the front effect, the wide area type front effect was set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type front effect was set to less than half of the display screen. ”, it does not necessarily have to satisfy more than half or less than half of the conditions.

The post-operation performance may be performed using only a liquid crystal display, sound output, or light emission from a lamp provided on the game board 5. The point is that any change in display, sound, light emission, etc. may be caused by the receipt of an operation.

Further, the "specific type of performance sound" may be a BGM playback sound that is output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound that is output across multiple fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception permission state does not necessarily have to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in an automatic reception mode.

In addition, there is a post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the first reception permissible state (first post-operation performance), and a post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the fourth reception permissible state (fourth post-operation performance). It is desirable that the contents of the performance be different between the two.

In each of the above examples and each example described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, processing to reduce the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (such as increasing the transmittance) You may also perform this at the same time.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, the image affected by the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance; in this case, Even if the image is displayed so as to overlap the whole of the model image (integrated model image), it is possible to confirm the aspect of the model image (integrated model image).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, "narrow-area front production" refers to "background change (the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a new background image is displayed)" It can also be referred to as ``a pre-performance that does not involve a production that causes the production to take place in a certain state.'' In this case, "wide-area front performance" refers to "background change (effect that makes the previously displayed background image invisible and performs the performance with a new background image displayed)" It means "a pre-stage performance accompanied by". The background image may be an all-black image, an all-white image, or the like.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and each presentation example to be described later, the aspect shown in FIG. 232(d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated simulated image. In this case, the "special mode" refers to a mode in which the shape of the operation means (a simulated image of the operation receiving part itself) is the same, and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the mode shown in FIG. 232(c)). It will be used.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, when a sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, the sample image is used as an operation means (operation receiver) for "action in the movable area" and "operation". As mentioned above, this is dynamically displayed in a form that expresses the behavior when In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continues on the specific layer even after the operation is accepted until it is hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, the display method for the sample images may be changed as appropriate to the contents described in Figures 232 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples. It is also possible to add the following information. In addition, regarding the sample image, gauge image, reception permissible sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception permissible state occurs, see Figures 212 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the "BGM" You may make appropriate changes or additions to the explanatory text and the content applied to other examples regarding the "validity period that occurs when the playback sound is strongly suppressed." . In addition, regarding the sample image, gauge image, reception permissible sound, and post-operation effect when the second reception permissible state occurs, see Figures 212 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the "BGM You may make appropriate changes or additions to the explanatory text regarding the "validity period that occurs when the playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode" and the content applied to other examples. .

[More detailed effects on the image disappearance effect, etc.]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permission state (validity period) in which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). ), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which presentation acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (validity period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the reception permission state (valid period) is applied to the performance component that is the target of the performance. A post-reception performance (post-operation performance) that causes a predetermined change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration) is executed. Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that interest in games related to the acceptance period may decrease.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, "operations by the player" to be detected refers to operations directly operated by the player, such as "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001." (Pushing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "contact motion by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "player's movement within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes "actions caused by". In short, it must be equipped with one or more reception means (operation means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) for presentation. Bye.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided, for example. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations, and for example, even if the game has at least one of the performance (any configuration). It is possible to reduce the interest, or it may be possible to selectively include some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is described as being applicable to other configurations. The configuration described above may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a sample image display that is displayed using a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600) is based on the acceptance of a movement by the player. In this way, even after the production has proceeded based on the reception (after the production change based on the reception has started), the sample image display can be displayed even after the production has proceeded based on the reception. It is possible for the player to understand which mode (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)) was displayed within the period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are advanced when an acceptance is received (conversation preview as a performance after reception, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.), and the preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance) A plurality of reception periods (validity periods) with different types () are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of a type depending on the result of the judgment (performance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, if a movement by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance effect image is displayed on the ``effect display device 1600'' based on the acceptance. It is possible to display a specific mode separately from the specific post-reception performance image, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, but also to check whether the specific aspect has appeared before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing its visibility, it is expected to encourage players to naturally shift their attention from the "sample image display" to the "specific post-reception performance image." .

However, since the sample image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, if the sample image display is to be displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a specific post-reception effect image has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Regarding this point, which will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sample image display is hidden (invisible) while a specific mode is appearing, The images are displayed in a manner that shows a particular aspect. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, the display performance changes from the pre-reception display (sample image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) while the specific mode appears. Since the transition will be realized, you can simply check whether you are in the situation before the specific aspect appears or if the specific aspect has finished appearing, from the pre-reception display (sample image display). It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the display performance to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) has been completed.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the above-mentioned specific mode and the above-mentioned specific post-reception performance image appear based on the acceptance. It appears before the post-effect image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-reception effect image has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where a specific post-reception performance image has not yet been displayed, the sample image display will be made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned specific mode. After reception, the effect image is likely to appear soon, and it becomes possible to prompt the player in advance to prepare mentally to change the target of attention from the ``display of the simulated image that is difficult to see.'' .

[Configuration 2]
Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the first acceptance period (validity period) among the plurality of acceptance periods (validity periods), A mode in which a first post-reception performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and in addition to the first post-reception performance image, the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize (first performance mode) can appear. In addition, if an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods (valid periods), a second effect image different from the first post-acceptance performance image based on the acceptance of the action is provided. In addition to being able to display the second post-reception performance image, in addition to the second post-reception performance image, a mode different from that in the first reception period (the second production aspect) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, or may correspond to neither of them.

According to such a configuration, the sample image display can be visually recognized without checking which of the "first post-reception performance image" and the "second post-reception performance image" is displayed as the post-reception performance image. By simply checking the mode in which it becomes difficult, it becomes possible to infer the type of the post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image). In other words, the manner in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (the first effect mode, the second effect mode) means that at least a portion of the predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" in which the simulated image display is displayed is Is it realized as an image displayed in a specific area that overlaps (if it overlaps with the entire area from the start of appearance, a predetermined transmittance will be set)? It goes without saying that this is realized as a performance (for example, a movable body performance) using predetermined performance bodies located in overlapping positions. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change his gaze from the simulated image display even after acceptance, the type of mode that appears (overlapping with the simulated image display) at his gaze point (first effect mode, second effect mode) ), and this makes it possible to infer the type of post-reception performance (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) without changing the gaze destination. Become

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the third acceptance period (validity period) among the plurality of acceptance periods (validity periods), Based on the acceptance, it is possible to display a third post-reception performance image that is different from either the first post-reception performance image or the second post-reception performance image, but the third post-reception performance image Separately, the first presentation mode corresponding to the first reception period can also appear as a presentation mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

According to such a configuration, when the first presentation mode appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception presentation images will appear, as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. As a mode for making it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display, when the second effect mode appears, it is possible to infer that the second post-reception effect image will appear. That is, in this case, for example, when the first presentation mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of outputting the second post-reception presentation image is denied, but the possibility of outputting the second post-reception presentation image is When a mode appears that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display because it is unclear which one will appear, and it is possible to make the player interested in which one will appear. It becomes possible to suitably encourage the shift of the gaze to the part where the presentation is being performed after the reception, while maintaining the presentation performance and tension.

Here, we have explained the "post-reception performance image" as an example of the post-reception performance, but for example, "lamp light emission" and "movable body movement" as the post-reception performance can be used during the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner (or it is executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but not when there is an acceptance within the other acceptance period), the above-mentioned ``reception'' It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "movable body movement." In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "it becomes possible to infer the type of post-reception performance without changing the gaze point," a sample image display is displayed for the post-reception performance. This will be realized as being executed at a position that is offset from the position when viewed from the front and does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes his gaze from the position where the sample image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image," "lamp emission," and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects may be If it corresponds to "post-reception performance", it can be said that the above-mentioned effects are achieved.

When multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as “post-reception effect image,” “lamp emission,” and “movable body movement” are performed in parallel based on the reception, these post-reception effects ( The fact that at least one of the post-reception mode) can be considered as a "post-reception performance" is applicable not only to the above-mentioned performance examples but also to the performance examples described below.

[Configuration 3]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-acceptance production ( During the execution period of the special performance mode, there are states in which the simulated image display is relatively easy to see and states in which the simulated image display is relatively difficult to recognize. I have to.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the special presentation mode (post-reception presentation) is started based on the reception, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a sample image display. . In addition, by making the sample image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the special presentation mode (post-reception presentation), we have changed the “sample image display” to “special presentation mode (post-reception presentation)”. It is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the object of their attention.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special presentation mode (post-reception presentation) does not affect the visibility of the sample image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before acceptance. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the sample image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is to display at least a part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is used to display images, nor is it an effect that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. As a result, during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), the sample image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that from "sample image display" to "special production mode (post-reception production)" ), it is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the subject.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, a state in which at least the special presentation mode and the predetermined presentation mode are performed in parallel appears based on the acceptance. It becomes. However, the predetermined performance mode starts to be executed after the special performance mode has started (behind the special performance mode) so as to have a negative impact on the visibility of the sample image display (make the sample image display difficult to see). It has become something that will be done. As a result, during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), the sample image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that from "sample image display" to "special production mode (post-reception production)" ), it is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the subject.

Note that the process of making the predetermined presentation mode appear is also started based on the acceptance. Therefore, a plurality of post-reception performances (a plurality of post-reception aspects) including at least a special performance mode and a predetermined performance mode are performed in parallel, and the predetermined performance mode is realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. You can do it like this. In any case, the predetermined presentation mode explained in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a part of a predetermined area in which a sample image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. It will be realized as a performance performed using a performance body located at a position that overlaps with that when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), while the sample image display is being displayed, A specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area, which is the display target area of the simulated image display, can be used to display a "specific disappearing effect display" that makes the simulated image difficult to visually recognize. After the specific disappearance effect display starts to be displayed, the image display is made to be hidden while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display even after the acceptance is made. In addition, the visibility of the sample image display is reduced by a specific disappearing effect display until the sample image display is hidden, and while the visibility is reduced, the sample image display is hidden. This can suggest that there is little time remaining until the display of the sample image is hidden, and a decline in gaming interest when the display of the sample image is hidden can be suppressed. It becomes wet.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned specific disappearing effect display can be displayed even after the simulated image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. The execution of the performance is started after the reception is received. The post-reception effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display, or (at least part of) the specific disappearance effect display. This is realized by using a performance element located at a position that overlaps the part) when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, for a specific post-reception effect that is performed at a position that overlaps with a specific disappearance effect display in front view, the viewer can watch from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. It will be possible to recognize it without having to migrate the previous part. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze destination in order to understand the form of the specific post-reception effect when the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 5]
Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's movement is accepted during the reception period (specific reception period) until the sample image display is hidden, the specific mode is not displayed. When the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor performance display is executed in a specific precursor mode based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.) If the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the foreshadowing effect display, the above specific mode shall be within the period from the time the acceptance is made until the above-mentioned simulated image display is turned off. It is possible to appear in.

In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific precursor mode, it is possible to recognize that a specific mode appears and the sample image display becomes difficult to see before the sample image display is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to pay close attention to the manner in which the simulated image display appears until the player performs an action. Note that the "specific aspects" according to configuration 5 and the "specific aspects" according to configuration 1 may be the same or different aspects, and may occur in response to different acceptance periods. It may be.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the winning/losing determination result is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.), a portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned specific portent mode. If an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the display of a precursory effect (an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the above-mentioned specific aspect is such that the sample image display is not displayed from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is released, and cases where it does not appear within that period.

According to such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific portent mode, the specific mode is executed from the time the reception is received until the sample image display is made invisible. Since it is now unknown whether or not the image will appear within the period, the performance from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden will be improved. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Note that configuration 5 above may be implemented by replacing it with the configuration below, or may be provided as a separate configuration (acceptance period) from configuration 5 above. In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, after a movement by a player is accepted during an acceptance period (a specific acceptance period or an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the simulated image display becomes hidden. During the period until the image is displayed, a specific aspect may appear, and when the specific aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the sample image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the omen effect display is performed in a special omen mode (same as the specific omen mode) based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.). ), and if an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the above-mentioned specific aspect will cause the above-mentioned simulated image display to be hidden from the time when the action is accepted. It will not be possible to appear within the period until the In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the sample image display is hidden, and the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will never be disappointed.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.), the omen effect display is executed in a manner different from the above-mentioned special omen mode. If a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the performance display (an acceptance period different from the acceptance period described above), the above specific aspect will cause the simulated image display to be hidden from the time the action is accepted. There will be times when the event will appear within the period up to the end of the period, and there will be times when it will not appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, if the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the special portent mode, the sample image display will be hidden from the time the specific mode is accepted. Since it is now unknown whether or not the image will appear within the period, the performance from the time it is accepted until the sample image display is hidden will be improved. , it becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

Regarding the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to apply each of the above-mentioned or later-described configurations applicable to the above-mentioned configuration 5 as appropriate.

[Configuration 6]
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides a plurality of types of precursory display effects that suggest that a reception period in which actions by players will be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, a specific precursor performance display can be executed over the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed. The system allows actions by the player to be accepted.

In other words, in this case, since the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (form) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (form) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to check can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor performance display is being displayed, a post-reception performance (for example, a special post-reception performance) is performed in response to the reception. Although execution is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but remains displayed even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the execution of the effect after acceptance according to the acceptance is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (form) of the precursor effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) occurs, the state is such that reception by the reception means is permitted, or the reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception acceptance sound that indicates that the game will (soon) be in a state where it is possible to hear the reception permission sound, it is possible to suppress the player from forgetting to perform the operation for reception.

Reception permissible sound means that even if it is realized as something that can be heard before the corresponding reception period occurs (suggesting that the reception period will occur soon), it does not affect the timing of the reception period. It is made audible in a straddling manner, and can be made audible at least halfway through the acceptance period. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine 1 where the tone setting value can be set to "0", in the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", the acceptance permissible sound will be output, but will not be audible. It will not be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, if an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is set to audible (output state) during the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period, etc.), the above-mentioned "sample image display" is The above-mentioned acceptance permission sound is played in a state where the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared before the "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)" appears. Processing for making the sound inaudible is started.

In other words, in this case, even if the situation in which "the sample image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared since the application was accepted, if the application period has already ended, the player will be notified of this. This will enable them to make suitable suggestions. This makes it possible to display the sample image in a manner that is easy to see, since it is less likely to cause any inconvenience even if the timing at which ``the pattern in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see'' appears is delayed after the acceptance. become

[Configuration 8]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of reception periods (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects) including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, during the period from when a player's action is accepted while the simulated image display is being displayed until the simulated image display is hidden, there is a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. It's starting to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by the player is accepted while the sample image display is being displayed during the first acceptance period, and when the sample image display is displayed during the second acceptance period. In either case, when a player's action is accepted while the game is in progress, "an aspect in which the map image display becomes difficult to see" appears before the map image display is hidden. ing.

In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the reception period is the first reception period or the second reception period, after the reception period has ended, it is possible to check which mode appeared in the sample image display. It becomes possible to suggest that the state is Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 8 may be the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 2 above. However, the reception periods may be of different types.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, multiple modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as "modes in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and the first mode appears during the first reception period. Since the second aspect appears in the second acceptance period, it is possible to give the "aspect in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" a performance related to the type of acceptance period.

In addition, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 further provides a third mode as "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize", and during the first acceptance period, regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the period, The first aspect may appear first, but in the second acceptance period, the second aspect appears when the item is accepted within the period, and the third aspect appears when the item is not accepted within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second acceptance period, it is determined whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, based on the "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" that has appeared. However, during the first acceptance period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the acceptance period based on the ``mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to see'' that appears. As a result, it is expected that the interest in gaming will be improved through such performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples or the production examples described below, "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" refers to a disappearing production display in a specific area that includes at least a part of the predetermined area in which the sample image display is displayed. In addition to the manner in which the image display is displayed, the manner in which the effect is performed using a presentation element located at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed when viewed from the front, the image display itself may be visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.).

[Configuration 9]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period, etc.) occurs, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted, or in a state in which acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the acceptance permission sound audible indicating that the game will be accepted (soon), it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance operation.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 provides a plurality of types of precursory display effects that suggest that a reception period in which actions by players are to be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, a specific precursor performance display can be executed over the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed. The system allows actions by the player to be accepted. In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which mode is being displayed as the precursory effect display, so there is no risk of the game being played by forgetting to check the mode of the precursory effect display. A decline in interest can be suppressed. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 6, or may be a different type (mode) of portent effect display. .

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display of a specific precursor effect is continued even after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the player's movement (post-acceptance effect) is progressed. This allows the player to confirm which mode has appeared as a precursor performance display even after the acceptance is made.

However, since the precursor display performance is originally displayed in a state where reception is not permitted (before the reception period occurs), the player cannot perform any actions while the precursor display performance is displayed. Even if the action is performed, the player may feel uneasy as to whether the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if a precursor effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease as it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. Ru.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor performance display is being displayed, the specific precursor performance will continue to be performed after the acceptance. Although the display is displayed, a mode is created in which the specific portent performance display is difficult to visually recognize while the specific portent performance display is being displayed. Then, after the aspect appears, the specific precursor effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific precursor effect display is made difficult to visually recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, but the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. There is. Then, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, a mode appears that makes it difficult to see the simulated image display while the simulated image display is being displayed. The "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display, which can be displayed even in symbol variations where no acceptance period occurs.

In other words, in this case, a specific disappearing effect display will be displayed so as not to affect the visibility of a predetermined image display that is unrelated to the reception period. It becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting performance.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) is used as an image display that has no relation to the reception period (current reception period). The second image display can be displayed respectively within the acceptance period, and the above-mentioned specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( The display shall be displayed in such a way as to affect the visibility of (reservations).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a manner in which the image display becomes difficult to view" appears depending on the type of image display. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is necessary to check whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of performance.

However, in this case, the first image display shall be displayed as an image (suggestive) related to (expectation level) of the symbol fluctuation, and the second image display shall be displayed as an image (suggesting) regarding the winning or loss (expectation level) of the symbol fluctuation. By displaying a display that is not related to (does not suggest) winning or losing (expectation level), it is possible to avoid a decline in gaming interest when the visibility of the second image display is affected. The above can be said to be desirable.

In addition, when using a "specific disappearance effect display" displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize," the operation by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period. When a sample image display is displayed, a specific area that includes at least a part of a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600) that is the display target area of the sample image display is used to identify the area. A disappearing effect display will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) A predetermined image display can be displayed within the game, and the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. . The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, the pattern image display becomes difficult to visually recognize while the pattern image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as modes that can appear and make it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

In other words, in this case, any of the plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode will appear as "a mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", so that the gaming interest when the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is reduced. It is now expected that companies will improve their performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" is executed as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "first mode" is a mode in which the simulated image display and the predetermined However, when the "second mode" is executed as the "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to view", the "second mode" makes both the scale image display and the predetermined image display difficult. Among the image displays, only the sample image display is made difficult to visually recognize.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect as to which of the "first mode" and "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", so that the game People are expected to try to improve their interest.

In addition, the display of the sample image and the predetermined image display are performed in a state where either the acceptance period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "first aspect" or the acceptance period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "second aspect" is occurring. It is desirable to be able to display the following information in order to improve the game's interest.

[Configuration 12]
Also, as mentioned above, in pachinko machine 1,
- It is possible to generate a first reception period in which reception by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is allowed, and when an action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, it is determined that the reception has been made. based on the first reception performance execution means that can display the performance after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (rates at which jackpot symbols are stopped); It is possible to generate a second reception period during which reception is allowed using the sword decoration object 5001 that is different from the operation button 410, and the operation by the player is allowed within the second reception period. When the reception is received, a second reception performance execution means capable of displaying the second reception performance display in one of a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (rates at which jackpot symbols are stopped) based on the reception. It is equipped with Note that the expectation level (rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Furthermore, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as different types of preview effects. In addition, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 12 are the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configurations 2 and 8 above. Alternatively, the reception period may be of different types.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, there are two cases: when the player's movement is accepted within the first acceptance period, and when the player's movement is accepted during the second acceptance period. Also, after the reception is made, it is possible for the pattern image display to appear in a manner in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize it while the pattern image display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of reception period, it is possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display even after the reception is made. In addition, since the visibility of the sample image display is reduced until the sample image display is hidden, it may be suggested that there is little time remaining until the sample image display is hidden. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the display of the simulated image is hidden.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, there are two cases in which the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception, and a case in which the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception. Regardless of whether the second mode, which is more expected than the first mode, is executed, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize." On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second mode with higher expectations than the first mode (or the first mode with lower expectations than the second mode) is executed as the performance display after the second reception , a specific mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but when the first mode (or second mode) is executed as a production display after the second reception, "the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Either the specific mode does not appear as the "mode that makes it difficult to view" and a different mode from the specific mode appears, or the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" itself does not appear. As mentioned above, the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation for the post-reception production display simply by checking "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the performance display after reception. Since there will be cases where it is not possible to estimate the degree of play, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through the performance of this kind of ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.'' .

Furthermore, regarding the "specified manner" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponds to the first reception period. '' cannot appear, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on ``the manner in which the image display becomes difficult to see,'' and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this. In order to obtain such effects, it is necessary to consider the "conditions in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" that may occur in response to the first reception period, and It is more desirable to prevent the display from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

However, as for the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize," the "manner" that may occur in response to the first reception period and the "manner" that may occur in response to the second reception period are the same. It may be possible to appear.

[Configuration 13]
Furthermore, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can display a reception-related effect display (a sample image display, a gauge image, etc.) at least within the acceptance period, and In connection with the occurrence, a reception-related performance sound (such as reception acceptance sound) can be output at least within the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance performance (this itself is an aspect of the post-acceptance performance) is generated based on the acceptance of the movement by the player. ) can be output, and if a player's action is accepted while the above reception-related production display is being displayed during the acceptance period, a to hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, if a player's action is accepted during the reception period when the reception-related performance sound is set to an audible state, the reception-related performance sound is set to an inaudible state based on the reception. I try to do that.

In the above configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, the post-reception performance sound related to the post-reception performance is output, the reception-related performance display is hidden, and the reception-related performance sound is hidden. Since it is set in an audible state, it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in an accepted state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related performance display is not finished at the time when a specific post-reception performance is started in response to the reception. However, the reception-related performance sound is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when a specific post-reception performance sound corresponding to the reception starts to be executed.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned reception-related production display that is displayed during the reception period will be displayed until after the execution of the specific post-reception production has started; The reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) is no longer audible at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception performance has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the reception-related performance display that was displayed during the reception period, but the reception-related performance sound is rendered inaudible. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the inaudible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related performance sound itself has been completed, or a state in which the output process of the reception-related performance sound itself has been completed. may continue, but be rendered inaudible by adjusting the volume to "0". In addition, a specific post-reception performance means that in each of the above examples and the examples described below, the post-reception performance in response to the reception is a composite performance using multiple performance elements (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable objects, etc.). When executed as a performance, it may correspond to "a performance using a specific performance" among these performance bodies.

[Configuration 14]
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a plurality of modes for displaying a premonition effect, and can display a specific premonition display before the reception period occurs, and can display reception-related production sounds. It is possible to start an audible output (such as acceptance acceptance sound). The specific precursor performance display and the reception-related performance sound can be executed over the timing when the reception period occurs, and the specific precursor performance display is displayed and the reception-related performance sound is audible (output). The player's actions can be accepted within the game. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed within the acceptance period, the specific Hide the precursor effect display. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound is set to be audible during the reception period, the reception-related performance sound is set to be inaudible based on the reception. ing.

In the above configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display is hidden, and reception-related effect sounds are rendered inaudible. Therefore, even if a player's action is accepted while a specific precursor effect display and reception-related effect sound are being executed, which have been in execution since before the acceptance period, the acceptance period will not be accepted. This will make it easier to recognize that the person is in the same state. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (mode) of portent effect display. Good too. Further, the "reception-related performance sound" according to configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "reception-related performance sound" according to configuration 13.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned specific precursor effect display indicates that a specific post-reception effect is started to be executed in response to the reception being received within the corresponding acceptance period. It is not finished and is displayed at the time of the update. On the other hand, the reception-related performance sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned specific foreshadow effect display that is displayed before the reception period starts will be displayed after the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed; The reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) before the occurrence of the period is no longer audible at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after the reception. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception effect has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the precursor effect displayed before the start of the reception period, and the reception-related effect that is output before the start of the reception period. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended. Note that the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" according to configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" according to configuration 13, respectively. There may be one, or they may be different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of acceptance periods are prepared in which "the performance content (type of performance after acceptance)" that is proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action is different. Further, the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, multiple Any one of the effects is made to appear, but a specific mode can appear no matter which one of the effects appears.

In the above configuration, the types of performance modes that appear based on the acceptance of the player's actions (such as a "conversation preview" that indicates which conversation will appear, and a "movable object" that indicates whether or not the movable object will move) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods with different types of preview performances (such as "action previews"). In this regard, if a player's action is accepted within a specific acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance; Even in cases where a specific aspect is used, it is possible for a specific aspect to appear. In other words, in this case, no matter which of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear, so it is considered that the specific mode is caused by the action being accepted by the player within the specific acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that this is a common production.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within a special acceptance period that is different from the above-mentioned specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, special conditions (such as jackpot winning conditions, probability change It is possible for any of multiple modes to appear, including special modes with different appearance rates (which may be 0% or 100%) depending on whether the entry conditions (such as entry conditions) are met, and the special mode is When it appears, the image display becomes difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, a special aspect indicating the degree of expectation appears before the simulated image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes the simulated image display difficult to see. , the player can now enjoy the performance that progresses from the sample image display to the post-reception performance (special mode) without having to change his gaze.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the acceptance of a movement by the player within the above-mentioned specific reception period, the sample image display is It is made difficult to see due to certain features. According to such a configuration, there is a case where the sample image display is made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a benefit (special reception period), and a case where the above-mentioned specific mode does not suggest the degree of expectation concerning the granting of the benefit. Since there are cases where the sample image display is made difficult to view (specific reception period), the ``modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)'' will be given a performance effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that the "specific reception period" according to configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" according to configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to different reception periods.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display that reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. Since the display area of the above-mentioned specific image can be reduced while the performance is in progress, it is difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted even after the reception has been made, creating a sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific divided area is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and a specific image is displayed within the specific divided area. (Gauge images, etc.) The display area is reduced. After the performance is progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (eg, gauge image) but also the specific divided area continues to be displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, the specific divided area is displayed, so the display area of the specific image (such as the gauge image) is reduced. This makes it easier to judge whether the number has decreased or not.

Note that ``the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the performance progresses based on the acceptance of the player's action'' means, for example, This also includes cases where a predetermined display area remains as a gauge image at the time the performance is performed based on this, but the display area is reduced to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. be. However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area is required to have the display area of the gauge image set to 0. It will be hidden after the specified timing.

For example, in the configuration 16, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (a specific image, a specific divided area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance; Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area remained for a specific image at the time of acceptance, the display area within a specific divided area must be set to a specific value (a predetermined value). ) is displayed, or only a specific partitioned area of a specific partitioned area and a specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when a motion by a player is accepted (when the progress of the performance according to the acceptance is started), the execution starts before the movement is accepted. The ``depiction in which the display area of a specific image is reduced'' does not end and continues. Then, when a predetermined timing arrives, either a specific image with a specific display area is displayed within a specific partitioned area, or only a specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) will not be significantly reduced and the drawing up to that point will continue. It is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or not even after the reception has been completed. In addition, since the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is significantly reduced at a timing later than the timing when the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the reception is valid for a period of time ( It is possible to make it appear as if the game was completed just in time within the application period (reception period), and it is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of precursor effects displayed as precursor effects indicating that the acceptance period will occur. This point will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect is displayed among the plurality of precursor effects displays, the reception period occurs for the sample image display related to the reception target. It is displayed both within the precursor period and within the reception period. The sample image display that is displayed during the precursor period is different from the sample image display that is displayed during the acceptance period, and is hidden before the acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from a period before the reception period occurs.

Furthermore, as described above, if the pachinko machine 1 receives an application within the acceptance period, the pattern image display is hidden based on the acceptance; however, the pattern image display is hidden. It is possible for a ``specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display'' to appear until the image is displayed. However, as will be described later, regarding the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display," when the sample image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden, This prevents it from appearing until the end of the process.

According to such a configuration, during the precursory period (specific precursory effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" that appears corresponding to the acceptance period does not appear, and the image representation is not displayed. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the sample image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be aware of the situation. This will make it difficult for people to misunderstand that the reception period has ended.

In addition, if there are multiple "modes that make it difficult to see the sample image display" that can appear depending on the reception, including the above-mentioned "specific modes that make the sample image display difficult to see," then those In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the sample image display displayed within the precursory period is not displayed at the same time as it is hidden. However, if the mode differs from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes that make the display of the sample image difficult to view" according to the reception, the display will be delayed until the display of the sample image is hidden within the premonitory period. It is also possible to cause a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" to appear. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the sample image display" exclusive to the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" appears during the precursor period. This makes it possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

Note that the "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different precursor effect display. You can.

[Configuration 18]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, if the first production condition is met, the first reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of symbol variation, and if the second production condition is met. , it is possible to generate a second acceptance period as an acceptance period during the execution period of symbol variation. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance period can continue even after the symbol variation that occurred during the first acceptance period has ended and the next symbol variation has started. However, the second reception period does not continue until after the symbol fluctuation that caused the second reception period ends, and ends before the symbol fluctuation ends. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the sample image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the first reception period. In any case where an action by the player is accepted within the period, a disappearing performance mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is made to appear based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, effects such as ``even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , it becomes possible to suitably obtain the information regardless of whether it is during the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearing effect mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is different when the application is accepted in the first acceptance period and when it is accepted in the second acceptance period. They are implemented in different ways. In other words, in this case, it will be possible to understand whether the acceptance period will end within a certain pattern change during execution based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Note that the "first reception period and second reception period" according to configuration 18 may be the same as the "first reception period and second reception period" according to configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may be different reception periods. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (a first game state, and second gaming state), and the above-mentioned acceptance period can occur in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, based on the acceptance, the pachinko machine 1 displays a A mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance mode) is made possible to appear, and then the simulated image display is hidden.

In other words, in this case, the effect is that ``Even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is limited to the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. Among the plurality of acceptance periods, the second acceptance period can occur only in the second gaming state (jackpot game) among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, the sample image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first gaming state (if accepted in the first reception period), a specific "sample image display" that cannot appear in the second gaming state (if accepted in the second reception period) is visible. It is now possible for a mode in which it becomes difficult to perform (disappearance mode) to appear.

According to such a configuration, the first game can be started by simply checking which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance mode)" without checking the effect after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which state is being controlled, the state and the second gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, even in the second gaming state (if accepted during the second reception period), there is a "mode in which the scale image display is difficult to visually recognize" that is different from a specific "mode in which the scale image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode)". It is also possible to make the mode (disappearance effect mode) appear.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) occurs in which a reception opportunity is given, a sample image related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed in the corresponding sample. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest until the post-reception performance (post-operation performance) is executed. I'm trying to suppress it. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. . In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, and 207 to 231) is realized by replacing the display mode of the illustrated sample image with one of the integrated sample images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve gaming interest.

Note that the "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. A display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the display can be performed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permission state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). ing. In the first type of acceptance state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" is selected in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the image, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 19 described above will be explained with reference to the drawings.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and the type of preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). ) with different reception periods (reception performances), and it is possible to generate different types of reception periods (reception performances) according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, performance judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception performance) to a seventh reception period (reception performance) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception performance).

Here, the "conversation preview" as a post-reception performance indicates the level of expectation (such as the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on which conversation content will appear among multiple conversation contents, and as a post-reception performance. The "cut-in notice" indicates the level of expectation (such as the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on which cut-in image will appear among multiple cut-in images, and the "movable object" as a production after reception. The "notice" indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) depending on whether the movable object will move or not.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 255 to 266. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be implemented as any one of the seventh reception periods.

FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. FIGS. 262 and 263 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a first reception period (first reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 262(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “first variation pattern” selected above. Become. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 262(a), for convenience of explanation, the first performance display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE, which is depicted as a frog character, are respectively displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed not at the start of the fluctuation but during the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings. The second performance display FE itself may or may not indicate the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the decorative symbols SZ stop in the variable performance.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs decoration as shown in FIG. 255(a). When the timing tF3 arrives when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the symbol SZ, the above-mentioned first reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding the performance after the first reception" is allowed occurs. (“Situation shown in FIG. 262(d)”). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production display device 1600 (first production device) has a reception period (validity period) in connection with the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) will occur soon, a simulated image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiver, etc.), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance that makes the simulated image difficult to see. A related display (a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize) and a post-acceptance performance display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) are performed in response to acceptance. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when timing tF1 arrives before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 262(b), the display screen (effect display device In step 1600), execution of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started as the precursor effect display. The "first portent effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Although the display is set to be hidden in accordance with the arrival of timing tF3, it may be made to be hidden before timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262(d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first portent effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where the reception of the player's action is permitted. It has never happened before.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 262(c), the timing tF2 before the occurrence of the first reception period is When it arrives, "Integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while "First omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and "Integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first portent effect display ZEH1" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), " At least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to visually recognize by the "first portent effect display ZEH1". As a result, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) before the occurrence of the first acceptance period, there is a strong interest in which objects (operation receiving units) the player's actions are allowed to perform. It is expected that this will make it difficult to forget to perform an operation or make a mistake in operation after the first reception period occurs.

In addition, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first portent effect display ZEH1" are displayed, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is reduced. In order to improve game interest, it is more desirable to display the "first portent effect display ZEH1" so that a tendency to gradually improve toward the occurrence of the acceptance period appears. For example, this can be achieved by gradually reducing the display range of the "first omen effect display ZEH1" (the range that overlaps with the integrated image display IG), or by gradually increasing its transmittance. be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIGS. 262(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated image display IG" is , are displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the first acceptance period, or when the first acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the first acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tF4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player (see FIG. 255(b)).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 255, the effect changes from FIG. In the evolving example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tF3a, the first acceptance period ends, and the period corresponding to the first acceptance period ends. The execution of the post-reception performance (first post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively low-expectation post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. At timing tF3a, which is the point in time when the presentation after the first reception is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. That's what I do.

That is, the first post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "first post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable display device). This will be realized as a combination of at least a "specific performance after the first reception" using a third performance device (speaker, etc.) and an output sound after the first reception using a third performance device (speaker). However, among these production devices, the production display device 1600 (first production device) on which the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display) is displayed, 1. The timing at which the performance display starts to be executed after reception is delayed compared to other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" even after the reception has been received. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 232 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner (as shown in FIGS. 263(e1) and (e2)), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 263(f1) or (f2), the first acceptance period ends when the player's action is accepted. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tF3a (when timing tF3b arrives), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is The display according to the first aspect of the first extinction related display SK1 is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "1st disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period. In addition, even after the first post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is started, the period until the integrated image display IG is made difficult to view (timings tF3a to tF3b) is Since it is possible to confirm the aspect of the integrated image display IG with good visibility, it is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the first reception period, the corresponding post-reception performances include modes with low expectations (Fig. 263 (e1) to (i1)) and modes with high expectation (Fig. 263 (e2) to (i2)). Regardless of which is executed, the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1. Even in a situation where the first performance device (the third performance device 1600) is starting to execute, the expectation level can be maintained as a secret in the first performance device (the performance display device 1600).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. When timing tf3c arrives during the period during which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize), the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the first acceptance period. The execution of "first post-reception performance display UG1" as the post-reception performance is started. However, here, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 263( g1), the first aspect (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 263 (e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 263 (g2), the first reception A second aspect (first post-reception performance display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are displayed, the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or The first post-reception effect display UG1-2) will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after it is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) can be started without much delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display starts after the first reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the first reception period has already ended. The point of view is automatically shifted from the "integrated image display IG" to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first reception performance display UG1-2)". It becomes expected (after timing tF3c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 263(h1) or (h2), the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. ” will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, “1st post-reception performance display UG1 (1st post-reception performance display UG1-1 or 1st post-reception performance display UG1-2)” will be hidden. ” will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "first post-reception performance display UG1" refers to a plurality of modes (here, the first reception performance display UG1-1 or the first This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance displays UG1-2). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255(b), the "first post-reception effect display UG1" is displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and "first extinction related display SK-1" are hidden. Also, it will be executed for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 255), and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second performance device is prepared separately from the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the operation by the player is performed within the first reception period. When the reception is received, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 255(c), based on the reception, the first post-reception production (specific after the first reception) using the second production device is performed. Performance) is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tF3a when the reception is received in the first reception period, but only a part of the first reception performance (the first reception performance display) is delayed, The first post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tF3a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be, for example, provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body capable of effect operation, , it may be provided as a production lamp capable of producing production light emission. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations.

Note that the presentation example shown in FIG. 263 assumes that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 263(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 263(e1) As shown in FIG. As a first post-reception specific production UGT1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of production UGT1, a first post-reception production using the first production device (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is performed. It is now ready to start running. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A2 (FIGS. 263(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned post-first reception specific presentation UGT1 (first reception period) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific performance UGT1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the post-reception specific performance UGT1, it precedes the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running.

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 262, in addition to the first omen production display ZEH1 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the first reception period. 262 (b) to (d)). The first omen specific effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tF3 arrives, and is executed in such a manner that it straddles the timing tF3.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first reception period occurs, at timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255(d), It is assumed that the output of the reception acceptance sound is started (corresponding to "the situation where the output of ♪ is started in FIG. 262(c)"). In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the first acceptance period is audible output that straddles the timing tF3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 262(d)") when the first acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 255(d), FIGS. 263(e1) to (g1), or FIGS. 263(e2) to (g2), the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. Even if an action is accepted by the player while the player is playing, the acceptance acceptance sound will not be terminated midway and will only be output for a predetermined period of time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of acceptance periods, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is changed based on the acceptance. This includes a reception period that ends prematurely. Therefore, if an acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output within the first acceptance period, and a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound continues appears, it is difficult to determine whether the acceptance is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

However, during the first reception period, even if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output, the reception permissible sound will be terminated midway (the audible output state will be terminated midway). However, when the reception is made, the audible output of the first reception output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on this. It has become a thing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255(d), the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that is audibly output within the first acceptance period, and the audible sound that is audible as a result of acceptance within the first acceptance period. Since both the output sound "output sound after the first reception" can be output audibly, it is easier to recognize whether the reception period is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. This can make it even more difficult to recognize.

As shown in FIG. 255(d), such output sound after the first reception is similar to the "first reception effect display UG1", and the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK". -1" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time ("♪♪ is output in Figure 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1). (equivalent to “situation”). Regarding the output sound after the first reception, an example where the production progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 262(d) to “A2 (Fig. 263(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 255, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the first acceptance period occurs, the timing tF4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (the point in time when the first acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's action is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF3a (the first Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period, the integrated simulated image display IG is shown in FIG. Not only is the integrated image display IG not hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first reception period ends because the player's operation is not accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the first reception period after the end of the first reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the first disappearance related display SK1 is -2 (the second aspect of the first extinguishment related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the first reception period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the above-mentioned "first disappearance related display SK1-2" that appears when the player's action is not accepted within the first acceptance period is This is executed in a manner different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" that appears based on the acceptance of the player's action within the period. As a result, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" appears, it becomes possible to indicate that the action by the player has not been accepted, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed. .

After this, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-2", first disable the "integrated model image display IG". Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first extinction related display SK-2" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception performance) occurs. FIGS. 264 and 265 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a second reception period (second reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 264 (a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “second variation pattern” selected above. Become. Note that in the production examples shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first production display TE is displayed, but the second production display FE is not displayed.

However, in the performance related to the "second variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 256(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ The above-mentioned second reception period in which "reception regarding the performance after the second operation" is allowed when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a second predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the performance. (validity period) ("situation shown in FIG. 264(d)"). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second acceptance period occurs, when the above-mentioned first acceptance period occurs (FIG. 255) Similar to this, in connection with this, there is a foreshadowing display that suggests that the reception period (validity period) will soon occur, a mock image display that suggests the reception object (operation reception part, etc.), and a hint of the remaining time of the reception period. A gauge image display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the map image display, a disappearance-related display that makes the map image display difficult to visually recognize, and a post-reception effect that indicates the level of expectation (rate of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on the acceptance. Displays are made respectively. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the sample image display is displayed as an "integrated sample image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not necessarily limited to this and can be displayed separately. It may be displayed. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in this example as well, when timing tG1 arrives before the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 256(b) and 264(b), the foreshadowing effect is As a display, "second portent effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed. Also, regarding the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)", the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) is similar to the case of the example shown in FIG. 255. When timing tG2 arrives before the occurrence, it is displayed while the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" is being displayed (FIG. 256(b), FIG. 264(c) ). As shown in FIG. 264(c), at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed, Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second portent effect display ZEH2", in the case of the example shown in FIG. 262(c) (the portent effect display corresponding to the first reception period) It is similar to

Further, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264(d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. The information will be hidden when the application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (in this case, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. This is also the same as in the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). Note that the second acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tG4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 256(b) (second reception period), the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is Not only is the aspect (image display) different from that of the "first omen effect display ZEH1", but also the timing at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs (second reception post-effect display) It is not hidden when tG3 (timing at which acceptance is permitted) arrives, but is displayed in a form that straddles the timing tG3.

In other words, in this case, during the second reception period, not only the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second precursor" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "integrated image display IG" are displayed. Actions by the player can be accepted while the effect display ZEH2 is being displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second portent effect display ZEH2", and the reception period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension within the period.

Here, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or it may be displayed until the reception period (Here, the second reception period) may be hidden at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, for the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2), within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), the "integrated simulation" "Image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" so that the area that overlaps with "Image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" tends to be gradually reduced, the display range is displayed in a gradually reduced form. This is desirable in that the visibility of the image display IG is gradually improved within the acceptance period. Furthermore, the area in which the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap with each other during the entire period in which the second precursor effect display is displayed. For example, after a predetermined timing within the acceptance period of the entire period arrives, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed. You may also do so.

Further, the second omen effect display ZEH2 according to this example is displayed when a reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) or when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). The screen is hidden when no action by the player is accepted until a predetermined timing within the period.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 256, the effect changes from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tG3a, the second acceptance period ends, and the second acceptance period corresponds to the second acceptance period. The execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively low-expectation post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to a case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 256, at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated image display IG" Not only is the integrated image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated image display IG but also the second omen effect display ZEH2 are displayed at the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the effect after the second reception is started). ) at timing tG3a, it is not hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

That is, the second post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "second post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using the second performance display device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the "second reception specific performance" using a third performance device (speaker, etc.) and the second reception output sound using a third performance device (speaker). However, among these production devices, the production display device 1600 (first production device) on which the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display) is displayed, 2.The timing at which the performance display starts after reception is delayed compared to other production devices, so that even after the reception is received, the "integrated image display IG" and "second omen performance display" ZEH2" visibility is maintained.

According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, even after the reception is made, as shown in FIG. Which of the plural modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) was the phantom image display IG displayed, and which mode was the omen effect display (first omen effect display ZEH1, second omen effect display)? Since the player will be able to easily recognize whether the game has been displayed in the display ZEH2, etc., it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suitably suppressed.

Here, after the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG and the omen effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time during which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the application has been accepted and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are not displayed during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner as it was when it was displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that people may be late in noticing this.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 256(b) and FIG. 265(f1) or (f2), a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ended due to acceptance of the player's action. Then (when timing tG3b arrives), a display related to a "second disappearance-related display SK2" different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed. " is displayed, and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed in at least a part of the area where "second extinction related display SK2" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period. Furthermore, even after the second post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is started, until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed (timings tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second omen effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, and the integrated image display IG will not be made difficult to see except by the second omen effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner. In addition, when the reception is made after the second omen effect display ZEH2 is hidden within the second reception period, the second omen effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, the aspect of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

Furthermore, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second extinction related display SK2” is displayed while the “foreshadow effect display (here, second omen effect display ZEH2)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "second extinction related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by making the second omen effect display ZEH2 difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suggest that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. It is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the second precursor performance display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance performance (after timing tG3b). As a result, it is now possible to continue displaying the second omen effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the precursor effect display was displayed within the acceptance period. In addition, even after the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the precursor performance display is not displayed until it is made difficult to see (timings tG3a to tG3b). Since the mode (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 265 (e1) to (i1)) appear as corresponding post-reception effects, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 265 (e2) to (i1)) appear. (i2)) appears, different aspects (second extinction-related displays SK2-1, SK2-2) appear as the second extinction-related display SK2. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 265(f1) and (f2), the situation is such that the "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is different from the first aspect (second disappearance related display SK2-1) and the second aspect (second disappearance related display SK2- 2, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "second reception effect display" will be executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256(b), FIG. When timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the behavior (a mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) accepts the action in response to the movement by the player being accepted within the second acceptance period. The execution of "second reception performance display UG2" as a post-performance is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 264(d) to "B1 (Fig. 265(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 265( g1), the first aspect (second post-reception performance display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception performance display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 265 (e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 265 (g2), the second reception A second mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception performance display UG2 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2 (second extinction related display SK2-1 or second extinction related display SK2-2)" While these are displayed, the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" starts to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after the application is accepted within the second acceptance period, the first effect device It is now possible to start the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance display UG2) in (performance display device 1600) without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. You will be able to do this. Furthermore, since the second post-reception effect display UG2 starts while the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see, the second reception period has already ended. While suggesting that the player's gaze changes from "integrated image display IG" or "second omen effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second It is expected that the process will automatically shift to ``Post-reception performance display UG2-2)'' (after timing tG3c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 256(b) and FIG. 265(h1) or (h2), the second post-reception performance display UG2 (second reception performance display UG2-1 or second reception performance display UG2) -2)" is displayed, first, among "Integrated image display IG", "Second omen effect display ZEH2", and "Second extinction related display SK2", "Integrated image display IG" and "Second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. 265(i1) or (i2), , "Second disappearance related display SK2 (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is considered good, "second disappearance related display SK2" will be hidden. 2 post-reception performance display UG2 (second reception performance display UG2-1 or second reception performance display UG2-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "second reception performance display UG2" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the second reception performance display UG2-1 or the second reception performance display UG2-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance displays UG2-2). Therefore, the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is used for comparison even after the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2" are hidden. It will run for a long time.

Incidentally, in the production example (FIGS. 262 and 263) corresponding to the first reception period described above, even if the reception is made within the first reception period and the "first reception post-performance display UG1" is executed, The background image is maintained without being switched before and after the "first reception performance display UG1" is started. On the other hand, in the production example (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, when the reception is made within the second reception period and the "second reception performance display UG2" is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second reception effect display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 265(e) and 265(f) (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (time tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256) Even if there is a change in performance in the first performance device), the "second reception performance display UG2" can indicate that the performance has not started yet.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 265, the post-reception effect is such that the background image can be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even if the second reception period occurs, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) can display the information within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 256). Various displays are displayed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tG3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example as well, when a player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 256(b) and 256(c), based on the acceptance, , Start execution of a second post-reception performance (second post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the second post-reception performance (second reception performance display) using the first performance device. I try to let them do it.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tG3a when the reception is received in the second reception period, but only a part of the performance after the second reception (the display of the performance after the second reception) is delayed. The second post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tG3a without delay.

As described above, such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or it may be a device that can perform effect operations. It may be provided as a performance movable body, a performance lamp capable of producing production light, or the like. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIGS. 265(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 265(e1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the second post-reception specific presentation UGT 2 (second presentation device) corresponding to the second reception period. As a second post-reception specific production UGT2-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific production UGT2, a second post-reception production using the first production device (second post-reception production display UG2-1) is performed. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIGS. 265(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the second post-reception specific presentation UGT 2 (corresponding to the second reception period). As the second post-reception specific production UGT2-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the second post-reception specific production UGT2, a second post-reception production using the above-mentioned first production device (second post-reception production display UG2-2) ) is started before execution.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 264, apart from the second omen production display ZEH2 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the second reception period. 264 (b) to (d)). The second omen specific performance on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) is different from the second omen performance display ZEH2 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tG3 is reached, and is executed over the timing tG3.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 256(d) At tG2, an acceptance acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 264(c) and 264(d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the second acceptance period is one that is audibly output across the timing tG3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 264(d)") when the second acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a long-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively long period of time, and a short-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively short period of time. are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 256(d), the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs or after that time.

In the second acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the long-term permissible sound and/or short-time permissible sound are being audibly output, the , the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-time permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In addition, during the second reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound (long time permissible sound, short time permissible sound) is being audibly output, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound (such as "♪♪ ”) starts an audible output. In other words, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance that is performed in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance (output sound after the second reception) performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 256(d), such a second post-reception output sound is similar to the "second post-reception performance display UG2", as shown in "integrated image display IG" and "second disappearance related display SK2". ” will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in Figure 265 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)”) ). Regarding the output sound after the second reception, an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 264(d) to "B1 (Fig. 265(e1) to (i1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example where the production progresses from Fig. 264(d) to “B2 (Fig. 265(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the second reception period, the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound were respectively output as the reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and the first permissible sound As in the acceptance period, only one acceptance permission sound may be output.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 256, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the second acceptance period occurs, the timing tG4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (the point in time when the second acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG3a (the second As shown in FIG. 265(e3), the integrated simulated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period of In addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is also not made to be difficult to see. In this performance example, since the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG4, the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not displayed after timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends without the player's operation being accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the second reception period after the end of the second reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the second disappearance related display SK2 is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “second disappearance related display SK2-” is displayed. 1 or 2nd disappearance related display SK2-2'' is displayed, and at least a part of the area where ``second disappearance related display SK2'' is displayed is displayed as ``integrated image display IG (sample image display , gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second acceptance period ends without any acceptance, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the second acceptance period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2. The case means that if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from Fig. 264(d) to "B1 (Fig. 265(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, the case where "second extinction related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second extinction related display SK2 when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period means that If the action by the player had been accepted within the above, the effect would have progressed from Fig. 264(d) to "B2 (Fig. 265(e2) to (i2))" This corresponds to the case where a high post-reception performance was executed).

In other words, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the second acceptance period ends. By simply checking the appearance of the "second disappearance related display SK2" (second disappearance related display SK2-1, second disappearance related display SK2-2), the second reception performance will be in a less expected manner. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed in a highly expected manner, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "second extinction related display SK2", first the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second disappearance related display SK2" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

FIG. 257 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the third variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the production related to the "third variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (advance judgment), the third predetermined time period after the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tH3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the performance after the third operation" is allowed. The third acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the third reception performance based on the reception of the player's action (in the first performance device) 255 (or FIG. 262, 263) The first post-reception performance (the "first reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first reception performance display" in the third performance device) described above with reference to "Rear output sound"), but other than that, the structure is basically the same.

For example, timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257(b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "first omen effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the foreshadow effect display. Note that the "first portent effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Permissible timing) It is hidden when tH3 arrives. However, the point that it may be hidden before timing tH3 is the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, in the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor performance display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where the reception of actions by the player is permitted.

Furthermore, timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262(c), while "first portent effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, "integrated model image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. " will be displayed, and at least a part of the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed will overlap with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" will be displayed. The configurations of the "integrated image display IG" and "first omen effect display ZEH1" displayed in connection with the third reception period, as well as other examples related to these, are shown in FIG. 255 and FIG. 262, as described above with reference to FIG. 263, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Furthermore, timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262(d), the third acceptance period is This will occur. Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the application is accepted within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. The same is true. Note that the third acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tH4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player.

Furthermore, timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period ends based on the acceptance of the player's action, and the post-reception performance (after the third reception period) corresponding to the third reception period ends. performance) will begin to be executed. In addition, as for the third reception performance, at least a case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation level is executed and a case where a second mode with a relatively high expectation level is executed are prepared. The content of the performance (the content of the post-reception performance display, the post-reception specific performance, and the post-reception output sound) is different from the first post-reception performance above, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the multiple modes it is executed in. The points etc. are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception performance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". In addition, at timing tH3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the third post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The fact that the fake image display IG is not made difficult to view is also the same as in the case of the first post-reception presentation.

Furthermore, timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the common corresponding display in the first reception period and the third reception period 1 extinction related display SK1) is started. The configuration of the "first extinguishment related display SK1" displayed in connection with the third reception period and other examples related thereto are as described above with reference to FIG. 255 and FIG. 263. Since there is, I will omit it here.

According to the configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) related to "the period from when the first omen effect display ZEH1 is displayed to when the first extinction related display SK1 is displayed", the first It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception period and the third reception period is occurring (or has occurred), and this makes it difficult to recognize whether the second presentation device or the third presentation device To improve the game's interest by encouraging the player to take an interest in the game, and by creating a strong interest in which aspect of the post-reception performance display (the first post-reception performance display, the third post-reception performance display) will appear. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, even in the third reception period, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a mode with a low level of expectation or a mode with a high level of expectation, the first disappearance related display SK1 is Since the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) is made to appear, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) has started to be executed, the first presentation device (The effect display device 1600) can maintain the level of expectation as a secret. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different extinction-related displays may appear depending on the level of expectation. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Further, timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the third presentation device (performance display device 1600) displays the “third reception performance display” as a post-reception performance in response to the reception of the player's action within the third reception period. (The type of preview performance is different from the first reception performance display)" will start to be executed. As for this "performance display after the third reception", multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation is executed as the third reception presentation, and a mode with a high expectation is executed. As mentioned above, different modes appear as the "third post-reception effect display" depending on the case.

That is, in this case, the execution of the "third post-reception effect display" is started while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are being displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to create a critical situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred, and it is possible to create a situation where the player's gaze becomes It is expected that there will be a natural transition from ``fake image display IG'' to ``post-reception performance display'' (after timing tH3c).

In this example as well, when the display related to the "third post-reception performance display" is started, regardless of the mode, while the "third post-reception performance display" is being displayed, first, Of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first disappearance related display SK-1" is hidden. A display related to "3rd Reception Effect Display" will now be displayed.

In this regard, as described above, the "third post-reception effect display" is also displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the "third post-reception effect display" also applies after the "integrated image display IG" and "first extinction related display SK-1" are hidden. , will be executed for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 257) and within a limited time. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result of this, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) sets the start timing (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) in response to the reception to a point earlier than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted in the third acceptance period, the third acceptance period is A third post-reception performance (a third post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to a third post-reception performance (a third post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I have to. The content of the third post-reception specific performance is also different from the first post-reception specific performance, but it is basically performed in the same way as the first post-reception specific performance.

For example, as the specific production after the third reception, multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and as the third reception production, a mode with a low expectation is executed and a mode with a high expectation is executed. Depending on the case, different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) as the specific presentation after the third reception. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 257(b) and (c), the third post-reception specific performance using the second performance device is changed to the third post-reception performance display using the first performance device. The point that the execution is started in advance is also the same as in the case of the specific effect after the first reception described above.

Also, when the third reception period occurs, similar to the case of the first reception period, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) displays a foreshadowing effect (common support for the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first sign specifying performance) is executed. In addition, in this case, the omen specifying effect (first omen specifying effect) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the third omen specifying effect It is executed even when the timing tH3 when the acceptance period occurs, and it is more desirable to execute it in a manner that straddles the timing tH3.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and even when the third reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 257(d) At tH2, output of the acceptance permission sound is started. In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to the third reception period is output audibly over the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs, and the reception permission sound is audibly output. Among them, actions by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that this acceptance permission sound be the same as the acceptance permission sound that is output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, in the third acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I'm trying to finish it.

In addition, during the third reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, not only will the reception permission sound be terminated midway, but also the Based on this, audible output of a third post-acceptance output sound that is different from the first post-acceptance output sound, the second post-acceptance output sound, etc. is started. In other words, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance that is performed in response to the reception. There will be no competition (overlapping) with the performance (output sound after the third reception) performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 257(d), the output sound after the third reception is similar to the "effect display after the third reception", and the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-". 1" will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. In addition, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the output sound after the third reception, and a mode with a low expectation level is executed and a mode with a high expectation level is executed as the performance after the third reception. It is desirable that different output sounds (modes) be output depending on the situation.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred during the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives just by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device or By checking the third performance device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a arrives earlier than that. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to concentrate only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances using more performance devices.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 257, even if the player's action is not accepted within the third acceptance period, the player's action is basically not accepted within the first acceptance period. It is the same as if it were not done.

That is, in this case, after the third acceptance period occurs, the timing tH4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (the point in time when the third acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH3a (the third Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period of It is also not made to make the fake image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (the first acceptance period and the third The display according to the second aspect of the first extinction related display SK1 that corresponds to the common reception period is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, if an operation by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type of operation occurred during the acceptance period, so the player is strongly urged to perform the operation. You will be able to do this. In addition, in the third acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, when the action by the player is not accepted, different aspects will appear as "first extinction related display SK1" depending on the expectation level. However, a mode (first extinction related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first extinction related display SK1-1) that appears when the acceptance is made appears.

Then, among the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first extinction related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) occurs. FIGS. 266 and 267 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (situation shown in FIG. 266(a)). , Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In the production example shown in FIG. 266(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE, which is depicted as a frog character, are respectively displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed not at the start of the fluctuation but during the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings.

However, in the production related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 258, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ starts regardless of which result is obtained as the production judgment (advance judgment). When the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since timing tI3 (this may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state), the "fourth operation" is reached. The fourth reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding post-production" is permitted is generated (situation shown in FIG. 266(d)). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fourth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) 255 (or FIG. 262, 263) The first post-reception performance (the "first reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first reception performance display" in the third performance device) described above with reference to The output sound is different. In addition, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, a fourth extinction-related display SK1 different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is set as "an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". Although it differs from the case of the first reception period in that the related display SK4 appears, the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the performances that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance), but here is an explanation of what is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception performance). I'll omit that. That is, regarding matters that are not particularly mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 258(b) and 266(b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), "first omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed as the foreshadow effect display. ” starts execution.

Furthermore, timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266(c), while "first portent effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, "integrated model image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. " will be displayed, and at least a part of the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed will overlap with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" will be displayed.

Further, timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266(d), the fourth reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. This will occur.

Further, timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 258, the effect progresses from FIG. In this example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tI3a, the fourth acceptance period ends, and the period corresponding to the fourth acceptance period ends. The execution of the post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 266(d) to "C1 (Fig. 267(e1) to (i1))" has relatively low expectations as a post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to a case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect. However, it is not necessary to prepare multiple modes with different expectations as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever an acceptance is received, a specific mode (for example, C1 (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1))) may also appear. In this case, even if it is a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period, multiple modes will not be prepared depending on the level of expectation, and when there is an acceptance, the same mode will always be the same. The aspect will be made to appear.

Similarly, during this fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. At timing tI3a, which is the point in time (when the presentation after reception is started), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see. .

Furthermore, timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made in the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth extinction related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “fourth extinction related display SK4” is displayed. " is displayed, and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed in at least a part of the area where "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tI3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1)) appear as corresponding post-reception effects, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 267 (e2) to (i1)) appear. (i2)) appears, different aspects (fourth extinction related displays SK4-1, SK4-2) appear as the fourth extinction related display SK4. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267(f1) and (f2), the "fourth post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the fourth disappearance related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is different from the first mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4- 2), it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "fourth post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

Further, timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing, the player's action within the fourth acceptance period is In response to the reception, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts executing the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" as a post-reception performance. However, in this case, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 266(d) to "C1 (Fig. 267(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 267( g1), the first aspect (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 267 (e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 267 (g2), the fourth reception A second mode (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1 or fourth extinction-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, "the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed. 4 after-reception performance display UG4 (fourth reception after-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth reception performance display UG4-2)" will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after it is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the after-reception performance (fourth after-reception performance display UG4) without much delay compared to other performance devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest. In addition, since the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the fourth reception period has already ended, and the player The gaze destination automatically shifts from the "integrated image display IG" to the "4th post-reception performance display UG4 (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception performance display UG4-2)". becomes expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, also in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to "4th post-reception production display UG4 (4th post-reception production display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception production display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. First, hide the "integrated image display IG" of the "integrated image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2" while the "effect display UG4-2)" is being displayed. . After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. 4 extinction-related display SK4-1 or 4th extinction-related display SK4-2)" will be hidden. As a result, even though visibility is good, "4th reception effect display UG4 (4th reception display SK4-2)" will be hidden. A display related to ``After Effect Display UG4-1 or 4th Post-Reception Effect Display UG4-2)'' is now performed.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as a reception period until the timing tI3b arrives just by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device or By checking the third performance device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a arrives earlier than that. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to concentrate only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances using more performance devices.

Furthermore, even if the player only looks at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth extinction-related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction-related display SK1 described above, is This appears as a condition in which the morphed image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, by checking such a mode, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type of reception period has occurred, before the "fourth reception effect display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this regard, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" refers to multiple modes (here, the fourth reception performance display UG4-1 or the fourth This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UG4-2). Therefore, the "4th post-reception effect display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "4th extinction related display SK4" are hidden. .

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even if the fourth reception period occurs, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) can display the information within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 258). Various displays are displayed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when a player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 258(b) and 258(c), the second performance is A fourth post-reception performance (a fourth post-reception specific performance) using the device is started to be performed prior to a fourth post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. There is.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a when the reception is received in the fourth reception period, but only a part of the performance after the fourth reception (the display of the performance after the fourth reception) is delayed, The execution of the fourth post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tI3a without delay.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIGS. 267(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 267(e1) As shown in FIG. As the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UGT4, the fourth post-reception performance (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1) using the above-mentioned first performance device Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIGS. 267(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which “two swords” are displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from that in the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT 4 (corresponding to the fourth reception period). As the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4, the fourth post-reception performance (4th post-reception performance display UG4-2) using the above-mentioned first performance device is implemented. ) is started before execution.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 266, apart from the first omen production display ZEH1 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. The foreshadowing effect (fourth omen specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 266(b) to (d)). The fourth omen specific performance on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) is different from the first omen performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tI3 arrives, and is executed in such a way that it straddles the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the omen performance corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as a performance (fourth omen identification performance) different from the first omen identification performance shown in FIG. 262. It may be executed as the same effect as the first omen specific effect shown. In this case, even when checking the second presentation device, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period will occur.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 258(d) is At tI2, an acceptance acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 266(b) to 266(d)) is started to be output. That is, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is one that is audibly output across the timing tI3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 266(d)") when the fourth acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the reception permission sound is terminated (audible) based on the acceptance. (terminates the output state midway).

In addition, in the fourth acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, not only will the reception permission sound be terminated midway, but also the Based on this, the audible output of a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), etc.) that is different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started. It becomes. In other words, in this case, in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (reception permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the effect that the reception has been made. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance (output sound after the fourth reception) performed accordingly.

Similar to the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4", such output sound after the fourth reception is the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" as shown in FIG. 258(d). ” will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in Figure 267 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)” ). Regarding the output sound after the fourth reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 266(d) to “C2 (Fig. 267(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

Regarding the reception permission sound that is output corresponding to the fourth reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period occurs, it is necessary to It is desirable that the sound is the same as the corresponding acceptance acceptance sound. However, they do not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 258, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the fourth acceptance period has occurred, the timing tI4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (the point in time when the fourth acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI3a (the fourth As shown in FIG. 267(e3), the integrated simulated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period of In addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is also not made to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends because the player's action is not accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the fourth reception period after the end of the fourth reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “fourth extinction related display SK4-” is displayed. 1 or 2nd disappearance related display SK4-2'' is displayed, and at least a part of the area where ``4th disappearance related display SK4'' is displayed is displayed as ``integrated image display IG (sample image display , gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth acceptance period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the fourth acceptance period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player's action is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. The case means that if the player's action had been accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from Fig. 266(d) to "C1 (Fig. 267(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, the case where "4th extinction related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth extinction related display SK4 when the player's action is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period means If the action by the player had been accepted in the above, the effect would have progressed from Fig. 266(d) to "C2 (Fig. 267(e2) to (i2))" This corresponds to the case where a high post-reception performance was executed).

In other words, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the fourth acceptance period ends. By simply checking the mode of "4th disappearance related display SK4" (4th disappearance related display SK4-1, 4th disappearance related display SK4-2) that appears, you can see that the performance after the 4th reception is in a low expected manner. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed in a highly expected manner, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "fourth disappearance related display SK4", "integrated model image display IG" is first hidden. do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

In addition, in the fourth reception period, similarly to the first reception period, the corresponding post-reception effects are modes with low expectations (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and modes with high expectation (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1)). 267(e2) to (i2)), the same specific aspect may appear as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the player's action is not accepted in the fourth acceptance period, the same specific aspect will appear as the fourth extinction related display SK4, unlike in the case of the first acceptance period described above. Become.

By the way, as mentioned above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE ( Here, a second effect display FE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and a second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262(b) and 262(c), in a situation where the "first portent effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the first effect display TE And the second effect display FE is made so that it is not made difficult to visually recognize by the "first omen effect display ZEH1". Furthermore, after the first reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. 263 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), mode) and the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (the mode when the acceptance is not accepted), but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance related display SK1 (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 or first disappearance-related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to see.

On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266(b) and (c), the first effect display is The TE and the second effect display FE are not made difficult to visually recognize by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1." Furthermore, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2), but the first effect display TE is not made difficult to recognize by the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if it is not remembered which type of reception period the type of extinction-related display SK corresponds to, the second effect is displayed when the extinction-related display SK is displayed. By simply checking whether the display FE is made difficult to view, it becomes possible to infer which type of reception period has occurred. In addition, the first effect display TE is configured not to be made difficult to recognize by the disappearance related display SK, regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the disappearance related display SK. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed, and then the "second reception effect display UG2" is displayed. During the period up to, the first effect display TE may be displayed among the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

In other words, in this case, the type of reception period can be inferred (at least the first Since it is now possible to guess that it is neither the reception period nor the fourth reception period, the second effect display FE itself does not imply the degree of expectation regarding the changing symbol effect. Even so, it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using the second performance display FE.

In addition, even when the second reception period occurs, the first effect display TE will be difficult to visually recognize due to the foreshadowing effect display and disappearance-related display, as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period and the above-mentioned fourth reception period. It is made so that it will not be affected.

FIG. 259 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "fifth variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), the fifth predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. When the elapsed timing tJ3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "reception regarding the performance after the fifth operation" is allowed. The fifth acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the fifth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "5th post-reception performance display", "5th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "5th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Further, the "fifth omen effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from each omen effect display corresponding to other reception periods. However, the methods for displaying the "Fifth post-reception effect display" and "Fifth omen effect display" (the start and end times of the display, and how it compares with other image displays until it is hidden) 255, 256, etc.) are explained in the display effects performed in connection with the first reception period and the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period (Figs. 255, 256, 262 to 265), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance). However, regarding the configuration that is the same as the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), we may mention that it is the same, but beyond that. We omit the explanation here. In other words, regarding matters not specifically mentioned, the performance will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), and there will be no exceptions or variations. The same applies to examples.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "fifth omen effect display" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned omen effect display.

In this regard, the "fifth omen effect display" is of a type that is displayed across the timing tJ3 at which the fifth reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 259(b). That is, although the "fifth omen effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" that is displayed corresponding to the second reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden, etc., the "second omen effect display ZEH2" will be explained with reference to FIGS. 256, 264, and 265. The display will be performed using the same method as described above. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

Furthermore, timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "fifth omen effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which the ``sample image display IG'' is displayed overlaps with the area in which the ``fifth omen effect display'' is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth reception period occurs while the "fifth omen effect display" and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" are being displayed. It happens.

Furthermore, timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance performance (fifth post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period starts to be executed. It happens. Note that, similarly to the first post-reception performance (Fig. 263) and the second post-reception performance (Fig. 265), the fifth post-reception performance also differs between the case where the first aspect with relatively low expectations is executed and the case where the relatively low expectation level is executed. There are cases where the second mode with high expectations is executed.

Further, timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ3b arrives, "an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear.

In this regard, when an application is received during the fifth reception period, the above-mentioned "first extinction related display SK1" which corresponds to the first reception period in common with the first reception period is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The display is set to start. Regarding the "first disappearance related display SK1" and "the start and end times of the display, and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden," etc., see Figures 255 and 263. As explained with reference to. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the performance after the fifth reception is "relatively expected Different modes may appear depending on when the "first mode with a low level of expectation" is executed and when the "second mode with a relatively high expectation level" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first disappearance-related display SK1 (Here, the first extinction related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263) which is the first aspect) is displayed.On the other hand, as the performance after the fifth reception, the first extinction related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263) which is the first mode When the "mode" is executed, if a mode different from "first disappearance related display SK1-1" appears as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the first reception When the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed in accordance with the period, make the user aware of the possibility that "the second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In this case, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception production, the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the first post-reception production. It is desirable to set the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) to be higher than the actual time. The percentage may be 100%.

In addition, when the "first aspect with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first disappearance related display SK1- 1", a "first extinction related display SK1-2 which is a second aspect of the first extinction related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. That is, in this case, when the first disappearance related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first extinction related display SK1-2 appeared as a result of the acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, or whether the first disappearance related indication SK1-2 appeared as a result of the acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the first extinction related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of not being able to receive the game in time, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "second aspect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the "1st disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "relative expectation" is set as a production after the fifth reception. In order to more appropriately make people aware of the possibility that the "second mode with a low degree of intensity" will be executed, the foreshadowing effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period should be used instead of the "fifth omen effect display". It is desirable that the "first omen effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period be executed.

In addition, even if an application is received in the fifth reception period, as shown in FIG. 259, the second The fifth post-reception performance (fifth post-reception specific performance) using the production device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the fifth post-reception production (fifth post-reception production display) using the first production device. Start execution in advance. Similarly, the fifth post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (fifth precursor specific performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Further, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 262, instead of the fifth omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the fifth acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 259(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 259(d), similar to the reception permissible sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs, the "long-term permissible sound" and the "short-time permissible sound" are each audibly output as the reception permissible sound. 256, 264 and 264 for information on the start and end times of audible output, how to interact with other effects until the audible output ends, etc. The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptable sound" with reference to H.265. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the fifth reception period occurs, just like the reception permission sound that is output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur, only one reception permission sound is output. may be output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as being terminated midway.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output corresponding to other acceptance periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the production performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (fifth reception There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that, similarly to the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the second reception, the fifth post-reception output sound also has a relatively The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 259, if the player's action is not accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the fifth acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tJ4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tJ4 (the point in time when the fifth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see.

After this, even if no action is accepted by the player, the display of the fifth disappearance related display SK5 will be started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

If the application is not accepted during the fifth acceptance period, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see," as with the second acceptance period, the acceptance will be temporarily accepted during the fifth acceptance period. The mode that would have appeared if it had been (different modes depending on the level of expectation) now appears. However, similar to the first acceptance period, an aspect that cannot appear when the application is accepted in the fifth acceptance period may be made to appear.

FIG. 260 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "sixth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the sixth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the production related to the "sixth variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (preliminary judgment), the sixth predetermined time period after the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tK3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding production after the 6th operation" is allowed. The sixth acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if an action by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the sixth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "6th post-reception performance display", "6th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "6th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). In addition, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance), the simulated image display (here In this case, the integrated image display) is hidden. However, the method of displaying "6th reception effect display" and "sample image display" (such as when the display starts and ends, and how it compares with other image displays until it is hidden) 255, 262, 263, etc.) are the same as those explained in the display effects (FIGS. 255, 262, 263), and other configurations as well. This method is basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance). However, regarding the configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception performance), we may mention that they are the same, but further explanation will be omitted here. That is, regarding matters that are not particularly mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tK1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "first precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the foreshadow effect display.

Furthermore, timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "first portent effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which "sample image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which "first omen effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends and the execution of the post-acceptance performance (sixth post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started. It happens. Note that the sixth post-reception performance is similar to the first post-reception performance (Fig. 263), in which the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed. There are cases where it is executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 260, there is no process related to the performance related to the sixth reception period that corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Gauge image display) will not become difficult to visually recognize until it is hidden. This is true regardless of whether the ``low expectation mode'' or the ``high expectation mode'' appears as the performance after the sixth reception (timing tF3b does not exist). The same holds true when the sixth acceptance period ends without any action by the player being accepted during the sixth acceptance period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, during other reception periods, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" can be visually recognized until the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is hidden after the reception period ends. Despite the appearance of aspects that make it difficult to display, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is hidden during the sixth acceptance period even if the acceptance period ends. Since the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize this (disappearance-related display SK) does not appear during this period, it is possible that the sixth acceptance period has ended (a situation in which the player's actions have been discontinued). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether there is something in the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the application is received during the sixth reception period, as shown in FIG. 260, based on the reception, the second production device (here, A sixth post-reception performance (sixth post-reception specific performance) using the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to a sixth post-reception performance (sixth post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. . Similarly, the sixth post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (sixth precursor specific performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Furthermore, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 262, rather than the sixth omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the sixth acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 260(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. Regarding such acceptance permissible sounds, ``the start and end times of audible output, and how they relate to other productions until the audible output ends,'' etc., are shown in Figures 258, 266, and Figures. The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to H.267. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the sixth reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds are output respectively in the same way as the reception permission sound that is output when the second reception period occurs. When the process is executed, the process may be outputted as being terminated prematurely.

In any case, in the sixth acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to other reception periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, there will be a performance performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and a performance performed in response to the reception (sixth reception). There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that the output sound after the sixth reception, as well as the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the fourth reception, is different from the case where the after-reception effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 260, if the player's action is not accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the sixth acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tK4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the sixth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tK4 (the point in time when the sixth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see. However, as mentioned above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the above-mentioned timing tK4 arrives without receiving any action by the player, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear. .

FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "seventh variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the seventh variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the seventh variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "seventh variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), the seventh predetermined time period has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. When the elapsed timing tL3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding production after the 7th operation" is allowed. The seventh acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the seventh post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "7th post-reception performance display", "7th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "7th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Further, the "seventh omen effect display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is also different from each omen effect display corresponding to other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", each extinction-related display corresponding to the other reception period A different "7th extinction related display" appears. However, the methods for displaying the "7th post-reception effect display", "7th omen effect display", and "7th disappearance related display" (the start and end times of the display, and the time until it is hidden) (how it interacts with other image displays in between, etc.) is the same as that explained in any of the display effects performed in connection with each reception period mentioned above, and other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance). However, regarding the configurations that are the same as in other reception periods (other reception performances), we will mention that they are the same, but will omit further explanation here. Further, regarding matters not specifically mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the display of the foreshadow effect starts to be executed on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

However, as mentioned above, during the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance), the "seventh precursor performance display", which does not correspond to other reception periods, is displayed as a corresponding precursor performance display. There is. As shown in FIG. 261(b), the "seventh omen effect display" is of a type that is not displayed when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this period. . In other words, although the "seventh omen effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "first omen effect display ZEH1" that is displayed corresponding to the first reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), the "seventh omen effect display" is different from the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden, etc., please refer to FIG. 256 and FIG. The display is done using a method. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

Furthermore, timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "seventh portent effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which the "sample image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "seventh omen effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends, and the execution of the post-acceptance performance (seventh post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the seventh acceptance period is started. It happens. Note that, similarly to the first post-reception performance (Fig. 263), in the seventh post-reception performance, there are cases in which the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and cases where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed. There are cases where it is executed.

Furthermore, timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. However, as mentioned above, when an application is accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the "seventh disappearance related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods is displayed as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display will start (timing tL3b).

Here, although the "seventh extinction related display" differs in presentation content (display image) from the above-mentioned "first extinction related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, "display start time 255, FIG. 256, FIG. The display is performed in the same manner as described for "Display SK1". The same applies to other examples and modifications. In addition, in both cases where the seventh post-reception production is executed as a mode with relatively low expectations and when it is executed as a mode with relatively high expectations, "display" is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (seventh disappearance related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the presentation after the seventh reception Different modes may appear depending on when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

Furthermore, timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, the player does not receive a request within the seventh acceptance period while the display related to the "seventh extinction related display" (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing. In response to the reception of the motion, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts executing the "seventh post-reception performance display" as a post-reception performance.

In addition, even if the application is received during the seventh reception period, as shown in FIG. 261, based on the reception, the second production device (here, A seventh post-reception performance (seventh post-reception specific performance) using the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to a seventh post-reception performance (seventh post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. . Similarly, the seventh post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (seventh precursor specific performance) corresponding to the seventh reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Furthermore, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 262, rather than the seventh omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the seventh acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 261(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. Regarding such acceptance permissible sounds, ``the start and end times of audible output, and how they relate to other productions until the audible output ends,'' etc., are shown in Figures 258, 266, and Figures. The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to H.267. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the seventh reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds are output respectively in the same way as the reception permission sound that is output when the second reception period occurs. When the process is executed, the process may be outputted as being terminated prematurely.

In any case, in the seventh acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output corresponding to other reception periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, there will be a performance performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and a performance performed in response to the reception (seventh reception). There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that, similarly to the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the fourth reception, the seventh post-reception output sound also has a relatively The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 261, if the player's action is not accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the seventh acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tL4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tL4 (the point in time when the seventh acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see.

After this, even if no action is accepted by the player, the seventh disappearance related display will be started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to view" when the application is not accepted during the seventh reception period, the same as the first reception period, the application is not accepted during the seventh reception period. At times, aspects that would otherwise never appear are beginning to appear. However, like the second reception period, the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted in the seventh reception period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may be made to appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a first reception period to a seventh reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

That is, first of all, no matter which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, regarding the sample image display that is displayed using a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), The display can be displayed even after the performance is progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance is started). As a result, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance, the game player can check in which mode (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)) the sample image was displayed during the acceptance period. This makes it possible for people to understand.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are advanced when an acceptance is received (conversation preview as a performance after reception, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.), and the preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance) ) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1st reception period to 7th reception period) with different types (types of), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It is said that

In this regard, during the first reception period to the seventh reception period, if a movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception performance display (from the first reception performance display to the seventh After reception, the effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, in the first to fifth acceptance periods and the seventh acceptance period, if a player's action is accepted, a post-acceptance performance display is displayed based on the acceptance. In addition, ``a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' is made to appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which mode appeared as the sample image display, but also to check whether the ``sample image'' is displayed before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize it (disappearance-related display), the player's attention naturally shifts from the "sample image display" to the "post-reception performance display." It is now expected that people will be able to

However, since the sample image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, if the sample image display is to be displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the performance display is already displayed after the reception, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when an acceptance is made during any of the first to fifth acceptance periods, and the seventh acceptance period, the sample image display is changed to ``a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display )" is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception effect display is displayed while "a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is appearing. I try to do that. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, the display changes from the pre-acceptance display (sample image display) to the post-acceptance display while "a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears. The transition to the display performance (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception performance display" are common in that they are displayed based on reception. However, "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. 265 (f1), FIG. 267 (f1), etc. It appears in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display when a display is being displayed. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" refers to a situation where a sample image display is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), and FIG. 267 (g1). Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. Furthermore, in each of the above examples, it was decided that the "post-reception performance display" would start displaying when the sample image display was being displayed; however, for the "post-reception production display", the sample image display The display does not necessarily have to be started when the image is being displayed, and the display may be started after the sample image display is hidden.

Regarding the "manner in which the scale image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)", the method of "appearing in a manner that makes the scale image display difficult to recognize" is to remove at least part of the area where the scale image display is displayed. In addition to methods that are achieved by preferentially displaying an image display that is different from the sample image display (displayed on the front layer), there is also a method that achieves this by displaying an image different from the sample image display as a priority (displaying it on the front layer). It is possible to adopt a method that achieves this by displaying an image (video) that is made to be visible (invisibly). Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display itself, rather than displaying a separate image from the sample image display. On the other hand, regarding the "post-reception performance display", a method for "appearing in a manner that does not make the sample image display difficult to see" is to display the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area where the sample image display is displayed. However, in addition to a method that is realized by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer) in a manner where the sample image display is prioritized, at least while the sample image display is being displayed. It is possible to adopt a method in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed only in an area other than the area where the sample image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the simulated image display in at least a part of the area where the simulated image display is displayed, It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to a situation in which the "post-reception performance display" is not yet displayed, before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. It appears below. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" has not yet been displayed, the sample image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, even though the sample image display is made visible, the ``post-reception performance display'' may appear soon, and the player's attention is made to change from the ``display of the sample image that is difficult to see''. You will be able to prompt people in advance to prepare.

In addition, if the application is received during the first to fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc., the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' will be changed to ``post-reception presentation display.'' ” can be displayed even after the “post-reception effect display” is displayed, and is hidden while the “post-reception effect display” is displayed. As a result, during the period during which the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in a wider range. Since it becomes possible to provide the effects related to the "post-reception effects display," it becomes possible to improve the game's interest by changing the effects during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIG. 263 (g1), (h1), FIG. As shown in 267 (g1) and (h1), regarding the "manner in which the display of a sample image becomes difficult to recognize (disappearance-related display)", not only the area in which the display of the sample image is displayed, but also the area where the sample image display is displayed. is displayed even in areas where it is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but due to the "mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. At least a part of the "display" is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to see (for example, displayed on a rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the ``mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' appears as one that makes not only the sample image display but also the ``post-reception effect display'' difficult to visually recognize. It is expected that this will improve both the performance until the sample image display is hidden, and the performance when the display of the "post-reception performance display" starts. Become.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. '' is not displayed, apart from the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'', there is a specific presentation after reception that does not make the sample image display difficult to see (using the second presentation device). (After reception) can appear in a manner depending on the level of expectation. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) Appears in a situation where the "state in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" occurs before the "state in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears. That's what I do. In addition, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) will continue until after the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has ended. There is.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, it is assumed that the precursory performance display is executed over the timing at which the sample image display is displayed. In addition, in some of the above-mentioned production examples, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, it is possible to receive an application while the precursor production display is displayed, and when the reception is made, The "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is such that both the sample image display and the precursor effect display are made difficult to visually recognize (such as the above-mentioned priority display).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears, neither the simulated image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the entirety of them. , allowing at least some unobstructed visibility. That is, by gradually deteriorating the visibility of the sample image display and the precursor effect display (increasing the overlapping area), "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is executed. There is.

Also, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. becomes. In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image has not been terminated and will continue even though ``a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' has appeared since the acceptance of the sample image display. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is limited to the display of the sample image. In addition, we decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, based on the acceptance, after the first acceptance The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and a mode (first extinction related display SK1) in which the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize can appear separately from the first post-reception effect display UG1. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a second post-acceptance effect display UG1 different from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 is displayed based on the acceptance. The post-reception performance display UG2 can be displayed, and in addition to the second post-reception performance display UG2, a mode different from that in the first reception period (second A disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the sample image display can be performed without checking which of the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception performance display. It becomes possible to infer the type of post-acceptance performance display by simply checking what mode (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) was the mode that made it difficult to visually recognize.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception performance display that is different from both the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and the "second post-reception performance display UG2," but it is possible to display a third post-reception performance display that is different from the third post-reception performance display UG1. Apart from this, the above-mentioned mode (first extinction related display SK1) corresponding to the above-mentioned first reception period can also appear as a production mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance displays will appear, as a mode in which the simulated image display is made difficult to visually recognize. However, as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display, when the second disappearance related display SK2 appears, it is possible to infer that the second post-reception effect display will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a "disappearance-related display" is used to display (prioritized display) a "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in an area that includes at least a part of the area where the scale image display is displayed. We decided to realize it as However, it is also possible to realize a performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the simulated image display when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1) appears as the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display", if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be won due to the symbol change. It is desirable that the rate (expectation level) of stopping is different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the precursor performance display is the same (the first precursor performance display), but when the "first extinction related display SK1" appears as a "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the first (3rd reception period) and a mode different from the "1st extinction related display SK1" appears (4th reception period), or when this mode does not appear (6th reception period) ).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, although the foreshadowing performance displays (the first harbinger performance display, the fourth harbinger performance display) are different, the same aspect (the first disappearance related display SK1 ) may appear (first reception period, fifth reception period).

According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is determined which type of performance is being executed after reception, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, the first performance device has a state in which the simulated image display is relatively easy to view and a state in which the simulated image display is relatively difficult to recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, it is still necessary to check which mode has appeared as the sample image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception presentation (post-reception specific presentation) using the second presentation device, by making the sample image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to It is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his gaze to the "second performance device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is based on the visibility of the sample image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) since before the reception was received. Execution is started in such a way that it does not affect the More specifically, the sample image display is displayed in a predetermined area on the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is This is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display is started after the appearance timing of the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. The display may be started at the timing when "" appears.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the display of the model image becomes difficult to visually recognize" is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the display of the model image is displayed." I decided to do so. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the sample image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations. According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., is maintained and continued even after acceptance. It is also possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image was displayed within the acceptance period.

However, in this case, if the period is immediately after the reception, the post-reception performance must be performed under such conditions (the display related to the sample image display is maintained). That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only a limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, as time passes and "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the map image display (disappearance-related display)" appears, the post-reception performance will be performed under the condition that "the visibility of the map image display may be deteriorated." Since this becomes possible, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation effects with different characteristics (the specific effect after reception in the second effect device and the effect display after reception in the first effect device) in stages, it is possible to control the manner in which the sample image is displayed even after acceptance. While making it easy to confirm, it is also possible to suitably play a role as a post-operation effect.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if the second precursor production display is displayed as a premonition production display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, "the pattern image display becomes difficult to see". "The second disappearance related display SK1 (FIG. 265) appears. In addition, if the 7th portent effect display is displayed as a harbinger effect display, if the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period, the 7th extinction related display will appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" It looks like this. On the other hand, if the "first omen effect display" that is different from the above-mentioned "second omen effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh omen effect display" is displayed as the omen effect display, within the corresponding reception period. When acceptance is made, the first disappearance-related display appears (in the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period) and the fourth disappearance-related indication appears (as a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize). There is a fourth reception period).

That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect display or the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as a precursor effect display, at that point, the system recognizes what mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". You will be able to do so.

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "first portent performance display" which is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second portent performance display" or the above-mentioned "seventh portent performance display") is used as the portent performance display. is displayed, even if the application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there are cases in which the ``mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize'' does not appear (sixth acceptance period). There is.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display is in a mode (here, the first omen effect display) that is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second omen effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh omen effect display"). If executed, whether the above-mentioned "manner in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself appears within the period from the time when the acceptance is made until the display of the sample image is hidden. Since the image is now considered unknown, the performance from the time it is accepted until the sample image display is hidden has been improved, making it possible to maintain a good sense of tension. become able to.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples may be realized by being modified to the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another omen production display). Good too. In other words, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when a movement by a player is accepted during the acceptance period until when the simulated image display is hidden, "the simulated image display becomes difficult to see". ``aspects'' can appear. In this regard, in this modification, when a specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display, the seventh omen effect display, or another omen effect display not mentioned above) is displayed as the omen effect display, Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the above-mentioned ``mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize'' itself is prevented from appearing. In other words, in this case, from the time when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner until the sample image display is hidden, the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' does not appear and the ``sample image display'' is not displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the display of the sample image is not made difficult to recognize due to the relationship between the "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize".

In this case, also in this modified example, if the precursor effect display is executed as the "first precursor effect display" and the reception is received within the corresponding reception period, the reception will not be accepted within the corresponding reception period. (1st reception period, 3rd reception period, 4th reception period) and 2. Cases where the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' appears when ” may not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display may be different from a specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display, the seventh omen effect display, or another omen effect display not mentioned above) (here, , the first precursor effect display), it is unclear whether the above-mentioned ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' will appear. The performance until the image display is turned off is improved, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Regarding the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), each configuration applicable to the above configuration before modification can be applied as appropriate.

In addition, in each of the performance examples described above, if a specific mode (here, "second precursor performance display") is displayed as a precursor performance display, the player's action within the corresponding acceptance period is Even if the application is not accepted, the "form in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same manner as it would have been if the reception had been accepted.

On the other hand, if a mode (here, "first portent effect display") different from the specific mode (here, "second portent effect display") is displayed as the portent effect display, the corresponding mode is displayed. When a different mode appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" depending on whether the action by the player is accepted or not within the acceptance period (such as during the first acceptance period); Even if the player's action is not accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' will appear in the same manner as it would have been if the acceptance had been accepted. There are cases (such as the fourth reception period).

According to such a configuration, by using a performance (precursive performance display) that is performed before the reception period occurs, the performance after the reception period ends or the performance when the reception is not accepted. etc. will be able to be improved.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, specific modes (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". During the possible reception period, the audible output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated midway, but a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first extinction related display) is defined as a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". During the acceptance period in which the acceptance permission sound can appear, there are cases in which the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway, and cases in which the audible output state of the reception permission sound is not terminated midway. According to such a configuration, by checking the output status of the acceptance permissible sound when an acceptance is received, a situation may arise in which it is easy to guess what kind of mode will appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since situations that are difficult to predict will appear, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the acceptance acceptance sound that can be used as such judgment material is terminated at a timing earlier than the timing at which the acceptance period ends (timing within the acceptance period). Since the audible output is made as a sound, is it possible to accept the acceptance while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the audible output state, or is the acceptance made after the acceptance acceptable sound is in the audible output state? You will be able to play the game by selecting whether you want to play the game.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the reception period in which the precursory performance display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursory performance display), the sample image display may be performed in a plurality of manners (for example, from FIG. 232(a) to The four modes shown in (d)) are enabled to be displayed, and during the reception period in which the foreshadowing effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first omen effect display), the sample image It is desirable to have an aspect that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three aspects shown in FIGS. 232(b) to 232(d) are not displayed, and only FIG. 232(a) is displayed). .

Furthermore, in each of the performance examples described above, in the reception period of a specific type, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display performance that suggests that the reception period in which actions by the player will be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, specific precursor performance displays (second precursor performance display, fifth precursor performance display) can be executed over the timing at which the corresponding reception period occurs. , the player's actions can be accepted while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, since the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (form) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (form) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to check can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, execution of a post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started; Even when the execution of the performance is started, the specific precursor performance display is not hidden but is displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the execution of the effect after acceptance according to the acceptance is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (form) of the precursor effect display.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception productions, for the post-reception production using the second production device (post-reception specific production), specific portent production displays (second portent production display, fifth portent production display) This shall be carried out in a manner that does not adversely affect the visibility of the foreshadowing effect display).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception productions, the post-reception production (post-reception production display) using the first production device also has a specific precursor production display (second precursor production display). Display, fifth omen effect display) shall be executed so as not to have a negative impact on the visibility of the display (e.g. displaying a specific omen effect display with priority over the post-reception effect display (displaying it in front of the layer), etc.) ).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the reception period in which the precursory performance display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursory performance display, the fifth precursory performance display), while the precursory performance display is displayed. However, if the player's action is not accepted, the precursor effect display can be hidden before the corresponding acceptance period ends. ing. In other words, in this case, it is possible to play the game by selecting whether to start the post-reception performance with the precursor performance display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the precursor performance display hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display does not necessarily have to be terminated within the acceptance period, and the execution status is not terminated within the acceptance period and continues to be displayed until the acceptance period ends. It can also be used as a thing. In this case, the specific precursor effect display will be displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the sample image display is displayed until the middle of the corresponding reception period. In a period after the timing, it is desirable to display the sample image using only an area different from the area, rather than the area where the sample image is being displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the reception period occurs, a reception permission sound is made audible indicating that reception is in a state where reception is permitted or that reception will be (soon) in a state in which reception is permitted. Processing is considered executable. This prevents the player from forgetting to perform an action for acceptance.

Furthermore, among the above-mentioned production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 256 to 259 and FIG. If the above-mentioned "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears, the "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. Processing for making the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound inaudible is started in a state where the reception permission sound is not audible.

In other words, in this case, even if the "state in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared since the acceptance, the acceptance period has already ended. can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, even if the timing at which the "disappearance-related display in which the sample image display becomes difficult to recognize" appears after the acceptance is delayed, inconveniences will be less likely to occur, so the sample image display will be displayed in a manner that is easily visible. be able to

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, even if a player's action is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is made audible, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, and the reception permission sound is made audible. While this continues, there will be an additional reception period (such as a first reception period) during which the extinction effect display is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or the reception has not yet been made, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In this regard, there is a reception period (FIGS. 256, 258, and 261) in which when an action by a player is accepted while the reception permission sound is made audible, the reception permission sound is made inaudible. The reception period (Fig. 255) in which the reception permissible sound is made inaudible even if a player's action is accepted while the reception permissible sound is made audible is the "simulation" that occurs in response to these. Since the types of "states in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" are different, it is now possible to infer the subsequent progress of the production by checking the output status of the acceptance permissible sound. Become.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, a plurality of types of reception permissible sounds are prepared. In this regard, it is desirable that the same sound be output as the reception permissible sound during the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

On the other hand, the reception permissible sound that is made audible corresponding to the first reception period is the same as the reception permission sound that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. The sound is audibly output as a sound different from the permissible sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound starts to be output, by checking the sound, it becomes possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type of reception period is occurring to some extent. In addition, when a reception is made while the reception permissible sound is set to be audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by checking whether the reception permissible sound is terminated midway. It becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using .

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the precursor performance display is executed in a specific manner (here, the second precursor performance display, the fifth precursor performance display, and the seventh precursor performance display), the reception permissible sound corresponding to this is also If an acceptance is made while is being output, the acceptance permission sound will be terminated midway, but if the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first precursor effect display), this If a reception is made while the reception permission sound corresponding to the reception permission sound is being output and the reception permission sound is terminated midway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period), and There is now a case (first reception period) where the application is not completed. With such a configuration, it is also possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

Furthermore, in each of the production examples described above, there is a reception period in which two sounds (a long-term permissible sound and a short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as a reception permissible sound. . During the reception period in which two sounds (long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, if the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is audible, the reception period ends midway, but the reception permissible sound In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there are cases in which the reception period is terminated midway when the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is audible, and cases in which the reception period is not terminated midway. With such a configuration, it is also possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

Regarding the reception period in which two sounds with different sound data (long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, if the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is being output, two sounds with different sound data will be output. Only one of the acceptance permissible sounds (long time permissible sound and short time permissible sound) may be terminated midway, and the other may be continued without being terminated midway.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" when the acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period. The period of reception (second reception period, fourth reception period, fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.) and the times when the reception was made within the reception period and the times when the said reception was not made. Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which different aspects appear as ``a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', the reception It becomes possible to improve performance when the performance is not done.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when a reception is made during a specific reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.), "modes in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see" , it is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the image display, but if the acceptance is not made, the image display itself changes (the numerical value related to the display characteristics (transparency) It is desirable to achieve this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether an acceptance has been made or a situation where no acceptance has been made when a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. become able to.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), the first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect" here) and the second effect display FE, which have no relation to the reception period in terms of effect, can be displayed. It has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, if the player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period, the “sample image display” is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed. ``A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance related display SK1)'' appears, but this ``a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (first disappearance related display SK1)'' also occurs in symbol variations where the acceptance period does not occur. Does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that may be displayed (whether the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is prioritized or the first effect display TE (or, the extinction related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect display should be displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (the first effect display TE and the above-mentioned second effect display FE) unrelated to the reception period. Therefore, it becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the performance that is not directly related to the reception period.

However, if the player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 4th extinction-related display SK4)" appears, but the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (4th extinction-related display SK4)" does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (does not make it difficult to see), but is displayed in such a way that it affects the visibility of the second effect display FE (makes it difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a manner in which the image display becomes difficult to view" appears depending on the type of image display. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is necessary to check whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of performance.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE shall be displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (suggesting) the winning or losing (expectation level) of the symbol change, and the second effect display FE shall be displayed as an image (suggestion) of the symbol change. If the display is displayed as a display that is not related to (does not suggest) the winning or losing (expectation level) of the fluctuation, the interest in the game will decrease when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. This can be said to be desirable in order to avoid.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can occur while the first production display TE is being displayed, but it can occur while the second production display FE is being displayed. It never occurs, and only occurs when the second effect display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second effect display FE can be displayed only at a relatively early stage after the start of the symbol variation, and is then hidden. It is used to enhance. In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only at a relatively late stage after the start of symbol fluctuation, this It has become possible to create such relationships.

As shown in FIG. 267, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction-related display SK4, it is thereafter displayed again in a state that is easy to see. . In other words, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of displaying a sample image, no aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second effect display FE appears.

The first performance display TE displays a predetermined performance result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation, but if a disappearance related display is displayed during the execution period of the first performance display TE, The extinction related display is hidden before a predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed, and in this area, the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a manner with a higher display priority than the above. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set for the fourth extinction-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE is made visible through the fourth extinction-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. You can also do this.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed, and in this area, the first effect display TE It is displayed in a manner with a lower display priority than that of the previous page. At this time, it is desirable to prevent the fourth extinction related display SK4 located behind the first effect display TE from becoming visible through the first effect display TE.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first extinction-related display SK1 is displayed in such a way that it does not affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It has become something that

When the first disappearing effect display SK1 does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the acceptance permission sound is not ended midway and continues, and the fourth disappearing effect display affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the reception acceptance sound can be terminated midway. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the performance using the acceptance permissible sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and both dynamic displays are continued even under the situation where either disappearance effect display is displayed. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to create a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) while the sample image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes will be prepared for the mode (disappearance-related display).

In other words, in this case, one of the plurality of modes will appear as "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", so that the game enjoyment can be improved when the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize. things come to be expected.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 267), the fourth Disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the simulated image display and the second effect display FE. )" appears (FIG. 263), the first disappearance related display SK1 is executed so as to make only the simulated image display difficult to see out of the simulated image display and the second effect display FE. There is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect as to which of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" and "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Therefore, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

In this case, what are the "sample image display" and "predetermined image display" that are displayed in the first reception period, and the "sample image display" and "predetermined image display" that are displayed in the fourth reception period? , are preferably displayed in the same manner.

The sample image display is hidden while the disappearance related display is appearing, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance related display is appearing, and the disappearance related display ends. It is desirable that the display be hidden at a predetermined timing after the change (before the symbol fluctuation stops).

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may be an effect using an effect that is performed in front of the simulated image display and the second effect display FE when viewed from the front, instead of using an image. However, it is desirable that the first disappearance related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can occur even when the second production display FE is in a non-display state. A special mode (second extinction related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is provided. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. SK2-2) and cases where it does not appear (second extinction related display SK2-1), and when the special mode appears, the expectation level (jackpot) is higher than when the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed in any manner. It is desirable to increase the rate of stopping at a symbol. The percentage may be 100%. Further, in this case, it is desirable that during the second reception period, a special aspect of the precursor performance (second precursor performance display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second performance display FE is in the display state can be executed.

In each of the production examples described above, in the first reception period, when the first aspect (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception production display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1) ~(i1)) and the second aspect (the first after-reception performance display UG1-2), which is more expected than the first aspect, is executed as the first reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 263(e2)~ (i2)), the same mode (first extinction related display SK1-1) appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode (second reception performance display UG2), which has higher expectations than the first mode (second reception performance display UG2-1), When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but the first mode appears as the effect display UG after the second reception. When (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1) is executed. 2) appears.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation for the post-reception production display simply by checking "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the performance display after reception. Since there will be cases where it is not possible to estimate the degree of play, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through the performance of this kind of ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.'' .

Furthermore, as the "manner in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", there is a "specific manner (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" that may occur in response to the second reception period. This cannot occur as a "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of acceptance period based on "the manner in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize", and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

However, the same aspect may appear in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period as the “aspect in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.”

As shown in FIG. 263, in the first acceptance period, if no acceptance is made, a mode that cannot appear when an acceptance is made (first disappearance-related display SK-2) was decided to appear. However, if no reception is made during the first reception period, the "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself may be prevented from appearing.

In the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations (the rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) can be selectively output as an acceptance permissible sound, and in the first acceptance period, It is desirable that only one aspect of the acceptable sound can be audibly output. In addition, in this case, any of the acceptance acceptable sounds (a plurality of modes) that may be audibly output in response to the second acceptance period are different from the acceptance acceptable sound that may be audibly output in response to the first acceptance period. It is desirable to prepare.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, different fluctuation patterns are generated from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but the same fluctuation pattern is generated from the first reception period to the seventh reception period. The pattern may include reception periods that can occur sequentially within the pattern. That is, in this case, at least some of the acceptance periods from the first acceptance period to the seventh acceptance period can occur in a plurality of variation patterns.

For example, for a reception period (such as a second reception period or a fourth reception period) in which ``the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' changes depending on the level of expectation, ``the pattern of the sample image display It occurs within the same pattern change after a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which "is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" does not change depending on the expectation level (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) It is desirable to make it possible.

In addition, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which reception can be made while the foreshadowing effect display is displayed, the reception cannot be made while the foreshadowing effect display is displayed. It is desirable to make it possible to generate within the same symbol fluctuation after a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) that does not exist occurs.

During the reception period, "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level, "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level. It is possible to selectively output a plurality of reception permissible sounds, including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during an unchanging reception period, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, "the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize." It is desirable that a highly anticipated mode appear as the mode (disappearance-related display).

In addition, during reception periods (such as the second reception period and the fifth reception period) in which "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level, the Although it is possible to display a precursor effect, a special preview effect can be performed at a stage even before the display of the precursor effect is executed, and when the special preview effect is executed, the above-mentioned When an acceptance is made during the acceptance period, it is desirable to ensure that ``a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' is always executed in a highly expected manner.

During the acceptance period, when the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the level of expectation, a jackpot can be obtained as "the mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". It is also possible to prepare an aspect (for example, a second extinction related display SK2-2) that can only appear when the information is displayed. Furthermore, a mode (for example, a second extinction related display SK2-1) that cannot appear when a jackpot has been obtained may be prepared.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related production display (such as a sample image display or a gauge image) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period; It is possible to output reception-related effect sounds (reception acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. In addition, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, it is possible to output a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production based on the acceptance, and the above-mentioned reception-related production is displayed within the acceptance period. If a player's action is accepted while a (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) ). Similarly, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound (such as acceptance permission sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related production will be performed based on the reception. Sounds (such as reception acceptance sounds) may be rendered inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production is audibly output, and a reception-related production display (such as a sample image display or a gauge image) is output. ), and the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible (such as reception acceptance sound), making it easier to recognize that the reception has been accepted.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) is terminated at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the reception starts. However, the reception-related production sound (reception permission sound, etc.) is terminated at the time the reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts, and may be rendered inaudible. I try to be that way.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) that is displayed during the reception period can be displayed even after the reception performance starts to be executed. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related performance sounds (reception permission sounds, etc.) that are audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. becomes. As a result, even after the post-reception performance has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) that was displayed during the reception period, and the reception-related performance sound By making the reception acceptance sound etc. inaudible, it is possible to suitably indicate that the reception period has already ended.

As described above, the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as a performance display that suggests the percentage (expectation level) of winning the jackpot. In this case, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) also differs depending on the level of expectation (mode of reception-related performance display) suggested by the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.). It is desirable to have one that outputs .

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) is made to continue without being terminated even when the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it difficult for the user to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where they have been accepted.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, only one aspect can be displayed as the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) during the first reception period, and it is possible to display only one mode as the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) It is not executed as a production display that suggests the percentage (expectation level). In addition, in the first reception period, only one mode of reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) appears, so when a mode different from this mode appears in another reception period, It becomes possible to suitably improve gaming interest.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, multiple modes including a specific mode are prepared as a precursor effect display, and prior to the occurrence of a specific reception period (for example, the second reception period), It is possible to display an effect display (for example, a second precursor effect display: FIG. 256), and to start audible output of reception-related effect sounds (reception acceptance sound, etc.). Then, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) can be executed over the timing when the reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is being displayed and the reception-related effect sound (acceptance permission sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this regard, if a movement by the player is accepted while a specific type of precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: Fig. 256) is being displayed within the acceptance period, based on the acceptance, to hide the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) of the specific mode. In addition, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is (sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that a movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden, Since the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is made inaudible, a specific aspect of the precursor performance display (for example, the second precursor performance display: Even if a player's action is accepted while 256) and the reception-related performance sound are being executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the action has been accepted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the above-mentioned specific aspect of the foreshadowing effect display (for example, the second omen effect display: FIG. 256) is a post-reception effect in response to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period. is not finished and is displayed when execution starts. On the other hand, the reception-related performance sound (reception permission sound) is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display: FIG. 256) that is displayed before the occurrence of the acceptance period is displayed after the execution of the post-reception effect is started. However, the above-mentioned reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is audible at the time the output sound starts to be executed after reception. It will be made so that it will no longer be. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception effect has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the precursor effect displayed before the start of the reception period, and the reception-related effect that is output before the start of the reception period. By making the sound (acceptance acceptance sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

Regarding the specific aspect of the portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2), it is displayed as a different display image depending on the degree of expectation, and is executed as a effect display that suggests the percentage of jackpots (the degree of expectation). It is desirable that the In this case, the reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) shall also output different sounds depending on the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode of precursor production display (the mode of the specific mode of precursor production display). is desirable.

However, in each of the above performance examples, during the reception period in which the first precursor performance display is executed, the first precursor performance display can be executed only in one mode, and the percentage of jackpots (expected It is designed so that it will not be executed as a production display that suggests a degree).

In addition, in the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) where multiple reception permissible sounds (long-term permissible sound, short-time permissible sound) are output simultaneously, the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception The output sounds do not overlap, but in the reception period when only one reception permissible sound is output, when the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception production sound overlap (first reception period), and the output of the reception permissible sound There are cases (such as the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.) where the output sound after reception does not overlap.

The long-term permissible sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second permissible sound shown in FIG. 213, etc.), and the short-time permissible sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a message sound. This refers to a sound (corresponding to the first permissible sound shown in FIG. 213, etc.). The case where only one acceptance permissible sound is output is, for example, the case where no message sound is output and only the sound effect is output (corresponding to the case where only the first permissible sound is output in Figure 212 etc.). That's true. Note that the short-time permissible sound may be "sound output as a sound effect" and the long-time permissible sound may be "sound output as a message sound."

When one of the two acceptance permissible sounds is output as a "message sound", the message image ("press") corresponding to the message sound (for example, "press" sound) is output audibly while the message sound (for example, "press It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as ''. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period in which the post-reception effect (post-reception output sound, etc.) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps with the period in which the post-reception performance is executed.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the scale image display is displayed as an integrated scale image display including a gauge image within the peripheral decoration image. The integrated image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and the like, and other configurations may be adopted as appropriate. That is, in the past, the sample image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by displaying an omen effect or displaying extinction related information. The gauge image may change depending on the manner in which the scale image is displayed, which indicates the degree of expectation, and if this can be visually recognized, the purpose of making the scale image difficult to visually recognize is lost. In this regard, by displaying them as an integrated model image display, it is easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the gauge image.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is assumed to appear in such a way as to make it difficult to visually recognize the production display after reception. The display may be displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to visually recognize the display (for example, priority display is given to the effect display after reception). In addition, among the multiple reception periods mentioned above, there is a reception period in which the post-reception performance display becomes difficult to see due to "modes in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and a reception period in which the post-reception effect display becomes difficult to see. A reception period in which the post-reception performance display is not made difficult to recognize may be included depending on the mode (disappearance related display).

Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare all of the first to seventh acceptance periods, and only some of these acceptance periods may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

The first reception period may also be terminated midway when the reception is accepted while the reception permission sound is audibly output.

Regarding the "first omen effect display" and "seventh omen effect display," they do not necessarily have to be of the type that is not displayed at the time the reception period occurs and is hidden before this. For example, it may be displayed as "a type that is displayed across the timing of the reception period". That is, in this case, the "first omen effect display" and the "seventh omen effect display" are the same as the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect content (display image) Although they are different, please refer to Figure 256, Figure 264, and Figure 265 for details such as "when the display starts and ends, and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden." The display will be performed in the same manner as described for the "second omen effect display ZEH2". The same applies to other examples and modifications.

It goes without saying that when the term "at least a part" is used in the above and below descriptions, it is intended to include "all".

Next, a modification of each of the above-mentioned production examples will be explained. That is, FIG. 268 is a modified example of "when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 is a modification example of "when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 265. This is a modification example of "the production of". In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in "Example of production related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)", and The same applies to other examples that can be applied to the "Example of Production".

As shown in FIG. 268, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) as a fourth presentation device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) was omitted from the explanation in each of the above-mentioned performance examples. things). That is, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) does not operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period.

Now, if the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, then also in the modification for the second reception period, first, the performance determination (advancement determination) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. etc.). After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 268(a) ”).

The subsequent steps are similar to those shown in FIGS. 264(b) to 264(d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268(b), "second portent effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in FIG. 268(c), "integrated image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second portent effect display ZEH2" and "integrated image display IG" are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 268(d), the second reception period occurs. (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted; however, in this modification as well, the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) The "back specific performance" and the "foreshadowing performance" are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable sound, output sound after second acceptance, etc.) are now executed in the same way as in the above example (Fig. 264, Fig. 265). ing.

In addition, in this modification, even if the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the action is When the second reception period ends, the execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) corresponding to the second reception period starts.

Note that the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 268(d) to "D1 (FIG. 269(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively This corresponds to the case where the first mode with low expectations is executed, and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. This corresponds to a case where a second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, similarly to the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 264 and 265), the moment when the player's action is accepted (the second post-reception performance starts depending on the acceptance) At timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the integrated image display IG is displayed, the "integrated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated image display IG but also the second omen performance display ZEH2 are hidden at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the performance is started after the second reception). The same thing as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265) also applies to the point of not making it difficult to see or make it difficult to see.

In addition, if the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1)), from this point onwards, This is also the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize." Next, when timing tG3c arrives, a "second reception performance display" is displayed as a post-reception performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the player's action within the second reception period. UG2-1" starts execution.

After this, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. 269 (h1), while the "second reception effect display UG2-1" is being displayed, First, among the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2-1", "integrated image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" ” will be hidden. After the “integrated image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i1). As a result, the display according to the "second post-reception effect display UG2-1" is performed under conditions where visibility is considered to be good.

However, when the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b , as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", instead of displaying the disappearance related display on the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600), the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is started. let That is, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) so that it overlaps at least a portion of the integrated image display IG when viewed from the front, The integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 269 (f2) has higher expectations than the case shown in FIG. 269 (f1). , it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in gaming. In addition, since the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) itself indicates the degree of expectation, it can also serve as a post-reception performance. It becomes possible to make the fake image display IG difficult to visually recognize. In this sense, the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as a performance element that indicates the level of expectation even in a performance that is different from the post-reception performance (such as a preview performance that indicates the level of expectation). It is desirable that there be.

Next, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is displayed in front view with at least a part of the integrated model image display IG. When the timing tG3c arrives during the execution in an overlapping manner, as a post-acceptance performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the movement by the player within the second reception period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2-2'' is started.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is "integrated image display IG". While being executed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the image display IG in front view, the execution of the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is started. According to such a configuration, while the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to visually recognize by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)," the second Since the post-reception effect display UG2-2 starts, it suggests that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the process will automatically transition from "effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2-2)" (after timing tG3c).

Also, when the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the " When the display related to "Second Post-Reception Performance Display UG2-2" starts, as shown in FIG. 269 (h2), while the "Second Post-Reception Performance Display UG2-2" is being displayed, First, we will explain how the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "integrated image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) Among the "effects used)," the "integrated image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden and the process is terminated. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and "second portent effect display ZEH2" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i2), the "integrated image display IG is visually recognized. ``Fourth performance device (performance using specific decorative member SDY)'' as ``a mode in which it becomes difficult'' is ended. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to its original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated image display IG when viewed from the front. As a result, the display according to the "second reception effect display UG2-2)" is performed under conditions where visibility is considered to be good.

In addition, when performing ``a presentation using the fourth presentation device (specific decorative member SDY)'' as the ``aspect where the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize'' (a relatively highly expected aspect (Fig. 269( e2) to (i2)) are cases in which "a presentation using the first presentation device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" (relative expectation level). It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" until the end of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to recognize" than the low mode (FIGS. 269(e1) to (i1)). In this case, when executing the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see," It became possible to improve the game's interest through its own performance, and after that, the ``fourth performance device (performance using a specific decorative member SDY)'' became possible. Even after the game ends, it is expected that the "second reception performance display UG2-2", which had been difficult to see until then, will be exposed, thereby further improving the game's interest. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there are cases where a mode with a low expectation level is executed as a post-reception performance and a case where a mode with a high expectation level is executed as a post-reception production. "A mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (first extinction related display SK-1, etc.)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 268(d) to "D3 (FIGS. 269(e3) to (h3))", the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period according to the modified example. This assumes that there is no such situation.

As shown in FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3), in this modification, if the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, in the case of the above example (FIG. 265 ( This is the same as e3) to (h3)). For example, if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The mode that would have appeared if the operation had been accepted will appear.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3), when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second extinction related display SK2-1" is displayed. The case means that if the player's action had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from FIG. 268(d) to "D1 (FIG. 269(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the fourth performance device (specific 268(d) to ``D2 (FIG. 269(e2) This corresponds to a case where the performance has progressed to ``~(i2))'' (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively high expectations has been executed).

After this, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), the "integrated image display IG" and the "integrated image display IG" become difficult to visually recognize (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth First, the ``integrated image display IG'' is hidden from the ``production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)''. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. -1 or the performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" will end.

As mentioned above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" is performed as the "display on the first production device (production display device 1600)". (FIGS. 269(e1) to (i1)), and cases in which it is performed as "a presentation using the fourth presentation device (specific decorative member SDY)" (FIGS. 269(e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, the timing at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed, and the timing at which the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed The start timing is set to be the same as the start timing (timing tG3b), but for the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)", the "first performance device (performance display device 1600)" The execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) that is earlier than the timing tG3b at which the "display at" is started.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of "a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" and the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) suggested as a post-reception presentation, "integrated image display IG" may be displayed after acceptance. Since the time required for the appearance of the ``form in which the fake image display IG becomes difficult to see'' appears, it becomes more interesting and the game can be more enjoyable. In particular, the "performance using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)" also functions as a post-reception production, similar to the "specific production after reception using the second production device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

However, even if the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' is executed in ``a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize'', the situation shown in FIG. 269 As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a portion of the integrated image display IG (image display) is visible.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when the effect progresses from FIG. 268(d) to "D2 (FIGS. 269(e2) to (i2))" If a high performance after reception is executed), the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" will not be performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", It was decided to perform "a performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" includes the "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "display related to the fourth effect (disappearance related display)" It is also possible to perform both "a presentation using a decorative member SDY".

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "display on the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" are displayed. This makes the integrated image display IG difficult to see, and it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has been accepted.

In this way, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" includes the "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "display related to the fourth effect (disappearance related display)" When executing both "Production using parts SDY)", the disappearance-related display is displayed in such a way as to make at least a part of the integrated image display IG difficult to see (priority display, etc.), and "Fourth The effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is executed in such a way as to make at least a portion of the integrated image display IG and at least a portion of the disappearance related display difficult to see.

In this case as well, execution is started at timing tG3a for the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' that functions as ``a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see''. The "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" may be started at timing tG3b. .

In addition, as "modes in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) (disappearance related display)" and "display in the fourth effect device (specific decorative member 268 (d) to "D1 (Fig. 269 (e1) to (i1))" (relative). The image display will be different from the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when a post-reception performance with low expectations is executed). It is desirable to do so.

Further, the fourth presentation device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and in short, at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display) A flying object that can perform a predetermined effect at a position that overlaps with the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front (for example, a flying object that can perform a flying effect at the front side of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, or (e.g., a light guide plate provided by a light guide plate). In addition, regarding the production using the fourth production device, in addition to being executed based on the reception during the reception period, when different production conditions are satisfied (such as the arrival of a predetermined timing in a specific symbol fluctuation) It is also desirable to have this executed.

The production example regarding "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is also applicable to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 268 and 269.

Furthermore, the production example related to "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" explained with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, while the integrated model image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) are displayed, the production display after reception is displayed. However, the performance display after the reception will be displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize by the integrated model image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH). (Fig. 263, Fig. 265, Fig. 267).

However, instead of this, execution of the effect display after reception is started while the integrated image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) are displayed. However, the post-reception effect display is not made difficult to see by the integrated image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) (priority display, etc.) ) may start the display.

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which such a configuration is applied to an example of presentation regarding the second reception period. Configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265), and can be applied to other examples as appropriate.

Regarding the production content until the player's action (operation) is accepted within the second acceptance period according to this modification, the production content described above (FIGS. 264(a) to 264(d), FIG. 265(e)) ) is the same as For example, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 270(e2), at the timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are displayed. '' is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

Also, in this modified example, there are cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively low level of expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively high level of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 265), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modification, if the "post-reception performance with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned performance content (see FIG. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effects shown in FIG. 270 (f2) to (i2) appear.

First, at timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2), Then, the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). Next, when timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, the player's action is not performed within the second reception period. "Second reception performance display UG2" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception starts execution in the second mode (second reception performance display UG2-2) be done. It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the level of expectation (the rate at which the bonus is given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes an integrated image display IG, a second omen effect display ZEH2, a second extinction related display SK2, etc. This will not make it difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification overlaps with the areas in which the integrated image display IG, the second omen effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed. The integrated image display IG, the second omen effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction related display SK2 are displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to visually recognize (priority display).

According to such a configuration, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 itself can function as "an aspect in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it. Note that even the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this example is not displayed with priority over the first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect" here), and the first effect is The portion that overlaps with the display TE is made difficult to see.

After this, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first, the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second extinction related display SK2 is hidden.

Also in the modified example shown in FIG. 270, if the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 265 (e3) to (h3)) . In other words, if the player's action is not accepted, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" will occur if the player's action had been accepted within the second acceptance period. A new aspect will emerge.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second extinction related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". However, the second extinction related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

The production example related to the "post-reception production display" described with reference to FIG. 270 is also applicable to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 270.

Furthermore, the production example related to the "post-reception production display" described with reference to FIG. 270 is not applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but is different from any of those reception periods. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance).

In the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, if a movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the replica image display (here, the integrated replica image display) IG) is displayed, a specific disappearing effect display (for example, A second extinction related display SK2-2)" can be displayed, and the sample image display can be performed after the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2) starts to be displayed. (For example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display even after the acceptance is made. In addition, the visibility of the sample image display is reduced by a specific disappearing effect display until the sample image display is hidden, and while the visibility is reduced, the sample image display is hidden. This can suggest that there is little time remaining until the display of the sample image is hidden, and a decline in gaming interest when the display of the sample image is hidden can be suppressed. It becomes wet.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the "specific disappearance effect display (for example, second disappearance related display SK2-2)" is a simulated image display (here, integrated It can be displayed even during a period after the sample image display IG) is hidden, and at least while the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is displayed, A post-reception performance (for example, a performance using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Regarding the post-reception effect, is it displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2)? (Example shown in FIG. 270), or a presentation object (such as the example shown in FIG. 269 or another example thereof) located in a position that overlaps (at least a part of) the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front. We are working to ensure that this is realized as something that can be achieved.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, for a specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) in front view, It becomes possible to recognize the disappearing effect display without shifting the gaze point from the position where it is displayed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze destination in order to understand the form of the specific post-reception effect when the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

When a specific post-reception performance according to the above modification (for example, a performance using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) appears, the rate at which benefits are given to players increases. It may be set to 100%.

The specific post-reception effect according to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is executed before the sample image display is hidden. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, so it is possible to suitably indicate that the reception has been accepted even when the image display is being displayed. . However, regarding the specific post-reception effects related to the above modification (for example, the effects using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.), after the sample image display is hidden, It may also be one that starts execution.

Apart from the reception period in which the specific post-reception performance according to the above modification (for example, the production using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.), the specific post-reception performance After preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is a case where the different after-reception effect is executed. may also be displayed. The reception period during which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, during the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception permissible sound is not ended midway, it is desirable that the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction related display SK2-2) is not displayed (another (The disappearance effect display may be displayed)

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the reception period occurs, the reception of the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process is executed to make an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the acceptance will be (soon) in a state where the acceptance is allowed, and this causes the player to forget to take the action for acceptance. I'm trying to suppress it.

Furthermore, as described above, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple types of precursor effect displays; If a player's action is accepted while the foreshadowing effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific foreshadowing effect display (second omen effect display ZEH2) will be displayed even after the acceptance, but the specific To make a mode appear in which a specific precursor performance display (second precursor performance display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize while the precursor performance display (second precursor performance display ZEH2) is being displayed. Then, after the mode appears, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden under the condition that it is made difficult to visually recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, but the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has already been made.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the manner in which the specific portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize is that the specific portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) is a different image display (for example, second extinction related display SK2-2 or post-reception effect display UG2-2), or it is on the front side of a specific omen effect display (second omen effect display ZEH2) It is designed to be a performance in a performance performed in a theater.

In addition, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is a In addition to the foreshadowing effect display ZEH2), it is executed so as to straddle both a specific foreshadowing effect display and a sample image display when viewed from the front, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. This aspect may be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to see the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, a specific precursor effect display or sample image display may be visible through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, regarding the "aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)", it is realized by a change in the display characteristics of the specific precursor effect display itself (such as a change in transmittance). may be

Also in the above-mentioned modifications (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden within the acceptance period. Even if the reception is made in the hidden state, "modes in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) are now executed.

In addition, in the first acceptance period described above, when a movement by a player is accepted, multiple effects (the effects shown in FIGS. 263(e1) to (i1), Any of the effects shown in (e2) to (i2)) will appear, but regardless of whether any of these effects appear, the specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period The first aspect of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to )) can appear. In other words, in this case, no matter which one of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear, so it is considered that they are caused by the action being accepted by the player within the specific acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that this is a common production.

On the other hand, in the second acceptance period described above, the second acceptance period according to the modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270), or another example thereof, when the action by the player is accepted, special conditions (jackpot winning Special modes (for example, second extinction related display SK2-2, specific It is possible to appear in one of several modes, including a production using decorative member SDY, a production display after reception UG2-2, etc.), and when the special mode appears, the image display becomes difficult to see. . According to such a configuration, a special aspect indicating the degree of expectation appears before the simulated image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes the simulated image display difficult to see. , the player can now enjoy the performance that progresses from the sample image display to the post-reception performance (special mode) without having to change his gaze.

In this regard, even when the above-mentioned specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the sample image display is It is made difficult to visually recognize the image depending on the aspect of the image. According to such a configuration, there is a case where the sample image display is made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a benefit (special reception period), and a case where the above-mentioned specific mode does not suggest the degree of expectation concerning the granting of the benefit. Since there are cases where the sample image display is made difficult to view (specific reception period), the ``modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)'' will be given a performance effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the reception period illustrated in each production example or modification example occurs, a sample image display indicating the objects (types of operation means, etc.) for which reception is permitted within the reception period will be displayed. It may be displayed both within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed before the reception period occurs, and within the reception period. However, in this case, the sample image display that will be displayed during the period in which the precursor effect display is executed will be different from the sample image display that will be displayed during the acceptance period, and It is desirable to make it invisible.

Hereinafter, a modification example will be described in which the method of displaying a sample image in this manner is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 271(a) to 271(f) and FIGS. 272(g) and 272(h) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. (i) to (l) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 265. In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in "Example of production related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)", and The same applies to other examples that can be applied to the "Example of Production".

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, then also in the modification for the second reception period, first, the performance determination (notice preview) corresponding to the second variation pattern is selected. judgment, etc.). After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 271(a) ”).

However, in this modified example, when timing tG0, which is earlier than timing tG1 described above, arrives, the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is executed, as shown in FIG. 271(b). There is. In the example shown in FIG. 271(b), as the "preceding precursor effect display SZE", another example of effect (a sample image display is executed within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed, and then it is temporarily hidden) Although the image display that is used also in the normal production example in which no such thing is performed is performed, the image display used in the "Advanced type precursor production display SZE" is different from other production examples (in which the precursor production display is executed). It is desirable to display an image that cannot appear in a normal production example in which a sample image is displayed within a period and then temporarily hidden.

In this modification, while the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is being displayed, a mock image display TMH (in this case, an integrated simulated image display) appears. That is, as shown in FIG. 271(c), at least a portion of the sample image display TMH (here, integrated sample image display) according to this example is made difficult to see by the "preceding precursor effect display SZE". The display will start while the screen is in progress. In addition, although the sample image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated sample image display, it is an image ( It is to be displayed as a sample image display in a manner that cannot be displayed during the acceptance period.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 271(d), the sample image display TMH (in this case, the integrated sample image display) is displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to see due to the "preceding precursor effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "advanced portent effect display SZE" has been terminated, and the display is now decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in FIG. 271(c) and (d), the relevant simulated image display TMH (here, integrated simulated image display) that appears while the "precedent type precursor effect display SZE" is being displayed. 232 (a) to (d)) are displayed in a manner different from any of the manners in which the sample images may be displayed within the acceptance period (FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)). This makes it possible to display the sample image display TMH for a relatively long period of time, while also indicating that the reception period has not yet occurred.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the relevant sample image display TMH (here, integrated sample image display) appears, the above-mentioned multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) are displayed within the corresponding acceptance period. The sample image display is displayed in a highly anticipated manner (for example, FIG. 232(d)). This makes it possible to improve the game's interest when the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. Note that the modes that can be displayed as a sample image display are not necessarily the above four modes (FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)), and may be, for example, only two modes.

In this modification, when timing tG1 arrives, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" starts to be executed, and the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" causes the sample image to be displayed. A part of the TMH becomes difficult to view (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271(f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see the entire sample image display TMH, and thus the "normal type precursor effect display" While "TZE" is being displayed, the sample image display TMH is not displayed.

Then, when timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 272(g), the sample image display (here, integrated sample image display IG) is ), the display starts with the highly anticipated mode. In this way, when the sample image display that can be displayed during the reception period (in this case, integrated sample image display IG) starts to be displayed, a part of it is made difficult to see due to the "normal type precursor effect display TZE". ing.

Then, while the "normal type portent effect display TZE" and the "sample image display (here, integrated replica image display IG)" are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 272(h), the second A reception period will occur (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted; however, in this modification as well, the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) The "back specific performance" and the "foreshadowing performance" are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable sound, output sound after second acceptance, etc.) are now executed in the same way as in the above example (Fig. 264, Fig. 265). ing.

In addition, in this modification, even if the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the action is When the second reception period ends, the execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) corresponding to the second reception period starts.

Also, in this modified example, there are cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively low level of expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively high level of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 265), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modification, if the "post-reception performance with relatively high expectations" is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned performance content (see Fig. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effects shown in FIGS. 272(i) to (l) appear.

First, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 272(i), at timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the player's action is accepted, "normal type portent effect display TZE" and "sample image display (here, , integrated model image display IG)" is not hidden, but also the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and "simulation image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" are made difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, at the time when the acceptance is made and after that, while the "sample image display (in this case, integrated replica image display IG)" is displayed, the dynamic display as a replica image display will be performed. is expected to continue. Furthermore, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced over time.

At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 272(j), while the "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started, The second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in a second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). However, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG has at the time of acceptance (FIG. 272(i)), when timing tG3b arrives, the display area will be "0". I'm trying to make it happen. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced according to a certain law with the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional to the passage of time) However, ignoring the previous rules, the display area was suddenly drastically reduced, and as a result, ``The remaining time was set to ``0'' due to a surprise attack, but luckily we were able to make it in time for reception.'' It becomes possible to make the player think that the player is playing the game, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Then, when timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the display related to the second extinction related display SK2-2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the player "Second reception performance display UG2" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the operation is in the second mode (second reception performance display UG2-2) Execution starts with . It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the level of expectation (the rate at which the bonus will be given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

Note that the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes the integrated image display IG, the second omen effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance related display SK2-, as shown in FIG. 272(k). 2, etc., but it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 270.

Then, first, the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden (FIG. 272(l)). Next, although the illustration is omitted, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility. It becomes like this.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of precursor effects displayed as precursor effects indicating that the acceptance period will occur. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 271(b) to (f) and FIG. 272(g)) among a plurality of precursor effect displays is performed, A sample image related to the reception target is displayed both during a precursor period (sample image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and during the acceptance period (sample image display IG).

Particularly, in this modification, after the sample image display (the sample image display TMH) is displayed in the precursor period, it is hidden within the precursor period. As for the sample image display TMH that is displayed (and hidden) only during the premonitory period, it is different from the sample image display IG that can be displayed within the acceptance period. It is expected to improve performance related to operations from a period before this occurs.

Also, in this modification, if an application is accepted within the acceptance period, the sample image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (Fig. 272(l)). Until the sample image display IG is hidden, "a specific mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" can appear (Fig. 272 (j), ( k)). However, regarding the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (second disappearance related display SK2-2)", the sample image display TMH displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. When it is hidden, it is prevented from appearing until it is hidden.

According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that appears corresponding to the reception period ” does not appear and the sample image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the sample image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (display of a specific precursor effect), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be informed. This makes it possible to make it less likely that a misunderstanding will occur that the reception period has ended before the application period has expired.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the "aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the replica image display" that can appear in response to the reception is changed from the above-mentioned "specific aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the replica image display" (second disappearance). A number of related displays will be prepared, including ``Related Display SK2-2)''. In this regard, in the above modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these aspects is made to appear when the sample image display TMH displayed within the precursory period is hidden. It has become. In the above modification, a mode different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "a mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" (normal type precursor effect display TZE) according to the reception is applied to the sample image display TMH within the precursor period. Until the image is hidden, it functions as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the sample image display" exclusive to the precursor period, even if the "mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" appears during the precursor period. This makes it possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

In addition, in the above modification, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the preview image display" until the preview image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. If the application is received within the acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" will be displayed as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the replica image display" until the replica image display IG is hidden. I decided to do so. In this regard, the period from when the "Normal portent effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden is the same as the period from when the "second extinction related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to make the length longer than that in order to improve the interest in the game.

If the sample image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period, in the reception period that occurs correspondingly after the sample image display TMH is hidden, the reception target of the type suggested by the sample image display TMH will be Reception (reception regarding post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is allowed for (operation means), and the reception target (operation means) is different from the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the sample image display TMH. It is desirable that the reception (reception regarding the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not allowed. That is, in the case of the above modification (FIGS. 271 and 272), the sample image display sample image display TMH displayed within the precursor period suggests the operation button 410 as the reception target, and therefore corresponds to this. During the reception period, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for a reception object (sword ornament 5001) that is different from the operation button 410.

Further, as described above, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with an "operation button 410" and a "sword ornament 5001" as objects for reception regarding post-reception effects. In this regard, if the performance is executed in a manner such as "after displaying the sample image display, hide the sample image display within the premonitory period", among the "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001" , it is desirable that the side with a high rate of jackpot symbols appearing when it is selected as the receiving object be selected as the receiving object. In other words, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001," the reception target with a lower rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol when it is accepted as a reception target will have a corresponding reception period. In advance, the effect is not executed in a manner such as ``after displaying the sample image display, the sample image display is hidden within the premonitory period''.

Among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such "performance mode related to omen production" is limited to a reception period that is different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, or a separate reception period between them. It is also applicable to examples. In addition, regarding the "performance mode related to omen production", it is not applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but is applied to the eighth reception period (eighth It may be prepared as a variable pattern (eighth post-reception performance).

Furthermore, among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such "performance mode related to omen performance" is not limited to the modified examples illustrated with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270, or other examples thereof. It is also applicable to

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display (display including section image KG, etc.) that reduces the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) as time passes during the acceptance period. be. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 271 and 272), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the performance is in progress, it is possible to recognize whether "the reception has been accepted" even after the reception has been made. It is now expected to make it difficult to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed as a remaining time suggestion display. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is depicted to be reduced within the divided area (divided image KG). After the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific section area (section image KG) will continue to be displayed. I have to. According to such a configuration, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, the specific divided area (divided image KG) is displayed, so that the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. ) has decreased in display area.

Note that "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action" means, for example, that the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is This also includes the case where a predetermined display area remains as the gauge image GG at the time when the performance is performed based on this, but the display area is reduced to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. (Figure 272(j)). However, in this case, it is required that the specific section area (section image KG) is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific section area (section image KG) is , the gauge image GG will be hidden from view after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to zero.

Furthermore, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when a movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (eg gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. However, prior to hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, a specific section area (section image KG ), a specific image with a display area of a specific value (a predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) and a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). In other words, in this case, the gauge image GG, whose display area has been decreasing according to a certain law with the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional to the passage of time), Ignoring this law, the display area was suddenly drastically reduced, making the user think that ``the remaining time was set to 0 due to a surprise attack, but luckily they were able to make it in time for the reception.'' This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, at the time when the player's action is accepted (when the progress of the performance according to the acceptance is started), the execution starts before the action is accepted. The "description in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is not ended and continues. Thereafter, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) with a display area of a specific value is displayed within a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG), or Only a specific divided area (divided image KG) of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that even after the reception has been made, it will be difficult to recognize whether the reception has been made or not, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension. In addition, a depiction in which the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image GG) is significantly reduced at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) that is later than the timing at which the progress of the production according to the reception is started (for example, timing tG3a) Since this is done, it is possible to make it appear as if the reception was completed just in time within the validity period (reception period), and it is expected that the game will increase interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the sample image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. . In this respect, when the timing tG3b arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the acceptance, no matter which dynamic position the sample image was at at the time of acceptance, it will be displayed at a specific dynamic position after the acceptance. The sample image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), when timing tG3b arrives, the button position is set to the highest position, regardless of the previous button position. ). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), the sample image display is not dynamically displayed after timing tG3b, but is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. Thereby, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained more suitably.

Among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such "depiction of gauge image GG and division image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 272(i) to (k))" and " Dynamic display and static display related to displaying a sample image" can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, regarding the "depiction of gauge images GG and compartment images KG after acceptance (Figs. 272(i) to (k))", it applies to any of the first acceptance period to seventh acceptance period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, "the depiction of the gauge image GG and the compartment image KG after the reception was made (Figs. 272(i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to the display of the sample image" will be sent to the first receptionist. When applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period may be used), it is preferable not to apply it to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance is made, there are cases where a depiction in which the gauge image GG decreases significantly appears (FIG. 272 (j)) and cases where the depiction does not appear, which reduces the interest in the game. You will be able to improve your skills.

Even during the reception period when "depiction of gauge images GG and compartment images KG after acceptance (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to display of sample images" are not applied, After the acceptance is made, it is desirable to perform a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image GG and dynamic display itself. That is, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted to be greatly reduced, disregarding the previous law, and that it is not statically displayed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, other examples, and variations thereof, multiple reception periods (for example, the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. There is. In this regard, for a predetermined acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.), the symbol fluctuation that occurred during the predetermined acceptance period ends. and can be continued even after the next symbol variation has started (can occur across multiple variations), and can be continued during a specific acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods (for example, during the second acceptance period). period, 4th acceptance period, 7th acceptance period, etc.) will not continue until after the symbol variation that occurred during the specific acceptance period has ended, and will not continue until the symbol variation has ended. It may be configured such that it is terminated earlier. In other words, in this case, the sample image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the predetermined reception period and during the specific reception period, and when the player's action is accepted within the predetermined reception period, and when the In either case, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the simulated image display is not hidden at the time the acceptance is made, and the simulated image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). etc.) will appear. As a result, effects such as ``even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended'' can be achieved. It becomes possible to suitably obtain the information regardless of whether it is a predetermined reception period or a specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" may be, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, or the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" may be, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, etc. In the case of a reception period and a seventh reception period, the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) is when the reception is made in a "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations, It will be executed in a different manner depending on when the reception is made in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. In other words, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the acceptance period will end within the pattern change that is being executed, based on the type of "manner in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display, etc.)" This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, a sample image display of the reception target is displayed in both the "predetermined reception period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. The sample image may be displayed in different manners (display size, position, etc.) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period." For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations, when a sample image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position), an occurrence that spans multiple variations may occur. During the possible "predetermined acceptance period", it is desirable to display the sample image so that its display position changes (move display). According to such a configuration, even if a "predetermined acceptance period" occurs across multiple fluctuations, it is possible to urge the player to accept the application quickly.

In addition, in the "reception period" that does not span multiple variations, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as a reception target and cases where the sword decoration 5001 is used as a reception target, but the occurrence occurs in a form that spans multiple variations. In the possible "reception period", the operation button 410 may be used as a reception object, but it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 not be used as a reception object.

Even in a "reception period" that may occur over multiple fluctuations, it is desirable to be able to display a precursor effect before the "reception period" occurs. In other words, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "foreshadowing effect display" is being executed, and the acceptance period corresponding to the "foreshadowing effect display" may occur after the symbol variation is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game after the symbol variation ends.

Even in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, as described above, after the reception is A mode that makes the image display difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.) appears. This "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (disappearance related display, etc.)" is executed after a predetermined time, but if the symbol fluctuation is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the "aspects that make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" be continued without being terminated midway.

``Precursive effects display'' that is executed in response to ``reception periods (e.g., first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.)'' that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations; Regarding "modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)", the time from when the symbol variation that was in the execution state stops to when the next symbol variation starts to execute (the time from when the symbol variation that was in the execution state starts) The execution period (the time from when the precursor effect display is displayed until it is hidden) is shorter than the time required from when the fluctuation stops until the hold is cleared, making the sample image display difficult to see. It is desirable that the time period from when the aspect appears until it is terminated be terminated.

As mentioned above, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "premonitory effect display" and “disappearance related display” may be displayed. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol variation in which the "foreshadowing effect display" is displayed ends, the same area as the "foreshadowing effect display" (overlapping area) ), the "extinction-related display" is displayed by using at least a part of If the ``extinction-related display'' is displayed in the ``disappearance-related display'' (e.g., after the ``disappearance-related display'' is displayed), the ``extinction-related display'' may be displayed using only an area different from the area in which the ``precursor effect display'' is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, while paying close attention to the post-reception performance, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the performance is performed over a plurality of variations.

In addition, as mentioned above, multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared for displaying the sample image, and a "reception period" (for example, a second reception period, 4th reception period, 7th reception period), the sample image display is displayed in one of these modes. However, in the "reception period (e.g., first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, certain aspects among the multiple aspects (for example, FIG. 232 It is desirable that only the simulated image in (a)) be displayed. However, there are "reception periods (e.g., second reception period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period)" that do not span multiple fluctuations, and "reception periods (e.g., reception periods that can occur across multiple fluctuations)" It is desirable that the dynamic display of the sample image is continued after the application is received, regardless of whether the application is accepted (first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.).

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of game states (the first game state and the second (playing state) can occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which the performance after acceptance can be executed when a movement by a player is accepted is limited to the first gaming state and the second playing state. This can occur in any gaming state. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted within such a "reception period", the "reception period" shall be deemed to have occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. After the application is accepted, "modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (disappearance related display, etc.)" appear while the sample image display is being displayed, and after that, "the sample image display becomes difficult to see." The model image display is hidden while the "mode (extinction related display, etc.)" is appearing.

In other words, in this case, the effect is that ``Even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

Note that the "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state (low probability, non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" corresponds to the normal gaming state (low probability, non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" is the one that occurs based on the result of jackpot determination ( This corresponds to a "gaming state different from the normal gaming state" that can occur (state transition). Any gaming state may be used as long as it is different from the normal gaming state.

To further explain this point using the multiple reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in the above-mentioned production examples, other examples, and variations thereof, for example, multiple reception periods Predetermined types of reception periods within the period (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, etc., but do not necessarily include all of them. ) is set so that it can occur only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods is set so that it can occur only in the second gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the display of the sample image related to the reception target is performed between the reception period of the predetermined type (first gaming state) and the third reception period (second gaming state). Displayed in both cases. However, in the first gaming state (if accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second gaming state (if accepted in the second acceptance period), "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" Specific modes (such as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 and the seventh disappearance-related display, but not all of them need to be included) that cannot appear can appear.

According to such a configuration, the first gaming state and the first gaming state can be determined by simply checking which mode has appeared as “a mode in which the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize” without checking the type of performance after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which of the two gaming states the player is in, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270 also appears only when the game is in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). It may also be set as a "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to recognize". That is, in this case, it is expected to suitably maintain the player's interest in gaming when he is in the most disadvantageous state (normal gaming state).

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second gaming state (when accepted in the third acceptance period), the first extinction-related display is executed as "a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, the first disappearance related display can also appear in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in a state controlled to the second gaming state is merely indicated, a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, even if the player is being controlled to the first gaming state, when the first extinction related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility that the player is being controlled to the second gaming state. As a result, the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or It may be something that can only occur in the first game state between the state and the second game state.

Furthermore, as described above, during the acceptance period that occurs in the first gaming state, the mock image display is configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)). In this regard, during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, it may be possible to display only the mock image of a specific mode (for example, the mode with low expectations, FIG. 232(a)) among the multiple modes. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a mode with a low expectation level (FIG. 232(a)) appears as a simulated image display, the possibility that the game is being controlled to the second gaming state is reduced. Since the player can be made aware of this, it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in playing the game.

In the first gaming state, if the player's action is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same mode as in the case where the image display is difficult to visually recognize appears (for example, 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and cases where a different aspect from the case of acceptance appears (for example, 1st reception period, etc.) However, in the second gaming state (third acceptance period), the same mode as in the case of acceptance should always appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", or It is desirable to ensure that a different aspect from the one that is accepted appears. According to such a configuration, when a motion is not accepted in the first gaming state, depending on whether the same mode as when the motion is accepted appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", It becomes possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the second gaming state is occurring.

The acceptance period (third acceptance period) that occurs in the second gaming state is set as ``Even if the acceptance is not accepted within the period, it is the same as if the acceptance is made in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display.'' If the mode is generated as "something that always appears", for the acceptance period (third acceptance period), even if "the mode is not accepted" that occurs in the first gaming state, "the pattern image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is desirable that the valid time (set time) as the acceptance period is longer than any of the ``acceptance periods in which the same mode as in the case of acceptance always appears as the mode''.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a corresponding precursor effect display will be executed before the acceptance period occurs. In this regard, in the first game state, specific precursor performance displays (second precursor performance display, fifth precursor performance display, seventh precursor performance display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second game state are executed. It is desirable to

[Special reception period]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, so that the jackpot judgment can be performed. A fluctuating performance using a decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessories performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating performance using the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permission state (validity period) in which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). ), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which presentation acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, the display changes according to the type of reception period that has occurred. Furthermore, during the acceptance period, a mock image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image can be displayed.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is allowed. Since the post-operation display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated. The performance itself is poor, and there are concerns that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, "operations by the player" to be detected refers to operations directly operated by the player, such as "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001." (Pushing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "contact motion by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "player's movement within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes "actions caused by". In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided, for example. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to reduce this, or it may be possible to selectively include some components deemed necessary to obtain further effects, or it may be possible to reduce the The configuration may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. , the same action by the player is displayed as different text information (for example, "Press!", "Please press", etc.) in the first reception period and the second reception period, even though the same action is accepted. I try to do that. The "first acceptance period (displayed after the first acceptance)" and "second acceptance period (displayed after the second acceptance)" regarding the configuration 1-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is requested from the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), it is necessary to operate (actions by the player) while being aware of which type of display change may occur as a post-reception display. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), the request will be made in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable for the character information displayed to be different from each other in order to suppress operational errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, if a player is requested to perform a different action (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the text information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-A", text information will not be displayed during the first reception period until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, text information may be hidden during the acceptance period (valid status). It may be set as such. In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance period, the player is not required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the period begins. It has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question, and it has also become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question. It is now expected to suitably avoid situations where the sense of tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 1-A", there will be a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is hidden during the second reception period. , the same display change may occur regardless of whether the reception is made during any of these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is hidden, as long as you confirm what kind of operation mode is requested while the text information is displayed, the operation can be performed properly. This is possible and is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

[Configuration 2-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, only one mode of displaying the sample image is possible, and in the second reception period, it is possible to display the sample image in any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, effects that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs are provided, so that until an operation (movement) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the player's interest in playing games.

In addition, regarding the "multiple modes of display of the sample image" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible for the game to vary the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. It is more desirable for improving interest. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the ``lowest expected mode'' of the ``multiple modes of displaying the simulated image'' be the same as the ``one mode'' that can be displayed during the first reception period.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, a third reception period will be further provided, and only one aspect of the sample image display will be displayed in the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be possible to do so. In the "second reception period" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) of the "first reception period" has ended. However, in the "third reception period", the display of the sample image will not be hidden until the end of the valid state (reception period). During this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. In other words, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, it is not possible to decide whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest in the game until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. Note that the sample image display displayed in the first reception period and the sample image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, so that they may not be displayed. It may also be possible to suggest the possibility that the

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 2-A", during the third reception period, either the period in which the sample image display is displayed or the period in which the sample image display is hidden. The same display change (post-reception display) may be made even if the reception is made in . In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues without any change, so the performance using the "third reception period" ( In creating the display (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that the "third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)" related to configuration 2-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 3-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, after the sample image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the sample image display is not hidden until the first reception period ends. , it is possible to accept actions by the player while the simulated image display is being displayed, and in the second acceptance period, it is possible to accept actions by the player while the simulated image display is not being displayed; The above-mentioned "acceptance permission sound" is audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 3-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which reception is performed while the reception permission sound is audibly output and the sample image display is displayed, but also the reception period in which the reception permission sound is not audibly output and Since there is a "second reception period" in which applications are accepted while the sample image display is not displayed, players should be aware that the post-reception display may occur at various times that they did not intend. It is now expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and during the second reception period, the sample image is Although it is possible to accept actions by the player while the display is not displayed and the sample image display is not displayed, in the third reception period, the sample image display is only for a part of the third reception period. It may be possible to accept an action by the player both during a period in which the virtual image display is hidden and during a period in which the virtual image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, the third reception period has two aspects: the first reception period (reception while the sample image display is displayed) and the second reception period (reception while the sample image display is not displayed). By having both of the above functions, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, even after the sample image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the player's actions (operations) will continue to be accepted, so the player's actions (operations) will not be accepted. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed when the sample image display is hidden without being displayed.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after the third acceptance)" regarding the "Configuration 3-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the Configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

Furthermore, the acceptance permission sound may be audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs or when the third acceptance period occurs. . That is, during the third reception period, there is a timing at which the sample image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration for the third reception period, the reception permission sound will not be output at the same time as the sample image display (or before or after). . As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side as the first reception period (a sample image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the reception permission sound is output) Since the player has both the above-mentioned features (not played), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 3-A", during the third reception period, either the period in which the sample image display is displayed or the period in which the sample image display is hidden. The same display change (post-reception display) may be made even if the reception is made in . In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues without any change, so the performance using the "third reception period" ( In creating the display (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, if a movement by the player is detected within the period, the first reception display is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but if no movement by the player is detected within the period. Sometimes, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output, and during the second reception period, when a movement by the player is detected within the period, Displays the second reception display and outputs the second reception sound, and even if no movement by the player is detected within the period, the second reception sound is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. Although the post-acceptance display is displayed, the second acceptance sound is not output. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 4-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, if a movement (operation) by a player is not accepted within the acceptance period, there may be a disadvantage in terms of performance, so it is preferable to reduce the feeling of tension when the acceptance period occurs. will be able to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 4-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, A display after the third reception is displayed and a third reception sound is output, and even if no movement by the player is detected within the period, the same 3rd reception sound as when the movement by the player is detected within the period is displayed. The post-acceptance display may be displayed and the third acceptance sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action was accepted is caused to occur so as to cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation. (Second reception period) and cases (Third reception period) in which the occurrence is made so as not to cause any disadvantages in terms of performance.As a result, actions (operations) by players cannot be accepted in time within the reception period. The decline in interest in games that would otherwise occur can be suppressed.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after the third acceptance)" for the "Configuration 4-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the Configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 5-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, during the first reception period, the first variation pattern starts to be executed regardless of the number of judgment information stored in the holding storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (number of pending)). This can occur when the first timing arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern started, and the second reception period is a period in which the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information If the second variation pattern is started when the number of jackpot determinations in the state (pending number) is less than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern is However, if the execution of the second variation pattern is started in a situation where the number of judgment information stored in the pending storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the second variation pattern Even if the second timing arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution, the second timing is prevented from occurring. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 5-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, when a game is about to be canceled and the number of pending games becomes small, a type of reception period (second reception period) that has not occurred before will occur. It becomes possible to expect that the game will be encouraged not to be canceled, or even if the game is canceled, it will be possible to have the impression that the game was interesting at the end.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-A", the second fluctuation pattern is Even if the execution is started, the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means When the number) increases (becomes a predetermined number or more), the second reception period may not occur when a second timing arrives at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started. In other words, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of reservations is decreasing, if the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. , which suggests that the player is not about to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of reservations is decreasing, within the execution period of the symbol variation. If the number of reservations is increased, the second reception period will not be generated when the second timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the execution of the second fluctuation pattern has started, so the second reception period will be changed. , it will be possible to function more appropriately as "a type of reception period that can only appear when you are about to cancel a game."

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more suitably, even if the second reception period occurs, the judgment information stored in the suspension storage means is It is more desirable to end the second acceptance period at that point when the number of requests (number of reservations) increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first reception period occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner regardless of the production situation, and the second reception period occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the production situation. Since it is generated after being suppressed or made inaudible, it is possible to use specific BGM to provide effects related to the type of reception period even before the reception period occurs. It becomes like this. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 6-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 6-A", multiple reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period will be prepared, and 3 Depending on the situation of the production, the reception period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, there are cases where the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. In either case, since there is a possibility that the reception period in question is the "third reception period", it is possible to suitably maintain gaming interest until the player's movement (operation) is accepted. become expected to do so.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after the third acceptance)" regarding the "Configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the Configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 7-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, if a reception is made within the period, a first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the first post-reception display is displayed on the production design. During this period, the display is given priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if a reception is made within the period, a second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the second post-reception display is displayed for the production design. During this period, the second post-reception display is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see, or is hidden. In addition, the "mode in which visibility is made difficult" according to the configuration 7-A means "at least a part of the production design is displayed through the second reception display set to a predetermined transmittance according to the transmittance." or a mode in which at least a part of the production design is made invisible by the second post-reception display that overlaps with this, or a mode in which at least a part of the production design is hidden, etc. ” means. In addition, the "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 7-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, the type of acceptance period can be recognized by checking whether the visibility of the performance symbols is affected by the post-acceptance display triggered by the player's operation. It becomes like this. It should be noted that the "design for presentation" refers to, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-reach state as a presentation in the presentation display device 1600, and also includes a presentation indicating whether or not to form a ready-to-reach state, a pseudo-continuous presentation, This is a pattern that is also used for full rotation performances.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel disgusted by the fact that the visibility of the performance symbols deteriorates due to the display of the second post-reception display. There is. Therefore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 7-A", when the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, the reception period is different from the second reception period. (for example, generated in response to a reception within the second reception period). Then, when an operation by the player is accepted within the different period, the second acceptance display may be hidden to make the performance symbols easier to see, using the acceptance as an opportunity.

For example, if the second post-reception display in response to the reception within the second reception period is to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display started, the display will be hidden until the predetermined time elapses. By simply performing a predetermined operation, the player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point. Please note that the operations required of the player to display the second post-reception display within the second reception period and the reception period that is different from the second reception period (reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period) ) The operations required of the player to hide the second post-reception display may be the same operation or different operations. For example, during a reception period that is different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period), the player may use multiple operation methods to hide the second reception display. Alternatively, the user may be required to perform an operation for each.

On the other hand, the display after the first reception may also be for a predetermined time after the display starts (the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden), or it may be a different time. It is hidden when the period (good) has elapsed. However, the display after the first reception that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols will not be hidden even if the player performs any operations before the predetermined time period has elapsed. It is more desirable to do this in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first acceptance period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, this period may occur. Taking this as a trigger, the specific BGM is made inaudible, and during the second acceptance period, the specific BGM that was being audibly output in a non-suppressing mode is allowed to be accepted after it becomes audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state where it is not audibly output. Even if the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed manner or in a state in which it is not audibly output. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 8-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not audibly output". You will be able to do this.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-A", during the first reception period, all the sounds that were being output audibly at the time of acceptance will be made inaudible (only specific BGM will be output audibly). In the second acceptance period, when the acceptance is made, all the sounds that were being output audibly at that time are made inaudible (only one sound is being output audibly). In some cases, only the one sound may be made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the specific BGM may be put in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output", or when the acceptance is made, it is not output audibly at that point. It is now possible to have a common presentation between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all the sounds made inaudible, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. become.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-A", the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first acceptance period (in the middle of the validity period) while acceptance of operations by the player is permitted. Although a situation may occur in which no sound is output, it is desirable that the acceptance period continues even in such a situation. In other words, in this case, in the first reception period, even though the specific BGM is made inaudible upon receipt of the reception, no reception is made for a predetermined period of time after the first reception period occurs. If not, the specific BGM will be made inaudible even though the application has not yet been accepted, making it possible to make people think that the first application period has ended, and the game You will be able to strongly attract people's interest.

In addition, when an acceptance is made and the specific BGM is made inaudible using this as a trigger, a "display change according to the acceptance (display after the first acceptance)" will be generated, but if the acceptance is not yet made. When making the specific BGM inaudible when the user is not listening, it is desirable to avoid causing a "display change in response to the reception (display after the first reception)". In other words, in this case, the first reception period continues by confirming that although the specific BGM has been made inaudible, the "display change according to the reception (display after the first reception)" has not occurred yet. You will be able to become aware of the possibility that you are After the specific BGM has been made inaudible, if an operation by the player is accepted before the end of the first acceptance period, this will be used as an opportunity to display a change in display according to the acceptance (first acceptance period). This will eliminate the feeling of anxiety when specific BGM is made inaudible (concern that the validity period may have expired), and thereby improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this.

[Configuration 9-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the operation means includes a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving part) and a second operation means (second operation receiving part). We have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including a specific reception period. In the specific acceptance period, both the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means and the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means are permitted as acceptance for causing a display change corresponding to the specific acceptance period. , when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a specific display change can be generated, and when an operation on the second operation means is accepted, the specific display change is not generated, but the specific display change is made. Since it is possible to generate display changes different from the above, it is possible to make it more interesting to decide which operating means to operate. In addition, the "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change)"), "first operation means", and "second operation means" according to the configuration 9-A are based on the technology of the configuration 9-A. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as "reception period" and "operation means" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period or operation means different from those reception periods. .

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-A", when the first operating means is operated during the specific acceptance period, the specific acceptance period ends, but when the second operating means is operated, the specific acceptance period ends. The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to create a reception period that uses multiple operating means and has an unprecedented effect, so it is possible to create various interesting reception periods based on this kind of effect. be able to provide

[Configuration 10-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, in the first reception period, a simulated image display that simulates the operation receiving section is displayed, and in the second reception period, a plurality of simulated image displays that simulate the operation receiving section are displayed, and the simulated image display is controlled by the player's operation. This makes it possible to perform a dynamic display that depicts the movement of the operation receiver when it is made movable. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 10-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, for example, even if a plurality of operation receivers with different required operations (e.g., pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, the player does not have to worry about what operation to perform. This makes it easier to recognize whether the information is valid or not, and makes it less likely that operations will not be completed in time within the validity period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 10-A", the sample image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation". There may be cases where the display is not executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving section is made movable by the player's operation." In other words, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation to perform even though the simulated image display is being displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed by the player? Since there may be cases where it is difficult to recognize the player's actions, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

[Configuration 11-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receivers) including a specific operation means (specific operation receiver) are prepared as operation means, As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared. Then, during the first reception period, a sample image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the sample image display are displayed, and ``the display area of the specific image is decreased over time to identify "Remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which acceptance of operations on the operating means is permitted" is performed, and in the second reception period, a mock image displaying a copy of the specific operating means is displayed; A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and a "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which operation on the specific operation means is allowed to be accepted by reducing the display area of the specific image over time" is performed. I'm trying not to get hurt. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 11-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 11-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, even if a simulated image display imitating a specific operating means is displayed, "by reducing the display area of the specific image over time, acceptance of operations on the specific operating means is permitted." Since the "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time" is not necessarily performed, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 11-A", during the second reception period, there will be a special simulated image display that simulates a specific operating means, and a special simulated image display that simulates a different special operating means. The above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be performed even though this is performed.

In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance period, although both the acceptance of operations on the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations on different operation means are allowed, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is not performed. will be prevented from occurring. As a result, the second acceptance period can occur without the player feeling overwhelmed by the fact that both acceptance of operations on a specific operation means and acceptance of operations on a different operation means are allowed. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when you are there.

[Configuration 12-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation means, a first operation receiving part that is displaced by a player's operation, and a first peripheral decoration part provided on the periphery thereof are provided. 1 operating means" and "a second operating means having a second operating receiving part that is displaced by an operation by a player, and a second peripheral edge decoration part provided on the periphery thereof." When displaying a first image display that simulates the first operation means, a first image that simulates the first operation receiver and a first peripheral edge that decorates the periphery of the first image that represents the first operation receiver are displayed. When displaying a second model image displaying a second operation means, a second receiver model image displaying a second operation receiver and a second receiver model image displaying a second operation receiver, and a second receiver model image displaying a second operation receiver. A second peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge can be displayed, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as mutually different images. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" related to other configurations, or may mean operating means on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different operating means from these operating means.

According to such a configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearance can be made to be significantly different when the first operating means is displayed and when the second operating means is displayed. As a result, it is expected that it will be easier to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 12-A", the first peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the first peripheral decoration part, but the second peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the second peripheral decoration part. The image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. In other words, in this case, when the "first imitation image display" having the first peripheral decoration image which is an image imitating the first peripheral decoration part is displayed, it is a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means. This makes it possible to suitably make the user aware of the situation. On the other hand, when the "second image display" having the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not simulate the second peripheral decoration part, is displayed, the second operation means is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to present a situation with a higher level of performance. In this case, the "second operation means corresponding to the second image display" has a larger operation receiver (first operation receiver) than the "first operation means corresponding to the first image display" Even if the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decoration part, is displayed, for example, by providing the second peripheral decoration part as a member, it may be difficult to recognize which operating means should be operated. It is desirable to avoid this.

In addition, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means as a "situation with higher performance," the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious one that does not exist in the gaming machine. It is desirable that the image be displayed as an imitation of the decorative part. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the second operation means is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a portion that imitates the second peripheral decoration part. It may be possible to do so.

[Configuration 13-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receivers including a first operation receiver, a second operation receiver, and a third operation receiver are prepared as operation means. We have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including a specific reception period. During the specific reception period, a first image display imitating the first operation receiving part, a second image display imitating the second operation receiving part, and a third image display imitating the third operation receiving part are displayed. All of them are displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation receiving section among the plurality of operation receiving sections, the reception is performed among the first sample image display, the second sample image display, and the third sample image display. At least the second image display and the third image display that simulate the operation receiving part that has not been performed are hidden. In addition, the "first operation receiving section", "second operation receiving section", "third operation receiving section", and "specific reception period" according to the configuration 13-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving section" or "acceptance period" related to other configurations, or it may mean different things.

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (second Since the sample image display, third sample image display) will be hidden, the operation receiving sections (second operation receiving section, third It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is required on the operation receiving section).

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 13-A", even though the first sample image display, second sample image display, and third sample image display are displayed during the specific reception period, the first sample image display, the second sample image display, and the third sample image display are displayed. Among the first operation receiving section, the second operation receiving section, and the third operation receiving section, the third operation receiving section may not be enabled (not allowed) to accept operations. That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, when an operation is accepted on the first operation receiving part, a first display change is generated, and when an operation is accepted on the second operation receiving part, a second display change is generated. However, since no operation will be accepted on the third operation receiving section and no display change will occur due to the operation, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specified reception period. It becomes possible to suitably maintain performance and tension.

[Configuration 14-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. , the same action by the player is displayed as different text information (for example, "Press!", "Please press", etc.) in the first reception period and the second reception period, even though the same action is accepted. I try to do that. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 14-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), operations (actions by the player) must be made with awareness of which type of display change may occur as a post-reception display. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), the request will be made in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable for the character information displayed to be different from each other in order to suppress operational errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, if a player is requested to perform a different action (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the text information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, if "Configuration 14-A" is adopted, text information will not be displayed during the first acceptance period until the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) ends. On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, text information may be hidden during the acceptance period (valid status). It is preferable to make it so. In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance period, the player is not required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the period begins. It has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question, and it has also become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question. It is now expected to suitably avoid situations where the sense of tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when adopting "Configuration 14-A", the second reception period includes a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is hidden. Different display changes may occur depending on when the reception is made within these periods. In other words, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless it becomes difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (text information is hidden). Through this kind of presentation, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, when the above-mentioned first reception period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player, and the above-mentioned second reception period occurs. It is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed to when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player is different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, only one mode of displaying the sample image is possible, and in the second reception period, it is possible to display the sample image in any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, effects that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs are provided, so that until an operation (movement) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the player's interest in playing games.

In addition, regarding the "multiple modes of display of the sample image" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible for the game to vary the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. It is more desirable for improving interest. Furthermore, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the ``lowest expected mode'' of the ``multiple modes of displaying the simulated image'' be the same as the ``one mode'' that can be displayed during the first reception period.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 15-A" is adopted, a third reception period will be further provided, and only one aspect of the sample image display will be displayed in the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be possible to do so. In the "second reception period" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) of the "first reception period" has ended. However, in the "third reception period", the display of the sample image will not be hidden until the end of the valid state (reception period). During this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. In other words, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, it is not possible to decide whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest in the game until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. Note that the sample image display displayed in the first reception period and the sample image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, so that they may not be displayed. It may also be possible to suggest the possibility that the

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 15-A", in the third reception period, there is a period in which the sample image display is displayed and a period in which the sample image display is not displayed. However, different display changes may occur depending on when within these periods the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, a display change will be prepared that cannot be confirmed unless the user is made aware of the possibility that the acceptance period has ended (the sample image display is hidden). Through this kind of presentation, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Note that the "third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)" related to the configuration 15-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) occurs in which a reception opportunity is given, a sample image related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed in the corresponding sample. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed until the display after reception (display change) is executed. I try to do that. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the display can be performed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permission state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). ing. In the first type of acceptance state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" is selected in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the image, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 15 described above will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, with respect to each structure described in the specification described below, only the corresponding structure can be arbitrarily selected and adopted when it is desired to obtain further effects.

First, examples that embody the above configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception performance).

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 273 to 282. Note that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 272 may be prepared as a separate reception period from reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D). Alternatively, it may be realized as any one of reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D).

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition A is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which reception period A (reception performance A) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the variation pattern A. After that, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern A, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 279(a)"), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 279(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 273(a). When timing tM2 arrives after a predetermined time A has elapsed since then (when condition A is satisfied), the above-mentioned acceptance period A (validity period) is generated during which "acceptance regarding post-acceptance display A" is permitted ("Fig. 279(b)”). This reception period A occurs when the specific BGM is being output without being suppressed. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in FIG. 279(c)).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) does not display the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.) in connection with the occurrence of such reception period A. ), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the sample image display (a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see), A display indicating the degree of expectation (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is displayed after each reception. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), when timing tM1 arrives before the reception period A occurs, “ "Integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period A, or when the acceptance period A ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the acceptance period A according to this example is configured to end when timing tM3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 273(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 273(a) to (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. 279(b) and (c), the action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tM2a within the acceptance period A. It is assumed that In other words, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 273(a) to 273(g) and FIGS. 279(b) and (c), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tM2a, the acceptance period is A ends, and the post-reception display A (post-reception performance A) corresponding to the reception period A starts to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 279, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, ``It's a chance!'') is executed, and the second aspect (for example, ``It's very hot''), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is sometimes executed as the post-acceptance display A.

However, although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 273 is performed in the same manner as the "first reception period" shown in FIG. 255 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), the time when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the audible output of acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance starts) At timing tM2a, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound A has already started, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the same manner as it was during the reception period (shown in Figure 255). In the example, if the display continues as shown in Figures 263 (e1) and (e2), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound A) that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tM2a when the acceptance period A ended due to the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player, (When timing tM2b arrives), a display related to the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize." The "disappearance-related effect" here refers to an image (an image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and while the "disappearance-related effect" is being displayed, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible. The image display IG will gradually become hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, among the "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" that is displayed, "extinction related display A (extinction EF in the figure)" is displayed. is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is supposed to be done.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the reception sound is made difficult to see by making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that A is already being executed. As a result, even in a situation where reception sound A is already being executed, it is now possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed in A. Furthermore, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, the integrated image display IG is not displayed until the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see (timings tM2a to tM2b). Since the mode of the IG can be checked with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the reception period A, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A is a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, the same mode will appear as the extinction-related display A. That's what I do. Thereby, even in a situation where reception sound A has started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can maintain the level of expectation as a secret.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 273(b) to 273(d), a display related to the disappearance related display A (an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. When the timing tM2c within the period tM2c arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" corresponding to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period A is started. The post-reception display A may be a case where the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, "It's a chance") is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, "It's super hot!") is executed. '') may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display A" are being displayed, the "post-reception display A" is started. In addition, since the "post-reception display A" starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is possible to indicate that the reception period A has already ended, while also It is now expected that the "integrated image display IG" will naturally transition to the "post-reception display A" (after timing tM2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display A" is started in this way, the "post-reception display A" is Among the displayed images, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display A", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. In this way, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance related display A" is hidden. ” will now be displayed (in FIG. 279, illustrations of the progress of these effects are omitted).

In this regard, the "post-acceptance display A" is one that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273(d), the "post-reception display A" continues for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display A" are hidden. It will be executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the output of the reception permission sound is started at timing tM1 shown in FIG. 273(f). In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs, and the player cannot hear the reception permission sound while the reception permission sound is being audibly output. The operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. The permissible sound is not terminated midway and is output only for a predetermined time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of acceptance periods, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound will be changed based on the acceptance. It includes an acceptance period during which the audible output state is prematurely terminated. Therefore, if an acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output during the acceptance period A, and a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound continues, it is necessary to check whether or not the acceptance is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

As shown in FIGS. 273(d) and 279(c), the post-reception display A according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the display A after acceptance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. First, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed with priority over the display A after reception. Then, the post-reception display A according to this example will be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started, as shown in FIG. 273(d) and FIG. 279(d). .

On the other hand, Figures 273(h) to (n) and "an example where the production progresses from Figure 279(b) to Figure 279(d) without going through Figure 279(c)" are within the reception period A. This assumes that the player's action is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period A has occurred, the timing tM3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function will not be activated). In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (the point in time when the acceptance period A ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM2a (the point in time when the acceptance of the movement by the player within the acceptance period A is no longer allowed). Similar to the effect display device 1600 at the time of reception), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. (In the example of FIG. 255, the mode shown in FIG. 263 (e3)).

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends without the player's action being accepted in time, the integrated image display IG will not be displayed within the reception period A after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the game was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during reception period A, if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 273(j), a disappearance-related effect (reception The display related to extinguishment related display A) corresponding to period A is never started. At this time, any method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

FIG. 274 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition B is satisfied as a result of the determination and reception period B (second reception presentation B) occurs. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception performance B) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the variation pattern B. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to variation pattern B, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 280(a)"), and the variation production is started. Within the execution period, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 280(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern B", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (preliminary judgment), as shown in FIG. 274(a), the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tN2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the process, the above-mentioned acceptance period B (validity period) during which "reception regarding post-reception display B" is permitted is set. (the situation shown in FIG. 280(b)). This acceptance period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. As a result, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, a post-acceptance display will be performed based on the acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 280(b), the acceptance period B occurs when the decorative symbol SZ is in a ready-to-reach state.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such reception period B occurs, this is similar to the case where reception period A described above occurs (FIG. 273). In connection with this, display of a sample image that suggests the reception target (operation receiver, etc.), display of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and display related to disappearance that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the sample image (the display of the sample image is difficult to visually recognize) In response to acceptance, a post-acceptance display indicating the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) is displayed. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the sample image display is displayed as an "integrated sample image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not necessarily limited to this and can be displayed separately. It may be displayed. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274(b), when the timing tN1 arrives before the reception period B occurs, the IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is displayed when an application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (in this case, acceptance period B), or when acceptance period B ends without the acceptance being made. The fact that it is hidden is also the same as in the example shown in FIG. 273 (acceptance period A). Note that the acceptance period B according to this example is configured to end when timing tN3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 274(h)).

Here, in the above-mentioned "reception period A (see FIG. 279(b))", when the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is displayed, no text information corresponding to it is displayed. , In the "acceptance period B (see FIG. 280(b))", when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted (here, , "Press") is now displayed. That is, in both "reception period A" and "reception period B", the same mode of sample image display (integrated image display IG) (among the multiple modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)) is used. 232(a)) is used, when "acceptance period B" occurs, character information (here, "press") that does not appear when "acceptance period A" occurs is used. ) is now displayed, which suggests that the level of expectation that may be suggested by the post-reception display is different. In this example, the expectation level (ratio) of a jackpot symbol appearing when the symbols stop is higher when acceptance period B occurs than when acceptance period A occurs. Alternatively, in display B after reception according to reception period B, an aspect that suggests that the expectation level for the appearance of the jackpot symbol is 100% may appear, whereas after reception according to reception period A In the post-display A, an aspect may not appear that suggests that the expectation level for the appearance of the jackpot symbol is 100%.

In this regard, the examples shown in FIGS. 274(a) to 274(g) assume that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tN2a within acceptance period B. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 274(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tN2a, acceptance period B is terminated, and the period corresponding to acceptance period B is terminated. Post-reception display B (post-reception performance B) will start to be executed.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 280, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, ``Defeat 10 enemies!'') is executed, or the second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, ``Defeat 100 enemies!'') is sometimes executed as display B after reception. There is.

Although details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 274 is performed in the same manner as the "second reception period" shown in FIG. 256 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 274(b), the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the audible output of acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance starts). At timing tN2a, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound B has already started, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the same manner as it was during the reception period (shown in Figure 256). In the example, if the display continues as shown in Figures 265 (e1) and (e2), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound B) that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, as shown in FIG. 274(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tN2a at which the acceptance period B ended due to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player, (When timing tN2b arrives), a display related to "disappearance-related display B" different from the above-mentioned disappearance-related display A is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" here refers to an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (a separate image that is different from the integrated image display IG). It is about. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and while the "disappearance-related effect" is being displayed, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible. The image display IG will gradually become hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the reception sound is made difficult to see by making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that B is already running. This makes it possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time even in a situation where reception sound B is already being executed, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed in B. Furthermore, even after the process for audibly outputting reception sound B is started, the integrated image display IG is not displayed until it is made difficult to view (timings tN2a to tN2b). Since the mode of the IG can be checked with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Also, although not shown, in the reception period B, there are different modes as the extinction-related display B depending on whether a mode with a low level of expectation appears as the corresponding post-reception performance B or a mode with a high level of expectation. (Extinction related displays B1, B2) are displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the "post-reception display B" using the effect display device 1600 has not yet started, the extinction-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is different from the first mode and the second mode. By checking in which mode it appears, it becomes possible to infer whether "post-reception display B" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 274(b) to 274(d), a display related to the disappearance related display B (an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. When the timing tN2c within the period tN2c arrives, a "post-reception display B" corresponding to the reception of an action (operation) by the player within the reception period B is started. The post-reception display B may be a first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, "Defeat 10 enemies!") or a second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, "100 enemies!"). As mentioned above, there are cases where "Body Destruction!") is executed.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or extinction-related display B2)" are displayed, the "post-reception display B (first mode or first aspect)" is displayed. 2 mode)" will start to be executed. In addition, since the post-reception display B starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the reception period B has already ended, and that the player's gaze is It is expected that the display will automatically shift from "Integrated image display IG" to "Post-reception display B" (after timing tN2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display B" is started in this way, the "post-reception display B" is displayed as shown in FIGS. First, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display B", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. In this way, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 280, illustrations of the progress of these effects are omitted). .

In this regard, the "post-acceptance display B" is one that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274(d), the "post-reception display B" is displayed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display B" are hidden. It will be carried out over a period of time.

By the way, in the production example (Fig. 279) corresponding to the reception period A mentioned above, even if the reception is made within the reception period A and the "post-reception display A" is executed, the "post-reception display A" is not started. The background image is maintained without switching before and after. In this regard, in the production example (Fig. 280) corresponding to the reception period B, when a reception is made within the reception period B and the "post-reception display B" is executed, the "post-reception display B" is started. The background images may be switched before and after.

According to such a configuration, even if there is some display change in the effect display device 1600 during a period in which the background image is not switched (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 274), the "post-reception display B" ” can now indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this case, the display B after reception may be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low expectation level appears and when a mode with a high expectation level appears, or a mode with a low expectation level may appear. The background image may be switched to a different background image depending on the case where a highly expected aspect appears. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the output of the reception permission sound is started at timing tN1 shown in FIG. 274(f). In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to reception period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which reception period B occurs, and the player cannot hear the reception permission sound while the reception permission sound is being audibly output. The operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in reception period B, as reception permissible sounds, a long-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively long period of time and a short-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively short period of time are used. It is now output. In the example shown in FIG. 274(f), the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at timing tN2 when reception period B occurs or thereafter.

During acceptance period B, if the player accepts an action while the long-term permissible sound and/or short-time permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound is The time-permissible sound and/or the short-time permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In addition, in the acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. 274(f), when the player's action is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) is being audibly output. , not only ends the reception acceptance sound midway, but also starts audible output of reception sound B based on this reception. In other words, in this case, during reception period B, unlike in the case of display changes, the production performed within the reception period (acceptance permission sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (second reception sound) are different. Conflicting (overlapping) periods will no longer occur.

Similar to the "post-reception display B", such a second reception sound is generated when the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction-related display B" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 274(g). From then on, the process continues for a relatively long time. Regarding the second reception sound, it is possible to output different output sounds (forms) depending on whether a highly expected mode appears as post-reception display B or a mode with a low expectation level. desirable. On the other hand, regarding the first reception sound, the same output sound (aspect) is output when a highly expected aspect appears as the post-acceptance display A and when a less expected aspect appears. This is desirable.

In addition, in reception period B, long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound were respectively output as reception permissible sounds, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and it is the same as reception period A. Only one acceptance permissible sound may be output as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 274(d) and FIG. 280(d), the post-reception display B according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display B is also displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 274(d) and FIG. 280(d), the post-reception display B according to this example is hidden when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

On the other hand, FIGS. 274(h) to 274(n) assume a case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period B.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period B has occurred, the timing tN3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, acceptance period B is different from acceptance period A, and is set as "an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is activated." Therefore, even if the above-mentioned timing tN3 arrives without receiving any action (operation) by the player during the reception period B, no action (operation) by the player will be accepted within the reception period B after this point. The same post-acceptance display B as before will be generated.

However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the automatic button function described above is enabled, the effect display device 1600 at timing tN3 does not allow the player to As shown in FIG. 274(i), as shown in FIG. 274(i), the effect display device 1600 does not hide the integrated image display IG, but also displays the integrated image The display IG is also not made to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integrated replica image will not be processed within the reception period B after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 274(i), when the timing tN3a, which is a predetermined period of time after the timing tN3 when the acceptance period B ends, arrives, The display related to the extinction related display B is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance related display B" is displayed while the "integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception period B ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG cannot be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to indicate that the acceptance period B has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period B.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of the extinction-related display B that appears when the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period B is ) would appear if it were accepted.

In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the reception period B, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the reception period B ends. By simply checking the appearance of "disappearance-related display B", it becomes possible to recognize whether post-reception display B was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Thereafter, when timing tN3b arrives, the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed in the manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the acceptance period B (Fig. 280(b) After the situation shown in ) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 280(c) appears regardless of whether or not there is an operation.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 274(i) to (k), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display B", first the "integrated model image display IG" is disabled. Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance related display B" is hidden.

Note that the timing at which "disappearance related display B" appears and the timing at which "post-reception display B" starts execution does not have to be later than the timing tN3 at which reception period B ends, and reception period B ends. It may be the timing tN3 to do this, or it may be an earlier timing.

FIG. 275 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition C is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a fluctuating pattern in which reception period C (reception performance C) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "fluctuation pattern C" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C. After that, a variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the variation pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variable effect, according to the result of the preview effect judgment. The effect (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 281(a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the production related to "variation pattern C", no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (preliminary judgment), if the predetermined time C has elapsed since the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ was started. When timing tO2 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "reception regarding post-reception display C" is permitted. A reception period C (validity period) is generated. This reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the acceptance period C (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such an acceptance period C occurs, the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) is indicated in response to acceptance. Although the post-reception display C is displayed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned reception periods A and B occur (Fig. 273, Fig. 274), in this connection, there is a display C that suggests the reception object (operation receiving section, etc.). Image displays, gauge image displays that indicate the remaining time in the reception period, and disappearance-related displays that make it difficult to see the sample image display (forms that make the sample image display difficult to see) are not displayed. . The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 275(b), when reception period C occurs, a sample image display, a gauge image display, and text information prompting operation are displayed. etc. will not be performed. Therefore, it is not only difficult for the player to recognize when the acceptance period C starts and when the acceptance period C ends, but also it is difficult for the player to even recognize the existence of the acceptance period C itself. will be done. Note that the acceptance period C according to this example is configured to end when timing tO3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 275(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in FIGS. 275(a) to 275(g) assume that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tO2a within acceptance period C. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 275(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tO2a, the acceptance period C is ended, and the period corresponding to the acceptance period C is terminated. The execution of the post-reception display C (post-reception performance C) will be started.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display C is displayed in a relatively low-expected first mode (for example, A mode in which the number of ghosts that appear as a ghost group is small) is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations as post-reception display C (for example, a mode in which a large number of ghosts appear as a ghost group) is executed. It is now possible that it will be executed.

As described above, during this acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 275(c), when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, no extinction related display is performed. Furthermore, when the reception period C occurs, the reception permission sound is not output as shown in FIG. 275(f).

As shown in FIG. 275(d) and FIG. 281(c), the post-reception display C according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-reception display C is not displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the decorative pattern SZ is displayed with priority over the post-reception display C. . Then, the post-reception display C according to this example will be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started, as shown in FIG. 275(d) and FIG. 281(d). .

On the other hand, Figures 275(h) to (n) and "an example where the production progresses from Figure 281(b) to Figure 281(d) without going through Figure 281(c)" are within the reception period C. This assumes that the player's action is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period C has occurred, the timing tO3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and without the automatic button function being activated). However, in the reception period C, since no display change occurs due to the end of the period C, at the timing tO3 (the reception period C ends and the player's action is Even when the point in time when reception is no longer permitted has arrived, only the background image HG3 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

FIGS. 276 and 277 are time charts showing an example of presentation contents when condition D is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (reception performance D) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "fluctuation pattern D1 (Fig. 276)" If "variation pattern D2 (FIG. 277)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation patterns D1 and D2. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to the variation patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 282(a)"). ), within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, the performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is added to the performance of the above-selected "variation pattern D1" or "variation pattern D2" itself. It will be executed. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 282(a), a landscape depicting mountains and a river is displayed as the background image HG4a.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 276(a) and 277(a). When timing tP2 arrives when a predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the SZ fluctuation effect (when condition D is satisfied), the above-mentioned reception period D (valid period) occurs (“the situation shown in FIG. 282(b)”). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 282(c)).

However, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 that generates a reach effect is selected, the reception period D is a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, as shown in FIG. 276(a). This occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (timing that comes after the timing when the ready-to-reach state is formed) arrives (when the condition D1 is satisfied) after the time D1 has elapsed, but the ready-to-reach effect does not occur. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 277(a), when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (condition D2 is (is established).

Moreover, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1, which is when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach effect, is shown in FIG. 276(e). Before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, the specific BGM is output in an audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is rendered inaudible is generated. In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed manner or is being rendered inaudible.

On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 277(e) As shown in , the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner at the time when the timing tP2-D2 arrives. That is, in this case, the acceptance period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

In this way, does the acceptance period D occur when the timing tP2-D1 arrives when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable pattern D1 that causes the reach effect, or does it not cause the reach effect to occur? The appearance of the effect differs depending on whether it occurs when the timing tP2-D2 has elapsed after the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2.

First, FIG. 276 shows an example of a performance in which the acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D1), when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, is reached. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 276(a) and 276(b), in the production display device 1600 (first production device), in connection with the occurrence of such a reception period D, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time in the acceptance period, and a post-acceptance display indicating the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on acceptance. There is. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 276(b), when timing tP1 arrives before the reception period D occurs, “ "Integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the acceptance period D occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden (invisible) when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D, or when the acceptance period D ends without being accepted. Note that the acceptance period D in this example ends when the timing tP3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (see FIG. 276(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 276(a) to 276(g) and the example that follows the production route such as FIG. 282(b) → FIG. 282(e) → FIG. 282(f) → FIG. It is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within period D. That is, in this case, based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tPx, the acceptance period D is ended, and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance performance D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is Execution will begin.

In the example shown in FIG. 282(c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period D, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D is displayed in the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, A cut-in by a princess character) may be executed, or a second mode (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character) which is relatively highly expected as the post-reception display D may be executed.

However, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276(b), the integrated image display IG is hidden at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (here, timing tPx). Of course, it does not make the integrated image display IG difficult to view.

In addition, during the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276(c), even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tPx at which the reception period D ended due to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player, the disappearance-related effect is never displayed. That is, in the reception period D, the corresponding extinction-related display (an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated model image display IG)) is not prepared, and the integrated image display IG is suddenly hidden.

Furthermore, even during the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276(b) to (d), when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated image display IG is being displayed, the player's request within the reception period D. Execution of "post-acceptance display D" in response to acceptance of the action (operation) is started.

However, during the reception period D, when the player's action (operation) is accepted, the "post-reception display D" is displayed on the integrated image display IG, as shown in FIG. 282(c). The display is started in such a manner that it overlaps with the entire area and is given priority to the integrated image display IG. “Post-reception display D” may be displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, when the "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the integrated image display IG suddenly disappears (displays on a layer). (even if they remain), and it becomes possible to provide a different kind of presentation than in the case of other reception periods that use a disappearing effect or the like. Note that the post-reception display D according to this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

In addition, during reception period D, unlike in other reception periods, even if the display according to "post-reception display D" starts based on the reception, it will not be triggered by the reception. The processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" is not terminated. That is, during the reception period D, the processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" is continued until a predetermined specific condition is met (here, timing tP3), and the predetermined specific condition is I am trying to terminate it when it is satisfied. Note that if the player's actions (operations) are not accepted until the predetermined specific conditions are met and the acceptance period D continues, the "integrated image display IG" In addition to terminating the display-related processing, processing for terminating the acceptance period D will also be performed.

That is, in the reception period D, when the "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on the reception, even though the period D is to be ended based on the reception. The processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" itself is not terminated, but the display on the layer is continued. However, since the "Display after reception D" is prioritized for display over the "Integrated image display IG", the "Integrated image display IG" is As mentioned above, the period covered by diagonal lines is hidden (invisible) by "Display after reception D". (equivalent to the period during which the sample image display IG) is hidden (invisible).

In this case, the "integrated image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to see through a predetermined transmittance set in the "post-reception display D."

In addition, during the acceptance period D, as shown in FIG. 276(b) and FIGS. 282(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is continued continues. During the process, the "integrated image display IG" is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), or the "integrated image display IG" is changed from the non-display state. The display state may be changed (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even if the "integrated image display IG" is in the non-display state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted, and the Based on this, the post-reception display D will be performed (see an example of tracing the production route from FIG. 282(e) to FIG. 282(c)).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player was accepted within the acceptance period D, would it have been accepted before the "integrated image display IG" became hidden? (Fig. 282 (b)→Fig. 282(c)), or was the reception made while the “integrated image display IG” was in the non-display state (Fig. 282(e)→Fig. 282(c))? Regardless of whether the reception was made after the ``fake image display IG'' was returned to the display state (FIG. 282(f) → FIG. 282(c)), the same aspect as the ``post-reception display D'' (FIG. 282( c))).

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 282(e), although the acceptance period D has occurred, the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed during the acceptance period C (FIG. 281( It is now possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game has been suddenly replaced with (see b) above, and it is possible to improve the game's interest through such a surprising performance. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted under a situation that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period C (the integrated image display IG is not displayed), the acceptance period Since the same aspect (FIG. 282(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D" corresponding to D, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the "integrated image display IG" changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it will more appropriately create an atmosphere as if the reception period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. become.

In particular, in this example, "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert that is different from "background image HG3" (Figure 282 ( b)→Figure 282(e)). According to such a configuration, when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere as if the reception period C that may occur when the desert background is suddenly replaced can be more suitably created. things come to be expected.

In this example, when the "integrated image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image must also be changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a". (Fig. 282(e) → Fig. 282(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere that returns to the original reception period D from other reception periods (particularly reception period C) can be more suitably created.

Further, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the post-reception display D according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ (displayed on the entire screen). It may be something)). In this example, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display D is also displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 276(d) and FIG. 282(d), the post-reception display D according to this example is hidden when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. Note that the situation shown in FIG. 282(d) shows a situation where the performance based on the ready-to-win state progresses and enters the SP ready-to-win performance.

However, if the post-reception display D is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, the effects (reach state, etc.) of the decorative pattern SZ cannot be viewed until the display time as the post-reception display D has elapsed. There is concern that interest in gaming will decline due to the inability to play.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed during the period when the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, and the acceptance is made. This is used as an opportunity to end the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" (see an example of tracing the production route from FIG. 282(c) to FIG. 282(g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the player's operation, the timing at which the display of the "post-reception display D" is ended can be made to arrive earlier (before the display time as the post-reception display D has elapsed). (FIG. 282(g)), the decline in gaming interest due to the inability to see the effect (reach state, etc.) by the decorative pattern SZ is suppressed by the "post-reception display D". .

In this example, in the reception period D, the operation details required to start displaying the "post-reception display D" (pressing operation on the operation button 410) and the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed. , the operation contents (press operation on the operation button 410) required to end the "post-reception display D" early are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. You can. For example, the operation content required to start displaying the "post-reception display D" is "press operation on the operation button 410", whereas the operation content required to end the "post-reception display D" is It may be a "sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001", or a combination of "pressing operation on the operation button 410" and "sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001".

In any case, during the period in which "post-reception display D" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 282(c), what kind of operation is required to end the "post-reception display D"? It is desirable to clearly indicate whether or not the information is correct by displaying ``text information (in the diagram, cancellation is possible)'' or ``display a sample image.'' In this case, it is desirable to display the "sample image display" with priority over the "post-reception display D" at a position that overlaps with the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, the "post-reception display The sample image display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with "D"). In addition, regarding "text information", it is not prepared as a separate image from "post-reception display D", but is displayed as a part of the "post-reception display D" itself (an image on the same layer). It may be done as follows.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period D occurs, the reception permission sound is not audibly output, as shown in FIG. It is designed to provide the same presentation as "Period C", and this also makes the user aware of "Reception Period C". Even when the "integrated image display IG" is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 276(h) to (n) and the examples following the production routes shown in FIGS. 282(b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are within the reception period D. This assumes a case where the player's action (operation) is not accepted.

In other words, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, no action (operation) by the player is accepted (and the automatic button function is not activated), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific conditions (here, "The arrival of timing tP3)" is established. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (the point in time when the acceptance period D ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 at the timing tPx (the time when the acceptance of the movement by the player within the acceptance period D is no longer allowed). Similar to the effect display device 1600 at the time of reception), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. There is.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends without the player's action (operation) being accepted in time, the integrated replica image will not be processed within the reception period D after the end of the reception period D. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, during the acceptance period D, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 276(j), the disappearance-related Display of effects is never started. At this time, any method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

Next, an example of a performance in which the acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2), which is when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect, is shown in FIG. 277 and FIG. 282. Note that FIG. 282 assumes that the reception period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond when the reception period D shown in FIG. 277 occurs. Even in the reception period D, which is different from the production contents shown in FIG. 282, the reception period D occurs in a state where no reach state has been formed, and the point that the SP reach production does not start after the reception period D ends. 282 in FIG. 282 for convenience of explanation, since everything else is basically the same.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect, the reception period D is also the same reception period as the above-mentioned reception period D. Therefore, the processing contents performed when an acceptance is made and the processing contents carried out when an acceptance is not made are the same as the processing contents described above, unless otherwise specified.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 arrives when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach effect, ), before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, the specific BGM is output in an audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is rendered inaudible is generated. On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 277(e) As shown in FIG. 2, before the timing tP2-D2 arrives, the specific BGM is output in audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is made inaudible does not occur.

Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 in which the reach effect is not generated, the reception period D is shown in FIG. 277(e). As such, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

However, if the reception period D is to be generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) has elapsed after the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach performance, the reception period D In a state in which this is occurring, the specific BGM, which had been audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, is made to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or to an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, although it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the specific BGM is not suppressed after that. It is as if the acceptance period B (see FIG. 274) occurs in which the player's actions (operations) can be accepted in a state in which the output is audible in a suppressed mode or in a state in which the player is in an inaudible state. The atmosphere will change, and it will be possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, when an application is made during acceptance period B, a high expectation level (for example, a jackpot symbol appears) that would not appear when an acceptance is made during acceptance period A is necessary. It is desirable that the post-acceptance display may be displayed in a manner that suggests that the percentage is 100%, etc.).

Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a, which is a predetermined period of time after the reception period D occurs, arrives, the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden. As mentioned above, the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden at the timing tPy when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or rendered inaudible. The timing is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM may be output in audible mode in a suppressed manner while the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is being displayed, or in an inaudible condition. As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere will change more favorably into an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring.

On the other hand, the timing tP2a at which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden is when the specific BGM is output audibly in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. Therefore, at the timing tP2a, it is possible to more suitably provide an atmosphere as if the reception period C (see FIG. 275) had occurred.

In addition, during the reception period D according to this example, when timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden, the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden. IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 282(f)). However, even after the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed again, the specific BGM continues to be ``audibly output in a suppressed mode, or in an inaudible state.'' .

277(a) to (g) show actions (operations) by the player when the specific BGM is "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppression mode or in an inaudible state" during the reception period D described above. This assumes that the application is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 277(a) to (g), in the reception period D, as in the reception period B, the specific BGM is Even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the player is in a state where the audible output is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible mode, this triggers the specific BGM to start audible output in a non-suppressed mode. Instead, the system maintains ``audible output in a suppressed manner or an inaudible condition''. This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring.

FIGS. 277(a') to (g') show timing tPy when the specific BGM is set to "audible output in suppressed mode or inaudible state" during the above-mentioned acceptance period D. In other words, it is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

As shown in FIG. 277(a') to 277(g'), during the above-mentioned acceptance period D, an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. In such a case, the reception is used as a trigger to set the specific BGM to ``audible output in a suppressed mode or an inaudible condition''. In other words, in this case, when the reception is made while the specific BGM is in the "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in the inaudible state", the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode using the acceptance as a trigger. However, if an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressing mode, the acceptance will be used as a trigger to change the specific BGM to a state where the specific BGM is being output audibly in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state. ”. As a result, after the reception period D occurs, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the action (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the reception period D occurs. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when doing so.

As mentioned above, in the reception period D according to this example, when the reception is completed, the "sample image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated replica image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))" is displayed. The processing related to the display of is not terminated. In other words, by displaying the "post-reception display D" with priority over the relevant sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, "the sample image display corresponding to the acceptance period D ( The integrated image display IG) is hidden (invisible).

In addition, in the "post-acceptance display D" according to this example, as described above, the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted during the display period, and once the acceptance is done, this is used as an opportunity. The process related to the display of the "post-reception display D" is ended early (see an example of tracing the effect route from FIG. 282(c) to FIG. 282(g)). At this time, once the acceptance is made, the "sample image display (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 282(c))" and text information (cancellable) corresponding to the post-reception display D will also be displayed. The process related to the display ends (see FIG. 282(g)).

In such a configuration, during the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed, depending on the timing at which an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "sample image display (integrated image display) corresponding to the reception period D" may be displayed. In a situation where the processing related to the display of "Display IG)" continues, a situation may occur where the processing related to the display of "Post-reception display D" is terminated early. In other words, in this case, the display of the "post-reception display D" that had been prioritized over the "sample image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))" is terminated. As a result, the "sample image display corresponding to reception period D" will be displayed again, but at this time, "reception period D" itself may be generated again.

In this way, if the "reception period D" is caused to occur again after the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is ended early, the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is ended early. Even after this, if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted again within the "acceptance period D" that occurs again, the "post-acceptance display D" can be displayed again. It becomes like this. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is accidentally ended early.

By the way, regarding the acceptance periods A to D shown in FIGS. 273 to 282, fluctuation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as the fluctuation patterns, and a predetermined time period A to D has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. The above-mentioned cases are described above as occurring at times. However, for acceptance periods A to D, it is not necessary to assume that they occur only when different fluctuation patterns are selected; for example, as described later, this can be triggered when one fluctuation pattern is selected. It may also be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

Furthermore, as described above, the reception period D occurs as a reception period that has special characteristics compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such acceptance period D may be set as an acceptance period that can only occur when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number. In other words, in this case, when the number of reservations becomes less than a predetermined number as a result of the player's attempt to interrupt the game, the reception period D will occur, and it will appear as if the reception period changes to one of the reception periods A to C each time. As special effects such as You will finally be able to hold it.

FIGS. 278(a) and 278(b) are tables showing examples of settings related to the conditions for generating the acceptance periods A to D when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 278(a) is a table that is referred to when the number of reservations is one of "2" to "4" when the reservation is completed. In other words, in this case, even if the symbols start to fluctuate in response to the pending expiration, the pending number will not be ``0'', but will be between ``1'' and ``3'', and there is no risk that the game will be stopped. Since the situation is low, the above acceptance period D will not occur no matter which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" is executed as a fluctuation pattern. .

More specifically, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, 70% of At a rate of 30%, none of the reception periods A to D occur, and as a result of the performance judgment (advancement judgment), only the reception period A of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is expired and the second variation pattern is executed, the reception period will be increased at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (previous judgment). Of A to D, only reception period C occurs, and reception period A and reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is expired and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period will be increased at a rate of 10% as a result of the production judgment (notice judgment). B and reception period C occur, and reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment).

Note that the reception period A is 5 days after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" with different fluctuation times is selected. The reception period C is 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, regardless of whether "second fluctuation pattern" or "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. The acceptance period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation when the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected.

In addition, reception periods B and C are not subject to production judgment (notice judgment), and will always occur when the corresponding variation pattern is selected, but reception period A is It is subject to judgment (advance judgment), and can only occur if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment. However, the reception periods B and C may be subject to performance determination (advancement determination), or the reception period A may not be subject to performance determination (advancement determination).

Next, FIG. 278(b) is a table that is referred to when the number of reservations is "1" when extinguishing reservations. In other words, in this case, when the symbol variation according to the pending expiry starts, the number of pending will become "0", and if no new pending is added within the execution period of the symbol variation, there is a risk that the game will be stopped. , No matter which of all the fluctuation patterns selected as the fluctuation pattern, including the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern", is executed, the above acceptance period will not apply. It is designed to generate D.

More specifically, when the number of holds is "1" and the hold is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, the reception period A to D will be changed at a rate of 70% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment). Of these, only reception period D occurs, and reception period A and reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of performance judgment (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the reservation is exhausted and the second variation pattern is executed, reception period C and reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (preliminary judgment). However, as a result of the performance determination (advancement determination), reception period A, reception period C, and reception period D will occur at a rate of 50%.

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the reservation is exhausted and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period B, reception period C, and Reception period D occurs, and reception period A, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment).

In this embodiment, the "first fluctuation pattern" is a fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" are set as fluctuation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the "first variation pattern" is selected, the acceptance period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 277. On the other hand, when the "second variation pattern" or "third variation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 276.

In addition, during the reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C, the predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) after the symbol fluctuation starts, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern or the number of reservations. On the other hand, during the acceptance period D, symbol fluctuations will occur depending on which of the first fluctuation pattern, second fluctuation pattern, and third fluctuation pattern is selected. The time from the start to the occurrence (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) is different.

In other words, in this case, since it is possible to generate the reception period D for each type of variation pattern at a timing that does not interfere with the performance content, the reception period D can be set in any of all variation patterns. can also be generated suitably.

In the above production example, there are multiple reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 2-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 2-A"). We have prepared a reception period for In this regard, during reception period A, only one mode (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed as the image display (here, integrated image display IG). In the reception period B, multiple modes of displaying the sample image (integrated image display IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)) are prepared, and among these modes, the ``Aspects corresponding to the results of the judgment (advance judgment)'' are selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, during the reception period B, effects that cannot appear when the reception period A occurs are provided, so that the game until an operation (movement) by the player is detected is provided. It becomes possible to suitably improve one's interest.

Furthermore, regarding the "multiple modes of display of sample images" that can be displayed during reception period B, it is important for the enjoyment of the game that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot symbol differs depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. This is more desirable in terms of improving performance. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the acceptance period A. In this case, it is desirable that the "lowest expected mode" among the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the acceptance period A.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is further provided, and the reception period A and the reception period D only have one mode as a sample image display. can be displayed. In the "acceptance period B" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until its valid state is ended. On the other hand, among the "acceptance period A" and "acceptance period B" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, in "acceptance period A", the period until the valid state (acceptance period) ends. The sample image display will not be hidden in between, but in "acceptance period B", until the valid state (acceptance period) ends (while the valid state continues) In the middle of this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point was hidden (see FIG. 282(e)). In other words, in this case, even in the "acceptance period A" and "acceptance period D" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, the effect of whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be suitably improved until an operation (movement) by the player is detected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after the reception 282(b)→(c) and FIG. 282(e)→(c)). In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so the presentation performance (reception period D) using the "reception period D" will continue. In creating a system (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, during the acceptance period D, the sample image display is hidden in the middle of the reception period, and then the sample image display is displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by subsequently displaying the sample image display again. You will be able to do so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, only one aspect of the sample image display can be displayed in the “acceptance period A” and “acceptance period D”. The contents of the display changes that appear when the screen changes are different from each other. This makes it possible to add interest to what kind of display changes will occur when an acceptance is made.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "reception period D", the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the object of reception is made to emit light during the period when the sample image display is displayed, This may prompt the player to perform an action (operation). In addition, in this case, even during the period when the sample image display is hidden during the "acceptance period D," the operation means (here Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this regard, in "reception period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the object of reception does not emit light, it is possible to tell which type of reception period is occurring. Be able to make suggestions.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, the reception period is reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 3-A") and reception period C (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 3-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (equivalent to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or reception period B, after the sample image display (here, the integrated sample image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or reception period B occurs, the reception period A or reception period B is displayed. The sample image display is not hidden until the sample image display is completed, and actions by the player can be accepted while the sample image display is being displayed (see FIGS. 273, 274, and 274). 279, FIG. 280, etc.), and during the reception period C, it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the sample image display is not displayed (see FIG. 275, FIG. 281, etc.), and as described above. The "acceptance permission sound" is audibly output when acceptance period A or acceptance period B occurs, but is not audibly output when acceptance period C occurs.

According to such a configuration, the reception permission sound is audibly output and not only during the "reception period A or reception period B" in which reception is performed while the sample image display is being displayed, but also when the reception permission sound is audibly output. Since there is a "reception period C" in which the application is accepted while the sample image display is not displayed, it is possible that the post-reception display may occur at various times that the player did not intend. It is now possible to make the player aware of the game, and it is expected that the player will be able to suitably maintain his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 3-A") is further provided, and in the reception period C (FIGS. 275 and 281), the reception period C occurs. The sample image display is not displayed from the time the sample image is displayed until the game ends, and it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the sample image display is not displayed. , FIG. 282), the sample image display is hidden for a part of the acceptance period D, and the period during which the sample image display is displayed and the period during which the sample image display is hidden are In either case, it may be possible to accept actions (operations) by the player. In other words, in this case, the reception period D has two aspects: reception period A and B (reception while the sample image display is displayed), and reception period C (reception while the sample image display is not displayed). Since it has both of the following functions (acceptance of the game), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, even after the sample image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the player's actions (operations) will continue to be accepted, so the player's actions (operations) will not be accepted. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed when the sample image display is hidden without being displayed.

Furthermore, the acceptance permission sound is audibly output when acceptance periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when acceptance period C and acceptance period D occur. In other words, in this case, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the reception period D has a side as reception periods A and B (a sample image display is displayed), and a side as reception period C (the reception permission sound is displayed). (not output), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after the reception display). In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so the presentation performance (reception period D) using the "reception period D" will continue. In creating a system (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (FIGS. 279 and 280), and the background image that appears when reception period C occurs ( Figure 281). This makes it possible to give the impression that the background image differs depending on the type of reception period.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, a change occurs in the background image within the reception period D, and in accordance with the timing at which the change occurs, the sample image display is turned off from the period in which the sample image display is displayed. Since the transition is made to the displayed period, it is possible to provide an effect that makes it appear as if the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

Furthermore, during the reception period D, the background image that has been changed is restored to its original state, and at the same time as the original image is restored, the pattern image display is changed from the period in which the pattern image display is hidden. Since the transition is made to the displayed period, it is possible to provide an effect within the reception period D as if the reception period was returned to before the transition.

Note that the background image changes within the acceptance period D when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. If an action (operation) by the player has been accepted previously, no change will occur in the background image even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period D. This makes it possible to avoid changing the background image to a different one while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during reception period A, B or reception period D, if a reception is made while the sample image display is being displayed, the sample image display is hidden. At that time, in reception period A and B, "disappearance EF" is displayed as an image different from the sample image display in conjunction with hiding the sample image display, but in reception period D, the sample image display is hidden. In addition to hiding the display, the "disappearance EF" is not displayed as an image different from the sample image display. In other words, in this case, if the "extinction EF" did not appear when the reception was made, it would be possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" had occurred. Although the aspect of A and B is maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the game due to the inability to understand which reception period is occurring.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, the reception period is reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 5-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 5-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (equivalent to the reception period). Then, the acceptance period A or the acceptance period B is the number of judgments shown in FIG. When the execution of the third variation pattern (corresponding to the first variation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") is started, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the third variation pattern (in FIG. 278, the reception period A In case of , it can occur when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and in case of reception period B, it can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation. When the number of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations in a pending state (pending number)) stored in the pending storage means is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the pending number becomes " When the second variation pattern (corresponding to the second variation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") shown in FIG. This can occur when the elapsed timing (in FIG. 278(b), the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) arrives, but in a situation where the number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means is "2" or more. When the execution of the second variation pattern is started at a certain time, the second variation pattern is prevented from occurring even if the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started (see FIG. 278(a)). reference).

According to such a configuration, if you are trying to cancel a game and as a result, the number of reservations runs out, a type of acceptance period (acceptance period D) that did not occur until then will occur, so the game will be canceled. The player can be expected to be encouraged not to play the game, or even if the game is canceled, the player can still have the impression that the game was interesting in the end.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the "number of determination information stored by the suspension storage means (number of reservations)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the number of reservations becomes " Even if the execution of the second variation pattern is started in the state of "0", the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 278(b), 30 seconds from the start of the variation) When the "number of judgment information stored by the suspension storage means (number of reservations)" increases before the timing (time that has passed) has not arrived (when the number of reservations increases from "0" to "1" or more), The reception period D may not occur when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started.

In other words, even if the pending number is ``1'' and it is used up and the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started in the state of ``0'', within the execution period of that symbol variation. If the pending number increases in , it suggests that you are not about to cancel the game. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of pending symbols is "0", the number of pending symbols is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. In this case, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 278(b), 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation), the reception period D is not generated. Therefore, the acceptance period D can be made to function more appropriately as "a type of acceptance period that can appear only when the player is about to cancel the game."

In order to obtain such effects more preferably, even if the reception period D occurs, the number of judgment information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means) is It is more desirable to end the acceptance period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at that point when the number) increases.

Furthermore, even in a situation where a reception is made within the reception period D and a post-reception display corresponding to the reception is executed, before the display time elapses, "the data is stored in the hold storage means". When the number of pieces of judgment information (pending number) increases, the post-reception display may be ended (not displayed) at that point.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the acceptance period D is a predetermined period of time after the first variation pattern shown in FIG. This event also occurs when the timing (timing 10 seconds after 10 seconds has elapsed) has arrived (on the condition that the number of reservations is 0). and,
- The timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern (the variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. 278 (the timing when 30 seconds have passed since the start of variation in FIG. 278(b)) has arrived. If the reception period D occurs when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D occurs while the inaudible state is maintained. (See Figure 276)
- The timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern (variation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. If the corresponding reception period D occurs when the specified BGM is output in an audible state, the specified BGM is not made audible, but the reception period D occurs while the specified BGM is output audibly, and within the reception period D that has occurred. Make specific BGM inaudible (see Figure 277)
It is planned to have the following configuration.

According to such a configuration, when the reception period D occurs, it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. In addition, the above-mentioned acceptance period B (see FIG. 274), which occurs while the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, appears to have occurred, which improves gaming interest. You will be able to aim for In addition, the reception period D, which appeared to have occurred during the reception period A (see FIG. 273), now appears to have changed to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, after the first variation pattern shown in FIG. If an acceptance is made while the music is being output, the audible output of the specific BGM is terminated using the acceptance as a trigger (see FIG. 277). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be terminated upon this acceptance, but may continue to be audibly output from then on. For example, even in the example of FIG. 277(e'), instead of setting the specific BGM to a suppressed mode or an inaudible state at the accepted timing tPx, the timing tPy shown in FIG. 277(e) The specific BGM may be suppressed or rendered inaudible based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM will be suppressed or made inaudible during the display period of the post-reception display D, making it possible to provide an interesting performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 6-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 6-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: And, the reception period A can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the performance situation (such as the result of jackpot determination or performance determination). Reception period B is such that it can occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, regardless of the performance situation (results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc.) By using specific BGM, it becomes possible to provide effects related to the type of acceptance period even before the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A") is further provided as a reception period, and the reception period D is divided into the performance situation (results of jackpot determination). Depending on the performance judgment result, etc.), it may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or it may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. I did it like that.

More specifically, a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 278(b)) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation of the first variation pattern (see FIG. 278(b) etc.) that does not form a reach state. If the reception period D occurs at times, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, for a predetermined period of time after the symbol fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern or the third fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 278(b) etc.) that forms the reach state is started (in FIG. 278(b), the second fluctuation pattern If the reception period D occurs when the period of time (30 seconds for the pattern and 50 seconds for the third variation pattern) has elapsed, the reception period D occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible. (See Figure 276).

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. In any of the above cases, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is "acceptance period D," the interest in the game is suitably maintained until the player's action (operation) is accepted. things come to be expected.

Note that even during reception period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "acceptance period A" is one that can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner, regardless of the performance situation (results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc.) " means "If reception period A occurs in a situation where no abnormality has been reported and the performance is proceeding properly, the specific BGM will always be audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. ``The corresponding acceptance period A will occur.''

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 7-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 7-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: In the reception period A, if a reception is made within the period, it is possible to execute the post-reception display A according to the reception, and at least the post-reception display A is displayed for the production design (decorative design SZ). 279(c)), it is displayed with priority over the post-reception display A while On the other hand, in the reception period D, if a reception is made within the period, it is possible to execute the post-reception display D according to the reception, and the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is such that at least the post-reception display D is executed. While it is being displayed, it is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to view or is hidden by the post-acceptance display D (see FIG. 282(c)).

In addition, "the manner in which it is made difficult to see" here means "the manner in which at least a part of the production design (decorative design SZ) is made visible through the reception display D set to a predetermined transmittance according to the transmittance. or a mode in which at least a part of the production design (decorative design SZ) is made invisible due to the post-reception display D that overlaps this, or at least one of the production design (decoration design SZ) "The manner in which parts are hidden, etc."

According to such a configuration, by checking whether or not the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's action (operation), the reception period can be determined. Be able to recognize the type of. Note that the "design for presentation (decorative pattern SZ)" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-reach state as a presentation in the presentation display device 1600, and also includes a presentation for forming a ready-to-reach state or not. , It is a pattern that is also used for pseudo continuous effects, full rotation effects, etc.

However, some players may feel disgusted by the deterioration in visibility of such performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ) due to the display of post-reception display D. has been confirmed. In this regard, in the production example described above, when the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is displayed, a reception period different from the reception period D is generated (for example, in response to the reception within the reception period D). When a player's operation is accepted within the different acceptance period, the acceptance is used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display D (processing related to displaying the post-acceptance display D). 282(c)→FIG. 282(g)).

According to such a configuration, if the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is "hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display started", the predetermined time is By simply performing a predetermined operation until the time elapses, the player can hide the post-acceptance display D at that point. Furthermore, the actions (operations) required of the player to display the post-reception display D within the reception period D and the reception period that is different from the reception period D (the reception period that occurs in response to the reception within the reception period D) The actions (operations) required of the player in order to hide the post-reception display D may be the same action (operation) or may be different actions (operations). Note that the above-mentioned "reception period different from reception period D" ends when the post-reception display D becomes hidden.

On the other hand, the post-reception display A may also be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the start of display (it may be the same time as the predetermined time until the post-reception display D is hidden, or may be a different time). It is hidden when the period has passed. However, regarding the post-reception display A that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ), the display will be hidden no matter what operation the player performs before the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent this from happening in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if a reception is made within the period, a post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed. , the production design (decorative design SZ) is displayed in a manner that is made difficult to see by the post-reception display B, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display B is displayed. (See Figure 280(c)).

However, in the above-mentioned example of production, although the "post-reception display B" and "post-reception display D" are common in that they affect the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ), First, the post-reception display B is "hidden when a predetermined period of time (which may be different from the time until the post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since the display started." If this is the case, no matter what operation the player performs until the predetermined time has elapsed, the post-acceptance display B will not be hidden due to this. Thereby, when the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is affected by the post-acceptance display, it is possible to provide performance regarding whether or not this can be improved.

It is preferable that the reception period B is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled, and the reception period D is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 8-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 8-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if the reception is made while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Taking this as an opportunity, the specific BGM is made inaudible (see Figure 277), and during reception period B, the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode becomes a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state in which it is not audibly output. Even if the reception is allowed after that and the reception is made, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or a state in which it is not audibly output is maintained (see FIG. 274).

According to such a configuration, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not audibly output". You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the production example mentioned above, in the reception period D, when the reception is made, all the sounds that were previously output audible, including the production sounds different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in the reception period B. When an acceptance is made, all sounds that were being output audibly at that time (such as acceptance acceptance sound) are made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the specific BGM may be put in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output", or when the acceptance is made, it is not output audibly at that point. It becomes possible to provide a common presentation between reception period D and reception period B, such as making all the sounds made inaudible, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Furthermore, as mentioned above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by players is allowed, a situation occurs (in the middle of the validity period) where the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output. However, even in this situation, the acceptance period is continued (see FIG. 282(e)). In other words, in this case, in the reception period D, even though the specific BGM is made inaudible upon receipt of the reception, if no reception is made for a predetermined period of time after the reception period D occurs, , since the specific BGM becomes inaudible while the application has not yet been accepted, it becomes possible to make the player think that the application period D has ended, and the interest of the player is increased. You will be able to strongly attract

In particular, in the production example mentioned above, the background image was changed to coincide with the timing when the specific BGM was made inaudible while the reception was not yet completed, so a reception period different from reception period D occurred. This will provide a performance that makes it seem as if the user is actually playing the game.

In addition, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with the reception as a trigger (see Figure 277), a "display change according to the reception (post-reception display D)" is generated. However, when making the specific BGM inaudible while the reception has not yet been made (see Figure 277), a "display change according to the reception (post-reception display D)" should be generated accordingly. I made sure that there was no. In other words, in this case, the reception period D ends by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred when the specific BGM is made inaudible. You will be able to make yourself aware of the possibilities that you are not aware of. If an action (operation) by the player is accepted after the specific BGM has been made inaudible but before the end of the acceptance period D, this will be used as an opportunity to display "display changes in accordance with the acceptance (reception Since the "later display D)" will occur, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period B, a predetermined production sound (for example, reception permission sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 when the period ends, and the predetermined When the performance sound is made inaudible, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted, so it is easy to determine whether or not acceptance period B continues. be able to recognize it. In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, reception period B is set as the reception period in which the automatic button function described above is activated, and the automatic button function is activated based on the arrival of timing tM3. It has become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period B occurs when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern shown in FIG. is made inaudible before a predetermined time elapses after the start of the third variation pattern, but for reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring until then. According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, reception period B occurs first, and after that, the specific BGM is made inaudible. Since it becomes possible to expect that the acceptance period D will occur even more, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D can only occur when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. In both the fluctuation pattern and the third fluctuation pattern, it is assumed that it can occur when a specified time has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation, but regardless of which fluctuation pattern It is desirable to set it to occur after the reception period (such as reception period A to C). In other words, in this case, the reception period D, which has a special effect, can be used as the last reception period that occurred for a player who is about to cancel the game, so that the game can be prevented from being canceled. The player will be able to expect prompting, or even if the game is canceled, the player will be able to leave the impression that the game was interesting at the end.

During the acceptance period D, when an acceptance is accepted, the post-acceptance display D appears for a specific time; however, when the specific time elapses and the post-acceptance display D is hidden, it is desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol variation is started.

Next, examples that embody the above configurations 1, 14, and 15 will be explained in order as modifications to the above-described production examples.

In other words, in the above-mentioned production example, when the reception is made within the period D when the sample image display is displayed, and when the reception is made during the period when the sample image display is hidden. It was decided that the same post-reception display D would be generated. However, instead of this, within the reception period D, when the reception is made within the period when the sample image display is displayed, and when the reception is made during the period when the sample image display is hidden. A different post-reception display may be generated.

In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D is more precisely the "acceptance period D1" which is the period during which the sample image display is displayed, and the "acceptance period D2" which is the period during which the sample image display is hidden. It is composed of two types of reception periods, and when the reception is made during the reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and when the reception is made during the reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed. After receiving the information, the display D2 will be displayed.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like is modified as described above.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 283 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 or FIG. 282 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 283 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and the same applies to other examples. It is possible to apply.

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 283, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283(b)), and if a reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 283(c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283(b)), if a predetermined time elapses without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives) , the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 283(e)). Regarding the fact that the player's actions (operations) are allowed even under such a situation (when the sample image display is hidden), it is different from the case of the production example shown in FIG. 282 etc. It's the same. However, in this modification, when the sample image display becomes hidden (see FIG. 283(e)), the above-mentioned "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs. It is supposed to be done.

In other words, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which the sample image display is hidden, the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" will be displayed. (See Figure 283(h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" which is different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be realized. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest through a sexual performance.

Moreover, during the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, it will more appropriately create an atmosphere as if the period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. will be done.

In particular, in this example, as in the production example shown in FIG. 282, from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from "background image HG3". (FIG. 283(b)→FIG. 283(e)). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, the atmosphere as if it were suddenly replaced with the reception period C that may occur when the desert background is created can be improved. It is now expected to produce favorable results.

Furthermore, the content of the "post-reception display D2" according to this example is different from the "group notice" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. 281(c), but it uses a ghost character. The content is reminiscent of "post-reception display C", such as the fact that it is common to "post-reception display C", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere that seems to be suddenly replaced with the reception period C that can occur when the background is a desert. will be expected to produce.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) It is possible to suggest that a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D2 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives) It becomes like this.

Note that if a predetermined time period elapses after the acceptance period D2 occurs without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives), the process shown in FIG. ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to displaying the sample image display (integrated image display IG). At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 283(e)→FIG. 283(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from other reception periods can be more suitably created.

If a reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 283(f)) that has occurred again in this way, the reception period D1 A post-reception display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 283(c)).

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D (acceptance period D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 283, the acceptance period D (corresponding to the third acceptance period of "Configuration 15-A") includes a period in which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed; There are periods during which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is not displayed, but these periods will function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", and these "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", different display changes are made depending on whether the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, there is a change in the display that cannot be confirmed unless the user is made aware of the possibility that the reception period D has ended (the sample image display is hidden). Since the display changes (changes in the display when

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, the acceptance period D includes a "period in which the model image display is displayed" and a "period in which the model image display is hidden." However, instead of this, in the reception period D, there is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is displayed, and a period in which text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is hidden. It may also be possible to include a period in which the

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like is modified as described above.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 284 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 or FIG. 282 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and can be similarly applied to other examples. .

However, in the acceptance period D (see FIG. 284(b)) shown in FIG. Text information (in this case, "Please press") related to what is being done is displayed.

In other words, as mentioned above, text information related to acceptance being allowed cannot be displayed during acceptance period A (see FIG. 279(b)), where expectations are relatively low. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 280(b)), where expectations are relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such text information (here, "Please press") during the reception period D, it is expected that interest in the game will be improved.

However, in the acceptance period D according to this modification, as shown in FIGS. 284(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is continued. 276 and 277), the character information related to the fact that reception is permitted (here, "Please press") is changed from the displayed state to the hidden state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), and the character information is may change from a non-display state to a display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even if the text information (here, "Please press") is hidden, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted. Based on the reception, the post-reception display D will be performed (see the example of tracing the production route from FIG. 284(e) to FIG. 284(c)).

In this example, if the player's action (operation) is accepted within the acceptance period D, the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance of the action is hidden. (Figure 284(b) → Figure 284(c)), or was the acceptance made while the text information (here, "Please press") was hidden? (Figure 284(e) → Figure 284(c)), or was the acceptance made after the character information (here, "Please press") was returned to the display state (Figure 284(f) → Figure 284(f) → Figure 284(f) → Figure 284(f))? 284(c)), the same aspect (FIG. 284(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D".

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 284(e), although the acceptance period D has occurred, the acceptance period A does not display text information related to acceptance of acceptance. (See FIG. 279(b)) It is now possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game has suddenly been replaced, and through such a surprising performance, it is possible to improve the game's interest. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted under a situation that appears to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period A (text information is not displayed), the operation will still correspond to the acceptance period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 284(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D", it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, when the text information related to acceptance of acceptance changes from a display state to a non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when text information related to acceptance of reception changes to a hidden state, it is possible to better create an atmosphere as if the period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. become expected.

In particular, in this example, "background image HG4a" depicting a mountain and a river is changed to "background image HG4c" depicting a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 284 ( b)→Figure 284(e)). According to such a configuration, when the text information related to acceptance of acceptance changes to a hidden state, it creates an atmosphere as if the acceptance period A has suddenly been replaced with the acceptance period A that may occur when the mountain background is displayed. It is expected to produce better results.

In addition, in this example, when the text information related to acceptance is allowed is returned from the hidden state to the displayed state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 284(e)→FIG. 284(f)). As a result, it is expected that an atmosphere that returns to the original reception period D from other reception periods (particularly reception period A) can be more suitably created.

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (corresponding to the period). In both cases, the reception period B occurs and the reception period D occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action by the player (pressing the operation button 410) is accepted in period B and reception period D, different character information ("press" in reception period B, "press" in reception period D) is accepted. "Please press").

That is, in reception period B and reception period D, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display B, D ) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since these are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), it is recognized which type of display change (post-reception display B, D) may occur as a post-reception display. It is now possible to perform operations (movements by the player), and it is expected that this will suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of reception period B is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of reception period B are displayed, but when the reception is made, the reception is different from that in the case of reception period B. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period during which the post-display occurs. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned modification, in the reception period B, the text information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is allowed (valid state) ends; During the reception period D, the text information can be hidden during the period while the reception continues to be permitted (valid state). In other words, in this case, during the acceptance period D, the player is required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the corresponding period occurs. As it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period. It is now expected to suitably avoid the situation where the information disappears completely.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, the acceptance period D includes a period in which text information is displayed (see FIG. 284(b)) and a period in which text information is hidden (see FIG. 284(e)). ), but the same display change (see FIG. 284(c)) occurs no matter when the reception is made within these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is hidden, as long as you confirm what kind of operation mode is requested while the text information is displayed, the operation can be performed properly. This is possible, and is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, the text information is hidden during the acceptance period D, and then is displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "reception period D" has suddenly changed to the "reception period A" in which no text information is displayed, the misunderstanding can be corrected by the text information being displayed again. It will be possible to resolve it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, a change occurs in the background image during the reception period D, and at the same time as the change occurs, the text information is removed from the period in which text information is displayed. I am trying to make the transition to the displayed period. This makes it possible to suitably give the impression that the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

In the production example described with reference to FIG. 284, there are cases in which a reception is made within the period during which text information related to acceptance is permitted during the reception period D, and a case in which the reception is permitted. The same post-reception display D is generated when the reception is made within the period in which text information related to the presence of the user is hidden. However, instead of this, when the reception is made within the period during which the text information related to the reception is allowed is displayed within the reception period D, and when the text information related to the reception is allowed is displayed. A different post-acceptance display may be generated depending on when the acceptance is made within a period in which text information is hidden.

In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D is, more precisely, the "acceptance period D1", which is the period in which text information related to the acceptance of acceptance is displayed, and the acceptance period D1, which is the period in which text information related to the acceptance of acceptance is displayed It consists of two types of acceptance periods, such as "acceptance period D2", which is a period in which the text information obtained is hidden, and when an acceptance is made during acceptance period D1, a corresponding post-acceptance display D1 is displayed. If a reception is made during the reception period D2, a corresponding post-reception display D2 will be displayed.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284 etc. is modified as described above.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 285 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 which is a modification thereof will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 285 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284, and the same can be applied to other examples as well. .

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 285, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285(b)), and when a reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 285(c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285(b)), if a predetermined time elapses without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives) , text information related to acceptance being permitted (here, "Please press") is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)). Regarding the fact that the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed even under such a situation (a situation where the text information related to the fact that acceptance is allowed is hidden), see Figure 284. This is the same as in the production example shown in . However, in this modified example, when the character information related to acceptance of acceptance is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)), the above-mentioned "acceptance period D1" ends. A different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

In other words, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which character information related to acceptance is hidden, the text information related to acceptance is hidden. Display D2 will be displayed (see FIG. 285(h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" which is different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be realized. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest through a sexual performance.

Moreover, in the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the character information related to acceptance of acceptance changes from a display state to a non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to acceptance is allowed changes to the hidden state, the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A in which the character information is hidden. It is expected to create a more suitable atmosphere.

In particular, in this example, as in the production example shown in FIG. 284, from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4c" depicting mountains different from "background image HG1". (FIG. 285(b)→FIG. 285(e)). With this configuration, when the text information (in this case, "Please press") changes to a hidden state, the atmosphere of the reception period A, which can occur when the mountain is in the background, is suddenly replaced. It is now expected to produce favorable results.

Furthermore, the content of the "post-reception display D2" according to this example is different from the "conversation preview" of the "post-reception display A" shown in FIG. 279(c), but it uses a princess character. The content is reminiscent of "Post-Reception Display A", such as the commonality of ``Reception Period A'', and this also makes it more suitable for creating an atmosphere that seems to have been suddenly replaced with Reception Period A in which text information is hidden. It is expected that this will be produced in the future.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) It is possible to suggest that a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D2 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives) It becomes like this.

Note that if a predetermined time period elapses after the reception period D2 occurs without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives), the process shown in FIG. ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to displaying "text information related to acceptance being permitted." At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 285(e)→FIG. 285(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from other reception periods can be more suitably created.

If a reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 285(f)) that has occurred again in this way, the reception period D1 A post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 285(c)).

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D (acceptance period D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 285, in the acceptance period D (corresponding to the second acceptance period of "Configuration 14-A"), "text information related to acceptance being allowed" is displayed. There is a period in which "textual information related to acceptance is permitted" is hidden, but these periods will function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", It was decided that different display changes would occur depending on which of the "reception period D1" and "reception period D2" the reception was made. In other words, in this case, when the "text information related to acceptance of acceptance" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a different acceptance period from the previous acceptance period begins. Since this occurs, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance even when actions (operations) by the player are not readily accepted.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the "post-reception display" is started to be displayed when the sample image display is being displayed, but regarding the "post-reception display", The display does not necessarily have to be started when the sample image display is being displayed, and the display may be started after the sample image display is hidden.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the sample images are displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception period occurs, but when the timing at which the reception period occurs, Alternatively, it may be displayed later.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. In this case, it is preferable that the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues even though the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" has appeared since it was accepted.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the "extinction effect (disappearance related display)" is not only used to display a sample image, but also to a gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. We decided to make this difficult to visually recognize. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, in the reception period D, even if the reception is made within the period, this will be used as an opportunity to terminate the display processing for displaying the sample image (in the modified example, text information). I tried not to let it happen. In other words, by displaying the post-reception display D preferentially over the sample image display (text information in the modified example) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the sample image display (text information in the modified example) is now hidden (invisible). However, even when an acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, this may be used as an opportunity to terminate the display process for displaying the sample image (in a modified example, text information).

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) that simulates the operation receiving section to be operated is displayed within the reception period. The sample image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by replacing it with, for example, an arrow notation that prompts an operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 277, if an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner during the acceptance period D, the acceptance will be used as a trigger to determine whether the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner. However, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not it has been accepted. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the post-acceptance display is rendered inaudible during the execution period, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before each reception period occurs, but the reception period It may also be displayed in accordance with the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of reception period, the display may be displayed before the reception period occurs, or may be displayed in accordance with the timing at which the reception period occurs. In short, as long as the reception can be made while each of the background images are displayed, the above-described effects related to the background images will be achieved.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, it is assumed that the reception period C occurs while the specific BGM is output audibly in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. , may occur when the specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed manner.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the acceptance period D includes a period in which a sample image display (in a modified example, text information related to acceptance of acceptance) is displayed; However, these periods include periods in which the player performs operations after confirming that the image display (or text information) is hidden. Even if you start the game, the time is set to be sufficient for the reception to be accepted in the non-display state, and the game will be started after confirming that the image display (or text information) is returned to the display state. This is set as a time sufficient for acceptance to be made in the display state even if the person starts an action (operation), and has no technical significance except for display methods using so-called "flashing displays." It is clear that it has.

For example, during reception period D, the time period during which a sample image display (or text information) is kept in a "hidden state" after it is turned into a "hidden state" is set as reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set the time value to be half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the current time (for example, 3 seconds). Also, after the sample image display (or text information) is returned to the display state, the time to maintain the display state is half of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as the reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set a time value of 1.5 seconds or more (1.5 seconds or more). It is desirable to set the time value to be more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or acceptance period B.

Or, the time from when the sample image display (or text information) is displayed to when it is hidden, or from when the sample image display (or text information) is set to the "hidden state" to the "non-display state". The time to maintain the "display state" and the time to maintain the display state after the sample image display (or text information) is returned to the display state are the shortest period of time for symbol fluctuations (required for shortened fluctuations). It may also be set as a time value greater than or equal to (time). This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol variation, and yet allows the symbol variation to be ended early.

Next, examples that embody the above configurations 4, 9 to 13 will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D), a reception period E is further prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects). It is said that

The characteristics of the reception period E will be explained with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. E) may also be realized.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which a reception period E (reception performance E) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "fluctuation pattern E" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E. After that, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to the variation pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 286(a)"), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 286(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 282(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the timing when a predetermined time E has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ has arrived. When this happens (when condition E is satisfied), the above-mentioned acceptance period E (validity period) in which “acceptance regarding post-acceptance display E” is permitted is generated (“situation shown in FIG. 286(e)”).

In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a sign corresponding to the reception period E is displayed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 286(b), a "kunoichi" character KI is introduced. Next, as shown in FIG. 286(c), the character KI throws a smoke bomb to generate smoke. Then, as shown in FIG. 286(d), the character KI is displayed saying a line such as "Press the button to call that person." At this time, the expansion of the "smoke" is depicted and a "sample image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "sample image display" are difficult to see because the character KI and dialogue are prioritized. It is being done. Then, when the reception period E occurs after such a precursor display (FIGS. 286(b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the lines are hidden, and the "sample image display" is clearly displayed. will be done.

In this example, "character KI" and "smoke" are displayed with priority over the background image HG4a and the decoration image SZ. Further, "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke". In other words, in this case, the "smoke" will function as the "background image" to be changed. "Smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 286(e), in the reception period E according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" in which the operation button 410 is modeled and the sword ornament 5001 are modeled as the model image display. A "sword decoration image SYG" and a "special imitation image TM" imitating the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed, respectively. Note that in this example, a plurality of each of the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. .

That is, in this case, during the acceptance period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword ornament 5001," and the "special operation means 1410." Thereby, the player determines which of the "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001", and "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

In this regard, if an operation is accepted for the "operation button 410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286(f), a reception sound such as "ping pong" E1 is audibly output, and the display changes to display an "image suggesting that the integrated image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" (post-reception display E1), and a display depicting a cityscape. Background changes to ``background image HG5'' occur. Note that after the "post-reception display E1" is displayed in this way, the performance progresses while the "background image HG5" is being displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286(g), no acceptance sound is generated and no There is no display change, and the acceptance period E is not ended (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). That is, in the reception period E, even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object for reception, a "special imitation image TM" imitating the "special operation means 1410" is displayed. . According to such a configuration, during the reception period E, a sample image display (integrated sample image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means set as the object of acceptance during the reception period E, and the corresponding Since the display of sample images (special sample images TM) of operation means that are not set for acceptance during reception period E is mixed, there is a feeling of tension as it is difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It will be possible to give the opportunity to operate in the middle of the day. Note that while the "special operation means 1410" is within the reception period E, operations on the "special operation means 1410" are accepted, but no reception sound is generated using this as an opportunity. In addition, even if it is arranged so that no display change occurs and the reception period E is not ended (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). good.

On the other hand, if an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286(i), based on the acceptance, an acceptance sound E2 such as "Boo" Along with the audible output, a display change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated that depicts the character KI speaking the line, ``I'll rearrange the partition!''. Note that at this time, no change occurs in the background image.

In other words, after "post-reception display E2" is displayed, the performance does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) as reception period E is reset, and as a result, the remaining time as reception period E is returned to the state immediately after the reception period E occurred (it can also be said that "the reception period E occurs again"). According to such a configuration, even if the operation for making the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) appear is not performed and as a result, the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time Since it becomes possible to restart the "acceptance period E" from the initial state where the period has not yet been completed, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Note that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not ``the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted once'', but ``the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted a predetermined number of times''. It may also be possible to accept only the amount of time required.

Incidentally, it goes without saying that if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the reception period E, the remaining time of the reception period E will not be reset.

Then, as a result of the operation performed on the "sword ornament 5001" within the reception period E, the remaining time of the reception period E was returned to the state immediately after the reception period E occurred (the reception period E re-occurred). ), the same procedure as described above will occur depending on which of the operations on the “operation button 410”, the operation on the “sword ornament 5001”, and the operation on the “special operation means 1410” is accepted within the acceptance period E. A phenomenon will occur (FIG. 286(f), (g), (i)).

However, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period E during which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is displayed and the set time When an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is made to differ from each other (after acceptance). display D1, D2, etc.). According to such a configuration, since there is a dramatic value in displaying the post-reception display D without resetting, it is preferable to reduce the feeling of tension when the reception period E is occurring. will be able to maintain it.

On the other hand, in the "example that progresses from FIG. 286(e) or FIG. 286(g) to FIG. 286(h)", the "operation on the operation button 410" and "operation on the sword ornament 5001" are performed within the acceptance period E. This is based on the assumption that neither application is accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period E has occurred, the remaining time is completely used up without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, and the acceptance period E is ended. In this regard, the reception period E is set as "the reception period during which the automatic button function described above is activated." Therefore, in the reception period E, even if the remaining time is exhausted without accepting either the "operation on the operation button 410" or the "operation on the sword ornament 5001," the process shown in FIG. 286(h) As shown in , the same post-acceptance display E as when there is an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period E is generated.

However, if neither the "operation on the operation button 410" nor the "operation on the sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "operation on the operation button 410" will not be accepted within the acceptance period E. Although the same post-acceptance display E as when received is generated, the same acceptance sound E (ping pong) as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is no longer audible. There is.

According to such a configuration, while displaying the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation on the operation button 410" was accepted within the acceptance period E, the result of a successful selective operation by the player is displayed. It is expected that this will encourage more active operations when reception period E occurs again. Become so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period E, it is made difficult to recognize how much time is left in the acceptance period E, or the post-acceptance display E1 is displayed. The process provides a hint as to which operation mode (operation type) is required for the purpose.

287(a) to 287(d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. 286(e), showing the display contents over time while the acceptance period E continues. It is a figure showing a change.

As mentioned above, during the reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" that imitates the operation button 410, the "sword decoration image SYG" that imitates the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation means ("PUSH" in the figure) are displayed. A "special imitation image TM" imitating the described button) 1410 is displayed.

That is, in the reception period E, although multiple types of sample image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to suggest the remaining time is one of the multiple types of sample image displays. This means that it will only be associated with one (integrated image display IG). This makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated image display IG" among the plurality of types of image display is in a state in which the operation means (operation button 410) should be operated.

Furthermore, as time passes during the acceptance period E, the "integrated image display IG" displays "movements when the player receives operations" as shown in FIGS. 287(a) to (d). A portion of the operation button 410 that simulates the "operation receiving section" (button design image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if the user were performing the following steps. This dynamic display is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234, and is also the same when "integrated image display IG" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285.

However, in this production example, among the multiple types of simulated image displays, the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special simulated image TM" are the part that simulates the "operation receiver" of the sword decoration 5001, and the special A portion of the operation means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiver" is not displayed dynamically, but is displayed statically. Note that for the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special print image TM", the light emission mode may be changed such as blinking light emission.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple types of image display, only the "integrated image display IG" expresses the "movement when the player receives an operation". It becomes possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to "integrated image display IG" among the types of image display types is in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) should be operated.

Furthermore, as described above, during the reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to suggest the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, such a gauge image GG normally depicts a display area that gradually decreases as time passes after the acceptance period occurs. , which is used to indicate how much time is left in the reception period. The manner in which the gauge image GG is used in this way is the same when the "gauge image GG (here, the integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285. be.

However, during the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 287(a) to (d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, the message ``Time elapsed since the reception period occurred'' is displayed. There is no "description in which the display area gradually decreases." That is, in the acceptance period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is maintained at the maximum value and displayed from the time the period occurs until the end of the period. There is. According to this configuration, during the reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. become expected.

In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time of the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since there is no depiction that would increase the display area of the gauge image GG, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that the remaining time for the reception period E has been reset, and a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. will be done.

The "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" shown in FIGS. 287(a) to (d) is repeated until the acceptance period E ends. Therefore, if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the ``dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG'' is terminated with this acceptance as a trigger. However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 within the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" will not be terminated due to this. Furthermore, even if an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the process of generating the post-acceptance display D2 will be performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" will be terminated. There is no need to change the settings or start over from the beginning, but the ``dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG'' that has been performed up to that point is simply continued.

According to the production example described above, first, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 4-A") and reception period E (the second reception period of "Configuration 4-A") are set as the reception period. We have multiple reception periods including: In the acceptance period A (FIGS. 273 and 279), when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-acceptance display A is displayed and the acceptance sound A is output. When no movement (operation) by the player is detected, the post-acceptance display A is not displayed and the acceptance sound A is not output. When an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if no action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output. The same post-acceptance display E1 as when an action (operation) by the player is detected within is displayed, but the acceptance sound E1 is not output.

According to such a configuration, if an action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period E, there may be a disadvantage in terms of performance, so that the tension when the acceptance period E occurs is reduced. will be able to maintain it properly.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in the reception period B (FIGS. 274 and 280), the game is not played within the period. When an action (operation) by the player is detected, the reception display B is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if no action by the player is detected within the period, the player's action is not detected within the period. The same post-acceptance display B as when (operation) is detected is displayed and the acceptance sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action was accepted is caused to occur so as to cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation. (Reception period E) and when the reception period occurs without causing any disadvantages (Reception period B), so while maintaining the tension when the reception period occurs, It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game when the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time within the period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is not displayed in reception period A (FIG. 279), and in reception period B (FIG. 280) and reception period E (FIG. 286). ) displays text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted. In this respect, the text information displayed during the reception period B and the text information displayed during the reception period E are made to be different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, the presence or absence of "textual information related to acceptance of reception" is checked, and the reception for which the automatic button function is activated is confirmed. It becomes possible to recognize whether it is a period or not. In addition, if "text information related to acceptance is allowed" is displayed when the reception period occurs, by checking the type of the text information, you can check the It becomes possible to recognize the type of

Furthermore, as described above, in the reception period B, when the automatic button function is enabled, the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" appears (see FIG. 274(j)). In this regard, in the production example mentioned above, in the reception period E (Fig. 286), when the automatic button function is activated (such as when progressing from Fig. 286 (e) to (h)), the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" should not appear. According to such a configuration, the type of reception period can be recognized based on whether or not a "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled. .

In addition, during the acceptance period E (FIG. 286), even when an action (operation) by the player is accepted and the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden, the message " It is also possible to prevent the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" from appearing.

As described above, during the acceptance period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232). On the other hand, during the acceptance period A and the acceptance period E, it is desirable that the sample image be displayed in only one manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the acceptance period A, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player (see FIG. 279), and in the acceptance period B and E, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player. The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the automatic button function has been activated and the post-acceptance display has been displayed, making it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

However, during the acceptance period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword ornament 5001", the post-acceptance display E2 is displayed. The background image will no longer be changed to a different background image. According to such a configuration, although the post-reception display E2 corresponding to the reception is displayed, the player can confirm that the background image that should have been changed has not been changed yet. It becomes possible to recognize that period E has not yet ended.

During the reception period E, there are a plurality of objects (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001, but the special operation means 1410 may also be included) as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player. is set, and differs depending on whether the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is accepted or the case where the player's action (operation) on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted. The reception sound is now output. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that different performances will occur depending on which of the plurality of objects is manipulated.

In addition, in reception period B, there is a case where "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output based on the result of performance judgment (jackpot determination), and "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is A different "acceptance sound B" may be audibly output in some cases.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the player is given multiple options (here, by operating the operation button 410, operating the sword decoration 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410). A different display (post-acceptance display E1, E2) appears as a post-acceptance display depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). If none of the multiple options above are selected within the period (in this case, no movement (operation) by the player is detected), a specific option from the multiple options above will be displayed after acceptance. A display (post-acceptance display E1) is made to appear when is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated).

According to such a configuration, if no operation is performed within the acceptance period E, only the same post-acceptance display is always displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to perform selective operations within the acceptance period E. be able to encourage

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving part) of "Configuration 9-A") and the sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to "Configuration 9-A") are used as operation means. We have prepared multiple operation means including the second operation means (corresponding to the second operation receiving part), and we have prepared multiple operation means including the reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Configuration 9-A") as the reception period. We have prepared a reception period for each type. In the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 are accepted as acceptance for causing a display change corresponding to the acceptance period E, When an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, a post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, a post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated. Since it is possible to generate a display change (post-reception display E2) that is different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) without causing the display to occur, it is possible to make it interesting to see which operating means to operate. You will be able to do this.

In addition, during the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is terminated, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not terminated. The remaining time was extended instead. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this is used as an opportunity to set the state in which the remaining time of the reception period E1 has not been used up. In other words, in this case, since it becomes possible to create an unprecedented performance during the reception period E using multiple operating means, it is possible to create various interesting performances based on this kind of performance. be able to provide

However, in the reception period E according to the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time of the reception period E can be extended by simply performing an operation on the sword ornament 5001, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained. There are concerns that it may not be possible. Therefore, we have decided to further provide a reception period F that is different from the reception period E, and in this reception period F, as well as the reception period E, there is an "integrated image display IG" that imitates the operation button 410, and a sword decoration 5001. ``sword decoration image SYG'' which is a copy of the ``sword decoration image SYG'' and a ``special copy image TM'' which is a copy of the special operation means (button labeled ``PUSH'' in the figure) 1410 are displayed. Even if the application is received within the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E described above (see FIG. 286),
- When an operation for the "operation button 410" is accepted, based on the acceptance, an acceptance sound F1 is audibly output and a post-acceptance display F1 is displayed;
- When an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound is generated, no display change is made, and the reception period E is not terminated. (same as the state where no reaction occurs and no operation is performed),
- When an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, the acceptance sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change different from the above-mentioned post-acceptance display F1 (post-acceptance display F2) will be displayed. Furthermore, in the reception period F, even if an operation is accepted for "sword ornament 5001", the remaining time of the reception period F is not reset (not extended), and the reception period F The remaining time may continue to be used as is. In other words, in this case, if an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period F, this will be used as an opportunity to display the post-acceptance display F2, but the acceptance period F may be ended or the acceptance period F The remaining time will not be reset, and the acceptance period F will continue thereafter (of course, acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 is also allowed).

According to such a configuration, the player is presented with the following options: "Do you want to operate the operation button 410?", "Do you want to operate the sword ornament 5001?" and "Do you want to operate the special operation means 1410?" Even if a reception period occurs, the remaining time of the reception period will not necessarily be reset (not extended) when an operation for "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, so it is preferable to create a sense of tension. will be expected to be maintained.

Further, it is preferable that the reception period F is set as a target for which the automatic button function described above is activated, similarly to the reception period E. Then, when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, as well as when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period F. It is desirable to display the "post-reception display F1" that appears in . However, in this case, if the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, unlike in the case of reception period E (reception sound E1 is not output audibly), reception sound F1 should be output audibly. is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to indicate whether the acceptance period was in the acceptance period E or the acceptance period F. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In this case, even during the reception period F, the "integrated model image display IG" will be displayed as a model image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG is as follows. It is desirable to prevent the display area from decreasing over time.

Also, in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, although multiple types of sample image displays are displayed, there are multiple gauge images (predetermined images) GG used to indicate the remaining time. It is desirable that the image be associated with only one of the types of image display (integrated image display IG).

Also, during the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, as time passes during the reception period F, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287(a) to (d). In addition, a portion of the operation button 410 that simulates the “operation receiving portion” (button sketch image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if it were performing “the movement when receiving the operation by the player,” In the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special imitation image TM", the part of the sword decoration 5001 that imitates the "operation receiving part" and the part of the special operation means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiving part" are dynamic. It is preferable that it is not displayed and is displayed statically.

In addition, during the acceptance period E and the acceptance period F, it is not necessary to display a simulated image display (special simulated image TM) that simulates the special operation means 1410, and the pachinko machine 1 may include the special operation means 1410 itself. You may choose not to have one.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception periods include "Reception period A or Reception period B or Reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 10-A")" and "Reception period E ("Reception period E (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 10-A")" We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including ``A'' (corresponding to the second acceptance period of ``A''). Then, during the reception period A (or reception period B, D), a specific image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is displayed as the image display that simulates the operation receiving part, and during the reception period E, A plurality of sample image displays (here, an integrated sample image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, and a special sample image TM) are displayed as sample image displays imitating the operation receiving part, and the sample image display can be changed by the player's operation. It is designed to be able to be executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable.

In this regard, in the example of production described above, when the sample image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the operation by the player" (for example, during the reception period A, B, E), and cases (for example, acceptance period E) in which the dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation are not executed. In other words, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation to perform even though the simulated image display is being displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed by the player? Since there may be cases where it is difficult to recognize the player, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving parts including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and in reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a replica of the sword decoration 5001 is prepared. The image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is performed, and at this time, the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 is not operated by the player. This is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is made movable.

On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the simulated image display imitating the operation button 410 (integrated simulated image display IG) and the simulated image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when one of the operation receiving parts is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the operation receiving part of the other of the integrated image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is movable by the player's operation. This prevents it from being executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when a sample image is displayed, there are cases in which it is executed as a dynamic display and cases in which it is not executed as such a dynamic display, so that it is possible to achieve various effects. It has become possible to realize this, and it is expected that it will improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, during the reception period E, no operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display on which the dynamic display is performed (here, the integrated sample image display IG). When this is accepted, the first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated using this as a trigger, and corresponds to the replica image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving part (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, this can be used as an opportunity to generate a second display change (post-acceptance display E2). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not dynamic display is being performed, a post-reception display corresponding to the type of side where the reception was made will appear, so the sample image of the side where dynamic display is not performed will be displayed. It becomes possible to give "implications in terms of production" to the display. For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving part (here, the sword decoration object 5001) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed, , it is now possible to create surprises when a display change occurs due to this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving parts including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is imitated. The image display (special image TM) is not performed, but a simulated image display (integrated image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is performed, and at this time, the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 is not operated by the player. This is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is made movable.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, at least both the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 (integrated simulated image display IG) and the simulated image display that simulates the special operation means 1410 (special simulated image TM) are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (in this case, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when one of the operation receiving parts is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the operation receiving part of the other of the integrated sample image display IG and the special sample image TM (here, the special sample image TM) is movable by the player's operation. This prevents it from being executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when a sample image is displayed, there are cases in which it is executed as a dynamic display and cases in which it is not executed as such a dynamic display, so that it is possible to achieve various effects. It has become possible to realize this, and it is expected that it will improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, during the reception period E, no operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display on which the dynamic display is performed (here, the integrated sample image display IG). When this occurs, the first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated, and the operation receiving part (here, the special sample image TM) corresponding to the sample image display on the side where dynamic display is not performed Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410), no display change (post-acceptance display) is caused by this operation. In other words, in this case, even if a sample image display (here, a special sample image TM) is displayed within the acceptance period, it will not necessarily be accepted when the corresponding operation receiving section (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained during the reception period.

In this case, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during the reception period A (or reception period B, D) in which the special sample image TM is not displayed, the display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. This will not occur. However, during the reception period A (or reception period B, D) in which the special sample image TM is not displayed, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410, a display change (post-reception display) occurs due to this operation. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the effectiveness of the operation cannot be determined only by the presence or absence of the sample image display, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM are displayed as still images. However, regarding the sword decoration image SYG and the special sketch image TM, the operation receiving part (in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, it is the sword decoration body 5001, and in the case of the special sketch image TM, the special operation means 1410) is activated by the player's operation. It is sufficient that it is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiver is made movable; for example, it may be a movement (such as rotation) that is different from the movement when the operation receiver is made movable by the player's operation. For example, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receivers) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiver) of "Configuration 11-A") are prepared. The reception period includes reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 11-A"), and reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 11-A"). We have multiple reception periods available. Then, during the reception period A (or reception period B), a map image display (button map image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button map image BMG are displayed. , ``remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which acceptance of operations on the operation button 41 is permitted'' is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, a button drawing image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, but the button drawing image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed. The remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time for which operation on the button 41 is permitted is not performed.

According to such a configuration, even if the button pattern image BMG (integrated image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed, the operation button 410 is displayed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time. Since the "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the reception of operations on the button 41 is allowed is not necessarily performed, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs. become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, a button drawing image BMG (integrated drawing image display IG) which imitates the operation button 410 and a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are imitated. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (describes) how much time is left for the reception period E is not displayed. ing. That is, in this case, in the acceptance period E, although both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are allowed, the above-mentioned " This means that the "remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, the player is not worried about the fact that both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 are allowed, and when the acceptance period E is occurring. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even in a situation where the remaining time display that suggests (describes) how much time is left for the reception period E (remaining time specific display mentioned above), the remaining time for the reception period E is not displayed. Needless to say, it is decreasing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the button drawing image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that partitions the display area of the gauge image GG. It is said that However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that its display area is maintained without decreasing its display area over time. In other words, in this case, even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the acceptance period E is reduced, so there is a situation where a large amount of the display area of the gauge image GG remains. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of tension when they are in a situation. The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the remaining time of the acceptance period E reaches "0" and the gauge image GG is no longer displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, only the button drawing image BMG, which imitates the operation button 410, and the sword decoration image SYG, which imitates the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed. It is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration object 5001 is enabled or not). This allows you to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, even during the above-mentioned acceptance period F, only the button drawing image BMG of the button drawing image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that imitates the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed as the remaining time. It is desirable to display the image as an integrated image with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

In addition, a reception period G related to the post-reception display G can be generated, and during the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG replicating the sword decoration object 5001 is not displayed, and the button design image BMG replicating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. Make it displayed as a sample image display IG. However, during reception period G, unlike reception period A and reception period B, the gauge image GG in the integrated image display IG does not reduce its display area over time and maintains its display area. Make it visible in the form. According to such a configuration, even if a reception period occurs in which only the button drawing image BMG (integrated drawing image display IG) is displayed as a drawing image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily occupy its display area. Since this prevents the number from decreasing, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension during the reception period.

In the above-mentioned production example, during reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated simulated image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is made difficult to recognize the remaining time of the acceptance periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in the reception periods E, F, and G, unlike in the case of reception period A, reception period B, etc. (integrated image display IG), the image display that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed as a "gauge". The remaining time may not be displayed by displaying the image as "an image that does not include image GG". That is, in this case, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position within the display area during the acceptance periods E, F, and G.

Note that when displaying a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 as an "image that does not include a gauge image GG," the "image that does not include a gauge image GG" is a "button simulated display that is included in the integrated simulated image display IG." It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image including at least "image BMG". That is, in this case, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed, there are both cases where it is displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG and cases where it is displayed as an image that is not integrated with the gauge image GG. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

Further, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following operation means are prepared as operation means.
- A handle part 5012 that is displaced when operated by the player (corresponding to the first operation receiving part of "Configuration 12-A"), and a handle part 5012 that is provided around the periphery and does not displace even when operated by the player. A sword decoration body 5001 (corresponding to the first operating means of “Configuration 12-A”) having a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration portion of “Configuration 12-A”) (see FIG. 146 etc.), and An operation button 410 that is displaced when operated by a player (corresponding to the second operation receiving part of "Configuration 12-A"), and a frame provided around the periphery that does not displace even when the operation button 410 is operated. A production operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration part of "Configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 44, etc.).

When displaying the sword decoration image SYG that is a replica of the sword decoration body 5001, a hilt replica image that is a replica of the hilt 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part replica image of "Configuration 12-A") and the hilt A handle peripheral decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image of "Configuration 12-A") that decorates the periphery of the simulated image can be displayed (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the simulated effect operation unit 400 can be displayed. When displaying an image display (here, integrated model image display IG), a button model image BMG (corresponding to the second receiver part model image of "Configuration 12-A") which is a model of the operation button 410, and the button model image A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the handle peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

According to such a configuration, since the peripheral decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operation means itself is similar, it is different when displaying the sword decoration image SYG and when displaying the integrated image display IG. It is now possible to make the appearance significantly different depending on the display, and it is expected that it will be easier to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a part that imitates a decoration part that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1, and is used as an image display that imitates the sheath part 5020. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed as an image that includes at least a portion that simulates a decorative part that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it becomes possible to suitably make the user recognize that the situation where the opportunity to operate the sword decoration object 5001 is given is given. On the other hand, when the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with higher performance. You will be able to do this. In this case, the "performance operation unit 400" is provided as a member having a larger operation receiving part (operation button 410) than the "sword decoration body 5001", and other decorative parts that do not exist in the pachinko machine 1 are used. It is desirable to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize which operating means to operate even if the peripheral decoration image SSG including at least a portion imitating the above is displayed.

In this way, in order to provide a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with higher performance", the peripheral decoration image SSG is It is desirable that the image be displayed as an imitation of a fictitious decorative part that does not exist in the machine 1. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG should include a portion that imitates the frame unit 415. may be included.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time is displayed only in the periphery decoration image SSG of the hilt peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the periphery decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG. As described above, the display area is divided into sections, and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area.

Note that the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which a hilt replica image that imitates the hilt part 5012 and a hilt peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the hilt replica image are integrated. ``Integrated image display IG'' is an image display in which a button image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button image BMG are displayed as an integrated image display. . In this respect, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle pattern image" and "handle peripheral decoration image" as its image data, but as one integrated image data. It will be provided. Similarly, the image data of the "integrated map image display IG" does not have the "button map image BMG" and "peripheral decoration image SSG" separately, but is prepared as one integrated image data. It has become something that will be done.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation reception part of "Configuration 13-A"), the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 (" A plurality of operation receivers are prepared, including an operation receiver of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the second operation receiver of "Configuration 13-A") and an operation receiver of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiver of "Configuration 13-A"). We have prepared multiple types of acceptance periods, including acceptance period E (corresponding to the specific acceptance period of "Configuration 13-A"). Then, during the reception period E (FIG. 286), the "integrated model image display IG (inner button model image BMG)" that simulates the operation button 410, and the "sword decoration image SYG (inner hilt Both the "peripheral decoration image)" and the "special imitation image TM" imitating the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 are displayed, and when an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation receiving parts is accepted, Among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM", the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" imitate the operation receiving part that is not accepted. (See Figure 286).

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) will be hidden, so the operation receiving part (hilt 5012 of sword decoration 5001, special operation) where the model image display is displayed but does not accept operations. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is required for the operation receiving portion of the means 1410.

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, the special operation Among the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is configured so that acceptance of operation (acceptance regarding display after acceptance) is not enabled (not allowed). That is, as described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the second display is generated. Although a change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated, no operation is accepted on the special operation means 1410, and no display change occurs in response to the operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance and tension until the operation by the player is accepted during the acceptance period E.

In addition, during the reception period E, when an operation on the sword decoration object 5001 is accepted, a second display change (post-reception display E2) is generated. Neither the "decoration image SYG" nor the "special copy image TM" are hidden, and their display state continues (FIG. 286(i)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from that when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In particular, in the reception period E, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to increase the remaining time of the reception period E (Fig. 286(i) → ( Progressing to (e)), in realizing performance that requires further operations, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest due to insufficient remaining time.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, a first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated; In the state where E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are both hidden (Fig. 286 ( f)). As a result, even after an operation is accepted while a plurality of sample images are being displayed, it is recognized that the post-acceptance display E1 is generated due to acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410. You will be able to do this.

In addition, at this time, since the "integrated image display IG" is displayed in a different position from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. 286(f)), the "integrated image display IG" is displayed in a different position from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. You will be able to suggest that you are in a certain state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the remaining time runs out during the reception period E, the automatic button function described above is activated, and if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen as (see FIG. 286(h)) appears. In this case as well, while the first display change (post-reception display E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed. Since both are hidden, it becomes possible to recognize that the reception display E1 corresponds to the operation button 410.

In addition, in the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284, when hiding the text information (please press), the display state of the sample image display was maintained (FIG. 284(e)); may also be hidden at the same time as the text information is hidden. In this case, when the text information (please press) is returned to the display state, the sample image display is also returned to the display state (FIG. 284(f)).

[Operation reception performance characterized by the state of the image display]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception performance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) is caused depending on the type of reception period that occurred.

Furthermore, during the acceptance period, an action target display indicating which "target of the player's action" is to be displayed can be displayed. Such an action object display can be displayed, for example, as a model image display in which an object (operating means) that is the object of an action by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this performance example is displayed as a "simulation image display" that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations.

Furthermore, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, multiple aspects (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, the level of expectation, and the type of operation means) are used as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. It is intended to be implemented in one of these ways.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) at a predetermined timing are not included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). However, it is desirable (though not necessarily required) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is allowed. Since the post-operation display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated. The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the "operation (movement) by the player" such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001". It is not limited to things that are directly manipulated (pressing motions or sword drawing motions), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "in a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effect is provided regarding the state of the sample image display when giving the player an operation opportunity (movement opportunity). I have to. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to reduce the The configurations described as (desirable) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an action object display (for example, a simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed. We have decided to provide multiple acceptance periods, including a specific acceptance period in which "determination of acceptance validity in which a player's action is considered a valid action" is permitted. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 1-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. However, during such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize when a valid reception judgment is allowed, or even whether a reception validity judgment is already allowed. There are concerns that only players who are sensitive to presentation can enjoy the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a specific acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the reception validity determination is in an acceptable state or that the reception validity determination is in an acceptable state is emitted. , so that when the action target display (for example, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed, Although there are still situations in which it is not possible to fully recognize the object of the player's action, there are situations in which the player is required to make some kind of action (a situation where the player is given an opportunity to perform an action). It is now possible to recognize certain things, and as a result, many players are expected to enjoy the performance.

Note that the acceptance permissible sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be one that occurs before the specific acceptance period and ends before the specific acceptance period, or may be generated at the timing of occurrence of the specific acceptance period. It may be output so as to straddle the specific acceptance period, or it may be generated after the specific acceptance period and ended within the specific acceptance period. The acceptance permission sound may be any sound that, when output, always gives (or has been given) some action opportunity to the player. Furthermore, the "state in which the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, but also applies to other configurations in which the "action target display (sample image display)" is not displayed. It suffices as long as it is not visible on the screen. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound that is output when the specific acceptance period occurs is also a sound that is output (as the admission permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is output even when a reception period occurs in which the same operation opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period occurs, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It is now possible to suitably suggest which operation opportunities (operation opportunities) are (are being) given to the player, even if they are not. For example, if the reception permission sound is output even when a reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) that is different from the specific reception period occurs, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) ) is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given. It becomes possible to suggest that the person is in a state of

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-B", when the specific reception period occurs, first the operation target display (for example, the sample image display) is hidden (not displayed) in the first display. Allow the state to appear. After that, while the specific reception period continues, a second display state in which an operation target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed may appear. That is, in this case, during the specific acceptance period, the button will initially appear as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) must be displayed while the specific reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has expired). Therefore, many players will be able to notice this (specific reception period) and enjoy the performance even if they are not sensitive to the performance. In addition, through this kind of performance, it is expected that children will develop the ability to see when so-called ``hidden buttons'' are occurring.

Further, in this case, in the second display state, it is desirable that the action target display can be displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels. In other words, on the player's side, if an action is accepted in the second display state even though the action was not accepted in the first display state, the action target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It is feared that players will find out that they were not aware that the specified reception period had occurred until the end of the game, and that their insensitivity to such effects will be exposed, leading to a decline in interest in gaming. In this regard, in the second display state, if the action target display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels, the player will be able to see the action even if the action is accepted in the second display state. I was aware that I was in a state where action acceptance was allowed from the time I was in the display state, but I wanted to see the level of expectation suggested by the action target display (for example, a sample image display), so in the first display state I It is now possible to make it appear as if the player did not intentionally accept the action, and it is expected that this will suitably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for players to accurately recognize when a specific reception period has occurred during which "determination of acceptance validity in which the player's action is considered a valid action" has occurred. It is difficult. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the specific reception period occurs, the "reception validity judgment" will not be made, and the message "I thought the specified reception period had occurred, but I was mistaken. There is a concern that the player may misunderstand that the player has received a request, and that the specific acceptance period may end without any action (operation) being performed by the player. Therefore, when adopting "Configuration 1-B", even if there is an action (operation) by the player before the specified reception period, the action (operation) will be judged as "valid reception" at that point. However, after the start of a specific acceptance period, a ``reception validity determination'' that targets (based on) actions (operations) by a player performed before the specified acceptance period. It is desirable to be able to do so. According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period, it will be possible to accept it after the occurrence of the specific acceptance period. In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance using this as an opportunity. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player depends on whether or not a reception period has occurred during which "determination of reception validity in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that it is carried out regardless of the situation.

In addition, in this case, for an action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period, that action (operation) is displayed in the first display state instead of in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific reception period. It is desirable to enable reception (reception validity determination) in the status. According to such a configuration, the timing when a little time has passed since the player performed an action (operation) (for example, the timing when the first display state (specific acceptance period) occurs), and the action target display (For example, a sample image display) is determined to be valid for reception, and as a result, execution of the post-reception performance is started. As a result, the state in which the player's action is properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when there is no action (operation) even though the action target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that there is something in the game, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, the action object is displayed (here, the action object is displayed in imitation of the player's action). In the second reception period, the action target display (here, a sample image display having multiple aspects with different expectations) is always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. A simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations is always prevented from being displayed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it is possible to give variety to the process of requesting actions from players (providing operation opportunities). It is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 2-B", a third reception period will be further provided, and during the third reception period, actions (operations) by the player will be considered valid actions (valid operations). Depending on the timing at which the acceptance validity determination is made, the operation object display (sample image display) may be displayed or the operation object display (sample image display) may not be displayed. Note that the "third acceptance period" related to the configuration 2-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period, or a reception period different from those reception periods. It may also mean.

According to such a configuration, it appears as if the "first reception period" in which the operation target display (sample image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. It is now possible to make it appear as if there is a "second reception period" in which the operation target display (sample image display) is not always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. By creating such a sense of uncertainty, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

[Configuration 3-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, the reception validity determination is performed, at least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations). Since the extinguishing EF effect can be performed by using the EF function, it is easy to recognize that the acceptance validity judgment has been made properly (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). You will be able to do this.

Note that the extinction EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (sample image display), but in this case, the action target display (sample image display) It does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the term "disappearance EF effect" includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to see"; in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (the model image display) is displayed. A mode in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including a ``disappearance effect display'', and an effect using a display element located at a position overlapping in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is performed. In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (sample image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) It may be an aspect.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 3-B", at what timing in the first reception period is a determination that the reception is valid for determining that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation)? Depending on the operation target display (sample image display), there may be cases where the action object display (sample image display) is displayed, and there may be cases where the action object display (sample image display) is not displayed.

In this case, first, when the reception is determined to be valid while the action target display (sample image display) is being displayed, this will be used as a trigger for the specific area where the action target display (sample image display) will be displayed. The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area. On the other hand, even if reception is determined to be valid under a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to perform the extinction EF effect under the above-mentioned situation (action target display). It is desirable to execute the process in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid (in a situation where is displayed). According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made. . In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action target display being displayed, and the disappearing EF effect is executed using at least a part of the area in which the operation target display was scheduled to be displayed.

At this time, during the second reception period, the operation object display (sample image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable to make it visible. By preparing such a "second reception period in which the action target display (sample image display) is always displayed" separately from the first reception period described above, it is possible to create a configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed. In combination, it becomes possible to provide a performance that gives a sense of security, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) A model image display that imitates a target and has multiple aspects with different expectations) can be displayed using at least a specific area, and the player's actions can be performed effectively while the model image display is being displayed. When the "reception validity determination" is made, it is possible to hide the operation object display (sample image display) based on the reception validity determination. In addition, if "reception validity judgment" is made while the operation target display (sample image display) is being displayed during the reception period, the operation target display (sample image display) will be hidden until the operation target display (sample image display) is displayed. An extinction EF effect can be executed using at least a part of the specific area.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. During the specific acceptance period, games played in a state where the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) are not displayed. It is possible to make a "reception validity determination" in which a motion by a user is considered a valid motion, and when the reception validity determination is made, the disappearing EF effect is not executed. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to Configuration 4-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). It is now expected that the tension created during the specific reception period, in which players are secretly asked to perform actions (and secretly provided with operation opportunities), will be maintained even after the reception has been determined to be valid. Become.

Note that even if the extinction EF effect is displayed, the action target display (sample image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed at that time. In addition, the term "disappearance EF effect" includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to see"; in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (the model image display) is displayed. A mode in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including a ``disappearance effect display'', and an effect using a display element located at a position overlapping in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is performed. In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (sample image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) It may be an aspect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-B" is adopted, the "specific reception period" may be set as the first reception period. Then, as the reception period, we prepare a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period. It may also be possible to determine whether the reception is valid or not, in which an operation performed by the player in a state where the image display (image display) is not displayed is considered to be a valid operation. Then, during the first reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid and that an action performed by the player while the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed is made as a valid action, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect will not be executed. First, in the second reception period, if the reception is determined to be valid in that an action performed by the player in a state where the action target display is not displayed is made as a valid action, even if the above-mentioned extinction EF effect is executed. good. In this case, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period are valid until the player performs an operation in a state where the operation target display (sample image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which one has occurred, but since the reception was determined to be valid with this as a valid operation, it is difficult to know which one has occurred: the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to prompt the player to take action.

[Configuration 5-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is made. At the time when execution starts, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. In some cases, if a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) ) is started, the action object display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. I try not to let it happen.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action object display (here, multiple modes imitating the object of the player's action and having different expectations) (a model image display having a pattern) is visible, and an action target display (here, a model image display having multiple aspects that imitate the object of the player's movement and have different expectations) is visible. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-B", within the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, If the operation target display (sample image display) is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is started; It is desirable that the operation object display (sample image display) is sometimes in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (corresponding to the first reception period) It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is "first mode with low expectations" and "first mode with low expectations". No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If the sample image display continues to be displayed in the ``first mode with low expectations'', it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the sample image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" at this time. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the drop in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can check whether the sample image is displayed through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to practically select whether to start executing the post-reception performance while it is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

[Configuration 6-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is made. At the time when execution starts, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes, and the expected (with multiple modes with different degrees) may not be hidden but may remain displayed, and the "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the second reception period. In this case, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, the display of the gauge image displayed within the frame image) A depiction in which the area decreases over time, and at least one of the frame image and gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. I try not to let that happen.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" starts, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is decreased as time passes). In some cases, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the remaining time is displayed in the frame image). A depiction in which the display area of the displayed gauge image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) are not made visible. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 6-B", within the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, At the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not hidden but is displayed. It is desirable that the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) be hidden in some cases and in other cases in which the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden.

That is, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (first It is certainly preferable to continue displaying the post-reception performance (corresponding to the reception period) even after the start of execution, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance (performance) has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "first mode with low expectation" and " Even if it is displayed in the "second mode with low expectations", there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with high expectations (and even more, there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with low expectations). It has become. Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so the frame image and the gauge image are It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the frame image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations". If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations." A person who wants to keep the frame image and gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production is started, as an "excuse" in case of a problem. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may think that the presentation after reception is the "second mode with low expectations." In order to reduce frustration when it is executed with ``, I would like to hide the frame image and gauge image so that they cannot be seen at the time when the execution after reception starts. It seems that there are people.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can use the frame image and gauge You can essentially choose whether to start executing the post-reception performance while the image is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 7-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. At the time when the player is playing, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the player's action target and has multiple aspects with different expectations) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. be. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed. , so that the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a hidden state. There is.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action target display (sample image display) is visible, and the action target display (sample image display) is visible. ) may not be visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, in the case where "Configuration 7-B" is adopted, "a reception validity determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. , the operation target display (sample image display) is hidden and is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. However, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives, the action target display (sample image display) is displayed. It is desirable that the execution of the performance after reception is started while the process is in progress.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (corresponding to the first reception period) It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is "first mode with low expectations" and "first mode with low expectations". No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If the sample image display continues to be displayed in the ``first mode with low expectations'', it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the sample image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" at this time. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the drop in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance in a state where the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the predetermined reception period within the first reception period can be started. If the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made until the timing arrives, at that point, the post-reception performance will start to be executed while the sample image display is not being displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 8-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. At the time when the remaining time is displayed (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is (for which multiple different modes are available) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) (prepared items) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible. images and gauge images) may not be made visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-B", if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. , the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. However, if "the reception is determined to be valid and the player's action is a valid action" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) It is desirable that execution of the post-reception effect be started while the screen is in the displayed state.

That is, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (first It is certainly preferable to continue displaying the post-reception performance (corresponding to the reception period) even after the start of execution, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance (performance) has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "first mode with low expectation" and " Even if it is displayed in the "second mode with low expectations", there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with high expectations (and even more, there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with low expectations) It has become. Then, when the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though it is possible to improve the game interest with this alone, in this case, If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so the frame image and the gauge image should not be displayed. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the frame image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations". If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations." A person who wants to keep the frame image and gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production is started, as an "excuse" in case of a problem. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may think that the presentation after reception is the "second mode with low expectations." In order to reduce frustration when it is executed with ``, I would like to hide the frame image and gauge image so that they cannot be seen at the time when the execution after reception starts. It seems that there are people.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen, and within the first reception period. If the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made until the predetermined timing arrives, at that point, if the frame image and gauge image are not displayed, Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the performance will start, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) It is possible to use at least a specific area to display a mock image display that imitates a target and has a plurality of modes with different expectations. During the reception period, if a "reception validity determination" is made that determines the player's action as a valid action, based on the reception validity determination, it is possible to execute a post-reception performance according to the type of the reception period. be done. Further, even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance performance is started, the action target display (sample image display) may remain displayed without being hidden.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period. In both cases where the "determination of validity of reception" is made within the first reception period and the case where the "determination of validity of reception" is made within the second reception period, the "determination of validity of reception" has been made. Based on this, it is possible to perform the extinction EF effect using at least a part of the specific area. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, a state in which the acceptance validity determination has been properly made under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the sample image display (a state in which the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's action) is reached. You will be able to easily recognize what has happened.

Note that the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the action target display (sample image display) becomes difficult to visually recognize", and in this case, the specific A manner in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the area, or a display element that is located at a position that overlaps in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is used. In addition to the manner in which the displayed effect is executed, the display of the operation target (sample image display) itself may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) ) may be displayed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-B", during the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination" is made, which determines that the player's action is a valid action, the first reception period When the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to one reception period starts, the operation target display (sample image display) is not hidden but is displayed, and the operation target display (sample image display) is not displayed. It may be arranged such that there are times when the object is not visible (a state where it cannot be visually recognized).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is "first mode with low expectations" and "first mode with low expectations". No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If the sample image display continues to be displayed in the ``first mode with low expectations'', it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the sample image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" at this time. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the drop in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can check whether the sample image is displayed through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to practically select whether to start executing the post-reception performance while it is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-B", during the second reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made, which determines that the player's action is a valid action, The action target display (sample image display) may be always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period is started.

According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the action target display (sample image display) at the time when the execution of the production is started after reception. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a sample image display related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying an integrated pattern image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the pattern image display, interest in the game is reduced until the display after reception (display change) is executed. I'm trying to suppress it. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the display can be performed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , is a sound in which the reception permissible state (reception period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur if a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image that simulates the same operating means (operation button 410).

Note that among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permission state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). (This configuration is not required). In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, in which of multiple modes including special modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) A determination is made as to whether the "display" should be displayed, and the "integrated image display" will be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, concrete examples of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, the multiple reception periods (reception performances) include at least the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance). We have it ready.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 288 to 303. Regarding each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1B reception period (performance after 1B reception), 2B reception period (performance after 2B reception), and 3B reception period (performance after 2B reception). (3B Post-reception performance). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 287. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 288 to 290 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1B reception period (1B reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 297 and 298 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variable pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1st B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 1B variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 297(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 288(a), when the timing tQ2 arrives at which the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 1B is satisfied) , generates the above-mentioned 1B reception period (valid period) in which "reception regarding production after 1B reception" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 1B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 1B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the ability to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 1B reception period. Display of operation target (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period, etc.), Remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) are being carried out respectively. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIG. 288(b) and FIGS. 1 performance device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and straddle the timing tQ2. It may be displayed in In addition, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (determined as valid for reception) within the 1B reception period, or when the acceptance (determined as valid for reception) is made. It will be hidden when the 1B reception period ends without any notice. The 1B reception period according to this example ends when timing tQ3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 288(a)).

Furthermore, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is in one of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and 232(d)). Figure 297(b) shows the case where the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 232(a). 297(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d). In addition, even during the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and (c). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 288 assumes that when the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period arrives, "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. There is. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 288(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tQ2a (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 1B acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to FIG. 298(h1))" is as a post-reception performance (first B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIGS. 298(d2) to 298(h2)") is This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. Not only is the "sample image display IG" not hidden, but also the integrated replica image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1B post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-liquid crystal, a movable display device). This will be realized as a combination of at least the "Specific performance after 1B reception" using the 3rd stage performance device (speaker, etc.) and the sound performance after 1B reception using the 3rd performance device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (simulation image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1B post-reception effect is started is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the ``integrated image display IG'' will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 298 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 288(b) and FIG. 298(e1) or (e2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tQ2a at which the 1B reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tQ2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tQ2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Additionally, in the 1B reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1)) appear as the corresponding post-reception performances (1B post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1)). Different forms of extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2) appear depending on the cases in which (d2) to (h2) in FIG. 298 appear. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 298 (e1) and (e2), the situation is such that "1B effect display after reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the extinction-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is “first extinction-related display SKB1” or “second extinction-related display SKB2”, check whether it is displayed as “first extinction-related display SKB1” or “second extinction-related display SKB2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1B post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 288(b), FIG. When the timing tQ2c arrives during the period during which the mode in which the behavior of The execution of "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (cut-in performance)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E1 (Fig. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 298( f1), the first aspect (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. 298 (f2) is displayed and the effect progresses from FIG. ), the second mode (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 ( "1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1" or "1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1B reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (1B post-reception performance display UGB1) without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGB1 starts after the 1B reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1B reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's attention is It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will automatically transition to "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "Integrated image display IG" and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". As a result, even if the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated sample image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 288(b), FIG. 298(g1) or (g2), the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and the "extinction related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 288(b), FIG. "Display SKB1 or 2nd extinction related display SKB2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is considered good, "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B Post-Reception Production Display UGB1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1) It is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGB1-2). Therefore, the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIGS. 297 and 298) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when the reception is made within the 1B reception period and the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is executed, the "1B The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception performance display UGB1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 298(d) and (e) where the background image is not switched (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 288), the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in the first performance device), the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, the "1B post-reception production display UGB1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed ( Although it was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tQ2c) than timing tQ2b), the timing when "extinction related display (first extinction related display SKB1, second extinction related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed (timing tQ2b) The display may be started at the same time as (timing tQ2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 298, as a post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 288), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by a player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 288(b) and 288(c), Start execution of the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tQ2a when the reception is received in the 1B reception period, but only a part of the 1B post-reception performance (the 1B post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 1B post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tQ2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E1 (Fig. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), Fig. 298(d1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (first reception As the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UTB1), it precedes the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E2 (Fig. 298(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 298( d2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1B reception period. As the 1B post-reception specific production UTB1-2), which is a highly anticipated form of the 1B post-reception specific production UTB1), the 1B post-reception production using the above-mentioned first production device (1B post-reception production display UGB1-2) Execution is started prior to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 297, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the 1B reception period is also applied to the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device). A presentation within the reception period that indicates that the situation has occurred is executed (FIGS. 297(b) and 297(c)). The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 297(b)). ) and in a highly anticipated manner (see FIG. 297(c)) are displayed in the same manner.

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1B acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG ” continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after reception UTB1-1" and "Specific production after reception UTB1-2" appears as the specific production UTB1 after reception of 1B. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1. For example, the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1 is provided with only "1B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2", and the expectation level (jackpot It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when the "1st B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "1st B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the 1B reception period occurs, the timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 288(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. That is, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the 1B acceptance period is audibly output across the timing tQ2 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)") when the 1B acceptance period occurs. The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1B reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 288(d), the output of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tQ2 when the first B acceptance period occurs or after that time.

In the 1B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the Thus, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, when the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectation as shown in Fig. 288(d) (Fig. 297(b) )) and a case where it is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 297(c)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed as valid (judgment of validity), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when to make the acceptance (judgment of validity of reception) within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is audibly output, the permissible permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 1B post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (audible output), and it is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1B reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the 1B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1," such 1B post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction-related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1B post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E1 (Fig. 298(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example where the production progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E2 (Fig. 298(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were respectively output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output. Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 1B reception post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 297(b) to "E2 (Fig. 298(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the level of expectation) even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1B reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 289 assumes a case where "a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when timing tQ2A arrives, which is relatively late within the 1B reception period. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 289(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tQ2A (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 1B acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 1B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 297 (b) to "E2 (Fig. 298 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device perform the performance as explained with reference to FIG. 288 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, in the situation shown in FIG. 298(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area is further reduced. Furthermore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, as shown in FIG. 289(d), the reception (reception validity determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound will not be prematurely terminated (the audible output state will be prematurely terminated) due to the acceptance (acceptance validity determination).

Furthermore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, the time for displaying the "1B post-reception effect display" based on the reception (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 288. This will result in a loss of performance. In other words, the "1B post-reception specific performance" and the "1B post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined period of time (certain time) from the time the reception is accepted (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1B post-reception effect display" ends (is not displayed) when the predetermined timing tQ4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It has become something that According to such a configuration, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension regarding the timing within the acceptance period when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 290 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 290, after the first B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tQ3 (the point in time when the first B acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tQ2a and The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 298(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 1B reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 1B reception period after the end of the 1B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 298 (e3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the 1B reception period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 1B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "first extinction related display SKB1" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). We are planning to do so. In other words, in this case, if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the 1B reception period, it is expected that the player would sense the possibility that the performance after the 1B reception would have suggested that the level of expectation was low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to feel glad that they did not have to perform the action (operation) during the 1B reception period, and the interest in the game decreases when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period. It is expected that the government will suppress the

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, "Second extinction related display SKB2" may be displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), or " You may make it appear in an aspect different from both of the ``first extinction related display SKB1'' and the ``second extinction related display SKB2''.

Furthermore, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be displayed even if the action (operation) had been accepted. It may be executed in any manner in which it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where "first extinction related display SKB1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 297 (b) to "E1 (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations was executed) becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 298(e3), the case where "second extinction related display SKB2" appears means that if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B reception period, then the situation shown in FIG. This means a case where the performance has progressed from b) to "E2 (Fig. 298 (d2) to (h2))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively high expectations has been executed). . In other words, in this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the 1B reception period ends. Just by checking the mode of "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears, you can determine whether the 1B post-reception effect was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 298 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the first disappearance related display SKB1)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 298 (g3), the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 297(b)). (see FIG. 297(c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 297(c) appears, it is different from the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 297(c) to "E1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 297(b) to "E1 (Fig. 298(d1) to (h1))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 297(c) to "E2'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 297(b) to "E2 (Fig. 298(d2) to (h2))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 297(c) to "E3'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 297(b) to "E3 (Fig. 298(d3) to (g3))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only.

FIGS. 291 to 293 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 2B reception period (2B reception performance) occurs. . FIG. 299 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a 2B reception period (2B reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable variable and non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second B fluctuation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 299(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "2nd B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the timing tR2 arrives at which the 2B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 2B is satisfied) , generates the 2nd B reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding performance after 2B reception" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 2B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

However, in the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the above-mentioned 1B reception period occurs, in connection with the occurrence of the 2B reception period, the reception object (operation reception unit, etc.) is suggested. The remaining time display (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time elapses) indicates the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period). , No disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is displayed.

More specifically, in the second B variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 291(b) and FIG. Timing tR2 arrives while the performance situation in which the gauge image)'') is not displayed is maintained, and the second B reception period occurs. Then, the second B acceptance period ends when timing tR3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 291(a)).

Such a 2B reception period is what is called a "hidden button", and from what timing is it allowed to ``determine whether the reception is valid in that the player's action is a valid action'' (2B reception period)? has occurred), whether the “valid reception judgment” is in an allowable state (is the 2B reception period occurring?), and at what timing does the “determination of valid reception” occur? No operation-related information is provided, such as whether the ``reception validity determination'' will be disallowed (whether the 2B reception period has ended), etc. Therefore, it can be said that the second B acceptance period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects.

FIG. 291 assumes that during such a 2B reception period, when a relatively early timing tR2a arrives, "a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action (operation) is a valid action". are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the 2B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tR2a. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the second B reception period is started.

Note that the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second modes with relatively high expectations are executed, such as "Specific performance after reception of 2B," "performance sound after reception of 2B," etc.). As the 2B post-reception performance (“2B post-reception performance display”, “2B post-reception specific performance”, “2B post-reception performance sound”, etc.), the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, respectively. The case is omitted from illustration, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. 299(a) to a situation where the 2B post-reception production is executed in the omitted mode (the first mode with low expectations). There are now cases where this is the case. However, for such a 2B reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation'' is made, the 2B post-reception performance (``2B post-reception performance display'' or ``2B post-reception performance display'') 299(b) and (c)) are executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 299(b) and (c). It may also be realized as a type in which low-expectation modes such as post-performance display, 1B post-reception specific production, 1B post-reception production sound) are not prepared. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, even in this performance example (2nd B reception period), as shown in FIGS. At timing tR2a, which is the point in time when the post-reception performance was started, the "2B post-reception performance display UGB2 (group preview performance)" of the 2B post-reception performance is not executed, and the "2B post-reception specific performance" is not executed. ``UTB2-2'' and ``2nd B Post-Reception Performance Sound (Highly Expected Mode)'' are executed. According to such a configuration, the performance progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1B post-reception performance, so that the above-mentioned effects can be obtained in the same manner.

However, in this production example (2nd B reception period), as shown in FIGS. 291 and 299(b), no matter which timing within the 2B reception period the reception (reception validity determination) The above-mentioned extinction related display (extinction EF effect) is never executed. In other words, in this case, during the 2B reception period, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted, it will be significantly delayed to notice this just by looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). becomes. In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated sample image display IG ("sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, the situation is such that the relevant 2B reception period has not occurred. This makes it appear as if the player was performing an action (operation) on the bottom, and in this respect, it can be said that the performance is realized with a high degree of difficulty in playing the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 291(b) and FIG. 299(c), when timing tR2c, which is later than timing tR2a, arrives, the player does not perform any action within the 2B acceptance period. In response to the reception, the first production device (production display device 1600) displays a "2B post-reception production display UGB2 (in the figure, a group preview production with ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated mode)" as a post-reception production on the first production device (production display device 1600). After receiving the second B, the performance display UGB2-2) is started. Then, the "2B post-reception effect display UGB2" started in this way is displayed for a predetermined period of time from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination), as shown in FIGS. 291(b) and 299(d). It will be closed (hidden) after a certain period of time has passed.

Note that in the production example (FIG. 299) corresponding to the 2B reception period, unlike the case of the 1B reception period, the background image is switched when the "2B post reception production display UGB2" is executed. This also makes it difficult to recognize that the application was accepted.

Additionally, when a player's action is accepted within the 2B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 291(b), (c) and 299(b), (c), Based on this, the 2B post-reception performance (2B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device precedes the 2B post-reception performance (2B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. and start execution.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a movable effect body that can perform effect operations, or a It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. In the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. 299(b) (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception presentation), as shown in FIG. 299(b), the sub liquid crystal The manner in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second performance device) is a highly anticipated manner of the above-mentioned 2B post-reception specific performance UTB2 (2nd B post-reception specific performance UTB2) corresponding to the 2B reception period. As the 2B post-reception specific performance UTB2-2), execution is started prior to the 2B post-reception performance using the first performance device (2B post-reception performance display UGB2-2). As mentioned above, we will omit the explanation of the case where a mode with low expectations is executed as the 2B post-reception production, but "2B post-reception production display" and "2B post-reception specific production UTB2" are low expectation modes. This is basically the same as when it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 299(a), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) also does not execute the presentation within the reception period that indicates that the second B reception period has occurred.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker). However, when the 2B reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 299(d), the reception permission sound is not output, and this makes it difficult to determine when the 2B reception period will occur. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, when an acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 2B post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be performed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output).

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 2B post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is something that is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-reception performance is executed in a highly anticipated manner or in a less expected manner.

On the other hand, FIG. 292 assumes a case where a "reception validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period arrives. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 292(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tR2A (the reception was determined to be valid), the 2B reception period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 2B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period (reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tR2a within the second B reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 292(a), when the performance progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. ), and cases where illustrations are omitted (when expectations are relatively low for the performance after reception). Basically, in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, The effect will be executed as described with reference to FIG. 291 and the like.

In particular, during the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception performance display" is similar to the "2B post-reception performance display" and "2B post-reception performance sound", etc. Since it is to be executed for a predetermined time (certain time) from the time when the reception is valid (judgment of reception validity), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also based on the timing when the reception is made (judgment of reception validity). It's the same regardless.

Note that the "2nd B post-reception performance display", the "2nd B post-reception specific performance", and the "2nd B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 293 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. This is based on the assumption that a valid judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 293, after the second B reception period occurs, the timing tR3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2B reception period, as shown in 293 of the same figure, no performance related to the occurrence or termination will be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred or that he/she was unable to perform an action (operation), A decrease in interest in games is suppressed.

FIGS. 294 to 296 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 3B reception period (3B reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 300 and 301 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as advance notice performance determination) corresponding to the 3B variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 3rd B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 300(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "3rd B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 294(a), when the timing tS2 arrives at which the 3B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 3B is satisfied) , the above-mentioned 3B reception period (validity period) is generated during which "reception regarding production after reception of 3B" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 3B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the ability to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 3B reception period. operation target display (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period), remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (reception valid judgment) are being carried out respectively. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

However, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effect of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" This is a special production that combines both.

More specifically, during the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 296(b) and FIG. This occurs under a situation (timing tS2) in which the "and gauge image)") are not yet displayed. In other words, in this case, the player is secretly given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), and a so-called "hidden button performance" is provided.

In this respect, the performance as the "hidden button performance" continues only until timing X when a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 296(b) and the like. That is, when timing X within the 3B reception period arrives, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example displays "sample image display" and "remaining time display" as the integrated simulated image display IG. (Frame image and gauge image)" is displayed, and the player is given an opportunity to operate (opportunity to operate) while the integrated image display IG is being displayed. This will lead to a transition to . In addition, the integrated sample image display IG displayed in this way (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 3B reception period, or when the reception (reception validity determination) ) is hidden when the 3B reception period ends without being done. The 3B reception period according to this example ends when timing tS3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 296(a), etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, from the occurrence of the 3B reception period to the arrival of timing X, the integrated image display IG is in the "first display state" in which it is not displayed. The "performance as a so-called hidden button" that allows the reception of actions (operations) by the player is now provided, and from the above timing X until the end of the 3B reception period, the integrated simulation While in the "second display state" in which the image display IG is displayed, "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided in which actions (operations) by the player are allowed. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effects of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both sex and sex, and it is expected that this will improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the "second display state" of the 3B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIG. 232(a) ), (c)), and in Fig. 300(b), the integrated image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed as shown in Fig. 232(a). 300(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c). This corresponds to the case where In addition, even during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 294 shows that while the above-mentioned "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 300(a))" appears during the third B reception period (timing tS2a in the figure), "Game It is assumed that a "determination of validity of acceptance" is made in which an action (operation) by a person is considered to be a valid action. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294(a), the 3B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tS2a. At the same time, execution of the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

In addition, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIGS. 301(d1) to 301(h1))", the above-mentioned "first display state" appears during the 3B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the "3B post-reception performance" as a result of the "reception validity determination", and from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. (d2) to Figure 301 (h2))" is an example where the "reception validity determination" is made while the above "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and as a result of " This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as "3B post-reception performance". The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. 294, at timing tS2a, which is the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the 3B post-reception performance is started in response to the reception), The ``integrated image display IG'', which had been hidden until then, can now be displayed.

In other words, if the player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (if a "reception validity determination" is made), the player An operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which form will appear as the simulated image display IG (the simulated image display, the frame image, or the gauge image). In this regard, by making it possible for the "integrated image display IG" that had been hidden until then to be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the player can If the above-mentioned "second display state" is assumed to occur during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which mode has appeared as the "integrated image display IG".

That is, the 3B post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "3B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-liquid crystal, a movable display device). This will be realized as a combination of at least the "Specific performance after reception of 3B" using the 3rd B reception performance (body, performance lamp, etc.) and the sound performance after reception of 3B using the 3rd performance device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "3rd reception effect display" as the 3B post-reception effect starts is delayed compared to other effect devices, and this The visibility of the "Integrated Image Display IG" will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 301 (d1) or (d2), even after the reception is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the end of the reception period ends. 232 (a) to (d)) in which the integrated image display IG was scheduled to be displayed. , it is expected to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG remains in the “second display state”. If it continues to be displayed in the same way as it was at a certain time, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation is such that an acceptance has been made. There are concerns that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. 301(e1) or (e2), a predetermined period of time starts from the timing tS2a when the 3B reception period ends due to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. When time has elapsed (timing tS2b has arrived), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the corresponding By making the integrated image display IG difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

In addition, if the reception is made during the ``first display state'' which provides the performance as a ``so-called hidden button'' during the 3B reception period, either the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period Although it is difficult to recognize whether the application was accepted during the 3B reception period, the appearance of the "disappearance related display (extinction EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2B reception period indicates that the reception was made during the 3B reception period. Be able to recognize that there is.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 301 (d1) to (h1)) appear as effects after reception of 3B, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 301 (d2) to (h2)). The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner regardless of the case in which the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1B reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 3B reception period, "extinction EF effect" is displayed. Since it is less important to pay close attention to the related display (disappearance EF effect), it is accepted during the above-mentioned ``first display state'' that provides the effect of a ``so-called hidden button'' during the 3B acceptance period. Even if the user accepts the request, the integrated image display IG can be watched properly after the request is accepted.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this production example, a post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the above 1B reception period is expected as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when a reception is made. The "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby improving gaming interest. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKB2." For example, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is displayed when the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if you use the "first disappearance related display SKB1" that is displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. When the timing tS2c arrives during the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the 3B acceptance period. The execution of "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (conversation preview)" as a performance is started. However, here, in an example where the performance progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F1 (Fig. 301(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), Fig. 301( f1), the first aspect (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. In an example where the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F2 (Fig. 301(d2) to (h2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 301(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, "3B post-reception performance display UGB3" ("3B post-reception performance display "UGB3-1" or "3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 3B reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB3) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGB3 starts after the 3B reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 3B reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will naturally transition to the ``3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)''. (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "Integrated image display IG" and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)". As a result, even if the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated sample image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. 301(g1) or (g2), the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. Display SKB2)" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3)" will be hidden. -2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3" refers to multiple modes (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1) with different expectations based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). Therefore, the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "extinction related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIGS. 300 and 301) corresponding to the 3B reception period, even if the reception is made within the 3B reception period and the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3" is executed, the "3B reception post-reception performance display UGB3" The background image is not switched before and after "3B reception effect display UGB3" is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the above-mentioned 1B reception period, even if the reception is made in the above-mentioned "second display state", the 3B which also has the performance as a "so-called hidden button" It becomes possible to indicate that the application has been accepted during the acceptance period. Also, when compared with the 2B reception period mentioned above, it appears that even though the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 is being executed, the performance is progressing as a result of acceptance using the ``so-called hidden button.'' It is possible to show.

In this production example, the "3rd B post-reception production display UGB3" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tS2c) than the timing (timing tS2b) when the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tS2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKB2)" (timing tS2b).

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 3B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 294), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) sets the start timing (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display) in response to the reception to be earlier than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when a player's action is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 294(b) and 294(c), Start executing the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tS2a when the reception is received in the 3B reception period, but only a part of the 3B post-reception performance (the 3B post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 3B post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tS2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F1 (Fig. 301(d1) to (h1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low for the post-reception production), Fig. 301(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB 3-1), which is a low-expected aspect of UTB 3, it is executed prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB 3-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F2 (Fig. 301(d2) to (h2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 301( d2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) according to the above-mentioned 3B after-reception specific production UTB3 (after 3B reception) corresponding to the 3B reception period. As the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB3-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific performance UTB3, the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2) using the first performance device is preceded. The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 301, in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, it is suggested that the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is also in a state where the 3B reception period has occurred. The effect within the reception period is not executed, and the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period indicates that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is also in a state where the 3B reception period has occurred. The presentation within the reception period is executed (FIGS. 300(b) and 300(c)). The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 300(b)). ) and in a highly expected manner (see FIG. 300(c)) are displayed in the same manner.

In other words, in this case, when the player is in the "second display state" during the 3B acceptance period in which an action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) Different modes will appear accordingly, and the same mode will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if a "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made during the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (the first While the display related to the "integrated image display IG" continues on the production device (while the display does not yet indicate the degree of expectation as a production after reception), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) Different aspects will appear depending on the level of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "3B specific production after reception UTB3-1" and "3B specific production after reception UTB3-2" appears as the 3B post-reception specific production UTB3. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the third B post-reception specific effect UTB3. For example, as the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB3, only "3B post-reception specific performance UTB3-2" is provided, and the expectation level (jackpot It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when the "3rd B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "3rd B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the third B reception period occurs, the timing tS1 shown in FIG. 294(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. The reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3B reception period is in a form that straddles both the timing tS2 when the 3B reception period occurs and the timing X when the above-mentioned "first display state" shifts to the "second display state". The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. However, the acceptance permissible sound may be audible as long as it is audibly output across timing X, and may not necessarily be audibly output as straddles timing tS2.

Here, in the 3B reception period, a third permissible sound that is different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It becomes possible to suggest that a 3B reception period will occur (or is occurring), which has the effect of acting as a "so-called hidden button" instead of a period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed using either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

During the 3B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the 3rd permissible sound) is audibly output, it is recognized that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway), and as a result, it is not the 1B reception period mentioned above, but the 3B reception period that also has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to suggest that a period occurs (or is occurring). However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as for the acceptance permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) corresponding to the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to have two cases: (the case shown in FIG. 300(b)) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 300(c)). In other words, in this case, although the reception acceptance sound indicates the level of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", it is confirmed once the reception is accepted (reception validity judgment). It is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained regarding when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) will be made within the acceptance period. It becomes like this.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if a player's action is accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output, not only will the acceptance permissible sound be terminated midway, but also the acceptance will be confirmed. Based on this, the audible output of the effect sound is started after receiving the third B. The 3B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, in the 3B reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (overlapping) with the performance to be performed (3B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3," such 3B post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 3B post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F1 (Fig. 301(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F2 (Fig. 301(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

Additionally, if the reception is accepted during the 3B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 3B post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 300(a) to "F1 (Fig. 301(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 300 (a) to "F2 (Fig. 301 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such "reception sound" is accepted (determined as valid) in a reception period different from the 3B reception period (for example, the 1B reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each of the above-mentioned reception periods). (regardless of expectations), it will be output audibly. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, in FIG. 295, the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 300(b) and (c))" appears during the 3B acceptance period (in the figure, , timing tS2A), it is assumed that a "reception validity determination that an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 295(a), the 3B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tS2A. At the same time, execution of the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 3B reception period, the reception (reception validity determination ), even if the above-mentioned "first display state (for example, see FIG. 300(a))" appears during the 3B reception period after the reception is made, The performance will proceed in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 300 (b) to "F2 (Fig. 301 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device perform the performance as explained with reference to FIG. 294 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295, in the situation shown in FIG. 301(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area of is reduced.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the "3B post-reception performance display" is similar to the "3B post-reception specific performance" and "3B post-reception performance sound" from the time the reception is accepted (reception is determined to be valid). Since it is executed for a predetermined time (certain time), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also the same regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

Note that "3B post-reception performance display", "3B post-reception specific performance", and "3B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 296 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, after the third B acceptance period occurs, the timing tS3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tS3 (the point in time when the third B acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tS2a and The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 301(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 3rd B reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time, the integration will be performed within the 3B reception period after the end of the 3B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the simulated image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 301 (e3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3B reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the third B acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 3B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, "Third extinction related display SKB3" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinguishment related display SKB3" not be displayed in connection with the 1B reception period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the performance during the 1B reception period (so-called normal button performance) described above It can now be suggested that it was a combination of both the above-mentioned ``2nd B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)'' and the performance.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 3B reception period has ended without any reception.

After this, as shown in FIG. 301 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKB3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 301 (g3), the "disappearance related display (third disappearance related display SKB3 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3B reception period according to this example, when the above-mentioned "second display state" is reached, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is shown in FIG. 232(a). As described above, the display may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIG. 300(c)) instead of in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIG. 300(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 300(c) appears, it is different from the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 300(c) to "F1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 300(b) to "F1 (Fig. 301(d1) to (h1))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 300(c) to "F2'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 300(b) to "F2 (Fig. 301(d2) to (h2))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 301(c) to "F3'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 300(b) to "F3 (Fig. 298(d3) to (g3))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1B reception period to 3B reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1B reception period to 3B reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception will be displayed based on the acceptance (1B performance display after reception ~ 3B after reception). effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which mode appeared as the sample image display, but also to check whether the ``sample image'' is displayed before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance-related display), the change from "sample image display" to "post-reception performance display" It is now expected that the player's gaze will shift naturally. It should be noted that the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" means that the same mode can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the contents of the effect that are carried out at the time of acceptance are different (Fig. 298 ( e2) and FIG. 301(e2)).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an acceptance is made during either the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be changed to ``sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance related display), while the post-acceptance performance display is ``display of sample image and remaining time display (frame image)''. , gauge image) is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. 298 (e1) and FIG. 298 (e2). , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the screen appears to make it difficult to see the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is something that will be done. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 298 (f1) and FIG. 298 (f2), a sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception effect display" when the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is being displayed. Regarding the "post-effect display", it does not necessarily have to start displaying when the sample image display is being displayed, but should start displaying after the sample image display is hidden. Good too.

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as a mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the image display and the display of the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" that occurs before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' could appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is accepted during the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)'' will be changed to ``after reception. It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during such a display period. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 298 and FIG. Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the ``post-reception performance display'' is displayed at least in part of the area, but ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to this configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is made to make it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

In addition, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed after the reception is received and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance in the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Also, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the sample image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, it is preferable that the dynamic display of the simulated image is not terminated and continues even though the disappearance related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a sample image display, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, based on the acceptance, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3", but apart from the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3, the above-mentioned aspect (second extinction Related display SKB2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second extinction-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third B post-reception performance displays will appear, but when the first extinction-related display SKB1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGB1 will appear after receiving the first B.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKB2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. The condition is such that it is difficult to visually recognize the object.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be performed in multiple modes (integrated image Display IGa to IGd). According to each of the production examples mentioned above, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., is maintained and continued even after the reception is received. It is also possible to recognize how the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the reception period.

However, in this case, if it is immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under these conditions (maintaining the display of the sample image and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). You won't get any more. That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only a limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be executed. However, if the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after time has passed, after receiving the item under the condition that ``the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated'', Since it is now possible to perform a performance, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation presentations with different characteristics (the post-reception specific presentation in the second presentation device and the post-reception presentation display on the first presentation device) in stages, it is possible to control the manner in which the sample image is displayed even after acceptance. While making it easy to confirm, it is also possible to suitably play a role as a post-operation effect.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) may be displayed.

Further, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects of the actions (operations) by the players may not necessarily be the same, and may require different actions from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action target display (sample image display) will also be displayed as a different display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "first method" allows "acceptance validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" without displaying the sample image display (or remaining time display). We have decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods, including the 3B reception period (FIGS. 294 to 296) that has a "display state". In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, it means that the reception validity determination is allowed, or that the reception validity determination is allowed. By making it possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound that suggests that a player is moving, a situation where the player cannot fully recognize the object of the action is caused by the fact that the sample image display is not displayed. However, it has become possible for players to recognize that they are in a situation where they are required to perform some action (a situation in which they are given an opportunity to perform an action), and as a result, many players are People are expected to enjoy the performance. As a result, even though it is a reception period in which a simulated image display is not displayed and "reception validity judgment in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed, unlike the case of the 2B reception period, the so-called hidden button Even players who are insensitive to presentation can enjoy the game. However, the acceptance permission sound may not be output when the third B acceptance period occurs. In addition, "a state in which the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not displayed" means a state in which the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not visible on the display screen. good. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer. Furthermore, "sample image display (or remaining time display)" here means an image that is displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d). are doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these modes is being displayed, it can be said that the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not being displayed (or vice versa). For example, if it is possible to determine in which of these modes the image is being displayed, even if it is not displayed in a manner that is easy to see, it can be determined that the "sample image display (or remaining time display) is being displayed." ).

In addition, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the 3B reception period occurs is realized as the "3rd permissible sound", but it is also output (as the reception permissible sound) when other reception periods occur. It is desirable that the sound be For example, if the acceptance permission sound is also output when an acceptance period occurs in which the same operation opportunity (for example, pressing operation on the operation button 410) as in the 3B acceptance period occurs, the sample image display is displayed. It is now possible to suitably suggest which operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is (has been) given to the player, even if it is not. Further, for example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity (for example, sheathing the sword ornament 5001) that is different from the 3B reception period occurs, While the sample image display is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given. It becomes possible to suggest that the person is in a state of

Furthermore, in the 3B reception period according to the above production example, as shown in FIG. 296 and the like, first, a "first display state" in which the simulated image display is not displayed appears. After that, while the third B acceptance period continues, a "second display state" in which a sample image display is displayed appears. That is, in this case, during the 3B reception period, the button will initially appear as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, since the sample image display is displayed while the 3B reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has expired), it is difficult to be sensitive to the effects. Even without this, many players will be able to notice this (3rd B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, through this kind of performance, it is expected that children will develop the ability to see when so-called ``hidden buttons'' are occurring.

In addition, in this case, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. This is desirable. In other words, on the player's side, if an action is accepted in the "second display state" even though the action was not accepted in the "first display state", the time until the sample image display is displayed is It is feared that the player's failure to recognize that the 3B reception period had occurred will become known to those around him, and that his insensitivity to such effects will be exposed, leading to a decline in interest in the game. In this regard, if the sample image is displayed in one of a plurality of different expectation levels (aspects) in the "second display state", the player can operate in the "second display state". Even if the reception is accepted, "I was aware that the acceptance of the operation was allowed from the time I was in the first display state, but I wanted to see the level of expectation suggested by the sample image display, so in the first display state It is now possible to make it appear as if the player did not intentionally accept the action, and it is expected that this will suitably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the 3B reception period (first display state), due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button", the 3B reception is allowed to "determine whether the reception is valid in that the player's action is a valid action" from any timing. It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the "reception validity determination" will not be made and the result will be "I thought the 3B reception period had occurred. There is a concern that the player may misunderstand that it was a misunderstanding, and that the 3B reception period may end without any action (operation) being performed by the player.

Therefore, in the 3B reception period, an action (operation) by the player is made before timing tS2 at which a state (3B reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the action by the player is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3B reception period). Even if there is, the action (operation) will not be considered as a "reception valid determination" at that time, but the 3B reception period will start (or after that). It is desirable to be able to make the "reception validity determination" target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the relevant 3B reception period has occurred, in which "determination of acceptance validity as a valid action by the player" is allowed. It will be necessary to implement it regardless of whether or not it occurs.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 294, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred, so based on this detection, the "Reception that the player's action is a valid action" No "validity determination" is made. However, the existence of this detection information will be kept as a memory (history), and after the 3B reception period occurs, the detection information kept as the memory (history) during the 3B reception period will be updated. Based on this, a "determination as to whether the action by the player is valid for acceptance" is made. Then, the 3B post-reception effect is executed based on the thus obtained "reception validity determination."

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) using this as an opportunity. This makes it possible to reduce the level of difficulty in accepting operations even though the performance of a so-called "hidden button" (first display state) is achieved.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period (more than a predetermined time), it may be possible to prevent the 3B post-reception performance from being executed using this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may or may not be applied in the same manner during the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period. You can do it like this.

In addition, at this time, for actions (operations) performed before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the actions (operations) are not changed to the above-mentioned "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B reception period. It is desirable to enable reception (acceptance validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first display state" as a validity determination. According to such a configuration, the timing when a little time has passed since the action (operation) by the player is performed (for example, the timing when the first display state (third B reception period) occurs), and the sample image It is determined that the reception is valid while the display is not displayed, and as a result, the execution of the post-reception performance is started. This suggests that the player's actions have been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when there is no action (operation) despite the simulated image display being displayed. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples (Fig. 294, Fig. 300, Fig. 301, etc.), there are two cases in which the reception (reception valid judgment) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and 3B reception It was decided that the same aspect would appear as the 3B post-reception effect corresponding to the reception (reception effect determined) when the reception is made while in the "second display state" within the period (Fig. 300 and fig. 301, etc.). However, if the reception (reception valid determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and if the reception (reception valid determination) is made while in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period. It is more desirable to make the presentation contents different depending on the case where the judgment (determination) is made, in order to improve the presentation performance as a reception period that has a "first display state" and a "second display state". .

For example, in the above-mentioned production examples (FIG. 294, FIG. 300, FIG. 301, etc.), even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, Same as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the "second display state" within the 3B reception period, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made, the (previously not displayed) ) The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is now displayed (from Fig. 300 (a) to "F1 (Fig. 301 (d1) to Fig. 301 ( h1)), or from FIG. 300(a) to F2 (FIG. 301(d2) to FIG. 301(h2)), etc.). However, instead of this, if a reception is made (judgment that reception is valid) while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, this will be used as an opportunity after the reception (judgment that reception is valid) is made. It is desirable to prevent the integrated image display IG (image image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) from being displayed.

According to such a configuration, from the player's perspective, an acceptance is made in the ``first display state'', which is relatively difficult to accept due to the presentation of the ``so-called hidden button''. It is now possible to show the people around you that you are in a successful situation (by progressing the performance while the sample image display is not displayed) after the reception (reception validity judgment) is made, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

However, in this case, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), even if the acceptance (acceptance valid judgment) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated replica image It is desirable that the display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) be displayed so that it can be visually recognized even when it is not displayed (while it cannot be visually recognized). In other words, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (while it cannot be seen), If the integrated image display IG is not displayed even after the reception is made, it is possible to determine whether the reception period occurred as the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period (first display state). This makes it difficult to distinguish whether or not the problem occurred as a result. In this regard, even if the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is By making it appear in the same way as when it was accepted in "2 display state", the reception period in question occurred as the 3B reception period (first display state), not the 2B reception period. Be able to suggest things.

In an example employing these configurations, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state (see FIG. 300(a))" within the 3B reception period, ) to (h1) or Figure 301 (d2) to (h2), etc., are displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). It will be carried out in the absence of In other words, if reception is determined to be valid in the first display state, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains not displayed in any of the multiple modes. If the execution of the post-reception effect is started and reception is determined to be valid in the second display state, multiple integrated sample image display IGs (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. The execution of the post-reception performance will start in a state where the screen is displayed in any of the modes.

Or, in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period,
・Even if the reception is accepted (determined that the reception is valid), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed and the 3B reception will be completed. A first period (first state, first timing) in which the post-effect is executed;
・When the reception is accepted (determined that the reception is valid), after the reception is accepted (after the timing of the reception), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge) image)) is displayed, and a second period (second state, second timing) is further included in which the display of the integrated image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-reception effect are performed in parallel. You can also do this. For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occur first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occur. According to such a configuration, since the presentation content differs depending on the timing in which the reception is made in the first display state, it is possible to improve the presentation performance as a reception period having the "first display state". People will now be expected to do more.

In addition, in the "first display state" of the 3B reception period, only at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is displayed. It may be included.

In the 3B reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, if the set time elapses without the player's action being accepted (FIG. 296(f)), it is the same as when the action is accepted within the 3B reception period. Prevented the post-reception effect from being executed (automatic reception effect functions). However, the 3B reception period may be generated as a target for automatic reception performance. In this case, automatic reception will not be performed in the first display state, but will be performed in the second display state. Further, the first reception period may be generated as a target for the automatic reception performance to function.

Further, in the 3B reception period, the timing at which automatic reception is performed may vary depending on the state of the performance (state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of when the automatic reception is performed, the same post-reception effect as when the automatic reception is performed in the above-mentioned "second display state" and the reception is performed within the relevant 3B reception period. It is desirable to start execution.

In addition, if the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but the gauge image The display (the above-mentioned depiction of reducing the area) may be started from a state where the display area has reached its maximum value within the frame (it may also be started from a state where the area has already been reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the reception period is actually already decreasing, the area of the gauge image starts to be displayed from the maximum value, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. The decline will be suppressed. Further, it is also possible to make the reception period appear to be the above-mentioned 1B reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1B acceptance period and a 2B acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, during the 1B reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, the integrated model image display IG (remote image display, remaining time display (frame) images, gauge images)) are always displayed (see Figures 288, 289, etc.), and during the 2B reception period, the integrated image is displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. The IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always prevented from being displayed (see FIGS. 291, 292, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it becomes possible to give variety to the process of requesting actions from players (providing operation opportunities). It is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a 3B reception period, in which a reception validity determination is made in which a movement (operation) by a player is considered to be a valid movement (valid operation). Depending on when it is done, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed, or the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or , remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. The integrated sample image display IG (display of sample images and display of remaining time It is now possible to make it appear as if the "2nd B reception period" is occurring, in which (frame image, gauge image)) is not always displayed, and through the production that creates such uncertainty, the reception period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the situation occurs.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 297 and 300, the integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge It is desirable that images)) be made displayable. That is, in the 1B reception period according to the production example described above, the special aspect (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 232(d) may be displayed, but this special aspect does not appear in the 3B reception period. It has become something that cannot be obtained. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is in the form (integrated model image display IGa) shown in FIG. 232(a). When displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, and the integrated image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) )) is displayed in the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 232(d), it can indicate that the 1B reception period is occurring.

In addition, during the 2B reception period, the acceptance permission sound is not output, and during the 3B reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sound be outputted even if the acceptance is made without notice and the post-acceptance performance is thereby executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the relevant acceptance period occurred as the third B acceptance period (first display state) rather than the second B acceptance period.

In addition, regarding the "reception sound" that is output in the same manner regardless of the manner (expectation level) of the post-reception production, it is output during the 1B reception period and 3B reception period, and is not output during the 2B reception period. Good too. It is desirable that the same format be output as the "reception sound" during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, it is desirable that an extinction EF effect (for example, the first extinction related display SKB1) that cannot appear in the 3B reception period can be displayed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring instead of the 3B reception period through the type of extinction EF effect.

Further, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that an extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) that may appear in the 3B reception period can be displayed. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period has occurred.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects to which the operation opportunity is given (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be the same or may be different. Good too. However, if the object to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action object display (sample image display) will be displayed differently.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1B reception period and a 3B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 1B reception period, based on the reception validity determination, one of the multiple modes with different expectations It is possible to execute the production after the 1B reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3B reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The 3B post-reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both cases where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1B reception period and the case where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3B reception period, the reception validity determination is Based on the fact that Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

Also, as mentioned above, in the 3B reception period, at what timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) is a reception validity determination made that a player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation)? Depending on the case, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image) , gauge image)) may not be displayed in some cases. In this case, first of all, if the reception is determined to be valid under the situation where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, use this as an opportunity to The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the integrated image display IG (image image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this will be used as a trigger. Therefore, it is desirable that the extinction EF effect be executed in the same manner as when the acceptance validity determination is made in a situation where the integrated image display IG is displayed. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance validity determination has been made secretly. In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, and the extinguishment EF The effect will be performed using at least a part of the area where the integrated image display IG was scheduled to be displayed.

At this time, during the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable that the By preparing the 1B reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the 3B reception period described above, in combination with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed, peace of mind can be achieved. It becomes possible to provide a visually appealing performance, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a high expectation mode (FIG. 298 (f2) to (h2)), the specific mode (FIG. 298 (e2) to (g2)) appear, but when different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 298 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as an extinction EF effect and a mode different from this (Fig. 298 ( It is desirable that e1) to (g1)) appear or the disappearing EF effect itself should not appear. According to such a configuration, when the extinction EF effect is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is possible to create an image as if a highly anticipated effect is being executed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. will be able to suppress.

In the 1B reception period, the acceptance permission sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the reception permission sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptance permission sound having the "first aspect" is output, the user is aware of the possibility that the 3B acceptance period, which has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button", is occurring. Since it becomes possible to make the user feel nervous, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1B acceptance period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "first aspect" be output as the aspect with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even in a situation where the acceptance acceptance sound is output in a manner with the lowest level of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1B reception period occurs after the 3B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, a 1B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the 2B reception period can occur between the occurrence of the 3B reception period and the occurrence of the 1B reception period.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the foreshadowing performance that is output when the 1B reception period occurs and the foreshadowing performance that is output when the 3B reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period will occur by the foreshadowing effect.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, as an extinction EF effect, a specific mode (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) will appear if there is a reception, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third disappearance related display SKB2) will appear. It is desirable that the related display SKB3) appears or that no aspect appears at all. On the other hand, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect. That is, in the 3B reception period, which has both the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)", It can be said that forgetting to operate (the reception period ends without receiving any reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) when the reception is made will not appear. It is now possible to appeal to players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to perform an operation, and from now on, it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that are likely to be forgotten during the 1B reception period. Despite this, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player intentionally made a gaming choice not to make the action. If you "advertise the fact that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may actually decrease. Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is reception appears as an extinction EF effect.

In particular, in the 1B reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the mode of the extinction EF production differs depending on the mode (expectation level) of the production after the 1B reception (see FIG. 298). Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same appearance as when there was a reception is made to appear as the disappearing EF effect, after the 1B reception that appeared when there was a reception. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the performance, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, during the second B reception period according to this embodiment, a player who plays while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is possible to make a "reception validity determination" in which the operation is a valid operation, and when the reception validity determination is made, the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). As a result, it is expected that the tension felt during the 2B reception period, in which players are secretly asked to perform actions (and secretly provided with operation opportunities), will be maintained even after the reception is determined to be valid. become.

In addition, in the above production example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in either the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period. It is possible to determine whether the reception is valid or not, in which an action performed by the player in the current state is considered to be a valid action. Then, during the 2B reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid, and the operation performed by the player in a state where the integrated image display IG) is not displayed is determined to be a valid operation, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect will not be executed. , during the 3B reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid and that an action by the player performed while the integrated image display IG is not displayed is a valid action, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect will be executed. did.

According to such a configuration, until the player performs an action while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize whether the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, but after the reception is determined to be valid with this as the valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period are Since it becomes possible to recognize which one has occurred, it becomes possible to urge the player to take action.

Moreover, when the 4th B condition is satisfied, the 4th B reception period may be made possible to occur further. Even during this 4B reception period, actions performed by the player in a state where the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) are not displayed are considered valid actions. It is possible to determine whether reception is valid. During the 4th B reception period, the reception is valid for actions performed by the player when the integrated image display IG (reference image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. If the determination is made, the extinction EF effect is executed as in the case of the third B reception period. However, in the 4B reception period, the extinction EF effect is executed in different manners depending on the manner (expectation level) of the corresponding 4B post-reception effect. According to such a configuration, until the player performs an action while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period, 3B reception period, and 4B reception period is occurring, but after the reception is determined to be valid, the 2B reception period and the 4B reception period are In addition to being able to recognize whether the 3B reception period or the 4th reception period occurred, it will also be possible to suggest the degree of expectation in the case of the 4th reception period. .

During the 1B reception period and 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed on the operation receiving section when the player's action is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display be executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming them into the following configurations, or the following configuration (reception period) may be changed to another reception period (another reception period) for different types of production after reception. It may be further provided as an omen effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period are at least the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period. We are prepared. Of these, during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the extinguishing EF effect can be executed based on the reception of the player's action (operation) (reception validity determination), and during the 2B reception period, As mentioned above, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted (determined to be valid), the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

In this regard, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1B reception period (reception valid determination), the 1B post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception validity determination). The extinction EF effect can be executed in the same manner as when it is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) and when the 1B post-reception effect is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). You may also do so. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 298, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1), and the modes shown in FIG. 298 (d2) to ( Regardless of whether the mode shown in h2) appears, and whether or not the reception is made within the 1B reception period (the mode shown in FIG. 298 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF One predetermined aspect will always appear as a performance. In other words, the 1B reception period means that no matter when the reception is received (determined as valid reception) at any time within the period (and even if the reception is not received), the integrated The image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "In which form the integrated image display IG (image image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if further different information is provided by the extinction EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, in such a 1B reception period, any mode (aspects shown in FIGS. 298(d1) to (h1), modes shown in FIGS. 298(d2) to (h2)) can be used as the 1B post-reception performance. Regardless of whether or not it appears, and whether or not it is accepted within the 1B reception period (aspects shown in FIGS. 298(d3) to (g3)), the predetermined disappearance EF effect is By ensuring that one aspect always appears, the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved.

In addition, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3B reception period (reception valid determination), the 3B post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception valid determination). The extinguishing EF effect can be executed in different ways depending on whether it is executed in a manner with a low rate of appearance (proportion of jackpot symbols appearing) or in a manner where the 3B post-reception performance is executed with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). You can do it like this. The 3B reception period has the effect of using ``so-called hidden buttons'', and it can be said that it is positioned as a ``reception period with a high level of difficulty'', so even after the reception is completed, It is possible to obtain mutually different performance information from both the form of the fake image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the form of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable to provide a stimulus to the audience in terms of performance.

Note that when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 301, the disappearing EF effect that appears when no reception is made is the same as the disappearing EF effect that can appear when an acceptance is made. It is desirable to make it different from any of the plurality of aspects. This makes it possible to recognize that the reception has not been made, and the reception period is the same as the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period". This makes it possible to suggest that it was a combination of both the production and the performance of the period (so-called hidden button production).

In addition, as mentioned above, in another example for the 3B reception period, if the reception is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display) is The image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. In other words, in this case, information such as "In what form was the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed" after the acceptance was made is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information based on the disappearing EF performance (expectation level information regarding the performance after reception) in order to improve the game's interest.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period (determined as valid acceptance), the extinction EF effect will be executed in a manner different from the manner in which it appears when the acceptance is made. You can also do this. This makes it possible to recognize that the application was not received, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3B reception period, the reception period is changed to the above-mentioned "1B reception period ( This makes it possible to suggest that the program did not have both the performance of the "so-called normal button performance" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2nd B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)".

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3B acceptance period (determined as valid acceptance), the extinction EF effect will be executed in the same manner as it appears when the acceptance is accepted. You can. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made, so that it is possible to improve the performance as a "so-called hidden button".

Regarding these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one configuration (modified example) may be applied to the above-mentioned presentation example or another example thereof.

Next, a case will be described in which some of the above-mentioned modifications are applied to the above-mentioned presentation examples. That is, FIG. 302 is a modified example of "the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 1B acceptance period" shown in FIG. 298, and FIG. 303 is a modification example of the effect shown in FIG. 301. This is a modified example of "effects that appear when a reception is made or when a reception is not made in the 3B reception period". In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "examples of effects related to the 1B reception period (Figs. 288 to 290, 297, and 298)" and ``examples of effects related to the 3B reception period (Figs. 296, Fig. 300, Fig. 301), and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples that can be applied to the "example of presentation related to the 1st B reception period" and the "example of presentation related to the 3rd B reception period." is similarly applicable.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 302, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 1B reception period, the 1B post-reception performance is expected based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the performance is executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figure 302 (d1) to (h1)), and in a manner with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figure 302 (d1) to (h1)), The extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as when executed in FIG. 302 (d2) to (h2)). Here, the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 302, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIG. 302 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishing EF effect, a mode that does not appear when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) is made to appear during the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third extinction related display SKB3 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 303, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception is based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the post-performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see FIG. 303 (d1) to (h1)), and when the 3B post-reception performance is executed with low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) The extinguishing EF effect is executed in a different manner depending on the case where it is executed in a manner with a high value (see FIG. 303 (d2 to (h2)).Here, the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) When it is executed in a manner with a low probability (see Fig. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction related display SKB1 is executed as an extinction EF effect, and it is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). (see FIG. 303 (d2 to (h2)), the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 303, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIG. 303 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF performance, the mode that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 303 (d3) to (g3), since the first extinction related display SKB1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 3B reception period. 303), it becomes possible to recognize that the production progress shown in FIGS. 303 (d1) to (h1) has occurred. On the other hand, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (determined as valid reception) during the 3B reception period, and the second extinction related display SKB2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3B reception period If the player's action (operation) is accepted (determined as valid acceptance) in , it becomes possible to recognize that the production progress shown in FIGS. 303 (d2) to (h2) has occurred. .

In the 1B reception period according to such a modification, as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception display (after 3B reception) corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification ``Second disappearance related display SKB2'' that is displayed when the performance) is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used. That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period according to the modified example, it is possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner as long as the reception is completed, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKB2." For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period according to the modified example, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first extinction related display SKB1" that is displayed when It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception is in a state during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "3rd extinction related display SKB3" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). It is intended to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed in connection with the third B reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the performance during the 1B reception period (so-called normal button performance) during the 1B reception period It can be suggested that it was not a combination of both the above-mentioned ``2nd B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)'' and the performance.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 1B reception period has ended without any reception.

By the way, for the 3B reception period according to this modification, if the reception is made while in the "first display state", the "integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image, If a configuration according to the above-mentioned other example such as "The post-reception performance is executed without displaying the gauge image)" is applied, the configuration shown in FIG. 303 (d1) to (h1) or FIG. 303 (d2) to (h2) etc. The progress of the performance shown in is performed in a state where the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if reception is determined to be valid in the first display state, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains not displayed in any of the multiple modes. If the execution of the post-reception effect is started and reception is determined to be valid in the second display state, multiple integrated sample image display IGs (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. The execution of the post-reception performance will start in a state where the screen is displayed in any of the modes.

In addition, even in the 3B reception period according to this modification, the player may Even if there is an action (operation), the action (operation) will not be judged as "valid reception" at that time, but it will be determined at the time when the relevant 3B reception period starts (or after that). ), a configuration according to the above-mentioned separate example, which makes it possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3B reception period. It is also possible to apply the configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the above modification, if a low expectation mode appears as the 3B post-reception performance (FIG. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF performance. However, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1B reception period according to the above modification, a specific mode appears as a disappearing EF effect when there is a reception (Fig. 302 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 302 (d2) to (h2)). Although, when there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode appears (FIG. 302 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no reception.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modification, when there is a reception, the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (extinction EF effect), but this is different from the second extinction related display SKB2. It may also be executed in various ways. For example, even if it is executed in the first disappearance related display SKB1, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

Next, concrete examples of the above-mentioned "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, the multiple reception periods (reception performances) include at least the 1C reception period (the 1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (the 2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (the 3C post-reception performance). We have it ready.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 304 to 318. Regarding each reception period described above with reference to Figure 303, there are 1C reception period (performance after 1C reception), 2C reception period (performance after 2C reception), and 3C reception period (performance after 3C reception). It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1st C reception period (performance after 1C reception), 2C reception period (performance after 2C reception), 3C reception period (performance after 2C reception). 3C (post-reception performance)). In addition, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is only necessary to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 303. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 304 to 306 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1C reception period (1C reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 313 and 314 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first C variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 313(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 304(a), when the timing tT2 arrives at which the 1C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 1C is satisfied) , generates the above-mentioned 1C reception period (validity period) during which ``reception regarding production after 1C reception'' is permitted (``situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and 297(c)''). As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 1C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the 1C post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is configured to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 1C reception period. Display of operation target (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period, etc.), Remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) are being carried out respectively. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIGS. 1 performance device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tT2, or may appear before the timing tT2 and straddle the timing tT2. It may be displayed in In addition, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted either when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 1C reception period or when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It will be hidden when the 1st C reception period ends without any notice. The 1C reception period according to this example ends when timing tT3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 304(a)).

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is in one of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and 232(d)). Figure 313(b) shows the case where the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 232(a). 313(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d). In addition, even during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and (c). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 304 assumes that when the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period arrives, "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action". There is. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 304(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tT2a (the reception was determined to be valid), the 1C reception period ends, and the corresponding A post-reception performance (first C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period will start to be executed.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to Fig. 314(h1))" is as a post-reception performance (first C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2) to FIG. 314(h2)") This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1C post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the ``1C post-reception specific production'' using the 3rd production device (speaker) and the 1C post-reception production sound using the 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1C post-reception effect starts is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the ``integrated image display IG'' will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 314 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 232 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIG. 314(e1) or (e2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tT2a at which the first C reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tT2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 314 (d1) to (h1)) appear as corresponding post-reception performances (1C post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 314 (d1) to (h1)). Different modes (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2) are made to appear as extinction-related displays depending on the cases in which (d2) to (h2) in FIG. 314 appear. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 314(e1) and (e2), the situation is such that the "1C post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the extinction-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is “first extinction-related display SKC1” or “second extinction-related display SKC2”, check whether it is appearing as “first extinction-related display SKC1” or “second extinction-related display SKC2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1C post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 304(b), FIG. When the timing tT2c arrives during the period during which the 1C reception period appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the reception of the player's action within the 1C reception period as a post-acceptance performance. The execution of "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in an example where the performance progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), Fig. 314( f1), the first aspect (here, the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. 314 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, "1C reception effect display UGC1 ( "1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1" or "1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1C reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1) without a significant delay compared to other effect devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGC1 starts after the 1st C reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1C reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's attention is It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will automatically transition to "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "Integrated image display IG" and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". As a result, even if the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated sample image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 304(b), FIG. 314(g1) or (g2), the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and the "extinction related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 304(b), FIG. "Display SKC1 or second disappearance related display SKC2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "1st C reception performance display UGC1 (1C reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C reception effect display UGC 1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "effect display UGC1 after receiving the 1C" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the effect display UGC1-1 after receiving the 1C or the effect display UGC1 after receiving the 1C) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGC1-2). Therefore, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIGS. 313 and 314) corresponding to the 1C reception period, when the reception is made within the 1C reception period and the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" is executed, the "1C reception period" is executed. The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception performance display UGC1" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 314(d) and (e) where the background image is not switched (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 304), the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in 1st performance device), the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, the "1st C post-reception production display UGC1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed ( Although it was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tT2c) than timing tT2b), the timing at which "extinction related display (first extinction related display SKC1, second extinction related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed (timing tT2b) The display may be started at the same time as (timing tT2b).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 314, as a post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1C reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 304), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set to be earlier than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when a player's action is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 304(b) and 304(c), Start execution of the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the start of execution is delayed from the timing tT2a when the reception is received in the 1C reception period, but only a part of the 1C post-reception performance (the 1C post-reception performance display) is delayed, and the The 1C post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tT2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to (h1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low for the post-reception production), Fig. 314(d1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1C post-reception specific presentation UTC1 (1C reception) corresponding to the 1C reception period. As the 1st C reception specific performance UTB 1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-specific performance UTC1, it is preceded by the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC 1-1) using the above-mentioned first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G2 (Fig. 314(d2) to (h2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 314( d2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1C post-reception specific presentation UTC1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1C reception period. As the 1C post-reception specific production (UTC1-2), which is a highly anticipated form of the 1C post-reception specific production UTC1, there is a 1C post-reception production (1C post-reception production display UGC1-2) using the above-mentioned first production device. Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 313, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the 1C reception period is also applied to the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device). A presentation within the reception period that suggests that the situation has occurred is executed (FIGS. 313(b) and 313(c)). The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 313(b)). ) and in a highly anticipated manner (see FIG. 313(c)).

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1C reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG '' continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after 1C reception UTC1-1" and "Specific production after 1C reception UTC1-2" appears as the specific production after 1C reception UTC1. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific performance UTC1 after receiving the first C. For example, the 1st C post-reception specific performance UTC1 is provided with only "1st C post-reception specific performance UTC1-2", and depending on whether or not the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1 appears, the expectation level (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is provided. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when "Specific performance after 1C reception UTC1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when "Specific performance after 1C reception UTC1-2" does not appear. Become.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third presentation device (speaker) is further provided, and when the 1C reception period occurs, the timing tT1 shown in FIG. 304(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1C reception period is audibly output across the timing tT2 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIGS. 313(b) and (c)") when the 1C reception period occurs. The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1C reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds are a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 304(d), the output of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tT2 when the first C acceptance period occurs or thereafter.

In the 1C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, then based on the acceptance, Thus, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, when the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations, as shown in Fig. 304(d) (Fig. 313(b) )) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 313(c)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed (validity determination), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when the acceptance (reception validity determination) should be made within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is audibly output, the permissible permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 1C post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1C post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1C reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the performance sound after receiving the first C).

Similar to the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1," such 1C post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction-related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1C post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G2 (Fig. 314(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the 1C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were respectively output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output; Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 1C post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 313(b) to "G2 (Fig. 314(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1C reception period (regardless of the level of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 305 assumes a case where "a reception validity determination is made in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" when the relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period arrives. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 305(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tT2A (the reception was determined to be valid), the 1C reception period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period will be started.

In this respect, during the 1C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period (even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Basically, the performance will proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tT2a within the first C reception period. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 313 (b) to "G2 (Fig. 314 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device execute the performance as explained with reference to FIG. 304 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, in the situation shown in FIG. 314(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area is further reduced. Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 314, as shown in FIG. 314(d), the reception (reception validity determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound will not be prematurely terminated (the audible output state will be prematurely terminated) due to the acceptance (acceptance validity determination).

Furthermore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, the time for displaying the "1C post-reception effect display" based on the reception (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 304. This will result in a loss of performance. In other words, the "1C post-reception specific performance" and the "1C post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined period of time (a certain amount of time) from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1C post-reception effect display" ends (is not displayed) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It has become something that According to such a configuration, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension regarding the timing within the acceptance period when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 306 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 306, after the first C acceptance period occurs, the timing tT3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tT3 (the point in time when the first C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tT2a or The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 314(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 1C reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 1C reception period after the end of the 1C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 314 (e3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the first C acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 1C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "first disappearance related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so. In other words, in this case, if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the 1C reception period, it is expected that the player would sense the possibility that the performance after the 1C reception would have suggested that the level of expectation was low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to feel glad that they did not perform the action (operation) during the 1C reception period, and the interest in the game decreases when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period. It is expected that the government will suppress the

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, "Second extinction related display SKC2" may be displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), or " You may make it appear in an aspect different from both of the ``first extinction related display SKC1'' and the ``second extinction related display SKC2''.

Furthermore, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be displayed even if the action (operation) had been accepted. It may be executed in any manner in which it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where "first extinction related display SKC1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 313 (b) to "G1 (Fig. 314 (d1) to (h1))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations was executed) becomes. On the other hand, the case where "second extinction related display SKC2" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 314 (e3) means that if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, then in the situation shown in FIG. This means a case where the performance has progressed from b) to "G2 (Fig. 314 (d2) to (h2))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively high expectations has been executed). . In other words, in this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the 1C reception period ends. Just by checking the mode of "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears, you can determine whether the 1C post-reception effect was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 314 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 314 (g3), the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 313(b)). (see FIG. 297(c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 313(c) appears, it is different from the case where the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 313(c) to "G1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1) to (h1))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the production progresses from Fig. 313(c) to "G2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from Fig. 313(b) to "G2 (Fig. 314(d2) to (h2))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the production progresses from Fig. 313(c) to "G3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from Fig. 313(b) to "G3 (Fig. 314(d3) to (g3))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for the convenience of explanation, the 1C post reception production (1C post reception production display UGC, 1C post reception specific production UTC, 1C post reception production sound) is as described above. It was decided to perform the same performance content (type) as the 1B post-reception performance corresponding to the 1B reception period. However, regarding the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, and post-reception performance sound), it is desirable that the performance contents (types) be different between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

Furthermore, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the extinction related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the extinction related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, the extinction-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

FIGS. 307 to 309 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 2C reception period (2C reception performance) occurs. . FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a 2nd C reception period (2nd C reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second C variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2nd C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2nd C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 315(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "2nd C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 307(a), when the timing tU2 arrives at which the 2C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 2C is satisfied) , generates the second C reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding production after reception of the second C" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the relevant 2C reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2C post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

However, in the 2nd C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike when the above 1C reception period occurs, the time when the operation by the player is accepted (determined as valid reception) (or the performance after the reception starts to be executed) At this point in time), the integrated sample image display IG (“sample image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed.

More specifically, in the second C variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 307(b) and 315(b), when timing tU2 arrives, the second C reception period occurs, and the integrated image display IG (" ``Study image display'' and ``Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)'') will be displayed. The 2C reception period ends when timing tU3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 307(a)).

FIG. 307 assumes that during such a second C reception period, when a relatively early timing tU2a arrives, "a reception validity determination is made in which the action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action". are doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 307(a), the second C reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tU2a. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) corresponding to the second C reception period is started.

Note that the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, respectively. As the 2nd C post-reception performance (such as "2nd C post-reception performance display", "2nd C post-reception specific performance", "2nd C post-reception performance sound", etc.), the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, respectively. In this case, the illustration is omitted, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. 315(b) to a situation where the production after receiving the 2C is executed in the omitted mode (the first mode with low expectations). There are now cases where this happens. However, for such a 2nd C reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made, the 2nd C post-reception performance (``2C post-reception performance display'' or ``2C post-reception performance display'') 315(c)) will be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 315(c). It may also be realized as a type in which a low-expectation mode is not prepared as a specific production after receiving the 1C and a production sound after receiving the 1C). The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, in this production example (2nd C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. At timing tU2a, which is the point in time when the performance after receiving the second C was started according to There is never one. Note that, more precisely, FIG. 315(c) shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 307(c). That is, at timing tU2a, "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2 (group preview performance)" among the 2C post-reception performances is not executed, and "2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2" and "2nd C reception performance display UGC2" are not executed. After-performance sound (highly anticipated mode)'' is executed. According to such a configuration, the performance progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1C post-reception performance, so that the above-mentioned effects can be obtained in the same manner.

Therefore, in this production example (2nd C reception period), as shown in FIG. 307 and FIG. The above-mentioned extinction related display (extinction EF effect) is never executed. This is because at a certain timing when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (at the time when the 2nd C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated sample image display IG ("display sample image" and "remaining image display") This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed and there is no need to make it difficult to visually recognize it.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. 315(c), when the timing tU2c, which is later than the timing tU2a, arrives, the player's operation is not allowed within the second C acceptance period. In response to the reception, the first production device (production display device 1600) displays a "2C post-reception production display UGC2" as a post-reception production (in the figure, a group preview production with ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated mode) After receiving the second C, the performance display UGC 2-2) is started. Then, the "2nd C post-reception effect display UGC2" started in this way is displayed for a predetermined period of time from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination), as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. 315(d). It will be closed (hidden) after a certain period of time has passed.

Note that in the production example (FIG. 315) corresponding to the 2C reception period, unlike the case of the 1C reception period, the background image is switched when the "2C post reception production display UGC2" is executed. Never.

Additionally, when a player's action is accepted within the 2C acceptance period, the second effect device is used based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 307(b) and 307(c). The execution of the 2nd C post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception specific performance) is started prior to the 2C post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. In the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. 315(c) (when expectations are relatively high for the effect after reception), "Ghost" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). The manner in which is displayed is as the above-mentioned 2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2 corresponding to the 2nd C reception period (2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2, which is a highly anticipated form of the 2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2). , execution is started prior to the second C post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance display UGC2-2) using the first performance device. As mentioned above, we will omit the explanation of the case where a low-expected mode is executed as the 2nd C post-reception performance, but "2nd C post-reception performance display" and "2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2" are low-expected modes. This is basically the same as when it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second C reception period occurs, the reception permission sound is not output, as shown in FIG. 307(d).

Furthermore, in the 1C acceptance period, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 2C post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2C post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output).

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 2C post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is something that is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the second C post-reception performance is executed in a highly anticipated manner or in a less expected manner.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 308 and progressing from FIGS. 315(b) and 315(e) to FIG. 315(c), when the relatively late timing tU2A within the second C reception period arrives, " It is assumed that a "reception validity determination" is made in which an action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 308(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tU2A (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 2C acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2nd C reception period will be started.

In this regard, in the 2C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tU2A within the 2C reception period (reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C reception period. Therefore, at the time when the player's operation is accepted (determined to be valid) (or when the performance starts to be executed after acceptance), the integrated sample image display IG ("sample image display" or "remaining time display") frame images and gauge images) are never displayed. In addition, in the case of the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 308(a) and Figs. 315(b) and (e) to Fig. 315(c), there are cases in which the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception production, and There are cases where the following is omitted (when expectations are relatively low as a presentation after reception), and for the first presentation device, second presentation device, and third presentation device, basically refer to Fig. 307 etc. The performance will be performed according to the content explained.

In particular, during the 2nd C reception period, unlike the 1st C reception period, the "2nd C post reception performance display" is similar to the "2nd C post reception special performance" and "2C post reception performance sound", etc. Since it is to be executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made, the aspect of the post-reception performance also changes to the timing when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It's the same regardless.

In addition, the "2nd C post-reception performance display", the "2nd C post-reception specific performance", and the "2nd C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 309 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIGS. 315(b) and 315(e) to FIG. This is based on the assumption that the application is not accepted (reception validity determination).

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 309, after the second C acceptance period occurs, the timing tU3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second C reception period, as shown in 309 of the same figure, no performance related to the end will be executed.

Note that in the second C reception period, only one mode (in FIG. 315, integrated model image display IGb (see FIG. 232(b))) is displayed as the model image display. The integrated image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed during the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period. However, the 2C reception period refers to the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the time when the post-reception production starts to be executed), regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. ) is characterized by the fact that no scale image display (gauge image) is displayed. Therefore, during the second C reception period, the sample image may be displayed in any mode, or may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Further, during the second C reception period, the sample image display may not be displayed, but the gauge image may be displayed. Furthermore, during the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, but a sample image display may be displayed. Further, during the second C reception period, neither the sample image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned features related to the 2C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the aspect of the post-reception performance without worrying about the aspect of the sample image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1st C reception period and 3rd C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2C reception period should not be subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. is desirable. As a result, the occurrence of a post-reception performance is limited to the case where the player himself operated the performance after confirming the performance during the 2C reception period, so the 2C reception period has ended. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the sample image or the gauge image is not displayed at that point or thereafter.

FIGS. 310 to 312 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 3C reception period (3C reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 316 to 318 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variable pattern in which the 3rd C reception period (3rd C reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the third C variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 3rd C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 316(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "3rd C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 310(a), when the timing tV2 arrives at which the 3C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 3C is satisfied) , generates the 3rd C reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding production after 3C reception" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the 3C post-reception performance is performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production display device 1600 (first production device) displays the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.) in connection with the occurrence of such a 3C reception period. A suggested action target display (sample image display), a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period) (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes), An extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display, and a 1C post-acceptance effect display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment). It is becoming more and more popular. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

In this respect, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is limited to the above-mentioned "1C reception period performance (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the performance starts to be executed after reception)", the sample image display and the gauge The effect of displaying the image) and the effect of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (the display of the sample image and the gauge image at the time of acceptance (or the time of execution of the effect after acceptance)) It has been realized as a special production that combines both the performance and performance that have not been done before.

More specifically, when the 3C reception period occurs during which the reception of operations by the player is permitted, first, as shown in FIGS. 310(b) and 316(b), the integrated image display IG (“sample image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is displayed (timing tV2). However, during the 3C reception period, depending on when within the 3C reception period the player's operation was accepted (reception valid determination), the time at which the reception (reception validity determination) was made (or the reception There are cases where the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed and cases where the sample image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect is started.

As will be described later, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. When the operation is accepted (determined as valid), the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the acceptance (determined as valid) is made (or at the time when the performance after reception starts to be executed). If a player's operation is accepted (reception valid determination) within the period from timing Y until the end of the 3C reception period (second period), the reception The sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the validity determination (validity determination) is made (or at the time when the execution of the performance after acceptance is started). However, such an aspect is only an example, and the point is that when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the first timing within the 3C reception period, the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the reception The sample image display and gauge image are hidden (not displayed) at the time when the post-production starts execution), and the reception is accepted at a second timing different from the above first timing within the 3C reception period. If the reception (validity determination) is made, the sample image display or the gauge image may be displayed at the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started).

According to such a 3C reception period, from the time the 3C reception period occurs to the arrival of timing Y, even if the reception is made, the 3C post-reception performance will not be integrated. The image display IG will start execution in a hidden state (invisible state), and from timing Y until the arrival of timing tV3 when the 3rd C reception period ends, it will not be accepted that the image display IG has been accepted. After receiving the corresponding 3C, the performance will start in a state where the integrated model image display IG is displayed (at least a part of the integrated model image display IG should be visible). . As a result, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is limited to the above-mentioned ``1C reception period performance (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts), the display of the sample image and the gauge The effect of displaying the image) and the effect of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (the display of the sample image and the gauge image at the time of acceptance (or the time of execution of the effect after acceptance)) It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both the performance and performance that has not been previously used, and it has come to be expected that this will improve the interest in the game.

In other words, in this case, by adjusting the operation timing with respect to the 3C reception period, the player can visually confirm the aspect of the integrated image display IG (sample image display and gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period. As stated above, should the execution of the 3rd C post-reception performance be started while the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and gauge image) is still being displayed, or should the execution be performed in order to concentrate on the 3C post-reception presentation? It is now possible to virtually select whether to hide the integrated image display IG (image image display and gauge image) and start execution of the performance after receiving the 3rd C. You will be able to improve your skills.

In order to better achieve this kind of performance, during the 3C reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) should be configured in one of several modes with different expectations. (For example, Fig. 232(a), (c)). Fig. 316(b) , gauge image) are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a), and FIG. 316(d) shows that the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c)). In addition, even during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 310 shows that during the above-mentioned "first period (first state) (for example, see FIG. 316(b))" of the 3C reception period (timing tV2a in the figure), It is assumed that a "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310(a), the 3C reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tV2a. At the same time, execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period begins.

Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIGS. 317(d1) to FIG. 317(h1))" is the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the "3C post-reception performance" as a result of the "reception validity determination" in the "H2 ( In an example where the performance progresses from ``Fig. 317 (d2) to 317 (h2))'', the ``reception validity determination'' is made during the above-mentioned ``first period (first state)'' of the 3C reception period. As a result, this corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as "3C post-reception performance". The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, if the "reception validity determination" is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the process shown in FIG. 310(b), FIG. 317(d1), or ( As shown in d2), at timing tV2a, which is the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the 3C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated image display IG" is hidden and not displayed (made invisible).

According to such a configuration, if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period ("reception validity determination" is made) ), the player may perform the post-reception performance (here, after the 3rd C reception) with the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) not displayed (made invisible). You will be able to enjoy the specific performance UTC3).

In this regard, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, even if the player performs an action (operation) during the "first period (first state)", the reception is When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tV2a (when the timing tV2b arrives), a display related to extinction (extinction EF effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 317 (e1) or (e2). .

That is, in the 3C reception period according to this example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", when timing tV2b arrives, Even though the "disappearance image display IG (display image, gauge image display)" is already not displayed (invisible state), the "extinction related display (disappearance EF effect)" will start to be displayed. , and at least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is supposed to be done.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the post-acceptance performance is being executed in response to the proper acceptance of the player's motion.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned ``2C reception period'' (the sample image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time the reception is received (or at the time the performance starts to be executed after reception)) If the reception is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" that provides a performance that does not have a performance effect, then whether the reception is made during the 2nd C reception period or the 3C reception period. Although it is difficult to recognize, it is possible to recognize that the application was accepted during the 3C reception period by the appearance of the "disappearance related display (extinction EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2C reception period. It becomes like this.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 317 (d1) to (h1)) appear as effects after the 3C reception, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 317 (d2) to (h2)) appear. The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner regardless of the case in which the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1C reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 3C reception period, "extinction EF effect" As the importance of paying close attention to "related display (disappearance EF effect)" is lowered, coupled with the fact that the sample image display (gauge image) is not displayed, the focus is on what form will appear as the effect display UGC after receiving the 3C. You will be able to do so.

In addition, during the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, a post-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the above 1C reception period is expected as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when a reception is made. The "second extinction related display SKC2" that is displayed when the process is executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second extinction-related display SKC2." For example, an extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3rd C reception period is displayed when the after-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first extinction related display SKC1" may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the 1C reception period may be used as the extinction related display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 310(b) and FIG. 317(f1) or (f2), the display related to the extinction related display (integrated image display IG) is difficult to visually recognize. When the timing tV2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which the mode becomes) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the third C acceptance period. The execution of "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation preview)" as a performance is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 316(b) to "H1 (Fig. 317(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 317( f1), the first aspect (here, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 3C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 316(a) to "H2 (Fig. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 317(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, 3C post-reception performance display UGC 3-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as 3C post-reception performance display UGC 3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. It is now possible to do so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed and the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is displayed, the "3rd C reception effect display UGC3" ("3rd C Execution of ``post-reception performance display UGC 3-1'' or ``3rd C post-reception performance display UGC 3-2'' will be started.

In this regard, the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3" ("3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") is the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" " is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the display area (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" The "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" is displayed preferentially. In this way, by making the object of attention by the player (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3) difficult to visually recognize, further concentration can be encouraged.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 310(b), FIG. or 3C reception effect display UGC 3-2) is displayed, the ``extinction related display (second annihilation related display SKC 2)'' is hidden, which improves visibility. Accordingly, a display related to "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is performed.

In this regard, the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the reception of the action (operation) by the player (here, the 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1). or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2). Therefore, the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "extinction related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the "3rd C reception effect display UGC3" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tV2c) than the timing (timing tV2b) when the "disappearance related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tV2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" (timing tV2b).

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 310(b) and 310(c), Start execution of the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs the display related to disappearance and then displays the performance after receiving the 3C, the performance after the reception of the 3C As for itself, execution can be started from the same timing tV2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low for the performance after reception), FIG. 317(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC 3-1), which is a low-expected aspect of UTC 3, it is executed prior to the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance display UGC 3-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example where the performance progresses from Fig. 316(a) to "H2 (Fig. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), Fig. 317( d2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 3rd C reception specific effect UTC3 (after 3rd reception reception) corresponding to the 3rd C reception period. As the 3rd C reception specific performance UTC 3-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific performance UTC 3, a 3C post reception performance using the above-mentioned first performance device (3C post reception performance display UGC 3-2) is preceded. The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 317, when it is in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period (FIG. 317(b)), and when it is in the above-mentioned "second period" (FIG. 317(b)), period (second state)" (FIG. 317(c)), there is a reception period that suggests that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is in a state where the 3C reception period has occurred. The internal performance is now executed. The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 316(b)). ) and in a highly anticipated manner (see FIG. 316(d)).

That is, in this case, during the 3C acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), different aspects appear on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and the sub The same aspect will appear on the liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, during the 3C reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid in that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the integrated simulated image. "Display IG" is hidden (while not yet indicating the level of expectation as a performance after reception), and different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after reception of 3C UTC3-1" and "Specific production after reception of 3C UTC3-2" appears as the specific production after reception of 3C UTC3. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the third C post-reception specific effect UTC3. For example, the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC3 is provided with only "3rd C post-reception specific performance UTBC-2", and depending on whether or not the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC3-2 appears, the expectation level It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when "Specific performance UTBC-2 after receiving 3rd C" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when "Specific performance UTBC-2 after accepting 3rd C" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. 310(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. The acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3rd C acceptance period is audible in a form that spans both the timing tV2 when the 3rd C acceptance period occurs and the timing Y when the above-mentioned "first period" shifts to the "second period". The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. However, the acceptance permissible sound may be audibly output as long as it straddles timing Y, and may not necessarily be audibly output as straddles timing tV2.

Here, in the 3rd C reception period, a third permissible sound that is different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound is audibly outputted as the permissible sound for the 1C reception. It becomes possible to suggest that a third C reception period, which has multiple effects, will occur (or is occurring) instead of a period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3C reception period may be executed using either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

During the 3C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the 3rd permissible sound) is audibly output, it is recognized that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway), and as a result, the 3C reception period, which has multiple effects, occurs instead of the 1C reception period described above. (or what is happening). However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 310(d), the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3C reception period (here, the third permissible sound) is executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations. It is desirable that there be two cases: (the case shown in FIG. 316(b)) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 316(d)).

The 3rd C post-reception effect sound is similar to the 3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3, as shown in FIG. It will continue to run for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. Regarding the 3C post-reception performance sound, an example where the performance progresses from Fig. 316(a) to "H1 (Fig. 317(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception performance) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 316(a) to "H2 (Fig. 317(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 3C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the 3rd performance device allows you to hear not only the 3C post-reception performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 316(b) to "H1 (Fig. 317(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 316(b) to "H2 (Fig. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such "reception sound" is accepted (determined as valid) in a reception period different from the 3C reception period (for example, the 1C reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). (regardless of expectations), it will be output audibly. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize the content of the presentation, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after reception.

On the other hand, the effect changes from Fig. 311 and Figs. 316(b) and (c) to "H3 (Fig. 318 (d3) to (h3))" or "H4 (Fig. 318 (d4) to (h4))". An example of progress is that during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period (timing tV2A in the diagram), "the action (operation) by the player is This assumes that the reception is valid. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311(a), FIGS. 318(d3) to (h3), or FIGS. 318(d4) to (h4), an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tV2A. Based on the fact that (the reception is determined to be valid), the 3C reception period is ended, and the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period, if the reception (reception validity judgment) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (as shown in Figure 316(c)) Even if the application is received in a state in which the application is accepted, basically, after the application is made, the application shall be made within the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" within the relevant 3B reception period. The production will proceed in the same manner as in the case where the reception (reception validity determination) is made (the case where the reception is made in the state shown in FIG. 316(b)). Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 311(a), when the performance progresses in a manner with relatively low expectations as the post-reception performance from FIG. 316(c) ("H3 (Fig. 318(d3) ~ (h3))") and when the performance progresses in a relatively highly anticipated manner as a post-reception performance from FIG. 316(c) ("H4 (Fig. 318(d4) to (h4))", and the first, second, and third performance devices basically refer to FIG. The performance will be performed according to the content as explained.

However, as mentioned above, the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned ``1C reception period performance (a performance in which a sample image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts). As a special production that combines both the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (performance in which the sample image display and gauge image are not displayed at the time when the production starts execution after reception). If the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period (as shown in Figure 316(c)). (If the reception is made in a state where the application is accepted), the performance according to the above-mentioned "1C reception period" (the performance in which the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the performance starts after reception) will appear. It has become a thing.

Therefore, it is clear when comparing "Fig. 318 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" with "Fig. 317 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As shown in Figure 316(c), if the reception is made during the "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (reception is determined to be valid) In this case, the integrated image display IG will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed at the time when the performance after receiving the third C is started.

In addition, such an integrated image display IG is displayed at the time when the execution of "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation preview)" starts (see FIG. 311 and FIG. 318 (f3) or (f4)). is not hidden and continues to be displayed. The integrated image display IG is not prioritized and displayed behind the "Second disappearance related display SKC2", but it is displayed behind the "Second disappearance related display SKC2", but it is displayed behind the "Second disappearance related display SKC2", but for the "3rd C reception performance display UGC3 (conversation preview)" It is arranged to be displayed preferentially, so that it is easy to recognize in which form it was displayed during the reception period.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period, the "after 3C reception" 311(b), FIG. 318(g3) or (g4). As shown in , while the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is being displayed, first, "integration" is displayed. Of the "Make Image Display IG" and "Disappearance Related Display," the "Integrated Image Display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 311(b), FIG. "Display SKC2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3 (3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3-1 or 3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3-") will be hidden. 2)" will now be displayed.

Other production aspects when the reception is made in the second period (second state) within the 3C reception period (for example, specific production after reception, disappearance related display, display production after reception, permissible sound, production after reception, etc.) The reception sound, etc.) are as described with reference to FIG. 317 (or the same as the production example shown in FIG. 301), and therefore will not be described here.

In addition, in the production examples (FIGS. 316 to 318) corresponding to the 3C reception period, even if the reception is made within the 3C reception period and the "3C post-reception production display UGC3" is executed, the "3C post-reception production display UGC3" is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the 3C reception effect display UGC3 is started. According to this configuration, the integrated image display IG is displayed when the application is received during the 1st C reception period and when the application is received during the 2nd period within the 3C reception period. However, by checking whether the background image changes in response to the reception, it is possible to change the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period. This makes it possible to recognize which of these has occurred. On the other hand, in cases where the application is received during the 2nd C reception period and in the case where the application is received during the 1st period within the 3C reception period, the reception is received while the integrated image display IG is not displayed. The same point is that the post-production starts to be executed, but by checking whether the "disappearance related display" is executed in response to the reception, the above 2C reception period and the 3C reception period can be changed. This makes it possible to recognize which of these has occurred.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the ``3C post-reception performance display'', like the ``3C post-reception specific performance'' and ``3C post-reception performance sound'', starts from the time the reception is accepted (determined to be valid). Since it is to be executed for a predetermined time (certain time), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also the same regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

In addition, "3C post-reception performance display", "3C post-reception specific performance", and "3C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 312 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 312, after the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tV3 (the point in time when the 3C acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tV2A, etc. Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time (when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the second period within the 3C reception period), the effect is shown in FIG. 318 (d5). As such, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

According to such a configuration, even if the 3rd C reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time, the integration will be performed within the 3C reception period after the end of the 3C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 318 (e5), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the third C acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 3C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, a "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as a disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed in connection with the first C reception period. In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, the reception period is still the same as the above-mentioned ``1C reception period performance (at the time the reception is made)'' Or, the performance in which a sample image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the performance starts execution after reception), and the performance by the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (at the time when the reception is received (or at the time when the reception It becomes possible to suggest that the post-effect was a combination of both the simulative image display and the effect in which the gauge image was not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect was started.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third C reception period has ended without any reception.

After this, as shown in FIG. 318 (f5), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKC3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 318 (g5), the "disappearance related display (third disappearance related display SKB3 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3C reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 316(b), (c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIGS. 316(d) and (e)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIGS. 316(d) and 316(e) appears, the situation shown in FIGS. The only difference is in the aspect of "sample image display, frame image, gauge image", and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 316(d) to "H1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 316(b) to "H1 (Fig. 317(d1) to (h1))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 316(d) to "H2'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 316(b) to "H2 (Fig. 317(d2) to (h2))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 316(e) to "H3'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 316(c) to "H3 (Fig. 318(d3) to (h3))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 316(e) to "H4'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 316(c) to "H4 (Fig. 317(d4) to (h4))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 316(e) to "H5'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 316(c) to "H5 (Fig. 318(d5) to (g5))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only.

In addition, in the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, for the convenience of explanation, the 3C post reception production (3C post reception production display UGC, 3C post reception specific production UTC, 3C post reception production sound) is as described above. It was decided to execute the same performance content (type) as the 3B post-reception performance corresponding to the 3B reception period. However, regarding the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, and post-reception performance sound), it is desirable that the performance contents (types) be different between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

Further, in the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the extinction related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the extinction related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1C reception period to 3C reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception will be displayed based on the acceptance (1C performance display after reception ~ 3C after reception). effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance performance display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image), but also to confirm which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image). By reducing the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display) until it is hidden, It is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "sample image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception performance display." It should be noted that the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" means that the same mode can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the contents of the effect that are performed upon acceptance are different (Fig. 314 ( e2) and FIG. 317(e2), etc.).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an application is received during either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) While the display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), the post-reception performance display is The time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed in a manner in which it is difficult to visually recognize it (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (e1) and FIG. 318 (e3). , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the screen appears to make it difficult to see the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is something that will be done. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (f1) and FIG. 318 (f3), a sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, if the reception is made in the first period of the 3C reception period, the extinction-related display and the post-reception effect display are changed to the sample image display as shown in FIG. 317(e1) etc. Since the display is started while the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is already hidden, the player concentrates on ``what kind of appearance will appear as the effect display after reception''. You will be able to do this. In addition, by adjusting whether operations will be accepted during the first period or the second period within the 3C reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be displayed. Either start the execution of the post-reception effect display while the state continues, or hide the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) before executing the post-reception effect display. It becomes possible to select whether or not to start the game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as a mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the image display and the display of the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" that occurs before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' could appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is received during the 1st C reception period or 3C reception period (2nd period), etc., "a manner in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" can be displayed even after the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during such a display period. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in FIG. 314 and FIG. Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see" (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) makes it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the "post-reception performance display" after the reception is made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (extinction EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the sample image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a display of a sample image, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3", but apart from the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, the above-mentioned mode (second extinction Related display SKC2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1C and 3C post-reception effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance related display SKC1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGC1 will appear after receiving the first C.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKC2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. The condition is such that it is difficult to visually recognize the object.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was decided to start displaying after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used in multiple modes (integrated image Displays IGa to IGd). According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. Even after this is done, it is possible to recognize in what manner the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the case where the "sample image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are in a hidden state may be a state where they are not visible from the player's side. For example, this includes cases where "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are displayed on a layer but cannot be viewed due to priority display of other images. It is the meaning. However, if at least part of the "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player's side, then the "sample image display" or "remaining time display" (frame image, gauge image)" is made visible, so "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are not hidden. It can be said that the display continues.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the specific production after reception may be realized by being performed in the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

Further, in the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period, the object of the action (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and may require different actions from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action object display (sample image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed as different displays.

By the way, if you want the reception (reception validity determination) to be made in the first period (first state) of the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination for the player will be made until timing Y arrives. This will require that the following be done. However, if the 3C acceptance period is set as a "valid period that lasts for 3 seconds", the first period (first state) can only last for about 1 second. becomes. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the player may act (operate) a little before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period due to impatience due to having to act (operate) within such a short time. Ru. In this case, even if the player attempts to redo the action, if timing Y has already arrived by then, there is a concern that the player may lose interest in the game because he or she will not be able to play the game as desired.

Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the action (operation) by the player is made before the timing tV2 at which a state (3C reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the action by the player is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3C reception period). Even if there is, the action (operation) will not be considered as a "reception valid determination" at that time, but the 3C reception period will start (or after that). It is desirable to be able to make the "reception validity determination" target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the relevant 3C reception period has occurred, in which "determination of acceptance validity as a valid action by the player" is allowed. It will be necessary to implement it regardless of whether or not it occurs.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 304, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred, so based on the detection, "Reception that the player's action is a valid action" is No "validity determination" is made. However, the existence of this detection information will be kept as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3C reception period, the detection information kept as the memory (history) during the 3C reception period will be updated. Based on this, a "determination as to whether the action by the player is valid for acceptance" is made. Then, the third C post-reception effect is executed based on the thus obtained "reception validity determination."

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period, In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) using this as an opportunity. Thereby, even though the above-mentioned performance (first period) is achieved, it is possible to reduce the level of difficulty in accepting motions.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3rd C reception period (more than a predetermined time), it may be possible to prevent the 3C post-reception performance from being executed using this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when operated (operated) a little before the occurrence of the 3rd C acceptance period may or may not be applied in the same way during the 1st C acceptance period and the 2nd C acceptance period. You can do it like this.

In addition, at this time, for actions (operations) performed before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, those actions (operations) will be transferred to the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C reception period. It is desirable to allow acceptance as a validity determination (acceptance validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" instead of "." According to such a configuration, acceptance is determined to be valid at a timing when a little time has elapsed after an action (operation) is performed by the player, and as a result, execution of the post-acceptance performance is started. As a result, it is not a so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the reception period, but it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been properly accepted. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there are a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, during which reception of actions (operations) by players (reception validity determination) is allowed. A reception period is available. Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) starts to be executed, an action object display (here, a simulated image display (FIG. 232(a) to ( d))) may be in a displayed state without being hidden (see Figure 318), and within the 2C reception period, "Reception validity judgment that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" ” is performed, at the time when the execution of the above-mentioned post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance corresponding to the 2C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the action target display (here, the action by the player ( A model image display (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) that imitates the object of the operation and has multiple aspects with different expectations is not hidden and may not be in the displayed state (Refer to FIG. 315) (Refer to FIG. 315) (Refer to FIG. 315).

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action object display (here, multiple forms that imitate the object of the player's action and have different expectations) (see FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d))) is visible; Since the sample image display (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) having multiple different aspects may not be visible, the tension after the reception performance starts is increased. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of performance.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception period is determined according to the timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made. At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started, the operation target display ((see FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d))) is not displayed. (See Figure 318) and when the operation target display ((See Figures 232(a) to (d))) is hidden (Figure 317). ).

In other words, from the player's perspective, the sample image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d)). When the reception is valid, it is possible to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" has started, which will improve the game's interest. It can certainly be said that it is preferable for the purpose of achieving this. However, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that during its validity period (3C reception period), the sample image display is "the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 316(b))". (see Figure 316(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the sample image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the sample image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 316(d))", if the sample image display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the sample image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the sample image display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 316(d))", some players may think that the post-reception performance is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the sample image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3rd C reception period occurs, the player can play the game through the timing at which "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period (see FIGS. 310 and 311). Whether to start execution of the post-reception performance while the image display is displayed (see Figure 318) or to start execution of the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be viewed (see Figure 317). (see), it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in a form that can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(d) (In the example shown in FIG. 315, integrated model image display IGb) is not displayed in any of the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. Even so, the operation target display is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is started. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 2nd C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, regarding the 3rd C reception period, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) will be performed as when the action (operation) was performed. (The above-mentioned automatic reception function may be enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, the operation target display (sample image) is displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance is executed. It is desirable to ensure that the display (display) is always displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3rd C post-reception performance without the player's knowledge, the operation target display (sample image display) may be displayed in any form within the 3rd C reception period. This makes it easier to recognize what is being displayed.

Further, when the "3rd C reception period" is targeted by the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the production mode and the like. However, regardless of when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the corresponding It is desirable that the action target display (sample image display) be always displayed at the time when the effect is executed after receiving the 3C.

However, for the 2nd C reception period, when no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is performed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (the automatic reception function described above should not be enabled).

In addition, during the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, there are cases where execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the operation target display (sample image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318); Even if the execution of the 3C post-reception performance is started while the target display (sample image display) is hidden (see Figure 317), the 3C post-reception performance (3C (Specific effect after reception UTC3, 3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3, 3rd C post-reception effect sound, etc.) The aspects themselves are the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the performance mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception performance and play the game.

In addition, during the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, there are cases where execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the operation target display (sample image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318); Regardless of whether the execution of the 3rd C post-reception effect is started while the target display (sample image display) is hidden (see Figure 317), the same mode (second A disappearance related display SKC2) is displayed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the reception has been properly completed during the third C reception period, regardless of the manner in which the presentation progresses.

In the above production example, apart from the 2nd C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, a 1C reception period is further prepared, and in the 1C reception period, the reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made at any time. Even if the action is performed at the timing of , the action object display is not hidden but always continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. In other words, in this case, the 3rd C reception period combines both the effects of the 1C reception period and the effects of the 2C reception period, making it possible to improve gaming interest. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in a form that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(d) (In the example shown in FIG. 313(c), the integrated model image display IGd) can be displayed in a manner different from any of the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1st C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is also displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)). It has become something that can be done. In other words, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period is occurring. A sense of tension within the period can be suitably maintained.

Note that during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) is not displayed as the operation target display, and the integrated model image display IGa( (aspect 1) may be always displayed.

Further, prior to the occurrence of the third C acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the action target display (sample image display) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the 3C post-reception performance is started, the execution of the 3C post-reception performance will not start. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursory effect display is displayed and cases where the specific precursory effect display is not displayed at a certain point in time. On the other hand, if the action target display (sample image display) is in a hidden state at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts to be executed, a specific precursor will appear at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts to be executed. It is desirable to ensure that the performance display is always displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there are a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, during which reception of actions (operations) by players (reception validity determination) is allowed. A reception period is available. Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) starts execution, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) , for which multiple modes with different expectations are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see Figure 318), and within the 2C acceptance period, "player actions (operations)" If a reception validity determination is made with ``Reception Validity Judgment'' is made, the remaining time display ( For example, it is a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as modes for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. ) are not hidden and may not be in a displayed state (no matter what timing the reception is made, the frame image and gauge image will be in a hidden state at the time when the execution starts after reception) (See Figure 315). Note that the remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and its modes include multiple modes shown in FIGS. (Multiple modes) are available as a frame image to form the frame image.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" starts, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is decreased as time passes). 232 (a) to (d)), in which multiple modes with different expectations are prepared for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. Since there will be cases where the remaining time display is not visible, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception period is determined according to the timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made. At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started, the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is not displayed. (See Figure 318) and the remaining time display ((See Figures 232(a) to (d))) is hidden (Figure 317). ).

That is, from the player's perspective, the remaining time is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))" among multiple modes (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d)). When the reception is valid, it is possible to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" has started, which will improve the game's interest. It can certainly be said that it is preferable for the purpose of achieving this. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period), within its validity period (3C reception period), the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) Regardless of whether the execution mode is displayed in the "second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))" or the "second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))", it will be executed in the mode with high expectations. There is now a possibility (and even a possibility that it will be executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(b))", it will reduce the interest in the game. Since this is clear, it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 316(d))", if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed, there may be a decrease in gaming interest due to the post-reception performance being performed in a manner with low expectations. Since this can be suitably suppressed, it is desirable to continue displaying the remaining time (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players may not be able to see the post-reception performance. As an "excuse" when it is executed in a "low expected manner", the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time the post-reception production starts execution. It seems that there are some people who would like to keep this display state, and the remaining time is displayed (gauge image, frame Even if a post-reception effect (image) is displayed, some players do not want the post-reception effect to be executed in order to reduce their ``frustration'' when the post-reception effect is executed in a ``low-expected manner.'' It seems that some people would like the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) to be hidden so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time the game starts.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3rd C reception period occurs, the player can use the remaining Either start execution of the post-reception effect while the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed (see Figure 318), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be seen. Since it becomes possible to essentially select whether to start execution of the performance after acceptance in the current state (see FIG. 317), it is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)). , and integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. 316(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 315, integrated model image display IGb), and at any timing " Even if "reception validity determination" is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is started. Make sure it is always hidden. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 2nd C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, regarding the 3rd C reception period, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) will be performed as when the action (operation) was performed. (The above-mentioned automatic reception function may be enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, the remaining time will be displayed (the gauge image , frame image) are always displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts execution of the 3C post-reception performance without the player's knowledge, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be displayed during the 3C reception period. This makes it easier to recognize whether the image is being displayed in the same way as the image.

Further, when the "3rd C reception period" is targeted by the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the production mode and the like. However, regardless of when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the corresponding It is desirable that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) be always displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is executed.

However, for the 2nd C reception period, when no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is performed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (the automatic reception function described above should not be enabled).

Further, in the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment, when the 3rd C reception effect starts to be executed while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318). , in the case where the performance after receiving the 3rd C is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see Figure 317), The aspects of the effects (such as the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3rd C, the effect display UGC3 after receiving the 3rd C, and the effect sound after receiving the 3rd C) are the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the performance mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception performance and play the game.

Further, in the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment, when the 3rd C reception effect starts to be executed while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318). , or when the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see Figure 317), the display related to disappearance is the same. The mode (second extinction related display SKC2) is displayed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the reception has been properly completed during the third C reception period, regardless of the manner in which the presentation progresses.

In the above production example, apart from the 2nd C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, a 1C reception period is further prepared, and in the 1C reception period, the reception validity judgment that determines the action by the player as a valid action is made at any time. Even if it is done at the timing of , the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be hidden and will always continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment starts. I try to be that way. In other words, in this case, the 3rd C reception period combines both the effects of the 1C reception period and the effects of the 2C reception period, making it possible to improve gaming interest. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)). , and the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. 316(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 313(c), the integrated model image display IGd) can be displayed. . In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1st C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a form that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 316(b)). It can also be displayed using the image display IGa). In other words, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period is occurring. A sense of tension within the period can be suitably maintained.

Note that during the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) is not displayed as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), and the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(b) is not displayed. The integrated image display IGa (first aspect) may be always displayed.

Furthermore, prior to the occurrence of the third C reception period, a specific precursor effect display indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the 3rd C post-reception performance starts, the 3C post-reception performance will be executed. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursor effect display is displayed at the time of starting, and cases where the specific precursor effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden at the time when the execution of the 3C post-reception performance is started, the specified time will be specified at the time when the 3C post-reception performance is started. It is desirable that the foreshadowing effect display is always displayed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1C acceptance period and a 3C acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, if a "valid reception determination that an action (operation) by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, there will be multiple aspects with different expectations (see Figure 3). 317 (d1) to (h1), or high expectation mode shown in Figure 317 (d2) to (h2)), it is possible to perform the performance after receiving the 3C, and during the 1C reception period. 314 (d1) to (314(d1) to (314)). The performance after the 1C reception can be performed in either the low expectation mode shown in h1) or the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 314(d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is At the time when execution starts, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is in a hidden state. There are cases. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. , so that the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a hidden state. There is. The sample image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated sample image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d) are prepared as its mode.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action target display (sample image display) is visible, and the action target display (sample image display) is visible. ) may not be visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" before the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 310), the operation target display (sample image display) is set to a hidden state at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although not displayed, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see Figure 311), the action target The execution of the 3rd C post-reception effect is started while the display (sample image display) is being displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))" among the multiple modes, after the reception based on the "valid reception determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying the effect (the effect after the 3rd C reception corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) even after the execution has started, in order to improve the interest in the game. However, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that during its validity period (3C reception period), the sample image display is "the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 316(b))". (see Figure 316(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the sample image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the sample image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 316(d))", if the sample image display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the sample image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the sample image display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 316(d))", some players may think that the post-reception performance is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the sample image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3rd C reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the timing is within the 3C reception period. If the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is considered a valid action" is not made until Y arrives, at that point, the post-reception performance starts to be executed while the sample image display is not being displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to choose whether or not to start the performance after reception while the sample image display remains displayed", and the 1C During the reception period, players are not given the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the sample image display remains displayed, and the post-reception performance is always performed with the sample image display always displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, during the 3C reception period that grants such selection rights, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity determination), the reception validity determination will be made. During the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception performance as when the 1C reception period is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, actions (operations) by the player are not accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable that the same post-reception performance as when the reception validity determination was made is executed (the automatic performance function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned selection right, relief when an operation is forgotten will not be provided. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception performance itself will not be performed unless a decision such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, and a sense of tension is suitably imparted. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right will not be granted, but even if the reception is not completed in time during the 1C reception period, the post-reception performance will be executed properly. Because of this, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming. In this case, if you start the post-reception performance when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period while the sample image display continues to be displayed, you can also perform the post-reception performance even when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period. Therefore, it is possible to not grant the above-mentioned selection right.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1C acceptance period and a 3C acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, based on the reception validity determination being made, there are multiple modes with different expectations (see Figure 3). 317 (d1) to (h1), or high expectation mode shown in 317 (d2) to (h2)), it is possible to execute the performance after receiving the 3C, and during the 1C reception period. 314 (d1) to (314(d1) to (314)). The performance after the 1C reception can be executed in either the low expectation mode shown in h1) or the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 314 (d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is At the time when execution starts, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes, and the expected (For which multiple modes with different degrees are prepared) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) (prepared items) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state. The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d) are available.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible. images and gauge images) may not be made visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" before the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 310), the remaining time is displayed (the frame image and the gauge image are hidden) at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed. Although it is not displayed, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see Figure 311), the remaining While the time display (frame image and gauge image) is being displayed, the 3rd C reception effect is started to be executed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among the plurality of modes, "reception validity determination" is made. It is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started based on the ``3C reception period'' in order to improve gaming enjoyment. . However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" ( If this continues to be displayed even after the execution of the 3rd C post-reception performance (corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) has started, a decline in gaming interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period), within its validity period (3C reception period), the remaining time display is “low expectation first mode (Fig. 316(b)). (see Figure 316(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 316(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 316(d))", if the remaining time display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the remaining time without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the remaining time display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the remaining time is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 316(d))", some players may think that the post-reception performance is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the remaining time display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3rd C reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the timing is within the 3C reception period. If the "reception validity determination that makes the player's action a valid action" is not made until the arrival of Y, at that point, the post-reception performance starts to be executed even though the remaining time display is not displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the remaining time display remains displayed", and the 1C During the reception period, the player is not given the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance with the remaining time displayed, and the post-reception performance is always performed with the remaining time displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, during the 3C reception period that grants such selection rights, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity determination), the reception validity determination will be made. During the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception performance as when the 1C reception period is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, actions (operations) by the player are not accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable that the same post-reception performance as when the reception validity determination was made is executed (the automatic performance function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned selection right, relief when an operation is forgotten will not be provided. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception performance itself will not be performed unless a decision such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, and a sense of tension is suitably imparted. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right will not be granted, but even if the reception is not completed in time during the 1C reception period, the post-reception performance will be executed properly. Because of this, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming. In this case, if you start the post-reception performance when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period while the remaining time display continues to be displayed, you can also perform the post-reception performance even when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period. Therefore, it is possible to not grant the above-mentioned selection right.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1C acceptance period and a 3C acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific area. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the 1C reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, the first It is possible to execute the performance after receiving the 1C, and if a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. It is possible to perform the performance after receiving the third C in any of a plurality of different modes. Also, at the time when the execution of the 1st C post-reception performance and the 3rd C post-reception performance is started, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) ) may be displayed instead of hidden.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both cases where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period and the case where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination is Based on the fact that Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

In addition, as mentioned above, during the 3C reception period, depending on at which timing (first period, second period, etc.) the "reception validity determination" that determines the player's action as a valid action is made, the 3C reception period When the execution of the 3rd C post-reception effect corresponding to 3C is started, there are cases where the integrated image display IG is not hidden but is displayed, and cases where the integrated image display IG is not displayed (visible). In some cases, the patient may be unable to do so. On the other hand, during the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It has become so. By preparing the 1st C reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-mentioned 3C reception period, combined with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed, a sense of security can be achieved. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of performance, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

During the 1C reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is executed in a high expectation mode (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2)), the extinction EF performance (extinction related display) A specific mode (Fig. 314 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used during the 3C reception period appears, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 314 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear, but a different mode (Fig. 314 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) itself does not appear. According to this configuration, when the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if a highly anticipated effect is being executed, and the game It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the 1C reception period, the acceptance permission sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3C reception period, the reception permission sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound having the "one aspect" is output, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the 3C acceptance period having the above-mentioned two effects is occurring. By being able to do this, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the first C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "first aspect" be output as the aspect with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even in a situation where the acceptance acceptance sound is output in a manner with the lowest level of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1st C acceptance period and the 3rd C acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first C reception period occurs after the third C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable to allow the second C reception period to occur between the occurrence of the third C reception period and the occurrence of the first C reception period.

Further, it is preferable that the foreshadowing performance that is output when the first C reception period occurs and the foreshadowing performance that is output when the third C reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1st C acceptance period and the 3rd C acceptance period will occur using the foreshadowing effect.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, as the extinction EF effect (disappearance related display), a specific mode (for example, second extinction related display SKC2) will appear if there is a reception, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode ( For example, it is desirable that the third disappearance related display SKC3) appears or that no aspect appears at all. On the other hand, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect (extinction related display). In other words, the performance based on the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the performance in which the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the performance starts after reception) and the performance based on the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" During the 3C reception period, it may be difficult to select the performance type. Therefore, it can be said that failure to operate (end of reception period without reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an operation is forgotten during the 3rd C reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKC2) when the reception is made will not appear. It is now possible to appeal to players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to perform an operation, and from now on, it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that are likely to be forgotten during the 1C reception period. Despite this, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player intentionally made a gaming choice not to make the action. If you "advertise the fact that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may actually decrease. Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same aspect as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect (extinction related display).

In particular, in the 1C reception period according to the above production example, the mode of extinction EF production (disappearance related display) differs depending on the mode (expectation level) of the production after reception of 1C (see Fig. 314). reference). Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same appearance as when there was a reception is made to appear as the extinction EF effect (extinction related display), it will be possible to display the same appearance as when there was a reception. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) regarding the performance after receiving the first C, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

During the 1C reception period and 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed on the operation receiving section when the player's action is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display be executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image continue.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming them into the following configurations, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further modified as another reception period for different types of post-reception productions. You may prepare it. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period are at least the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period. We are prepared. Of these, during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is made executable based on the reception of the player's action (operation) (acceptance validity determination). As mentioned above, during the 2C reception period, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is not executed.

In this regard, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1C reception period (reception valid determination), the 1C post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception validity determination). The extinction EF performance (disappearance related display) is the same in the case where the 1C post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a high expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear). may be made executable. In addition, when applying such a configuration to the example shown in FIG. 314, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 314 (d1) to (h1), the modes shown in FIG. 314 (d2) Regardless of whether the mode shown in ~(h2)) appears, and whether or not the reception is made within the 1C reception period (the mode shown in FIG. 314(d3) to (g3)), It is desirable that one predetermined mode always appear as the extinction EF effect. In other words, the 1C reception period means that no matter when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the period (and even if the reception is not received), the period ends. After the completion, the display of the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "In which form the integrated image display IG (image image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if further different information is provided by the extinction EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, according to such a 1C reception period, any form (aspects shown in FIGS. 314(d1) to (h1), forms shown in FIGS. 314(d2) to (h2) 314 (d3) to (g3)), regardless of whether the mode) appears, and whether or not it is accepted within the 1C reception period (modes shown in FIGS. 314(d3) to (g3)), it is determined in advance as the extinction EF effect. The above-mentioned concerns can be resolved because the one aspect that is specified will always appear.

In addition, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3C reception period (reception valid determination), the 3C post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception valid determination). The extinction EF effect can be executed in different ways depending on whether it is executed in a manner with a low rate of appearance (proportion of appearance) or in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) after the 3C reception. You can do it like this. The 3C reception period has the above-mentioned two effects, and it can be said that it is positioned as a ``reception period with a high level of difficulty''. It is important for players to be able to obtain different performance information from both the image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the disappearing EF performance. It is desirable to provide a stimulating effect on the performance.

Note that when such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the disappearing EF effect that appears when no reception is made is the same as the disappearing EF effect that may appear when an acceptance is made. It is desirable that the EF performance be different from any of the multiple modes. This makes it possible to recognize that the reception has not been made, and the reception period is different from the effect of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2C reception period". It becomes possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

In addition, as mentioned above, in another example for the 3C reception period, if the reception is made during the "first period (first state)" within the 3C reception period, the integrated model image will be processed after the reception is made. The display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. In other words, in this case, information such as ``in which form was the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed after the acceptance was made'' is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information based on the disappearing EF performance (expectation information regarding the post-reception performance) in order to improve the game's interest.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 1C acceptance period (determined as valid acceptance), the extinction EF effect will be executed in a manner different from the manner in which it appears when the acceptance is made. You may also do so. This makes it possible to recognize that the application has not been received, and if the aspect cannot occur during the 3C reception period, the reception period is the "1C reception period" mentioned above. This makes it possible to suggest that the product did not have both the effect of the above-mentioned performance and the effect of the above-mentioned "Second C reception period".

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3C acceptance period (acceptance valid determination), the extinction EF effect will be executed in the same manner as it appears when the acceptance is accepted. You can.

Regarding these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one configuration (modified example) may be applied to the above-mentioned presentation example or another example thereof.

Next, a case will be described in which some of the above-mentioned modifications are applied to the above-mentioned presentation examples. That is, FIG. 319 is a modified example of "the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 1C acceptance period" shown in FIG. 314, and FIGS. (Acceptance in the 1st period) and Fig. 318 (Acceptance in the 2nd period) This is a modified example of “the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 3C acceptance period”. be. In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "examples of effects related to the 1st C reception period (Figs. 304 to 306, Figs. 313, 314)" and ``examples of effects related to the 3rd C reception period (Figs. 312, FIGS. 316 to 318)", and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples applicable to the "example of presentation related to the 1st C reception period" and the "example of presentation related to the 3rd C reception period". is similarly applicable.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 319, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance is expected based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the performance is performed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 319 (d1) to (h1)), and in a manner with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figure 319 (d1) to (h1)), The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in the same manner as when executed in FIGS. 319(d2) to (h2)). Here, the second extinction related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 319, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIG. 319 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishing EF effect, a mode that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (reception validity determination) is made to appear during the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third extinction related display SKC3 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (determined to be valid for reception) during the 3C reception period, based on the acceptance (determined to be valid for reception), When the 3C post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 320 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 321 (d3) to (h3)), Different modes depending on the case where the 3C post-reception performance is executed with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 320 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 321 (d4) to (h4)) The extinction EF effect is now executed. Here, when executed in a manner with low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 320 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 321 (d3) to (h3)), the extinction EF effect is 1 disappearance related display SKC1 is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 320 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 321 (d4) to (h4)) A second extinction related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect. As mentioned above, Figures 320 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 320 (d2) to (h2) show the effects that appear when the acceptance is made in the first period of the 3C acceptance period according to the modification. The details of the progress are shown in Figures 321 (d3) to (h3) and Figures 321 (d4) to (h4) when the application is accepted in the second period within the 3C acceptance period for the modification. This shows the progress of the production as it appears in .

Furthermore, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance valid determination) during the 3C acceptance period (see FIGS. 321 (d5) to (g5)) ) appears as a disappearing EF effect that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 321(d5) to (g5), since the first extinction related display SKC1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3C reception period ( 321 (d3) to (h3) (if the reception was accepted in the first period, the performance progress shown in FIG. 320 (d1) to (h1)). be able to recognize that it has occurred. On the other hand, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (determined as valid reception) during the 3C reception period, and the second extinction related display SKC2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3C reception period Suppose that the player's action (operation) is accepted (determined as valid acceptance) in , the presentation progresses as shown in FIG. 321 (d4) to (h4) (if it is accepted in the first period, ) to (h2)) can be recognized as occurring.

In the 1C reception period according to such a modification, as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception performance (after 3C reception) corresponding to the above 3C reception period according to the modification ``Second disappearance related display SKC2'' that is displayed when the performance) is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used. That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period according to the modified example, it is possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner as long as the reception is completed, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the "second extinction-related display SKC2." For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period according to the modified example, the after-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKC1" that is displayed when It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception is in a state during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "3rd disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). It is intended to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed in connection with the third C reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception period is limited to the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the above-mentioned "1C reception period." It becomes possible to suggest that it was not a combination of both the presentation and the performance of the ``2C reception period''.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C acceptance period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 1C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Note that even in the 3C reception period according to this modification, the player must receive the request before the timing tV2 when a state (3C reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3C reception period). Even if there is an action (operation) in accordance with ), a configuration according to the above-mentioned separate example, which makes it possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3C reception period. It is possible to apply the following.

In the 3rd C reception period according to the above modification, if a low expectation mode appears as a performance after the 3rd C reception (see Figure 320 (d1) to (h1) or Figure 321 (d3) to (h3)), it disappears. Although the first extinction related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the extinction EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1C reception period according to the above modification, a specific mode appears when there is a reception as a disappearing EF effect (Fig. 319 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 319 (d2) to (h2)). Although, when there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode appears (FIG. 319 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no reception.

In addition, in the first C reception period according to the above modification, when there is a reception, the second extinction related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (extinction EF effect), but this is different from the second extinction related display SKC2. It may also be executed in a different manner. For example, even if it is executed in the first disappearance related display SKC1, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1st C reception period or the 3C reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

[Omen stock performance]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception performance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) is caused depending on the type of reception period that has occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes a "motion detection means (such as a sensor) that detects a motion (operation) by a player" and a "detection information storage means (peripheral control) that stores information detected by the motion detection means". (RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.)" and "acceptance period can be generated, and a reception validity determination is made to determine whether a player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. If it is done within the reception period, the reception-related performance execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) that can execute the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period. There is.

Furthermore, during the acceptance period, an action target display indicating which "target of the player's action" is to be displayed can be displayed. Such an action object display may be displayed, for example, as a model image display in which an object (operating means) that is the object of an action by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this performance example is displayed as a "simulation image display" that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of modes with different expectations.

Furthermore, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, multiple aspects (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, the level of expectation, and the type of operation means) are used as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. It is intended to be implemented in one of these ways. Different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, in the event that a reception period occurs, a precursor effect that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that the reception period will occur) can be performed before this period. There is. The foreshadowing performance is, for example, performed by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) at a predetermined timing are not included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). However, it is desirable (though not necessarily required) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that may occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is permitted. Since the post-display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated, the reception permission state (validity period) is The performance itself is poor, and there are concerns that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the "operation (movement) by the player" such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001". It is not limited to things that are directly operated by the player (pressing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by touch sensors, and "game movements within a specific space" that can be detected by non-contact sensors. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided regarding acceptance of "operations (movements) by players". Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to reduce the The configurations described as (desirable) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods, and a specific effect display can be displayed as a precursor effect. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to the configuration 1-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. Further, the "specific effect display" according to the configuration 1-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. You can.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if a player performs a movement while a specific performance display is being displayed, the movement is detected by the movement detection means (sensor, etc.), and the movement is detected. The information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.), and based on the stored detection information, the reception validity determination that determines that the player's action is a valid action is made as specified above. We make sure that it may be done within the acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much momentum while the premonitory performance (specific performance display) is being executed, the post-acceptance performance can be started using this as an opportunity. It has become possible to maintain the interest in gaming through such flexible performances.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-C", the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when a specific effect display is being displayed. Even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, within the specific acceptance period, the game is played based on the detected information stored by the detected information storage means before the specific acceptance period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed. In some cases, a reception validity determination is made that makes the action by the person a valid operation (stock reception performance), and if the reception validity determination is made, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, A specific effect display may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the precursor effect" before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the detection of the action is performed appropriately. , the detection information may be stored and retained until the specific acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player may not perform the action again after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance. In addition, at this time, when the specific reception period has not yet occurred (the specific production display is being displayed) and the performance starts to be executed after reception due to an excessive movement (operation), Since the performance display is not hidden but is displayed, the relevant post-reception performance can be detected by the action performed by the player while the specific performance display is being displayed. This makes it possible to suitably recognize that the execution has started based on the information).

[Configuration 2-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first sign corresponding to the first reception period is prepared. In the performance, the first performance display is displayed, and in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second reception period, the second performance display can be displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the opposite second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" in other configurations. It may mean a different effect display (for example, a specific effect display, etc.) from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to other configurations. Good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first effect display or the second effect display is being displayed, the above action will not be performed. Detected by the detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and based on the stored detection information, the acceptance validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made during the first reception period or the second reception period. Since the action may be made within the reception period, even if the player moves with too much force while the precursor effect (first effect display or second effect display) is being executed, Taking this as an opportunity, it has become possible to start performances after reception, and it is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained through such flexible performances.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. In both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. To make it possible to determine whether an action by a player is a valid action based on information (stock reception performance). Then, a game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first reception period, before the first reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If a reception validity determination is made in which the action by the person is a valid action, at least a portion of the above-mentioned simulated image display is always displayed at the time when execution of the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do it like this. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If it is determined that the reception is valid and that the action by the player is a valid operation, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, even a part of the sample image display will not be displayed. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first reception period or the second reception period Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, in the event that an action (operation) is performed with excessive force before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the above-mentioned sample image display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the second reception period occurs, the above sample image Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move or not.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. In both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. To make it possible to determine whether an action by a player is a valid action based on information. Then, a game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first reception period, before the first reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If a reception validity determination is made in which the action by the person is a valid operation, at least a portion of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do it like this. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If it is determined that the reception is valid and that the action by the player is a valid operation, the remaining time display will not be displayed even in part at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first reception period or the second reception period Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if you perform an action (operation) with too much momentum before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the remaining time display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the second reception period occurs, the remaining time will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on this starts to be executed. Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move.

Note that "the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 2-C, but also refers to a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations. That's fine. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 3-C]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to Configuration 3-C is only a name used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no movement by the player is detected during the specified acceptance period, even if the above-mentioned acceptance validity judgment is made and the acceptance corresponding to the specified acceptance period is Since performances are sometimes performed, it is expected that the game's interest can be suitably maintained through such flexible performances.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, a specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs, Even when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific reception period and when the specific effect display is being displayed is used. (stock reception performance), and when the reception is determined to be valid, the sample image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts Make sure it's not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts execution. , so that a sample image display may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, if a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" is made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the sample image display is being displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production starts, it is possible to determine whether or not it is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific production display is being displayed. At times, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means.

Note that the "specific effect display" according to the configuration 3-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" related to other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" related to other configurations. You can.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, a specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs, Even when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific reception period and when the specific effect display is being displayed is used. (stock reception effect), and if the reception is judged to be valid, the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment starts. Make sure it's not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts execution. , the remaining time may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, if a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" is made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production starts, it is possible to determine whether or not it is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific production display is being displayed. At times, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means.

Note that "the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 3-C, but also refers to a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations. That's fine. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 4-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, it is possible to execute the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period, and when the second reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detecting means within the second reception period, the second post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the performance after the first reception starts without the movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period. As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 4-C", the timing at which the execution of the performance after the first reception starts without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period. Therefore, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and at the first timing, the above reception is valid based on the movement (detection information) by the player detected before the first reception period occurs. When the judgment is made within the first reception period, the execution of the performance after the first reception starts (stock reception performance)", and at the second timing, "the player The execution of the first post-reception performance may be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing) without detecting any operation by the user.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 4-C", in the second reception period, "the above-mentioned It is possible to make the execution of the second post-reception effect start when the reception validity determination is made within the second reception period (stock reception effect), but it is also possible to Also, it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the second post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting any action by the player.

If both of these configurations are provided, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, the reception period is determined based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs. The above-mentioned acceptance validity determination can be made within the process (stock reception presentation), thereby making it possible to start executing the post-reception presentation. Moreover, during the first reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, a post-reception performance will be executed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. From now on, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance will not be executed as a relief, so a sense of tension is suitably imparted. You will be able to do this.

[Configuration 5-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. The specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 5-C is only a name used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are the timings at which the performance after the specific reception is started without the movement of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the specific reception period. Since this has been done, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-C", when the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing, the above-mentioned sample image display is Although not displayed, if the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing, the above-mentioned sample image display may be displayed at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-C", when the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started at the first timing, the remaining time display is Although not displayed, when the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance is started. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 5-C", a specific effect display is displayed as a precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing. When the specific post-reception performance is started, the specific performance display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance is started, but when the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing, the specific post-reception performance is not started. The specific effect display may not be displayed at the time of the display. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

Note that "the sample image display, the remaining time display, and the specific effect display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 5-C, but also includes the sample image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display in other configurations. It is sufficient if the effect display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

Further, the "specific effect display" related to the configuration 5-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. You can.

[Configuration 6-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. A specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 6-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timings at which the performance after the specific reception is started without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period are at least the first timing and the second timing. I try to make sure that there is. Furthermore, if the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started at a second timing without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detecting means within the specific acceptance period, an extinguished EF display can be displayed, and the extinguished EF display can be displayed. When the display is displayed, the operation promotion display is made difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it possible to appropriately recognize that the specific acceptance period has ended.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 6-C", the execution of the above-mentioned post-specific reception performance is started at the first timing without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specified reception period. Although the extinguished EF display can be displayed even when the extinguished EF display is displayed, a display different from the operation promotion display may be made difficult to visually recognize when the extinguished EF display is displayed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

In this case, the disappearing EF display is the same whether it appears when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed at the first timing or when it appears when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed at the second timing. It may also be displayed as an image display. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the execution is being executed at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearing EF display. It is now expected that players will be able to focus their attention on the object that is being ignored.

[Configuration 7-C]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 7-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific acceptance period occurs, the specific post-acceptance production corresponding to the specific acceptance period is performed without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specific acceptance period. There are cases in which the performance is executed, and there are cases in which the performance after the specific reception is not executed when the specific reception period ends without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detecting means within the specific reception period. This makes it possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the specific reception period occurs.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 7-C", it is possible to generate a predetermined reception period that is different from the specific reception period, and if the predetermined reception period occurs, the player must It is desirable that the corresponding predetermined post-reception effect is always executed even if the movement is not detected by the movement detecting means. Note that the "predetermined acceptance period" according to the configuration 7-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "acceptance period" of other configurations.

In other words, in this case, when the specific reception period occurs, a sense of tension is suitably imparted, such as, ``If the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the reception period, the post-reception performance may not occur.'' However, when a predetermined reception period occurs, a corresponding post-reception performance will always occur, so it is expected to improve gaming interest.

[Configuration 8-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding It is possible to perform the first precursor performance before the first reception period occurs, and if the second reception period occurs, the second precursor performance can be executed before the second reception period occurs. I decided to do so. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first omen effect" and the "second omen effect" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same foreshadowing performance as the "first omen performance (or the opposite second omen performance)" and the "second omen performance (or the opposite first omen performance)" for other configurations. Alternatively, the "first omen effect" and the "second omen effect" according to other configurations may mean a different omen effect (for example, a specific omen effect).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period in which the first effect display (first precursor effect) is displayed, when a movement is performed by a player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means. A first period in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the first reception period, and even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when the player performs a motion. A second period is included in which the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of tension.

Also, as will be described later, after the motion detection means detects the motion within the second period of the period during which the first effect display is displayed, the first reception is performed without any new detection by the motion detection means. Even when the period ends, the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed as the above-mentioned post-reception performance. In other words, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected in the second period instead of the first period during which the first precursor effect (first effect display) is being performed, the player's Since it becomes possible to generate a performance after reception without newly detecting a motion, it is expected that a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-C", the first period and the second period during which the first effect display is displayed are both longer than the first reception period occurs. It may be set to be the previous period. In other words, in this case, a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the first reception period based on detection information obtained before the first reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the first reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the first reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Moreover, even if the player's action is detected during the second period instead of the first period, as a result of the player's action (operation) being carried out with excessive force before the first reception period occurs, the player's Since it becomes possible to generate a performance after reception without newly detecting a motion, it is expected that a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

[Configuration 9-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a specific performance display is displayed in a precursory performance corresponding to the specific reception period. I'm trying to make it possible. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 9-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. Further, the "specific effect display" related to the configuration 9-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. You can.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during a period in which a specific effect display is displayed, when a movement is performed by a player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information by the movement detection means is The first period during which the reception is determined to be valid within the specific reception period, and even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means is Since the second period, which is not subjected to the reception validity determination, is included within the specific reception period, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-C", the first period and the second period are periods before the specific reception period, and a specific effect display is not displayed. It may also be possible to include both periods. In other words, in this case, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specific reception period occurs, the player will be able to accept the action without redoing the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the aftereffects. However, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the specific reception period occurs, the post-reception effect will not necessarily be executed (second period), which will reduce the feeling of tension. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

[Configuration 10-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first sign corresponding to the first reception period is prepared. In the performance, the first performance display is displayed, and in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second reception period, the second performance display can be displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the opposite second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" in other configurations. It may mean a different effect display (for example, a specific effect display, etc.) from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to other configurations. Good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both the period in which the first performance display (first precursor performance) is executed and the period in which the second performance display (second precursor performance) is executed, the “player ``A pre-operation permissible period during which when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means and the information detected by the movement detection means is used to determine the validity of the reception within the reception period.'' "Pre-action non-permissible period during which, even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the movement is performed, the information detected by the movement detection means is not used for determining the validity of the reception within the reception period." Since this is included, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 10-C", both the "pre-operation permissible period" and the "pre-operation non-permissible period" occur during the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period). The period may be earlier than the timing when In other words, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the reception period (the first reception period or the second reception period), the "valid reception judgment that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the reception period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with excessive force before the reception period occurs, the player may not be able to perform the operation after the reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the performance after reception without having to redo the action. However, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs, the post-reception performance will not necessarily be executed. (pre-motion non-permissible period), it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 11-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. The specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 11-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period. Therefore, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 11-C", the timing at which the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period is At least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and at the first timing, "the reception validity determination is made based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the specific reception period occurs." The execution of the specific post-reception performance is started when the action is performed within the specific reception period (stock reception performance), and at the second timing, any action by the player is detected, including before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Instead, execution of the specific post-reception performance may be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing). In other words, in this case, ``the above reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception effect)'', and this This makes it possible to start executing the performance after a specific reception. Moreover, during the specific reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the specific post-reception performance will be executed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing). Because of this, you will be able to take on the challenge of "stock reception production" with confidence.

[Configuration 12-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means within the first reception period, the corresponding first reception performance can be executed, and if the second reception period occurs, the second reception period Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means, the corresponding second post-reception performance can be executed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first post-reception performance is performed when the player's movement is executed without being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, and when the player's movement is performed within the first reception period without being detected by the movement detection means. Since the execution time is the same regardless of whether the motion is executed based on what has been detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

Furthermore, as will be described later, if the said "Configuration 12-C" is adopted, the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) acquired before the occurrence of the first reception period is within the first reception period. By being subjected to the above-mentioned reception validity determination in , the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, and the performance after the first reception can be executed, and the second reception period By using the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained before the occurrence of the above-described reception validity determination within the second reception period, the player's movement within the second reception period is The second post-reception performance may be made executable without being detected by the motion detection means. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs, the player will not be able to complete the first reception period or the second reception period. After the second reception period occurs, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance without having to repeat the operation.

[Configuration 13-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a precursor performance suggesting that a player will be given an opportunity to perform an action, there are cases in which a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is output, and a case in which a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is output. It is arranged so that there may be cases where a precursor effect sound corresponding to the precursor effect is not output. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when giving the player an opportunity to perform a movement.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 13-C", if a specific precursor effect sound is output before the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, the reception While there are at least a first timing and a second timing as timings at which the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the period, there are at least a first timing and a second timing. In contrast, when no foreshadowing effect sound is output before the acceptance period during which a movement opportunity is granted occurs, the player's movement within the reception period is handled without being detected by the movement detection means. There may be a case where there is at least a first timing and a second timing as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception performance is started, and a case where there is no second timing and there is at least the first timing. That is, in this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be more suitably enhanced when the precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is not output.

[Other configurations]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, there is an acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) in which it is permitted to make an acceptance validation determination that a movement by a player is a valid movement based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. If this occurs, an integrated model image display (see Fig. 232 ), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the display after acceptance (display change) is executed. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the display can be performed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

Note that among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permission state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). You may also do so. In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, in which of multiple modes including special modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) A determination is made as to whether the "display" should be displayed, and the "integrated image display" will be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception performances), at least a 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) and a 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance) are prepared.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 322 to 334. Note that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be implemented as either the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) or the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 321. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 322 to 324 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 1D is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1D reception period (1D reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 328 to 331 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 1D reception period (1D reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1D variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 1D variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1D variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1D variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 328(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st D variation pattern" selected above. Become.

However, in the performance related to the "1st D fluctuation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 322(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tW2 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) when the 1D time has elapsed after the start of the production has arrived, the above-mentioned 1D reception period (valid period) occurs (“the situation shown in FIG. 329(d)”). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, the 1D post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 1D acceptance period occurs, in relation to this, an acceptance period (validity period) will occur soon. A precursory effect display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), an operation object display (simulation image display), a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, an operation object display (simulation image display) and the remaining time. An extinguishment-related display (extinction EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the operation target display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 322(b) and FIG. Execution of "1D portent effect display ZEC" is started. As will be described later, the "1D portent effect display ZEC" according to this example is the "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 328(b))" and the "1D portent effect display ZEC-1". This is executed by sequentially displaying "1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 328(c))" which makes it difficult to visually recognize "." However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided. In this example, as shown in FIG. 322(d), when the "1D omen effect display ZEC" is executed, the effect sound (omen effect sound) corresponding to the "1D omen effect display ZEC" is output. be done.

Furthermore, the "1D omen effect display ZEC" according to this example is hidden at the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. There may be.

As will be described later, in the 1D reception period according to this embodiment, the player performs an action (for example, presses a button) on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the 1D reception period occurs. Even if an operation) is performed, the operation (operation) is detected by the operation detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detection information is stored in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c or the corresponding Processing steps, etc.) may be stored in memory even when the 1st D reception period occurs, and may be used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period (when stock reception performance is executed). It has become.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 322 and 323, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 1D reception period occurs, that is, a case in which detection information obtained before the 1D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period.

More specifically, if the 1D reception period occurs at timing tW2 without the stock reception effect being performed, the effect display according to this example is as shown in FIGS. 322(b) and 329(d) In the device 1600 (first presentation device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. Even if the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, the gauge image) can appear at the timing tW2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the 1D reception period) occurs, Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tW2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. In addition, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed only when the reception (reception valid determination) is made within the 1D reception period, or when the reception (reception valid judgment) It is hidden when the 1D reception period ends without any determination (determination) being made. The 1D reception period according to this example ends when timing tW3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 322(a)).

Furthermore, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and 232(d) )). 329 to 331 correspond to the case where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 232(d)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 232(a)", the integrated model image shown in FIGS. 329 to 331 The display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is simply changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)"; I will omit it here. In addition, even during the 1D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and 232(c). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 322 shows that a movement by the player is detected within such a 1D reception period, and based on the detection information, the "reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is a valid movement" is made at timing tW2a. This assumes that this is the case. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 322(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tW2a (the reception was determined to be valid), the 1D reception period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period is started.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1) to FIG. 330(i1))" is as a post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIGS. 330(e2) to 330(i2)") is This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1D post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a ``1D post-reception performance display'' using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a ``1D post-reception performance display'' using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the ``1D post-reception specific performance'' using the 3rd stage performance device (speaker) and the 1D post-reception performance sound using the 3rd performance device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three production devices), but among these production devices, integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) on which is displayed, the timing at which the "first effect display after reception" as the 1D post-reception effect starts to be executed is delayed compared to other effect devices. As a result, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" can be maintained even after the application has been accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 330 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 232 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 322(b) and FIG. 330(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tW2a at which the first D acceptance period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tW2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, remaining time display)". overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tW2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Since it becomes possible to do this, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 330 (e1) to (i1)) appear as the corresponding post-reception performances (1D post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 330 (e1) to (i1)). Different forms of extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) appear depending on the cases in which (e2) to (i2) in FIG. 330 appear. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 330(f1) and (f2), the situation is such that the "1D effect display after reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the extinction-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is “first extinction-related display SKD1” or “second extinction-related display SKD2”, check whether it is displayed as “first extinction-related display SKD1” or “second extinction-related display SKD2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1D post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 322(b), FIG. When the timing tW2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which mode) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the reception of the action by the player within the 1D reception period as a performance after reception. The execution of "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to "I1 (Fig. 330(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 330( g1), the first mode (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. 330 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. It has become so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "first D reception effect display UGD1 ( "1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1" or "1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1D reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.Also, Since the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1D reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will automatically transition to the ``1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)''. (after timing tW2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and the The "integrated image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)". As a result, even if the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 322(b) and FIG. 330(h1) or (h2), the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 322(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance Related Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is good, "1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1 (1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGD1-2). Therefore, the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIG. 330) corresponding to the 1D reception period, when a reception is made within the 1D reception period and the "1D post-reception production display UGD1" is executed, the "1D post-reception production display UGD1" is executed. The background image is switched before and after "Display UGD1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 330(e) and 330(f) where the background image is not switched (timings tW2a to tW2b shown in FIG. 322), the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in the first performance device), the "1D post-reception performance display UGC1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, "1D post-reception production display UGD1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed ( It was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tW2c) than timing tW2b), but when the "extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed (timing tW2b). The display may be started at the same time as (timing tW2b).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 330, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the production display device 1600 (first production device) according to this example, when the 1D reception period occurs, the display screen (production display device) is displayed within a limited time and on a limited display screen (production display device). Various displays are displayed within the display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tW2c) of the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set to be earlier than the received timing tW2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 322(b) and 322(c), Start execution of the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tW2a when the reception is received in the 1D reception period, but only a part of the 1D post-reception performance (the 1D post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 1D post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tW2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to "I1 (Fig. 330(e1) to (i1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 330(e1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned 1D post-reception specific presentation UTD1 (1D reception) corresponding to the 1D reception period. As the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UTD1), it precedes the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to "I2 (Fig. 330(e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 330( e2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1D post-reception specific presentation UTD1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1D reception period. As the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1), the 1D post-reception production using the above first production device (1D post-reception production display UGD1-2) Execution is started prior to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 329(d), in addition to the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the first D A reception period effect (display of a samurai character and a princess character) indicating that the reception period has occurred is executed. Regarding the performance within the acceptance period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device), the "integrated image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown). 329(d)) and the highly anticipated mode (see FIG. 329(d)).

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1D acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG '' continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the production within the reception period (display of samurai characters and princess characters) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is performed continuously from before the 1D reception period occurs. This also functions as a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the first D reception period will occur. However, the reception period presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) and the omen presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) may be executed as different presentations.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested depending on which of the "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-1" and "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-2" appears as the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1. For example, the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1 is provided with only "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-2", and the expectation level (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is determined depending on whether or not the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1 appears. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when the "1st D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "1st D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 322(d) The output of the acceptance permission sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than the above. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1D reception period is audibly output across the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs, and while the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the 1D reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 304(d), the output of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one (or both) of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tW2 when the first D acceptance period occurs or after that time.

Then, during the 1D reception period, if the player accepts an action (reception is valid) while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are being audibly output, the acceptance is Based on what has been done, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 322(d), the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations (not shown). It is desirable to have a case where the process is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner (as shown in FIG. 329(d)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed as valid (judgment of validity), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when to make the acceptance (judgment of validity of reception) within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is audibly output, the reception permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the first D post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1D post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (audible output), and it is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1D reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the 1D post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1," such 1D post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1D post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to "I1 (Fig. 330(e1) to (i1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to “I2 (Fig. 330(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the 1D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were respectively output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output. Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1D reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 1D post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1) to (i1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 329(d) to "I2 (Fig. 330(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1D reception period (regardless of the level of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize the content of the presentation, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after reception.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 323, "i1 (FIG. 330 (e3) to (i3))" from FIG. The example in which the performance progresses to ``i4))'' is based on the assumption that no movement (operation) is performed by the player within the 1D acceptance period and acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 323, after the 1D acceptance period occurs, the timing tW3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (acceptance validity determination). However, in the 1D reception period according to this example, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player and reception (reception validity determination) is not made within the 1D reception period, the above-mentioned timing tW3 arrives. Based on this, the same post-reception performance (here, 1D post-reception performance) as when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period is generated.

For example, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "i1 (FIG. 330(e3) to (i3))" means that if the reception is validly determined within the 1D reception period, then the direction shown in FIG. ) to "I1 (Figure 330 (e1) to (i1))" (low expectations), but in reality, the reception was not determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as "remaining time display" in the integrated image display IG is "0", so that "I1 (Fig. 330 (e1) to (i1))" is However, other than that, as shown in Figures 330 (e3) to (i3), the performance is basically the same as in the case of "I1 (Figure 330 (e1) to (i1))". progress will be made.

In addition, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "i2 (FIG. 330(e4) to (i4))" means that if the reception is validly determined within the 1D reception period, then FIG. 329(d) ) to "I2 (Fig. 330 (e2) to (i2))" (high expectations), but in reality, the reception was not determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as "remaining time display" in the integrated image display IG is "0", so that "I2 (Fig. 330 (e2) to (i2))" is However, other than that, as shown in Figures 330 (e4) to (i4), the performance is basically the same as in the case of "I2 (Figure 330 (e2) to (i2))". progress will be made.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are two cases in which the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity determination being made within the 1D reception period, and a case in which the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. In the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without being performed, the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) The execution time for each is set to be different from each other. In this example, if the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without a reception validity determination being made within the 1D reception period, it is assumed that the reception validity determination has been made within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is set to be shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the 1D reception period. The system encourages players to do the following: However, if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the timing tW3 having not been determined to be valid within the 1D reception period, it will be based on the fact that the reception has been determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 324 shows that as a result of the player performing an action (for example, a pressing operation) on the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) before the first D acceptance period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and retained in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the corresponding 1D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above reception validity determination is performed within the 1D reception period (in the case where the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display (here, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) indicating that an opportunity will be given is made executable. In this regard, during the period in which the 1D portent effect display ZEC is executed,
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if a movement is performed by a player and the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. A second period (non-stock period) is now included.

In addition, the "1st D portent effect display ZEC" according to this example corresponds to the "1st period (stock period)" as shown in FIGS. 324 and 328 (b) and (c). "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 328(b))" and "1D portent effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 328(c))" corresponding to the "second period (non-stock period)" mentioned above. ” are displayed one after another. That is, in this case, the operation by the player is performed within the period in which "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 328(b))" is executed out of the period in which "1D portent effect display ZEC" is executed. When detected, this will be used for the reception validity determination described above within the 1D reception period, but within the period in which "1D portent effect display ZEC-2 (see Figure 328(c))" is executed. When a movement by the player is detected in , this is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the 1D reception period.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 324, an action is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" of the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means. This is based on the assumption that it has been detected.

However, the "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action" is permitted only within the 1D reception period. Therefore, even if a player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at that point in time (the point in time when the 1D acceptance period has not yet occurred) ``Reception validity determination'' is never made. That is, the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and held even at the timing tW2 when the 1D acceptance period occurs. Then, at timing tW2 (more precisely, determination timing tW2A that arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tW2 occurs), the "reception validity determination" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether or not it is in a situation where it should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)") " A "valid reception judgment" will be made (stock reception performance). Furthermore, based on the determination that the reception is valid, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period is terminated. ) will start executing.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action within the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at the time of the detection, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is The program will not be terminated midway, nor will the corresponding precursor sound effects be interrupted. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( No reaction is caused in the first production device), and the acceptance permission sound does not stop being output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs a movement in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned movement detection. The performance is developed in the same manner whether the motion is detected by the motion detection means or not detected by the motion detection means.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (when the stock reception performance is executed), Also, as shown in FIGS. 324 and 331, basically, the production will proceed in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the effect changes from FIG. (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), and when the production progresses from Fig. 328(c) to "J2 (Fig. 331 (e6) to (i6)") (a post-reception production). 322 and 330 (e1) to () in the first presentation device, second presentation device, and third presentation device. The effect will be executed as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 330(e2) to (i2).

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as in the case shown in FIG. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the point in time when the production started after the 1D reception, the "integrated model image display IG" is in the display state, and the integrated model image display IG is visually recognized. I won't make it difficult either.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 331 (e5) and (e6), the operation by the player is not accepted. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the 1D post-reception effect was started (the time when the 1D post-reception effect was started in response to the reception), the "1D omen effect display ZEC" was not hidden. I keep it in the displayed state. In other words, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, which is before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period ( It becomes possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception has been determined to be valid.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 324(b) and FIG. 331(f5) or (f6), the timing tW2 (more precisely, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tW2A) (when timing tW2B arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG (image image display) is started. As the 1D post-reception performance, modes with low expectations (Fig. 331 (e5) to (i5)) appear, and modes with high expectations (Fig. 331 (e6) to (i6)) appear, and disappear. It is also similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 322 and 330 that different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) appear as related displays.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as shown in FIG. The display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2) is displayed in such a way that not only the integrated model image display IG (the model image display) but also the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" are difficult to see.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), while the ``1D precursor effect display ZEC'' is being displayed, the ``extinction related display (extinction EF effect)'' is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the "1D portent effect display ZEC" is to continue to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the "1D portent effect display ZEC" is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (an example in which the stock reception performance is executed), when timing tW2C arrives within the period in which the disappearance related display appears, as shown in FIG. 331 (g5) or (g6), , "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of a movement by the player within the 1D reception period. starts running. An example in which the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" progresses from Fig. 328(c) to "J1 (Fig. 331 (e5) to (i5))" 328 (c) to "J2 (Fig. 331 (e6) to (i6))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance) ) are executed in mutually different modes (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1, 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2), which is similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 322 and 330.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), when the timing tW2C arrives, the "1D precursor performance display ZEC" is hidden. ing.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (an example in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), "1D post reception performance display UGD1 (1D post reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post reception performance display UGD1-1 or After the display related to "Effect display UGD1-2)" is started, as shown in FIG. 324(b) and FIG. 331 (h5) or (h6), 1D reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display", "integration "Study image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 324(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance Related Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is good, "1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1 (1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" will now be displayed.

Note that also in the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 (examples in which the stock reception performance is executed), the second performance device is activated based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid). The 1D post-reception performance (specific performance after 1D reception) and the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance sound) using the 3rd performance device were created using the 1D post-reception performance using the above-mentioned first performance device. The execution may be started prior to the production (production display after 1D reception), or the player's action may be accepted while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output (reception is enabled). Based on the determination (judgment), the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state is ended midway).

However, regarding the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, one (or both) of them may be made to start outputting at timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs or after that. is as described above. When such a configuration is adopted, the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed) are different from the examples shown in FIGS. 322 and 330 (examples accepted within the reception period). Unlike the above case, the output of the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound may not be started.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 or FIG. In the example case (in the case of an example in which the reception is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period), the 1D reception is executed based on the reception being determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. The execution times of post effects (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) are made to be different from each other. In this example, if the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see FIGS. 324 and 331), within the 1D reception period, The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is made shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 322 and 330). The player is encouraged to play the game so that the player's operation is detected within the 1D acceptance period. However, if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see Figures 324 and 331), the information obtained within the 1D reception period is The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detected information (see FIGS. 322 and 330).

Furthermore, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 (in the case of an example in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), in the case of the example shown in FIG. ), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) will be made to differ from each other.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D portent performance display ZEC" is hidden is determined by the 1D post-reception performance. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing tW2C at which the display UGD1 starts executing, the timing does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, "1D portent effect display ZEC" is displayed at the same timing as "integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))" (timing after timing tW2C). It may also be hidden.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 (examples in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), "reception is valid" based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs. If the "judgment" is made, at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the "reception validity judgment" is made, the 1D portent effect display SKC-2 (second period ) is displayed, but instead of this, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-1 that appeared when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. . That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest at which timing the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detected information.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the 1D omen effect display ZEC is executed is
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if a movement is performed by a player and the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) was made to occur sequentially, but instead, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. You can.

Furthermore, in the above example, the content of the production as the 1D omen production display ZEC was made to be different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the content of the production is the same. (continued over two periods). Further, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed.

By the way, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(d), but in the form shown in FIG. 232(a). As mentioned above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. It was predetermined (predetermined in advance based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) would be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a). Nevertheless, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the 1D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs, the situation shown in FIG. 331 described above will occur. The only difference is the aspect of the ``integrated image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image)'' than when the ``integrated image display IG'' appears, and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner. In other words, when the situation shown in FIG. 331 described above appears, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d). This corresponds to the case where has been predetermined (predetermined based on the result of jackpot determination).

According to such a configuration, even if the above-described stock reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display IG) It becomes possible to suitably suggest which mode was planned to appear (image display, frame image, gauge image).

FIGS. 325 to 327 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2D is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and a 2D reception period (2D reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 332 to 335 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variable pattern in which a 2D reception period (2D reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second D fluctuation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2D variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2D variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 332(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the ``2nd D fluctuation pattern'' selected above. Become.

In addition, in the performance related to the "2nd D fluctuation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 325(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tX2 (for example, the timing in the non-reach state) has arrived when the 2D time has elapsed since the production started (when the condition 2D is satisfied), the "reception regarding the production after the 2D reception" is The permissible second D reception period (validity period) may be generated ("situation shown in FIG. 333(d)"), or if a predetermined result is obtained as a performance judgment (advance judgment). The above-mentioned 2D reception period (valid period) may be generated. In any case, if the action by the player is accepted within the 2D reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2D post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 2D acceptance period occurs, in relation to this, an acceptance period (validity period) will occur soon. A precursory effect display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), an operation object display (simulation image display), a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, an operation object display (simulation image display) and the remaining time. An extinguishment-related display (extinction EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the operation target display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, as shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. Execution of "2nd D portent effect display ZED" is started. The "2D omen effect display ZED" according to this example is hidden at timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. Good too. In this example, as shown in FIG. 325(d), when the "2nd D portent effect display ZED" is executed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZED" is executed, the corresponding The effect sound (precursor effect sound) corresponding to "2D omen effect display ZED" is not output.

Also, as will be described later, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, as well as the above-mentioned 1D reception period, the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is pressed before the 2D reception period occurs. Even if the player performs an action (for example, a pressing operation), the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means (peripheral). When the 2D reception period occurs in the control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.), it is stored in memory even when the 2D reception period occurs, and is used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period (stock reception performance is executed). However, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 2D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, then the above-mentioned "1D reception period will occur" In contrast to the case where "reception validity determination" is made within the relevant 1D reception period based on previously obtained detection information, the integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image) , gauge image)) is never displayed (made visible) before the execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 2D post-reception performance) is started. Note that the object (type of operation means) to which the operation opportunity is given in the 1D reception period and the object (type of operation means) to which the operation opportunity is given in the 2D reception period may be the same. , may be different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 2D reception period occurs, that is, a case in which detection information obtained before the 2D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period.

More specifically, when the second D reception period occurs at timing tX2 without stock reception performance, the performance display according to this example is as shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. 333(d). In the device 1600 (first presentation device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. Even if the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) can appear at the timing tX2 when the corresponding acceptance period (here, the 2D acceptance period) occurs, Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tX2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed only when the reception (reception valid determination) is made within the 2D reception period, or when the reception (reception valid judgment) It is hidden when the 2D acceptance period ends without any determination (determination) being made. The 2D acceptance period according to this example ends when timing tX3 arrives if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 325(a)).

In addition, during the 2D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and 232(c) )). 333 and 334 correspond to the case where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in "the mode shown in FIG. 232(c)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 232(a)", the integrated model image shown in FIGS. 333 and 334 Since the display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is simply changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 232(c)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)", the illustration is I will omit it here. In addition, even during the 2D reception period, the integrated map image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 325 shows that a movement by the player is detected within such a 2D reception period, and based on the detection information, the "reception validity determination that the movement (operation) by the player is a valid movement" is made at timing tX2a. This assumes that this is the case. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 325(a), based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted at timing tX2a (the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 2D acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period will be started.

Here, an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1) to FIG. 334(i1))" is a post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K2 (FIG. 334(e2) to FIG. 334(i2)") is This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period.As for the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) , "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, even during the 2D reception period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated model image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 2D post-reception performance according to this embodiment also includes a "2D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a 2D post-reception performance display using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), This will be realized as a combination of at least the "2D post-reception specific performance" using a 2D post-reception production sound (such as a 2D presentation device, performance lamp, etc.) and the 2D post-reception production sound using a 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three production devices), but among these production devices, integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) on which is displayed, the timing at which the "second reception effect display" as the 2D post-reception effect starts to be executed is delayed compared to other effect devices. As a result, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" can be maintained even after the application has been accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 334 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 232 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. 334(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tX2a when the second D reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tX2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, remaining time display)". overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tX2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

However, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, in the 2D reception period, the corresponding post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is a mode with low expectations (Fig. 334 (e1) to (i1) ) appears and when highly expected modes ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 334) appear, the same mode (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance-related display. There is. That is, in this case, while the extinction related display is appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception effect display" is executed. become.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 325(b), FIG. When the timing tX2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which mode) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2D reception period as a post-acceptance performance. The execution of "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K1 (Fig. 334(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 334( g1), the first mode (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K2 (Fig. 334(e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 334(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D reception period. It is supposed to be done.

In other words, in this case, the execution of the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 will start in one of multiple modes with different expectations (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2). However, no matter which of these modes starts execution, one mode (second extinction related display SKD2) is displayed (priority is given) so as to overlap with the second D reception effect display UGD2. Since the display functions to make it difficult to visually recognize this, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception effect display" is being executed.

In addition, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKD2)" are displayed, "2D post-reception performance display UGD2" ("2D post-reception performance display "UGD2-1" or "2nd D post-reception effect display UGD2-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 2D reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (2D post-reception performance display UGD2) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the 2D post-reception effect display UGD1 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 2D reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will automatically transition to the ``2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)''. (after timing tX2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)". As a result, even if the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. 334(h1) or (h2), the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 325(b), FIG. "Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition of good visibility, "2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2 (2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2-1 or 2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2-") will be hidden. 2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGD2-2). Therefore, the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "extinction related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the "2D post-reception production display UGD2" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tX2c) than the timing (timing tX2b) when the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tX2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" (timing tX2b).

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 315(b) and 315(c), Start execution of the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs the 2D post-reception performance display after displaying the extinction-related display, the 2D post-reception performance is As for itself, execution can be started from the same timing tX2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a movable effect body that can perform effect operations, or a It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K1 (Fig. 334(e1) to (i1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), Fig. 334(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2-1), which is a low expectation aspect of UTD2, is executed prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K2 (Fig. 334(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 334( e2), the manner in which "Lucky" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned 2D reception specific presentation UTD2 (after 2D reception) corresponding to the 2D reception period. As the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific performance UTD2, the 2D post-reception performance using the first performance device (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) is preceded by the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2). The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 333(d), in addition to the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the second D A presentation within the reception period (display of fortune slips) is executed to indicate that the reception period has occurred. Regarding the performance within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device), the "integrated image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown). 333(d)) and the highly anticipated mode (see FIG. 333(d)).

That is, in this case, when it is within the 2D acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 2D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG ” continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the production within the reception period (display of fortunes) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the 2D reception period occurs. , it also functions as a precursor effect suggesting that the second D reception period will occur. However, the reception period presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) and the precursor presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) may be executed as different presentations.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "2D post-reception specific production UTD2-1" and "2D post-reception specific production UTD2-2" appears as the 2D post-reception specific production UTD2. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the second D post-reception specific performance UTD2. For example, the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2 is provided with only "2D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2", and the level of expectation (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is determined depending on whether or not the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2 appears. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when the "2nd D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "2nd D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2" does not appear. Become.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX2 shown in FIG. 325(d) The output of the acceptance permission sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than the above. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 2D reception period is audibly output across the timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs, and while the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first long permissible sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, is not output. A short permissible sound is now output. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound.

During the 2D reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) is being audibly output, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptance permissible sound is prevented from ending midway (the audible output state ends midway), and as a result, the 2D reception period occurs instead of the 1D reception period (or the 2D reception period does not occur). It is intended to suggest that However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 2D acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on acceptance.

In this regard, the acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) corresponding to the 2D reception period is executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations, as shown in FIG. 325(d). It is desirable that there be two cases (not shown) and a case (case shown in FIG. 333(d)) in which it is executed (audible output) in a manner with a high degree of expectation.

Furthermore, when an acceptance is made during the 2D acceptance period (acceptance validity determination), based on this, the audible output of the 2D post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2D post-reception performance sound is the same as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2, as shown in FIG. It will continue to run for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. Regarding the 2D post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K1 (Fig. 334(e1) to (i1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K2 (Fig. 334(e2) to (i2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2D reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 2D post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K1 (Fig. 334(e1) to (i1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 333(d) to "K2 (Fig. 334(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 2D reception period (regardless of the level of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 326 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "k" (FIG. 334(e3) to (h3)) are This assumes a case where no action (operation) is performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 326, after the second D acceptance period occurs, the timing tX3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (acceptance validity determination). In the 2D reception period according to this example, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, if the player does not perform any action (operation) during the 2D reception period and the reception (reception validity determination) is not made. The same post-reception performance (here, 2D post-reception performance) that occurs when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period does not occur.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tX3 (the point in time when the second D reception period ends and the reception of the player's action (operation) is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted within the 2D acceptance period (or the time when the effect starts to be executed after acceptance), the figure As shown in 334 (e3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

According to such a configuration, even if the 2D reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 2D reception period after the end of the 2D reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the simulated image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 334 (f3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) starts. In other words, while the "integrated image display IG (reference image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed, and the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. At least a part of the area in which "Integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which "Integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 2D reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the second D acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 2D reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 2D acceptance period, a "third disappearance related display SKD3" is displayed as a disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKD3" not be displayed in connection with the first D acceptance period. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the 1D reception period has not occurred. Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKD3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 2D acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Regarding "3rd extinction related display SKD3", if the reception validity judgment had been made within the 2D reception period, regardless of whether or not a highly expected aspect would have appeared as "2D post-reception production". , it is desirable to always display it in one manner.

After this, as shown in FIG. 334 (g3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKD3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 334 (h5), the "disappearance related display (in the figure, third disappearance related display SKD3)" is It will be displayed.

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(c), but in the form shown in FIG. 232(a). As mentioned above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. However, if such a situation occurs, the production will proceed in the same manner except for the aspect of "integrated image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image)". Therefore, I will omit the explanation.

On the other hand, FIG. 327 shows that as a result of the player performing an operation (for example, pressing operation) on the operation means (for example, operation button 410) before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period, the operation (operation) is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the corresponding 2D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above-mentioned reception validity determination is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) indicating that an opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed,
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "determination of acceptance validity" within the 2D reception period. A second period (non-stock period) is now included.

In addition, the "2D portent effect display ZED" according to this example, as shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 332(b) and (c), (Non-Stock Period)” are displayed in the same manner. Therefore, even if the mode of "2D portent effect display ZED" is confirmed, it is difficult to know which of the "first period (stock period)" and "second period (non-stock period)" is occurring. It is now impossible to recognize. However, regarding the "2nd D portent effect display ZED", different aspects will appear when it is in the above-mentioned "1st period (stock period)" and when it is in the above-mentioned "2nd period (non-stock period)". You can.

Furthermore, in the "2D portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)" according to this example, the portent effect display is executed in comparison with the case of the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZEC (see FIG. 324)." The ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from when the application is received until the reception period occurs is increased. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 324, the ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period from timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 327, The ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period from timing tX1 to tX2" is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)", when a movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display until the occurrence of the acceptance period, this is displayed as " The expected value performed within the ``first period (stock period)'' can be made higher than in the case of the ``1D omen effect display ZED (see Fig. 324)''.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 327, an action is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, and this is detected by the above-mentioned action detection means. This is based on the assumption that it has been detected.

However, the "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action" is permitted only within the 2D reception period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at that point (the point at which the 2D acceptance period has not yet occurred) ``Reception validity determination'' is never made. That is, the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and held even at timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. Then, at timing tX2 (more precisely, determination timing tX2A that arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tX2 occurs), the "reception validity determination" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether the situation is such that it should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)") " A "valid reception judgment" will be made (stock reception performance). Furthermore, based on the determination that the reception is valid, the 2D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period is terminated. ) will start executing.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action within the "first period (stock period)" and this action is detected by the action detection means, at the time of the detection, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is It will not be terminated prematurely. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( No reaction is caused in the first production device), and the acceptance permission sound does not stop being output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs, the player performs a movement in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned movement detection. The performance is developed in the same manner whether the motion is detected by the motion detection means or not detected by the motion detection means.

In addition, during the 2D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (when the stock reception performance is executed), Also, as shown in FIGS. 327 and 335, basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the effect changes from FIG. 332(c) to "L1 (FIG. 335(e4) to (i4))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), and when the production progresses from Fig. 332(c) to “L2 (Fig. 335(e5) to (i5))” (post-reception production). 325 and 334 (e1) to () in the first presentation device, second presentation device, and third presentation device. The effect will be executed as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 334(e2) to (i2).

However, as mentioned above, in the 2D reception period, if "reception validity determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (when stock reception performance is executed) , the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is never displayed (visible) and the post-reception performance (here, after the 2D reception) (direction) is now started to be executed.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), unlike the case shown in FIG. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the point in time when the 2D post-reception performance is started, the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed (visible).

Moreover, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 335 (e4) and (e5), the operation by the player is not accepted. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the 2D prerequisite effect is started (the time when the 2D post-reception effect is started in response to the reception), the "2D omen effect display ZED" is not hidden. It is kept in the displayed state. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, which is before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period ( It becomes possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception has been determined to be valid.

In this regard, also in the example shown in FIG. 327(b) and FIG. 335(f4) or (f5), the timing tX2 (more precisely, , timing tX2A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (when timing tX2B arrives), a display related to extinction (extinction EF effect) is started. As the 2D post-reception performance, modes with low expectations (Fig. 335 (e4) to (i4)) appear and modes with high expectation (Fig. 335 (e5) to (i5)) appear, and disappear. The same aspect (second extinction related display SKD2) appears as the related display, which is similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 325 and 334.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as shown in FIG. The display SKD2) is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize the "2D precursor effect display ZED" instead of the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display).

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (an example where the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), while the "2D precursor performance display ZED" is displayed, the "extinction related display (extinction EF performance)" is displayed. is now displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "2D omen effect display ZED" is displayed. There is. According to such a configuration, even if the "2D omen effect display ZED" continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the "2D omen effect display ZED" is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), when timing tX2C arrives within the period in which the extinction related display appears, (g4) or (g5 ), the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 ( Conversation Preview Production)" starts to be executed. An example in which the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" progresses from FIG. 332 (c) to "L2 (Fig. 335 (e5) to (i5))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance) ) are executed in mutually different modes (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2), which is similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 325 and 334.

In the example shown in FIG. 327 (an example in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), "2D reception performance display UGD2 (2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1)" 327(b), FIG. 335 (h4) or (h5), after the display related to the "effect display UGD2-2)" is started, as shown in FIG. 327(b) or FIG. 335 (h4) or (h5), While "2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, "2D omen performance display ZED" and "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" are displayed. ”, “2D portent effect display ZED” is hidden. Then, after the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 327(b), FIG. Display SKD2)" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2)" will be hidden. -2)" will now be displayed.

Note that also in the examples shown in FIGS. 327 and 335 (examples in which the stock reception performance was executed during the 2D reception period), based on the fact that the action by the player was accepted (the reception was determined to be valid), The 2D post-reception performance using the second production device (2D post-reception specific production) and the 2D post-reception production using the third production device (2D post-reception production sound) are performed using the first production device. The execution is started prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display).

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 327 and 335 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 described above (the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period) Unlike the case in which the first short permissible sound was output (example), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted while the first short permissible sound was being audibly output (judgment that the reception was valid), the first short permissible sound was output midway. It does not terminate (terminate midway through the audible output state).

Further, as described above, the output of the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs or after that time. Even if such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in FIGS. 327 and 335 (examples where the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. 324 and 331 ( Unlike the case in which the request was accepted within the acceptance period, it is desirable that the first short allowable sound be always output.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 or FIG. In the case of the example (in the case of an example in which the reception is based on detection information obtained within the 2D reception period), the 2D The execution times of the post-reception effects (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) are made to be the same.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 327 and 335 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden is determined by the 2D post-reception effect. Although the display UGD2 is set later than the timing tX2C when execution is started, it may be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the 2D portent effect display ZED is executed is
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "determination of acceptance validity" within the 2D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) was made to occur sequentially, but instead, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. You can.

Further, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed.

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this production example, it was decided to use the "2D precursor performance display ZED" which can also appear when the reception is made in the 1D reception period, as the extinction-related display SKD. However, the disappearance related display may be executed in a manner that it cannot appear related in the 1D reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1D reception period and a 2D reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1D reception period and 2D reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception is displayed (1D performance display after reception, 2D performance display after reception) based on the acceptance. effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image), but also to confirm which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image). By reducing the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display) until it is hidden, It is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "sample image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception performance display." In addition, "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" refers to multiple reception periods (reception periods different from the 1D reception period and 2D reception period (up to Figure 321 The same aspect can be commonly used for the acceptance period (which may be the acceptance period described above with reference to the drawings).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an acceptance is made during either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be changed to ``sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance related display), while the post-acceptance performance display is ``display of sample image and remaining time display (frame image)''. , gauge image) is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "the manner in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" basically refers to figures such as those shown in Fig. 330(f) and Fig. 334(f). As shown in , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). This is how it appears. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 330(g) and FIG. 334(g), a sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as a mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the image display and the display of the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "modes in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' may appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is accepted during the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' will be changed to ``after reception. It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during this display period. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, as shown in FIGS. 330 and 334, "the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the ``post-reception performance display'' is displayed at least in part of the area, but ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) makes it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

Furthermore, the "disappearance related display" according to the example shown in FIG. It is displayed not only in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is, but also in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is made difficult to see due to the "extinction-related display". (for example, displayed on the rear layer). In other words, in this case, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is not the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the "2D precursor effect display ZED" and the "post-reception effect display" that are difficult to visually recognize. Since it appears as something that does something, it becomes possible to provide a performance that is different from the performance described above.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed after the reception is received and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance in the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (extinction EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Also, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the sample image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a sample image display, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2", but apart from the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2, the above-mentioned mode (second extinction Related display SKD2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1D and 2D post-reception performance displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKD1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGD1 will appear after receiving the first D.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the extinction-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (movable body, etc.) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKD2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is made so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be performed in multiple modes (integrated image Display IGa to IGd). According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. Even after the application is made, it is possible to recognize in what manner the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if the "predetermined image display" such as the "sample image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state (not displayed) For example, although it is displayed on a layer, by giving priority to displaying other images, you can display "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image)" as long as it is not visible to the player. , gauge image)," etc., is rendered invisible. However, if at least a part of the "predetermined image display" such as "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, then this Therefore, it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed. The "predetermined image display" may be an image (for example, an omen effect display, etc.) different from the "sample image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)".

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the specific production after reception may be realized by being performed in the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

Further, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the object of the action (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and may require different actions from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action object display (sample image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed as different displays.

In the example of the above-mentioned performance, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 331), when the reception is determined to be valid within the 1D reception period (the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started). At this point in time), the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the integrated simulated image display IG were respectively displayed. In this regard, in the example of production described above, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC was displayed behind the integrated model image display IG, but instead of this, the integrated model image display IG was It may be displayed behind the 1D portent effect display ZEC. However, in this case, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed so as to overlap only a part of the integrated model image display IG, and (at least a part of) the integrated model image display IG is displayed. It is required that the vehicle be kept in a visible state (visible state).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the disappearance-related display SKD that can appear when the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period, " 2D portent effect display ZED" is used, but instead of this, a mode that cannot appear when reception is determined to be valid within the 1D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and in the harbinger production, the ``2D harbinger'' shown in FIGS. The effect display ZED (specific effect display) can now be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 327, 332, and 335, even if the player performs an action while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed, , the motion is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.), and the stored detection information is If the reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made within the above-mentioned 2D reception period based on (if obtained) (stock reception performance). According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much momentum while the precursor performance (2D precursor performance display ZED) is being executed, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 2D post-reception performance. It has become possible to start a game, and it has become possible to maintain interest in the game through such flexible performance. Regarding the configuration and effects, the same can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, there is a case where the player performs the action before the 2D acceptance period occurs and while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being displayed. Even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, within the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means before the 2D reception period occurs and when the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. In the case where it is determined that the reception is valid based on the detection information and the movement by the player is a valid movement (if the detection information is obtained in the first period (stock period) of the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed) ), and if the reception is determined to be valid, as shown in FIG. 335, the 2D precursor performance display ZED is displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. I made it seem like it was. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the 2D precursor effect display ZED" before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period, the detection of the action is not performed. is performed properly, and the detection information may be stored and held until timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, a "reception validity determination that determines that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the 2D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much momentum before the 2D reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. In addition, at this time, the 2D reception period is not yet generated (the state where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed), and the 2D At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts, the 2D precursor performance display ZED is not hidden but is displayed, so that the 2D post-reception performance is the 2D precursor Based on the action (detected information) performed by the player while the effect display ZED is being displayed, it is possible to suitably recognize that the execution has started. Regarding the configuration and effects, the same can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, at a specific timing within the 2D reception period (timing tX2a in FIG. 327), based on the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained within the 2D reception period, If a valid reception determination is made that the player's action is a valid operation, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) is I made it so it wasn't displayed. According to such a configuration, if the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, and when the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period, The performance mode in the performance display device 1600 at the time when the performance after the 2D reception starts is different depending on whether the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period based on the detected information obtained. This makes it possible to suggest whether or not the acceptance validity determination has been made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the reception is valid within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained during the 2D reception period, a precursor effect will be displayed at the time when the corresponding 2D post-reception effect starts to be executed. (Here, the 2D omen effect display ZED) may be displayed and may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, although it is suggested whether or not the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the reception is in this situation. It becomes possible to make the recognition difficult, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. This other example is similarly applicable to the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, and the 2D reception If the precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect is started, the integrated simulated image display IG ( (sample image display and remaining time display) are now displayed. According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 334 (e1) and (e2), the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display) indicates that the execution of the performance after the 2D reception has started. Since the display state is maintained thereafter without being made difficult to view by other image displays, it becomes possible to suitably suggest in which mode the display was displayed within the 2D acceptance period. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the "precursor effect display (here, 2D precursor effect display ZED)" is displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception effect is started, as shown in FIG. 335(f). In order to do so, the "precursor effect display (here, the 2D omen effect display ZED)" is made difficult to visually recognize by the extinction-related display (here, the second extinction-related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, while indicating that the stock reception effect is being executed, the display of the "precursive effect display (here, 2D omen effect display ZED)" This makes it possible to prevent suspicions such as ``the reception validity determination has not yet been made.'' The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period, the extinction-related display (Fig. 335) and the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, making the "integrated image display IG (reference image display and remaining time display)" difficult to see. The disappearance related display (see FIG. 334) for the purpose of the present invention is made to be displayed in the same manner (second disappearance related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that the 2D acceptance period has ended.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period (see FIG. 335), the integrated model image display is displayed at the time when the corresponding 2D post-reception performance starts to be executed. (Small image display and remaining time display) are not displayed (visible), but the "precursor effect display (here, 2D omen effect display ZED)" is displayed, and the stock reception effect is displayed during the 1D reception period. is executed (see FIG. 331), the integrated image display (image image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding 1D post-reception effect starts to be executed. I did it as it was. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, and immediately after the reception period occurs. It is expected that the decline in interest in games due to games being terminated will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the foreshadowing performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (see FIG. 328) In the case, the 1D omen effect display ZEC (first effect display) is displayed, and in the omen effect corresponding to the 2D reception period (see Fig. 332), the 2D omen effect display ZED (second effect display) is displayed. I tried to make it wet.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an operation (operation) while either the 1D precursor effect display ZEC or the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the operation will not be performed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and based on the stored detection information, the reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion is made within the first D reception period or within the first D reception period. Since the above-mentioned 2D precursor effect display may be performed within the above-mentioned 2D acceptance period, the player may move too vigorously while the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC or 2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. Even in the case of a game, it has become possible to use this as an opportunity to start a performance after acceptance, and it has become possible to maintain interest in the game suitably through such flexible performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations were adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the precursor performance is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, both within the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where a reception validity determination is made that a movement by a player is a valid movement (stock reception effect). Then, during the 1D reception period, before the 1D reception period occurs, and when the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) is being executed, the detected information storage means stores the information. If a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information that determines that the player's action is a valid motion, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, the above-mentioned sample image display will be at least as effective as possible. Some of them are always displayed. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and the precursor performance (2D precursor performance display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If it is determined that the player's action is valid based on the detected information stored in I made it so that not even a part of it was displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the player's actions are determined to be valid actions based on the detection information obtained before the relevant reception period occurs. Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. In addition, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 1D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the above-mentioned sample image display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the above sample image will be displayed at the time when the above post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations were adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the precursor performance is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, both within the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where a reception validity determination is made that a movement by a player is a valid movement (stock reception performance). Then, during the 1D reception period, before the 1D reception period occurs, and when the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) is being executed, the detected information storage means stores the information. If a valid reception judgment is made based on the detection information that indicates that the player's action is a valid movement, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge images) so that at least a part of them is always displayed. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and the precursor performance (2D precursor performance display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information stored by the player, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) so that not even a part of them is displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the player's actions are determined to be valid actions based on the detection information obtained before the relevant reception period occurs. Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if you perform an action (operation) with too much momentum before the 1D reception period occurs, the remaining time will be displayed (frame image and gauge image ) is always displayed, at least a part of it is always displayed, but if you act (operate) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the above post-reception effect based on this will start to be executed. At the time when the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not even partially displayed, the post-reception performance is based on either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. It becomes possible to suitably suggest whether the player acted before which acceptance period occurred.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the same operation means is given an operation opportunity during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this regard, in the first reception period, an aspect that cannot appear in the second reception period (integrated pattern image display IGd shown in FIG. 232(d)) can be displayed as a pattern image display or remaining time display. According to such a configuration, even if the stock reception performance is not performed, it is possible to suggest which of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period is occurring.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception performance is performed), even a part of the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started. However, even in this case, as shown in FIGS. 327 and 335, the extinction related display (here Now, we decided to display the second extinction related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, even if no sample image display or remaining time display prompting the player to perform an action appears, the system will respond to the acceptance of the action by the player within the acceptance period. It is now possible to indicate that a "post-reception performance" is being performed.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, modes with low expectations (Figure 331 (e5) to (i5)) appear as effects after the 1D reception, and modes with high expectation (Figure 331 (e6) to (i6)) appear. The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in different manners (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) depending on the case where the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 335 (e4) to (i4)) appear as effects after the 2D reception, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 335 (e5) to (i5)) appear. )) appears, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1D reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 2D reception period, "extinction EF effect" is displayed. Since the importance of paying close attention to "related display (extinguishing EF effect)" is reduced, coupled with the fact that the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed, the focus is on what form will appear as the effect display UGD2C after 2D reception. You will be able to do so.

In addition, during the 2D reception period according to this production example, the post-reception production (1D post-reception production) corresponding to the 1D reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. The "second extinction related display SKD2" that is displayed when the process is executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 2D reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKD2." For example, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 2D reception period is displayed when the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The “first extinction related display SKD1” may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the 1D reception period may be used as the extinction related display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the 2D reception period, as the disappearance EF production (disappearance related display), when there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) appears, and when there is no reception It is desirable that a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third extinction related display SKD3) or no mode appear at all. According to such a configuration, if an operation is forgotten during the second D reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) when the reception is made will not appear, so that the game It will now be possible to appeal to those who have forgotten to perform an action, and from now on, it will be possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when a reception period occurs. .

In addition, in the 1D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display or the remaining time display (at least part of it) is displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception production starts based on the stock reception production being performed. The 1D post-reception performance is displayed when the reception is determined to be valid (stock reception performance) based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, and when the 1D post-reception performance is displayed. The process is executed for a different time depending on whether the acceptance is valid or not based on the detection information obtained within the acceptance period (see FIGS. 322 and 324). On the other hand, in the 2D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the 2D post-reception production starts based on the stock reception production being performed. The 2D post-reception performance is performed when the reception is determined to be valid (stock reception performance) based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period, and when the 2D post-reception performance is performed within the 2D reception period. It is configured to be executed for the same amount of time as in the case where the acceptance validity determination is made based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 325 and 327). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide completely different performances during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the detection by the motion detection means when a player performs a motion and the storage of the detected information by the detection information storage means are not limited to the reception period or the execution period of the precursor performance, but are performed at all times. You may also do so. However, in this case, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means will not be stored until the reception period occurs, or even if it is stored, it will not be used for determining the validity of reception within the reception period.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no movement by the player is detected during the 2D reception period, the above reception is determined to be valid and the corresponding 2D reception period is handled. Since the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is sometimes executed, it is expected that the game interest can be suitably maintained through such flexible performance.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, and is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. Even if the player performs an action while the second D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means. It was made to be remembered by. Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and when the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" information" (stock reception performance), and when the reception is determined to be valid, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts, The image display is no longer displayed. On the other hand, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period," the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 2D post-reception performance) ) is now started, a sample image may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, the "determination of validity of acceptance that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 2D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D acceptance period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player may not be able to do so after the 2D reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without having to redo the action. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the sample image display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is started, it is determined whether the 2D precursor performance is before the relevant 2D reception period occurs and Suggests whether or not the reception is determined to be valid (the stock reception performance is performed) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to do it.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, and is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. Even if the player performs an action while the second D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means. It was made to be remembered by. Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and when the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" information" (stock reception performance), and if the reception is determined to be valid, the remaining The time display is no longer displayed. On the other hand, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period," the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 2D post-reception performance) ) so that the remaining time may be displayed at the time the execution starts. When these configurations are adopted, the "determination of validity of acceptance that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 2D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D acceptance period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player may not be able to do so after the 2D reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without having to repeat the action again. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) starts, it is determined whether the 2D precursor performance is before the relevant 2D reception period occurs and Suggests whether or not the reception is determined to be valid (the stock reception performance is performed) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to do this.

In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is At the time when the execution is started, there may be a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, and a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is started based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period". or whether the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is starting to be executed based on the “detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period” is made difficult to recognize. This makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in at least one of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when the execution of the post-reception performance is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs" You may also prepare a special performance mode that cannot appear. In other words, the special performance mode may appear if the execution of the post-reception performance is not started based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs." It becomes. It is desirable to suggest a high rate of appearance of highly anticipated modes as post-reception effects depending on whether or not the special presentation mode appears.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, multiple reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, within the 1D reception period. Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means, it is possible to execute the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period, and if the 2D reception period occurs, within the 2D reception period. Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means, the 2D post-reception performance corresponding to the 2D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period. As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

By the way, as a player, I thought that I performed the action (operation) within the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the first D reception period, but in reality, it was during the "period from timing W to tW2". If the player performs an action (operation) within the "1D acceptance period", it is difficult for the player to realize that the action should be redone after the 1D acceptance period occurs; It can be said that there is a high possibility of forgetting to perform the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the timing at which the execution of the performance after the 1D reception is started without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period is shown in FIG. 324. At least the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 323 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. ), the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started (stock reception performance) when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected in , at timing tW3, ``the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period. ” According to such a configuration, the player may mistakenly believe that the action (operation) was performed within the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, and as a result, the player may not be able to perform the action. Even if you forget to do so, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance will start based on the arrival of timing tW3, so it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the 2D reception period, "the reception validity determination is determined based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the 2D reception period occurs. It is possible to make the execution of the 2D post-reception performance start by performing it within the reception period (stock reception performance), but it is possible to This prevents a situation in which the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without any detection of the above. In other words, in this case, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the above reception validity determination is made within the reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs. (Stock reception performance)", thereby making it possible to start executing the post-reception performance. Moreover, during the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) will provide relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3). Since it is executed in a consistent manner, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) will not be executed as a remedy. , it becomes possible to suitably impart a sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the portent effects corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D portent performance display ZEC, etc.) and the portent effects corresponding to the 2D reception period (2D portent performance display ZED, etc.) are different from each other. Although these foreshadowing effects are executed in the same effect mode (for example, in both cases, the 2D omen effect display ZED) may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not a reception period (1D reception period) with relief (timing tW3) occurs when the stock reception performance based on the operation when the precursor performance is performed fails. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

In addition, during the 1D reception period according to the example of the above-mentioned performance, if the 1D post-reception performance is to be generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception performance), the 1D reception period The same process as when generating the 1D post-reception effect based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (detection by the same motion detection means → storage by the same detection information storage means → same reception valid within the 1D reception period) By performing the judgment), the 1D post-reception effect is generated. On the other hand, when generating the 1D post-reception effect based on the arrival of timing tW3 after the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period is based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance is generated by performing processing different from the case of generating a post-effect (determination that there is no detection by the same motion detection means, no storage by the same detection information storage means, and timing tW3 has arrived). We are planning to do so. According to such a configuration, when automatically generating post-reception effects without requiring any action by the player within the acceptance period, it becomes possible to provide various effects to the player, and the game People are expected to try to improve their interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a case where the 1D post-reception effect is generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception effect), and a case where the 1D post-reception effect is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3. Since the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is made different depending on when the 1D post-reception performance is generated, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception production when the reception is determined to be valid at a specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1D reception period is obtained before the 1D reception period. This is because it is different from both the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the detected information (by the stock reception performance) and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3. , it becomes possible to further improve gaming interest.

On the other hand, in the 2D reception period where there is no relief (automatic reception) in case the stock reception performance fails, the 2D reception is performed based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (through the stock reception performance). Execution of the 2D post-reception performance when the post-reception performance is generated, and when the 2D post-reception performance is generated based on the reception validity determination being made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the 2D reception period. Since the times are made to be the same, even if the stock reception performance fails, you can enjoy the same performance by redoing the operation within the 2D reception period, and there is no remedy. It is expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in games caused by this.

In addition, during the execution period of the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) before the 1D reception period, even if there is a movement by the player, the detection information obtained regarding the movement is No notification is made to indicate whether or not the reception will be submitted for validation within the reception period. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may be arranged that no indication that a movement by the player has been detected is made. By having such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained even during the 1D reception period, where relief (timing tW3) is set when the stock reception performance fails. Become.

Furthermore, if there is a movement by the player during the execution period of the precursory performance (2D precursory performance display ZED) before the 2D reception period, the detection information obtained regarding the movement will be displayed within the relevant 2D reception period. It is also possible not to provide any notification indicating whether or not the application will be used for determining whether or not the reception is valid. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may be arranged that no indication that a movement by the player has been detected is made.

Further, in the harbinger effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, the 1D harbinger effect display ZEC and the harbinger effect sound related thereto are respectively executed. On the other hand, in the harbinger effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D harbinger effect display ZED is executed, but the harbinger effect sound related to the 2D harbinger effect display ZED is not executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a remedy when the stock reception performance fails, through whether or not the precursor performance sound is output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs actions within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed even if the motion detection means does not detect the motion detection means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timing at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period is at least the timing shown in FIG. 324. Since there is a timing tW2 (tW2A) and a timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed as a precursor production corresponding to the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception production is executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the 1D post-reception performance is started, the 1D precursor performance display ZEC is displayed, but when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed at timing tW3 shown in FIG. , the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started. That is, in this case, when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started without detection information being obtained within the 1D reception period, this is the difference between the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. It becomes possible to indicate when the execution is started.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, even if the 1D post-reception production is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed, The "first extinction related display SKD1" or "second extinction related display SKD2" is made to appear as the extinction related display (see FIG. 331). In this case, the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed as either the "first extinction-related display SKD1" or the "second extinction-related display SKD2", but the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is It is desirable to execute this in a manner that overlaps this so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, and the first post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. In either case, the above-mentioned simulated image display is displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 336, if the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. Similar to the case where the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started, the above-mentioned sample image display may not be displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period, the sample image display (here, the integrated sample image display IG) is never displayed, just like when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. The execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) is started without being displayed (in a visible state).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, and the first post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. In either case, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 336, if the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. As in the case where the 2D post-reception performance is started, the remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated image display IG) is never displayed, just as when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period. The execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) is started without being displayed (in a visible state).

According to the configuration according to these other examples, when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, (See FIG. 336), while the sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the performance after the 1D reception starts, the 1D reception is performed at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. When the execution of the post-effect is started, the sample image display and the remaining time display will be displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started (see "i1" and "i2" in Fig. 330). reference). In other words, in this case, if the performance after the 1D reception is started without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324) and the second timing. It is now possible to indicate which of the two timings (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323) the execution has started.

Furthermore, even if these other examples are adopted, when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (f5) and (f6) As such, it is desirable that the "first extinction-related display SKD1" or "second extinction-related display SKD2" appear as the extinction-related display. In other words, in this case, the "disappearance-related display" will appear while the sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed, and the "disappearance-related display" is similar to the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" and the "1D Post-reception performance display UGD1" etc. will be displayed in such a way that it will be difficult to visually recognize them.

It should be noted that the reception period according to these other examples (see FIG. 336) is provided as a modification of the 1D reception period shown in FIGS. 322 to 324 and 328 to 331. However, instead of this, it may be provided as a 3D reception period (occurred according to condition 3D) that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this case, when the post-reception performance (3D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3D reception period is executed, regardless of whether the post-reception performance is performed in any of the multiple modes with different expectations, "disappearance" One aspect (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) may appear as the "related display".

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the timing at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without the movement of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the 1D reception period is at least the timing shown in FIG. 324. tW2 (tW2A) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. Then, if the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF display), and when the disappearance-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed, the integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to appropriately recognize that the 1D acceptance period has ended.

Furthermore, in the example of the performance described above, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period. It is also possible to display a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, but when the extinction-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, the above-mentioned integrated image display IG (simulation image display, remaining time display) The different displays may be made difficult to visually recognize. That is, in this case, after the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started, the situation in which the 1D post-reception performance is started at either timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 It will be possible to suggest what is there.

For example, if a configuration according to another example regarding the 1D reception period is adopted, the 1D reception period is set at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the execution of the post-effect is started, the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. In other words, in this case, when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period, the 1D reception effect disappears. When the related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, displays (such as the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) that are different from the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the remaining time display) are made difficult to recognize. Alternatively, if the execution of the 1D after-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, and if the execution of the 1D after-reception effect is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. An image display that cannot be obtained may be displayed, and the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) may be made to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display.

Furthermore, regarding the extinction related display (extinction EF display), there are cases where it appears when the execution of the above-mentioned 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. The same image display is made when the 1D post-reception effect appears when execution is started. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether the process is being executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 just by looking at the extinction related display (extinction EF display). It is now expected that the disappearing EF display will encourage the player to focus on the "object that is difficult to see."

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the 2D reception period occurs, the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period, and the 2D reception period corresponding to the 2D reception period occurs. If the post-reception performance is executed (see FIG. 327), the 2D reception period ends and the 2D reception ends without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period. There are cases in which the post-effect is not executed (see FIG. 326). This makes it possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the example of production described above, it is possible to further generate a 1D reception period different from the 2D reception period, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the above actions by the player are performed within the 1D reception period. Even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means, the corresponding 1D post-reception performance is always executed. In other words, in this case, when the 2D reception period occurs, "when the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the reception period, the post-reception performance may or may not occur." While trying to suitably impart a sense of tension, when the first D reception period occurs, ``a post-reception effect will always occur even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detection means within the reception period.'' As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing performance settings (at least one of volume, brightness, performance mode, etc.) that causes a change in the performance mode based on operations by the player. have the means. In this regard, there are cases where the performance after the 2D reception is performed without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period, and cases where the player's movement within the 2D reception period is the above-mentioned movement. A case where the second reception period ends without being detected by the detection means and the 2D post-reception performance is not performed can occur under the same performance settings. In other words, the case where the 2D post-reception performance is executed without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period means that the 2D reception period is executed with the automatic button performance state set. It doesn't mean what happens. For example, even in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set (under the same effect setting), during the 2D reception period, the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means during the 2D reception period. When the 2D post-reception performance is executed, and when the second reception period ends without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period, the 2D post-reception performance is not executed. There may be cases.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and in the harbinger performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D harbinger performance display ZED is displayed. I tried to make it wet. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 327, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means. A stock period (first period) in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine the validity of the reception within the second D reception period, and a stock period (first period) in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine the validity of the reception within the second D reception period, and when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means. Since the non-stock period (second period) includes a non-stock period (second period) in which the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the second D reception period even if detected by the motion detection means, You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D acceptance period (2D omen effect display ZED) but also in the 1D acceptance period (1D omen effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 324).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as for the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), as shown in FIG. Both periods are included in the period in which the 2D portent effect display ZED is displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after receiving the 2D reception. In addition, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the 2D post-reception performance will not necessarily be executed (non-stock period). You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D acceptance period (2D omen effect display ZED) but also in the 1D acceptance period (1D omen effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 324).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the ratio of the stock period (first period) to the period in which the precursor production is displayed is different between when the 1D reception period occurs and when the 2D reception period occurs. Made them different from each other. In the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, at least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set as a different time from each other.

More specifically, in the example of the effect described above, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the 1D reception period occurs), during the execution period of the 1D precursor effect display ZEC (period from timing tW1 to tW2). In contrast, the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. The ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to (the period from timing tX1 to tX2) is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)", when a movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display until the occurrence of the acceptance period, this is displayed as " The expected value performed within the ``first period (stock period)'' can be made higher than in the case of the ``1D omen effect display ZED (see Fig. 324)''.

In addition, in the "2nd D portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)" according to this example, the portent effect display is executed in comparison with the case of the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZEC (see FIG. 324)". Although the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from the time the application starts until the reception period occurs is made larger, it is also possible to make the ratio smaller instead. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described performance example, at least in the performance display device 1600, when a movement by the player is detected within the stock period and when a movement by the player is detected within the non-stock period, In either case, no reaction was shown in response to the detection. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is such that it can be executed as a stock reception performance, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the 1D precursor performance is displayed in the precursor performance corresponding to the 1D reception period. ZEC is displayed, and the 2D omen effect display ZED can be displayed in the 2nd omen effect corresponding to the 2D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 324 and FIG. "A stock period (previous movement permissible period) in which when a movement is performed by a person, the movement is detected by the movement detection means and the information detected by the movement detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the reception period." , "A non-stock item in which, even if a movement is performed by a player and the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used to determine the validity of the reception within the reception period. period (pre-motion non-permissible period)", it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension in a suitable manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, both the stock period (pre-motion permissible period) and the non-stock period (pre-movement non-permissible period) are set to be earlier than the timing when the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period) occurs. It was set to be the previous period. In other words, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period (1D acceptance period or 2D acceptance period), the ``reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action'' is determined during the acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with excessive force before the reception period occurs, the player may not be able to perform the operation after the reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the performance after reception without having to redo the action. Moreover, if the user performs an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period) occurs, the post-reception performance is not necessarily executed. (non-stock period (pre-motion non-permissible period)), it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

By the way, in the example of the effect described above, there is a stock period (pre-operation permissible period) within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and a stock period (pre-operation allowable period) within the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed. During both periods, no message is displayed to prompt the player to take any action.

However, instead of this, a message is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action during at least the stock period (pre-operation permissible period) of the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and the 2D During the stock period (pre-operation permissible period) within the period in which the precursor performance display ZED is executed, a message display urging the player to perform an operation may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the first D reception period occurs, it is possible to prompt the player's actions to be obtained as detection information before the first D reception period occurs, Furthermore, it becomes possible to more actively provide a performance (stock reception performance) in which reception validity is determined within the first D reception period based on the detection information obtained in this way. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period occurs, the fact that such stock reception performances are allowed is kept secret, which makes it possible to add interest to the performance and increase the enjoyment of the game. will be able to improve their performance.

In this case, the message display that is displayed during the stock period (previous motion permissible period) during the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed will also be displayed during at least part of the non-stock period (previous motion non-permissible period). It may be in a display state. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action while the message display is in the display state, this will not necessarily be used to determine whether the reception is valid within the 1D reception period. will be able to maintain it. During the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed, no message display is displayed in either the stock period (pre-motion permissible period) or the non-stock period (pre-movement non-permissible period).

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, as shown in FIGS. 332 and 335, when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, no message display is displayed after the 2D precursor performance display ZED starts to be displayed. The execution of the performance after receiving the 2D reception was started without any delay. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned modification regarding message display, when the stock reception effect is performed during the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period occurs even if detection information is obtained during the stock period (pre-operation permissible period). It is desirable not to hide the message display within a period before the detection information is detected, but to maintain the display state as in the case when no detection information was obtained. Furthermore, when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period, it is desirable that the message display remain in the display state even when the 1D post-reception performance is started in response to this. According to such a configuration, both when the 1D reception period occurs and when the 2D reception period occurs, there is a situation where the stock reception performance has been performed (a situation where the stock reception performance has been successful). By making it difficult to recognize whether the situation is true or not, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs actions within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the movement is not detected by the motion detection means. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least two timings (Fig. 324 Since the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 323 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 are provided, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, the timing tW2 ( shown in FIG. At least the timing tW2A) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 are prepared, and at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the reception validity determination is made within the relevant 1D reception period based on the detection information), the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started (stock reception performance), and at timing tW3 shown in FIG. The execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period.

In other words, in this case, "the above reception validity determination can be made within the 1D reception period based on the movement (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the 1D reception period (stock reception performance)". As a result, it becomes possible to start executing the performance after receiving the first D. Moreover, during the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the 1D post-reception performance is performed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3). Because of this, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 324), and when the player In the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without any movement being detected (see FIG. 323), the execution time required for the 1D post-reception performance is different from each other. did. That is, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on any timing. You will be able to suggest something. Note that at this time, either execution time may be set longer.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information at timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 322), it means that the stock reception performance was performed within the 1D reception period. When the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on (see FIG. 324), and when the timing tW3 has arrived without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance is performed. Since the performance after the 1D reception is executed over a different time period than when the 1D reception period is executed (see FIG. 323), the player's actions performed within the 1D reception period are not properly accepted. You will be able to suggest that you are in a certain situation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a specific reception period that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, and even in the specific reception period, it is possible to generate a specific reception period that is earlier than the specific reception period (within the execution period of the precursor performance) ) is executed based on the detection information obtained in The post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without any movement by the player being detected within the reception period. There are two cases in which a post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) is executed based on the stock acceptance effect being performed within a specific acceptance period, and a case in which a predetermined timing is executed without a movement by the player being detected within the specific acceptance period. The execution time required for the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be made to be the same in the case where the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize at what timing the post-reception performance was executed just by looking at the execution time of the post-reception performance, and a sense of tension is suitably maintained. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D post-reception performance is performed when the player's movement is not detected by the movement detection means (stock reception performance) within the 2D reception period, and when the 2D post-reception performance is Since the execution time is the same regardless of whether the motion by the player is executed based on the motion detected by the motion detecting means within the acceptance period, it is possible to suitably maintain interest in the game. become able to

On the other hand, the 1D post-reception performance is the case where the player's movement is executed without being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period (stock reception performance), and the case where the player's movement is executed within the 1D reception period without being detected by the movement detection means Since the execution time is different depending on when the action is executed based on the action detected by the action detection means, it is possible to provide different effects depending on the type of reception period. become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in a precursor production that suggests that the player is given an opportunity to act, a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor production is output (see FIG. 322); There are cases in which the precursor performance sound corresponding to the relevant precursor performance is not output (see FIG. 325). As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when giving the player an opportunity to perform a movement.

Furthermore, when a specific precursor performance sound (performance sound corresponding to the 1D precursor performance display ZEC) is output before the acceptance period in which an action opportunity is given to the player occurs, As shown in FIG. 324, the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. ) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 are made to exist at least. On the other hand, if no precursor effect sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, as shown in FIGS. There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the movement of the user is started without being detected by the movement detecting means, and there is no timing corresponding to the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 324. At least there is a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (tW2A). According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect sound is being output, even if the stock reception effect fails as a result of an action performed by the player (the movement is detected within a non-stock period), even if the stock reception effect fails (the movement is detected within a non-stock period) Since the performance is always performed, it becomes possible for the child to try out the stock reception performance with a sense of security. In addition, in a situation where no precursor effect sound is output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player will need to perform the operation again within the acceptance period in order to generate the post-reception effect. From there, you will be able to challenge yourself to create a stock reception performance in a tense environment.

Furthermore, if no precursor effect sound is output before the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, as shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception effect corresponding to the movement is started without being detected by the movement detecting means, and the timing tW2 (tW2A shown in FIG. 324) ) when there is at least a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (2D reception period), the corresponding post-reception performance starts to be executed without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the reception period. When there is at least a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 and a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 as the timing to be received (another reception period) It may be made so that there is. According to such a configuration, in a situation where no precursor sound is being output, it is possible to challenge the stock reception performance while maintaining a sense of tension and suitably providing a sense of security. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the example of the performance described above, the situation is such that the precursor performance sound corresponding to the 1D precursor performance display ZEC is being output, and the player performs an action within the stock period (first period) and this is detected. Even if this happens, the 1D precursor performance display ZEC and the corresponding precursor performance sound are not interrupted before the 1D reception period occurs. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the detection of the player's action was performed during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period).

Note that, as described above, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC may be performed in a manner that straddles the timing at which the 1D reception period occurs. At this time, the precursor effect sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is also output in a manner that spans the timing at which the 1D acceptance period occurs. In this case, when the 1D reception period has occurred and the player performs an action while the harbinger effect sound corresponding to the 1D harbinger effect display ZEC is being output, and this is detected. This may be used as an opportunity to interrupt the 1D omen effect display ZEC and the omen effect sound corresponding thereto within the 1D reception period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the stock reception performance is performed or the reception is performed within the 1D reception period. On the other hand, when the stock reception effect is performed, the precursor effect sound is interrupted at timing tX2 (tX2A).

By the way, as mentioned above, the "stock reception performance" in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. If the player performs an action within the "execution period" and this is obtained as detection information, the detected information is stored, and the stored detection information is used as "reception valid" during the reception period that occurs thereafter. It means to be used as if it were to be used for "judgment." Therefore, "the fact that the player performs an action within the execution period of the precursor effect and this is obtained as detection information" is not the same as "the fact that the operation to set the above-mentioned automatic button effect state was performed". This is completely different.

For example, in the "stock reception performance", by checking the detection information obtained during the "precursor performance execution period" as is during the reception period, it is determined that the reception is valid even if no movement by the player is detected within the reception period. It was designed so that On the other hand, when an operation is performed to set the automatic button presentation state as described above, detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information must be retained until the acceptance period occurs. There isn't. That is, at the time when detection information corresponding to the operation for setting the automatic button effect state described above is obtained, the state of the effect state flag is changed to "automatic button effect state" based on the obtained detection information. ” to a specific state corresponding to the setting operation. After that, each time a reception period occurs, the state of the performance status flag is checked when a predetermined timing within the reception period arrives, so that the player does not perform any action (operation) during the reception period. It is possible to perform the performance after receiving the application.

Therefore, in order to realize the "stock reception performance" in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335 and its other example (modified example), it is necessary to use a gaming machine that does not have a setting function related to the automatic button production state. Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to be in an automatic button presentation state. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335 or another example (modification example) thereof, when the automatic button production state is set by the player's operation, the 1D reception Assuming that a period has occurred, in the 1D reception period, apart from the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. Based on this, execution of the 1D post-reception performance will begin. That is, in this case, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the fact that the predetermined timing has arrived while no movement by the player is detected (reception validity determination is not made). On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function, so the timing tW3 is reached without any movement by the player being detected (no reception validity determination is made). After the 1D reception, the performance will start to be executed. Note that if the 2D reception period occurs when the automatic button production state is set by the player's operation, in the 2D reception period, the specified button after the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. Based on the arrival of the timing, the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started.

In addition, in the performance example described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335, and its other examples (variations), the actions (operations) required of the player in order to succeed in the above-mentioned "stock reception performance" are: , it goes without saying that the actions (operations) required of the player during the corresponding acceptance period are the same.

Furthermore, in the example of production described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335, and another example (modified example) thereof, it is assumed that the action by the player is performed more than a predetermined time before the timing at which the reception period occurs. (In the embodiment, only detection information within the execution period of the corresponding precursor effect is provided for the “reception validity determination”.) ). In other words, it is necessary to make such a "stock reception performance" possible only when the player is in a situation where the player is aware of the reception period during which the action (operation) is to be performed. It can be said that this is important in order to have the player perform an action (operation) with an awareness of causing this.

Furthermore, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335 and another example (modified example) thereof, even if the detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is not obtained. No notification regarding this is made within the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, when the automatic button presentation state is set, it is obvious that it is necessary to notify the person who made the setting whether or not the setting has been completed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 322 to 335, and another example (modified example) thereof, if detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is It will always be used for the "reception validity determination" within the process, and the post-reception performance will always occur based on this. On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is set, it is obvious that this can be canceled before the predetermined timing arrives.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example (1D reception period, 2D reception period, etc.), within the period in which the precursor production is executed, the stock period (first period) occurs first, and the non-stock period (second period) period) will occur after this, and the reception period will occur in a way that connects to this. However, instead of this, within the period in which the precursor effect is executed, a non-stock period (second period) occurs first, and a stock period (first period) occurs after this, leading to this. A reception period may also occur. In this case, it is assumed that the player's actions are detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, but even in such a case, It is desirable that the reception validity determination be made within the reception period based on the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) without using the detection information. Alternatively, if a movement by a player is detected across the stock period (first period) and reception period, the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained within the reception period The reception validity determination may be made within the reception period based on both of the above. Even in such a case, the effects may be advanced in the manner shown in FIGS. 331 and 335.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, unless there is a specific description that the automatic button production state is set, the automatic button production state may not be set. It is described as a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a function related to an automatic button presentation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, during the period in which the 2D precursor production display ZED is displayed, the player performs an action as shown in FIGS. 325 to 327. a stock period (first period) in which the motion is detected by the motion detecting means when the player receives the motion, and the information detected by the motion detecting means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the second D reception period; and the motion by the player. is performed, and even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the second D reception period (non-stock period). 2 periods). Then, after the motion detection means detects the motion within the non-stock period (second period) of the period during which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the motion detection means detects the motion without any new detection. When the 2D reception period ends, the above-mentioned 2D post-reception effect is not executed (see FIG. 326).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, even during the period in which the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 322 to 324, the player's actions are a stock period (first period) in which the movement is detected by the movement detection means and the information detected by the movement detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the 1D reception period; a non-stock period in which, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when a motion is performed, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first D reception period; (second period). Despite this, there is no new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects it within the non-stock period (second period) during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. Even if the 1D reception period ends as it is, the 1D post-reception effect is executed (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323). In other words, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected within the non-stock period (second period) rather than the stock period (first period) within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is performed. Since it becomes possible to generate the performance after receiving the first D without newly detecting a movement by the player, it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), it is still within the 1D reception period. In the progress of the performance in which the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information, the mode related to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1- 1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2), different modes (first disappearance related display SKD1 or second disappearance related display SKD2) are made to appear. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, when detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), As long as the performance progresses on the side where the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the above-mentioned 2D reception period, the aspect related to the 2D post-reception performance (the The same mode (second disappearance related display SKD2) is made to appear regardless of the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance is such that even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. Since this can be executed without any new acquisition, there is a concern that players will not be able to maintain their sense of tension. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 1D post-reception effect is executed, the disappearance-related display itself has a effect to suggest the level of expectation, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, the 2D post-reception performance is limited to cases where detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since this can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the second D acceptance period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained due to its own performance. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 2D post-reception effect is executed, the extinction-related display itself does not have any effect to suggest the level of expectation, so the reception based on the stock reception effect is effective. Once the judgment is successful, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to concentrate on the performance after receiving the first D. In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance is executed, the "second extinction-related display SKD2" corresponding to the highly anticipated aspect of the 1D post-reception performance is always displayed as the extinction-related display, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 331, even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. In the development of the performance where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining The image display and remaining time display are now displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 335, only when detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), the above-mentioned In the development of the performance where the 2D post-reception performance can be performed without newly obtaining detection information within the 2D reception period, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the stock reception performance, the 2D post-reception performance will be executed. The sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed (invisible) at the time the execution starts.

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance is such that even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. Since this can be executed without any new acquisition, there is a concern that players will not be able to maintain their sense of tension. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started, the "reception validity determination" has not yet been made because the sample image display and remaining time display are still being displayed. It is expected that students will be made aware of the possibilities and maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, the 2D post-reception performance is limited to cases where detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since this can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the second D acceptance period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained due to its own performance. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (invisible) at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started, the "reception validity determination" is It is expected that it will be easier to recognize that the situation has been properly performed, and that it will encourage concentration on the performance after the first D reception.

Note that the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period according to each production example and modification example (another example) described above may be realized by modifying the configuration below, or the configuration according to the following modification example ( A 1D reception period and a 2D reception period) may be further provided as reception periods separate from the above-mentioned 1D reception period and 2D reception period.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes at least a 1D acceptance period and a 2D acceptance period as acceptance periods in which actions (operations) by players are allowed.

In this regard, when the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, the 1D post-reception performance is expected (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1), and 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2 when the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). ) The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in a different manner depending on when it is executed. However, instead of this, there is a case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols), and a case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). It disappears in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether it is executed in a manner with a high (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D effect display after reception UGD1-2) or An EF effect (disappearance related display) may be executed.

In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance corresponding to the 2D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. A case where the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a low mode (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1), and a case where the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in one predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the extinction EF effect is executed or not. However, instead of this, there is a case where the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols), and a case where the 2D post-reception performance is performed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). The extinction EF performance (extinction related display) may be executed in a different manner depending on when it is executed in a manner with a high (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

Next, a case will be described in which the above modification is applied to the above example of effect. In other words, FIG. 337 shows that "when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information being obtained within the 1D reception period, or when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period" shown in FIG. 330, FIG. 338 is a modified example of the effect that appears when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without being executed, and FIG. This is a modified example of the effect that appears when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained. In addition, FIG. 339 shows "When the 2D post-reception performance is executed based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, or when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period" shown in FIG. 334. FIG. 340 is a modified example of the effect that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without being executed, and FIG. This is a modified example of the effect that appears when the effect is executed. In this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "Examples of effects related to the 1D reception period (Figs. 322 to 324, Figs. 328 to 331)" and ``Examples of effects related to the 2D reception period (Figs. 325 to 331)''. 327, FIGS. 332 to 335)", and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples applicable to the "example of presentation related to the 1st D reception period" and the "example of presentation related to the 2D reception period". is similarly applicable.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, first, the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. (see Fig. 337 (e1) to (i1)), and the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 337 (e2) to (i2)). The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in the same manner as when the event occurs. In addition, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on the arrival of timing tW3 (see FIG. 337 (e3) to (i3)), Even if the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a high expectation level (proportion of jackpot symbols appearing) (see Fig. 337 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF performance (extinction related display) is performed in the same manner. It is now possible to do so. In addition, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (Fig. 338 (e5) to (i5) )), and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figure 338 (e6) to (i6)), the extinction EF performance is performed in the same manner. (Disappearance related display) is now executed. Here, the second extinction related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 339 and 340, the performance after the 2D reception is performed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. (see Fig. 339 (e1) to (i1)), and when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (Fig. 339 (e2) to (i2)). )), the extinction EF effects are executed in different ways. In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (Fig. 340 (e4) to (i4) )) and when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 340 (e5) to (i5)), the extinction EF performance is performed in a different manner. is now executed. Here, when executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 339 (e1) to (i1) and Fig. 340 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF effect is 1 disappearance related display SKD1 is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 339 (e2) to (i2) and Figures 340 (e5) to (i5)) A second extinction related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

Note that in the modification shown in FIG. 339, if timing tX3 arrives without a reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period, a third extinction related display SKD3 is displayed as the extinction EF effect. However, instead of this, as an extinction EF effect, the mode that would have appeared if the reception validity determination had been made within the 2D reception period (first extinction related display SKD1 or second extinction related display SKD2) appears. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the reception is valid within the 2D reception period, it is possible to check the mode of the disappearing EF effect displayed based on the arrival of timing tX3. , it becomes possible to recognize in which mode (low expectation mode or high expectation mode) the 2D post-reception performance would have been executed if the reception validity determination had been made within the 2D reception period.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 326 and 334 and the modified example shown in FIG. 339, if timing tX3 arrives without reception validation being determined within the 2D reception period, the 2D post-reception performance is executed. I tried to prevent it from happening. However, instead of this, even if the production example shown in FIGS. 326 and 334 or the modification example shown in FIG. 339 is used, the production example shown in FIGS. Similarly, the 2D post-reception performance may be executed based on the arrival of timing tX3 without reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period. That is, in this case, the only difference is the remaining time shown by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is "0"), and the other differences are as shown in FIGS. 334(e1) to (i1) or 334(e2) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in i2), or in the manner shown in FIGS. 339(e1) to (i1) or FIGS. 339(e2) to (i2).

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various modifications may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Improvements and design changes are possible.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be carried out. In particular, when the pachinko machine 1 is not set to automatic performance mode, but is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic performance function can always be enabled and is not equipped with a process such as "setting to performance state", It is desirable that a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" not be displayed. In a pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with a process such as "setting to a performance state", the period of validity of the automatic performance function and the automatic performance function depend on the type of operation acceptance performance that is allowed to be operated by the player. It may be arranged such that there is a valid period in which the data is not played.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "sample image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, such as an arrow image pointing downward and moving up and down, which is not necessarily the target of the operation. It does not have to be displayed as an image that simulates the operation means.

In addition, when adopting the automatic performance function in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatic generation (automatic reception) of operation reception within the operation validity period can be set at any timing within the operation validity period. It may be. In order to appropriately provide the player with operation opportunities, it is necessary to perform an operation when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that occurs after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation validity period reaches one frame, and the post-operation performance is performed based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to start the process. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, if the bar display is to be maintained without being hidden even after the validity period has ended, the operation that will be performed according to the timing when the validity period ends It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off an LED, etc.). This is expected to prevent players from misperceiving that the validity period has continued, even if the bar display is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Become so.

In addition, in the production examples described above and below, such as the production example explained with reference to FIG. The time from the timing when the operation is detected until the timing when the sample image (or bar display) is hidden (period from timing tf2 to tf4, period from timing tg3 to tg5, period from timing th3 to th4, etc.) '', it is sufficient that there is a time period of at least several frames (for example, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame's worth of time. Even with this amount of time, the period during which the sample image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the post-operation effect starts, and some players may notice this. In some cases.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, when "period" or "time" is written, these may be the minimum control unit "period" or "time", for example, a period of one frame or a period of time. The meaning also includes time.

In addition, in the example explanation of "Help images to promote understanding of the production," we used a ruler as an example of a "reference image showing the unit of length in the horizontal direction," but we recommend using images other than this. You can. In short, it is sufficient that when the player operates, a display image that is depicted without being affected by special effects appears.For example, it is not an image that is intended to promote understanding of the effect, but may have other functions. Display images for the purpose of performance (e.g., images that suggest expectations, images that suggest the current state of performance, images that suggest conditions related to performance settings, etc.) are depicted as extending in the horizontal direction. It may also be displayed as an image. Note that such an image does not necessarily have to be depicted as a single image, but may be depicted as a whole extending in the horizontal direction by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

In addition, in the explanation example of "preventing pranks on multiple operating methods," pranks are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnetism. It may also lead to profits. Therefore, images that appear based on the detection of a player's operation (including images that appear in the process up to the appearance of a specific video) should be realized as having nothing to do with prank prevention. Good too. The point is that when a player performs operations on a plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), the effect display device 1600 executes a game effect according to the jackpot determination. Display (play) a specific video that cannot appear in the current state (it may be a video with content that has nothing to do with prank prevention (for example, transition to a state where a predetermined movie is played)). ), "Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value for the production sound output volume will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed." Even if a button is operated, changes to the brightness setting value for the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed.''This control causes a function restriction period to occur for a predetermined period of time. Good to have. In this case, the player can also voluntarily create a functional restriction period during which the above-mentioned specific video is played by operating multiple operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). It is.

Furthermore, in the example of "preventing mischief on a plurality of operation means", the partial restriction period may be always controlled in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, regarding the explanation example of "noise prevention using adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store", the point is that the control is set to the normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. This is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through a restricted state in which no volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output, and if a game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state ends early. The limit state may be controlled as long as it is controlled to a normal state, and the length of time the limit state is maintained may be set appropriately (anywhere from a few seconds to several hours). good. If the length of time that the restricted state is maintained is set too short, the above-mentioned effects will not be achieved during the gaming period immediately after the store opens, but the problem will be the noise caused when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power. It is possible to suppress this.

In addition, in the explanation example of "control regarding volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance", when the first special symbol is fluctuating and when the second special symbol is fluctuating, there is an advantageous condition. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output while the second special symbol on the side that is playable is changing, but during the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the side that is playable under disadvantageous conditions. We have decided to exemplify a case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output. However, it is also possible to apply this technology to gaming machines that are not equipped with the second special symbol.For example, it is possible to prepare a specific symbol that is drawn under conditions that are more disadvantageous than the first special symbol. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output while the first special symbol (special symbol) is changing on the side that is allowed to play under advantageous conditions, but on the side that is allowed to play under disadvantageous conditions. It may be configured such that a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output while the specific symbol is changing.

In addition, in the explanation example of "period during which operation reception is permitted (valid period) and its own performance", there is also a reception permission sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception performance, and a reception permissible sound accompanying the occurrence of the first and second operation reception performance. The production sound may be different from the reception permissible sound. In addition, in FIG. 210, the acceptance permissible sound is output from timing tr1 (tr11), but as "one sound data" spanning timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to a channel from timing trA. It may also be output.

It is also possible to separately prepare a simulated image of the operation receiving part that receives an operation and a peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery as image data, and display them as an integrated simulated image that combines each image data. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 232, when giving an operation opportunity to one operation means, there is a case where the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 232(a) and (c)), and a case where the 232(b), (d)). However, when the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 232(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving part), and the "special button image BMGa" is displayed. When the "sample image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 232(b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiver) different from the first operation means (first operation receiver) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be provided.

In each of the above explanation examples, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include those that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), and those that require an insertion/extraction operation (insertion/removal action) (such as a sword). In addition to decorations, etc.), it may also be realized as something that requires player actions such as non-contact or touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

Although it is assumed that the peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration part that is actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part that is the object to which the operation opportunity is given," it is assumed that at least a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG imitates the peripheral decoration part. There may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration part.

Regarding the second valid period in which operation-related images (such as the integrated image IG) are displayed in a "display mode with characteristics of the movement of the gauge image GG" and the valid period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined setting time is not a finite one, but may be continued indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception performance" described in FIG. 232 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the "automatic reception performance" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Any of the above-mentioned implementation methods may also be adopted as to how the sample image and the gauge image are respectively displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, the type of performance state at the time of occurrence, the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the reception performance Depending on the conditions under which the ``automatic performance function'' is activated, the same post-operation performance will be executed even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period (the ``automatic performance function'' is activated). If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation performance may not be executed (the "automatic performance function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic production function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the validity period, at the end of the validity period, or at a timing a little while after the validity period ends. It may be.

The reception periods illustrated in each of the above production examples (for example, reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 282 to 287, reception periods F and G, etc.) are not necessarily productions that correspond to the results of jackpot judgment (performance judgment). It does not have to occur within a pattern. For example, a predetermined condition may be set not during a period when symbol fluctuations are being performed, but during a period when symbol fluctuations are not being performed (for example, during a period when a jackpot game is being performed, various interval periods, etc.). (based on what has been established). In this case, "x seconds after the start of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. The timing "x seconds later" has arrived, and the reception period D may be generated at this timing. According to such a configuration, since the acceptance period D occurs after the symbol fluctuation is stopped when the hold is "0", it is possible to hold back a player who wants to cancel the game. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stops" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation starts."

In addition, the acceptance periods illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples (for example, acceptance periods D, E, acceptance periods F, G, etc. shown in FIGS. It does not necessarily have to be set as "the time value has elapsed," and the reception period can be set when a predetermined end condition is met (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted into the grand prize opening). It may also be something that ends it.

At the timing shown in FIG. 316(b), the operation target display (sample image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are hidden and cannot be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 300(a). It may be set to be in the state.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance EF production (disappearance effect image, etc.) is the post-reception production (conversation preview that indicates the level of expectation depending on which conversation will appear, whether the movable object will move or not). It is commonly used for multiple reception periods with different types (such as movable effects that indicate the level of expectation depending on whether or not the cut-in display appears, cut-in notices that indicate the level of expectation depending on whether the cut-in display appears, etc.). This makes it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed (the reception period has ended). In other words, the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, so when you look at the content of the performance, you can check whether it is being performed within the reception period or whether the reception period has ended. It is difficult to recognize whether this is being done in conjunction with the In this regard, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) manner after the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) can be properly performed and the post-reception performance can be performed. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the program is currently being executed. However, as long as the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) executes a common extinction EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) in multiple types of post-reception effects, for example, a specific type of post-reception effect may occur. A dedicated extinction EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

In addition, the items described as "desirable" in the above-mentioned production examples, modifications, notes, etc. only describe further effects when the same configuration is provided. Needless to say, it is not necessary to prepare.

That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, similar effects can be achieved.

Claims (1)

A determination means for making a determination;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means;
a specific operation receiver for receiving operations by a player;
an operation acceptance means capable of generating an acceptance acceptance state in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation reception unit, and causing a change after acceptance when an operation is accepted in the acceptance acceptance state;
a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image display of the specific operation receiving part in a predetermined display area;
an overlapping effect display means capable of displaying an overlapping effect display that is a different image from the said sample image display and that appears to overlap from the front side with respect to said sample image display;
Equipped with
When the acceptance acceptance state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation reception is allowed is outputted audibly,
As the acceptance state,
When the operation is accepted, a first post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the first post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is displayed, a first acceptance permission state;
When the operation is accepted, a second post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the second post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is not displayed.
When the operation is accepted, a third post-acceptance change is caused based on the operation acceptance, and in the third post-acceptance change, the duplicate effect display is not displayed.
is available,
No matter which one of the first reception permissible state, the second reception permissible state, and the third reception permissible state occurs, the sample image display is displayed when the reception permissible state occurs; When either the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state occurs, the sample image display indicates that operation reception for the specific operation receiving section is permitted after the reception permission state occurs. While the state continues, the display state is continued without being hidden, but when the third reception permissible state occurs, the sample image display does not change until the third reception permissible state occurs. After that, while the state in which operation reception on the specific operation receiving section is allowed continues, the display of the simulated image can be made into a non-display state,
When either the first reception permission state or the second reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound is audibly output, but when the third reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound is output. There is no audible output,
moreover,
When the reception permission state occurs, a specific pre-effect display different from the sample image display may be displayed as a display related to the occurrence of the reception permission state, and the specific pre-effect display is It is now possible to display information that spans the timing of occurrence of the acceptance permission state.
When the overlapping effect display is displayed while the specific pre-effect display is being displayed, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front side of the specific pre-effect display,
moreover,
The third acceptance permission state may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible,
moreover,
In the third acceptance permission state, after the sample image display is hidden, the sample image display is displayed again while the state in which operation reception for the specific operation receiving unit is permitted continues. A gaming machine characterized by being able to play games .

Images